游客
​要
​1
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
LIBRARIEVERITAS
1817
WILL
ARTES
SCIENTIA
OF THE
2011.
KRISPEMISSOU
CIRCUMSPICE
1111HSI 11.6
CUMMINA
inl||||||||||||
PLON
Ulll||||1..7
IITHIIIIIIII
Hyun WEMMURNAMokslum AAHUBHWILMINIMUI
THIS BOOK
FORMS PART OF THE
ORIGINAL LIBRARY
OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
BOUGHT IN EUROPE
1838 TO 1839
BY
ASA GRAY
/2 کے
او د
وه
E
IT
HA
4.
42
A.
...
#
1
AL
D
Yield
1
M.
.
MI
A
sotto
WW
Sy
}
y
DIUM
النتا
-
L. ". - .
/
ام
1 lite
.)
1
/
And .
1 il /
1
1.1
Εγώ
1111?
TA
---
Tòa
kro
w
SA
7
a
A
i
w
11
ht
w
ATTO
Τελέλεση
1
Will
Well
Pelo cu suvome
11
ili
*
T'
---
SA
-
4.
1
The
Sacred Theory
1
BER
of the
EARTH.
!
474
1
che
ti?
Didace
Women
4-96
1
195
THE
THE O RY
OF THE
E ART H:
Containing an Account
OF THE
Original of the Earth
AND OF ALL THE
GENERAL CHANGES
Which it hath already undergone,
OR
IS TO UNDERGO
Till the ConsUM MATION of all Things.
THE TWO FIRST BOOKS
Concerning The DELUGE,
Concerning PARADISE.
AND
The Third Edition review'd by the Author.
LONDON,
Printed by R. N. for Walter Kettilby, at the Biſhop's-
Head in S. Paul's Church-Yard, 1697.
)
7
}
-T
TO THE
!
KINGS
MOST
Excellent Majeſty.
1
SIR,
ہنسنے سے
a)
27-
IA
EW-found Lands and Countreys aco
crew to the Prince, whoſe Subject
makes the firſt Diſcovery; And han
ving retriev'd a World that had been
loft, for fome thouſands of Years, ont
of the Memory of Man, and the Records of I ime,
I thought it my Duty to lay it at Your Majeſty's
Feet. 'I will not enlarge Your Dominions, 'tis paſt
ànd
gone ; nor dare I ſay it will enlarge Your
Thoughts; But I hope it may gratifie Your Princely
curioſity to read the Deſcription of it, and ſee the
Fate that attended it.
IVe have ſtill the broken Materials of that firſt
World, and walk upon its Ruines; while it ſtood,
there was the Seat of Paradiſe, and the Scenes of the
Golden Age; when it fell
, it made the Deluge ;
And this unſhapen Earth we now inhabit, is the
Form ic was found in when the Waters had retir’d,
and
2
The Epiſtle Dedicatory:
2
and the dry Land appear’d. Theſe things, Sir, 1
propoſe and preſume to prove in the following
I reatiſe, which I willingly ſubmit to Your Maje-
ſty's Judgment and Cenſure; being very well ſatis-
fied, that if I had ſought a Patron in all the Liſt of
Kings, Your Contemporaries: Or in the Róll of
Your Nobles of either Order: I could not bave
found a more competent Judge in a Speculatitn of
this Nature. - Your Majeſty's Sagacity, and
happy Genius for Natural Hiſtory, for Obſerva-
tioris and Remarks upon the Earth, the Heavens,
and the Sea, is a better preparation for Inquiries of
this kind, than all the dead Learning of the
Schools.
Sir, This Theory in the full extent of it; is to
reach to the laſt period of the Earth, and the End
of all things; But this firſt Volume takes in only ſo
inrich as is already paſt, from the Origin of the Earth,
to this preſent time and ſtate of Nature
. To de.
fcribe in like manner the Changes and Revolutions of
Nature that are to come, and ſee thorough all ſuc-
ceeding Ages, will require a fteddy and attentive Eye,
and a retreat from the noiſe of the World; Eſpecially
ſo to conne& the parts, and preſent them all under one
view, that we may ſee, as in a Mirrour, the ſeveral
faces of Nature, from Firſt to Laſt, throughout
all the Circle of Succeſſions.
Your Majeſty baving been pleas'd to give encou-
ragement to this Tranſlation, I humbly preſent it to
Your Gracious Acceptance. And 'tis our Intereſt
,
as well as Duty, in Diſquiſitions of this Nature, to
Addreß our ſelves to Your Majeſty, as the Defen-
der
}
.
The Epiltle Dedicatory
der of our Philofophick Liberties; againſt thoſe
that would uſurp upon the Fundamental privilege
and Birth-right of Mankind, The Free uſe of
Reaſon. Your Majeſty bath always appeard the
Royal Patron of Learning and the Sciences: and'tis
ſuitable to the Greatneſs of a Princely Spirit, to fa-
vour and promote whatſoever tends to the enlarge-
ment of Humane Knowledge, and the improvement
of Humane Nature. To be Good and Gracious,
and à Lover of Knowledge, are, methinks, two
of the moſt amiable things in this World; And that
Your Majeſty may always bear that Charakter, in
preſent and future Ages, and after a long and pro-
ſperous Reign, enjoy a bleſſed Immortality, is the
conſtant Trayer of
Your MAJESTY'S
Moſt Humble and moſt
Obedient Subject,
THOMAS BURNET
PREFACE
PREF A C E
TO THE
R E A DER
AVING given an account of this
whole Work in the firſt Chapter, and
of the method of either Book, whereof
this Volume conſiſts, in their proper
places, there remains not much to be
ſaid here to the Reader. This Theory
of the Earth may be call'd Sacred, becauſe it is not the
common Phyſiology of the Earth, or of the Bodies
that compoſe it, but reſpects only the great Turns of
Fate, and the Revolutions of our Natural World : ſuch
as are taken notice of in the Sacred Writings, and are
truly the Hinges upon which the Providence of this
Earth moves; or whereby it opens and ſhuts the ſe-
veral ſucceſſive Scenes whereof ic is made up. This
Engliſh Edition is the ſame in ſubſtance with the Latin,
though, I confeſs, 'cis not ſo properly a Tranſlation,
as a new Compoſition upon the ſame ground, there
being ſeveral additional Chapters . in it, and ſeveral
new-moulded.
As every Science requires a peculiar Genius, ſo like-
wiſe there is a Genius peculiarly improper for every
one; and as .co Philoſophy, which is the Contempla-
tion of the works of Nature, and the Providence that
governs thens, there is no temper or Genius, in my
mind, to improper for it, as chat which we call a mean
and narrom. Spirit; and which the Greeks call Little.
neſs of Soul. This is a defect in the firſt make of ſome
Mens minds, which can ſcarce ever be corrected af-
terwards, either by Learning or Age. And as Souls
that are made little and incapacious cannot enlarge
their thoughts to take in any great compaſs of Times
or
THE PRE F A C E.
or things; ſo what is beyond their compaſs, or above
their reach, they are apt to look upon as Fantaſtical,
or at leaſt would willingly have iç paſs for ſuch in the
World. Now as there is nothing ſo great, ſo large, ſo
immenſe, as the works of Nature, and the methods of
Providence, men of this complexion muſt needs be
very unfit for the contemplation of them. Who would
fet a purblind Man at the top of the Maft to diſcover
Land? or upon an high Tower to draw a Landskip
of the Country round about? for the ſame reaſon,
ſhort-fighted minds are unfit to make Philoſophers,
whoſe proper buſineſs it is to diſcover and deſcribe in
comprehenſive Theories the Phenomena of the World,
and the Cauſes of them.
This original diſeaſe of the Mind is ſeldom cur’d by
Learning, which cures many others; Like a fault in the
firit Stamina of the Body, it cannot eaſily be rectified
afterwards. 'Tis a great miſtake to think that every
ſort of Learning makes a Man a competent Judge of
Natural Speculations; We ſee unhappy examples to the
contrary amongſt the Chriſtian Fathers, and particu-
larly in S. Auſtin, who was unqueſtionably a Man of Parts
and Learning, but interpofing in a controverſie where
his Talent did not lie, ſhow'd his zeal againſt the An-
tipodes to very ill purpoſe, though he drew his Reaſons
partly from Scripture. And if within a few Years, or
in the next Generation, it ſhould prove as certain and
demonftrable, that the Earth is mov'd, as it is now,
chat chere are Antipodes; thoſe that have been zealous
againſt ic, and ingag'd the Scripture in the Controver-
lie, would have the ſame reaſon to repent of their for-
wardneſs, that S. Auſtin would have now, if he was
alive. 'Tis a dangerous thing to engage the authority
of Scripture in diſputes about the Natural World, in
oppoſition to Reaſon; left Time, which brings all
things to light, ſhould diſcover that to be evidently
falſe which we had made Scripture to aſſert: And I
remember S. Auſtin in his Expoſition upon Geneſis, hach
laid down a rule to this very purpoſe, though he had
the unhappineſs, it ſeems, not to follow it always him-
felf. The reaſon alſo, which he gives there for his rule,
!S
THE PRE F C E.
t
Quenquum
Chriftianorum
in eire quim
1
ز
is very good and ſubſtantial: For, faith He, if the Un- Gen. ad lit.
believers or Philoſophers Jhall certainly know us to be miſta- lib. 1.C 19.
ken, and to err in thoſe things that concern the Natural World, accidit ut
and ſee that we alledge our (Sacred) Books for ſuch vain Termin, de
opinions, how lijall they believe thoſe ſame Books when they Cado, de cie-
tell them of the RESURRECTION of the Dead, and runde ele.
the world to come, if they find them to be fallaciouſly writ Cim enim
in ſuch things as lie within their certain Knowledge?
optimè có: una, feruie depechendei int, l'anam /entensi mult: 1m 2x noftris libris afferere, qu0 paito illis libris credituri
funt de Reuvectiune Afuitetuillmil, fe vila aterriü reynóque cælorum, 91.7.lo de lis rebus quis jam experiri velin.
dubuaris nunciis ferpere purutinent, fullauter the inteje conferipros?
We are not to ſuppoſe that any truth concerning
the Natural World can be an Enemy to Religion; for
Truth cannot be an Enemy to Truth, God is not divi-
ded againſt himſelf; and therefore we ought not upon
that account to condemn or cenſure what we have not
cxamin’d or cannot diſprove; as thoſe that are of this
narrow Spirit we are ſpeaking of, are very apc co do.
Let every thing be try'd and examin'd in the firſt place,
whether it be True or Falſe ; and if it be found falle, 'cis
then to be conſider'd, whether it be ſuch a fallity as is
prejudicial to Religion or no. But for every new The-
ory that is propos'd, to be alarm’d, as if all Religion
was falling about our Ears, is to make the World ſuf-
pect that we are very ill aſſur'd of the foundation it
ſtands upon. Beſides, do not all Men complain, even
Theſe as well as others, of the great ignorance of Man-
kind ? how little we know, and how much is ſtill un-
known ? and can we ever know more, unleſs ſome-
thing new be Diſcover’d? lc cannot be old when it
comes first co light, when firſt invented, and firſt
pro-
pos’d. If a Prince ſhould complain of the poorneſs of his
Exchequer, and the ſcarcity of Money in his Kingdom,
would he be angry with his Merchants, if they brought
him home a Cargo of good Bullion, or a Maſs of Gold
out of a foreign Countrey ? and give this reaſon only
for it, He would have no new Silver; neither ſhould
any be Curranc in his Dominions but what had his
own Stamp and Image upon ic : How ſhould this Prince
or his People grow rich? To complain of want, and
yet refuſe all offers of a ſupply, looks very ſullen, or very
fantaſtical.
I might
12
THE PREFACE.
I might mention alſo upon this occaſion another Ge-
nius and diſpoſition in Men, which often makes them
improper for Philoſophical Contemplations; not ſo
much, it may be, from the narrowneſs of their Spirit
and Underſtanding, as becauſe they will not take time
to extend them. I mean Men of Wit and Parts, but of
ſhore Thoughts
, and little Meditation, and that are apo
to diſtruſt every thing for a Fancy or Fiction that is
not the dictare of Senſe, or made our immediately to
their Senſes. Men of this Humour and Character call
fuch Theories as theſe, Philoſophick Romances, and
think themſelves witty in the expreſſion; They allow
them to be pretty amuſements of the Mind, but with
oui Truth or Reality. I am afraid if an Angel ſhould
write the Theory of the Earth, they would paſs the
fame judgment upon it; Where there is variety of Parts
in a due Contexcure, with ſomething of ſurprizing apt-
neſs in the harmony and correſpondency of them, this
they call a Romance; but ſuch Romances muſt all
Theories of Nature, and of Providence be, and muſt
have every part of that Character with advantage, if
they be well repreſented. There is in them, as I may ſo
ſay, a Plot or Myſtery purſued through the whole Work,
and certain Grand Iſſues or Events upon which the reſt
depend, or to which they are ſubordinato; but theſe
things we do not make or contrive our ſelves, but
find and diſcover them, being made already by the
Great Author and Governour of the Univerſe: And
when they are clearly diſcover'd, well digeſted, and well
reaſond in every part, there is, methinks, more of beau-
ty in ſuch a Theory, at leaſt a more maſculine beauty,
than in any Poem or Romance; And that ſolid truth
that is at the bottom, gives a ſatisfaction to the Mind,
that it can never have from any Fiction, how artificial
locver it be.
To enter no farther upon this matter, 'tis enough to
obſerye, that when we make Judgments and Cenſures
upon general preſumptions and prejudices, they are
made rather from the temper and model of our own
Spirits, than from Reaſon; and therefore, if we'would
neither impoſe upon our ſelves, nor others, we muſt
lay
THE PRE FAC E.
*
lay aſide that lazy and fallacious method of Cenſuring
by the Lump, and muſt bring things cloſe to the reſt
of True or Falſe
, to explicit proof and evidence ; And
whoſoever makes ſuch Objections againſt an Hypotheſis
,
hath a right to be heard, let bis Temper and Genius be
what it will. Neither do we intend that any thing we
have ſaid here, ſhould be underſtood in another ſence.
To conclude, This Theory being wric with a lin-
cere intention to juſtifie che Doctrines of the Vniverſal
Deluge, and of a Paradiſiacal ſtate, and protect them
from the Cavils of thoſe that are no well-wiſhers to
Sacred Hiſtory, upon that account it may reaſonably
expect fair uſage and acceptance with all that are well-
diſpos'd; And it will alſo be, I think, a great fatis-
faction to them to ſee thoſe pieces of moſt ancient Hi-
ſtory, which have been chiefly preſerv'd in Scripture,
confirm'd a-new, and by another Light, that of Nature
and Philoſophy; and alſo freed from thoſe miſcon-
ceptions or miſrepreſentations which made them fic
uneaſie upon the Spirits even of the beſt Men, that took
time to think. Laſtly, In things purely Speculative, ,
as cheſe are, and no ingredients of our Faith, it is free
to differ from one another in our Opinions and Senti-
ments; and ſo I remember S. Auſtin hath obſerv'd upon
this very ſubject of Paradiſe ; Wherefore as we deſire to
give no offence our felves, ſo neither ſhall we take any
at the difference of Judgment in others; provided this
liberty be mutual, and that we all agree to ſtudy
Peace, Truth, and a good Life.
2
CONTENTS
1
ta
7
4
C Ο Ν Τ Ε Ν Τ S
OF THE
f
CHAPTER S.
}
THE FIRST BOOK .
THF
1
CH A P. I.
HE Introdu&tion; An account rity, and from the Nature and
of the whole Work, of the ex- Firm of the Chaos, out of which
tent and general Order of it. the Earth was made.
CHAP. II.
CHAP. V.
A general account of Noah's The Second Propoſition is laid
Flood. A computation what quan- down,viz.That the face of the Earth
tity of Water mould be neceſſary for before the Deluge was ſmooth,
the making of it; That the common regular and uniform; without
Opinion and Explication of that Mountains, and without a Sea. The
Flood is not intelligible.
Chaos out of mbich the lorld riſe is
fully examin’d, and all its motions
CHAP. I I I.
obferv’d, and by ubat ſteps it wrought
it ſelf into an habitable World. Sime
All Evaſions concerning the Flood things in An-iquity relating to the
anfiver'd; That there was 123 Crea- firſt ſtate of the Earth are interpre-
tron of IVaters at the Deluge; and ted, and fome things in the Sacred
that it nás not particular or Nati- Writings. The Divine Art and Geo-
on.al, but . extended throughout the metry in the conſtruction of the firſt
whole Earth. A prelude and pre- Earth is obſerv'd and celebrated.
parition to the true accrurit ind
explication of it. The method of C H A P. 7 I.
the firſt Book.
The diſſolution of the Firſt Earth:
CHAP. I V.
The Deluge enſuing thereupon. And
the foron of the preſent Earth riſing
That the Earth and Mankind had from the Ruines of the Firſt.
an Original, and were not from
Eternity; Prov'd againſt Ariſtotle. CHAP. VII.
The firſt. Propoſition of our Theory
luid dorrn, vịz. Thout the Ante-di That the Explication we have
luviin E.arth is of a differerit Form given of an Universal Deluge is 1206
and Conſtruction from the preſent. an IDEA enly, but an account of whus
This is prov'd from Divine Anther really came to paſs in the Earth, and
the
.
1
THE CONTENTS.
the true explication of Noah's lar induction ; beginning with an ac-
Flood. An examination of Tehom count of Subterraneous Cavis,es ind
Rabbá, or the Great Abyſs, and Subterraneous l'aters. i
that by it the Seu cannot be under-
ftood, nor the Subterranecus Waters 8 С НА Р. Х.
as they are at preſent; What the
true Notion and Form of it 7:15, Concerning the Chanelof the Sea,
collefted from Moſes and other Sil- and the Original of it: The cujes
credlkriters. Obſervations in Deu- of its' irregular form und unequal
calion's Deluge.
depths: As alfo of the Original of
Iſlands, their ſituation, and other pri-
CHAP. VIII. perties.
CHAI XI.
The particular Hiſtory of Noah's
Flood is explain'd in all the material Concerning the Mountains of the
parts
cand circumſtances of it, accor- Earth, their greatneſs and irregu-
ding to the preceding Theory. Any lar Form, their Situation, Gaufes
jeeming difficulties remov’d, and the and Origin.
arhole Section concluded with a Dif-
courſe how far the Deluge may be
CHAP. XII.
lookt upon as the effe&t of an Ordina-
ry Providence, and how far of an A ſhort revieir of mhat hath been
Extraordinary.
already treated of, and in mhat man-
All methods, whether Philo.
CHAP. I X.
ſophical or Theological, that hive
been offer'd by others for the expli-
The Second Part of this Diſcourſe, cation of the Form of the Earth, are
proving the ſame Theory from the examin'd and refuted. A conjeéture
Effects and the preſent Form of the concerning the other Planets, their
Earth. First, by a general Scheme Natural Form and State compar'd
of what is most remarkable in this with ours; Especially concerning
Globe, and then by a more particu- Jupiter and Saturn.
1
ner.
THE SECOND BOOK.
THF The Second Book. The gene
C H A P. I.
C Η Α Ρ. ΙΙΙ.
HE Introduction and Ginients
of the Second Book. The
gene-
The Original differences of the Pri
ral ſtate of the Primaval Earth, and mitive Earth from the preſent or Poſt-
of Paradiſe.
diluvian. The three Characters of
Paradiſe and the Golden Age found
CHAP. II.
in the Primitive Earth. A particu-
lar explication of each Chara&ter.
The great change of the World
ſince
the Flood from what it was in the
CHAP. I V.
firſt Ages. The Earth under its
preſent Form could not be Paradiſia A Digreſſion, concerning the l'a
cal, nor any part of it.
tural Cauſes of Longevity. That
the
}
!
THE CONTENTS .
the Machine of an Animal conſiſts change of the Poles of the World;
of Springs, and which are the two The Doctrine of the Mundane Egg
principal. The Age of the Ante-di- Hom Ainerica was firſt peopled;
luvians to be computed by Solar, Him Paradiſe within the Circle of
not Lunar Tears.
the Mcon.
CHAP. V.
CHAP. I X.
Concerning the W’a!ers of the Pri A general Objection againſt this
mitive Earth: Ihat the state of Theory, viz. That if there had been
the Regions of the Air wis then, ſuch a Primitive Earth, as we pre-
and hom all Waters proceeded from tend, the fame of it would have foun-
them. How the Rivers aroſe, mbat ded throughout all Antiquity. The
mas their courſe, and how they end Eaſtern and Weſterii Learning con-
ed. Several things in Sacred Ifrit fider'd, the moſt conſiderable Kecords
that confirm this Hydrography of the of both are loſt; mhat footſteps re-
Firſt Earth, eſpecially the Post-dilu- main relating to this ſubject. The
vian Origin of the Rain-borr. Jewiſh and Chriſtian Learning con-
ſider'd, how fir loſt as to this Ar-
C H A P. VÌ.
gument, and what Notes of Tradi-
tions remain. Laſtly, How far the
A Recollection and review of what Sacred Il ritings bear witneſs to it.
hath been fuid concerning the Pri- The Pr vidential conduet of Know-
mitive Farih, with a more full Sur- ledge in the World. A Recapitulation
vey of the ſtate of the Firſt World, and ft.ite of the Theory.
Natural and Civil, and the compil-
riſon of it with the preſent World.
С НА Р. Х.
CH A P. VII.
Concerning the AUTHOR of
NA I 2 R E.
Concerning the place of Paradiſe ;
It carrizot be determin'd from the The-
CHAP. X I.
ory only, nor from Scripture only;
What the fence of Antiquity rras coil Concerning Natural Provi-
cerning it, as to the firs and Heiz- dence. Several miſrepreſentations
thens, and eſpecially as to the Chri- of it, and falje methods of Contem-
(tian Fathers, That they generally plation; Preparatives to the true
plac'd it out of this continent, in the Method, and a true repreſentation
Southern Hemiſphere.
of the Univerſe. The Mundane Idea,
and the Univerſal Syſtem of Provi-
CHAP. VIII. dence ; Several ſubordinate Syſtems,
That of our Earth and Sublunary
The uſes of this Theory for the il World; The Courſe and Periods of
luſtration of Antiquity; The Chaos it; How much of this is already
of the Ancients explain'd; The in- treated of, and what remains. Gona
habitability of the Turrid Zone; The cluſion.
THE
1
THE
THE ORY
OF THE
E A R T H.
Воок І.
Concerning the Deluge, and the Diſſolution
of the Earth.
C H A P. I.
THE INTRODUCTION;
An Account of the whole Work; of the Extent and general
Order of it.
INCE I was firſt inclin'd to the Contempla-
tion of Nature, and took pleaſure to trace out
the Cauſes of Effects, and the dependance of one
thing upon another in the viſible Creation, I
had always, methought, a particular curioſity
to look back into the Sources and ORIGINAL
of Things; and to view in my Mind, ſo far as I
was able, the Beginning and Progreſs of a RISING WORLD.
And after ſome Eſſays of this Nature, and, as I thought, not
unſucceſsful, I carried on my enquiries further, to try whether
this Riſing World, when form' d and finiſh'd, would continue al-
ways the ſame ; in the ſame form, ſtructure, and conſiſtency;
or what changes it would ſucceſſively undergo, by the conti-
nued action of the ſame Cauſes that firſt produc'd it; And,
laſtly, what would be its final Period and Conſummation. This
whole Series and compaſs of things taken together, I calld a
COURSE OF NATURE, or a SYSTEM OF NA-
TURAL PROVIDENCE; and thought there was no-
thing belonging to the External World more fit or more worthy
Б
QUE
I
2
Book 1.
The Tbeory of the Earth
2 -
ܚܪ
our ſtudy and meditation, nor any thing that would conduca
inore to diſcover the ways of Divine Providence, and to liew us
the grounds of all true knowledge concerning Nature. And
therefore to clear up the ſeveral parts of this Theory, I was wi-
ling to lay aſide a great piany other Speculations, ind 2!! wherria
dry ſubtleties with which the Schools, and the Books of ! hijo -
phers are uſually filld.
But when we ſpeak of a Piling Bild, and the Contemplarion
of it, we do not mean this of the Greiit liniverfe ; for who calli
deſcribe the Original of that vaſt Frame? But we lpeak of the Sul-
lugary Karld, This Earthi and its dependencies, which roſt out of 1
Chaos about fix thou and years ago ; And ſeeing it hath falny19
Bur lot to act upon kis Stage, to have cur preſent home and it-
ſidence here, its ſeems inoſt reaſonable, and the place delignid
by Providence, where we ſhould firſt imploy our thoughts to un-
derſtand the works of God and Nature. We have accordingly
therefore delignd in this work to give an account of the Ori-
ginal of the Earth, and of all the great and General Changes
that it hath already undergone, or is hence forwards to under-
go, till the Conſummation of all Things. For if from thoſe
Principles we have here taken, aná that Theory we have begun
in thele Two Firſt Books, we can deduce with ſucceſs and clear-
neſs the Origin of the Earth, and thoſe States of it that are al-
ready paſt; Following the ſame Ihred, and by the conduct of
the ſame Theory, we will purſue its Fate and Hiſtory through
future Ages, and mark all the great Changes and Converſions
that attend it while Day and Night ſhall laft'; that is, fò long as it
continues an Earth.
By the States of the Earth that are already paſt, we under-
Nand chiefly Paradiſe and the Deluge; Names well known and
as little known in their Nature. By the Future States we undr-
ſtand the Gunflagration, and what new Order of Nature may foi-
low upon that, till the whole Circle of Time and Providence be
compleated. As to the firſt and past States of the Earth, we ſhall
have little help from the Ancients, or from any of the Philoſo
phers, for the diſcovery or deſcription of them; We inuit often
tread unbeaten paths, and make a way where we do not find
one; but it ſhall be always with a Light in our hand, that we
may ſee our ſleps, and that thoſe that follow us may not follow
us blindly. There is no Sect of Philoſophers that I know of,
that ever gave an account of the Univerſal Deluge, or diſco-
ver’d, froin the Contemplation of the Earth, that there had been
ſuch a thing already in Nature. 'Tis true, they often talk of
an alternation of Deluges and Conflagrations in this Earth, but they
ſpeak of them as things to come ; at leaſt they give no proof or
argument of any that hath already deſtroyed the World. As to
Piradiſe, it ſeems to be repreſented to us by the Golden Age ;
whereof the Ancients tell inany ſtories, ſometimes very luxuri
ant, and ſometimes very defective: For they did not ſo well
underſtand the difference betwixt the New-made Earth and the
Preſent, as to ſee what were the juſt grounds of the Golden Age,
Or
Chap.1. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
3
or of Paradiſe: Tho' they had many broken Notions concerning
thoſe things, As to the Conflagration in particular, This hath al-
ways been reckond One amongſt the Opinions or Doginata of
the Stoicks, That the liorld was to be deſtroy'd by Fire, and their
Books are full of this Notion; but yet they do not tell us the Cauſes
of the Conflagration, nor what preparations there are in Nature,
or will be, towards that great Change. And we may generally
cbſerve this of the Ancients, that their Learning or Philoſophy
conſiſted more in Concluſions, than in Demonſtrations; They had
many Truths among them, whereof they did not know them-
felves the Presnifles or the Proofs: Which is an argument to me,
that the knowledge they had, was not a thing of their own in-
vention, or which they came to by fair Realoning and obſervati-
ons upon Nature, but was delivered to them from others by Tra.
dition and Ancient Fame, ſometimes more publick, ſometimes more
ſecret: Theſe Concluſions they kept in Mind, and communicated
to thoſe of their School, or Sect, or Poſterity, without knowing,
for the moſt part, the juſt grounds and reaſons of them.
'Tis the Sacred Writings of Scripture that are the beſt Monu-
ments of Antiquiry, and to thoſe we are chiefly beholden for the
Hiſtory of the Firſt Ages, whether Natural Hiſtory or Civil. 'Tis
true, the Poets, who were the moſt Ancient Writers amongſt
the Grecks, and ſerv'd them both for Hiſtorians, Divines, and Phi-
loſophers, have deliver'd ſome things concerning the firſt Ages of
the World, that have a fair reſemblance of Truth, and ſome affi-
nity with thoſe accounts that are given of the ſame things by Sa-
cred Authors, and theſe inay be of uſein due time and place; but
yet, leſt any thing fabulous ſhould be inixt with them, as coin-
inonly there is, we will never depend wholly upon their credit,
nor aſſert any thing upon the authority of the Ancients which is
not firſt prov'd by Natural Reaſon, or warranted by Scripture.
It ſeems to me very reaſonable to believe, that beſides the Pre-
cepts of Religion, which are the principal ſubject and deſign of
the Books of Holy Scripture, there may be providentially con-
ſerv'd in them the inemory of things and times ſo remote, as
could not be retriev'd, either by Hiſtory, or by the light of Nature;
and
yet were of great importance to be known, both for their own
excellency, and alſo to rectifie the knowledge of men in other
things conſequential to them: Such points may be, Our gre.it
Epocha or the Age of the Earth, The Origination of Mankind,
The Firſt and Paradiſiacal State, The deitruction of the Old World
by an Univerſal Deluge, The Longevity of its Inhabitants, The
manner of their preſervation, and of their Peopling the Second
Earth; and laſtly, The Fate and Changes it is to undergo. Theſe
I always lookt upon as tlie Seeds of great knowledge, or heads of
Theories fixt on purpoſe to give us aim and direction how to pur-
ſue the reſt that depend upon them. But theſe heads, you ſee, are
of a mixt order, and we propoſe to our ſelves in this Work only
ſuch as belong to the Natural World; upon which I believe the
trains of Providence are generally laid; And we muſt firſt conſider
how God hath order'd Nature, and then how the Oeconomy of
the
B 2
4
Book 1.
The Theory of the Earth.
the Intellectual World is adapted to it; for of theietwo parts conliit
the full Syſiem cf Providence. In the mean time, what ſubject clo
be more worthy the thoughts of any ſerious perſon, than to view
and conſider the Riſe and Fall, and all the Revolutions, not of a
Monarchy or an Empire, of the Greci12 or Roman State, but oi
an intire World.
The obſcurity of theſe things, and their reinoteneſs from com-
mon knowledge will be made an argument by ſome, why we
thould not undertake them; And by others, it may be, the very
ſame thing will be made an argument why we ſhould ; for any
part I think There is nothing So ſecret that ſhall not be bronght to Light,
within the compaſs of Our World; for we are not to underſtand
that of the whole Univerſe, nor of all Eternity, our capacities do
not extend ſo far; But whatſoever concerns this Sublunary
World in the whole cxtent of its duration, from the Chaos to
the laſt period, this I believe Providence hath made us capable to
understand, and will in its due time make it known. All I ſay,
betwixt the firſt Chaos and the laſt Completion of Time and all
things temporary, This was given to the diſquiſitions of men ;
On cither hand is Eternity, before the World and aftcr, which is
without our reach : But that little ſpot of ground that lies be-
twixt thofe two great Oceans, this we are to cultivats, this we
are Maſters of, herein we are to exerciſe our thoughts, to un-
derſtand and lay open the Treaſures of the Divine Wiſdom and
Goodneſs hid in this part of Nature and of Providence.
As for the difficulty or obfcurity of an argument, that does
but add to the pleaſure of conteſting with it, when there are hopes
of victory; and ſucceſs does more than recoinpence all the pains.
For there is no fort of joy more grateful to the inind of Man,
than that which ariſeth from the invention of Truth; eſpecialty
when ’tis hard to come by. Every Man hath a delight ſuited to
his Genius, and as there is pleaſure in the right exerciſe of any
faculty, ſo eſpecially in that of Right-reaſoning; which is ſtill
the greater, by how much the conſequences are more clear, and
the chains of them more long: There is no Chaſe ſo pleaſant,
inet hinks, as to drive a Thought, by good conduct, froin one
end of the World to the other; and never to loſe ſight of it till it
fall into Eternity, where all things are loſt as to our knowledge.
This Theory being chietiy Philoſophical, Rcaſon is to be our
firſt Guide; and where that falls ſhort, or any other juſt occaſion
offers it ſelf, we may receive further light and confirmation from
the Sacred Writings. Both theſe are to be lookt upon as of Di-
vine Original, God is the Author of both; He that made the
Scripture made alſo our Faculties, and 'twere a reflection upon
the Divine Veracity, for the one or the other to be falſe when
rightly us’d. We muſt therefore be careful and tender of oppo-
ſing theſe to one another, becauſe that is, in effect, to oppoſe Cod
to himſelf. As for Antiquity and the Teſtimonies of the Anci-
ents, we only make general reflections upon them, for illuſtration
rather than proof of what we propoſe; not thinking it proper for
an Eriglich Treatiſe to multiply citations out of Greek or Latin
Authors.
I
ܪ
$
Chap.2. I he Deluge and Di ſolution of the Earth.
5
I am very ſenſible it will be inuch our intereſt; That the Rea-
der of this Theory ſhould be of an ingenuous and unprejudic'd
Temper ; neither does it ſo much require Book-learning and Scho-
larſhip, as good natural ſence to diſtinguiſh True and falſe, and
to diſcern what is well prov'd, and what is not. It often hap-
pens that Scholaſtick Education, like a Trade, does ſo fix a Man
in a particular way, that he is not fit to judge of any thing that lies
out of that way, and ſo his Learning becomes a clog to his na-
tural parts, and makes him more indocile, and more incapable
of new thoughts and new improvements, than thoſe that have
only the Talents of Nature. As Maſters of exerciſe had rather
take a Scholar that never learn'd before, than one that hath had
a bad Maiter; fo generally one would rather chuſe a Reader with-
out art, than one ill-inftruited; with Learning, but opinionative
and without judgment ; yet it is not neceſſary they ſhould want
either, and Learning well plac'd ſtrengthens all the powers of the
Mind. To conclude, juſt reaſoning and a generous love of Truth,
whether with or without Erudition, is that which makes us
inoſt competent Judges what is True; and further than this, in
the peruſal and examination of This Work, as to the Author as
much Candor as you plaſe, but as to the Theory we require no-
thing but attention and impartiality.
CHA P. II.
A general account of Noah's Flood; A computation what
quantity of Water would be neceſſary for the making of
it; that the common Opinion and Explication of that
Flood is not intelligible.
T
IS now more than Five Thouſand Years ſince our World
was made, and though it would be a great pleaſure to the
Mind, to recollect and view at this diſtance thoſe firſt Scenes of
Nature: What the face of the Earth was when freſh and new,
and how things differ'd from the ſtate we now find them in, the
ſpeculation is ſo remote, that it ſeems to be hopeleſs, and beyond
the reach of Humane Wit. We are almoſt the laſt Poſterity of
the Firſt Men, and faln into the dying Age of the World; by
what footſteds or by what guide, can we trace back our way
to thoſe Firſt Ages, and the firſt order of things ? And yet, me-
thinks, it is reaſonable to believe, that Divine Providence, which
ſees at once throughout all the Ages and Orders of the World,
ſhould not be willing to keep Mankind finally and fatally ignorant
of that part of Nature and of the Univerſe, which is properly
their Task and Province to manage and underſtand. We are the
Inhabi-
6
Book I.
The Theory of the Earth.
Inhabitants of the Earth, the Lords and Maſters of it; and we are
endow'd with Reaſon and Underſtanding ; doth it not then pro-
perly belong to us to examine and unfold the Works of God in
this part of the Univerſe, which is faln to our lot, which is our
heritage and habitation? And it will be found, it inay be, upon
a ſtricter Enquiry, that in the preſent form and conſtitution of
the Earth, there are certain inarks and Indications of its firſt
State; with which if we compare thoſe things that are recorded
in Sacred Hiſtory, concerning the firſt Chaos, Paradiſe, and an
Univerſal Deluge, we may diſcover, by the help of thoſe Lights,
what the Earth was in its firſt Original, and what Changes have
ſince ſucceded in it.
And though we ſhall give a full account of the Origin of the
Earth in this Treatiſe, yet that which we have propos'd particu-
larly for the Title and Subject of it, is to give an account of the
primæval PARADISE, and of the Univerſal DELUGE,
Thoſe being the two moſt important things that are explain’d by
the Theory we propoſe. And I muſt beg leave in treating of
theſe two, to change the Order, and treat firſt of the Deluge,
and then of Paradiſe: For though the State of Paradiſe doth
precede that of the Flood in Sacred Hiſtory, and in the natura
of the thing, yet the explication of both will be more ſenſible,
and more effectual, if we begin with the Deluge; there being more
Obfervations and Effects, and thoſe better known to us, that
inay be refer'd to this, than to the other; and the Deluge being
once truly explain’d, we lhall from thence know the Form and
Quality of the Ante-diluvian Earth. Let us then proceed to the
explication of that great and fatal Inundation, whoſe Hiſtory is
well known; and according to Mofes, the beſt of Hiſtorians, in
a few words is this-------
Sixteen Hundred and odd years after the Earth was made, and
inhabited, it was over-flow'd, and deſtroy'd in a Deluge of Wa-
Not å Deluge that was National only, or over-run fome
particular Country or Region, as Judei or Grcice, or any other,
but it overſpread the face of the whole Earth, from Pole to Pole,
and from Eaſt to Weſt, and that in ſuch exceſs, that the Floods
over-reacht the Tops of the higheſt Mountains; the Rains de-
fcending after an unuſual manner, and the fountains of the Great
Deep being broke open; ſo as a general deſtruction and de-
vaſtation was brought upon the Earth, and all things in it, Man-
kind and other living Creatures ; excepting only Noah and his Fa-
mily, who by a ſpecial, Providence of God was preſerv'd in a
certain Ark; or Vaffel made like a Ship, and ſuch kinds of living
Creatures as he took in to him. After theſe Waters had' rag'd for
ſome time on the Earth, they began to leſſen and ſhrink, and the
great waves and fluctuations of this Deep or Abyſſe, being quieted
by degrees, the Waters, retird into their Chanels and Caverns
within the Earth; and the Mountains and Fields began to appear,
and the whole habitable Earth in that form and ſhape wherein we
now ſee it, . Then the World began again, and froin that little
Remnant preſerv'd in the Ark, the preſent race of Mankind, and
of
ter.
Chap.2. I be Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earthi
,
7
1
of Animals, in the known parts of the Earth, were propagated.
Thus periſh'd the Old World, and the preſent aroſe from the
ruines and remains of it.
This is a ſhort ſtory of the greateſt thing that ever yet hapned
in the World, the greateſt revolution and the greateſt change in
Nature; and if we come to reflect ſeriouſly upon it, we ſhall find
it extremely difficult, if not impollible, to give an account of the
Waters that compos'd this Deluge, wlience they came or whi-
ther they went. It it had been only the Inundation of a Coun-
try, or of a Province, or of the greateſt part of a Continent, ſome
proportionable cauſes perhaps might have been found out; but a
De uge overflowing the whole Earth: the whole Circuit and whole
Extent of it: burying all in Water, even the greateſt Mountains:
in any known parts of the Univerſe, to find Water fufficient for
this Effect, as it is generally explained and underſtood, I think is
impoſſible. And that we may the better judge of the whole mat-
ter let us firſt compute how much Water would be requiſite for
ſuch a Deluge : or to lay the Earth, conſider'd in its preſent
form, and the higheſt Mountains, under Water. Then let's con-
ſider whether ſuch a quantity of Water can be had out of all the
ſtores that we know in Nature: And from theſe two we will
take our Ground and Riſe, and begin to reflect, whether the World
hath not been hitherto miſtaken in the common opinion and ex-
plication of the general Deluge.
To diſcover how much Water would be requiſite to make this
Deluge,we muſt firſt ſuppoſe enough to cover the plain ſurface of
the Earth, the Fields and lower Grounds; then we muſt heap up fo
much more upon this, as will reach above the tops of the higheſt
Mountains ; fo as drawing a Circle over the tops of the higheſt
Mountains quite round the Earth, ſuppoſe from Pole to Pole,
and another to meet it round the middle of the Earth, all that
ſpace or capacity contain’d within theſe Circles is to be fill'd up
with Water. This I confeſs will make a prodigious inafs of Wa-
ter, and it looks frightfully to the imagination ; 'tis huge and
great, but 'tis extravagantly ſo, as a great Moniter: It doth not
look like the work of God or Nature: However let's compute a
little more particularly how much this will amount to, or how
many Oceans of Water would be neceſſary to compoſe this great
Ocean rowling in the Air, without bounds or banks.
If all the Mountains were par'd off the Earth, and ſo the ſur-
face of it lay even, or in an equal convexity every where with
the ſurface of the Sea, from this ſurface of the Sea, let us fup-
poſe that the height of the Mountains may be a mile and a half;
or that we may not ſeem at all to favour our own opinion or
calculation, let us take a mile only for the perpendicular height
of the Mountains. Let us on the other ſide ſuppoſe the Sea to
cover half the Earth, as ’tis generally believ'd to do; and the coin-
mon depth of it, taking one place with another, to be about a
quarter of a mile, or 250 paces. I ſay, taking one place with
another, for though the middle Chanel of the great Ocean be far
deeper, we may obſerve, that there is coinmonly a deſcent or de-
clivity
ر
-8
Book I.
The Theory of the Earth.
clivity from the ſhore to the middle part of the Chanel, ſo that
one comes by degrees into the depth of it; and thoſe ſhory parts
are generally but ſome fathoins deep. Belices, in arins of the Sua,
in Straits, and among Illands, there is commonly no great deptlı,
and ſome places are plain ſhallows. So as upon a moderate
computation, one place compar'd with another, we may take a
quarter of a mile, or about an hundred fathoms, for the coin-
mon meaſure of the depth of the Sea, if we were caſt into a
Chanel of an equal depth every where. This being ſuppos’d,
there would need four Oceans to lie upon this Ocean, to raiſe it
up to the top of the Mountains, or ſo high as the Waters of the
Deluge riſe; then four Oceans more to lie upon the Land, that
the Water there might ſwell to the ſame height ; which together
make eight Oceans for the proportion of the Water requir'd in
the Deluge.
'Tis true, there would not be altogether ſo much Water re-
quir d for the Land as for the Sea, to raiſe them to an equal
height; becauſe Mountains and Hills would fill up part of that
ſpace upon the Land, and ſo make leſs Water requiſite. But to
compenſate this, and confirin our computation, we muſt conti-
der in the firſt place, that we have taken a much leſs height of
the Mountains than is requiſite, if we reſpect the Mediterraneous
Mountains, or thoſe that are at a great diſtance from the Sea;
For their height above the ſurface of the Sea, computing the
declivity of the Land all along from the Mountains to the Sea-lide
( and that there is ſuch a declivity is manifeſt from the courſe
and deſcent of the Rivers) is far greater than the proportion we
have taken: The height of Mountains is uſually taken from the
foot of them, or from the next Plain, which if it be far from the
Sea, we may reaſonably allow as much for the declenſion of the
Land from that place to the Sea, as for the iminediate height of
the Mountain; So, for inſtance, the Mountains of the Moon in
Ifrica, whence the Nile flows, and after a long courſe falls into
the Mediterranean Sea by Egypt, are ſo much higher than the
ſurface of that Sea, firſt, as the Aſcent of the Land is from the
Sea to the foot of the Mountains, and then as the height of the
Mountains is from the bottom to the top: For both theſe are
to be computed when you meaſure the height of a Mountain, or
of a mountainous Land, in reſpect of the Sea: And the height of
Mountains to the Sea beirig thus computed, there would be need
of ſix or eight Oceans to raiſe the Sea alone as high as the high-
eſt In-land Mountains ; And this is more than enough to com-
penſate the leſs quantity of Water that would be requiſite upon
the Land. Beſides, we inuſt conſider the Regions of the Air up-
wards to be more capacious than a Region of the ſame thick-
neſs in or near the Earth, ſo as if an Ocean pour’d upon the ſur-
face of the dry Land, ſuppoſing it were all linooth, would riſe to
the height of half a quarter of a mile every where; the like quan-
tity of Water pour'd again at the height of the Mountains, would
not have altogether the ſame effect, or would not there raiſe the
inafs half a quarter of a inile higher ; for the ſurfaces of a Globe,
the
Chap.2. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
9
;
the farther they are from their Center, are the greater ; and ſo ac-
cordingly the Regions that belong to thein. And, laſtly, we muſt
conſider that there are ſome Countries or Valleys very low, and
alco many Caverns or Cavities within the Earth, all which in this
caſe were to b: firſt fillid with Water. Theſe things being coin-
pard and eſtimated, we ſhall find that notwithſtanding the rooin
that Hills and Mountains take up on the dry Land, there would
be at leaſt eight Oceans requir’d, or a quantity of Water eight times
as great as the Ocean, to bring an Univerſal Deluge upon the Earth,
as that Deluge is ordinarily underſtood and explained.
The proportion of Water for the Deluge being thus ſtated, the
next thing to be done, is to enquire where this Water is to be found;
if any part of the Sublunary World will afford us ſo much :
Eight Oceans Aoating in the Air, make a great bulk of Water, I
do not know what poſſible Sources to draw it from. There are
the Clouds above, and the Deeps below and in the bowels of the
Earth ; and theſe are all the ſtores we have for Water; and Moſes
directs us to no other for the Cauſes of the Deluge. The Funtains ( he
ſaith) of the great Abyſſe mere broken up, or burſt afunder, and the
Rain deſcended for forty days, the Cataraxts or Floodgates of Hea-
ven buing open'd. And in theſe two, no doubt, are contain'd the
cauſes of the great Deluge, as according to Mofes, ſo alſo according
to reaſon and neceſſity; for our World affords no other treaſures
of Water. Let us therefore conſider how much this Rain of Forty
Days might amount to, and how much might flow out of the
Abyſſe, that ſo we may judge whether theſe two in conjunction
would make up the Eight Oceans which we want.
As for the Rains, they would not afford us one Ocean, nor half
an Ocean, nor the tenth part of an Ocean, if we may truſt to the
Obſervations made by others concerning the quantity of Water
that falls in Rain. Merſenius gives us this account of it. “It ap- Cog. Phyſ.
pears by our Obſervations, that a Cubical Veſſel of Braſs, whereof Mech. p. 2212
“ we made uſe, is fill'd an inch and an half in half an hours time;
“but becauſe that ſucks up no hing of the moiſture as the Earth
doth, let us take an inch for half an hours Rain; whence it fol-
lows, that in the ſpace of 40 days and nights Rain, the Waters
“ in the Deluge would riſe 160 feet, if the Rains were conſtant Al. 4 feet in
“and equal to ours, and that it rain'd at once throughout the face 24 hours,
« of the whole Earth. But the Rain of the Deluge, faith he,
ſhould have been go times greater than this, to cover, for inſtance,
the Mountains of Armenia, or to reach 15 Cubits above them.
So that according to his computation, the 40 days Rain would
ſupply little more than the hundredth part of the Water requiſite
to make the Deluge. 'Tis true, he makes the heighth of the Moun-
tains higher than we do; but, however, if you temper the Cal-
culation on all ſides as much as you pleaſe, the water that came
by this Rain would be a very inconſiderable part of what was
neceſſary for a Deluge. If it rain'd 40 days and 40 nights through-
out the face of the whole Earth, in the Northern and Southern
Hemiſphere all at once, it might be ſufficient to lay all the lower
grounds under water, but it would ſignifie very little as to
C С
the
(6
IO
Book I.
The Theory of the Earth.
Aud. c.it. in
Gen. 7. t.
may be
the over-flowing of the Mountains. Wience another Anchor up-
on the ſame occaſion hath this paflige. “If the Deluje had been
" made by Rains only, there would not have nezded 40 days,
“ but 40 years Rain to have brought it to pats. And if wellicula
ſuppoſe the whole mielele Region condens'd jnio water, it would
not at all have ben ſufficient for this fact, according to that pro-
portion ſome make betwixt Air and Water ; for they fay, Air
turn'd into Water takes up a hundred times leſs room than it did
before. The truth is, we inay reaſonably ſuppoſe, that all the va-
pours of the middle Region were turn’d into water in this 40 days
and 40 nights Rain, if we admit, that this Rain was throughout
the whol. Earth at once, in either Hemiſphere, in every Zone, in
every Climate, in every Country, in every Provinci, in every
Field; and yet we ſee what a ſinall proportion all this would
amount to.
Haring done then with theſe Superiour Regions, we are next
to examine the Inferiour, and the treaſures of water that
had there. Mifes tells us, that the Fountains of the great Abylle
were broke open, or c'ove onfunder, as the word there us'd doth
imply; and no doubt in this lay the great myſtery of the Deluge,
as will appear when it comes to be rightly underſtood and ex-
plain’d; but we are here to conſider what is generally underſtood
by the great Abyſſe, in the common explication of the Deluge;
and 'tis commonly interpreted either to be the Sea, or Subterra-
neous waters hid in the bowels of the Earth: Theſe, they ſay,
broke forth and rais'd the waters, caus'd by the Rain, to ſuch an
height, that together they overfowed the higheſt Mountains.
But whether or how this could be, deferves to be a little ex-
amin'd.
And in the firſt place; the Sea is not higher than the Land,
as fome lave formerly imagin’d; fanſying the Sea ſtood, as it
Were, upon a heap, higher than the ſhore; and at the Deluge a
relaxation being inade, it overflow'd the Land. But this conceit
is ſo grofi, and ſo much againſt reaſon and experience, thať none
Í think of late have ventur'd to make uſe of it. And yet on the
other hand, if the Sea lie in an equal convexity with the Land, or
lower g-raliy than the ſhore, and much inore than the mid-
fand, as it is certainly known to do, what could the Sea contri-
bute to the Deluge? It would keep its Chanel, as it doth now;
and take up the ſame place. And ſo alſo the Subterraneous wa-
Ters would lie quiet in their Cells? whatſoever fountain's or
paſiages you ſuppoſe, theſe would not iſſue out upon the Earth,
for water doth not afcend, unleſs by force. But lets imagine then
that force us'd and appli’d, and the waters both of the Sea and
Caverns under ground drawn out upon the ſurface of the Earth,
we ſhall not be any whit the nearer for this; for if
theſe waters out of their places, thoſe places muſt be fill'd again
with other waters in the Deluge; ſo as this turns to no account
upon the whole. If you have two Veſſels to fill
, and you empty
one to fill the other, you gain nothing by tliat, there ſtill remains
one Veſſel empty, you cannot have theſe waters both in the Sca
and
you take
Chap.2. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
II
and on the Land, both above ground and under; nor can you
ſuppoſe the Chanel of the Sea would ſtand gaping without water,
when all the Earth was overflow'd, and the tops of the Moun-
tains cover'd. And ſo for Subterraneous Cavities, if you ſuppoſe
the water pumpt out, they would ſuck it in again when the
Earth came to be laid under water; ſo that upon the whole, if you
thus underſtand the Abyſſe or great Deep, and the breaking open
its Fountains in this manner, it doth us no ſervice as to the Deluge,
and where we expected the greateſt ſupply, there we find none
at all.
What ſhall we do then? whither ſhall we go to find more than
ſeven Oceans of water that we ſtill want? We have been above
and below; we have drain'd the whole middle Region, and we
have examin'd the Deeps of the Earth; they muſt want for them-
ſelves, they ſay, if they give us any; And, beſides, if the Earth
Mould diſgorge all the water that it liath in its bowels, it would
not amount to above half an Ocean, which would not at all an-
ſwer our occaſions. Muſt we not then conclude, that the com-
mon explication of the Deluge makes it impoſſible ? there being no
ſuch quantity of water in Nature as they make requiſite for an
univerſal Deluge. Yet to give them all fair play, having examin'd
the waters above the Earth or in the Air, the waters upon the
Earth, and the waters under the Earth ; let us alſo conſider if
there be not waters above the Heavens, and if thoſe might not
be drawn down for the Deluge. Moſes ſpeaks of waters above the
firmament, which though it be generally underſtood of the middle
Region of the Air, yet ſome have thought thoſe to be waters plac'd
above the higheſt Heavens, or Super-celeſtial waters: and have
been willing to make uſe of them for a ſupply, when they could
not find materials enough under the Heavens to make up the great
maſs of the Deluge. But the Heavens above, where theſe waters
lay, are either ſolid, or fluid ; if ſolid, as Glaſs or Cryſtal, how
could the waters get through 'em to deſcend upon the Earth? If
fluid, as the Air or Æther, how could the waters reft upon them?
For Water is heavier than Air or Æther; So that I am afraid thoſe
pure Regions will prove no fit place for that Element, upon any
account. But ſuppoſing theſe waters there, how imaginary ſo-
ever, and that they were brought down to drown the World in
that vaſt quantity iliat would be neceſſary, what became of thein,
when the Deluge ceas'd; Seven or eight Oceans of water, with
the Earth wrapt up in the middle of them, how did it ever get
quit of them? how could they be diſpos'd of when the Earth
was to be dri'd, and the World renew'd? It would be a hard task
to lift them up again among the Spheres, and we have no room for
them here below. The truth is, I mention this opinion of the
Heavenly waters, becauſe I would omit none that had ever been
made uſe of to make good the common explication of the Deluge;
but otherwiſe, I think, ſince the Syſtem of the World hath been
better known, and the Nature of the Heavens, there are none
that would ſeriouſly affert theſe Super-celeſtial waters, or, at leaſt,
make uſe of them ſo extravagantly, as to bring them down hither
for cauſes of the Deluge.
C2
We
I 2
Book ).
The Theory of the Earth.
i we have
We liave now employ'd our laſt and utmoſt endeavours to find
out waters for the vulgar Delug?, or for the Deluge as common-
ly underſtood ; and you ſee with how little ſucceſs
left no corner unfought, where there was any appearance or re-
port of water to be found, and yet we have not been able to col-
lect the eighth part of what was neceffary upon a moderate ac-
count. Nay we not then with aſſurance conclude, that the
World hath taken wrong meaſures hitherto in their notion and
explication of the general Deluge? They make it impoſſible and
unintelligible upon a double account, both in requiring more wa-
ter than can be found, and inore than can be diſpos'd of, if it
was found: or could any way be withdrawn from the Earth
when the Deluge ſhould ceaſe
. For if the Earth was encompaſs’d
with eight Oceans of water heapt one upon another, how theſe
flould retire into any Chanels, or be drain d off, or the Earth
any way diſengag'd from then, is not intelligible ; and that in ſo
ſhort a tiine as ſome months: For the violence of the Deluge
laſted but four or five months, and in as many months after the
Earth was dry and habitable. So as upon the whole enquiry,
we can neither find ſource nor iffuc, beginning nor ending, for
ſuch an exceſſive maſs of Waters as the Vulgar Deluge requir'd;
neither where to have them, nor if we had tliem, how io get
quit of thein. And I think men cannot do a greater injury or in-
juſtice to Sacred Hiſtory, than to give ſuch repreſentations of
things recorded ther:, as make them unintelligible and incredible;
And on the other hand, we cannot deſerve better of Religion and
Providence, than by giving ſuch fair accounts of all things pro-
pos'd by them, or belonging to them, as may filence the Cavils
of Athtiſts, ſatisfie the inquiſitive, and recommend them to the
belief and acceptance of all reaſonable perſons.
CHA P. III.
All Evaſions anſwered; That there was no new Creation of
waters at the Deluge: And that it was not particular or
National, but extended throughout the whole Earth. A
prelude and preparation to the true Account and Expli-
cation of it: The method of the firſt Book.
THI
Hough in the preceding Chapter we may ſeem to have given
a fair trial to the common opinion concerning the ſtate of
the Deluge, and might now proceed to ſentence of condemnation:
yet having heard of another plea, which ſome haie us'd in its
behalf, and another way found out by recourſe to the Supream
Power, to ſupply all defects, and to make the whole matter in-
telligible
Chap.3. The Deluge and Diſolution of the Earth.
13
(
telligible, we will proceed no further till that be conſider'd; be-
ing very willing to examine whatſoever inay be offer’d, in that
or any other way, for reſolving that great difficulty which we
have propos’d, concerning the quantity of water requiſite for ſuch a
Deluge. And to this they ſay in ſhort, that God Almighty created
waters on purpoſe to make the Deluge, and then annihilated them again
when the Deluge was to ceaſe ; And this, in a few words, is the
whole account of the buſineſs. This is to cut the knot when we
cannot looſe it; They ſhew us the naked arm of Omnipotency;
ſuch Arguments as theſe come like lightning, one doth not know
what Armour to put on againſt them, for they pierce the more,
the more they are reſiſted: We will not therefore oppoſe any
thing to them that is hard and ſtubborn, but by a foft anſwer
deaden their force by degrees.
And I deſire to mind thoſe perſons in the firſt place of what
S. Auſtin hath ſaid upon a like occaſion, ſpeaking concerning thoſe
that diſprov'd the opinion of waters above the Heavens ( which
we mention'd before) by natural Reaſons. “We are not, faith
“he, to refute thoſe perſons, by ſaying, that according to the
Omnipotence of God, to whom all things are poſſible, we ought
to believe there are waters there as heavy as we know and feel
" them here below ; for our buſineſs is now to enquire according
“ to his Scripture, how God hath conſtituted the Nature of
things, and not what he could do or work in theſe things,
“by a miracle of Omnipotency. I deſire them to apply this
to the preſent argument for the firſt anſwer.
Secondly, let them conſider, that Mofes hath aſſign'd cauſes of
the Deluge ; Forty days Rain, and the diſruption of the Abyſe; and
ſpeaks nothing of a new creation of water upon that occaſion.
Thoſe were cauſes in Nature which Providence had then diſ-
pos'd for this extraordinary effect, and thoſe the Divine Hiſto-
rian refers us to, and not to any productions out of nothing. Be-
ſides, Mofes makes the Deluge increaſe by degrees with the Rain,
and accordingly makes it ceaſe by degrees, and that the waters
going and returning, as the waves and great commotions of the Sea
uſe to do, retird leiſurely from the face of the Earth, and ſettled
at length in their Chanels. Now this manner of the beginning
or ceaſing of the Deluge doth not at all agree with the inſtanta-
neous actions of Creation and Annihilation.
Thirdly, let them conſider, that S. Peter hath alſo aſſign'd Cauſes 2 Pet. 3. 6,
of the Deluge; namely the particular conſtitution of the Earth
and Heavens before the Flood; by reaſon whereof, he faith, the
ll'orld that was then, periſht in a Deluge of vater. And not by rea-
ſon of a new creation of water. His words are theſe,
“ Heavens and the Earth were of old, conſiſting of water, and by
“water ; whereby, or by reaſon whereof, the World that then
“ was, being overflowed with water, periſhed.
Tourthly, they are to conſider, that as we are not raíhly to have
recourſe to the Divine Omnipotence upon any account, ſo eſpe-
cially not for new Creations, and leaſt of all for the creation of
new matter. The matter of the Univerſ6 was created many Ages
before
« The
14
Book 1.
The Theory of the Earth.
before the Flood, and the Univerſe being full, if any more was
created, then there muſt be as much annihilated at the ſame time
to make room for it; for Bodies cannot penetrate one anothers
dimenſions, nor be two or more within one and the fame ſpace.
Then on the other hand, when the Deluge ceas'd, and theſe waters
were annihilated, ſo much other matter muſt be created again to
take up their places: And methinks they make very bold with the
Deity, when they make him do and undo, go forward and back-
wards by ſuch countermarches and retractions, as we do not wil-
lingly impute to the wiſdom of God Almighty.
Laſtly, I ſhall not think my labour loft, if it be but acknow-
ledg'd, that we have ſo far cleard the way in this controverſie, as
to have brought it to this iſſue; That either there muſt be new
waters created on purpoſe to make a Deluge, or there could be
no Deluge, as 'tis vulgarly explain'd; there not being water ſuffi-
cient in Nature to make a Deluge of that kind. This, I ſay, is a
great ſtep, and, Ithink, will ſatisfie all parties, at leaſt all that
are conſiderable; for thoſe that have recourſe to a New Creation
of waters, are of two forts, either ſuch as do it out of lazineſs
and ignorance, or ſuch as do it out of neceſſity, ſeeing they can-
not be had otherwiſe; as for the firſt, they are not to be valu'd
or gratifi’d; and as for the ſecond, I ſhall do a thing very accep-
table to them, if I free them and the argument from that necellity,
and ſhow a way of making the Deluge fairly intelligible, and
accountable without the creation of new waters; which is the de-
ſign of this Treatiſe. For we do not tye this knot with an Intenti-
on to puzzle and perplex the Argument finally with it, but the
harder it is ty’d, we ſhall feel the pleaſure inore ſenſibly when
come to looſe it.
It may be when they are beaten from this new Creation of wa-
ter, they will ſay the Element of Air was chang'd into water, and
that was the great ſtore-houſe for the Deluge. Forty days Rain
we allow, as Moſes does, but if they ſuppoſe any other tranſcle-
mentation, it neither agrees with Moſes's Philoſophy, nor S.Peter's;
for then the opening of the Abyſſe was needleſs, and the form and
conſtitution of the Antediluvian Heavens and Earth, which S. Pe-
ter refers the Deluge to, bore no part in the work; it might have
been made, in that way, indifferently under any Heavens or
Earth. Beſides they offend againſt S. Auſtin's rule in this method
too; for I look upon it as no leſs a miracle to turn Air into Wa-
ter; than to turn Water into Wine. dir, I ſay, for Vapours in-
deed are but water made volatile, but pure Air is a body of an-
other Species, and cannot by any compreſſion or condenſation,
ſo far as is yet known, be chang d into water. And laſtly, ifthe
whole Atmoſphere was turn'd into water, 'tis very probable it
would make no more than 34 foot or thereabouts; for ſo much
Air or Vapours as is of the ſame weight with any certain quanti.
ty of water, 'tis likely, if it was chang'd into water, would alſo
be of the ſame bulk with it, or not much more: Now according
to the doctrine of the Gravitation of the Atinoſphere, 'tis found
that 34 foot of water does counterbalance a proportionable Cylin
der
Chap.3. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
15
1
der of Air reaching to the top of the Atmoſphere; and conſe.
quently, if the whole Atmoſphere was converted into water, it
would make no more than eleven or twelve yards water about the
Earth ; which the cavities of the Earth would be able in a good
meaſure to fuck up, at leaſt this is very inconſiderable as to our
eight Oceans. And if you would change the higher Regions into
water too, what muſt fupply the place of that Air which
you
transform into water, and bring down upon the Earth? There
wou'd be little left but Fire and Æther betwixt us and the Moon,
and I am afraid it would endanger to fuck down the Moon too
after it. In a word, ſuch an explica ion as this, is both, purely
imaginary, and alſo very operoſe, and would affect a great part of
the Univerſe; and after all, they would be as hard put to’t to get
rid of this water, when the Deluge was to ceaſe, as they were at
firſt to procure it.
Having now examin'd and anſwered all the pleas, from firſt to
laſt, for the vulgar Deluge, or the old way of explaining it, we
ſhould proceed immediately to propoſe another mathod, and an-
other ground for an univerſal Deluge, were it not that an opinion
hath been ſtarted by ſome of late, that would in effect ſupplant
both theſe inethods, old and new, and take away in a great mea-
ſure the ſubject of the queſtion. Some modern Authors obſer-
ving what ſtraits they have been put to in all Ages, to find
out water enough for Noah's Flood, have ventur'd upon an ex-
pedient more brisk and bold, than any of the Ancients durſt
venture upon: They ſay, Niah's Flood was not Univerſal, but a
National Inundation, confin’d to Juded, and thoſe Countries
thereabouts; and conſequently, there would not be ſo inuch
water neceſſary for the cauſe of it, as we have prov'd to be ne-
ceſſary for an Univerſal Deluge of that kind. Their inference is
very true, they have avoided that rock, but they run upon ano-
ther no leſs dangerous; to avoid an objection from reaſon they
deny matter of fact, and ſuch matter of fact as is well atteſted by
Hiſtory, both Sacred and prophane. I believe the Authors that
ſet up this opinion, were not themſelves ſatisfied with it: but ſee-
ing inſuperable difficulties in the old way, they are the more ex-
cuſable in chuſing, as they thought, of two evils the leſs.
But the choice methinks, is as bad on this land, if all things
be conſidered ; Moſes repreſents the Flood of Noah as an overthrow
and deſtruction of the whole Earth; and who can imagine, that in
fixteen or ſeventeen hundred years time ( taking the lower Chro-
nology ) that the Earth had then ſtood, mankind ſhould be
pro-
pagated no further than Judæi, or forne neighbouring Coun-
tries tliereabouts. After the Flood, when the World was re-
new'd again by eight perſons, they had made a far greater progreſs
in A1.1
, Europe and Africa, within the fame ſpace of years, and
yet ’tis likely they were more fruitful in the firſt Ages of the
World, than after the Flood; and they liv'd lix, ſeven, eight, nina
hundred years a piece, getting Sons and Daughters. Which'lon-
gevity of the firſt Inhabitants of the Earth ſeeins to have been pro-
videntially deſign’d' for the quicker multiplication and propagation
of
16
Book I.
The Theory of the Earth.
of mankind; and mankind thereby would become ſo numerous
within fixteen hundred years, that there ſecins to me to be a greater
difficulty from the multitude of the people that would be b.fore
the Flood, than from the want of prople. For if we a low th:
firſt couple at the end of one hundred ycars, or of the firſt Cen-
tury, to have left ten pair of Breeders, which is no liard ſuppoli-
tion, there would ariſe from theſe, in fifteen hundred years, a
greater number than the Earth was capable of; allowing every pair
to multiply in the ſame decuple proportion the first sair did. But
becauſe this would riſe far beyond the capacities of this Earth,
let us ſuppoſe them to increaſe, in the following Centuries, in a
quintuple proportion only, or, if you will, only in a quadruple;
and then the Table of the multiplication of mankind from the
Creation to the Flood, would ſtand thus ;
Century 21
-Io
-655360
Gm
IO-
2
2621442
II
در ط
I 2
4-
59
6
70
-160
640
-2560
10240
40960
163840
13-
10485760
41943040
167772160
-671088642
2684354560
107374182,0
14-
7
15
16m
This product is too exceſſive high, if compar'd with the preſent
number of men upon the face of the Earth, which I think is com-
inonly eſtimated to be betwixt three and four hundred millions ;
and yet this proportion of their increaſe ſeems to be low enough,
if we take one proportion for all the Centuries; for, in reality,
the ſame meaſure cannot run equally through all the Ages, but
we have taken this as moderate and reaſonable betwixt the high-
eit and the loweſt ; but if we had taken only a triple propor-
tion, it would have been ſufficient (all things conſider'd) for
purpoſe. There are ſeveral other ways of computing this num-
ber, and ſome more particular and exact than this is, but which
way foever you try, you ſhall find the product great enough for
the extent of this Earth; and if you follow the Septuagint Chrono-
ligy it will ſtill he far higher. I have met with three or four
different Calculations, in ſeveral Authors, of the number of man-
kind before the Flood, and never met with any yet, but what ex-
ceeded the number of the people that are at preſent upon the face
of the Earth. So as it ſeems to me a very groundleſs and forc'd
conceit to imagine, that Judæa only, and ſome parts about it in
Aſia, were ſtord with people when the Deluge was brought upon
the old World. Beſides if the Deluge was confin'd to thoſe Coun-
tries, I do not ſee but the Borderers might have eſcap'd, shifting a
little into the adjoyning places where the Deluge did not reach.
But eſpecially what needed ſo much a-do to build an Ark to ſave
Noah and his family, if he might have ſav'd himſelf, and thein,
only by retiring into ſome neighbouring Countrey; as Lot and his
fainily ſav'd themſelves, by withdrawing from Sodom when the
City
Chap.3. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
17
City was to be deltroyed ? Had not this been a far eaſier thing,
and more compendious, than the great Preparations he made of a
Jarge Veſſel, with Rooms for the Reception and Accommodation of
Bealts and Birds ? And now I mention Birds, wliy could not they
at leaſt have down into the next dry Country? they might have
pearch d upon the Trees, and the tops of the Mountains by the
way to have reſted themſelves if they were weary, for the Waters
did not all of a ſudden riſe to the Mountains tops.
I cannot but look upon the Deluge as a much more conſiderable
thing than theſe Authors would repreſent it, and as a kind of
diſſolution of Nature. Mofes calls it a deſtroying of the Earth, as
well as of Mankind, Gen. 6. 13. And the Bow was ſet in the
Cloud to ſeal the Covenant, that he would deſtroy the Earth 110 more,
Gen. 9. 11. or that there ſhould be no more a Flood to deſtroy the
Earth. And 'tis faid, verſe 13. that the Covenant was made be-
tween God and the Earth, or this frame of Nature, that it ſhould
perilh no more by Water. And the Rainbow, which was a To-
ken and pledge of this Covenant, appears not only in Judæa, or
fome other Aſiatick Provinces, but to all the Regions of the Earth,
who had an equal ſhare and concern in it. Mofes faith alſo the
Fountains of the grear Abyſs were burſt aſunder to make the De-
luge, and what means this Abyſs and the burſting of it, if reſtrain’d
to Judæa, or ſome adjacent Countries? What appearance is there
of this Diſruption there, more than in other Places ? Further-
more, S. Peter plainly implies, that the Antediluvian Heavens and 2 Epift.c.50 6
Earth periſh'd in the Deluge ; and oppoſeth the preſent Earth
and Heavens to them, as different and of another conſtitution:
and faith, that theſe ſhall periſh by Fire, as the other periſh'd by
Water. So he compares the Confagration with the Deluge, as
two general diſſolutions of Nature, and one may as well ſay, that
the Conflagration ſhall be only National, and but two or three
Countries burnt in that laſt Fire, as to ſay that the Deluge was fo.
I confeſs that diſcourſe of S. Peter, concerning the ſeveral States of
the World, would ſufficiently convince me, if there was nothing
elſe, Thiat the Deluge was not a particular or National Inunda-
tion, but a mundane change, that extended to the whole Earth, and
both to the ( lower ) Heavens and Earth.
All Antiquity, we know, hath ſpoke of theſe Mundane Revolu-
tions or Periods, that the World ſhould be ſucceſſively deſtroy'd by
Water and Fire; and I do not doubt but that this Deluge of Noah's,
which Moſes deſcribes, was the firſt and leading inſtance of this
kind : and accordingly we ſee that after this Period, and after the
Flood, the bleſſing for multiplication, and for repleniſhing the
Earth with Inhabitants, was as folemnly pronounc'd by God Al-
mighty, as at the firſt Creation of Man, Gen. 9. 1. with Gen. 1. 28.
Theſe conſiderations, I think, might be ſufficient to give us aſſu-
rance from Divine Writ of the univerſality of the Deluge, and yet
Mojes affords us another argument as demonſtrative as any, when
in the Hiſtory of the Deluge, he faith, Gen.7.19. The waters ex-
ceedingly prevailed upon the Earth, and all the high Hills that were 112-
der the whole Heavens were covered. All the high Hills, he faith,
D
under
IS
The Theory of the Earth. Book I.
under the urhole Heavcus, then quite round the Earih; and if the
Mountains were cover d quite round the Earth, lire the Plains
could not ſcape. But to argue with thein upon their own grounds;
Let us ſuppoſe only the Alitick and irmu'n?!! Mountains covered
with theſe waters, this they cannor deny; then unlus there was a
miracle to keep theſe waters upon leaps, they would tow i hrough-
out the Earth; for theſe Mountains are high enough to make thein
fall every way, and make them joyn with our Seas that environ
the Continent. We cannot imagine Hills and Moumains of water
to have hung about Judæa, as if they were congeald, or a maſs eſ
water to have ſtood upon the middle of the Earth like one great
drop, or a trembling jelly, and all the places about it dry and un-
touch'd. All liquid bodies are diffuſive; for their parts being in
motion have no tye or connexion one with another, bui glide and
fall off any way, as gravity and the Air preveth them; 1o the fur-
face of water doth always conform into a Spherical coneity with
the reſt of the Globe of the Earth, aud every part of it falls as
near to the Center as it can; wherefore when theſe waters can
to riſe at fiiit, long before they could ſwell to the heighth of the
Mountains, they would diffuſe themſelves every way, and there-
upon all the Valleys and Plains, and lower parts of thé Earth would
be filled tliroughout the whole Earth, before they could riſe to the
tops of the Mountains in any part of it: And the Sea wouid be all
raiſed to a confiderable heighth before the Mountains could be co-
vered. For let's ſuppoſe, as they do, that this water fell not
tlıroughout the whole Earth, but in fome particular Country, and
there made firſt a great Lake; this Lake when it begun to ſwell
would every way diſcharge it ſelf by any deſcents or declivities of
the ground, and theſe iſſues and derivations being once made, and
ſupplied with new waters puſhing thein forwards, would continue
their courſe till they arriv'd at the Sea ; juſt as other Rivers do, for
theſe would be but ſo many Rivers riſing out of this Lake, and
would not be conſiderably deeper and higher at the Fountain than
in their progreſs or at the Sca. We may as well then expect that
the Lemin-Lake, for inſtance, out of which the Rune runs, ſhould
ſwell to the tops of the Alpes on the one hand, aud the Mountains
of Srritzerland and Burgundy on the other, and then ſtop, without
overflowing the plainer Countries that lie beyond them; as to ſup-
poſe that this Diluvian Lake ſhould riſe to the Mountains tops in
one place, and not diffuſe it ſelf equally into all Countries about,
and
upon
the ſurface of the Sta: in proportion to its heighth and
depth in the place where it firſt fell or ſtood.
Thús inuch for Sacred Hiſtory. The univerſality of the Deluge
is aļfo atteſted by profane Hiſtory; for the fame of it is gone
through the Earth, and there are Records of Traditions concerning
it, in all parts of this and the hew-found World. The Americans do
cknowledge and ſpeak of it in their Continent, as Acoſta witneſſeth,
and Laet in their Hiſtories of them. The Chineſes have the Tradi-
tion of it, which is the fartheſt part of our Continent; and the
nearer and Weſtern parts of Aſia is acknowledg’d the proper ſeat of
it. Not to mehtion Deucalivia's Deluge in the European parts, which
ſeems
Miut.
Mart,
Chap. 3. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
19
ſeems to be the faine under a diſguiſe : So as you may trace the
Deluge quite round the Globe in profane Hiſtory; and which is re.
markable, every one of theſe people have a tale to tell, ſome one
way, ſome another, concerning the reſtauration of mankind; which
is an argument that they thought all mankind deſtroy'd by that
Deluge. In the old diſpute between the Scythians and the Agypti-
ans for Antiquity, which Juſtin mentions, they refer to a former
deſtruction of the World by Water or Fire, and argue whether
Nation firſt riſe again, and was original to the other. So the Ba-
bylonians, Aſſyrians, Phænicians and others, mention the Deluge in
their ſtories. And we cannot without offering violence to all Re-
cords and Authority, Divine and Humane, deny that there hath
been an univerſal Deluge upon the Earth; and if there was an uni-
verſal Deluge, no queſtion it was that of Noal's, and that whichi
Mofes deſcrib'd, and that which we treat of at preſent.
Theſe conſiderations, I think, are abundantly ſufficient to ſilence
that opinion, concerning the limitation and reſtriction of the De
luge to a particular Country or Countries. It ought rather to be
lookt upon as an Evaſion indeed than Opinion, ſeeing the Authors
do not offer any poſitive argument for the proof of it, but depend
only upon that negative argument, That an univerſal Deluge is a
thing unintelligible. This stumbling-ſtone we hope to take away
for the future, and that men ſhall not be put to that unhappy
choice, either to deny matter of fact well atteſted, or admit an
effect, whereof they cannot ſee any poſſible cauſes. And ſo having
ſtated and propos'd the whole difficulty, and try'd all ways offer'd
by others, and found them ineffectual, let us now apply our ſelves
by degrees to unty the knot.
The exceſſive quantity of water is the great difficulty, and the re-
moval of it afterwards. Thoſe eight Oceans lay heavy upon my
thoughts, and I caſt about every way to find an expedient, or to
find ſome way whereby the ſame effect might be brought to paſs
with leſs Water, and in ſuch a manner, that that Water might
afterwards conveniently be diſcharg'd. The firſt thought that
came into my mind upon that occaſion, was concerning the form
of the Earth, which I imagin’d might poſſibly at that time be dif-
ferent from what it is at preſent, and come nearer to plainneſs
and equality in the ſurface of it, and ſo might the more eaſily be
overflow'd, and the Deluge perform’d with leſs water. This opi-
nion concerning the plainneſs of the firſt Earth, I alſo found in
Antiquity, mention'd and refer'd to by ſeveral Interpreters in their
Commentaries upon Geneſis, either upon occaſion of the Deluge,
or of that Fountain which is faid, Gen. 2. 6. to have watered the
face of the whole Earth: And a late eminent perſon, the honour of
his profeſſion for Integrity and Learning, in his diſcourſe concern-
ing the Origination of mankind, hath made a like judginent of the
State of the
Earth before the Deluge, that the face of it was more
ſmooth and regular than it is now. But yet upon ſecond thoughts,
I eaſily ſee that this alone would not be ſufficient to explain the
Deluge, nor to give an account of the preſent form of the Earth,
unequal and Mountainous as it is. 'Tis true this would give a
D 2
great
i
20
Book I.
The Theory of the Earth.
great advantage to the waters, and the Rains that fell for forty
days together would have a gruat power over the Earth, being plain
apd ſmooth; but low would theſe waters be diſpus d of when
the Deluge ceas d? or how could it ever ceaſe? Belides, what
means the diſruption of the great Deep, or the great Abyffc, or wliat
anſwers to it upon this ſuppolition ? This was aiſuredly of no leſs
conſideration than the Rains, nay, I believe, the Rains were but
preparatory in ſome meaſure, and that the violence and conſum-
ination of the Deluge depended upon the diſruption of the great A-
bylle. Therefore I ſaw it neceflary, to my firſt thought, concern-
ing the ſmoothneſs and plainneſs of the Ante-diluvian Earth, to
add a ſecond, concerning the diſruption and diſſolution of it; for
as it often happens in Earthquakes, when the exteriour Earth is
burſt alunder, and a great Flood of waters iſſues out, according to
the quantity: and force of them, an Inundation is made in thoſe
parts, more or leſs ; ſo I thought, if that Abyſſe lay under ground
and round the Earth, and we ſhould ſuppoſe the Earth in this
manner to be broken in ſeveral places at once, and as it were a
general diffolution made, we might ſuppoſe that to make a gene-
ral Deluge, as well as a particular diſſolution often makes a parti-
cular. But I will not anticipate here the explication we intend
to give of the univerſal Deluge in the following Chapters, only by
this previous intimation we may gather ſome hopes, it may be, that
the matter is not ſo deſperate as the formncr repreſentation might
poſſibly make us fanlie it.
Give me leave to add farther in this place, that it hath been ob-
ſerv'd by ſeveral, from the contemplation of Mountains and Rocks
and Precipices, of the Chanel of the Sca, and of Iſlands, and of
Subterraneous Caverns, that the ſurface of the Earth, or the exte-
rigur Region which we inhabit, hath been. broke, and the parts of
it diſlocated: And one might inſtance more particularly in ſeveral
parcels of Nature, that retain ſtill the evident marks of fraction
and ruine; and by their preſent form and pollure ſhow, that they
have been once in another ſtate and lituation one to another. We
fhall have occaſion hereafter to give an account of theſe Phenomena,
froin which ſeveral have rightly argu'd and concluded ſome gene-
ral rupture or ruine in the ſuperficial parts of the Earth. But this
ruine, it is true, they have imagin’d and explain'd ſeveral ways,
ſome thinking that it was inade the third day after the foundation
of the Earth, when they ſuppoſe the Chanel of the Sea to have
been form'd, and Mountains and Caverns at the ſame time; by a
violent depreſſion of ſome parts of the Earth, and an extruſion and
elevation of others to make them room. Others ſuppoſe it to have
come not all at once, but by degrees, at ſeveral times, and in fe-
Veral Ages, from particular and accidental cauſes, as the Earth
falling in upon Fires under ground, or water eating away the
lower parts, or Vapours and Exhalations breaking out, and tcar-
ing the Earth. 'Tis true, I am not of their opinion in cither of
theſe Explications; and we ſhall ſhow at large hereafter, when we
have propos'd and ſtated our own Theory, how incompetent ſuch
cauſes are to bring thc Earth into that form and condition we
now
Chap.3. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
21
-
now find it in. But in the mean time, we may ſo far inake uſe
of theſe Opinions in general, as not to be ſtartled at this Doctrine,
concerning the breaking or diſſolution of the exceriour Earth; for
in all Ages the face of Nature hath provok d men to think of and
obſerve ſuch a thing. And who can do otherwiſe, to ſee the Ele-
ments diſplac'd and diſorderd, as they ſeem to lie at preſent; the
heavieſt and grofleſt bodies in the higheit places, and the liquid and
volatile kept below; an huge inafs of Stone or Rock reard into
the Air, and the water creeping at its feet; whereas this is the more
light and active body, and by the law of Nature ihould taķe place
of Rocks and Stones ? So we fee, by the like diſorder, the Air
thrown down into Dungeons of the Earth, and the Earth got up
among the Clouds ; for theſe are the tops of the Mountains, and
under their roots in Holes and Caverns the Air is often detain'd.
By what regular action of Nature can we ſuppoſe things firſt pro-
duc'd in this poſture and forin ? not to mention how broke and
torn the inward ſubſtance of the Earth is, which of it ſelf is an uni-
form maſs, cloſe and compact: but in the condition we ſee it, it
lies hollow in many places, with great vacuities intercepted betwixt
the portions of it; a thing which we ſee happens in all ruines more
or leſs, eſpecially when the parts of the ruines are great and in-
flexible. Then what can have more the figure and meen of a ruine,
than Crags and Rocks and Cliffs, whether upon the Sea ſhore, or
upon the ſides of Mountains; what can be more apparently broke,
than they are; and thoſe leſſer Rocks, or great bulky Stones that
lie often ſcatter'd near the feet of the other, whether in the Sea, or
upon the Land, are they not manifeſt fragments, and pieces of
thoſe greater maſſes? Beſides, the poſture of theſe Rocks, which
is often leaning or recumbent, or proſtrate, ſhows to the eve, that
they have had a fall, or ſome kind of diſlocation from their Natu-
ral ſite. And the ſame thing may be obſerved in the Tracts and
Regions of the Earth, which very ſeldom for ten miles together
have any regular ſurface or continuity one with another, but lie
high and low, and are variouſly inclin'd ſometimes one way, fome-
times another, without any rule or order. Whereas I ſee no rea-
ſon but the ſurface of the Land ſhould be as regular as that of the
water, in the firſt production of it: And the Strata or beds with-
in lie as even. This I am ſure of, that this diſpolition of the Ele-
ments, and the parts of the Earth, outward and inward, hath
ſomething irregular and unnatural in it, and manifeſtly ſhews us
the marks or footſteps of ſome kind of ruine and diſſolution ; which
we ſhall ſhew you, in its due place, happen'd in ſuch a way, that
at the ſame time a general Flood of waters would neceſſarily over-
run the face of the whole Earth. And by the fame fatal blow,
the Earth fell out of that regular form, wherein it was produc'd
at firſt, into all theſe irregularities which we ſee in its preſent form
and compoſition ; ſo that we ſhall give thereby a double fatisfacti-
on to the mind, both to ſhew it a fair and intelligible account of
the general Deluge, how the waters came upon the Earth, and
how they return'd into their Chanels again, and left the Earth
habitable; and likewiſe to ſhew it how the Mountains were brought
forth,
22
Book I.
The Theory of the Earth.
forth, and the Chanel of the Sea diſcover'd : How all thoſe ine-
qualities caine in the lody or face of the Earth, and thoſe empty
Vaults and Caverns in its bowels; which things are no leſs matter
of admiration than the Flood it ſelf.
But I muſt beg leave to draw a Curtain before the Work for a
while, and to keep your patience a little in ſuſpence, till materials
are prepar'd, and all things ready to repreſent and explain what we
have propos’d. Yet I hope in the incan time to enteriain the mind
with ſcenes no leſs pleaſing, though of quite another face and or-
der: for we muſt now return to the beginning of the World, and
look
upon
the firſt rudiments of Nature, and that dark but fruit-
ful womb, out of which all things ſprang, I mean the Chaos: For
this is the matter which we mult next work upon, and it will be
no unpleaſing thing to obſerve, how that rude maſs will ſhoot it
ſelf into ſeveral forms, one after another, till it comes at length
to make an habitable World. The fteddy hand of Providence,
which keeps all things in weight and ineaſure, being the inviſible
guide of all its motions. Theſe motions we muſt examine from
firſt to laſt, to find out what was the form of the Earth, and what
was the place or ſituation of the Ocean, or the great Abyſs, in
that firſt ſtate of Nature: Which two things being determin'd,
we ſhall be able to make a certain judgment, what kind of diſlo-
lution that Earth was capable of, and whether from that diſſolu-
tion an Univerſal Deluge would follow, with all the conſequen-
ces of it.
In the inean time, for the eaſe and ſatisfaction of the Reader,
we will here mark the order and diſtribution of the firſt Book,
which we divide into Three Sections; whereof the firſt is theſe
Three Chapters paſt: in the Second Section we will ſhew, that the
Earth before the Deluge was of a different frame and form from
the preſent Earth; and particularly of ſuch a form as made it ſub-
ject to a diſſolution: And to ſuch a diſſolution, as did neceſarily
expoſe it to an Univerſal Deluge. And in this place we ſhall
apply our diſcourſe particularly to the cxplication of Noah's Flood,
and that under all its conditions, of the height of the waters, of
their univerſality, of the deſtruction of the World by them, and
of their retiring afterwards from the Earth; and this Section
will conliſt of the fourth, Fifth, Sixth, Seventh and Eighth Chap-
ters. In the Third Section we prove the ſame diſſolution from the
effects and conſequences of it, or from the contemplation of the
preſent face of the Earth: And here an account is given of the
Origin of Mountains, of ſubterraneous Waters and Caverns, of
the great Chanel of the Sea, and of the firſt production of Illands;
and thoſe things are the Contents of the Ninth, Tenth and Ele-
venth Chapters. Then, in the laſt Chapter, we make a general
review of the whole Work, and a general review of Nature;
that, by comparing them together, their full agreement and cor-
reſpondency may appear. Here ſeveral collateral arguments aru
given for confirmation of the preceeding Theory, and ſome refccti-
ons are made upon the ſtate of the other Planets compar'd with
the Earth, And laſtly, what accounts foever have been given by
other's
Chap.4. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
23
others of the preſent forin and irregularities of the Earth, are ex-
amind and Thew'd inſufficient. And this ſeemeth to be all that
is requiſite upon this ſubject.
CHAP. IV.
That the Earth and Mankind had an Original, and were
not from Eternity: Prov'd againſt Ariſtotle. The firſt
propoſition of our Theory laid down,viz. That the Ante-
diluvian Earth was of a different form and conſtru&tion
from the preſent. This is prov'd by Divine Authority,
and from the nature and form of the Chaos, out of which
the Earth was made.
W
E are now to enquire into the Original of the Earth, and
in what form it was built at firſt, that we may lay our
foundation for the following Theory, deep and ſure. It hath been
the general opinion and conſent of the Learned of all Nations, that
the Earth aroſe from a Chaos. This is atteſted by Hiſtory, both
Sacred and Profane; only Ariſtotle, whom ſo great a part of the
Chriſtian World have made their Oracle or Idol, hath maintain'd
the Eternity of the Earth, and the Eternity of Mankind; that
the Earth and the World were from Everlaſting, and in that very
form they are in now, with Men and Women and all living Crea-
tures, Trees and Fruit, Metals and Minerals, and whatſoever is of
Natural production. We ſay all theſe things aroſe and had their
firſt exiſtence or production not fix thouſand years ago; He ſaith,
they have ſubſiſted thus for ever, through an infinite Series of paſt
Generations, and ſhall continue as long, without firſt or laſt: And
if ſo, there was neither Chaos, nor any other beginning to the
Earth. This takes away the ſubject of our diſcourſe, and there-
fore we muſt firſt remove this ſtone out of the way, and prove that
the Earth had an Original, and that from a Chaos, before we
ſhew how it aroſe from a Chaos, and what was the firſt habitable
form that it fetled into.
We are affur'd by Divine Authority, that the Earth and Man-
kind had a beginning; Mofes faith, In the beginning God made the
Heavens and the Earth. Speaking it as of a certain Period or Terin
from whence he counts the Age of the World. And the ſame Moſes
tells us, that Adam was the firſt Man, and Eve the firſt Woman, from
whom ſprung the race of Mankind; and this within the compaſs
of ſix thouſand years. We are alſo aſſured from the Prophets, and
our Chriſtian Records, that the world ſhall have an end, and that
by a general. Confagration, when all Mankind ſhall be deſtroy'd,
with the forın and all the furniture of the Earth. And as this
proves
>
24
Book!
The Theory of the Earth.
proves the ſecond part of Ariſtotle's Doctrine to be faiſe imine-
diately, fu deth it the firſt, by a true conſequence; fur what hath
an end had a beginning, what is not immortal, was not Eternal;
That which exiſts by the ſtrength of its own Nature at firſt, the
fame Nature will enable to exiſt for cver; and indeed what exifts
of it ſelf, exiſts necesarily; and what exiſts neceſſarily, cxiſts eter-
nally.
Having this infallible aſſurance of the Origin of the Earth and
of Mankind, from Scripture, we proceed to refute the fame Do-
ctrine of Ariſtotle's by Natural Reaſon. And we will firſt conſider the
form of the Earth, and then Mankind; and ſhew from plain evi-
dence and obſervation, neither of them to have been Eternal. 'Tis
natural to the mind of Man to conſider that which is compound,
as having been once more ſimple; whether that compoſition be a
mixture of many ingredients, as moſt Terreſtrial Bodies are, or
whether it be Organical; but eſpecially if it be Organical : For a
thing that conſiſts of a multitude of pieces aptly joyn'd, we cannot
but conceive to have had thoſe pieces, at one time or another, put
together. 'Twere hard to conceive an eternal Watch, whoſe pieces
were never ſeparate one from another, nor ever in any other form
than that of a Watch. Or an eternal Houſe, whoſe inaterials
were never aſunder, but always in the form of an Houſe. And
'tis as hard to conceive an Eternal Earth, or an Eternal Ilorld:
Theſe are made up of more various ſubſtances, more ingredients,
and into a far greater compoſition; and the living part of the World,
Plants and Animals, have much more variety of parts and multi-
farious conſtruction, than any Houſe, or any other artificial thing :
So that we are led as much by Nature and neceſſity to conceive this
great
Machine of the World, or of the Earth, to have been once
in a ſtate of greater fimplicity than now it is, as to conceive a Watch,
an Houſe, or any other ſtructure, to have been once in its firſt and
ſimple materials. This I ſpeak without reference to immediate
Creation, for Ariſtotle did not own any ſuch thing, and therefore
the argument ſtands good againſt hirn, upon thoſe grounds and
notions that he goes, yet I gueſs what anſwer would be made by
him or his followers to this argumentation ; They would ſay there
is not the ſame reaſon for Natural things, as for Artificial, though
equally compounded. Artificial things could not be from Eterni-
ty, becauſe they ſuppoſe Man, by whoſe Art they were made,
pre-exiſtent to them; the work-man muſt be before the work, and
whatſoever hath any thing before it, is not Eternal. But may not
the ſame thing be ſaid of Natural things ? do not moſt of them
require the action of the Sun, and the infuence of the Heavens
for their production, and longer preparations than any Artificial
things do? Some Years or Ages would be neceſſary for the con-
coction and maturation of Metals and Minerals; Stones thern-
ſelves, at leaſt ſome ſorts of them, were once liquors or fluid maſſes;
and all Vegetable productions require the heat of the Sun, to pre-
diſpoſe and excite the Earth, and the Seeds. Nay, according to
Ariſtotle, 'tis not Man by himſelf that begets a Man, but the Sun is
his Coadjutor. You ſee then 'twas as neceſſary that the Sun, that
great
Chap.4. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
25
1
great Workman of Nature, ſhould pre-exiſt to Natural things, pro-
ducd in or upon the Earth, as tiiat Man Mould pre-exiſt to Arti-
ficial. So that the Earth under that form and conſtitution it now
hath, could no more be Eternal, than a Statue or Temple, or any
work of Ari.
Beſides, that form, which the Earth is under at preſent, is in ſome
fort preter-natural, like a Statue inade and broken again; and ſo
hath ſtill the leſs appearance or pretence of being Eternal. If the
Elements had lain in that order to one another, as Ariſtotle liath
diſpos d them, and as ſeems to be their firſt diſpoſition; the Earth
altogether in a maſs in the middle, or towards the Centre; then
the Water in a Spherical maſs about that; the Air above the Wa-
ter, and then a Sphere of Fire, as he fanlied, in the higheit Circle
of the Air : If they had lain, I ſay, in this poſture, there might
have been ſome pretence that they had been Eternally fo; becauſe
that might ſeem to be their Original poſture, in which Nature had
firlt plac'd them. But the form and poſture we find them in at pre-
ſent is very different, and according to his Doctrine muſt be look'd
upon as unnatural and violent; and no violent ſtate by his own
Maxim, can be perpetual, or can have been fo.
But there is ſtill a more preſſing conſideration againſt this Opini-
on. If this preſent ſtate and form of the Earth had been from
Eternity, it would have long ere this deſtroy'd it ſelf, and chang'd
it ſelf : the Mountains ſinking by degrees into the Vallies, and into
the Sea, and the Waters riſing above the Earth ; which form it
would certainly have come into fooner or later, and in it continu'd
drown'd and uninhabitable, for all ſucceeding Generations. For
'tis certain, that the Mountains and higher parts of the Earth grow
leffer and leffer from Age to Age ; and that from many cauſes,
foinetimes the roots of them are weakend and eaten by Subterra-
neous Fires, and ſometimes they are torn and tumbled down by
Earthquakes, and fall into thoſe Caverns that are under them;
and though thoſe violent cauſes are not conſtant, or univerſal, yet
if the Eartlı had ſtood from Eternity, there is not a Mountain would
have eſcap'd this fate in one Age or other. The courſe of theſe
exhalations or Fires would have reach'd them all ſooner or later,
if through infinite Ages they had ſtood expos'd to them. But there
are alſo other cauſes that conſume them inſenſibly, and make them
ſink by degrees; and thoſe are chiefly the Winds, Rains, and Storms,
and heat of the Sun without; and within, the ſoaking of Water
and Springs, with ſtreams and currents in their veins and crannies.
Theſe two ſorts of cauſes would certainly reduce all the Moun-
tains of the Earth, in tract of time, to equality; or rather lay
them all under Water: For whatſoever moulders or is waſht away
from them, is carried down into the lower grounds, and into the
Sea, and nothing is ever brought back again by any circulation:
Their loſſes are not repair’d, nor any proportionable recruits made
from any other parts of Nature. So as the higher parts of the
Earth being continually ſpending, and the lower continually gain-
ins, they muſt of neceſſity at length come to an equality; and the
Waters that lie in the lower parts and in the Chanels, thoſe Cha-
E
nels
26
Book 1.
The Theory of the Earth.
nels and Valleys being fill’d up with Earth, would be thruſt out
and riſe every where upon the ſurface of the Earth; Which new
poſt when they had once ſeiz'd on, they would never quit it, nor
would any thing be able to diſpoſſeſs them ; for 'tis their natural
place and ſituation which they always tend to, and from which
there is no progreſs nor regreſs in a courſe of Nature. So that the
Earth would have been, both now, and from innumerable Gene-
rations before this, all under water and uninhabitable; if it had
ſtood from everlaſting, and this forin of it had been its firſt origi-
nal form.
Nor can he doubt of this argumentation, that conſiders the co-
herence of it, and will allow time enough for the effect. I do not
ſay the Earth would be reduc'd to this uninhabitable form in ten
thouſand years time, though I believe it would : but take twenty,
if you pleaſe, take an hundred thouſand, take a million, 'tis all
one, for you may take the one as eaſily as the other out of Eter-
nity; and they make both equally againſt their ſuppoſition. Nor
is it any matter how little you ſuppoſe the Mountains to decreaſe,
'tis but taking more time, and the ſame effect ſtill follow's. Let
them but waſte as much as a grain of Muſtard ſeed every day, or
a foot in an Age, this would be more than enough in ten thou-
fand Ages to conſume the talleſt Mountain upon Earth. The Air
alone, and the little drops of Rain have defac'd the ſtrongeſt and
the proudeſt monuments of the Greeks and Romans; and allow
them but time enough, and they will of themſelves beat down the
Rocks into the Sea, and the Hills into the Valleys. But if we add to
theſe all thoſe other foremention'd cauſes that work with more
violence, and the weight of the Mountains themſelves, which upon
any occaſion offer'd, is ready to ſink them lower, we ſhall ſhorten
the time, and make the effect more fure.
We need add no more here in particular, Againſt this Ariſtote-
lian Doctrine, that makes the preſent form of the Earth to have
been from Eternity ; for the truth is, this whole Book is one con-
tinued argument againſt that Opinion ; Chewing that it hath de faéto
chang’d its form; both in that we have prov'd that it was not
capable of an univerſal Deluge in this form, and conſequently was
once under another; and alſo in that we ſhall prove at large here-
after throughout the Third and fourth Sections, that it bath been
broken and diſſolv'd. We might alſo add one conſideration more,
that if it had ſtood always under this form, it would have been un-
der Fire, if it had not been under Water; and the Conflagration,
which it is to undergo, would have overtaken it long ere this.
For S. Peter faith, the Heavens and the Earth that are now, as op-
pos’d to the Ante-diluvian, and conſidered in their preſent form
and conſtitution, are fitted to be conſum'd by fire. And whoſo-
ever underſtands the progreſs and revolutions of Nature, will fee
that neither the preſent forin of the Earth, nor its firſt forin, were
permanent and immutable forms, but tranſient and temporary by
their own frame and conſtitution; which the Author of Nature,
after certain periods of time, had deſign'd for change and for de-
ſtruction:
Thus
Chap.4. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
27
1
Thus much for the body of the Earth, that it could not l'ave
been from Eternity, as Árijietle pretended, in the forin it hath. Now
let's conſider the Origination of Mankind; and that we thall find
could much leſs be Eternal than the other; for whatſoever de-
ſtroy d the form of the Earth, would alſo destroy Mankind; and
telid.s, there are many particular marks and arguments, that the
Generations of Men have not been from Everlaſting. All Hiſtory, and
all monumen:s of Antiquity of what kind foever, are but of a few
thouſand of years date ; we have ſtill the memory of the golden Age;
of the firſt ſtate of Nature, and how mortals liv'd then in inno-
cency and ſimplicity. The invention of Arts, even thoſe that are
neceſſary or uſeful to humane life, hath been within the know-
ledge of Men: How imperfect was the Geography of the Ancients;
how imperfect their knowledge of the Earth, how imperfect their
Navigation? Can we imagine, if there had been Men froin Ever-
laſting, a Sea as now, and all materials for Shipping as much as
we have, that men could have been ſo ignorant, both of the Land
and of the Sea, as ’tis manifeſt they have been till of late Ages?
They had very different fancies concerning the figure of the Earth.
They knew no Land beyond our Continent, and that very imper-
fectly too; and the Torrid Zone they thought utterly uninhabi-
table. We think it ſtrange, taking that ſhort date of the World,
which we give it, that Men ſhould not have made more progreſs in
the knowledge of theſe things ; But how impoſſible is it then, if
you ſuppoſe them to have been from Everlaſting? They had the
ſame wit and paſſions that we have, the ſame inotives that we
have, can we then imagine, that neither the ambition of Princes,
nor intereſt or gain in private Perſons, nor curioſity and the deſire
of Knowledge, nor the glory of diſcoveries, nor any other paſſion
or conſideration could ever move them in that endleſs time, to try
their fortunes upon the Sea, and know ſomething more of the
World they inhabited? Though you ſhould ſuppoſe them gene-
rally ſtupid, which there is no reaſon to do, yet in a courſe of in-
finite Gencrations, there would be ſome great Genio's, ſome extra-
ordinary perſons that would attempt things above the reſt. We
have done more within the compaſs of our little World, which we
can but count (as to this ) from the general Deluge, than thoſe
Eternal Men had done in their innumerable Ages foregoing.
You will ſay it may be, they had not the advantages and oppor-
tunities for Navigation as we have, and for diſcoveries ; becauſe
the uſe of the Loadſtone, and the Mariners Needle was not then
known. But that's the wonder, that either that invention, or any
other ſhould not be brought to light till t'other day, if the World
had ſtood from Eternity. I ſay this or any other practical inven-
tion; for ſuch things when they are once found out and known,
are not eaſily loſt again, becauſe they are of daily uſe. And ’tis
in moſt other practical Arts as in Navigation, we generally know
their Original and Hiſtory: who the Inventors, and bywhat degrees
improv'd, and how few of them brought to any perfection till of
late Ages. All the Artificial and Mechanical World is, in a man.
nir, new; and what you inay call the Civil World too is in a great
E 2
meaſure
28
Book I.
The Theory of the Earth.
meaſure ſo. What relates to Government, and Laivs ; to Wars
and Diſcipline; we can trace theſe things to their Origin, or very
near it. The uſe of Money and of Coins, nay the uſe of the very
Elements; for they tell us of the firſt invention of Tira by Prome-
theus, and the inploying of Wind or Water to turn the Mills and
Plin.l. 7.6.56. grind their Corn was ſcarce known before the Romans ; and that we
may think nothing Eternal here, they tell us the Ages and Genea-
logies of their very Gods. The meaſures of Time for the common
uſes of life, the dividing it into Hours, with the Inſtruments for
thoſe purpoſes, are not of an unknown date: Even the Arts for
preparing Food and Clothing, Medicines and medicaments, Build-
ing, Civil and Military, Letters and Writing, which are the foun-
dations of the World Civil : Theſe, with all their retinue of letler
Arts and Trades that belong to thein, Hiſtory and Tradition tell
us, when they had their beginning, or were very imperfett; and
how
many
of their Inventors and Inventrelles were deild, The
World hath not ſtood ſo long but we can ſtill run it up to thoſe
Artleſs Ages, when mortals liv'd by plain Nature; when there was
but one Trade in the World, one Calling, to look to their Flocks;
and afterwards to Till the Ground, when Nature grew leís libe
ral: And may we not reaſonably think this the beginning ni Man-
kind, or very near it? If Man be a creature both naturally ſagaci-
ous to find out its own conveniencies, and naturally fociable arc
inclin'd to live in a Community, a little time would make them
find out and furniſh themſelves with what was neceſſary in theſe
two kinds, for the conveniencies of ſingle life, and the convenien-
cies of Societies; they would not have liv'd infinite Ages unprovi-
ded of thein. If you ſay Neceflity is the mother of Arts and Inven-
tions, and there was no neceſſity before, and therefore theſe things
were ſo ſlowly invented. This is a good anſwer upon our ſuppoli-
tion, that tlie World began but fome Ages before there were found
out, and was abundant with all things at firſt; and Men not very
numerous, and therefore were not put ſo much to the uſe of their
wits, to find out ways for living commodiouſly. But this is no
anſwer
upon their ſuppoſition ; for if the World was Eternal and
Men too, there were no firſt Ages, no new and freſh Earth ; Men
were never leſs numerous, nor the Earth more fruitful; and con-
ſequently there was never leſs neceſſity at any time than is now.
This alſo brings to mind another argument againſt this opinion
(viz. ) from the gradual increaſe of Mankind. 'Tis certain the
World was not ſo populous one or two thouſand years ſince, as it is
now, ſecing 'tis obſerv'd, in particular Nations, that within the
ſpace of two or three hundred years, notwithſtanding all caſualties,
the number of Men doubles. If then the Earth had ſtood from
Everlaſting, it had been over-ſtockt long ere this, and would not
have been capable to contain its Inhabitants inany Ages and Millions
of Ages ago. Whereas we find the Earth is not yet fufficiently
Inhabited, and there is ſtill room for ſoine Millions. And we muſt
not fie to univerſal Deluges and Conflagrations to deſtroy Mankind;
for beſides that the Earth was not capable of a Deluge in this pre-
fent form, nor would have been in this forin after a Condagra-
tion,
Chap.4. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
-29
܀܀
tion, Ariſtotle doth not admit of theſe univerſal changes, nor any
that hold the form of the Earth to be Eternal. But to return to our
Arts and Inventions.
We have ſpoken of practical Arts and Inventions uſeful in hu-
mane life; then for Theoretical Learning and Sciences, there is no-
thing yet finiſh'd or compleat in theſe; and what is known hath
been chiefly the production of latter Ages. How little hath been
diſcover'd till of late, either of our own Bodies, or of the body of
the Earth, and of the functions or moțions of nature in either ?
What more obvious, one would think, than the Circulation of
the Bloud? What can more excite our curioſity than the flowing
and ebbing of the Sea ? Than the nature of Metals and Minerals ?
Theſe are either yet unknown, or were ſo at leaſt till this laſt Age;
which ſeems to me to have made a greater progreſs than all Ages
before put together, ſince the beginning of the World. How
unlikely is it then that theſe Ages were Eternal ? That the Eternal
Studies of our Forefathers could not effect ſo much as a few years
have done of late? And the whole maſs of knowledge in this
Earth doth not ſeem to be ſo great, but that a few Ages more,
with two or three happy Genius's in them, may bring to light all
that we are capable to underſtand in this ſtate of mortality.
To theſe arguments concerning the novelty of the Earth, and
the Origin of Mankind, I know there are ſome ſhuffling excuſes
made, but they can have little effect upon thoſe inſtances we have
choſen. And I would ask thoſe Eternaliſts one fair quellion, What
mark is there that they could expect or deſire of the novelty of a
World, that is not found in this? Or what mark is there of Eter-
nity that is found in this ? If then their opinion be without any
poſitive argument, and againſt all appearances in Nature, it may
be juſtly rejected as unreafonable upon all accounts. 'Tis not the
bold aſſerting of a thing that inakes it true, or that makes it cre-
dible againſt evidence. If one ſhould alſert that ſuch an one had
liv'd from all Eternity, and I could bring witnefles that knew him
a ſucking Child, and others that reinembred him a School-boy, I
think it would be a fair proof, that the Man was not Eternal. So
if there be evidence, either in Reaſon or Hiſtory, that it is not
very many Ages ſince Nature was in her minority, as appears by
all thoſe inſtances we have given above; ſome whereof trace her
down to her very infancy: This, I think, may be taken for a good
proof that ſhe is not Eternal. And I do not doubt, but if the Hiſto-
ry of the World was writ Philoſophically, giving an account of the
ſeveral ſtates of Mankind in ſeveral Ages, and by what ſteps or de-
grees they caine from their firſt rudeneſs or ſimplicity to that order
of things, both intellectual and Civil, which the World is advanc'd
to at preſent, That alone would be a full conviction, that the Earth
and Mankind had a beginning. As the ſtory of Rome, how it riſe
from a mean Original, by what degrees it increas'd, and how it
chang'd its form and government till it caine to its greatneſs, doth
ſatisfie, us very well, that the Roman Empire was not Eternal,
Thus much concerning the Temporal Original of the Earth. We
are now to conſider the manner of it, and to ſhew how it riſe from
2
30
Book 1.
>
The Theory of the Earth.
a Chaos.- I do not rcinember that any of the Ancients that ac-
knowledge the Earth to have had an Original, çid deny that Ori-
ginal to have been from a Chaos. We are aliirid of both from
the authority of Moſes, who ſaith, that in the beginning the Earth
was Tohu Bubu, without form and void; a fluid, dark, confus id
maſs, without diſtinction of Elements; inade up of all variety of
parts, but without Order, or any determinate Forin; which is the
true deſcription of a Chaos : And ſo it is underſtood by the ge-
neral conſent of Interpreters, both Hebrew and Chriſtian. We
need not therefore ſpend any time here to prove, that the Origin
of the Earth was from a Chaos, ſeeing that is agreed on by all that
give it any Origin. But we will proceed immediately to examine
into what form it firſt riſe when it came out of that Chaos; or
what was the primæval form of the Earth, that continued till the
Deluge, and how the Deluge depended upon it, and upon its diſle-
lution.
And that we may proceed in this enquiry by ſuch eaſie ſteps as
any one may readily follow, we will divide it into Thre. Propoli-
tions, whereof the firſt is this in general; That the Form of the inte-
diluvian Earth, or of the Earth that riſe firſt from the Chaus; arus diffe-
rent from the Form of the preſent Farth. I ſay different in general,
without ſpecifying yet what its particular form was, which fliall
be expreſt in the following Propoſition.
This Firſt Propoſition we have in effect prov'd in the Second
Chapter: where we have ſhewn, that if the Earth had been always
in this form, it would not have been capable of a Deluge; ſeeing
that could not have been effected without ſuch an infinite maſs of
water as could neither be brought upon the Earth, nor afterwards
any way removed from it. But we will not content our ſelves.
with that proof only, but will prove it alſo from the nature of
the Chaos, and the manifeſt conſequences of it. And becauſe this
is a leading Propoſition, we think it not improper to prove it alſo
from Divine Authority, there being a pregnant patage to this
purpoſe in the writings of S. Peter. Where treating of this very
ſubject, the Deluge, He manifeſtly puts a difference between the
Ante-diluvian Earth and the preſent Earth, as to their form and cor-
ftitution. The Diſcourſe is in the Second Epiſtle of S. Pcter, the
Third Chapter, where certain Deiſts, as they ſeem to have been,
laught at the Prophecy of the day of Judgment, and of the Con-
flagration of the World, uſing this argument againſt it, That ſince
the Fathers fell aſleep, all things have continued as they were from the
beginning. All external Nature hath continued the ſame without
any remarkable change or alteration, and why ſhould we believe
( ſay they ) there will be any? What appearance or what founda-
tion is there of ſuch a revolution, that all Nature will be diſſolv'd,
and the Heavens and the Earth conſum'd with Fire, as your Pro-
phecies pretend? So from the permanency and immutability of Na-
ture hitherto, they argu'd its permanency and immutability for the
future. To this the Apoſtle anſwers, that they are willing to forget
that the Heavens and the Earth of old had a particular form and
conſtitution as to Water, by reaſon whereof the World that then
Was,
Chap.4. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
31
so
1
was, periſht by a Deluge. And the Heavens and the Earth that
are now, or ſince the Deluge, have a particular conſtitution in re-
ference to Fire, by reaſon whereof they are expos'd to another fort
of deilruction or diſſolution, namely by Fire, or by an univerſal
Conflagration. The words of the Apoſtle are theſe; For this they are chap. 3.
willingly ignorant of, that by the Word of God the Heavens were of old, ver.5,6,7.
and the Earth, conſiſting of Water, and by Water; or (as we render it)
ſtanding out of the Water, and in the Water : whereby the World that
ther was, being overflom'd with Water, periſht. But the Heavens and
the Earth that are nom, by the ſame Word are kept in ſtore, referu'd un-
to Fire againſt the day of Judginent. We ſhall have occaſion, it may
be, hereafter to give a full illustration of theſe words; but at preſent
we ſhall only take notice of this in general, that the Apoſtle here
doth plainly intimate ſome difference that was between the old
World and the preſent World, in their form and conſtitution; or
betwixt the Ante-diluvian and the preſent Earth, by reaſon of which
difference, that was ſubject to periſh by a Deluge, as this is ſubject
to periſh by Confagration. And as this is the general Air and
Importance of this diſcourſe of he Apoſtle's, which every one at
first light would diſcover; ſo we may in ſeveral particular ways
prove from it our firſt Propoſition, which now we muſt return to;
(viz.) That the form and conſtitution of the Ante-diluvian Earth was
different from that of the preſent Earth. This may be infer'd from
the Apoſtle's diſcourſe, firſt, becauſe he makes an oppoſition be-
twixt theſe two Earths, or theſe two natural Worlds; and that not
only in reſpect of their fate, the one periſhing by Water, as the
other will periſh by Fire, but alſo in reſpect of their different dif-
poſition and conſtitution leading to this different fate; for other-
wiſe his fifth verſe is ſuperfluous, and his Inference in the ſixth un-
grounded; you ſee he premiſeth in the fifth verfe as the ground of
his diſcourſe, what the conſtitution of the Ante-diluvian Heavens
and Earth was, and then infers from it in the ſixth verſe, that they
therefore periſht in a Deluge of Water. Now if they had been the
fame with ours, there had neither been any ground for making
an oppoſition betwixt them, nor any ground of making a contrary
inference as to their fate. Beſides, in that he iinplies that the con-
ftitution of the Ante-diluvian Earth was ſuch, as made it ſubject
to a Deluge; he ſhews that it was different from the conſtitution
of the preſent Earth ; for the form of that is ſuch, ag makes it ra-
ther incapable of a Deluge, as we have ſhewn in the ſecond Chapter.
Then we are to obſerve further, that when he faith ( verſe 6.) that
the firſt World periſh'd in a Deluge, or was deſtroy'd by it; this is
not to be underſtood of the Animate World only, Men and living
Creatures, but of the Natural World, and the frame of it; for he
had deſcrib'd it before by the Heavens and the Earth, which make
the Natural World. And the objection of the Atheiſts, or Deifts
rather, which he was to anſwer, proceeded upon the Natural
World. And laſtly, this periſhing of the World in a Deluge, is ſet
againſt
, or compar'd with the periſhing of the World in the Con-
fagration, when the frame of Nature will be diſſolv'd. We muſt
therefore, according to the tenor of the Apoſtle's arguing, ſuppoſe,
that
.
32
1
The Theory of the Earth. Book).
that the Natural World was deſtroy'd or perih'd in the Deluge;
and ſeeing it did not periſh as to matter and ſubſtance, it inuít be
as to the form, frame, and compoſition of it, that it perilh'd; and
conſequently, the preſent Earth is of another form and frame from
what it had before the Deluge; which was the thing to be proved.
Laſtly, Let us conſider what it is the Apoſtle tells theſe Scoffers
that they were ignorant of: Not that there was a Deluge, they
could not be ignorant of that; nor doth he tell them that they were;
But he tells them that they were ignorant that the Heavens and
the Earth of old were ſo and ſo conſtituted, after a different man-
ner than they are now, and that the ſtate of Nature was chang'd
at the Deluge, if they had known or attended to this, they had
made no ſuch objection, nor us'd any ſuch argument as they did
againſt the future Conflagration of the World. They pretended
that there had been no change in Nature ſince the beginning, and
the Apoſtle in anſwer tells them, that they are willingly ignorant
of the firſt conſtitution of the Heavens, and the Earth, and of that
change and diſſolution that happen'd to them in the Deluge ; and
how the preſent Heavens and Earth have another conſtitution,
whereby in like manner they are expos’d, in God's due time, to be
conſum'd or diffolv'd by Fire. This is the plain, calie and natu-
ral import of the Apoſtle's diſcourſe; thus all the parts of it are co-
herent, and the fence genuine and appoſite, and this is a full con-
firmation of our firſt and general affertion, That the Ante-diluvian
Earth was of another form from the preſent Earth. This hath been
obſerv'd formerly by ſome of the Ancients from this Text, but that
it hath not been generally obſerv’d, was partly becauſe they had
no Theory to back ſuch an interpretation, and make it intelligible;
and partly becauſe they did not obſerve, that the Apoſtle's dif-
courſe here was an argumentation, and not a bare affirmation, or
ſimple contradiction to thoſe that rais'd the ſcruple ; 'tis an anſwer
upon a ground taken, he premiſeth and then infers; in the fifth
and fixth Verſes, concerning the Deluge; and in the ſeventh, 2011-
cerning the Conflagration. And when I had diſcover'd in my
thoughts from the conſideration of the Deluge, and other natural
reaſons, that the Earth was certainly once in another form, it was
a great aſſurance and confirmation to me, when I reflected on this
place of S. Peter's; which ſeems to be ſo much directed and inten-
ded for the ſame purpofe, or to teach us the ſame concluſion, that
though I deſign’d chiefly a Philoſophical Theory of theſe things,
yet I ſhould not have thought we had been juſt to Providence, if
we had neglected to take notice of this paſſage and Sacred evi-
dance, which ſeems to have been left us on purpoſe, to excite our
enquiries, and ſtrengthen our reaſonings, concerning the firſt ſtate
of things.' Thus much from Divine Authority: We proceed now
to prove the ſame Propoſition from Reaſon and Philoſophy, and
the contemplation of the Chaos, from whence the firſt Earth
aroſe.
We need not upon this occaſion make a particular deſcription
of the Chaos, but only conſider it as a Fluid Maſs, or a Maſs of all
forts of little parts and particles of matter' mixt together, and Ana-
ting
Chap.4. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
33
ting in confuſion, one with another. 'Tis impoſſible that the ſur-
face of this maſs ſhould be of ſuch a form and figure, as the ſur-
face of our preſent Earth is. Or that any concretion or conſiſtent
ftate which this maſs could flow into immediately, or firſt ſettle in,
could be of ſuch a forin and figure as our preſent Earth. The first
of theſe Affertionis is of caſie proof; for a fuid body, we know,
whether it be water or any other liquor, always cafts it ſelf into a
ſimooth and ſpherical ſurface; and if any parts, by chance, or by
ome agitation, become higher than the reſt, they do not continue
ſo, but glide down again every way into the lower places, till they
all come to make a ſurface of the ſame height, and of the ſame di-
ſtance every where from the Center of their gravity. A mountain
of water is a thing impoſſible in Nature, and where there are no
Mountains there are no Valleys. So alſo a Den or Cave within the
water that hath no walls but the liquid Element, is a ſtructure un-
known to Art or Nature; all things there muſt be full within, and
even and level without, unleſs ſome External force keep them bý
violence in another poſture. But is this the form of our Earth,
which is neither regularly made within nor without? The ſurface
and exteriour parts are broken into all ſorts of inequalities, Hills
and Dales, Mountains and Valleys ; and the plainer tracts of it lie
generally inclin'd or bending one way or other, ſometimes upon
an eaſie deſcent, and other times with, a more ſenſible and uneaſie
ſteepineſs 3 and though the great Mountains of the Earth were
taken all away, the remaining parts would be more unequal than
the rougheſt Sea; wheieas the face of the Earth ſhould reſemble
the face of the calmeſt Sea, if it was ſtill in the forın of its firſt
maſs. But what ſhall we ſay then to the huge Mountains of the
Earth, which lie ſometimes in lumps: or cluſters heapt up by one
another, ſometimes extended in long ridges or chains for many
hundred miles in length ? And ’tis remarkable, that in every Con-
tinent, and in every ancient and original Iſland, there is either ſuch
a cluſter, or ſuch a chain of Mountains. And can there be any
more palpable demonſtrations than theſe are, that the ſurface of
the Earth - is not int the faine form that the ſurface of the Chaos
was, or that any fluid maſs can ſtand or hold it ſelf in?
Then for the form of the Earth within or under its ſurface, 'tis
no leſs impoſſible for the Chaos to imitate that ; for 'tis full of cavi-
ties and empty places, of dens and broken holes, whereof ſome are
open to the Air, and others cover'd and encloſed wholly within
the ground. Theſe are both of thein unimitable in any liquid
ſubſtance, whofe parts will neceſſarily flow together into one con-
tinued maſs, and cannot be divided into apartments and ſeparate
l'ooins, nor have vaults or caverns made within it; the walls.would
ſink, and the roof fall in: For liquid bodies have nothing to ſuf-
tain their parts, nor arfy' thing to cement them; they are ali looſe
and incoherent, and in a perpetual flux: Even an heap of Sand
or fine Powder will ſuffer no hollowneſs within them, though
they be dry ſubſtances, and though tlie parts of them being rough,
will hang together a little, and ſtand a little upon an heap; but
the parts of liquors being glib, and continually in motion, they fall
F
off
34
Воок І.
Tbe Tbeory of the Earth.
off from one another, which way foever gravity inclines them, and
can neither have any hills or eminencies on their ſurface, nor any
hollowneſs within their ſubſtance.
You will acknowledge, it may be, that this is true, and that
a liquid maſs or Chaos, while it was liquid, was incapable of ci-
ther the outward or inward form of the Earth; but when it came
to a concretion, to a ſtate of conſiſtency and firmneſs, then it might
go, you'll ſay, into any form. No, not in its firſt concretion, nor in
its firſt ſtate of conſistence ; for that would be of the ſame form
that the ſurface of it was when it was liquid; as water, when it
congeals, the ſurface of the Ice is ſinooth and level, as the ſurface
of the water was before; ſo Metals, or any other ſubſtances melted,
or Liquors that of theinſelves grow ſtiff and harden, always ſettle
into the ſame forin which they had when they were laſt liquid,
and are always ſolid within, and ſinooth without, unleſs they
be caſt in a mould, that hinders the motion and Aux of the parts.
So that the firſt concrete ſtate or conſiſtent ſurface of the Chaos,
muſt be of the ſame form or figure with the laſt liquid ſtate it was
in ; for that is the mould, as it were, upon which it is caſt; as
the ſhell of an Egg is of a like form with the ſurface of the liquor
it lies upon. And therefore by analogy with all other liquors and
concretions, the form of the Chaos, whether liquid or concrete,
could not be the ſame with that of the preſent Earth, or like it:
And conſequently, that forin of the firſt or primigenial Earth which
riſe immediately out of the Chaos, was not the ſame, not like to
that of the preſent Earth. Which was the firſt and preparatory Pro-
poſition we laid down to be prov'd. And this being prov'd by the
authority both of our Reaſon and our Religion, we will now
proceed to the Second which is inore particular.
CH A P. V.
The Second Propoſition is laid down, viz. That the face of
the Earch before the Deluge was ſmooth, regular
and uniform; without Mountains, and without a
Sea. The Chaos out of which the World riſe is fully ex-
amin’d, and all its motions obſerv’d, and by what ſteps
it wrought it ſelf into an habitable World. Some things
in Antiquity relating to the firſt ſtate of the Earth are
interpreted, and ſome things in the Sacred Writings.
The Divine Art and Geometry in the conſtruction of the
firſt Earth is obſerv'd and celebrated.
!
W
E have ſeen it prov'd, in the foregoing Chapter, That the
form of the firſt or Ante-diluvian Earth; was not the laine,
nor like the form of the preſent Earth; this is our firn diſcovery
at a diſtance, but 'tis only general and negative; tells us what the
Dis
+
6
T!
form
Chap.5. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
35
forin of that Earth'was not, but tells us not exprelly what it was
that muſt be our next enquiry, and advancing one ſtep further in
our Theory, we lay down thuis Second Propoſition. That the face
of the Earth before the Deluge,, was Jimooth, regular and uniforins
erithout Mountains, and withcut a Sea. This is a bold ſtep, and car-
ries lis into another World, which we have never ſeen, nor ever
yet heard any relation of; and a World, it feems, of very different
icenes and proſpects from ours, or from any thing we have yet
known. An Earth without a Sca, and plain, as the Elyſinn fields;
if you travel it all over,you will not inect with a Mountain or a Rock,
yet well provided of all reqnilite things for an habitable World; and
the fame indeed with the Earth we ſtill inhabit, only:under' ano:
ther form. And this is the great thing that now comes into débate;
the great Paradox which we offer to be examin'd, and which we
affirm, That the Earth in its firft riſe and forination froin a Chaos,
was of the form here deſcrib’d, and fo continu'd for many hun
dreds of years.
To examine and prove this, we muſt return to the beginning of
the World, and to that Chaos out of which the Earth and all Sub-
lunary things aroſe: 'Tis the motions and progreſs of this which
we muſt now conſider, and what forin it fetled into when it firſt
became an habitable World.
Neither is it perhaps ſuch an intricate thing as we imagine at
firſt ſight, to trace a Chaos into an habitable World; at leaſt there
is a particular pleaſure to ſee things in their Origin, and by what
degrees and ſucceſſive changes they riſe into that order and ſtate
we ſee them in afterwards, when compleated. I am ſure, if ever
we would view the paths of Divine Wiſdom, in the works and
in the conduct of Nature, we inuſt not only conſider how things
are, but how they came to be ſo. 'Tis pleaſant to look upon a
Tree in the Summer, cover'd with its green Leaves, deckt with
Bloſſoms, or laden with Fruit, and caſting a pleaſing ſhade under
its ſpreading Boughs; but to conſider how this Tree with all its
furniture, ſprang from a little Seed; how Nature ſhap'd it, and
fed it, in its infancy and growth ; added new parts, and ſtill ad-
vanc'd it by little and little, till it came to this greatneſs and per-
fection, this, methinks, is another ſort of pleaſure, more rational,
leſs common, and which is properly the contemplation of Divine
Wiſdom in the works of Nature. So to view this Earth, and this
Sublunary World, as it is now compleat, diſtinguiſht into the
fevcral orders of Bodies of which it conſiſts, every one perfect and
admirable in its kind ; this is truly delightful, and a very good
entertainment of the mind; But to ſec all theſe in their firit Seeds,
as I may ſo fay; to take in pieces this frame of Nature, and melt
it down into its firſt principles; and then to obſerve how the Di-
vine Wiſdom wrought all theſe things out of confuſion into order,
and out of ſimplicity into that beautiful compoſition we now ſee
them in; this, methinks, is another kind of joy, which pierceth
the mind more deep, and is more ſatisfactory. And to give our
ſelves and others this ſatisfaction, we will firſt make a ſhort repreſen-
tation of the Chaos, and then ſhew, how, according to Laws efta-
F 2
bliſhe
+
36 dins The Theory of the Earth. Book I.

bliſht in Nature by the Divine Power and Wiſdom, it was wrought
by degrees from one form into another, till it ſetled at length into
an habitable Earth; and that of ſuch a frame and ſtructure, as we
have defcrib'd in this ſecond Propoſition.
By the Chaos I underſtand the matter of the Earth and Hea-
vens, without form or order; reduc'd into a Auid maſs, wherein
are the materials and ingredients of all bodies, but mingled in con-
fufion one with another. As if you ſhould ſuppoſe all ſorts of
Metals, Gold, Silver, Lead, &c. melted down together in a com-
mon maſs, and ſo mingled, that the parts of no one Metal could
be diſcern'd as diſtinct from the reſt, this would be a little Metal-
lick Chaos: Suppoſe then the Elements thus mingled, Air, Water
and Earth,which are the principles of all Terreſtrial Bodies; mingled,
I ſay, without any order of higher or lower, heavier or lighter,
ſolid or volatile, in ſuch a kind of confus'd maſs as is here repre-
fented in this firſt Scheme.org bdii
2159 / 10 ark
Fresh
SW, carla apig bai Shimo
pag. 36. diena
o .
Cte
Osaston
VOS
stod
CW
SV
hoe
was baie
Homo
Tattooicino
om
รายงานไป 17 18 197
Let this then reprefent to us the Chaos; in which the firſt change
that we ſhould imagine to happen would be this, that the heavieſt
and groſſeſt parts would ſink down towards the middle of it, (for
there we fuppofe the center of its gravity) and the reſt would doat
above.

Chap.s. The Deluge and Diſſolation of the Earth. 37
above. Theſe groffer parts thus ſunk down and compreſs'd more
and more, would harden by degrees, and conſtitute the interiour
parts of the Earth. The reſt of the maſs, which ſwims above,
would be alſo divided by the ſame principle of gravity into two
orders of Bodies, the one liquid like Water, the other Volatile mike
Air. For the more fine and active parts diſentangling themſelves
by degrees from the reſt, would mount above them, and having
motion enough to keep them upon the wing, would play in thoſe
open places where they conſtitute that body we call A Í R. The
other parts being groffer than theſe and having a more languid motion
could not fly up ſeparate from one another, as theſe did, but ſetled
in a maſs together, under the Air, upon the body of the Earth,
compoſing not only Water ſtrictly ſo called, but the whole maſs of
liquors, or liquid bodies, belonging to the Earth. And theſe firſt
ſeparations being thus made, the body of the Chaos would ſtand
in that form which it is here repreſented in by the ſecond Scheme.
fig:
pag. 37.
2.
low our prices
abd bloow to
bebas Segurines
Cele mai bun
The liquid maſs which encircled the Earth, was not, as I noted
before, the mere Element of Water, but a collection of all Liquors
that belong to the Earth. I mean of all that do originally belong
to it. Now ſeeing there are two chief kinds of Terreſtrial Liquors,
thoſe that are fat, oily, and light; and thoſe that are lean and more
Earthy, like common Water; which two are generally found in
compound

38 The Theory of the Earth. T Book.
compound liquors; we cannot doubt but there were of both forts
in this common maſs of liquids. And it being well known, that
theſe two kinds mixt together, if left to themſelves and the general
action of Nature, ſeparate one from another when they come to
ſettle, as in Cream and thin Milk, Oil and Water, and fuch like;
we cannot but conclude, that the fame Effect would follow here,
and the more oily and light part of this maſs would get above the
other, and ſwinn upon it. The whole maſs being divided into two
leſſer maſſes, and ſo the Globe would ſtand as we ſee it in this
Third Figure. I Store privor bra ser mais tolong gnid zieq tadio
bolistand bib starts 21 19 tons oro mort sisi.qst gos y con los
ad 38.1 To vbod silt ned it mobnu caurlagos homes an
TEXNEW viro con fig: 3 mnog
2ds ba
biupil To Top
bree
id anointia
9moris
nuo tort ni
Hitherto the changes of the Chaos are eaſie and unqueſtionable,
and would be diſpatcht in a ſhort time; we muſt now look over
again theſe two great maſſes of the Air and Water, and conſider
how their impurities or groffer parts would be diſpos'd of; for
we cannot imagine but they were both at firſt very muddy and im-
pure: And as the Water would have its ſediment, which we are
not here concern'd to look after, ſo the great Regions of the Air
would certainly have their ſediment too; for the Air was as yet thick,
groſs, and dark; there being an abundance of little Terreſtrial par-
ticles ſwimming in it ſtill, after the groffeſt were ſunk down; which,
bog mo
by

Chap.5. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
39
by their heavineſs and lumpiſh figure, made their way more eaſily
and ſpeedily. The leſſer and lighter which remain'd, would ſink
too, but more ſlowly, and in a longer time: ſo as in their deſcent
they would meet with that oily liquor upon the face of the Deep,
or upon the watery maſs, which would entangle and ſtop them
from paſſing any further ; whereupon mixing there with that uncti-
ous ſubſtance, they compos'd a certain ſlime, or fat, ſoft, and light
Earth, ſpread upon the face of the Waters; as ’tis repreſented in
this fourth Figure.
Pag: 39.
fig: 4.
.
&
sura
KY
- 150 laris
at brie
102'orit
9101sd suhted egin to post 2h 11ន
od sraim
TiA srl
Autot Det brebis
about bw fiointi
To pa at 919
25. 2915W et nguoril tuo sito o pls calem binpil era ni
vis yra Toneban od biisow no idrios on ol bus bibeniors
Storld slogquit enor 25 2106W eli lo sos) est noqu b'mol dan
This thin and tender Orb of Earth increasa niti more and more!
as the little Earthy parts that were detain'd in the Air could make
their way to it. Some having a long journey from the upper
Regions and others being very light would not up and down
a good while, before they could wholly diſengage themſelves and
deſcend. But this was the general rendezvous, which fooner or
later they all got to, and mingling more and more with that oily
liqdor, they fucke it all up at length, and were wholly incorporate
together, and to began to grow more ftiff and firm, makitig both
but one ſubſtance, which was the firft-concretion, or fifth and con-
fiftent ſubſtance that riſe upon the face of the Chaos. And the
whole Globe ſtood in this poſture, as in Figure the fifth, listlərls
boog
IC
40
Bookl:
.: The Theory of the Earth.
)
is
i
n
could be
1
4
I
var
}
1
1
t
When
3
It may be, you will ſay, we take our liberty, and our own
time for the ſeparation of theſe two liquors, the Oily and the
Earthy, the lighter and the heavier; and ſuppoſe that done before
the Air was clear'd of Earthy particles, that ſo they might be
catcht and ſtopt there in their deſcent. Whereas if all theſe par-
ticles were fallen out of the Air before that ſeparation was made
in the liquid maſs, they would fall down through the Water, as
the firſt did, and ſo no concretion would be made, nor any Earthy
cruſt form'd upon the face of the Waters, as we here ſuppoſe there
was. Tiş que, there could be no ſuch Orb of Earth form’d there,
if the Air was wholly Burgd of all its Earthy parts before, the
Maſs of liquids began to purifie it felf, and, to ſeparate the Oilý
parts from the more heavy: But, this is an unreaſonable and incre
dible ſuppoſition, if we: , conſider, the maſs of the
Air was many
thouſand times greater than the Water, and would in proportion
require a greater time to be purified the particles that were: im
the Regions of the Ais having a long way to canie before they
Teacht the Watery, mals, and far longer than the Oily particles had
to, riſe from any part of that maſs: to the ſurface of ity, Beſides we
may ſuppoſe a greati, mạny degrees, of littleneks jandlightneſs in
theſe Earthy particles 100 as many of the mighq Haat in the Air'a
good
Chap.5. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
4)
good while, like Exhalations, before they fell down. And lältly,
We do not ſuppoſe the ſeparation of theſe two liquors wholly
made and finiſht before the purgation of the Air began, though we
repreſent them ſo for diſtinction fake ; Let them begin to puritie
at the ſame time, if you pleaſe, theſe parts riſing upwards, and
thoſe falling downwards, they will mect in the middle, and unite
and grow into one body, as we have deſcrib'd. And this body or
new concretion would be increas'd daily, being fed and ſupply'd
both from above and below; and having done growing, it would
become inore dry by degrees, and of a temper of greater conſiſtency
and firmneſs, ſo as truly to reſemble and be fit to make an habi-
table Earth, ſuch as Nature intended it for.
But
you
will further object, it may be, that ſuch an effect as
this would indeed be neceflàry in ſome degree and proportion, but
not in ſuch a proportion, and in ſuch quantiiy as would be ſuffi-
cient to make this cruft or concrete Orb an habitable Earth. This
I confefs appear'd to me at firit a real difficulty, till I conſider'd
better the great diſproportion there is betwixt the Regions of the
Air and the Circumference of the Earthi, or of that exteriour Orb
of the Earth, we are now a inaking; which being many thou-
fand times leſs in depth and extent than the Regions of the Air,
taken as high as the Moon, though theſe Earthy particles, we ſpeak
of, were very thinly diſpers'd through thoſe valt tracts of the Air,
when they came to be collected and ainaſs'd together upon the
ſurface of a far leſſer Sphere, they would conſtitute a body of a
very conſiderable thickneſs and folidity. We ſee the Earth ſome-
times covered with Snow two or three feet deep, made up only
of little fakes or pieces of Ice, which falling from the middle Re-
gion of the Air, and meeting with the Earth in their deſcent, are
there ſtopt and heapt up one upon another. But if we ſhould ſup-
pofe little particles of Earth to ſhower down, not only from
the middle Region, but from the whole capacity and extent of
thoſe vaſt ſpaces that are betwixt us and the Moon, we could not
imagine but theſe would conſtitute an Orb of Earth ſome thouſands
of times deeper than the greateſt Snow; which being increas'd and
ſwoln by that oily liquor it fell into, and incorporated with, it
would be thick, ſtrong, and great enough in all reſpects to render
it an habitable Earth.
We cannot doubt therefore but ſuch a body as this would be
form'd, and would be ſufficient in quantity for an habitable Earth.
Then for the quality of it, it will anſwer all the purpoſes of a
Riſing World. What can be a more proper Seminary for Plants and
Animals, than a foil of this temper and compoſition? A finer and
lighter ſort of Earth, mixt with a benign Juice, eaſie and obedient
to the action of the Sun, or of what other cauſes were einploy'd
by the Author of Nature, for the production of things in the new-
made Earth. What ſort or diſpoſition of matter could be more
fit and ready to catch life from Heaven, and to be drawn into all
forms that the rudiments of life, or the bodies of living Creatures
would require? What ſoil more proper for vegetation than this
warin moiſture, which could have no fault, unleſs it was too
G
fertile
܀
42
Воок 1.
The Theory of the Earth.
v
fertile and luxuriant? And that is no fault neither at the begin-
ning of a World. This I am ſure of, thai the learned amungil
'In us *pwo-; the Ancients, both Greeks , Egyptians, Phænicians, and others, have
gevhs.
deſcrib'd the primigenial foil, or the temper of the Earth, that
was the firſt ſubject for the Generation and Origin of Plants
and Animals, after fuch a manner, as is truly expreſs'd, and I
think with advantage, by this draught of the primigenial Earth.
Thus much concerning the inatter of the first Earth. Let us re-
flect a little upon the form of it alſo, whether External or Internal;
both whereof do manifeſtly Mew themſelves from the manner of
its production or formation. As to the External form, you ſeu ir
is according to the Propoſition we were to prove, Jinooth, regular
and uniform, without Mountains, and without a Sea. And the proof
we have given of it is very eaſie; The Globe of the Earth could
not poſſibly riſe inmediately from a Chaos into the irregular form
in which it is at preſent. The Chaos being a fluid maſs, which we
know doth neceſſarily fall into a Spherical ſurface, whoſe parts are
equi-diſtant from the Center, and conſequently in an equal and
even convexity one with another. And ſeeing upon the diſtinction
of a Chaos and ſeparation into ſeveral Elementary inaſſes, the Wa-
ter would naturally have a ſuperiour place to the Earth, 'tis mani-
feſt, that there could be no habitable Earth formd out of the
Chaos, unleſs by ſome concretion upon the face of the Water.
Then laſtly, ſeeing this concrete Orb of Earth upon the face of the
Water would be of the ſame form with the ſurface of the Water
it was ſpread upon, there being no cauſes, that we know of, to
make any inequality in it, we muſt conclude it equal and uniform,
and without Mountains, as alſo without a Sea ; for the Sea and all
the maſs of Waters was enclos'd within this exteriour Earth, which
had no other baſis or foundation to reſt upon.
The contemplation of theſe things, and of this poſture of the
Earth upon the Waters, doth ſo ſtrongly bring to mind certain
paſſages of Scripture, ( which will recur in another place) that we
cannot, without injury to truth paſs them by here in ſilence. Paſ-
ſages that have luch a manifeſt reſeinblance and agreement to this
form and ſituation of the Earth, that they ſeem viſibly .to point at
it : ſuch are thoſe expreſſions of the Pſalmiſt, God hath founded the
Eurth
upon the Seas. And in another Pſalm, ſpeaking of the wif
dom and power of God in the Creation, he faith, To him who alone
doth great monders; to him that by wiſdom made the Heavens; to hin
that extended or stretched out the Earth above the Waters. What can
be more plain or proper to denote that form of the Earth that we
have deſcrib'd, and to expreſs particularly the incloſure of the WV1?-
ters within the Earth, as we have repreſented them? He faith in
another place ; By th: Word of the Lord were the Heavens made; he
shut up the Waters of the Sea as in B.igs, (for fo the word is to be
render'd; and is render'd by all, except the English ) 1ud laie up
Abyſe as in fore-houſes. This, you ſee, is very conformable to that
Syſtem of the Earth and Sea, which we have propos'd here. Yet
there is ſomething more expreſs than all this in that rumarkably
place in the Proverbs of Sulomwn, where Hiſlom declaring lur Anti
guits
-
Chap.5. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
43
2.
quity and Exiſtence before the foundation of the Earth, amongſt
other things, faith; When he prep::red the Heavens, I was there : When Proz. 8. 27.
he drem 'an Orb over the ſurface of the Abyſſe; or when he ſet an Orb
upon the face of the Abyſſe. We render it in the Engliſh a C012
paſs, or Circle, but 'tis more truly rendred an Orb or Sphere; and
what Orb or Spherical Body was this, which at the forination of
the Earth was built and plac'd round about the Abyſs; but that
wonderful Arch, whoſe form and production we have deſcrib'd,
encompaſſing the maſs of Waters, which in Scripture is often call'd vid. Fig.58.40
the Abyſle or Deep? Laſtly, This Scheme of the firſt Earth gives This Orb is re-
light to that place we mention’d before of S. Peter's, where the firſt preſented by
the Circle 1,
Earth is ſaid to conſiſt of Water and by Water: and by reaſon there and the Abylie
of was obnoxious to a Deluge. The firſt part of this character is by the Region
plain from the deſcription now given: and the ſecond will appear
in the following Chapter. In the mean time, concerning theſe
paſſages of Scripture, which we have cited, we may truly and mo-
deſtly ſay, that though they would not, it may be, without a The-
ory premis’d, have been taken or interpreted in this ſence, yet this
Theory being premis'd, I dare appeal to any unprejudic'd perſon,
if they have not a fairer and eaſier, à more full and more emphati-
cal ſence, when apply'd to that. forin of the Earth and Sea, we
are now ſpeaking of, than to their preſent form, or to any other
we can imagine.
Thus much concerning the external form of the firſt Earth. Let
us now reflect a little upon the Internal forini of it, which conſiſts
of ſeveral Regions, involving one another like Orbs about the ſame
Center, or of the ſeveral Elements caſt circularly about each other;
as it appears in the Fourth and Fifth Figure. And as we have no-
ted the External form of this primæval Earth, to have been markt
and celebrated in the Sacred Writings ; ſo likewiſe in the Philofo-
phy and Learning of the Ancients, there are ſeveral remains and
indications of this Internal form and compoſition of it. For 'tis ob-
ſervable, that the Ancients in treating of the Chaos, and in railing
the World out of it, rang’d it into ſeveral Regions or Maſſes, as
we have done; and in that order ſucceſſively, riſing one from ano-
ther, as if it was a Pedigree or Genealogy. And thoſe Parts and
Régions of Nature, into which the Chaos was by degrees divided,
they ſignified commonly by dark and obſcure names, as the Night,
Tartarus, Oceanus; and ſuch like, which we have expreſs’d in their
plain and proper terms. And whereas the Chaos, when it was
firſt ſet on work, ran all into diviſions, and ſeparations of one Ele-
ment from another, which afterwards were all in ſome meaſure
united and aſſociated in this primigenial Earth ; the Ancients ac-
cordingly made Contention the principle that reign'd in the Chaos at
firſt, and then Love: The one to expreſs the diviſions, and the
other the union of all parties in this middle and common bond.
Theſe, and fueh, like notions which we find in the Writings of the
Ancients figuratively and darkly deliver'd, receive a clearer light,
when compar'd with this Theory of the Chaos ; which repreſen-
ting every thing plainly, and in its natural colours, is a key to
their thoughts, and an illuſtration of their obſcurer Philoſophy,
con-
G 2
44
Book I.
The Theory of the Earth.
PANEL
1
Lib. 2.
Chap 1:
concerning the Original of the World; as we have ſhewn at large
in the Latin Treatiſe.
There is another thing in Antiquity, relating to the forin and
conſtruction of the Earth, which is very remarkable, and hath ob-
tain'd throughout all learned Nations and Ages. And that is the
compariſon or reſemblance of the Earth to an Egg. And this
is not ſo much for its External Figure, though that be true too:
as for the inward compoſition of it; conſiſting of ſeveral Orbs, one
including another, and in that order, as to anſwer the ſeveral Ele-
mentary Regions of which the new-made Earth was conſtituted.
For if we admit for the Tolk a Central fire ( which though very
reaſonable, we had no occaſion to take notice of in our Theory of
the Chaos ) and ſuppoſe the figure of the Earth Oval, and a little
extended towards the Poles, ( as probably it was, ſeeing the Votex
that contains it, is ſo ) thoſe two bodies do very naturally repre-
ſent one another; as in this Scheme, which repreſents the Interiour
faces of both, a divided Egg, or Earth. Where, as the two in
paj 44
14:7
I
Com
;)
А.
1)
T.
1
1
TO
------
A
À
X1
lib. 2.6. JO.
moſt Regions (A.B.) repreſent the Yolk and the Membrane that lies
next above it; ſo the Exteriour Region of the Earth (D.) is as the
Shell of the Egg, and the Abyſſe (C.) under it as the White that
lies under the Shell. And conſidering that this notion of the Mün-
dane Egg, or that the World was Oviform, hath beeri the fencé arid
Tel. Theer. Sac. Language of ali Antiquity, Latins, Greeks, Perfians; Egyprians, and
others, as we have ſhew'd elſewhere; I thought it worthy our no-
tice in this place; feeing it receives ſuch a clear and eafie explication
from that Origin and Fabrick we have given to the firſt Earthi land
alſo reflects light upon the Theory it felf, and confirms it to be no
fiction: This notion, hdwich is a kind of Epitome of Image of it;
having been conſerv'd in the moſt Ancient Learning, .?!.
Thus much concerning the firh Earthi, its production and forint,
and concerning our Second Propoſitioni relating to it:f. Which bei
ing prov'd by Reaſon, the laws of Náture, and the motions of the
Chaos; then atteſted by Antiquity, both as to the I'matter and
form
Chap.5. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
45
form ofit; and confirm’d by Sacred Writers, we may take it now for
a well eſtabliſhit truth, and proceed upon this ſuppoſition, That the
Ante-diluvian Furth was ſmooth and uniform, zrithout Mountains or Se:2,
to the explicating of the univeríal Deluge.
Give me leave only before we proceed any further, to annex
here a ſhort Advertiſement, concerning the Cauſes of this wonder-
ful ſtructure of the first Earth. 'Tis true, we have propos'd the
Natural Cauſes of it, and I do not know wherein our Explication
is falſe or defective; but in things of this kind we may eaſily be too
credulous. And this ſtructure is ſo marvellous, that it ought ra-
ther to be conſider'd as a particular effect of the Divine Art, than
as the work of Nature. The whole Globe of the Water vaulted
over, and the exteriour Earth hanging above the Deep, ſuſtain'd
by nothing but its own meaſures and manner of conſtruction: A
Building
without foundation or corner-ſtone. This ſeems to be a
piece of Divine Geometry or Architecture ; and to this, I think,
is to be refer'd that magnificent challenge which God Almighty
made to Job; Where waſt thou when I laid the foundations of the Earth? Fol 38:42 5;
6, 7,&c
declare if thou haſi underſtanding ; l'ho hath laid the meaſures thereof,
if thou knoweſt ; or who hath ſtretched the line
upon
it? Whereupon are
the foundations thereof faftred, or who laid the corner-ſtone thereof?
When the morning Stars ſang together; and all the Sons of God ſhouted
for joy. Mojes alſo when he had deſcrib'd the Chaos, faith, The
Spirit of God mov'd upon, or ſat brooding upon, the face of the ma-
ters; without all doubt to produce ſome effects there. And S. Pe-
ter, when he ſpeaks of the form of the Ante-diluvian Earth, how
it ſtood in reference to the Waters, adds, By the Word of God, or 7 262 2
by the Wiſdom of God it was made fo. And this ſame Wiſdom of
God, in the Proverbs, as we obſerved before, takeš.. notice of this
very piece of work in the formation of thie Earth. When he ſet an
Orb over the face of the Deep I was there. And laſtly, the Ancient
Philoſophers, or at leaſt the beſt of them, to give them their due,
always brought in Mens or Amor, as a Supernatural principle to passo
unite and conſociate the parts of the Chaos ; which was firſt done
in the compoſition of this wonderful Arch of the Earth. Where.
fore to the great Architect, who made the boundleſs Univerſe out
of nothing, and form’d the Earth out of a Chaos, let the praiſe
of the Whole Work, and particularly of this Maſter-piece, for ever
with all honour be given.
λόγο
2
1
CH AP.
46
Bookl.
The Theory of the Earth.
-
r.
1,- SHI
..
...
.
CH A P.
VI.
The diſolution of the Firſt Earth: The Deluge enſuing
thereupon. And the form of the preſent Earth riſing
from the Ruines of the Firſt.
W
E have now brought to light the Ante-diluvian Earth out
of the dark maſs of the Chaos; and not only deſcribed
l'id. Fig. s. the ſurface of it, but laid open the inward parts, to fhew in what
6.pag.40. order its Regions lay. Let us now cloſe it up, and repreſent the
Earth entire, and in larger proportions, more like an habitable
World; as in this Figure, where you ſee the ſmooth convex of
the Earth, and may imagine the great Abyſe ſpread under it*;
which two are to be the only ſubject of our further contemplation.
aperture 2. a.
44
* As at the
Booke j?
st
p.46.
i
,!!
WIND
ta
Font
!
Ver
willes
1
Thir
11
ol
the
skilt
Lord..
los
I
"".
)
Hling
.
.
illos
srill...,
Witins
11
before
to form
www
trert
TO
intro
In
Chap.6. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
47
In this ſmooth Earth were the firſt Scenes of the World, and
the firſt Generations of Mankind; it had the beauty of Youth and
blooming Naturc, freſh and fruitful, and not a wrinkle, ſcar or
fracture in all its body; no Rocks nor Mountains, no hollow
Caves, nor gaping Chanels, but even and uniform all over. And
the ſinoothneſs of the Earth made the face of the Heavens fo too;
the Air was calın and fer:ne; none of thoſe tumultuary motions
and conflicts of vapours, which the Mountains and the Winds
cáuſe in ours : 'Twas ſuited to a golden Age, and to the first
innocency of Nature.
All this you'll ſay is well, we are got into a pleaſant World in-
deed, but what's this to the purpoſe? what appearance of a Deluge
here, where there is not ſo much as a Sea, nor half ſo much Wa-
ter as we have in this Earth? or what appearance of Mountains,
or Caverns, or other irregularities of the Earth, where all is level
and united : So that inſtead of looſing the Knot, this ties it the
harder. You pretend to thew us how the Deluge was made, and
you lock up all the Waters within the womb of the Earth, and
ſet Bars and Doors, and a Wall of impenetrable ſtrength and
thickneſs to keep them there. And you pretend to ſhew us the
original of Rocks and Mountains, and Caverns of the Earth, and
bring us to a wide and endleſs plain, ſmooth as the calm Sea.
This is all true, and yet we are not ſo far from the light and
diſcovery of thoſe things as you imagine ; draw but the cur-
tain and theſe Scenes will appear, or ſomething very like them.
We muſt remember that S. Peter told us, that the Ante-diluvian
Earth periſh’d, or was demoliſh'd ; and Mofes faith, the great Abyſje
was broken open at the Deluge. Let us then ſuppaſe, that at a
time appointed by Divine Providence, and from Cauſes made ready
to do that great execution upon a ſinful World, that this Abafle was
open'd, or that the frame of the Earth broke and fell down into
the Great Abyſſe. At this one ſtroke all Nature would be chang'd,
and this ſingle action would have two great and viſible Effects. The
one Tranſient, and the other permanent. Firſt an univerſal Deluge
would overflow all the parts and Regions of the broken Earth,
during the great commotion and agitation of the Abydle, by the
violent fall of the Earth into it. This would be the firſt and un-
queſtionable effect of this diffolution, and all that World would be
deſtroyed. Then when the agitation of the Abyſle was afiwag'd,
and the Waters by degrees were retir'd into their Clianels, and the
dry land appear'd, you would ſee the true image of the preſent
Earth in the ruines of the firſt. The ſurface of the Globe would be
divided into Land and Sea ; the Land would conlilt of Plains and
Valleys and Mountains, according as the pieces of this ruine were
plac'd and diſpos’d: Upon the banks of the Sea would ſtand the
Rocks, and near the fhoar would be Illands, or leller fragınents
of Earth coinpaſs'd round by Water. Then as to Subterraneous
Waters, and all Subterraneous Caverns and hollownelles, upon this
ſuppoſition thoſe things could not be otherwiſe ; for the parts
would fall hollow in many places in this, as in all other ruines :
And ſeeing the Earth fell into this Abyſle, the Waters at a certain
height
48
Book).
The Theory of the Earth.
ܪ
height would flow into all thoſe hollow places and cavities; and
would alſo fink and inlinuatë into many parts of the folid Earth.
And though theſe Subterraneous Vaults ur holes, whether dry or
full of Water, would be more or leſs in all places, where the parts
fell hollow; yet they would be found eſpecially about the roots of
the Mountains, and the higher parts of the Earth; for there the
ſides bearing up one againſt the other, they could not lie ſo cloſe at
the bottoms, but many vacuities would be intercepted. Nor are there
any other inequalities or irregularities obſervable in the preſent forin
of the Earth ; whether in the ſurface of it, or interiour conſtruction,
whereof this hypotheſis doth not give a ready, fair, and intelligible
account ; and doth at one view repreſent them all to us, with
their cauſes, as in a glaſs: And whether that Glaſs be true, and
the Image anſwer to the Original, if you doubt of it, we will
hereafter examine them piece by piece. But in the firſt place, we
muſt conſider the General Deluge, how eaſily and truly this ſup-
poſition repreſenis and explains it, and anſwers all the properties
and conditions of it.
I think it will be eaſily allow'd, that ſuch a diſſolution of the
Earth as we have propos'd, and fall of it into the Abyſſe, would
certainly make an Univerſal Deluge ; and effectually deſtroy the
old World, which perith'd in it. But we liave not yet particularly
prov'd this diſolution, and in what manner the Deluge follow'd
upon it: And to aſſert things in groſs never inakes that firm im-
preſſion upon our underſtandings, and upon our belief, as to ſee
them deduc'd with their cauſes and circumſtances; And therefore
we muſt endeavour to ſhew what preparations there were in Na-
ture for this great diffolution, and after what manner it came to
paſs, and the Deluge in conſequence of it.
We have noted before, that Moſes imputed the Deluge to the
diſruption of the Abyſs ; and S. Peter, to the particular conſtitu-
tion of that Earth, which made it obnoxious to be abſorpt in Wa-
ter, ſo, that our explication fo far is juſtifi’d. But it was below
the dignity of thoſe Sacred Pen-men, or the Spirit of God that di-
rected them, to ſhew us the cauſes of this diſruption, or of this ab-
ſorption ; this is left to the enquiries of inen. For it was never
the deſign of Providence, to give ſuch particular explications of
Natural things, as ſhould make us idle, or the uſe of Reaſon un-
neceſſary; but on the contrary, by delivering great concluſions to
us, to excite our curioſity and inquiſitiveneſs after the inethods, by
which ſuch things were brought to paſs: And it may be there
is no greater trial or inſtance of Natural Wiſdom, than to find out
the Chanel, in which theſe great revolutions of Nature, which we
treat on, flow and ſucceed one another.
Let us therefore reſume that Syſtem of the Ante-diluvian Eartli,
which we have deduc'd from the Chaos, and which we find to an
ſwer S. Peter's deſcription, and Mofes his account of the Deluge.
This Earth could not be obnoxious to a Deluge, as the Apoſtle ſup-
poſeth it to have been, but by a diſſolution ; for the Abyfle was en-
clos'd within its bowels. And Mofes doth in effect tell us, there was
ſuch a diſſolution; when lie faith, The fountains of the great Abyſſe
wel
Chap.6. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
49
1
were broken open. For Fountains are broken open no otherwiſe than
hy breaking up the ground that covers thein? We muſt therefore
here inquire in what order, and from what cauſes the frame of
this exteriour Earth was diſolv'd, and then we ihall foon fee how,
upon that diſſolution, the Deluge immediately prevailid and over-
flow'd all the parts of it.
I do not think it in the power of humane wit to determine how
long this frame would ſtand, how many Years, or how many
Ages; but one would ſoon imagine, that this kind of ſtructure
would not be perpetual, nor laſt indeed many thouſands of Years,
if one conſider the effect that the heat of the Sun would have
upon
it and the Waters under it; drying and parching the one, and
rarefying the other into vapours. For we muſt conſider, triat the
courſe of the Sun at that tiine, or the poſture of the Earth to the
Sun, was ſuch, that there was no diverlity or alternation of
fraſons in the Year, as there is now; by reaſon of which alterna-
tion, our Earth is kept in an equality of temper, the contrary ſea-
fons balancing one another ; ſo as what inoiſture the heat of the
Summer ſucks out of the Earth, 'tis repaid in the Rains of the next
Winter ; and what chaps were made in it, are filld up again, and
the Earth reduc'd to its former conſtitution. But if we thould ima-
gine a continual Suminer, the Earth would proceed in drineſs still
inore and more, and the cracks would be wider and pierce deeper
into the ſubſtance of it; And ſuch a continual Summer there
was, at leaſt an equality of ſeaſons in the Ante-diluvian Earth, as
ſhall be prov'd in the following Book, concerning Paradiſe. In
the mean time this being ſuppos'd, let us conſider what effect it
would have upon this Arch of the exteriour Earth, and the Wa-
ters under it.
We cannot believe, but that the heat of the Sun, within the
ſpace of ſome hundreds of years, would have reduc'd this Earth to
a conſiderable degree of drineſs in certain parts; and alſo have
much rarefi'd and exhald the Waters beneath it: And conſider-
ing the ſtructure of that Globe, the exteriour cruſt, and the Wa-
ters lying round under it, both expos'd to the Sun, we may fitly
compare it to an Xolipile, or an hollow Sphere with Water in it,
which the heat of the Fire rarefies and turns into Vapours and
Wind. The Sun here is as the Fire, and the exteriour Earth is
as the Shell of the #olipile, and the Abyſſe as the Water within
it; now when the heat of the Sun had pierced through the Shell
and reach'd the Waters, it began to rarefie them, and raiſe them in-
to Vapours; which rarefaction made them require more ſpace and
room than they needed before, while they lay cloſe and quiet. And
finding themſelves pend in by the exteriour Earth, they preſs’d
with violence againſt that Arch, to make it yield and give way to
their dilatation and eruption. So we ſee all Vapours and Exha-
lations enclos’d within the Earth, and agitated there, ſtrive to
break out, and often ſhake the ground with their attempts to get
looſe. And in the compariſon we us'd ofan Æolipile, if the mouth
of it be ſtopt that gives the vent, the Water rarefi'd will burſt the
Veſſel with its force. And the reſemblance of the Earth to an Egg,
H
which
05
Book 1.
The Theory of the Earth.
which we us'd before, holds alſo in this reſpect; for when it heats
before the Fire, the moiſture and Air within being rarefid, makes
it often burit the Shell. And I do the more willingly mention this
laſt compariſon, becauſe I obſerve that ſome of the Ancients, when
they ſpeak of the doctrine of the Mundane Fgg, ſay, that after a
certain period of time it was broken.
But there is yet another thing to be conſider'd in this caſe; for
as the heat of the Sun gave force to theſe Vapours inorcand inore,
and made them more Rrong and violent ; ſo on the other hand,
it alſo weaken'd more and more the Arch of the Earth, that was
to reſiſt them; ſucking out the moiſturc that was the cement of
its parts, drying it immoderately, and chapping it in ſundry places.
And there being no Winter then to cloſe up and unite its parts,
and reſtore the Earth to its former ſtrength and compactneſs, it
grew more and more diſpos’d to a diffolution. And at length,
theſe preparations in Nature being made on either fide, the-forcé
of the Vapours increas'd, and the walls weaken’d, which ſhould
have kept them in, when the appointed time was come, that All-
wiſe Providence had deſign'd for the puniſhment of a ſinful World,
the whole fabrick brake, and the frame of the Earth was torn in
pieces, as by an Earthquake; and thoſe great portions or fraginenis,
into which it was divided, fell down into the Abyſſe, ſome in one
poſture, and ſome in another.
This is a ſhort and general account how we may conceive the
diſſolution of the firſt Earth, and an univerſal Deluge ariſing upon
it. And this manner of diſſolution hath ſo many examples in
Nature every Age, that we need not inſiſt farther upon the Ex-
plication of it. The generality of Earthquakes ariſe from like
cauſes, and often end in a like effect, a partial Deluge, or Inunda-
tion of the place or Country where they liappen; and of theſe we
have ſeen fome inſtanceseven in our own times: But whenfoever it
ſo happens that the Vapours and Exhalations ſhut up in the caverns
of the Earth, by rarefaction or coinpreſſion come to be ſtraitned,
they ſtrive every way to ſet themſelves at liberty, and often break
their priſon, or the cover of the Earth that kept them in; which
Earth upon that diſruption falls into the Subterraneous Caverns
that lie under it: And if it ſo happens that thoſe Caverns are full of
Water, as generally they are, if they be great or deep, that City or
tract of Land is drown'd. And alſo the fall of ſuch a maſs of
Earth, with its weight and bulk, doth often force out the Water
ſo impetuouſly, as to throw it upon all the Country round about.
There are innumerable examples in Hiſtory ( whereof we hall men
tion fome hereafter ) of Cities and Countries thus ſwallow'd
up,
or overflow'd, by an Earthquake, and an Inundation ariſing upon
it. And according to the manner of their fall or ruine, they either
reinain'd wholly under water, and perpetually drown'd, as Sodom
and Gomorrha, Plato's Atlantis, Bura and Helice, and other Citius
and Regions in Greece and Aſia; or they partly emerg'd, and be
came dry Land again; when ( their ſituation being pretty high )
the Waters, after their violent agitation was abated, retir'd into
the lower places, and into their Chanels.
Now
Chap.6. I be Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
51
1
Now if we compare thoſe partial diffolutions of the Earth with
an univ.rſal diſſolution, we may as ealily conceive an Univerſal De-
luge from an Univerſal Diſſolution, as a partial Deluge from a par-
tial. If we can concive a City, a Country, ari Illand, a Continent
thus abforpt and overſuwn; if we do but enlarge our thought and
imagination a little, we may conceive it as well of the whole Earth.
And it ſeems ſtrange to me, that none of the Ancients thould hit
upon this way of explaining the Univerſal Deluge; there being ſuch
frequent inſtances in all Ages and Countries of Inundations made in
this manner, and never of any grtat Inundation made otherwiſe,
unleſs in maritime Countries, by the irruption of the Sea into
grourds that lie low. Tis true, they would not ſo eaſily imagine
this Diſſolution, becauſe they did not underſtand the true form of
the Ante-diluvian Earth; but, methinks, the examination of the
Deluge ſhould have led them to the diſcovery of that: For obſerving
the difficulty, or impoſſibility of an Univerſal Deluge, without the
Diſſolution of the Earth; as alſo frequent inſtances of theſe Dillo-
lutious accompany'd with Deluges, where the ground was hollow,
and had Subterraneous Waters; this, methinks, ſhould have promp-
ted them to imagine, that thoſe Subterraneous Waters were univer-
ſal at that time, or extended quite round the Earth; ſo as a diſſo-
lution of the exteriour Earth could not be made any where but it
would fall into Waters, and be more or leſs overflowd. And
when they had once reacht this thought, they might conclude both
what the form of the Ante-diluvian Earth was, and that the De-
luge came to paſs by the diſſolution of it. But we reaſon with eaſe
about the finding out of things, when they are once found out;
and there is but a thin paper-wall ſometimes between the great dif-
covcries and a perfect ignorance of them. Let us proceed now to
conſider, whether this ſuppolition will anſwer all the conditions
of an Univerſal Deluge, and ſupply all the defects which we found
in other Explications.
The great difficulty propos'd, was to find Water ſufficient to
make an Univerſal Deluge, reaching to the tops of the Mountains ;
and yet that this Water ſhould be tranſient, and after ſome time
ſhould fo return into its Chanels, that the dry Land would ap-
pear, and the Earth become again habitable. There was that
double impoſſibility in the common opinion, that the quantity of
Water neceſſary for ſuch a Deluge was no where to be found, or
could no way be brought upon the Earth; and then if it was
brought, could no way be remov'd again. Our explication quite
takes off the edge of this Objection ; for, perforining the ſame ef-
fect with a far leſs quantity of Water, 'tis both eaſie to be found,
and eaſily remov'd when the work is done. When the exteriour
Earth was broke, and fell into the Abyſſe, a good part of it was
cover'd with Water by the meer depth of the Abyile it fell into,
and thoſe parts of it that were higher than the Abyſſe was deep,
and conſequently would ſtand above it in a calm Water, were
notwithſtanding reacht and overtopd by the waves, during the
agitation and violent commotion of the Abyſſe. For it is not ima-
ginable what the commotion of the Abyſſe would be upon this
H 2
diffolu-
52
Book 1.
The Theory of the Earth.
diffolution of the Earth, nor to what height its waves would be
thrown, when thoſe prodigious fragments were tumbled down in-
to it. Suppoſe a ſtone of ten thouſand weight taken up into the
Air a inile or two, and then let fall into the middle of the Ocean,
I do not believe but that the daſhing of the water upon that im-
preſſion, would riſe as high as a Mountain. But ſuppoſe a mighty
Rock or heap of Rocks to fall from that height, or a great Illand,
or a Continent; theſe would expel the waters out of their places,
with ſuch a force and violence, as to Aing them among the higheſt
Clouds.
'Tis incredible to what height ſometimes gréat Stones and Cin-
ders will be thrown, át che eruptions of fiery Mountains; and the
preſſure of a great maſs of Earth falling into the Abyſſe, though it
be a force of another kind, could not but impel the water with ſo
much ſtrength, as would carry it up to a great height in the Air:
and to the top of any thing that lay in its way, any eminency, high
fragment, or new Mountain: And then rowling back again, it
would ſweep down with it whatſoever it ruſht upon, Woods,
Buildings, living Creatures, and carry thein all headlong into the
great gulph. Sometimes a maſs of water would be quite fruck off
and ſeparate from the reſt, and toſt through the Air like a flying
River ; but the common motion of the waves was to climb up the
hills, or inclin'd fragments; and then return into the valleys and
deeps again, with a perpetual fluctuation going and coming, aſcen-
ding and deſcending, till the violence of them being ſpent by de
grees, they ſetled at laſt in the places allotted for them; where
bounds are ſet that they cannot pafs over, that they return not again to
cover the Earth.
Neither is it to be wonder'd, that the great Tumult of the wa-
ters, and the extremity of the Deluge laſted for ſome inonths; for
beſides, that the firſt ſhock and commotion of the Abyſſe was ex-
tremely violent, from the general fall of the Earth, there were ever
and anon ſome ſecondary ruines; or ſome parts of the great ruine,
that were not well ſetled, broke again, and made new commotions:
And 'twas a confiderable time before the great fragments that fell,
and their leſſer dependencies could be ſo adjuſted and fitted, as to
reſt in a frin and immoveable poſture: For the props and ſtays
wliereby they lean'd one upon another, or upon the bottom of the
Abyffe, often faild, either by the incumbent weight, or the vio-
lent impulſes of the water againſt them; and ſo renew'd, or con-
tinu'd the diſorder and confuſion of the Abyſſe. Beſides, we are to
obſerve, that theſe great fragments falling hollow, they inclos'd
and bore down with them under their concave ſurface a great deal
of Air and while the water compaſs’d thefe fragments, and over
flow'd them, the Air could not readily get out of thoſe priſons, but
by degrees, as the Earth and Water above would give way; ſo as
this would alſo hinder the ſettlement of the Abyſſe, and the re-
tiring of the Water into thoſe Subterraneous Chanels, for ſome
time. But at length, when this Air had found a vent, and left its
place to the Water, and the ruines, both primary and ſecondary,
were (etted and fix'd, then the Waters of the Abyſſe began to ſettle
Plal. 104.6)
7, 8, y.
too
Chap.7. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
53
w
too, and the dry Land to appear; firſt the tops of the Mountains,
then the high Grounds, then the Plains and the reſt of the Earth.
And this gradual ſubſidency of the Abyfle (which Mofes alſo hath
particularly noted), and diſcovery of the ſeveral parts of the Earth,
would alſo take up a conſiderable time.
Thus a new World appear'd, or the Earth put on its new form,
and became divided into Sea, and Land; and the Abyſſe, which
from ſeveral Ages, even from the beginning of the World, had lain
hid in the womb of the Earth, was brought to light and diſco-
verd; the greateſt part of it conſtituting our preſent Ocean, and
the reſt filling the lower cavities of the Earth : Upon the Land ap-
pear'd the Mountains and the Hills, and the Iſlands in the Sea, and
the Rocks upon the ſhore. And ſo the Divine Providence, having
prepard Nature for ſo great a change, at one ſtroke diffolv'd the
frame of the old World, and made us a new one out of its ruines;
which we now inhabit ſince the Deluge. All which things being
thus explain'd, deducd, and ſtated, we now add and pronounce
our Third and laſt Propoſition ; That the diſruption of the Abyſſe, or
diſſolution of the primaval Farth and its fall into tbe sbyfje, mas the
cauſe of the Itniverſal Deluge, and of the deſtruction of the old World.
CHA P. VII.
That the Explication we have given of an Univerſal Deluge
is not an Idea only, but an account of what really came to
paſs in this Earth, and the true Explication of Noah's
Flood; as is prov'd by Argument and from Hiſtory. An
Examination of Tehom-Rabba,' or the great Abyſſe, and
that by it the Sea cannot be underſtood, nor the Subter-
raneous Waters, as they are at preſent. What the true
Notion and Form of it was, collected from Moſes and
other Sacred Writers; The frequent alluſions in Scri-
pture to the opening and ſhutting the Abyſſe, and the para
ticular ſtile of Scripture in its reflections on the Origin,
And the Formation of the Earth. Obſervations on Deu-
calion's Deluge.
W
E have now given an account of the firſt great revolution
of Nature, and of the Univerſal Deluge, in a way that is in-
telligible, and from cauſes that anſwer the greatneſs of the effect;
We have ſuppos’d nothing but what is alſo prov'd, both as to the
firſt forin of the Earth, and as to the manner of its Diſſolution:
and how far from that would evidently and neceflarily ariſe a ge-
neral Deluge; which was that, which put a period to the old
World, and the firſt ſtate of things. And though all this hath
been deduc'd in due order, and with connexion and conſequence
of
54
Book.
The Theory of the Earth.
of one thing upon another, ſo far as I know, which is the true
evidence of a Theory ; yet it may not be ſufficient to command the
Aflent and belief of ſome perſons, who will allow, it may be, and
acknowledge, that this is a fair Idea of a poſſible Deluge in geneial,
and of the deſtruction of a World by it; but this may be only an
Idea, they'll ſay; we deſire it inay bu prov'd froin fume collateral
arguments, taken either from Sacred Hiſtory, or from obſervation,
that this hath really been exemplified upon the Earth, and that
No.zh's Flood came to paſs this way. And ſeeing we have deſign d
this firſt Book chiefly for the Explication of Noah's Deluge, I am
willing to add here a Chapter or two extraordinary upon this oc-
caſion; to ſhew, that what we have deliver'd is more than an Idea,
and that it was in this very way that Noah's Deluge came to paſs
.
But they who have not this doubt, and have a mind to ſee the
iſſue of the Theory, inay skip theſe two Chapters, if they pleaſe,
and proceed to the following, where the order is continued.
To ſatisfie then the doubtful in this particular, let us lay down
in the firſt place that concluſion which they ſeem to admit, viz.
That this is a poſſible and conſiſtent Explication of an Univerſal
Deluge; and let's ſee how far this would go, if well conſiderd,
towards the proof of what they deſire, or towards the demonſtra-
tion of Noah's Deluge in particular. It is granted on both hands,
that there hath been an Univerſal Deluge upon the Earth, which
was Noah's Deluge ; and it is alſo granted, that we have given a
poſſible and conſiſtent Idea of an Univerſal Deluge ; Now we have
prov'd Chap. II.and 11 l. that all other ways hitherto aſſign’d for the
Explication of Noah's Flood are incongruous or impoſſible ; there-
fore it came to paſs in that poſſible and competent way which we
have propos’d. “And if we have truly prov'd, in the foremention'd
Chapters, the impoſſibility or unintelligibility of it in all other ways,
this argumentation is undeniable. Beſides, we may argue thus, as
it is granted that there hath been an Univerſal Deluge upon the
Earth; ſo I ſuppoſe it will be granted that there hath been but one:
Now the diffolution of the Earth, whenfoever it happen'd, would
make one Univerſal Deluge, and therefore the only one, and the
ſame with Noah's. That ſuch a Diſſolution as we have deſcrib’d,
would make an Univerſal Deluge, I think, cannot be queſtion d ;
and that there hath been ſuch a diſſolution, belides what we have
already alledg’d, ſhall be prov'd at large from natural Obſervations
upon the Form and Figure of the preſent Earth, in the Third Section
and lalt. Chap. of this Book; In the mean time we will proceed to
Hiſtory, both Sacred and Profane, and by comparing our Expli-
cation with thoſe, give further aſſurance of its truth and reality.
In the firſt place, it agrees, which is moſt conſiderable, with
Moſes's Narration of the Deluge; both as to the matter and man-
ner of it. The matter of the Deluge Moſes makes to be the Waters
from above, and the Waters from below; or he diſtinguiſhes the
Cauſes of the Deluge, as we do, into Superiour and Inferiour ; and
the Inferiour cauſes he makes to be the diſruption of the Abyſs
,
which is the principal part, and the great hinge of our Explication
Then as to the manner of the Deluge, the beginning and the
ending
$
Gen. 7. II!.
Chap.7. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
55
1
.ر ,3
ending, the increaſe and decreaſe, he ſaith it increas'd gradually, ver. 17, 18,
and decreas'd gradually, by going and coming ; that is after many re- 19920. cap. 8.
peated fluctuations and reciprocations of the waves, the waters of
the Abyſſe began to be more compos'd, and to retire into their
Chanels, whence they ſhall never return to cover the Earth again.
This agrees wholly with our Theory; we ſuppoſe the Abyfle to
have been under an extream commotion and agitation by the fall
of the Earth into it, and this at firſt encreas'd more and more, till
the whole Earth was faln ; Then continuing for ſome time at the
height of its rage, overwhelming the greateſt Mountains, it after-
wards decreas'd by the like degrees, leaving firſt the tops of the
Mountains, then tlie Hills and the Fields, till the Waters came to
be wholly drawn off the Earth into their Chanels.
It was no doubt a great overſight in the Ancients, to fanfie the
Deluge like a great ſtanding Pool of water, reaching from the bot-
iom of the Valleys to the tops of the Mountains, every where alike,
with a level and uniforin ſurface; by reaſon of which miſtaken 110-
tion of the Deluge, they made more water neceſſary to it than was
poſſible to be had, or being had, than it was poſſible to get quit of
again; for there are no Chanels in the Earth that could hold ſo
much water, either to give it, or to receive it. And the Pſalmiſt vid. St. Au-
ſpeaking of the Deluge, as it ſeems to nie, notes this violent com- fiin in loc.
motion of the Abyſſe. The laters went up by the Mountains, came Pſil. 104.
down by the Valleys unto the place which thou haſt founded for them. I verſ. 8, 9.
know ſome interpret that paſſage of the ſtate of the waters in the
beginning, when they cover'd the face of the whole Earth, Gen. I.
2. but that cannot be, becauſe of what follows in the next Verſe
Thou haſt fet a bound that they may not paſs over ; that they turn not again
to cover the Earth. Which is not true, if the preceding words be un-
derſtood of the ſtate of the waters at the beginning of the World ;
for they did paſs thoſe bounds, and did return ſince that time to
cover the Earth, namely at the Deluge: But if theſe words be re-
fer'd to the time of the Deluge, and the ſtate of the waters then,
'tis both a juſt deſcription of the motion of the Abyſſe, and certain-
ly true, that the waters since that time are ſo ſetled in their Cha-
nels, that they ſhall never overfow the Earth again. As we are af.
ſured by the promiſe made to Noah, and that illuſtrious pledge and
confirmation of it, the Rainbow, that the Heavens alſo ſhall never
pour out ſo much waters again; their ſtate being chang'd as well
as that of the Earth, or Sea, from what they were before the De-
luge.
But before we leare Mofis's Narration of the Deluge, we muſt
examine further, what is, or can be underſtood by his TEHOM-
R A B BA, or great Abyſſe, which he faith was broken up at the Gen. 7. 13:
Deluge ; for this will help us to diſcover, whether our Explicati-
on be the ſaine with his, and of the ſame Flood. And firſt we muſt
conſider, whether by the Tebom-Rabba, or Moſaical Abyſſe, can be
underſtood the Sea or Ocean, under that form we ſee it in at pre-
ſent; and ’tis plain, methinks, that the Sea cannot be underſtood
by this great Abyffe, both becauſe the Sea is not capable upon any
diſruption to make ſuch an univerſal Deluge; and becauſe the Nar-
ration
3
56
,
The Theory of the Earth. Book).
ration of Mofes, and his expreſſions concerning this Abyſle, do not
agree to the Sea. Some of the Ancients indeed did imagine, that
the waters of the Sea were much higher than the Land, and ſtood,
as it were, on an heap; fu as when theſe waters were let leo!e, they
overflow'd the Earth, and made a Deluge. But this is known to be
a groſs iniftake; the Sea and the Land make one Globe, and the
Waters couch themſelves, as cloſe as may be, to the center of this
Globe in a Spherical convexity ; fu that iſ all the Mountains and
overflow its ſincoth ſurface; much leſs could they overfiuw it in
the form that it is now in, where the Shores are higlier than the
Sea, the Inland parts than the Shores, and the Mountains ſtill far
above all: So as no diſruption of the Sea could make an univerſal
Deluge, by reaſon of its i.tulation. But beſides that, the quantity of
Water conta n'd in the Sea is no way ſufficient to make a Deluge in
the preſent form of the Earth ; for we have ſhewn before, Ghazp. 2.
that Eight ſuch Oceans as ours would be little enough for that pur-
poſe. Then as to the expreſſions of Mufes concerning this Abyffe,
if he had meant the Sea by it, and that the Deluge was made by the
diſruption oi the Sea, why did he not ſay ſo? There is no mention
of the Sea in all the Hiſtory of the Deluge: Moſes had mention'd
the Sea before, Gen. 1. 10. and us'd a word that was common and
known to ſignifie the Sea ; And if he had a mind to expreſs the
ſame thing here, why ſhould le not uſe the ſame word and the
ſame term ? In an Hiſtorical relation we uſe terins that are most
proper and beſt known; but inſtead of that he uſeth the ſame term
here that he did, Gen. 1. 2. when he faith, Darkneſs was upon the
face of the Abyſſe, or of the Deep, as we render it; there the Abyffe
was open, or cover'd with darkneſs only, nair.ely before the exte.
rior Earth was form’d; Here the ſame Abyffe is mention'd again,
but cover'd, by the forination of the Earth upon it; and the cover-
ing of this Abylle was broken or cloven aſunder, and the Waters
guſht out that made the Leluge. This I am ſure is the moſt natural
interpretation or ſignification of this word, according as it is us’d
in Moſes's writings. Furthermore, we muſt obſerve what Moses
faith concerning this Abyſſe, and whether that will agree with the
Sea or no ; he faith the Fountains of the great Abyſſe were broken open ;
now if by the great Abyſſe you underſtand the Sea, low are its
Fountains broken open ? To break open a Fountain, is to break open
the ground that covers it, and what ground covers tlie Sea : So that
upon all conſiderations, either of the word that Misis here uſeth,
Tehun-Rabka, or of the thing affirmed concerning it, breaking open
its Fountains ; or of the effect following the breaking open its Foun-
tains, drowning of the Earth ; from all theſe heads it is manifeft, that
the Sea cannot be underſtood by the great Abyſſe, whoſe diſrupti-
on was the cauſe of the Deluge.
And as the Mofaical Abyſſe cannot be the Sea, ſo neither can it
be thoſe Subterraneous waters that are diſperſt in the Cells and Ca-
verns of the Earth; for as they are now lodg’d within the Earth,
they are not one Abyſſe, but ſeveral Ciſterns and Receptacles of wa-
ter, in ſeveral places, eſpecially under the roots of Mountains and
Hills
7
:
Chap.7. I he Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
57
I fills; ſeparate cne from another, ſometimes by whole Regions
and Countries interpos'd. Beſides wlia. Fountains, if they were
broken up, could let out this water, or bring it upon the face of
thie Earth? When we ſink a Mine, or dig a Well, the waters,
wlien uncover d, do not leap out of their places, out of thoſe Ca
vities, or at leait, do not fow upon the Earth.;. 'Tis not as if you
open'd a Vein, where the Bloud ſpirts out, and riſeth higher than
its Source ; but' as when you take off thë cover of a Verrel, the
water doth not fly out for that: So if we ſhould imagine all the
Subterraneous Caverns of the Earth uncover'd, and the waters laid
bare, there they would lie unmoy'd in their beds, if the Earth did
not fall into them to force them up. Furtherinore, if theſe waters
were any way extracted and laid upon the ſurface of the ground,
nothing would be gain'd as to the Deluge by that, for as much
water would run into theſe holes again when the Deluge begun to
riſe; ſo that this would be but an uſeleſs labour, and turn to no ac-
count. And laſtly, Theſe waters are no way ſuņcient for quantity
to anſwer to the Mofaical Abyſs, or to be the principal cauſe of the
Deluge, as that was.
Now ſeeing neither the Scä, as it is at preſent, nor the Subterra-
neous Waters, as they are at preſent, can anſwer to the Mofaica!
Abyſſe, we are ſure there is nothing in this preſent Earth that can
anſwer to it. Let us then on the other hand compare it with that
Subterraneous Abyſs, which we have found in the Alte-diluvian
Earth, repreſented 5 Fig. 2. and examine their characters and cor- P.40:
reſpondency: Firſt, Moſes's Abyſs was cover'd, and 'Subterrane-
ous, for the Fountains of it are ſaid to have been cloven or burſt
open; then it was vaſt and capacious ; and thirdly, it was ſo dif:
pos’d, as to be capable of a diſruption, that would cauſe an uni-
verſal Deluge to the Earth. Our Ante-diluvian Abyſs anſivers truly
to all theſe characters ; 'twas in the womb of the Earth ; the Earth
was founded upon thoſe Waters, as the Pſalmiſt ſaith; or they
were enelos'd within the Earth as in a Bag. Then for the capa-
city of it, it contained both all the Waters now in the Ocean, and
all thoſe that are diſpers'd in the Caverns of the Earth: And laſtly,
it is manifeſt its ſituation was ſuch, that upon a diſruption or
diſſolution of the Earth which cover'd it, an univerſal Deluge
would ariſe. Seeing then this anſwers the deſcription, and all the
propertics of the Moſaicab Abyſſe, and nothing elſe will, how can
we in reaſon judge it otherwiſe than the ſame, and the very thing
intended and propos'd in the Hiſtory of Noah's Deluge under the
name of Tehom-Rabba, or the great Abyſs, at whoſe diſruption the
World was over-flow’d. And as we do not think it an unhappy
diſcovery to have found out (with a moral certainty) the feat of
the Mofaical Abyſs, whicli hath been almoſt as much fought for,
and as much in vain, as the ſeat of Paradiſe ; fo this gives us a great
allurance, that the Theory we have given of a general Deluge, is
not a meer Idea, but is to be appropriated to the Deluge of No.zh,
as a true explication of it.
And to proceed now from Mofes to other Divine Writers
That our Deſcription is a reality, both as to the Ante-diluvian
I
Earth
58
The Theory of the Earth. BOOK I.
}
Earth, and is to the Deluge, we may further be convinc'd from
2 Epift. 3. 6. S. Peter's diſcourſe concerning thoſe two things. $. Peter faith, that
the conſtitution of the Ante-diluvian Earth was ſuch, in reference
to the Waters, that by rca ſon of that it was obnoxious to a De-
luge; we ſay theſe Waters were the great Abyſle it ſtood upon, ,
by reaſon whereof that World was really expos d to a Deluge, and
overwhelm'd in it upon the diſruption of this Abyſs, as Moſes wit-
neſſes. 'Tis true, S. Peter doth not ſpecifie what thoſe waters
were, nor mention either the Sea, or the Abyſs; but ſeeing Moses
tells us, that it was by the waters of the Abyſs that the Earıh was
overwhelm'd, S. Peter's waters muſt be underſtood of the ſame Abyſs,
becauſe he ſuppoſeth them the cauſe of the ſame Deluge. And, I
think, the Apoſtle's diſcourſe there cannot receive a better illuftra-
tion, than from Moſes's Hiſtory of the Deluge. Moſes diſtinguiſhes
the Cauſes of the Flood into thoſe that belong to the Heavens, and
thofe that belong to the Earth; the Rains and the Abyſs : S. Peter
alſo diſtinguiſheth the cauſes of the Deluge into the conſtitution of
the Heavens, in reference to its waters, and the conſtitution of the
Earth, in reference to its waters; and no doubt tliey both aim at
the ſame cauſes, as they refer to the ſame effect; only Mufes men-
tions the immediate Cauſes, the Rains and the Waters of the
Abyſs; and S. Peter menţions the more remote and fundamental
cauſes, that conſtitution of the Heavens, and that conſtitution of
the Earth, in reference to their reſpective Waters, which made
that world obnoxious to a Deluge: And theſe two ſpeaking of No-
ah's Deluge, and agreeing thus with one another, and both with
us, or with the Theory, which we have given of a General De-
luge, we may ſafely conclude, that it is no imaginary Idea, but a
true account of that Ancient Flood, whereof Mifes hath left us the
Hiſtory.
And ſeeing the right underſtanding of the Mofaical Abyffe is ſuf-
ficient alone to prove all we have deliver'd concerning the Deluge,
as alſo concerning the frame of the Ante-diluvian Earth, give me
leave to take notice here of ſome other places of Scripture, which
we mention'd before, that ſeem inanifeſtly to deſcribe this fame
form of the Abyſs with the Earth aboveit, Pfal. 24.2. He founded
4 Efdr.16.58. the Earth upon the Seas, and eſtabliſh'd it upon the Floods; and Pſal. 13€.
6. He ſtretched out the Earth above the Waters. Now this ſoundation
of the Earth upon the Waters, or extenſion of it above the Waters,
doth moſt aptly agree to that ſtructure and ſituation of the Abyſs
Chat. 6.
and the Ante-diluvian Earth, which we have aſſign'd them, and
which we liave before deſcrib’d; but very improperly and forc’dly
to the preſent form of the Earth and the Waters. In that ſecond
place of the P/almiſt, the word may be render'd either, he ſiretch'd,
as we read it, or he fixt and conſolidated the Earth above the Waters,
as the Vulgate and Septuagint tranſlate it: For 'tis from the fame
word with that which is ufed for the Firmament, G(m. I. So that
as the Firmainent was extended over and around the Earth, ſo was
the Earth extended over and about the Waters, in that firſt con-
ſtitution of things; and I remember ſome of the Ancients uſe this
very compariſon of the Firmament and Earth, to expreſs the
ſituation
Chap.7. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth,
59
Very well
i
fituation of the Paradiſiacal Earth in reference to the Sea or Abyſſe.
There is another remarkable place in the Pfzılıs, to thew the diſ-
poſition of the Waters in the firſt Earth ; Pfill. 33. 7. He gathereth
the Waters of the Sea'as in a Bag, he layeth up the Abyffes in ſtore-houſes.
This anſwers very fitly and naturally 10 the place and diſpolition of
the Abyſſe which it had before the Deluge, inclos'd within the
vault of the Earth, as in a Bag or in a Store houſe. I know
what I render here in a Bag, is render'd in the English, as an heap;
but that tranſlation of the word ſeems to be grounded on the old
Error', that the Sea is higher than the Land, and ſo doth not make
a true ſence. Neither are the two parts of the Veiſe ſo well ſuited
and conſequent one to another; if the firſt expreſs an high ſituation
of the Waters, and the ſecond a low one. And accordingly, the
Vulgate, Septuagint, and Oriental Verſions and Paraphraſe, as alſo
Symmachus, St. Jerome, and Baſil, render it as we do here, in a Bag,
or by terins equivalent.
To theſe paſſages of the Pfulmiſt, concerning the form of the
Abyſſe and the firſt Earth, give me leave to add this general remark,
that they are commonly uſhered in, or followed, with ſomething
of Admiration in the Prophet. We obſerv'd before, that the for-
mation of the firſt Earth, after ſuch a wonderful manner, being a
piece cf Divine Architecture, when it was ſpoken of in Scripture,
it was uſually aſcrib'd to a particular Providence, and accordingly
we ſee in theſe places now mention'd, that it is ſtill made the ob-
ject of praiſe and admiration : In that 136 Pſalm 'tis reckon'd
among the wonders of God, l'erf
. 4,5,6. Give praiſe to him mrho d-
kine doth great wonders ; To him that by wiſdom made the Heavens : To
him that ſtretched out the Earth above the Waters. And in like manner,
in that 33 P/alm, 'tis joyn’d with the forming of the Heavens, and
made the ſubject of the Divine Power and Wiſdom : Verf. 6,7,8,9.
By the word of the Lord were the Heavens made, and all the Hoft of them
by the breath of his mouth ; He gathereth the laters of the Sea together,
as in a Bag, he layeth up the Abyſte in Store-honfes. Let all the Earth
fear the Lord; Let all the Inhabitants of the World ſtand in inre of him;
For he Spake, and it was; he commanded, and it ſtood faft. Namely,
all things ſtoud in that wonderful poſture in which the Word of his
Power and Wiſdom had eſtabliſht them. David often made the
works of Nature, and the External World, the matter of his Me-
ditations, and of his praiſes and Philoſophical Devotions ; reflecting
fumetimes upon the preſent form of the World, and ſometimes up-
on the primitive form of it: And though Poetical expreſſions as the
Pſalms are, ſeldom are ſo determinate and diſtinct, but that they
may be inie! preted more than one way, yet, I think, it cannot but
be acknowledg’d, that thoſe expreſſions and paſſages that we have
infanc'd in, are more fairly and aptly underſtond of the Ancient
forin of the Sea, or the Abyſſe, as it was enclos'd within the Earth,
than of the preſent form of it in an open Chanel.
There are alſo in the Book of Job many noble reflections upon the
works of Nature, and upon the formation of the Earth and the
Abyffe; whereof that in Chap. 26. 7. He ſtretcheth out the North over
the Empty places, and hangeth the Earth upoil nothing, ſeems to parallel
the
I 2
60
1
Book I.
The Theory of the Earth.
D
the expreſſion of David ; He ſtretched out the Earth upon the l'aters;
for the word we render the empty place is TOHLI, which is appli’d
to the Chaos and the firſt Abyſle, Gen. 1. 2. and the hanging the
Earth upon nothing is much more wonderful, if it be underſtood op
the firſt habitable Earth, that hung over the Waters, ſuſtain'd by
nothing but its own peculiar forin, and the libration of its parts,
than if it be underſtood of the preſent Earth, and the whole body
of it; for if it be in its Center or proper place, whither quould it
link further, or whithier Ihould it go? But this paſſage, together
with the foregoing and following Verſes, requires a more critical
examina:ion than this Diſcourſe will eaſily bear.
There is another remarkable Diſcourſe in Job, that contains ma-
ny things to our preſent purpoſe, 'tis Chap. 38. where Cod reproa-
ches Job with his ignorance of what paſs’d at the bezinning of the
World, and the forination of the Eaith, l’erf. 4,5,6. Ilbere wall
thou when I laid the foundations of the E.urth ? Declare if thou hast 11-
derſtanding : Who hath laid the meaſures thereof, if thou kuorrejt ; or
who hath ftretched the line upon it? Whereupon are the foundations there-
of faſtned, or urbo laid the corner-ſtorie ? All theſe queſtions have far
more force and Emphalis, inore propriety and elegancy, if they be
underſtood of the firſt and Ante-diluvian form of the Earth, than if
they be underſtood of the preſent ; for in the preſent form of the
Earth there is no Architecture, no ſtructure, no more than in a
ruine ; or at leaſt none comparatively to what was in the firſt form
of it. And that the exterior and ſuperficial part of the Earth is
here ſpoken of, appears by the rule and line appli'd to it; but what
rule or regularity is there in the ſurface of the preſent Earth? what
line was us'd to level its parts ? But in its original conſtruction wlien
it lay ſmooth and regular in its ſurface, as if it had been drawn by
rule and line in every part; and when it hung pois'd uson the
Deep, without pillar or foundation ſtone, then juſt proportion:
were taken, and every thing plac'd by weight and meaſure: And
this, I doubt not, was that artificial ſtructure here alluded to, and
when this work was finiſht, then the morning Stars Suing together, and
all the Sons of God ſhouted for joy.
Thus far the queſtions proceed upon the form and conſtruction
of the firſt Earth; in the following verſes (8, 9, 10, 11.) they pro-
ceed upon the demolition of that Earth, the opening the Abyffe',
and the preſent ſtate of both. Or who ſhut up the Sea with doors ir ben
it brake forth, as if it had iſſu'd out of a momb? Who can doubt but
this was at the breaking open of the Fountains of the Abyſſe, Gen. 4.
11. when the waters guht out, as out of the great womb of Nil-
ture ; and by reaſon of that confuſion and perturbation of Air and
Water that riſe upon it, a thick milt and darkneſs was round the
Farth, and all things as in a ſecond Chaos, When I m:ide the cloud the
gairment thereof, and thick darkneſs a ſwadling band for it, and brake up
for it my decreed place, and made bars and doors. Nainely, (taking the
Words as thus uſually render’d) the preſent Chanel of ihe Sea was
made when the Abyſſe was broke up, and at the ſame time were
made the ſhory Rocks and Mountains which are the bars and boun-
daries of the Sea. And ſaid hitherto Malt thou come, and no further,
und
i'ci.
.
Chap.7. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth. 61
מן
and here ſhall thy proud waves be ſtay'd. Which laſt ſentence ſhows,
that this cannot be underſtood of the firſt diſpoſition of the waters
as they were before the Flood, for their proud waves broke thoſe
bounds, whatſoever they were, when they overflow'd the Earth in
the Deluge. And that the wronb which they broke out of was the
great Abyſs, the Chaldee Paraphraſe in this place doth exprelly
mention; and what can be underſtood by ile wimb if the Farth, onion
but that Subterraneous capacity in which the Abyſs lay? Then that
which followeth, is a deſcription or repreſentation of the great
Deluge that enſu’d,and of that diſorder in Nature,that was then,and
how the Waters were ſetled and Bounded afterwards: Not unlike
the deſcription in the 104 Pfulm, verb. 6,7,8,9. and thus much for
theſe places in the book of Job.
There remains a remarkable diſcourſe in the Proverbs of Solomon,
relating to the Mofaical Abyſle, and not only to that, but to the
Origin of the Earth in general; where Wiſdom declares her anti-
quity and pre-exiſtence to all the works of this Earth, Chap. 8. ver.
23.24,25,26,27,28. I was ſet up from everlaſting, from the begin-
ning, ere the Earth was. When there were 120 Deeps or Abyſſes, I was
brought fortlt; when 110 fountains abounding with water. Then in the
27. verſe, When he prepared the Heavens, I was there; when he fet a
Compaſs upon the face of the Deep or Abyſſe. When be eſtabliſhed the
Clouds above, when he ſtrengthned the fountains of the Abyffe. Here is
mention made of the Abuſe, and of the Fountains of the Abyſle, and
who can queſtion, but that the Fountains of the Abyſs here, are
the ſame with the Fountains of the Abyſs which Mofes mentions,
and were broken open, as he tells us, at the Deluge ? Let us ob
ſerve therefore what form Wiſdom gives to this Abyſs, and conſe-
quently to the Moſaic.il: And here ſeein to be two expreſſions that
determine the form of it, verf. 28. He ſtrengthned thc fountains of the
Abyſſe, that is, the cover of thoſe Fountains, for the Fountains
could be ſtrengthned no other way than by making a ſtrong cover
or Arch over thein. And that Arch is expreſt more fully and
diſtinctly in the foregoing verſe, It hen be prep.ir'd the Heavens, I
was there; irhen he fet a Compaſs on the face of the Absfſe; we ren-
der it Compaſs, the word ſignifies a Circle or Circumference, or an
Orb or Sphere. So there was in the beginning of the World a
Sphere Orb or Arch ſet round the Abyſs, according to the teſtimo
ny of Wiſdom, who was then preſent. And this ſhews us both the
form oi the Mofisical Abyſs, which was included within this Vault:
and the form of the habitable Earth, which was the outward fur
face of this Vault, or the cover of the Abyſs that was broke up at
And thus much, I think, is ſufficient to have noted out of Scri
pture, concerning the Mofisc.l Abyſs, to diſcover the forin, place
and ſituation of it ; which I have done the inore largely, becauſe
that being determin'd, it will draw in eaſily all the reſt of our The
ory concerning the Deluge. I will now only add one or two ge
neral Obſervations, and fo conclude this diſcourſe; The first Ob-
fervation is concerning the Abyſs ; namely, That the opening and
Jhutting of the Abyſſe, is the great hinge upon which Nature turns in
this'
the Deluge.
.
62
Book 1.
The Theory of the Earth.
I 2,161
20. 1, 2, 3-
21. I.
10.
Verſe 13.
this Earth : This brings another face of things, other Scenes and a
New World upon the Itage: And accordingly it is a thing often
mention'd and alluded to in Scripture, ſometimes in a Natural,
ſometimes in a Moral or Thcological fence; and in both fences, our
Saviour Thuts and opens it as he pleaſeth. Our Saviour, who is
both Lord of Nature and of Grace, whole Dominion is both in
Heaven and in Earth, hath a double key; that of the Abyſs, where-
Fob 11. 109 by Death and Hell are in his power, and all the revolutions of Na-
Apoc. I. 18.
ture are under his Conduct and Providence ; And the Key of Da-
vid, whereby he admits or excludes from the City of God, and the
Kingdom of Heaven whon he pleaſeth. Of thoſe places that refer
Afoi. 3. 7.
1/4.22.22. to the ſhutting and opening the Abyſs in a natural fence, I can-
not but particularly take notice of that in Job, Chap. 12. ver. 14,15.
ở Chat. II.
God breaketh dumn, and it cannot be built again: he shutteth up man,
and there coin be no opening : Behold, he rriskholdeth the waters, and
they dry up; alſo he ſendeth them cut, and they overturn the Earth.
Though theſe things be true of God in leſſer and common inſtances,
yet to me it is plain, that they principally refer to the Deluge, the
opening and ſhutting the Abyſs, with the diſſolu ion or ſubverſion
of the Earth thereupon; and accordingly they are made the great
effects of the Divine Power and Wiſdom in the foregoing Verſe,
With God is miſdom and ſirength, he hath counſel and underſtanding;
Behold, he breaketh down, &c. And alſo in the concluſion 'tis re-
Verſe 6. peated again, With him is firength and miſdom; which folemnity
would ſcarce have been us'd for common inſtances of his power.
When God is ſaid to build or pull down, and no body can build
again, 'tis not to be underſtood of an Houſe or a Town, God builds
and unbuilds Worlds; and who ſhall build up that Arch that
was broke down at the Deluge? Where ſhall they lay the Foun-
dation, or how ſhall the Mountains be rear'd up again to make part
of the Roof? This is the Fabrick, which when God breaketh down,
none can build up again. He withholdeth the waters and they dry up:
As we ſhew'd the Earth to have been immoderately chapt and parcht
before its diſſolution. He ſendeth them forth and they overturn the
Earth. What can noro properly expreſs the breaking out of the
waters at the diſruption of the Abyſs ? and the ſubverſion or diſlo-
lution of the Earth in conſequence of it?'Tis true this laſt paſſage
may be applied to the breaking out of waters in an ordinary Earth-
quake, and the ſubverſion of ſome part of the Earth, which often
follows upon it; but it muſt be acknowledg'd, that the ſence is more
weighty, if it be refer'd to the great Deluge, and the great Earth-
quake which laid the World in ruines and in water. And Philo-
fophical deſcriptions in Sacred Writings, like Prophecies, have of-
ten a leſſer and a greater accompliſhment and interpretation.
I could not paſs by this place without giving this ſhort Explica-
rion of it. We proceed now to the ſecond Obſervation, which is
concerning the ſtile of Scripture, in moſt of thoſe places we have
cited, and others upon the ſame ſubjet. The reflections that are
made in ſeveral parts of the Divine Writings, upon the Origin of
the World, and the formation of the Earth, feein to me to be writ
in a ſtile ſomething approaching to the nature of a Prophetical ſtile,
and
Chap.7. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
63
and to have inore of a Divine Enthuliaſm and Elocution in thein,
than the ordinary text of Scripture ; the expreſſions are lofty, and
ſometimes abrupt, and often figurative and diſguis’d, as may be
obſerv'd in moſt of thoſe places we have made uſe of, and particu-
larly in that ſpeech of Wiſdom, Prov. 8. where the 26. verfe is ſo ob-
ſcure, that no two Verſions that I have yet met with, whether An-
cient or Modern, agree in the Tranſlation of that Verſe. And
therefore though I fully believe that the conſtruction of the firſt
Earth is really intended in thoſe words, yet ſeeing it could not be
made out clear without a long and critical diſcuſſion of them, I did
not think that proper to be inlifted upon here. We may alſo obſerve;
that whereas there is a double forın or compoſirion of the Earth,
that which it had at firſt, or till the Deluge, and that which it hatlı
lince ; ſometimes the one, and ſometimes the other may be glanc'd
upon in theſe Scripture phraſes and deſcriptions; and ſo there
may be in the ſame diſcourſe an intermixture of both. And
it conmonly happens ſo in an Enthuſiaſtick or Prophetick ſtile,
that by reaſon of the eagerneſs and trembling of the Fancy, it dotlı
not always regularly follow the ſame even thread of diſcourſe, but
ſtrikes many times upon ſome other thing that hath relation to it;
or lie; under or near the ſame view. of this we have fre
quent examples in the Apocalypſe, and in that Prophecy of our
Saviour's, Matth. 24. concerning the deſtruction of Jeruſalem, and
of the World. But notwithſtanding any ſuch unevenneſs or indi-
ſtinctneſs in the ſtile of thoſe places which we have cited concern-
ing the Origin and form of the Earth, we may at leaſt make this
remark, that if there never was any other form of the Earth but
the preſent, nor any other ſtate of the Abyſſe, than what it is in
now, 'tis not imaginable, what ſhould give occaſion to all thoſe
expreſſions and pallages that we have cited; which being ſo ſtrange
in themſelves and paradoxical, 1hould yet ſo inuch favour, and ſo
fairly comply with our ſuppolitions. What I have obſerv'd in ano- Tell. Tbeor.
ther place, in treating of Paradiſe, that the expreſſions of the An-
cient Fathers were very extravagant, if Paradiſe was nothing but a
little plot of ground in Meſopotamia, as many of late have fanſied;
may in like manner be obſerv'd concerning the ancient Earth and
Abyſſe, if they were in no other ſorin, nor other ſtate than what
they are under now, the expreſſions of the Sacred Writers concer-
ning them are very ſtrange and inaccountable, without any fuffici-
ent ground, that we know, or any jult occaſion for ſuch uncoutlı
repreſentations. If there was nothing intended or refer'd to in
thoſe deſcriptions, but the preſent form and ſtate of the Earth,
that is ſo well known, that in deſcribing of it there would be no-
thing dark or myſterious, nor any occaſion for obfçurity in the
ſtile or expreſſion, whereof we find ſo much in thoſe. So as, all
things conliderd, what inight otherwiſe be inade an exception to
ſome of theſe Texts alledg’d by us, viz. that they are too obſcure,
becomes an argument for us : as implying that there is ſomething
more intended by them, than the preſent and known form of the
Earth. And we having propo.'d another form and ſtructure of the
Earth, to which thoſe characters ſuit and anſwer more eaſily, as this
opens
lib. 2.6.6.
64
Book
1. The Theory of the Earth.
X
1
Dr.
1
ܪ
opens and gives light to thoſe difficult places, fuit may 14 realon-
ably concluded to be the very fence and notion intended by the holy
Writers.
And thus much, I think, is ſufficient to llave olfurvid out of
Scripture, to verifie our Explication of the Deluge, and our Appli-
cation of it.to Noah's Flood, both according to the Mifugal Hiltu-
ry of the Flood, and according to many occalienal réliegions and
diſcourſes: diſpers’d in other places of Scripture, concerning the
ſame Flood, or concerning the Abyile and the firſt form of the
Earth. And though there may be ſome other paſſages of a diffe-
rent aſpect, they will be of no force to diſprove our concluſions, be-
cauſe they reſpect the preſent form of the Earth and Sea ; and alſo
becauſe expreſſions that deviate more from the common opinion,
are more remarkable and more proving ; in that there is. nicthing
could give occaſion to ſuch, but an ini ention to expreſs the very
truth. So, for inſtance, if there was one place of Scripture that
ſaid the Earth was mov’d, and ſeveral that ſeem'd to imply, that the
Şun was mov’d, we ſhould have more regard to that one place for
the motion of the Earth, than to all the other that made againſt it
becauſe thoſe others might be ſpoken and underſtood according 10
common opinion and cominon belief, but that which aftirin'd"the
motion of the Earth, could not be ſpoke upon any other greund,
but only for truth and inſtruction ſake. I leare this to be appli'd
to the preſent ſubject.
Thus much for the Sacred Writings. As to the Hiſtory of the
ancient Heathens, we cannot expcet an account or Narration of
Noah's Flood, under that name and notion ; but it inay be of uſe
to obſerve two things out of that Hiſtory. Firſt, that the Inunda-
tions recorded there came generally to paſs in the manner we have
deſcrib'd the Univerſal Deluge ; namely, by Earthquakes and an
eruption of Subterraneous waters, the Earth being broken and (all-
ing in : and of this we ſhall elſe-where give a full account out of
their Authors. Secondly, that Deuc.ilion's Deluge in particular,
which is ſuppos’d by inoſt of the Ancient Fatliers to repreſent
Noah's Flood, is ſaid to have been accompanied with a gaping or
Bibl. lib. i. diſruption of the Easth ; Apollodorus faith, that the Mountains of
Theſily were divided afunder, or ſeparate one from another at that
time: And Lucian (de deâ Syriâ) tells a very remarkable ſtory to
this purpoſe, concerning Deucalion's Deluge, and a ceremony cb-
ſerv'd in the Temple of Hieropulis, in commemoration of it; which
ceremony ſeems to have becn of that nature, as impli'd that thero
was an opening of the Earth at the time of the De'uge, and that the
waters ſubſided into that again when the Deluge ceas'd. He faith,
that this Temple at Hieropolis was built upon a kind of Abytie, cr
had a bottomleſs pit, or gaping of the Earth in one part of it, and
the people of Arabia and Syria, and the Countries the eabouts twice
a year repair’d to this Temple, and brought with tliem every one a
veſſel of water, which they pour'd out upon the floor of the Tem-
ple, and made a kind of an Inundation there in memory of Direct
lion's Deluge ; and this water ſunk by degrees in:o a Chalin or open
ing of a Rock, which the Temple ſtood upon, and ſo leſt the poor
dri
Chap.8. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
65
ܪ
dry again. And this was a rite ſolemnly and religioully perform'd
both by the Prieſts and by the People. If Mofes had left ſuch a
Religious rite among the Jers, I ſhould not have doubted to have
interpreted it concerning his Abyſſe, and the retiring of the waters
into it; but the actual diſruption of the Abyfle could not well be
repreſented by any ceremony. And thus much concerning the pre-
ſent queſtion,and the true application of our 'Theory to Noah's Flood. -
CHA P. VIII.
The particular Hiſtory of Noah's Flood is explain'd in all
the material parts and circumſtances of it, according to
the preceding Theory. Any ſeeming difficulties removed,
and the whole Section concluded, with a Diſcourſe how
far the Deluge may be lookt upon as the effe&t of an or-
dinary Providence, and how far of an extraordinary.
W
E have now proved our Explication of the Deluge to be
more than an Ides, or to be a true piece of Natural Hiſto-
ry; and it may be the greateſt and moſt remarkable that hath yer
been ſince the beginning of the World. We have thown it to be
the real account of Noah's Flood, according to Authority both Di.
vine and Humane; and I would willingly proceed one ſtep further,
and declare my thoughts concerning the manner and order where-
in Noah's Flood came to paſs ; in what method all theſe things hap-
pen’d and ſucceeded one another, that make up the Hiſtory of it,
as cauſes or effects, or other parts or circumſtances: As how the
Ark was born upon the waters, what effect the Rains had, at what
time the Earth broke, and the Abyſle was open’d; and what the
condition of the Earth was upon the ending of the Flood, and fuch
like. But I deſire to propoſe iny thoughts concerning theſe things
only as conjectures, which I will ground as near as I can upon Scri-
ſture and Reaſon, and am very willing they thould be rectifid
where they happen to be amiſs. I know how ſubjeét we are to
miſtakes in theſe great and remote things, when we deſcend to par-
ticulars; but I am willing to expoſe the Theory to a full trial, and
to ſhew the way for any to examine it, provided they do it with
equity and ſincerity. I have no other deſign than to contribute mny
endeavours to find out the truth in a ſubject of ſo great importance,
and wherein the World hath hitherto had ſo little ſatisfaction:
And lie that in an obſcure argument propoſeth an Hypotheſis thac
reacheth from end to end, though it be not exact in every particu-
lar, 'tis not without a good effect; for it gives aini to others to take
their meaſures better, and opens their intention in a matter which
otherwiſe, it may be, would have been impenetrable to thein: As
he that makes the firſt way through a thick Torelt, though it be
not the ſtreigliteſt and ſhorteſt, deſerves better, and hath done
mure, than lie that makes it ſtreighter and ſinoother afterwards.
Providence that ruleth all things and all Ages, after the Earth
had ſtood above fixteen hundred Years, tlought fit to put a period
to that World; and accordingly, it was reveal'd to Noah, that for
K
the
66
Book).
The Theory of the Earth.
the wickedneſs and degeneracy of men, God would deſtroy man-
kind with the Earth (Gen. 6. 13.) in a Deluge of water ; Where
upon he was commanded, in order to the preſerving of Himſelf
and Family, as a ſtock for the new World, to build a great Veffel
or Ark, to float upon the waters, and had inſtruciions given him
for the building of it both as to the matter and as to the form.
Noah believed the word of God, though againſt his ſenſes, and all
external appearances, and ſet himſelf to work to build an Ark, ac-
cording to the directions given, which after many years labour Tas
finiſh'd; whilſt the incredulous World, ſecure enough, as i hey
thought, againſt a Teluge, continu'd ſtill in their exceſſes and infó
lencies, and laught at ihe admonition of Noah, and at the folly of
his deſign of building an extravagant Machine, a floating houſe, to
fave hiiſeli from an imaginary Inundation; for they thought it no
leſs, ſeeing it was to be in an Earth where there was no Sea, nor
any Rain ne ther in thoſe parts, according to the ordinary courſe of
Nature; as ſhail be ſhown in the ſecond Book of this Treatiſe.
But when the appointed time was come, the Heavens began to
melt, and the Rains to fall, and theſe were the fi:ſt ſurprizing cau-
ſes and preparatives to the Deluge ; They fell, we ſuppoſe, (tho
we do not know how that could proceed froin natural cauſes)
throughout the face of the whole Earth ; which could not but have
a conliderable effect on that Earth, being even and ſmooth, with-
out Hills and eminencies, and might lay it all under water to foie
depth; ſo as the Ark, if it could not float upon thoſe Rain-waters,
at leaſt taking the advantage of a River, or of a Dock or Ciſtern
made to receive them, it might be a-float before the Abyſſe was
broken open. For I do not ſuppoſe the Abyſſe broken open before
any Rain fell; And when the opening of the Abyſſe and of the
Flood-gates of Heaven are mention’d together, I ain apt to think
thoſe Flood-gates were diſtinct from the common Rain, and were
ſomething more violent and impetuous. So that there might be
preparatory Rains before the diſruption of the Abyſſe : and I do not
know but thoſe Rains, ſo covering up and encloſing the Earth on
every ſide, might providentially contribute to the diſruption of
it; not only by ſoftning and weakning the Arch of the Earth in
the bottom of thoſe cracks and Chaſms which were made by the
Sun, and which the Rain would firſt run into, but eſpecially by
ttopping on a ſudden all the pores of the Earth, and all evaporation,
which would make the vapors within ſtruggle more violently,as we
get a Fever by a Cold; and it may be in that ſtruggle,the Doors and
the Bars were broke,and the great Abyſſe guſht out as out of a womb.
However, when the Rains were faln, we may ſuppoſe the face
of the Earth cover'd over with water; and whether it was there
waters that S.Peter refers to, or that of the Abyſſe afterwards, I can
not tell, when he faith in his firſt Epiſtle, Chap. 3. 20. Noah and his
Family were ſav'd by water; ſo as the water which deſtroy'd the reſt
of the World, was an inſtrument of their conſervation, in as much
as it bore up the Ark, and kept it from that impetuous ihoch,
which it would have had, if either it had ſtood upon dry land
when the Earth fell, or if the Earth had been dillöly'd without
Chap.8. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth. 67.
any water on it or under it. However, things being thus prepard,
let us ſuppoſe the great frame of the exteriour Earth to have broké
at this time, or the Fountains of the great Abyſs, as Mofes faith, to
have been then opend, from thence would iſſue, upon the fall of
the Earth, with an unſpeakable violence, ſuch a Flood of waters
as would over-run and overwhelm for a time all thoſe fragments
which the Earth broke into, and bury in one common, Grave all
Mankind, and all the Inhabitants of the Earth. Beſides, if the
Flood-gates of Heaven were any thing diſtinct from the Forty days
Rain, their effuſion, 'tis likely, was at this ſame time when the
Abyſs was broken open ; for the ſinking of the Earth would make
an extraordinary convulſion of the Regions of the Air, and that
crack and noiſe that inuſt be in the falling World, and in the col-
liſion of the Earth and the Abyſs, would make a great and univer-
fal Concuſſion above, which things together, muit needs ſo ſhake,
or ſo ſqueeze the Atmoſphere, as to bring down all the remaining
Vapours; But the force of theſe motions not being equal through-
out the whole Air, but drawing or preſſing inore in ſome places
than in other, where the Center of the Convulſion was, there would
be the chiefeſt collection, and there would fall, not ſhowers of Rain,
or ſingle drops, but great ſpouts or caskades of water ; and this is
that which Mofes ſeems to call, not improperly, the Cataracts of
Heaven, or the Windows of Heaven being jet open.
Thus the Flood came to its height; and tis not eaſie to repre-
ſent to our ſelves this ſtrange Scene of things, when the Deluge was
in its fury and extremity; when the Earth was broken and ſwal.
low'd up in the Abyſs, whoſe raging ivaters riſe higher than the
Mountains, and fillid the Air with broken waves, with an uni-
verſal miſt, and with thick darkneſs, ſo as Nature ſeem'd to be in a
ſecond Chaos; and upon this Chaos rid the diſtreſt Ark, that bore
the ſmall remains of Mankind. No Sea was ever ſo tumultuous,
as this, nor is there any thing in preſent Nature to be compar'd
with the diſorder of theſe waters ; All the Poetry, and all the Hy-
perboles that are us’d in the deſcription of Storms and raging Seas,
were literally true in this, if not beneath it. The Ark was really
carry'd to the tops of the higheſt Mountains, and into the places of
the Clouds, and thrown down again into the deepeſt Gulfs; and to
this very ſtate of the Deluge and of the Ark, which was a Type
of the Church in this World, D.uvid ſeemns to have alluded in the
name of the Church, Pf.1l. 42.7. Abyſſe calls upon Abyſſe at the noiſe of
thy Cataracts or water-ſports; all tby waves and billours have gone over
It was no doubt an extraordinary and miraculous Providence,
that could make a Vettel, ſo ill man’d, live upon ſuch a Sea; that
kept it from being daſht againſt the Hills, or overwhelm'd in the
Deeps. That Abyſs which had devourd and ſwallow'd up whole
Foreſts of Woods, Cities, and Provinces, nay the whole Earth,
when it had conquer'd all, and triumph'd over all, .could not
deſtroy this ſingle Shir. I remember in the ſtory of the Argonan-
Dion.Argontest
ticks, when Fajin ſet out to fetch the Golden Fleece, the Poet faith, 11.0.47,
all the Gods that day look'd down from Heaven to view the Ship
and the Nymphs ſtood upon the Mountain-tops to ſee the noble Youth
K 2
of
me.
68
Book I.
The Theory of the Earth.
of Theſſaly pulling at the Oars; We may with more reaſon ſuppoſe
the good Angels to have look'd down upon this Ship of Noah's; and
that not out of curioſity, as idle ſpectators, but with a paſſionate
concern for its ſafety and deliverance. A Ship whoſe Cargo was
no leſs than a whole World; that carry'd the fortune and hopes
of all poſterity, and if this had periſh'd, the Earth for any thing
we know, had been nothing but a Deſart, a great ruine, a dead
heap of Rubbiſh, from the Deluge to the Confagration. But
Death and Hell, the Grave, and Deſtruction have their bounds.
We may entertain our felves with the conſideration of the face of
the Deluge, and of the broken and drown'd Earth, in this Scheme
with the floating Ark, and the guardian Angels.
Pag: 68.
1
!
1
Chap.8. The Deluge and Diffolution of tlie Earth.
69
---
Thus much for the beginning and progreſs of the Deluge. It
now remains only that we conſider it in its decreaſe, and the ſtate
of the Earth after the waters were retir'd into their Chanels, which
makes the preſent ſtate of it. Mofes faith, God brought a wind
upon the waters, and the tops of the Hills became bare, and then
the lower grounds and Plains by degrees; the waters being ſunk
into the Chanels of the Sea, and the hollowneſs of the Earth, and
the whole Globe appearing in the form it is now under. There
needs nothing be added for explication of this, 'tis the genuine con-
ſequence of the Theory we liave given of the Deluge; and whe-
ther this wind was a deſcending wind to depreſs and keep down the
ſwellings and inequalities of the Abyſs, or whether it was only to
dry the Land as falt as it appear'd, or might have both effects, I
do not know; But as nothing can be perpetual that is violent, ſo
this commotion of the Abyſs abated after a certain time, and the
great force that impelld the waters, decrealing, their natural gra-
vity began to take effect, and to reduce them into the loweſt places,
at an equal height, and in an even ſurface, and level one part with
another : That is, in ſhort, the Abyfs became our Sea, fixt within
its Chanel, and bounded by Rocks and Mountains : Then mas the
Fob 38.10,7L
decreed place eſtabliſht for it, and Bars and Doors were ſet į then rras it
ſaid, hitherto ſhalt thou come, and no further, and here shall thy proud
maves be ſtopt. And the Deluge being thus ended, and the waters
ſetled in their Chanels, the Earth took ſuch a broken Figure as is
repreſented in thoſe larger Schemes, p. 100. And this will be the
form and ſtate of it till its great change comes in the Conflagration,
when we expect a New Heaven and a Ner Earth.
But to purſue this proſpect of things a little further ; we inay
eaſily imagine, that for many years after the Deluge ceaſt; the face
of the Earth was very different from what it is now, and the Sea
had other bounds than it hath at preſent. I do not doubt but
the Sea reacht much further in-land, and cliinb'd higher upon
the ſides of the Mountains ; And I have obſerv'd in many places,
a ridge of Mountains ſome diſtance from the Sea, and a Plain from
their roots to the ſhore; which Plain no doubt was formerly com
ver'd by the Sea, bounded againſt thoſe Hills as its firſt and natu-
ral Ramparts, or as the ledges or lips of its Veffel. And it ſeems
probable, that the Sea doth ſtill grow narrower from Age to Age,
and ſinks more within its Chanel and the bowels of the Earth, ac.
cording as it can make its way into all thofe Subterraneous Cavi..
ties, and crowd the Air out of them. We ſee whole Countries of
Land gain'd from it, and by ſeveral indications, as ancient Sea:
ports left dry and uſeleſs, old Sea-marks far within the Land, pieces
of Ships, Anchors, &c. left at a great diſtance from the preſent
ſhores ; from theſe ſigns, and ſuch like, we inay conclude that the
Sea reach'd many places formerly that now are dry Land, and at
firſt I believe was generally bound in on cither ſide with a chain of
Mountains. So I ſhould eaſily imagine the Mediterranean Sea, for
inſtance, to have been bounded by the continuation of the Alps
through Dauphiné and Languedock to the Pyrene.ins, and at the other
end by the Darmatick Mountains almoſt to the Black Sea. Then
Atlias
70
Book 1
The Theory of the Earth.
Atlas major which runs along with the Mediterranean froin Agypt
to the Atlantick Ocean, and now parts Barbary and Numidia may
poſſibly have been the Ancient Barriere on the Africk-lide. And in
our own Iſland I could eaſily higure to my ſelf, in many parts of it,
other Sea-bounds than what it hath at preſent; and the like may be
obſerv'd in other Countries.
And as the Sea had much larger bounds for ſome time after the
Deluge, ſo the Land had a different face in many reſpects to what
it hath now; for we ſuppoſe the Valleys and lower grounds,
where the deſcent and derivation of the water was not ſo calie, to
have been full of Lakes and Pools for a long time; and theſe were
often converted into lens and Bogs, where the ground being ſpongy,
ſuckt up the water, and the looſen'd Earth ſwell'd into a ſoft and
pappy ſubſtance; which would ſtill continue ſo, if there was any
courſe of water ſenſible or inſenſible, above or within the ground,
that fed this moiſt place: But if the water ſtood in a more firm
Baſin, or on a foil which for its heavineſs or any other reaſon
would not mix with it, it made a Lake or clear Pool. And we
may eaſily imagine there were innumerable ſuch Lakes, and Bogs
and faſtneſſes for many years after the Deluge, till the World be-
gun to be pretty well ſtockt with people, and humane induſtry
cleans'd and drain'd thoſe unfruitful and unhabitable places. And
thoſe Countries that have been later cultivated, or by a lazier
people, retain ftill, in proportion to their ſituation and foil, a
greater number of them.
Neither is it at all incongruous or inconvenient to ſuppoſe, that
the face of the Earth ſtood in this manner for many years after
the Deluge ; for while Mankind was finall and few, they needed
but a little ground for their ſeats or ſuſtenance ; and as they grew
more numerous, the Earth proportionably grew more dry, and
more parts of it fit for habitation. I eaſily believe tlať Plato's ob
ſervation or tradition is true, that Men at firſt, after the Flood;
liv'd in the Up lands and ſides of the mountains, and by degres
funk into the Plains and lower Countries, when Nature had
par'd them for their uſe, and their numbers requir’d more room.
The Hiſtory of Moſes tells us, that ſometime after the Deluge, Noah
and his poſterity, his Sons and his Grand-children, chiang'd their
quarters, and fell down into the Plains of Shiner, froip the ſides of
the Hills where the Ark had reſted; and in this Plain was the laſt
general rendezvous of Mankind; ſo long they ſeem to have kept
in a body, and from thence they were divided and broken into
companies, and diſperſt, firſt, into the neighbouring Countries, and
then by degrees throughout the whole Earth; the ſeveral ſucceſſive
Generations, like the waves of the Sea when it Aows, over-reach-
ing one another, and ſtriking, out further and further, upon the
face of the Land. Not that the whole Earth was peopled by an
uniform propagation of Mankind every way, from one place, as
a common center: like the ſwelling of a Lake upon a Plain: for
ſometimes they ſhot out in length, like Rivers: and ſometimes they
flew into remote Countreys in Colonies, like ſwarms from the
Hiye, and ſetled there, leaving many places uninhabited betwixt
them
De Leg. li. 3.
pre:
Gen. 11.
Chap.8. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
71
them and their firſt hone. Sea-ſhores and Iſlands were generally
the laſt places inhabited : for while the ineinory or ſtory of the De-
luge was freſh amongſt them, they did not care for coming to near
their late Enemy: or, at leaſt, to be enclos’d and ſurrounded by his
forces.
And this may be ſufficient to have diſcours d concerning all the
parts of the Deluge, and the reſtitution of the Earth to an habita-
ble form, for the further union of our Theory with the Hiſtory of
Moſes; There reſts only one thing in that Hiſtory to be taken no-
tice of, which may be thought pollibly not to agree ſo well with
our account of the Deluge ; namely, that Mofes ſeems to ſhut
ир
the Abyſſe again at the end of the Deluge, which our Explication
ſuppoſeth to continue open. But beſides that half tlie Abyſſe is ſtill
really cover’d, Mofes faith the ſame thing of the windows of Hea-
ven, that they were ſhut up too ; and he ſeemeth in both to ex-
preſs only the ceſſation of the Effect which proceeded from their
opening: For as Moſes had aſcrib'd the Deluge to the opening of
theſe two, ſo when it was to ceaſe, he faith, theſe two were ſhut
up; as they were really put into ſuch a condition, both of them,
tliat they could not continue the Deluge any longer, nor ever be
the occaſion of a ſecond; and therefore in that ſence, and as to that
effect were for ever ſhut up. Some may poſſibly make that alſo an
Objection againſt us, that Mofes mentions and ſuppoſes the Moun-
tains at the Deluge, for he ſaith, the waters reached fifteen Cubits
above the tops of them ; whereas we ſuppoſe the Ante-diluvian
Earth to have had a plain and uniform ſurface, without any inequa-
lity of Hills and Valleys. But this is eaſily anſwer'd, 'twas in the
height of the Deluge that Mofes inention'd the Mountains, and we
fuppoſe them to have riſen then or inore towards the beginning of
it, when the Earth was broke ; and theſe Mountains continuing
ſtill upon the face of the Earth, Mofes might very well take them
for a ſtandard to meaſure and expreſs to Pofterity the height of the
waters, though they were not upon the Earth when the Deluge be-
gun. Neither is there any mention made, as is obſerv'd by ſome, of
Mountains in Scripture, or of Rain, till the time of the Deluge.
We have now finiſht our account of Noah's Flood, both general-
ly and particularly ; and I have not wittingly omitted or conceald
any difficulty that occur'd to ine, either from the Hiſtory, or from
abſtract reaſon: Our Theory, ſo far as I know, hath the conſent
and authority of both: And how far it agrees and is demonſtrable
from natural obſervation, or from the form and Phenomena of this
Eartlı, as it lies at preſent, ſhall be the ſubject of the remaining
part oftlis Firſt Brok. In the mean time I do not know any thing
imore to be added in this part, unleſs it be to conclude with an Ad
vertiſement to prevent any miſtake or miſconſtruction, as if this
Theory, by explaining the Deluge in a natural way, in a great
meaſure, or, by natural cauſes, did detract from the power of God,
by which that great judgment was brought upon the World in a
Providential and miraculous manner.
To ſatisfie all reaſonable and intelligent perſons in this particu-
lür, I anſwer and declare, firſt, That we are far from excluding
Divine
72
Book 1.
The Theory of the Earth.
Mat. 6. 21.
Luk. 12. 24.
Divine Providence, either ordinary or extraordinary, from the
cauſes and conduct of the Deluge. I know a Sparrow doth not
fall to the ground without the will of our Heavenly Father, much
leſs doth the great World fall in pieces without his good pleaſure
and ſuperintendency. In him all things live, inove, and have their
being; Things that have Life and Thought have it from him, he is
the Fountain of both: Things that have motion only, without
Thought, have it alſo from him: And what hath only naked
Being, without Thought or Motion, owe ſtill that Being to
him. And theſe are not only deriv’d from God at firſt, but every
moment continued and conſerv'd by him. So intimate and uni-
verſal is the dependance of all things upon the Divine Will and
Power.
In the ſecond place, they are guilty, in my Judgment, of a great
Error or indiſcretion, that oppoſe the courſe of Nature to Provi-
dence. St. Paul ſays (Axt, 14. 17.) God hath not left us without wit-
neſs, in that he gives us Rain from Heaven ; yet Rains proceed from
natural cauſes, and fall upon the Sea as well as upon the Land. In
like manner, our Saviour makes thoſe things inſtances of Divine
Providence, which yct come to paſs in an ordinary courſe of Na-
ture; In that part of his excellent Sernion upon the Mount, that
concerns Providence, He bids them Conſider the Lilies how they gror,
they toil not, neither do they Spin, and yet Solomon in all his glory was
not arrayed like one of theſe ; He bids them alſo conſider the Ravens,.
they neither fow nor reap, neither have they Store-houſe nor Barn, and God
feedeth them. The Lilies grow, and the Ravens are fed according
to the ordinary courſe of Nature, and yet they are juſtly made ar-
guments of Providence by our Saviour ; nor are theſe things leſs
Providential, becauſe conſtant and regular ; on the contrary, ſuch
a diſpoſition or eſtabliſhment of ſecond cauſes, as will in the beſt
order, and for a long ſucceſſion, produce the inoſt regular effects,
affifted only with the ordinary concourſe of the firſt cauſe, is a
greater argument of wiſdom and contrivance, than ſuch a diſpoſi-
tion of cauſes as will not in ſo good an order, or for ſo long a time
produce regular effects, without an extraordinary concourſe and
interpoſition of the Firſt cauſe. This, I think, is clear to every man's
judgment. We think him a better Artiſt that makes a Clock that
ſtrikes regularly at every hour from the Springs and Wheels which
he
puts in the work, than he that hath ſo made his Clock that he
muſt put his finger to it every hour to make it ſt!ike: And if one
ſhould contrive a piece of Clock-work ſo that it ſhould beat all the
hours, and make all its motions regularly for ſuch a time, and that.
time being come, upon a ſignal given, or a Spring toucht, it ſhould
of its own accord fall all to pieces; would not this be look'd upon
as a pivce of greater Art, than if the Workinan came at that time
prefixt, and with a great Hammer beat it into piecez? I uſe theſe
compariſons to convince us, that it is no detraction from Divine
Providence, that the courſe of Nature is exact and regular, and
that eren in its greateſt changes and revolutions it thould ſtill con-
(pire and be prepar'd to anſwer the ends and purpoſes of the Di-
vine Will in reference to the Moral World. This ſeems to me to lie
the
Chap.8. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth
73
the great Art of Divine Providence, ſo to adjuſt the two \Vorlds,
Humane and Natural, Material and Intellectual, as ſeeing thorough
the poſſibilities and futuritions of each, according to the firſt state
and circumſtances he puts them under, they ſhould all along cor-
reſpond and fit one another, and eſpecially in their great Criſes
and Periods.
Thirdly, Beſides the ordinary Providence of God in the ordina.
ry courſe of Nature, there is doubtleſs an extraordinary Providence
that doth attend the greater Scenes and the greater revolutions of
Nature. This methinks, beſides all other proof from the Effects, is
very rational and neceſſary in it felf; for it would be a limitation
of the Divine Power and Will fo to be bound up to ſecond cauſes,
as never to uſe, upon occaſion, an extraordinary influence or di-
rection: And ’tis manifeſt, taking any Syſteme of Natural cauſes, if
the beſt poſſible, that there may be more and greater things done,
if to this, upon certain occaſions you joyn an extraordinary con-
duct. And as we have taken notice before, that there was an ex-
traordinary Providence in the formation or compoſition of the
firſt Earth, ſo I believe there was alſo in the diffolution of it; And
I think it had been impoſſible for the Ark to have liv'd upon the
raging Abyſs, or for Noah and his Family to have been preſery'd,
if there had not been a miraculous hand of Providence to take
care of them. But 'tis hard to ſeparate and diſtinguiſh an ordi-
nary and extraordinary Providence in all caſes, and to mark juſt
how far one goes, and where the other begins. And writing a
Theory of the Deluge here, as we do, we were to exhibit a Series
of cauſes whereby it might be made intelligible, or to ſhew the
proximate Natural Cauſes of it; wherein we follow the example
both of Moses and S. Peter; and with the ſame veneration of the
Divine Power and Wiſdom in the government of Nature, by a con-
ſtant ordinary Providence, and an occaſional extraordinary.
So much for the Theory of the Deluge, and the ſecond Section
of this Diſcourſe.
CHAP. IX.
The Second Part of this Diſcourſe, proving the ſame Theory
from the Effe&ts and preſent form of the Earth. Firſt
, by
a general Scheme of what is moft remarkable in this Globe,
and then by a more particular Indu&tion ; beginning with
an Account of Subterraneous Cavities and Subterraneous
Waters.
WE
E have now finiſht our explication of the Univerſal Deluge,
and given an account, not only of the poſſibility of it, but
(ſo far as our knowledge can reach) of its Cauſes; and of that
form and ſtructure of the Earth, whereby the Old World was ſub-
ject to that ſort of Fate. We have iidt beg'd any Principles
I
74
Book I.
The Theory of the Earth.
1
or Suppoſitions for the proof of this, but taking that common
ground, which both Moſes and all Antiquity preſents to us, viz.
That this Earth roſe from a Chaos; We have from that deduc'd, by
an calie train of conſequences, what the firſt Form of it would be';
and from that Form, as from a nearer ground, we have by a fecond
train of conſequences made it appear, that at ſome time or other
that firſt Earth would be ſubject to a diſſolution, and by that dito-
lution to a Deluge. And thus far we have proceeded only by the
intuition of Cauſes, as is moſt proper to a Theory; but for the
ſatisfaction of thoſe that require inore ſenſible arguments, and to
compleat our proofs on either hand, we will now argue from the
Effects; and from the preſent ſtate of Nature, and the preſent forin
of the Earth, prove that it hath been brokeri, and undergone ſuch
a diſſolution as we have already deſcrib'd, and inade the imme-
diate occaſion of the Deluge. And that we may do this more per.
ſpicuouſly and diſtinctly, we will lay down this Propoſition to be
prov'd, viz. Tbat the present form and ſtructure of the Eurth, both as to
the ſurface and as to the Interior parts of it, fi far as they are kucuraz
and acceſſible to us, doth exačily anjirer to our Theory concerning the form
and diſſolution of the firſt Earth, wiid cannot be explain'd upon any other
Hypothefis yet known.
Oratours and Philoſophers treat Nature after a very different man-
ner;
Thoſe repreſent her with all her graces and ornaments, and
if there be any thing that is not capable of that, they diſſemble it,
or paſs it over ſlightly. But Philoſophers view Nature with a
more impartial eye, and without favour or prejudice give a juſt
and free account, how they find all the parts of the Univerſe, ſome
more, fome leſs perfect. And as to this Earth in particular, if I
was to deſcribe it as an Oratour, I would ſuppoſe it a beautiful and
regular Globe, and not only ſo, but that the whole Univerſe was
made for its fake; that it was the darling and favourite of Heaven,
that the Sun ſhin'd only to give it light, to ripen its fruit, and
make freſh its Flowers, and that the great Concave of the Firma-
inent, and all the Stars in their ſeveral Orbs, were deſign'd only
for a ſpangled Cabinet to keep this Jewel in. This loce.. I would
give of it as an Oratour; But a Philoſopher that overheard me,
would either think me in jeſt, or very injudicious, if I took the
Earth for a body ſo regular in it ſelf, on: ſo conſiderable, if com-
par'd with the reſt of the Univerſe. This, he would ſay, is to make
the great World like one of the Heathen Temples, a beautiful and
magnificent ſtructure, and of the richeſt materials, yet built only
for a little brute Idol, a Dog, or a Crocodile, or ſome deformed
Creature, plac'd in a corner of it.
We muit therefore be impartial where the Truth requires it, and
deſcribe the Earth as it is really in it ſelf; and though it be hand-
fome and regular enough to the eye in certain parts of it, ſingle
tracts and ſingle Regions; yet if we conſider the whole ſurface
of it, or the whole Exteriour Region, 'tis as a broken and confus'd
heap of bodies, plac'd in no order to one another, nor with any
correſpondency or regularity of parts: And ſuch a hody as the Moon
appears to us, when 'tis look'd upon with a good Glaſs, rude and
ragged:
1
Chap.9. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
75
P. 100
ragged; as it is alſo repreſented in the modern Maps of the Moon;
ſuch a thing would the Earth appear if it was ſeen from the Moon.
They are both in my judgment the image or picture of a great Ruine, vid. Fig
and have the true aſpect of a World lying in its rubbiſh.
Our Earth is firſt divided into Sea and Land, without any regu-
larity in the portions, either of the one or the other ; In the Sca lie
the Iſlands, ſcatter'd like limbs torn from the reſt of the body;
great Rocks fand rear'd up in the waters ; The Promontories and
Capes ſhoot into the Sea, and the Sinus's and Creeks on the other
hand i'un as much into the Land; and theſe without any order or
uniformity. Upon the other part of our Globe ſtand great heaps
of Earth or ſtone, which we call Mountains; and if theſe were
all plac'd together, they would take up a very conſiderable part of
the dry Land; In the reſt of it are lefſer Hills, Valleys, Plains,
Lakes, and Mariſhes, Sands and Leſarts, &c. and theſe alſo with
out any regular diſpolition. Then the inſide of the Earth, or
inward parts of it, are generally broken or hollow, eſpecially about
the Mountains and high Lands, as alſo towards the ſhores of the
Sea, and among the Rocks. How many Holes and Caverns, and
ſtrange Subterraneous paſſages do we ſee in many Countries; and
how inany more may ive eaſily imagine, that are unknown and
unacceſſible to us?
This is the pourtraicture of our Earth, drawn without Aattery ;
and as oddly as it looks, it will not be at all ſurpriſing to one that
hath conſider'd the foregoing Theory; For 'tis manifeſt enough,
that upon the diſſolution of the firſt Earth, and its fall into the
Abyſs, this very face and poſture of things, which we have now
deſcrib’d, or ſomething extremely like it, would immediately re-
fult. The Sea would be open'd, and the face of the Globe would
be divided into Land and Water: And according as the fragments
fell, ſome would make Iands or Rocks in the Sea, others would
make Mountains or Plains upon the Land; and the Earth would
generally be full of Caverns and hollowneſſes, eſpecially in the
Mountainous parts of it. And we ſee the reſemblance and imita
tion of this in leſſer ruines, when a Mountain ſinks and falls into
Subterraneous water; or which is more obvious, when the Arch
of a Bridge is broken, and falls into the water, if the water under
it be not ſo deep as to overflow and cover all its parts, you may ſee
there the image of all theſe things in little Continents, and Itlands,
and Rocks under water : And in the parts that ſtand above the
water, you ſee Mourītains, and Precipices, and Plains and inoft
of the varieties that we ſee and admire in the parts of the Earth.
What need we then ſeck any further for the Explication of theſe
things ? Let us ſuppoſe this Arch of the Bridge, as the great Arch
of the Earth, which once it had, and the water under it as the
Abyſs, and the parts of this ruine to repreſent the parts of the
Earth'; There will be ſcarce any difference but of leſſer and greater,
the ſame things appearing in both. But we have naturally that
weakneſs or prejudice, that we think great things are not to be ex
plain'd from eaſie and familiar inſtances; We think there muſt be
ſomething difficult and operoſe in the explication of them, or elſe
L2
1
sve
76
Book 1.
The Theory of the Earth.
we are not ſatisfied; whether it is that we are alhain'd to ſee our
ignorance and admiration to have been ſo groundleſs, or whether
we fancy there muſt be a proportion between the difficulty, of tlie
explication, and the greatneſs of the thing explain'd; but that is a
very falſe Judgment, for let things be never ſo great, if they be
ſimple, their explication muſt be ſimple and eaſie; And on the con-
trary, ſome things that are mean, common, and ordinary, may
depend upon caules very difficult to find out ; for the difficulty of
explaining an etteet doth not depend upon its greatneſs or littleneſs,
but upon
the ſimplicity or compoſition of its cauſes. And the ef-
fects and Phanomen.z we are here to explain, though great, yet de-
pending upon cauſes very ſimple, you muſt not wonder if the Ex-
plication, when found out, be familiar and very intelligible.
And this is ſo intelligible, and ſo eaſily deducible from the fore-
mentioned cauſes, that a Man born blind or brought up all his
life in a Cave, that had never ſeen the face of the Earth, nor ever
heard any deſcription of it, more than that it was a great Globe,
having this Theory propos’d to him, or being inſtructid what the
form of the firſt Earth was, how it ſtood over the waters, and then
how it was broke and fell into them, he would eaſily of his own
accord foretel what changes would ariſe upon this diſſolution ;
and what the new form of the Earth would be. As in the firſt
place he would tell you, that this ſecond Earth would be diſtin-
guiſh'd and checker'd into Land and Water ; for the Orb which
fell being greater than the circumference it fell upon, all the frag-
ments could not fall fat and lie drown'd under water; and thoſe
that ſtood above, would make the dry Land or habitable part of
the Earth. Then in the ſecond place, he would plainly diſcern
that theſe fragments that made the dry Land, could not lie all plain
and ſmooth and equal, but ſome would be higher and ſome lower,
ſome in one polture and ſome in another, and conſequently would
make Mountains, Hills, Valleys, and Plains, and all other varieties
we have in the ſituation of the parts of the Earth. And laſtly, a
blind inan would eaſily divine that ſuch a great ruine could not
happen but there would be a great many holes and cavities amongſt
the
parts of it, a great many intervals and empty places in the rub-
biſh, as I inay fo ſay; for this we ſec happens in all ruines more or
leſs; and where the fragments are great and hard, 'tis not poſlible
they ſhould be ſo adjuſted in their fall, but that they would lie
hollow in many places, and many unfill'd ſpaces would be inter-
cepted amongſt them ; ſome gaping in the ſurface of the Eartlı,
and others hid within; to as this would give occaſion to all ſorts
of fractures and cavities either in the skin of the Earth, or within
its body. And theſe Cavities, that I may add that in the laſt place,
would be often fillid with Subterraneous waters, at leaſt at ſuch a
depth ; for the foundations of the Earth ſtanding now within the
waters, fo high as thoſe waters reach'd they would more or leſs
propagate theinſelves every way.
Thus far our Blind man could tell us what the New World
would be, or the forın of the Earth upon the great diſſolution :
and we find his reaſonings and inferences very true, theſe are the
chief
ܪ
Chap.9. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
77
chief lineaments and features of our Earth; which
appear indeed
very irregular and very inaccountable when they are lookt upon
naked in themſelves, but if we look upon them through this
Theory, we ſee as in a glaſs all the reaſons and cauſes of them,
There are different Genius's of Men, and different conceptious, and
every one is to be allow'd their liberty as to things of this nature;
I confeſs, for my own part, when I obſerve how eaſily and natu-
rally this Hypotheſis doth apply it ſelf to the general face of this
Earth, hits and falls in ſo luckily and ſurprizingly with all the
odd poſtures of i:s parts, I cannot, without violence, bear off my
mind from fully affenting to it : And the more odd and extrava-
gant, as I may ſo ſay, and the more diverſify'd the effects and ap-
pearances are, to which an Hypotheſis is to be apply'd, if it anſwers
them all and with exactneſs, it comes the nearer to a moral certi-
tude and infallibility. As à Lock that conſiſts of a great deal of
workmanſhip, mary Wards, and many odd pieces and contrivances,
if
you
find a Key that anſwers to them all, and opens it readily,
'tis a thouſand to one that 'tis the true Key, and was made for that
purpoſe:
An eminerit Philoſopher of this Age, Monſieur des Cartes, hath
made uſe of the like Hypotheſis to explain the irregular form of the
preſent Earth; though he never dream'd of the Deluge, nor
thought that firſt Orb built over the Abyſs, to have been any more
than a tranſient cruſt, and not a real habitable World that laſted
for more than ſixteen hundred years, as we ſuppoſe it to have been.
And though he hath, in my opinion, iti the formation of that firſt
Orb, and upon the diſſolution of it, committed ſome great over-
ſights, whereof we have given an account in the Latin Treatiſe ; 6:. O
however he ſaw a neceſſity of ſuch a thing, and of the diſruption
lib. 2.C.AL
of it, to bring the Earth into that form and poſture wherein we
now find it
Thus far we have ſpoken in general concerning the agreement
and congruity of our ſuppolition with the preſent face of the Earth,
and the calie account it gives of the cauſes of it. And though I
believe to ingenuous perſons that are not prejudic'd by the forins
and opinions of the Schools againſt every thing that looks like a
novelty or invention, thus much Inight be ſufficient; yet for the
ſatisfaction of all, we will, as a farther proof of our Theory, or
that part of it which concerns the diffolution of the Earth, de-
ſcend to particular explication of three or four of the moſt conſider
able and remarkable things that occur in the fabrick of this pre-
fent Earth ; namely, The great Chanel of the Oc:an ; Subterraneous
Cavities and Subterraneous l'aters; and laſtly, Mountains ind Rocks.
Theſe are the wonders of the Earth as to the viſible frame of it;
and who would not be pleas'd to ſee a rational account of theſe?
of their Origin, and of their properties; Or who would not ap-
prove of an Hypotheſis, when they ſee that Nature in her greateſt
and ſtrangeſt works inay eaſily be underſtood by it, and is in no
other way, that we know of, intelligible.
We will ſpeak firſt of Subterraneous Cavities and Waters, becauſe
they will be of calier diſparch, and an introduction to the reſt,
Thie
ܪ
78
Bookl.
The Theory of the Earth.
1
ز
That the inſide of the Earth is hollow and broken in many places,
and is not one fii'm and united maſs, we have both the Teſtimony
of Sence and of eaſie Obſervations to prove: How inany Caves
and Dens and hollow pallages into the ground do we ſee in many
Countries, eſpecially amongſt Mountains and Rocks; and ſome of
them endleſs and bottomleſs ſo far as can be diſcover'd. We have
many of theſe in our own Iſland, in Derbilbire, Somerſetſhire, Wales,
and other Counties, and in every Continent or Itland they abound
inore or leſs. Theſe hollownelles of the Earth the Arcients made
priſons, or ſtorehouſes for the Winds, and ſet a God over them
to confine them, or let them loole at his pleaſure For ſome Ages
after the Flood, as all Antiquity tells us, Theſe were the firſt houſes
men had, at leaſt in ſome parts of the Earth; here rude mortals
ſhelter'd themſelves, as well as they could, from the injuries of the
Air, till they were beaten out by wild beaſts that took poffeffion of
them. The Ancient Oracles alſo us'd to be given out of theſe Vaults
and receſſes under ground, the Sibyls had their Caves, and the Del
phick Oracle, and their Temples ſometimes were built upon an hol-
low Rock. Places that are ſtrange and folemn ſtrike an awe into
us, and incline us to a kind of ſuperſtitious timidity and venera-
tion, and therefore they thought them fit for the fears and reſiden-
ces of their Deities. They fanſied alſo that ſteams riſe ſometimes,
or a ſort of Vapour in thofe hollow places, that gave a kind of
Divine fury or inſpiration. But all theſe uſes and employments are
now in a great meaſure worn out, we know no uſe of them but to
make the places talkt on where they are, to be the wonders of the
Countrey, to pleaſe our curioſity to gaze upon and admire; but we
know not how they came, nor to what purpoſe they were made
at firſt.
It would be very pleaſant to read good deſcriptions of theſe Sub-
terraneous places, and of all the ſtrange works of Nature there;
how ſhe furniſheth theſe dark neglected Grottoes; they have often a
little Brook runs murmuring through thein, and the roof is com-
monly a kind of petrehed Earth or Icy fret-work; proper enough for
ſuch rooms. But I ſhould be pleas'd eſpecially to view the Sea-caves,or
thoſe hollow Rocks that lie upon the Sea, where the waves Roll in
a great way under ground, and wear the hard Rock into as many
odd Chapes and figures as we ſee in the Clouds. 'Tis pleaſant alſo
to ſee a River in the middle of its courſe throw itſelf into the inout)
of a Cave, or an opening of the Earth, and run under ground ſome
times many miles ; ſtill purſuing its way through the dark pipes of
the Earth, till at laſt it find an out-let. There are many of theſe Ri
vers taken notice of in Hiſtory in the ſeveral parts of the Earth, as
the Rhone in France, Guadiana in Spain, and ſeveral in Greece, Alpheus,
Lycus, and Eraſinus; then Niger in dlfrica, Tigris in Aſia,&c. And I be-
lieve if we could turn Derirent, or any other River into one of the
holes of the Peak, it would groap its way till it found an iſſue, it
may be in ſome other County. Theſe Subterraneous Rivers that
emerge again, ſhew us that the holes of the Earth are longer and
reach farther than we imagine, and if we could ſee into the ground,
as we ride or walk, we ſhould be affrighted to ſee ſo often Waters
or Caverns under us.
Bilt
Chap.9. The Deluge' and Diffolution ofalse Earth.
79
.
But to return to our dry Caves yitltelecommonly ſtand higti,
and are ſometimes of a prodigious greatneſs : Strabo mentions fome Geo.l. 16.
in the Mountains towards Arabia, that are capable to receive four
thouſand men at once. The Cave of . Engedi hid David and ſix hun- 1 Sam. 24.
dred men, ſo as Saul, when he was in the mouth of it, did not 33 4.
perceive them. In the Mountains of the Traconites there are many
of theſe vaſt dens and receſſes, and the people of that Country de
fended themſelves a long time in thoſe ſtrong Holds againſt Herod
and his Army ; They are plac d among ſuch craggy Rocks and Prei
cipices, that, as Joſephus tells us, Herod was forc'd to make a fort
Ant. Fuit.
of open chelts, and in thoſe by chains of Iron he let down his Soul- 1.14.01.27
diers from the top of the Mountains to go fight them in their dens.
I need add no more inſtances of this kind.; In the Natural Hiſtory
of all Countries, or the Geographical, deſcriptions of them, you
find ſuch places taken notice of, more or leſs; yet if there was a
good collection made of the chief of them in ſeveral parts, it might
be of uſe, and would make us more ſenſible how broken and torn
the body of the Earth is.
There are Subterraneous Cavities of another nature, and more re-
markable, which they call Volcano's, or fiery Mountains; that belch
out flames and ſmoke and aſhes, and ſometimes great ſtones and
broken Rocks, and lumps of Earth, or ſome metallick mixture ;
and throw them to an incredible diſtance by the force of the erup-
tion. Theſe argue great vacuities in the bowels of the Earth, and
magazines of combuſtible matter treaſur'd up in them, · And as the
Exhalations within theſe places muſt be copious, ſo they muſt lie in
long Mines or Trains to do ſo great execution, and to laſt fo long.
'Tis ſcarce credible what is reported concerning fome eruptions of
Veſuvius and Atna. The Eruptions of Veſuvius ſeem to be more
frequent and leſs violent of late; The fame and ſmoke break out
at the top of the Mountain, where they have eaten away the ground
and inade a great hollow, ſo as it looks at the top, when you ſtand
upon the brimes of it, like an Amphitheater, or like a great Cal-
dron, about a mile in circumference, and the burning Furnace
lies under it. The outſides of the Mountain is all ſpread with
Alhes, but the inſide much inore; for you wade up to the mid-
leg in Aſhes to go down to the bottom of the Cavity, and 'tis ex-
tremely heavy and troubleſome to get up again. The inſide lies
ſloping, and one inay ſafely go down if it be not in a raging fit ;
but the middle part of it or center, which is a little rais'd like the
bottoin of a Platter, is not to be ventur'd upon, tlie ground there
lies falſe and hollow, there it always ſmoaks, and there the Funnel
is ſuppos d to be; yet there is no viſible hole or gaping any where
when it doth not rage. Naples ſtands below in fear of this fiery
Mountain, which hath often cover'd its Streets and Palaces with
its Alhes; and in ſight of the Sea (which lies by the ſide of them
both ) and as it were in defiance to it, threatens at one time or ano.
ther, to burn that fair City. Hiſtory tells us, that ſome eruptions
of l’eſuvines have carry'd Cinders and Afhes as far as Conftantinople;
this is atteſted both by Greek and Latin Authors; particularly, that
tlicy were ſo affrighted with theſe Afhes and darkneſs, that the
Emperor
80
Book 1:
The Theory of the Earth.
Emperor left the City, and there was a day obſervd yearly for a
memorial of this calamity or prodigy.
Ætna is of greater fame than l'eſuvius, and of greater fury, all
Antiquity ſpeaks of it; not only the Greeks and Rimans, but as far
as Hiſtory reacheth, either real or fabulous, there is ſomething re-
corded of the Fires of Atnu. The Figure of the Mountain is in-
conſtant, by reaſon of the great conſumptions and ruine; it is ſub-
ject to;
The Fires and Æftuations of it are excellently deſcrib'd by
Virgil, upon occaſion of Ænas his paſſing by thoſe Coaſts.
Horrificis juxta tonat Ætna ruinis ;
Interdumque atram prorumpit ad athero nubem,
Turbine fumanteni piceo & candente favilla ;
Attollitque globos flammarum & fydera lambit ;
Interduin ſcopulos, avolſáque viſcera Montis
Erigit eructans, liquefa&žáque faxa ſub auras
Gum gemitu glomerat, fundóque exajiuat imo.
Fama eft Enceladi ſemuftum fulmine corpus
Urgeri mole hâc, ingentemque infuper Atnam
Impofitam, ruptis flammam expirare caminis.
Et feſſum quoties mutet latus, intremere omnem
Murmure Trinacriam & cælum ſubtexere fumio.
3
:
1
!
t
Ætna, whoſe ruines inake a thunder ;
Sometimes black clouds of ſmoak, that rowl about
Mingled with flakes of fire, it belches out.
And ſometimes Balls of flame it darts on high,
Or its torn bowels flings into the Sky.
Within deep Gells under the Earth, a ſtore
Of fire-niaterials, molten Stones, and Ore,
It gathers, then Spews out, and gathers inore.
Enceladus when thunder-ſtruck by Jove,
Mas buri'd here, and Ætna thrown above
e ;
And when, to change his wearied ſide, he turns,
The Iſland trembles and the Mountain burns.
Not far from Ærna lies Strombolo, and other adjacent Inands,
where there are alſo ſuch magazines of Fire ; and throughout all
Regions and Countries in the Weſt-Indies and in the Eaſt, in the Nor-
thern and Southern parts of the Earth, there are ſome of theſe
Volcano's, which are ſenſible evidences that the Earth is incompact
and full of Caverns; beſides the roarings, and bellowings that uſe
to be heard before an eruption of theſe Volcano's, argue fome dread-
ful hollowneſs in the belly or under the roots of the Mountain,
where the Exhalations ſtruggle before they can break their Priſon.
The Subterraneous Cavities that we have ſpoke of hitherto, are
ſuch as are viſible in the ſurface of the Earth, and break the 'skin
by ſome gaping Orifice; but the Miners and thoſe that work under
ground meet with many more in the bowels of the Earth, that
neter
81
7
the water that ſtood out before, the props failing that bore them
Chap.9. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
never reach to the top of it; Burrows, and Chanels, and Clefis,
and Caverns, iliat never had the confort of one beam of light
tince the great fall of the Earth. And where we think the ground
is firm and fulid, as upon Heaths and Downs, it often betrays its
followneſs, by founding under the Hories feet and the Chariot-
wheels that paſs ovir it. We do not know when and where we
Itand upon good ground, if it was examin'd deep enough; and to
make us further fenlible of this, we will inſtance in two things that
argue the unſoundneſs and hollow'neſs of the Earth in the inward
recelles of it, though the ſurface be intire and unbroken; Theſe
are Earthqu.ikes and the communication of Subterrineuils waters and
Seas: Of which two we will ſpeak a little more particularly.
Earthquakes are too evident deinonſtrations of the hollowneſs of
the Earth, being the dreadful effects or conſequences ofit; for if the
body of the Earth was found and compact, there would be no ſuch
thing in Nature as an Earthquake. They are commonly accom-
panicd with an heavy dead ſound, like a dull thunder which ariſeth
from the Vapours that are ſiriving in the womb of Nature when
her throes are coming upon her. And that theſe Caverns where
the Vapours lie are very large and capacious, we are taught
ſometimes by fad experience ; for whole Cities and Countries have
been ſwallow'd up into them, as Sodom and Gomorrha, and the Re
gion of Pentapolis, and ſeveral Cities in Greece, and in Aſia, and
other parts. Whole Iſlands alſo have been thus abſort in an Earth-
quake; the pillars and props they ſtood upon being broken, they
have ſurik and faln in as an houſe blown up. I am alſo of opinion
that thoſe Iſlands that are made by divulſion from a Continent, as
Sicily was broken off from Italy, and Great Britain, as ſome think,
froin France, have been made the ſame way; that is, the Iſthmus
or necks of Land that joyn’d theſe Illands with their Continents
before, have been hollow, and being either worn by the water,
or ſhak'd by an Earthquake, have ſunk down, and ſo made way for
the Sea to overflow thein, and of a Proinontory to make an Illand,
For it is not at all likely that the neck of Land continu'd ſtanding,
and the Sea overflow'd it, and ſo made an Illand; for then all thoſe
paſſages between ſuch Illands, and their reſpective Continents
would be extremely ſhallow and unnavigable, which we do not
find them to be. Nor is it any more wonder if ſuch a neck of Land
Thould fall, than that a Mountain (liould ſink, or any other Tract
of Land, and a Lake riſe in its place, which hath often happen d.
Plato ſuppoſeth his Arlantis to have been greater than Aſia and
Africa together, and yet to have ſunk all into the Sea ; whether
that be true or no, I do not think it impoſſible that ſome arms of
the Sea or Sinus's Inight have had ſuch an original as that ; and I
am very apt to think, that for ſome years after the Deluge, till the
fragments were well ſetled and adjuſted, great alterations would
happen as to the face of the Sea and the Land ; many of the
fragments would change their poſture, and many would ſink into
up, or the joynts and corners whereby they lean’d upon one ano-
ther: and thereupon a new face of things would ariſe, and a new
M
Deluge
82
Воок 1.
The Theory of the Earth.
Deluge for that part of the Earth. Such removes and interchan-
ges, I believe, would often happen in the frit Ages after the Flood;
as we ſee in all other ruines there happen leifer and ſecondary
ruines after the firſt, till the parts be ſo well pois'd and ſetled, that
without ſome violence they ſcarce change their pollure any more.
But to return to our Earthquakes, and to give an infance or
two of their extent and violence: Pliny mentions one in the Reign
of Tiberius Cæfar that ſtruck down Twelve Cities of Alix in one
night. And Fournier gives us an account of one in Pern, that reacht
three hundred leagues along the Sea-lhore, and ſeventy leagues in-
land; and leveld the Mountains all along as it went, threw dowi.
the Cities, turn'd the Rivers out of their Chanels, and made an
univerſal havock and confuſion; And all this, he faith, was done
within the ſpace of ſeven or tight minutes. There muſt be dread-
ful Vaults and Mines under that Continent, that gave paſiage to
the Vapours, and liberty to play for nine hundred miles in length,
and above two hundred in breadth. Alia alſo hath been very
fub
ject to theſe defolations by Earthquakes; and many parts in Europe,
as Greece, Italy, and others. The truth is, our Cities are built upon
ruines, and our Fields and Countries itand upon broken Arches
and Vaults, and ſo does the greateſt part of the outward fraino
of the Earth, and therefore it is no wonder if it be often ſhaken;
there being quantities of Exhalations within tlieſe Mines, or
Cavernous paſſages, that are capable of rarefaction and inflamma-
tion; and, upon ſuch occaſions, requiring more room, they ſhake
or break the ground that covers them. And thus much concerning
Earthquakes.
A ſecond obſervation that argues the hollowneſs of the Earth,
is the communication of the Seas and Lakes under ground. The
Caſpian and Mediterranean Seas, and ſeveral Lakes, receive into
them great Rivers, and yet have no viſible outlet: Theſe muſt
have Subterraneous out-lets, by which they empty themſelves,
otherwiſe they would redound and overflow the brims of their
Vellel. The Mediterranean is moſt remarkable in this kind, be.
cauſe 'tis obſerv'd that at one end the great Ocean flows into it
through the ſtraits of Gibralter, with a ſenſible current, and towards
the other end about Conftantinople the Pontus flows down into it
with a ſtream ſo ſtrong, that Veſſels have much ado to ſtem it;
and yet it neither hath any viſible evacuation or out-let, nor
over-flows its banks. And beſides that it is thus fed at either ind,
it is fed by the navel too, as I may fo ſay; it ſucks in, by thcir
Chanels, ſeveral Rivers into its belly, whereof the Nile is one very
great and conſiderable. Theſe things have made it a great Problem,
What becomes of the water of the Mediterranean Sea? And for my
part, I think, the ſolution is very eaſie, namely, that it is diſcharg'd
by Subterraneous paſſages, or convey'd by Chanels under the ground
into the Ocean. And this manner of diſcharge or conveyance is
not peculiar to the Mediterranean, but is common to it with the
Caſpian Sea, and other Seas and Lakes, that receive great Rivers
into them, and have no viſible iſſue,
1
I know
Chap.9. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
83
1
I know there have been propos'd ſeveral other ways to anſwer
this difficulty concerning the eflux or conſuinption of the waters
of the Mediterranean'; fume have ſuppos d a double current in the
ftrait of Gibralter, one that carry'd the water in, and another that
brought it out; like the Arteries and Veins in our Body, the one
exporting our bloud from the heart, and the other re-importing it:
So they ſuppos d one current upon the ſurface, which carry'd the
water into the Mediterranean, and under it at a certain depth a
counter-current, which brought the water back into the Occan. But
this hath neither proof nor foundation ; for unleſs it was included
in pipes, as our bloud is, or conſiſted of liquors very different,
theſe croſs currents would mingle and deſtroy one another. Others
are of opinion, that all the water that Aows into the Mediterranean,
or a quantity equal to it, is conſum'd in Exhalations every day
This ſeems to be a bolder ſuppoſition than the other, for if ſo much
be conſum'd in Vapours and Exhalations every day as fows into
this Sea, what if this Sea had an out-let, and diſcharg'd by that,
every day, as much as it receiv'd; in a few days the Vapours
would have conſum'd all the relt; and yet we ſee many Lakes that
have as free an out-let as an in-let, and are not conſuin'd, or ſen-
ſibly diminiſht by the Vapours. Belides, This Reaſon is a Suminer-
reaſon, and would paſs very ill in Winter, when the heat of the
Sun is inuch leſs powerful: At leaſt there would be a very ſenſible
difference betwixt the height of the waters in Summer and Winter,
if ſo much was conſum'd every day as this Explication ſuppoſeth.
And the truth is, this want of a viſible ont-let is not a property
belonging only to the Mediterranean Sea, as we noted before, but
is alſo in other Seas and great Lakes, fome lying in one Climate
and ſome in another, where there is no reaſon to ſuppoſe ſuch ex-
ceſſive Exhalations; and though'tis true ſome Rivers in Africk, and
in others parts of the Earth, are thus exhald and dry'd up, with-
out ever flowing into the Sea ( as were all the Rivers in the firſt Earth)
yet this is where the fands and parch'd ground ſuck up a great part
of them ; the heat of the Climate being excellively ſtrong, and the
Chanel of the River growing ſhallower by degrees, and, it may be,
divided into leſſer branches and rivulets; which are cauſes that
take no place here. And therefore we muſt return to our firſt reaſon,
which is univerſal, for all ſeaſons of the Year and all Climates; and
ſeeing we are allur'd that there are Subterraneous Chanels and paſ-
ſages, for Rivers often fall into the ground, and ſometimes riſe again,
and ſometimes never return; why ſhould we doubt to aſcribe this
effect to ſo obvious a cauſe? Nay, I believe the very Ocean doth
evacuate it ſelf by Subterraneous out-lets ; for conſidering what á
prodigious maſs of water falls into it every day from the wide
inoutlis of all the Rivers of the Earth, it muſt have out-lets
propor-
tionable; and thoſe Syrtes or great Whirlpools that are conſtant in
certain parts or Sinus's of the Sea, as upon the Coaſt of Noriray and
of Italy, ariſe probably froin Subterraneous out-lets in thoſe places,
whereby the water ſinks, and turns, and draws into it whatſoever
comes within ſuch a compaſs; and if there was no iſſue at the bot-
tom, though it might by contrary currents turn things round with-
M 2
រំ in
*
1
84
Book 1.
The Theory of the Earth.
Virgil.
in its Sphere, yet there is no reaſon from that why it ſhould ſuch
them down to the bottom. Neither does it feuin improbable, that
the currents of the Sea are from theſe in-draughts, and that there is
always a ſubmarine in-let in ſome part of them, to make a circula -
tion of the Waters. But thus much for the Subterrancolis coin-
munication of Seas and Lakes.
And thus much in general concerning Subterraneous Cavitics,
and concerning the hollow and broken frame of the Earth. lii
Kad now Magick enough to ſhow you at one view all the inſide
of the Earth, which we have imperfectly deſcrib'd; if we could go
under the roots of the Mountains, and into the ſides of the broken
rocks; or could dive into the Earth with one of thoſe Rivers that
ſink under ground, and follow its courſe and all its windings till
it riſe again, or led us to the Sea, we ſhould have a much ſtronger
and more effectual Idea of the broken forin of the Earth, than any
we can escite by theſe faint deſcriptions collected froin Reaſon.
The Ancients I remember usd to repreſent theſe hollow Caves
and Subterraneous Regions in the nature of a l'orld under-ground,
and ſuppos'd it inhabited by the Nymphs eſpecially the Nymphs of
the waters and the Sea-Goddeſles; lo Orpheus ſung of old; and in
imitation of him Virgil hath made a deſcription of thoſe Regions ;
feigning the Nyinph Cyrene to ſend for her ſon to come down to her,
and make her a viſit in thoſe ſhades where mortals were not adınitted.
Duc
age,
duc ad 1205, fas illi limina Divům
Tangere, ait : Simul alta jubet diſcedere latè
Flumina, quà juvenis greffus inferret, at illum
Curvata in montis faciem circumftitit unda,
Accepitque finu vafto, misétque ſub amnem.
Fámqu: domum mirans Genetricis & humidi regna,
Spelunciſque lacos claufus, lucufque fonantes,
Ibat, & ingeitti motu Itup fa&tus aquarum
Omnia ſub magnâ labentia flumina terra
Spectabat diverſa locis; Phasímque Licúmque, &c.
Et Thalami matris pendentia pumice te&ta, &c.
Come led the Touth belor, bring him to me,
The Gods are pleas'd our Manſions he should fie;
Streight she commands the floods to make him wuy,
They open their wide bofom and obey;
Sofi is the path, and eaſie is his tread,
A m.try Arch bends o'er his dewy head;
Ind as he goes he wonders, and looks round,
To ſee this new-found Kingdom under ground.
The ſilent Likes in hollow Caves he fees,
And on their banks an echoing gruve of Trees 3
The fall of waters 'mongſt the Rocks belom
He hears, and ſees the Rivers how they flow;
All the great Rivers of the E.irth are there,
Prep:r'd, as in a romb, by Nature's care.
Laſt
, to his mother's bed-chamber he's brought,
Where the high roof with Pumice-ſtone is wrought, &c.
IN
Chap.9. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
85
A
If we now could open the Earth as this Nymph did the Water,
and
go
down into the boſom of it: ſee all the dark Chambers and
Apartments there, how ill contriv'd, and how ill kept : ſo many
holes and corners, ſome fillid with ſmoak and fire, come with wa-
ter, and ſome with vapours and mouldy Air; how like a ruine it
lies gaping and torn in the parts of it? we thould not eaſily believe
that God created it into this forin immediately out of nothing ;
It would have coft no more to have made things in better order ;
nay, it had been more eaſie and more ſimple; and accordingly we
are aſſured that all things were inade at firſt in Beauty and propor-
tion. And if we conſider Nature and the inanner of the firſt for-
mation of the Earth, 'tis evident that there could be no ſuch holes
and Caverns, nor broken pieces, made then in the body of it; for
the groſſer parts of the Chaos falling down towards the Center,
they would there compoſe a maſs of Earth uniform and compact,
the water ſwimming above it; and this first maſs under the water
could have no Caverns or vacuities in it; for if it had had
any,
the Earthy parts, while the maſs was liquid or ſemi-liquid, would
have ſunk into them and fillid thein up, espelling the Air or
Water that was there; And when afterwards there came to be a
cruſt or new Earth form'd upon the face of the Waters, there could
be no Cavities, no dens, no fragments in it, no more than in the
other ; And for the ſame general reaſon, that is, palling from a
liquid form into a concrete or folid, leaſurely and by degrees, it
would flow and ſettle together in an entire maſs ; There being
noching broken, nor any thing hard, to bear the parts off from
one another, or to intercept any empty ſpaces between thein.
'Tis manifeft then that the Earth could not be in this Cavernous
form originally, by any work of Nature ; nor by any immediate
action of God, ſeeing there is neither uſe nor beauty in this kind
of conſtruction ; Do we not then, as reaſonably, as aptly, aſcribe
it to that defolation that was brought upon the Earth in the gene-
ral Deluge ? Wien its outward frame was diſſolv'd and fell into
the great Abyſs: How eaſily doth this anſwer all that we have
obſerv'd concerning the Subterraneous Regions ? That hollow and
broken poſture of things under ground, all thoſe Caves and holes,
and blind recefi's, that are otherwiſe ſo inaccountable, ſay but that
they are a Ruine, and you have in one word explain'd them all.
For there is no ſort of Cavities, interior or exterior, great or little,
open or ſhut, wet or dry, of what forın or faſhion foever, but we
might reaſonably expect them in a ruine of that nature. And as
for the Subterraneous waters, ſeeing the Earth fell into the Abyſs.
the pillars and foundations of the preſent ( exteriour ) Earth mult
ſtand immers'd in water, and therefors ar ſuch a depth from the
ſurface every where, there muſt be water found, if the ſoil be of
a nature to admit it. 'Tis true, all Subterraneous waters do not
proceed from this original, for inany of them are the effects of Rains
and melted Snows funk into the Earth ; but that in digging any
where you conſtantly come to water at length, even in the moſt ſolid
ground, this cannot proceed from theſe Rains or Snows, but muſt
come from below, and from a cauſe as general as the effect is;
which
86
Воок 1.
T.be Theory of the Earth.
which can be no other in any judgment than this, that the roots
of the exteriour Earth ſtand within the old Abyſs, whereof, as a
great part lies open in the Sea, ſo the reſt lies hid and cover'd
among
the fragınents of the Earth; fonetiines diſpers d and only inoill-
ning the parts, as our bloud lies in the fleſh, and in the habit of
the body, ſometimes in greater or heller mailes, as the bloud in
our Veflels. And this I take to be the true account of Subterra-
neous waters as diſtinguiſh'd from Fountains and Rivers, and from
the matter and cauſes of them.
Thus much we have ſpoke to give a general Idea of the inward
parts of the Earth, and an eaſie Explication of thein by our Hypo-
theſis ; which whether it be true or no, if you compare it impar-
tially with Nature, you will confeſs at leait, that all theſe things
are juſt in ſuch a form and poſture as if it was true.
1
C H A P. X.
Concerning the Chanel of the Sea, and the Original of it;
The Cauſes of its irregular form and unequal depths: As
alſo of the Original of Iſlands, their ſituation, and other
properties.
E have hitherto given an account of the Subterraneous Re-
gions and of their general forin; We now come above
ground to view the ſurface of the Globe, which we find Terraque-
vus, or divided into Sea and Land: Theſe we muſt ſurvey, and
what is remarkable in them as to their frame and ſtructure, we
muſt give an account of from our Hypothefis, and ſhew to be inac
countable from any other yet known.
As for the ocean, there are two things conſiderable in it, the
Water and the Chanel that contains it. The Water no doubt is as
ancient as the Earth and cotemporary with it, and we ſuppoſe it
to be part of the great Abyſs wherein the World was drown'd;
the reſt lying cover'd under the hollow fragments of Continents and
Tílands. But that is not ſo much the ſubject of our preſent diſcourſe
as the Chanel of the Ocean, that valt and prodigious Cavity that
runs quite round the Globe, and reacheth, for ought we know,
from Pole to Pole, and in many places is unfearchably deep: When
I preſent this great Gulf to my imagination, emptied of all its
waters, naked and gaping at the Sun, ſtretching its jaws from
one end of the Earth to another, it appears to me the moſt ghaftly
thing in Nature. What hands or inſtruments could work a Trench
in the body of the Earth of this vaſtneſs, and lay Mountains and
Rocks on the ſide of it, as Ramparts to encloſe it?
But as we juſtly admire its greatneſs, ſo we carinot at all admire
its beauty or elegancy, for 'tis as deform’d and irregular as it is
grcat. And there appearing nothing of order or any regular
deſign
Chap.9. The Deluge and Diffolution of the Earth. 87/
delign in its parts, it ſeems reaſonable to believe that it was not
the work of Nature, according to her first intention, or according
to the firſt inodel that was drawn in meaſure and proportion, by the
Line and by the Plummet, but a ſecondary work, and the beſt
that could be made of broken materials. And upon this ſuppoli-
tion 'tis eaſie to imagine, how upon the diſſolution of the priinä-
val Earth the Chanel of the Sea was made, or that huge Cavity
that lies between the ſeveral Continents of the Earth ; which ſhall
be more particularly explain'd after we have view'd a little better
the form of it, and the Iſlands that lie ſcatter'd by its ſhores.
There is no Cavity in the Earth, whether open or Subterraneous,
that is comparably to great as that of the Ocean, nor would any
appear of that deformity if we could ſee it empty. The inſide of
a Cave is rough and unlightly; The beds of great Rivers and great
Lakes when they are laid dry, look very raw and rude; The Val-
leys of the Earth, if they were naked, without Trees and without
Graſs, nothing but bare ground and bare ſtones, from the tops of
their Mountains would have a ghaſtly aſpect; but the Sea-chanel is
the complex of all theſe ; here Caves, empty Lakes, naked Valleys
are repreſented as in their original, or rather far exceeded and out-
done as to all their irregularities; for the Cavity of the Ocean is
univerſally irregular, both as to the ſhores and borders of it; as
to the uncertain breadth and the uncertain depth of its ſeveral parts,
and as to its ground and bottoin and the whole mould: If the Sea
had been drawn round the Earth in regular figures and borders,
it might have been a great beauty to our Globe, and we ſhould
reaſonably have concluded it a work of the firſt Creation, or of
Nature's firſt production; but finding on the contrary all the marks
of diſorder and diſproportion in it, we may as reaſonably conclude,
that it did 110t belong to the firſt order of things, but was ſome-
thing ſuccedaneous, when the degeneracy of Mankind, and the
judgments of God had deſtroy'd the firſt World, and ſubjected the
Creation to ſome kind of Vanity.
Nor can it eaſily be imagin'd, if the Sea had been always, and
the Earth, in this Terraqueous form, broke into Continents and Idlands,
how Mankind could have been propagated at firſt through the face
of the Earth, all from one head and from one place. For Naviga-
tion was not then known, at leaſt as to the grand Ocean, or to paſs
from Continent to Continent; And, I believe, Noah's Ark was
the firſt Ship, or Veílel of bulk, that ever was built in the World;
how could then the Poſterity of Adam overflow the Eartlı, and ſtock
the ſeveral parts of the World, if they had been diſtant or ſeparate
then, as they are now, by the interpoſal of the great Ocean? But
this conſideration we will inſiſt upon more largely in another place;
let us reflect upon the irregularities of the Sea-chancl again, and the
poſſible cauſes of it.
If we could iinagine the Chanel of the Sea to have been made as
we my imagine the Chanel of Rivers to have been, by long and
inſenſible attrition: The Water wearing by degrees the ground
under it, by the force it hath from its deſcent and courſe, we ſhould
not wonder at its irregular form; but 'tis not pollible this Chanel
Thould
88
Bookl.
The Theory of the Earth.
but go
ſhould have liad any ſuch original; whence (hould its water har:
deſcended, from what Mountains, or from what Clouds? Where
is the ſpring-head of the Sea? What forcë could eat away hal
the ſurface of the Earth, and wcar it hollow tu an imineaturable
depth? This muſt not be from feeble and lingiing cauſes, ſuch as
the attrition of waters, but from ſome great violence offer'd to Na
ture, ſuch as we ſuppoſe to have been in the general Deluge, when
the frame of the Earth was broken. And after we have a little ſur .
vey d the Sea-coaſt, and ſo far as we can, the form of the Sea chia-
nel, we llall the more eaſily believe that they could have no other
original than what we aſſign.
The ſhores and coaſts of the Sea are no way equal or uni orm,
in a line uncertainly crooked and broke; indented and
jag'd as a thing torn, as you may ſee in the Maps of the Ccalls and
the Sca-charts; and yet there are innumerable more inequalities than
are taken notice of in thoſe draughts ; for they only mark the
greater Promontories and Bays ; but there are beſides thoſe a mul-
titude of Creeks and oui-lets, necks of Land and Angles, which brcak
the evenneſs of the fhore in all manner of ways. Then the licight
and level of the fiora is as uncertain is the line of it; 'Tis foine-
times high and ſometimes low, ſometimes ſpread in ſandy Plains,
as (mooth as the Sea it ſelf, and of ſuch an equal height with it,
that the waves feein to have no bounds but the meer figure and
convexity of the Globe; In cther places 'tis rais'd into banks and
ramparts of Earth, and in others 'tis wall’d in with Rocks; And
all this without any order that we can obferve, or any other reaſon
than that this is what might be expected in a ruine.
As to the depths and foundings of the Sea, they are under no
rule nor equality any more than the figures of the Shores ; Shal
lows in ſome places, and Gülphs in others; beds of Sands fome-
times, and ſometimes Rocks under water; as Navigators have learn'd
by a long and dangerous experience: And though we that are up-
on dry Land, are not much concern'd how the Rocks and the
Shelves lie in the Sea, yet a poor ſhipwreckt Mariner; when he hath
run his Veſſel upon a Rock in the middle of the Chanel, expoftu-
lates bitterly with Nature, who it was that plac'd that Rock there,
and to what purpoſe? Was there not room cnough, faith he, up .
on the Land, or the Shore, to lay your great ſtories, but they mult
be thrown into the iníddle of the Sca, as it were in ſpite to Navi-
gation ? The beſt Apology that can be made for Nature in this cale,
ſo far as I know, is to confeſs that the whole buſineſs of the Sea-
chanel is but a ruine, and in a ruine things tumble uncertainly,
and commonly lie in confuſion: Though to ſpeak the truth, it ſel-
dom happens, unleſs in narrow Seas, that Rocks or Banks or Iſlands
lie in the middle of them, or very far from the Shorcs.
Having view'd the more viſible parts of the Chanel of the Sea,
we muſt now deſcend to the bottom of it, and ſee the form and
contrivance of that; but who ſhall guide us in our journey, while
Chap. 38.16. we walk, as Fob faith, in the ſearch of the deep > Or who can
make a deſcription of that which none hath ſeen ? It is reaſonable
to believe, that the bottom of the Sea is much more rugged, brokin
and
Chap. 1o. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth. 89
ز
and irregular than the face of the Land; There are Mountains, and
Valleys, and Rocks, and ridges of Rocks, and all the common in-
equalities we ſee upon Land; beſides theſe, 'tis very likely there
are Caves under water, and hollow pallages into the bowels of the
Earth, by which the Seas circulate and communicate one with ano-
ther, and with Subterraneous waters ; Thoſe great Eddees and in-
famous Syrtes and Whirlpools that are in ſome Seas, as the Baltick
and the Mediterranean, that ſuck into thein and overwhelin what-
ever comes within their reach, ſhow that there is ſomething below
that ſucks from them in proportion, and that drinks up the Sea as
the Sea drinks up the Rivers. We ought alſo to imagine the Shores
within the water to go inclin'd and iloping, but with great ine-
quality; there are many Shelves in the way, and Chambers, and
Tharp Angles; and many broken Rocks and great ſtones lie rolled
down to the boitom.
'Tis true theſe things affect us little, becauſe they are not expos'd
to our ſenſes; and we feldom give our felves the trouble to col-
lect from reaſon what the form of the inviſible and inacceſſible
parts of the Earth is; or if we do ſometimes, thoſe Idea's are faint
and weak, and make no laſting impreſſion upon our imagination
and paſſions; but if we ſhould ſuppoſe the Ocean dry, and that
we lookt down from the top of ſome high Cloud upon the empty
Shell, how horridly and barbarouſly would it look? And with
what amazement ſhould we ſee it under us like an open Hell, or a
wide bottomleſs pit? So deep, and hollow, and vaſt; lo broken and
confus'd, ſo every way deforin'd and monſtrous. This would ef.
fettually waken our imagination, and inake us enquire and wonder
how ſuch a thing came in Nature; from what cauſes, by what
force or engincs could the Earth be torn in this prodigious manner?
did they dig the Sea with Spades, and carry out the molds in
hand-baskets? Where are the entrails laid ? and how did they cleave
the Rocks aſunder? If as many Pioneers as the Ariny of Xerxes,
had been at work ever ſince the beginning of the World, they
could not have made a ditch of this greatneſs. Nor is it the
greatneſs only, but that wild and multifarious confuſion which
we ſee in the parts and faſhion of it, that inakes it ſtrange and in-
accountable; pois another Chaos in its kind, who can paint the
Scenes of it? Gulfs, and Precipices, and Cataracts; Pits within Pits,
and Rocks under Rocks, broken Mountains and ragged Iſands,
that look as if they had been Countries pulld up by the roots, and
planted in the Sea.
If we could make true and full repreſentations of theſe things to
our felves, I think we ſhould not be ſo bold as to make them the
immediate product of Divine Omnipotence; being deſtitute of all
appearance of Art or Counſel. The firſt orders of things are more
perfect and regular: and this Decorum ſeems to be obſerv'd, that
Nature doth not fall into diſorder till Mankind be firſt degenerate
and leads the way. Monſters have been often made an argument
againſt Providence; if a Calf have two heads, or five legs, ſtreight
there muſt not be a God in Heaven, or at leaſt not upon Earth;
and
yet
this is but a chance that happens once in many years, and
N
is
90
Book I.
The I beory of the Earth.
are.
is of no conſequence at all to the reſt of the World: But if we make
the ſtanding frame of Nature inonſtrous, or deform'd and diſprc-
portion'd, and to have been ſo not by corruption and degeneracy;
but immediately by Divine Creation or Formation, it would not be
ſo eaſie to anſwer that objection againſt Providence. Let us there.
fore prevent this imputation, and ſuppoſing, according to our
Theory, that theſe things were not originally thus, let us now ex-
plain more distinctly how they caine to paſs at the Deluge, or
upon the diffolution of the firſt Earth.
And we will not content our ſelves with a general anſwer to
theſe obſervations concerning the Sea-chanel, as if it was a ſufficient
account of them to ſay they were the effects of a ruine; there are
other things to be conſidtr'd and explain'd beſides this irregulari-
ty, as the vaſt hollowneſs of this Cavity, bigger incomparably thanı
any other belonging to the Earth; and alſo the declivity of the
ſides of it, which lie ſhelving from top to bottoin; For notwith-
ſtanding all the inequalities we have taken notice of in the Chane!
of the Sea, it hath one general form, which may, though under
many differences, be obſerv'd throughout, and that is, that the
ſhores and ſides within the water lie inclin'd, and you deſcend by
degrees to the deepeſt part, which is towards the middle. This, i
know, admits of many exceptions, for ſometimes upon a rocky
ſhore, or among rocky Iſlands the Sea is very deep cloſe to the
Rocks, and the deeper commonly the higher and ſteeper the Rocks
Alſo where the deſcent is more leiſurely, 'tis often after a
different manner, in ſome coaſts more equaland uniform, in others
more broken and interrupted, but ſtill there is a deſcent to the
Chanel or deepeſt part, and this in the deep Ocean is fathomleſs;
And ſuch a deep Ocean, and ſuch a deep Chanel there is always
between Continents. This, I think, is a property as determinate as
any we can pitch upon in the Chanel of the Sea, and with thoſe
other two inention'd, its vaſt Cavity and univerſal irregularity, is
all one can deſire an account of as to the form of it; we will there
fore from this ground take our riſe and firſt meaſures for the Ex-
plication of the Sea-chanel.
Let us ſuppoſe then in the diſſolution of the Earth when it be
gan to fall, that it was divided only into three or four fragments,
according to the number of our Continents; but thoſe fragments
being vaſtly great could not deſcend at their full breadth and ex-
panſion; or at leaſt could not deſcend ſo faſt in the middle as to-
wards the extremitics ; becauſe thc Air about the edges would
yield and give place eaſily, not having far to go to get out of the way;
but the Air that was under the middle of the fragment could not
without a very ſwift motion get from under the concave of it,
and conſequently its deſcent there would be more reſiſted and ſuf-
pended; but the ſides in the mean time would continually deſccnd,
bending the fragment with their weight, and ſo making it of a
Jeffer compaſs and expanſion than it was before: And by this
means there would be an interval and diſtance made between the
two falling fragments, and a good part of the Abyſs, after their
defcent, would lie uncover'd in the middle betwixt them; as may
be
.
Chap.10. I be Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth. 91
1
be ſeen in this Figure, where the fragments A. B. bending down-
wards in their extremities, ſeparate as they go, and after they are
faln leave a good ſpace in the Abyſs betwixt thein, altogether un-
cover d ; This ſpace is the main Chanel of the great Ocean, lying
betwixt two Continents; and the inclining ſides ſhew the declivity
of the Shores.
This we have repreſented here only in a Ring or Circle of the
Earth, in the firſt Figure; but it may be better repreſented in a
broader ſurface, as in the ſecond Figure, where the two fragments
A.B. that are to make the two oppoſite Continents, fall in like
double Doors opening downwards, the Hinges being towards the
Land on either ſide, ſo as at the bottom they leave in the middle
betwixt them a deep Chanel of water, 1. a. a. ſuch as is betwixt
all Continents; and the water reaching a good height upon the
Land on either ſide, makes Sea there too, but ſhallower, and by
degrecs you deſcend into the deepeſt Chanel.
This gives an account of two things that we mention'd to be con-
ſider'd and explain'd as to the Sea, how the great Cavity of its
Chanel was made, and how it was made in that general form of
declivity in its ſides from the Land : The third thing was the ir-
regularities of it, both as to its various depths, and as to the form
of the ſhores and of the bottom. And this is as eaſily and natural-
ly explain'd from the ſame ſuppoſition as the foriner two; for
though we have hitherto repreſented the fragments A. B. as even
and regular after their fall, becauſe that was moſt ſimple, and there
was no occaſion then to repreſent them otherwiſe, yet we muſt
ſuppoſe that as ſoon as in their fall they hit upon the top or bot-
toin of the Abyſs, that great force and weight with which they
deſcended broke off all the edges and extremities, and ſo made innu-
merable ruptures and inequalities in the ſhores, and as many with-
in the Sea, and at the bottom ; where the broken Rocks and lumps
of Earth would lie in all imaginable diſorder ; as you may con-
ceive froin the third Figure. For when the motion came on a ſud-
den to be obſtructed, the load of the fragment ſtill preſſing it for-
wards, ſuch a concuſſion ariſe as inade thouſands of leſſer fragments,
of all ſhapes and magnitudes, and in all poſtures and forms, and
moſt of them irregular. And by theſe fractions and ſecondary
ruines the line of the ſhores was broken, and the level of thein too;
In ſome places they would ſtand high, in others low,
low, ſometimes
rough and ſometimes even, and generally crooked, with Angles
and in-lets, and uncertain windings. The bottom alſo, by the ſame
ſtroke was diverſifi'd into all manner of forms, ſometimes Rocky
with Pits and Gulfs, and ſometimes ſpread in plain beds, ſome-
tiines ſhallow and ſometimes deep ; for thoſe differences would
depend only upon the ſituation of the ſecondary fragments; and ſo
it might come to paſs, that ſome places near the ſhore might be
exceſſive deep when a Rock or Rocks ſtood in a ſteep poſture, as
(Figure 3. ) b.b.b. and, on the contrary, ſometimes places much
more advanc'd into the Ocean, might be leſs deep, where a frag-
ment of Earth lay under water, or one bore up another, as c. c. c.
but theſe caſes would not be very frequent. To conclude, There
N?
are
17
2
.
92.1
T
.
T.
ar
?
frug...
T
1
А.
A:
B
.
fig.
2.
M
}
!
#1.2
1
}
A
B
**
fig.3.
+
A
"
-
V DV
.
.
2. W
I
VA
***
Y SA
1
Law
M
**
Chap. 1o. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
93
are no properties of the Sea-chanel, that I know of, nor differen-
ces or irregularities in the form of it, which this Hypotheſis doth
not give a fair account of: And having thus far open'd the way,
and laid down the general grounds for their Explication, other
things that are more ininute, we leave to the curioſity of particu-
lar Genius's ; being unwilling to clog the Theory at firit with things
that may ſeem unneceſſary. We proceed now to the conſideration
of Iſlands.
We muſt in the firſt place diſtinguiſh between Original Iſlands
and Factitious Iſlands ; Thoſe I call factitious, that are not of the
ſame date and Antiquity with the Sea, but have been made ſome
at one time, ſome at another, by acciderital cauſes, as the aggeſti-
on of Sands and Sand-beds, or the Sea leaving the tops of fomu
ſhallow places that lie high, and yet flowing about the lower skirts
of them; Theſe make fandy and plain Iſlands, that have no high
Land in them, and are but mock-Iſlands in effect. others are made
by divulſion from ſome Continent, when an Iſthmus or the neck
of a Promontory running into the Sea, ſinks or falls in, by an
Earthquake or otherwiſe, and the Sea entring in at the gap paſſeth
through, and makes that Promontory or Country become an Illand.
Thus the Inland Sicily is ſuppos’d to have been made, and all
Africa might be an Iſland, if the Iſthmus between the Mediterr.e-
nean and the red Sea ſhould ſink down. And theſe Illands may
have Rocks and Mountains in them, if the Land liad fo before.
Laſtly, There are Iſlands that have been faid to riſe from the bot-
tom of the Sea ; Hiſtory mentions ſuch in both the Archipelago's,
Agaan and Indian ; and this ſeems to argue that there are great
fragments or tracts of Earth that lie looſe at the bottom of the Sea,
or that are not incorporated with the ground ; which agrees very
well with our Explication of the Sea-chanel.
But beſides theſe Iſlands and the ſeveral ſorts of them, there are
others which I call Original ; becauſe they could not be produc'd
of the forementioned ways, but are of the fame Origin and
Antiquity with the Chanel of the Sea ; and ſuch are the genera-
lity of our Illands ; They were not made of heaps of Sands, nor
torn from any Continent, but are as ancient as the Continents
themſelves, namely, ever ſince the Deluge, the coinmon Parent of
them both. Nor is there any difficulty to underſtand how Illands
were inade at the diſſolution of the Earth, any more than how
Continents were made; for Iſlands are but lefſer Continents, on
Continents greater Iſlands; and according as Continents were inade
of greater maſſes of Earth or grcater fragments ſtanding above th:
Water, fo Illands were made of leſs, but ſo big always, and in ſuch
a poſture, as to bear their tops above the Water. Yet though they
agree thus far, there is a particular difference to be taken notice of
as to their Origin; for the Continents were made of thoſe three
Or four priinary inaſſes into which the falling Orb of the Earth
was divided, but the Iſlands were made of the fractures of theſe,
and broken off by the fall from the skirts and extremities of the Con
tinents; We noted before, that when thoſe great mafles and prima
ry fragments came to daſh upon the Abyſs in their fall, the lindileri
stop
in any
1
94
Book
The Theory of the Earth.
ſtop of the motion, and the weighty bulk of the deſcending frag-
ment broke off all the edges and extremities of it, which edges and
extremities broken off made the Itlands; and accordingly we ſee
that they generally lie ſcatter'd along the ſides of the Continents,
and are but ſplinters, as it were, of thoſe greater bodies. 'Tis truc,
beſides theſe, there were an infinite number of other pieces broke
off that do not appear, ſome making Rocks under water, ſome
ſhallows and banks in the Sea ; but the greateſt of them when they
fell either one upon another, or in ſuch a poſture as to prop up one
another, their heads and higher parts would ſtand out of the water
and make Illands.
Thus I conceive the Illands of the Sea were at firſt produc'd;
we cannot wonder therefore that they ſhould be ſo numerous, or
far more numerous than the Continents; Theſe are the Parents,
and thoſe are the Children ; Nor can we wonder to ſee along the
ſides of the Continents ſeveral Iſlands or ſets of Illands, ſown, as it
Were, by handfuls, or laid in trains; for the manner of their
gene-
ration would lead us to think they would be ſo plac'd. So the Ame-
rican Iſlands lie ſcatter'd upon the Coaſt of that Continent ; the Mal-
divian and Philippine upon the Eaſt-Indian ſhore, and the Heſperides
upon the Africk; and there ſeldom happen to be any towards the
middle of the Ocean, though, by an accident, that alſo might
come to paſs. Laſtly, It ſuits very well with our Explication, that
there ſhould be Mountains and Rocks, ſometimes in cluſters, fome-
times in long chains, in all Iſands ; ( as we find there are in all that
are true and Original ) for 'tis that makes them high enough to
appear above the water, and ſtrong enough to continue and
pre-
ſerve themſelves in that high ſituation.
And thus much may ſuffice for a ſummary Explication of the
cauſes of the Sea-chanel and Illands, according to our Hypotheſis.
C H A P. XI.
Concerning the Mountains of the Earth, their greatneſs and
irregular Form, their Situation, Cauſes, and Origin.
W
E have been in the hollows of the Earth, and the Chambers
of the Deep, amongſt the damps and ſteams of thoſe lower
Regions; let us now go air our ſelves on the tops of the Moun-
tains, where we ſhall have a more free and large Horizon, and
quite another face of things will preſent it ſelf to our obſervation.
The greateſt objects of Nature are, methinks, the moſt pleaſına
,
to behold ; and next to the great Concave of the Heavens, and
thoſe boundleſs Regions where the Stars inhabit, there is nothing
that I look upon with more plaeſure than the wide Sea and the
Mountains of the Earth. There is ſomething auguſt and ſtately in
the Air of theſe things, that inſpires the mind with great thoughts
and paſſions ; We do naturally, upon ſuch occaſions, think of God
and
Chap. 11. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth,
95
and his greatneſs : and whatſoever hath but the ladow and
ap-
pearance of INFINIT E, as all things have that are too big
for our comprehenſion, they fill and over-bear the mind with their
Exceſs, and caſt it into a pleaſing kind of ſtupor and admiration.
And yet theie Mountains we are ſpeaking of, to confeſs the trutli,
are nothing but great ruines; but ſuch as Thow a certain magni-
ficence in Nature; as from old Temples and broken Amphitheaters
of the Romans we collect the greatneſs of that people. But the gran-
deur of a Nation is leſs ſenſible to thoſe that never fee the remains
and monuinents they have left, and thoſe who never ſee the moun-
tainous parts of the Earth, ſcarce ever reflect upon the cauſes of
them, or what power in Nature could be ſufficient to produce
them. The truth is, the generality of people have not ſence and cu-
rioſity enough to raiſe a queſtion concerning theſe things, or con-
cerning the Original of them. You may tell them that Mountains
grow out of the Earth like Fuzz-balls, or that there are Monſters
under ground that throw up Mountains as Moles do Mole-hills;
they will ſcarce raiſe one objection againſt your doctrine ; or if you
would appear more Learned, tell them that the Earth is a great
Animal and theſe are Wens that grow upon its body. This would
paſs current for Philoſophy; ſo much is the World drown'd in ftu-
pidity and ſenſual pleaſures, and ſo little inquiſitive into the works
of God and Nature.
There is nothing doth more awaken our thoughts or excite our
minds to enquire into the cauſes of ſuch things, than the actual
view of them; as I have had experience iny ſelf when it was my
fortune to croſs the Alps and Appennine Mountains ; for the light
of thoſe wild, vaſt and indigeiicd heaps of Stones and Earth, did
ſo deeply ſtrike my fancy, that I was not eaſie till I could give my
ſelf fome tolerable account how that confuſion came in Nature.
'Tis true, the height of Mountains compar'd with the Diameter of
the Earth is not conſiderable, but the extent of them and the ground
they ſtand upon, bears a conſiderable proportion to the ſurface of
the Earth; and if from Europe we may take our ineaſures for the
reſt, I caſily believe, that the Mountains do at leaſt take up the
tenth part of the dry Land. The Geographers are not very care-
ful to deſcribe or note in their Charts, the inultitude or ſituation of
Mountains ; They mark the bounds of Countries, the ſite of Cities
and Towns, and the courſe of Rivers, becauſe theſe are things
of chief uſe to civil a fairs and commerce, and that they deſign to
ſerve, and not Philoſophy or Natural Hiſtory. But Cluverius in his
deſcription of Ancient Germany, Switzerland and Italy, hath given
Maps of thoſe Countries more approaching to the natural face of
them, and we have drawn (at the end of this Chapter ) ſuch a
Map of either Hemiſphere, without marking Countries or Towns,
or any ſuch artificial things; diſtinguiſhing only Land and Sea,
Iſlands and Continents, Mountains and not Mountains; and 'tis
very uſeful to imagine the Earth in this manner, and to look often
upon ſuch bare draughts as ſhew us Nature undrelt, for then we
are beſt able to judge what her true ſhapes and proportions are.
Tis
96
Воок !.
The Theory of the Earth.
ܪ
'Tis certain that we naturally imagine the ſurface of the Earıh
inuch more regular than it is; for unleſs we be in ſome Mountai-
nous parts, there ſeldom occur any great inequalities within fo
inuch compaſs of ground as we can, at orice, reach with our Eye;
and to conceive the reſt, we multiply the ſame Mea, and extend it
ro thoſe parts of the Earth that we do not ſee; and ſo fanſie the
whole Globe much more ſmooth and uniforin than it is. But ſup-
poſe a man was carri'd alleep out of a Plain Country anongle
the Alps, and left there upon the top of one of the higheſt Moun-
tains, when he wak'd and look'd about him, he would think him-
felf in an inchanted Country, or carri’d into another World; every
thing would appear to him ſo different to what he had ever ſeen
or imagin d before. To ſee on every hand of him a multitude of
vaſt bodies thrown together in confuſion, as thoſe Mountains are;
Rocks ſtanding naked round about him ; and the hollow Valleys
gaping under him; and at his feet it may be, an heap of frozen
Snow in the midſt of Summer. He would hear the thunder come
from below, and ſee the black Clouds hanging beneath him ; Up-
on ſuch a proſpect, it would not be eaſie to him to perſwade
himſelf that he was ſtill upon the ſame Earth ; but if he did, he
would be convinc'd, at leaſt, that there are ſome Regions of it
ſtrangely rude, and ruine-like, and very different from what he
had ever thought of before. But the Inhabitants of theſe wild
places are even with us; for thoſe that live amongſt the Alps and
the great Mountains, think that all the reſt of the Earth is like their
Country, all broken into Mountains, and Valleys, and Precipices;
They never ſee other, and moſt people think of nothing but what
they have ſeen at one time or another.
Theſe Alps we are ſpeaking of are the greateſt range of Moun-
tains in Europe ; and 'tis prodigious to ſee and to conſider of what
extent theſe heaps of Stones and Rubbiſh are ; one way they over-
ſpread Savoy and Dauphiné, and reach through France to the Pyre-
nean Mountains, and ſo to the Ocean. The other way they run along
the skirts of Germany, through Stiria, Pannonia, and Dalmatia, as
far as Thrace and thc Black Sca. Then backwards they cover Sirit-
zerland and the parts adjacent; and that branch of them which we
call the Appennines, ſtrikes through Italy, and is, as it were, the
back-bone of that Country. This muſt needs be a large ſpace of
ground which they ſtand upon; Yet 'tis not this part of Europe only
that is laden with Mountains, the Northern part is as rough and
rude in the face of the Country, as in the manners of the people;
Bohemiit, Sileſia, Denmark, Norway, Sweedland, Lapland, and Ile-
land, and all the coaſts of the Baltick Sea, are full of Clifts, and
Rocks, and Crags of Mountains: Beſides the Riphean Mountains
in Muſcovy, which the Inhabitants there uſe to call the Stone-girdle's
and believe that it girds the Earth round about.
Nor are the other parts of our Continent more free from Mouna-
tains than Europe, nor other parts of the Earth than our Continent:
They are in the New World as well as the Old ; and if they could
diſcover two or three New Worlds or Continents more, they
would ſtill find them there. Neither is there any Original Ifand
A
upon
Chap.1). The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth. 97
1
upon the Earth, but is either alla Rock, or hath Rocks and Moun-
tains in it. And all the dry Land, and every Continent, is but a kind of
Mountain: though that wountain hath a multitude of lelitr ones,and
Valleys, and Plains, and Lakes, and Marſhes and ail variety of grounds.
In America, the Indes, or a ridge of Mountains ſo calld, are re-
ported to be higher than any we have, reaching above a thouſand
Leagues in length, and twenty in breadth, where they are the nara
rowelt. In Africk the Mountain Atlas, that for its height was ſaid
to bear the Heavens on its back, runs all along from the Weſtern
Sea to the borders of Egypt, parallel with the Mediterrane.in. There
alſo are the Mountains of the Mc011, and many more whereof we
have but an imperfect
, account, as neither indeed of that Country
in the remote and inner parts of it. Afiz is better known, and the
Mountains thereof better defcribd : Taurus, which is the principal
was adjudg'd by the ancient Geographers the greateſt in the World:
It divides Afia into two parts, which have their denomination from
it: And there is an Anti-Taurus the greater and the leſs, which ac-
cordingly divide Armenia into greater and leſs. Then the Cruci-
form Mountains of 1.115, the famous Caucaſus, the long Chains
of Taitary and China, and the Rocky and Mountainous Arabia. If
one could at once have a proſpect of all theſe together, one would
be eaſily ſatisfied, that the Globe of the Earth is a more rude and
indigeſted Body than ’tis commonly imagin'd; If one could ſee, I
fay, all the Kingdoms and Regions of the Earth at one view, how
they lie in broken heaps ; The Sea hath overwhelm'd one half of
them, and what remains are but the taller parts of a ruine: Look
upon thoſe great ranges of Mountains in Europe or in Afir whereof
we have given a ſhort ſurvey, in what confuſion do they lie? They
have neither form nor beauty, nor ſhape, nor order, no more than
the Clouds in the Air. Then how barren, how deſolate, how naked
are they? How they fand neglected by Nature. Neither the Rains
can ſoften them, nor the Dews from Heaven make them fruitful.
I have given this ſhort account of the Mountains of the Earth,
to help to remove that pre udice we are apt to have, or that con-
ceit, That the preſent Earth is regularly form’d. And to this pul
poſe I do not doubt but that it would be of very good uſe to have
natural Maps of the Earth, as we noted before, as well as civil; and
done with the ſame care and judgment. Our common Maps I call
Givil, which note the diſtinction of Countries and of Cities, and
repreſent the Artificial Earth as inhabited and cultivated : But
Natural Maps Icave out all that, and repreſent the Earth as it
would be if there was not an Inhabitant upon it, nor ever had been ;
the Skeleton of the Earth, as I may ſo ſay, with the ſite of all its
parts. Methinks alſo every Prince ſhould have ſuch a Draught of
his own Country and Dominions, to ſee how the ground lies in the
feveral parts of them, which higheſt, which lowelt; what reſpect
they have to one another, and to the Sea; how the Rivers flow,
and why; how the Mountains ſtand, how the Heaths, and how
the Marches are plac'd. Such a Map or Survey would be uſeful
both in time of War and Peace, and many good obſervations might
be made by it, not only as to Natural Hiſtory and Philoſophy, but
0
allo
98
The Theory of the Earth. Book I.
you would
alſo in order to the perfect improvement of a Country. But to re-
turn to our Mountains.
As this View of the multitude and greatneſs of them may help
to rectifie our iniſtakes about the form of the Earth, ſo before we
proceed to examine their cauſes it will be good to obſerve farther,
that theſe Mountains are plac'd in no order one with another,
that can either reſpect uſe or bcauty; and if you conſider them
ſingly, they do not conſiſt of any proportion of parts that is refer-
able to any deſign, or that hath the leaſt footſteps of Art or Coun-
fel. There is nothing in' Nature more ſhapeleſs and ill-figur d than
an old Rock or a Mountain, and all that variety that is among them,
is but the various modes of irregularity; ſo as you cannot make
a better character of them, in ſhort, than to ſay they are of all
forms and figures, except regular. Then if
go within
theſe Mountains, (for they are generally hollow,) you would find
all things there more rude, if poſſible, than without:' And laſtly,
if you look upon an heap of them together, or a Mountainous
Country, they are the greateſt examples of confuſion that we know
in Nature; no Tempeſt or Earthquake puts things into more dif-
order. 'Tis true, they cannot look ſo ill now as they did at firſt;
a ruine that is freſh looks much worſe than afterwards, when the
Earth grows diſcolour'd and skind over. But I fancy if we had
ſeen the Mountains when they were new born and raw, when the
Earth was freih-broken, and the waters of the Deluge newly retir'd,
the fractions and confuſions of them would have appear'd very
gaſtly and frightful.
After this general Survey of the Mountains of the Earth and
their properties, let us now reflect upon the cauſes of them. There
is a double pleaſure in Philoſophy, firſt that of Admiration, whilſt
we contemplate things that are great and wonderful, and do not
yet underſtand their Cauſes; for though admiration proceed from
ignorance, yet there is a certain charin and ſwectneſs in that paf-
ſion. Then the ſecond pleaſure is greater and more intellectual,
which is that of diſtinct knowledge and comprehenlion, when we
come to have the Key that unlocks thoſe ſecrets, and ſee the methods
wherein thoſe things come to paſs that we admir'd before; The
reaſons why the World is ſo or ſo, and from what cauſes Nature,
or any part of Nature, came into ſuch a ſtate ; and this we are
now to enquire after as to the Mountains of the Earıh, what their
original was, how and when the Earth came into this ſtrange frame
and ſtructure? In the beginning of our World, when the Earth
riſe from a Chaos, 'twas impoſſible it ſhould come immediately in-
to this Mountainous form; becauſe a maſs that is fluid, as a Chaos
is, cannot lie in any other figure than what is regular; for the
conſtant Laws of Nature do certainly bring all liquors into that
form: And a Chaos is not call’d ſo from any confuſion or bro-
kenneſs in the form of it, but from a confuſion and mixture of all
ſorts of ingredients in the compoſition of it. So we have already
produc’d, in the precedent Chapters a double argument that the
Earth was not originally in this form, both becauſe it riſe from a
Chaos, which could not of it ſelf, or by any immediate concie-
tion,
Chap.1. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth. 99
tion, ſettle into a forin of this nature, as hath been ſhown in the
Fourth and Fifth Chapters; as alſo becauſe if it had been originally
inade thus, it could never have undergone a Deluge, as hath buen
prov
d in the Second and Third Chapters. If this be then a ſecondary
and ſuccedaneous form the great queſtion is from what cauſes it ariſes.
Some have thought that Mountains, and all other irregularities
in the Earth, have riſe from Earthquakes, and ſuch like cauſes;
others have thought that they came from the univerſal Deluge;
yet not from any diſſolution of the Earth that was then, but only
from the great agitation of the waters, which broke the ground in-
to this rude and unequal forin. Both theſe cauſes ſeem to me very
incompetent and inſufficient. Earthquake feldom make Mountains, ,
they often take them away, and ſink them down into the Caverns
that lie under them; Beſides, Earthquakes are not in all Countries
and Climates as Mountains are; for, as we have obſerv'd more
than once, there is neither Iſland that is original, nor Continent
any where in the Earth, in what Latitude ſoever, but hath Mouri-
tains and Rocks in it. And laſtly, what probability is there, or
how is it credible, that thoſe vafttracts of Land which we fee fill'd
with Mountains both in Europe, Aſiz and Africa, were rais'd by
Earthquakes, or any eruptions froin below. In what Age of the
World was this done, and why not continu'd ? As for the Deluge,
which they alledge as another cauſe, I doubt 110t but Mountains
were made in the time of the general Deluge, that great change
and transformation of the Earth happen'd then, but not from ſuch
cauſes as are pretended, that is, the bare rolling and agitation of
the waters ; For if the Earth was finooth and plain before the
Ilood, as they ſeem to ſuppoſe as well as we do, the waters could
have little or no power over a ſinooth ſurface to tear it any way in
pieces, no more than they do a meadow or low ground when they
lie upon it; for that which makes Torrents and Land-foods vio-
lent, is their fall from the Mountains and high Lands, which our
Earth is now full of, but if the Rain fell upon even and level ground,
it would only ſadden and compreſs it; there is no poſſibility how
it ſhould raiſé Mountains in it. And if we could imagine an uni-
verſal Deluge as the Earth is now conſtituted, it would rather
throw down the Hills and Mountains than raiſe new ones; or by
beating down their tops and looſe parts, lielp to fill the Valleys, and
bring the Earth nearer to evenneſs and plainneſs.
Seeing then there are no lopes of explaining the Origin of Moun-
tains tither from particular Earthquakes, or from the general
Deline, according to the common notion and Explication of it;
theſe not being cauſes anſwerable to ſuch vaſt effects ; Let us try
our Hypotheſis again ; which hath made us a Chanel large enough
for the Sea, and room for all ſubterraneous Cavities, and I think
will find us materials enough to raiſe all the Mountains of the
Earth. We ſuppoſe the great Archi or circumference of the firſt
Earth to have fallen into the Abyſs at the Deluge, and ſeeing that
was larger than the ſurface it feil upon, 'tis abſolutely certain,
that it could not all fall flat, or lie under the water; Now as all
thoſe parts that ſtood above the water made dry Land, or the pre-
02
fent
1
IOO
Book 1.
The Theory of the Earth.
ſent habitable Earth, ſo ſuch parts of the dry Land as ſtood higher
than the relt, made Hills and Mountains; and this is the firſt and
general account of them, and of all the inequalities of the Earth.
But to conſider theſe things a little more particularly; There is a
double cauſe and neceſſity of Mountains, firſt this now mention'd,
becauſe the exteriour Orb of the Earth was greater than the inte'-
riour which it fell upon, and therefore it could not all fall fat;
and ſecondly, becauſe this exteriour Orb did not fall fo fat and
large as it might, or did not cover all the bottom of the Abyſs, as
it was very capable to do; but as we ſhewed before in explaining
the Chanel of the Ocean, it left a gaping in the middle, or an
Abyſs-chanel, as I ſhould all it; and the broader this Abyſs-chanel
was, the more Mountains there would be upon the dry Land; for
there would be more Earth, or more of the falling Orb left, and
leſs room to place it in, and therefore it muſt ſtand more in heaps.
In what paris of the Earth theſe heaps would lie, and in what
particular manner, it cannot be expected that we ſhould tell; but
all that we have hitherto obſerv'd concerning Mountains, how
itrange ſoever and otherwiſe unaccountable, inay eaſily be explain’d,
and deduc'd from this original; we ſhall not wonder at their
greatneſs and vaſtneſs, ſeeing they are the ruines of a broken World;
and they would take up more or leſs of the dry Land, according
as the Ocean took up inore or leſs ſpace of our Globc: Then as
to their figure and form, whether External or Internal, 'tis juſt
ſuch as anſwers our expectation, and no more than what the Hy-
potheſis leads us to; For you would eaſily believe that theſe heaps
would be irregular in all manner of ways, whether conliderd
apart, or in their ſituation to one another. And they would lie
coinmonly in Cluſters and in Ridges, for thoſe are two of the moſt
general poſtures of the parts of a ruine, when they fall injvards.
Laſtly, We cannot wonder that Mountains Mould be generally hol-
Ipw; For great bodies falling together in confulion, or bearing and
leaning againſt one another, muſt needs make a great many hollow-
neſſes in them, and by their unequal Applications empty ſpaces
ivill be intercepted. We fee alſo from the ſame reaſon, why moun-
tainous Countries are ſubject to Earthquakes; and why Mountains
often link and fall down into the Caverns that lie under them ; their
ipynts and props being decayed and worn, they become unable to
bear their weight. And all theſe properties you fee hang upon one
and the ſame ſtring, and are juſt conſequences from our ſuppoſition
concerning the diffolution of the firſt Earth. And there is n lurer
mark of a good Hypotheſis, than when it doth not only hit luckily
in one or two particulars, but anſwers all that it is to be apply'd to,
and is adequate to Nature in her whole extent.
But how fully or eaſily foever theſe things inay anſwer Naturl',
you will fay, it inay be, that all this is but an Hypotheſis ; that is, a?
kind of fiction or ſuppoſition that things were ſo and fo at firſt, and
by the coherence and agreement of the Effiets with ſuch a ſuppoli-
tion, you would argue and prove that they were rcally fo. This
I confeſs is true, this is the method, and if we would know any
thing in Nature further than our ſenſes go, wecan know it no other-
wife
pag.101
Fig
1
Incognita
:
E U RO™ "P
А
A А
ს 2-3
A
F
R
D
co
WA
02
CATE
ވިހި ރަ
Incoghita
(Fig.2.
pag. 101.
Incognita
leh
HBUSHIALI
1
.
tcognita
0
1
Chap. 1 1. I be Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth. 1oi
wife chan by an Hypotheſis. When things are either too little for our
ſenſes, or too remote and inaccellible, we have no way to know the
inward Nature, and the cauſes of their ſenſible properties, but by
reaſoning upon an Hypotheſis. If you would know, for example,
of what parts Water, or any other Liquor conſiſts, they are too
little to be diſcernd by the Eye, you muſt therefore take a ſuppoli-
tion concerning their inviſible figure and forin, and if that agrees
and gives the reaſon of all their ſenſible qualities, you underſtand
the nature of Water. In like manner, if you would know the na-
ture of a Comer, or of what matter the Sun contiſts, which are
things inacceſſible to us, you can do this no otherwiſe than by an Hy-
potheſis; and if that Hypotheſis be ealic and intelligible, and anſwers
all the Phanomena of thole iwo bodies, you have done as much as
a Philofopher or as Humane roufon can do. And this is what we have
attempted concerning the Earth and concerning the Deluge. We have
laid down an Hypotheſis that is eaſie and peripicuous, conſiſting of
a few things, and thoſe very intelligible, and from this we have
given an account how the Old World was deſtroy'd by a Deluge of
Water, and how the Earth came into this preſent form; ſo diſtin-
guilh'd and interrupted with Sea and Land, Mountains and Valleys,
and ſo broken in tlie ſurface and inward parts of it.
But to ſpeak the Truth, this Theory is ſomething more than a
bare Hypotheſis; becauſe we are alfur'd that the general ground that
we go upon is true, namely, That the Earth riſe at firſt from a
Chaos ; for beſides Reaſon and Antiquity, Scripture it ſelf doth
aſure us of that; and that one point being granted, we have de-
duc'd from it all the reſt by a direct chain of conſequences, which I
think cannot be broken eaſily in any part or link of it. Belides, the
great hinge of this Theory upon which all tlie reſt turns, is the di-
ſtinction we make of the Ante diluvian Earth and Heavens from the
Poſt-diluvian, as to their form and conſtitution. And it will never
be beaten out of my head, but that S. Peter hath made the ſame 2 Ep. Chag.
diſtinction fixteen hundred years ſince, and to the very ſame pur- 3.57 6.
poſe; fo that we have fur: footing here again, and the Theory
riſeth above the cliaracter of a bare Hypotheſis. And whereas an Hi-
pothefis that is clear and proportion'd to Nature in every reſpect, is
accounted morally certain, we inuſt in equity give more than a
morat certitude to this Theory. But I mean this only as to the ge-
neral parts of it; for as to particularities, I look upon them only
as problematical, and accordingly I affirm nothing therein but with
a power of revocation, and a liberty to change my opinion when I
ſhall be better inform d. Neither do I know any Author that hathi
treated a matter naw, remate, and conſiſting of a multitude of par-
ticulars, who would not have had occaſion, if he had liv'd to have
ſeen his Hypotheſis fully examin'd, to have chang'd his mind and
imanner of explaining things, in many inaterial inſtances.
To conclude both this Chapter and this Section, we liave here
added a Map or Draught of the Earth, according to the Natural
face of it, as it would appear from the Moon, if we were a little
nearer to her ; or as it was at firſt after the Deluge, before Cities
were built, diſtinctions of Countries made, or any alterations by
humane
102
Bookl.
The Theory of the Earth.
humane induſtry. 'Tis chiefly to expoſu more to view the Moun-
tains of the Earth, and the proportions of Sca and Land, 10 thew
it as it lies in it ſelf, and as a Naturaliſt ought to conceive and con-
lider it. 'Tis true, there are far more Mountaius upon the Eartlı
than what are here repreſented, for more could not conveniently
be plac'd in this narrow Scheme; But the beſt and moſt effectual
way of repreſenting the body of the Earth as it is by Nature, would
be, not in plain Tables, but by a rough Globe, expreſſing all the con-
liderable inequalities that are upon the Earth. The ſmooth Globes
that we uſt, do but nourith in us the conceit of the Earth's regu-
larity, and though they may be convenient enough for Geographi.
cal purpoſes, they are not ſo proper for Natural Science; nothing
would be more uſeful, in this reſpect, than a rough Globe of the
largeſt dimenſions, wherein the Chanel of the Sea ſhould be really
hollow, as it is in Nature, with all its unequal depths according to
the beſt foundings, and the ſhores expreſt both according to matter
and form, little Rocks ſtanding where there are Rocks, and Sands
and Beaches in the places where they are found; and all the Iſlands
planted in the Sea-chanel in a due forin, and in their ſolid dimen-
fions. Then upon the Land ſhould ſtand all the ranges of Moun
tains, in the fame order or diſorder that Nature hath ret them
there; And the in-land Seas, and great Lakes, or rather the beds
they lie in, ſhould be duly repreſented; as alſo the vaſt dtfarts of
Sand as they lie upon the Earth. And this being done with care
and due Art, would be a true Epitome or true model of our Earth.
Where we ſhould ſee, beſides other inſtructions, what a rude Lump
our World is, which we are ſo apt to dote uponi.
7
CHAP. XII.
A ſhort review of what hath been already treated of, and in
what manner. The ſeveral Faces and Schemes under which
the Earth would appear to a Stranger, that ſhould viem
it firſt at a diſtance, and then more cloſely, and the Ap-
plication of them to our ſubje&t. All methods, whether
Philoſophical or Theological, that have been offer’d by
others for the Explication of the Form of the Earth, are
examin’d and diſprov’d. A conje&ture concerning the
other Planets, their Natural Form and State compared
mith ours.
+
W
E have fuifh'd the Three Sections of this Book, and in this
laſt Chapter we will make a ſhort review and reflection
upon what hath been hitherto treated of, and add ſome further
confirmations of it. The Explication of the Univerſal Diluge was
olie firſt propoſal and deſign of this Diſcourſe, to make that a thing
credible
Chap. 12. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
103
credible and intelligible to the inind of Man: And the full Expli-
cation of this drew in the whole Theory of the Earth : Whoſe ori-
ginal we have deduc'd from its firſt Source, and ſhew'd both what
was its primeval Form, and how it came into its preſent form. The
ſumm of our Hypotheſis concerning the Univerſal Deluge was this
That it came not to paſs
, as was vulgarly believ'd, by any exceſs
of Rains, or any Inundation of the Sea, nor could ever be effected
by a meer abundance of Waters; unleſs we ſuppoſe ſome diffolu-
tion of the Earth ai the ſame time, namely when the Great Abyſs
was broken open. And accordingly we ſhewed that without ſuch
a diſſolution, or if the Earth had been always in the ſame form it
is in now, no maſs of water, any where to be found in the World,
could have equalld the height of the Mountains, or made ſuch an
Univerſal Deluge. Secondly, We ſhewed that the form of the
Earth at firſt, and till the Deluge, was ſuch as made it capable and
ſubject to a Diilolution : And thirdiy, That ſuch a diſolution be-
ing ſuppos’d, the Doctrine of the Univerſal Deluge is very reaſon-
able and intelligible; And not only the Doctrine of the Deluge, but
the ſame ſuppoſition is a key to all Nature beſides, Thewing us how
our Globe became Terraqueous, what was the original of Moun-
tains, of the Sea-chanel, of Iſlands, of ſubterraneous Cavities ;
Things, which without this ſuppoſition, are as unintelligible as the
univerſal Flood it ſelf. And theſe things reciprocally confirming
one another, our Hypotheſis of the Deluge is arin'd both breaſt and
back, by the cauſes and by the effects.
It remains now, that, as to confirm our Explication of the Deluge,
we ſhow'd all other accounts that had been given of it to be inef-
fectual or impoſſible, ſo to confii'm our doctrine concerning the dif
ſolution of the Earth, and concerning the Original of Mountains,
Seas, and all inequalities upon it, or within it, we muſt examine
what cauſes have been aſſigu’d by others, or what accounts given
of theſe things: That ſeeing their defectiveneſs, we may have the
more affurance and ſatisfaction in our own inethod.
And in order to this, let us obſerve firſt the general forms under
which the Earth may be conſider'd, or undür which it doth ap-
pear accordingly as we view it more nearly or remotely; And the
firſt of theſe and the moſt general is that of a Terruqueous Globe. If
a Philoſopher ſhould come out of another World out of curioſity
to ſee our Earth, the firſt diſcovery or obſervation he would make
would be this, that it was a Terraqueous Globe; Thus much he
might obſerve at a great diſtance when he came but near the bor-
ders of our World. This we diſcern in the Moon and moſt of the
Planets, that they are divided into Sea and Land, and how this di-
viſion came, would be his firſt remark and inquiry concerning our
Earth; and how alſo thoſe ſubdiviſions of Iſlands, or little Earths
which lie in the Water, how theſe were forin'd, and that great
Chanel that contains them both.
The ſecond form that the Earth appears under, is that of an un-
even and Mountainous Globe. When our Traveller had got below the
Circle of the Moon, he would diſcern: the bald tops of our Moun-
tains, and the long ranges of them upon our Continents. We can-
3
triot
104
Book 1:
The Theory of the Earth.
not from the Earth diſcern Mountains and Valleys in the Moon,
directly, but from the inotion of the light and ſhadow's which we
ſee there, we ealily collect that there are ſuch inequalitics : And
accordingly we ſuppoſe that our Mountains would appear at a great
diſtance, and the ſhady Valleys lying under them; and that thuis
curious perſon that came to view our Earth, would make that his
ſecond Enquiry, how thoſe Mountains were form’d: and how our
Globe came to be ſo rude and irregular? for we may juftly de-
mand how any irregularity came into Naturc, ficing all her frit
inotions and her firſt forins are regular, and whatſoever is not ſo
is but fecondary, and the conſequer.ce of ſome degeneracy, or of
fome decay.
The Third viſible forin of our Earth is that of a broken Globe ;
and broken throughout, but in the outward parts and Regions of
it. This, it may be, you will ſay, is riot a viſible form ; it doth
not appear to the eye, without reaſoning, that the ſurface of the
Earth is ſo broken. Suppoſe our new Viſitant had now paſs’d
the middle Region of the Air, and was alighted upon the top of
Pick Tineriffe for his firſt reſting place, and that ſitting there he
took a view of the great Rocks, the wide Sea, and of the thorcs of
Africk and Europe ; for we'll ſuppoſe his piercing Eye to reach ſo
far; I will not ſay that at firſt ſight he would pronounce that the
ſurface of this Globe was broken, unleſs he knew it to be fo by
compariſon with ſome other Planet like to it; but the broken
form and figure of many parts of the Rocks, and the poſture in
which they lay, or great portions of them, ſome inclin'd, ſome
proſtrate, ſome erected, would naturally lead him to that thought,
that they were a ruine; He would ſee alſo the Ilands tore from
the Continents, and both the ſhores of the Continents and cheir in
land
parts
in the fume diſorder and irregular ſituation. Beſides, ho
had this great advantage in viewing the Earth at a diſtance, that
he could ſee a whole Hemiſphere together, which, as he made his
approaches through the Air, would have much what the famo
aſpect and countenance as ’tis repreſented with in the great Scheme ;
And if any man ſhould accidentally hit upon that Scheme, not
knowing or thinking that it was the Earth, I believe his firſt thought
of it would be, that it was ſome great broken bedy, or ruini'd frame
of matter ; and the original, I am ſure, is more manifeſtly ſo. But
we'll leave our Strange-Philoſopher to his own obſervations, and
wiſh him good Guides and Interpreters in his Survey of the Earth,
and that he would make a favourable report at his return home,
of our little dirty Planet.
In the mean time, let us purſue, in our own way, this Third
Ice of the Farth a little further, as it is a broken Globe, Nature I
know hath diſſembled and cover'd this form as much as may be, and
time hath helpt to repair ſome of the old breaches, or fill them up;
belides, the changes that have been made by Art and Humane in-
duſtry, by Agriculture, Planting, and Building Towns, hath madu
the face of the Earth quite another thing from what it was in iis
naked rudeneſs. As inankind is much alter'd froin its Priſtine flate,
from what it was four thouſand years ago, or towards the first
Ages
7.LK. 100
Chap. 12. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth. 105
IO,
Ages after the Flood, when the Nations liv'd in fiinplicity or bar-
barouſneſs; ſo is the Earth too, and both ſo diſguis'd and trans-
furin'd, that if one of thoſe Primitive Fathers ſhould riſe from the
dead, he would ſcarce know this to be the ſame World which he
liv'd in before. But to diſcern the true form of the Earth, whether
intire or broken, regular or diſorder'd, we muſt in the firſt place
take away all thoſe ornaments or additions made by Art or Nature;
and view the bare carcaſs of the Earth; as it hath nothing on it
but Rocks and Mountains, Deſarts and Fields, and hollow Valleys,
and a wide Sea. Then ſecondly, We muſt in our imagination
empty this Chanel of the Sea, take out all the Waters that hinder
the light of it, and look upon the dry Ditch, meaſure the depth
and breadth of it in our mind, and obſerve the manner of its con-
ſtruction, and in what a wild poſture all the parts of it lie ; accor-
ding as it hath been formerly repreſented. And laſtly, We muſt
Ghaf. Io
take off the cover of all Subterraneous places and deep Caverns, to
fee the inſide of the Earth ; and lay bare the roots of Mountains,
to look into thoſe holes and Vaults that are under them; filld ſome
times with Fire, ſometimes with Water, and ſometimes with thick
Air and Vapours. The object being thus prepar'd, we are then to
look fix’dly upon it, and to pronounce what we think of this dif-
figur’d maſs, whether this Exteriour frame doth not ſeem to be
Thatter'd; and whether it doth more aptly reſemble a new-made
World, or the ruines of one broken. I confeſs when this Ider of
the Earth is preſent to my thoughts, I can no more believe that this
was the form wherein it was firſt produc'd, than if I had ſeen the
Temple of Jeruſalem in its ruines, when defac'd and fack'd by the
Babylonians, I could have perſwaded my ſelf that it had never been
other poſture, and that Solomon had given orders for building
it fo.
So inuch for the form of the Earth: It remains now that we
examine what cauſes have been aſſign’d by others of theſe irregulari-
ties in the forın of the Earth, which we explain by the diffolution
of it; what accounts any of the Ancients have given or attempted
to give, how the Earth ſwell’d into Mountains in certain places,
and in others was depreſs’d into low Valleys, how the body of it
was ſo broken, and how the Chanel of the Sea was made. The
Elements naturally lie in regular forms one above another, and
now we find then mixt, confounded and tranſpos’d, how comes
this diſturbance and diſordination in Nature? The Explications of
theſe things that have been given by others, may be reduc'd to two
general forts, Philoſophical or Theological, and we will try them
both for our fatisfaction.
Of Philoſophers none was more concern'd to give an account of
ſuch things than Epicurus, both becauſe he acknowledged the Ori-
gin of the Earth to have been from a Chaos, and alſo admitted no
cauſes to act in Nature but Matter and Motion: Yet all the account
we have from the Epicureans of the forin of the Earth, and the
great inequalities that are in it, is ſo ſlight and trivial, that methinks
it doth not deſerve the name of a Philoſophical Explication. They
ſay that the Earth and Water were mix'd at firſt, or rather the
Р
Earth
in any
106
Book I.
The Theory of the Earth.
!
1
1
Earth was above the Water, and as the Earth was condens'd by the
heat of the Sun, and the Winds, the Water was ſqueez'd out in
certain places, which cither it found hollow or made ſo; and to
was the Chanel of the Sea made. Then as for Mountains, while
ſome
parts
of the Earth ſhrunk and funk in this manner, others
would not link, and theſe ſtanding ſtill while the others full lower,
made the Mountains. How the ſubterraneous Cavities were made
according to them, I do not find.
This is all the Account that Monſieur Gaſſendi ( who ſeems to have
made it his buſineſs, as well as his pleaſure, to embelliſh that Philo-
ſophy) can help us to out of the Epicurean Authors, how the Earth
caine into this form; and he that can content himſelf with this, is,
in
my
mind, of an humour very eaſie to be pleas'd. Do the Sun
and the Wind uſe to ſqueaze pools of Water out of the Earth,
and that in ſuch a quantity as to make an Ocean? They dry the
Earth, and the Waters too, and rarifie them into vapours, but I
never knew them to be the cauſes of preſſing Water out of the
Earth by condenſation. Could they compreſs the Earth any other
wiſe, than by drying it and making it hard? and in proportion,
as it was more dry, would it not the more imbibe and fuck up the
Water? and how were the great Mountains of the Earth made,
in the North and in the South, where the influence of the Sun is
not great ? What ſunk the Earth there, and made the fleſh ſtart
from the bones? But 'tis no wonder that Epicurus ſhould give ſuch
a mean account of the Origin of the Earth, and the form of its
parts,
who did not ſo much as underſtand the general Figure of
the Body of it, that it was in ſome manner Spherical, or that the
Heavens encompaſt it round. One muſt have a blind love for that
Philoſophy, and for the concluſions it drives at, not to ſee its lame-
neſs and defects in thoſe firſt and fundamental parts.
Ariſtotle, though he was not concern’d to give an account how
the Earth came into this preſent forin, as he ſuppos’d it, Eternal;
yet upon another conſideration he ſeems oblig'd to give ſome rea-
ſon how the Elements came into this diſorder ; ſeeing he ſuppoſeth,
that, according to the order of Nature, the Water ſhould lie above
the Earth in a Sphere, as the Air doth above the Water, and his
Fire above the Air. This he toucheth upon in his Meteors, but
ſo gently and fearfully, as if he was handling lot coals. He faith
the Sea is to be conſider'd as the Element, or body of Waters thar
belongs to this Earth, and that theſe Waters change places, and
the Sea is fome Ages in one part of the Globe, and ſome Ages in
another ; but that this is at ſuch great diſtances of time that there
can be no memory or record of it. And he ſeems willing to ſup-
poſe that the Water was once all over the Earth, but that it drid
up in certain places, and continuing in others, it there made the
Sea.
What a miſerable account is this? As to his change or removal
of the Sea-chanel in ſeveral Ages, as it is without all proof or pro
bability, if he mean it of the Chanel of the great Ocean, fo'tis
nothing to the purpoſe here; for the queſtion is not why the Cha-
nel of the Sia is in ſuch a part of the Earth, rather than in ano-
ther,
Chap. 12. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth.
107
ther, but why there is any ſuch prodigious Cavity in or upon the
Earth any where. And if we take his ſuppoſition, that the Ele-
inent of Water was once higher than the Earth, and lay in a Sphere
about it, then let him teil us in plain terms how the Earth got
above, or how the Cavity of the Ocean was inade, and how the
the Mountaius riſe; for this Elementary Earth which lay under the
Water, was, I ſuppoſe, equal and ſmooth when it lay there; and
what reaſon was there, that the Waters Thould be drid in one
part of it, more than another, if they were every where of an
equal depth, and the ground equal under them? It was not the
Climates made any dıltinction, for there is Sea towards the Poles,
as well as under the Æquator ; but ſuppoſe they were dri’d up
in
certain places, that would make no Mountains, no more than there
are Mountains in our dri'd Marches : And the places where they
were not dri’d, would not therefore become as deep and hollow as
the Sea chanel, and tear the Earth and Rocks in pieces. If you
ſhould ſay that this very Elementary Earth, as it lay under the
Waters, was unequal, and was ſo originally, form'd into Moun-
tains and Valleys, and great Cavities; beſides, that the ſuppoſition
is altogether irrational in it ſelf, you inuſt ſuppoſe a prodigious
maſs of Water to cover ſuch an Earth ; as much as we found re-
quiſite for the vulgar Deluge, namely, eight Oceans; and what then
is become of the other ſeven? Upon the whole I do not ſee that
either in Epicurus's way, who ſeems to ſuppoſe that the Waters
were at firſt within the Earth ; nor in Ariſtotle's way, who ſeems
to ſuppoſe them upon the Earth, any rational or tolerable account
can be given of the preſent form of the Earth.
Wherefore ſome modern Authors, diſſatisfied, as very well they
might be, with theſe Explications given us by the Ancients con-
eerning the forin of the Earth, have pitch'd upon other cauſes, inore
true indeed in their kind, and in their degree, but that fall as
much ſhort of thoſe effects to which they would apply them. They
ſay that all the irregularities of the body of the Earth have riſen
from Earthquakes in particular places, and from Torrents and
Inundations, and from eruptions of Fire, or ſuch like cauſes,
whereof we ſee ſome inſtances inore or leſs every Age ; And theſe
have made that havock upon the face of the Earth, and turn'd
things up-ſide down, raiſing the Earth in ſome places, and making
great Cavities or Chaſins in others, ſo as to have brought it at
length into that torn, broken, and diſorderly form in which we
now fee it.
Theſe Authors do ſo far agree with us, as to acknowledge that
the preſent irregular form of the Earth muſt have proceeded from
ruines and diſſolutions of one fort or other, but theſe ruines they
make to have been partial only, in this or in that Country, by
piece-meal, and in ſeveral Ages, and from no other cauſes but
ſuch as ſtill continue to act in Nature, namely, accidental Earth-
quakes and Eruptions of Fires and Waters. Theſe cauſes we ac-
knowledge as readily as they do, but not as capable to produce ſo
great effects as they would aſcribe to them. The ſurface of the
Earth
inay be a little changed by ſuch accidents as theſe, but for
the
P2
108
Воок 1,
The Theory of the Earth.
5
the moſt part they rather ſink the Mountains than raiſe new ones :
As when Houſes are blown up by Mines of Powder, they are not
ſet higher, but generally fall lower and fatter : Or ſuppoſe they
do ſometimes raiſe an Hill, or a little Mount, what's that to the
great Mountains of our World, to thoſe long and vaſt piles of Rocks
and Stones, which the Earth can ſcarce bear? What's that to ſtrong.
backt Taurns or Atlas, to the American Andes, or toa Mountain that
reachech from the Pyrencans to the Euxine Sea? There's as much
difference between theſe and thoſe factitious Mountains they ſpeak
of, as betwixt thein and Mole-hills.
And to anſwer more diſtinctly to this opinion, as before in ſpeak-
ing of Iſlands we diſtinguiſh'd betwixt Factitious and Original
Illands, ſo, if you pleaſe, we may diſtinguiſh here betwixt Factiti
ous and Original Mountains; and allowing ſome few, and thoſe of
the fifth or ſixth magnitude, to have riſen from ſuch accidental
cauſes, we erquire concerning the reſt and the greateſt, what was
their Original If we ſhould ſuppoſe that the ſeven Hills upon
which Rome ſtands, came from ruines or eruptions, or any ſuch
cauſes, it doth not follow that the Alps were made ſo too. And as
for Mountains, ſo for the Cavities of the Earth, I ſuppoſe there may
be diſruptions ſometimes made by Eartlıquakes, and holes worn by
ſubterraneous Fires and Waters; but what's that to the Chanel
of the Atlantick Ocean, or of the Pacifick Ocean, which is extended
hundred and fifty degrees under the Æquator, and towards the
Poles ſtill further. He that ſhould derive ſuch mighty things from
no greater cauſes, I ſhould think him a very credulous Philofo-
pher. And we are too ſubject indeed to that fault of credulity in
matter of Philoſophizing; Many when they have found out cauſes
that are proper for certain effects within ſuch a compaſs, they can
not keep them there, but they will make them do every thing for
them ; and extend them often to other effects of a ſuperiour nature
or degree, which their activity can by no means reach to. Æ11.3
hath been a burning Mountain ever ſince and above the memory
of Man, yet it hath not deſtroy'd that Iſand, nor made any new
Chanel to the Sea, though it ſtands fo near it. Neither is Veſuvius
above two or three miles diſtant from the Sea-ſide, to the beſt of
my remembrance, and yet in ſo many Ages it hath made no paf-
fage to it, neither open nor ſubterraneous. Tis true fome Iſthmus's
have been thrown down by Earthquakes, and ſome Lakes have
been made in that manner, but what's this to a Ditch nine thou-
land miles broad? ſuch an one we have upon the Earth, and of
a depth that is not meaſurable; what proportion have theſe caules
to ſuch an inſtance and how many thouſand Ages inuſt be allow'd
to thein to do their work, more than the Chronology of our Earth
will bear?
Beſides, When were theſe great Earthquakes and diſruptions,
that did fuch great execution upon the body of the Earth? Was
this before the Flood or ſince? "If before, then the old difficulty
returns, how could there be a Flood, if the Earth was in this Moun
tainous forın before that time? This, I think, is demonſtrated
impoſſible in the Second and Third Chapters. If ſince the Flood,
where
Chap. 12. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth. 109
where were the Waters of the Earth before theſe Earthquakes made
a Chanel for them. Beſides, Where is the Hiſtory or Tradition
that ſpeaks of theſe. ſtrange things, and of this great change of the
Earth? Hath any writ of the Origins of the Alps? In what year
of Rome, or what Olympiad they were born? Or how they grew
from little ones ? how the Earth groan'd when it brought them forth,
when its bowels were torri by the ragged Rocks? Do the Chro-
nicles of the Nations inention theſe things, or ancient fame, or an-
cient Fables ? were they made all ar once; or in ſuccellive Ages?
Theſe cauſes continue ſtill in Nature, we have ſtill Earthquakes and
ſubterraneous Firis and Waters, why ſhould they not ſtill operate
and have the ſame effects? We often hear of Cities thrown down
by Earthquakes, or Countries ſwallow'd up, but whoever heard
of a new chain of Mountains made upon the Earth, or a new Cha-
nel made for the Ocean? We do not read that there hath been ſo
much as a new Sinus of the Sea ever ſince the memory of Man:
Which is far more feaſible than what they pretend. And things of
this nature being both ſtrange and ſenſible, excite admiration and
great attention when they come to paſs, and would certainly have
been remembred or propagated in ſome way or other, if they had ever
happeni'd ſince the Deluge. They have recorded the foundation of
Cities and Monarchies, the appearance of Blazing Stars, the erupti-
ons of fiery Mountains, the moſt remarkable Earthquakes and Inun-
dations, the great Eclipſes or obſcurations of the Sun, and any thing
that look'd ſtrange or prodigy-like, whether in the Heavens or on
Earth: And theſe which would have been the greateſt prodigies
and greateſt changes that ever happen'd in nature, would theſe have
eſcap'd all obſervation and inemory of Men? That's as incredible
as the things themſelves are.
Laſtly, To coinprehend all theſe opinions together, both of the
Ancient and Modern Authors, they ſeein all to agree with us in
this, That the Earth was once under another form ; otherwiſe why
do they go about to fhew the cauſes how it came into this form.
I deſire then to know what form they ſuppoſe the Earth to have
been under before the Mountains were made, the Chanel of the
Sea, or ſubterraneous Cavitics. Either they muſt take that form
which we have aſſign'd it before the Deluge, or elſe they muſt fup-
poſe it cover'd with Water, till the Sea-chanels were made, and the
Mountains brought forth; as in that Fig. p.19. 37. And no doubt
Fig. 2.p. 37
it was once in this forin, both reaſon and the authority of Moses
aſſures us of it; and this is the Teſt which every opinion muſt be
brought to, how the Earth emerg'd out of that watery form ? and
in particular, as to that opinion which we are now examining, the
queſtion is, how by Eartliquakes, and fiery eruptions, ſubterrane-
ous Waters, and ſuch like cauſes, the body of the Earth could be
wrought from that forin to this preſent form. And the thing is iin-
poſſible at firſt ſight; for ſuch cauſes as theſe could not take place
in ſuch an Earth. As for fubterraneous Waters, there could be
none at that time, for they were all above ground; and as for ſub-
terraneous Exhalations, whether Fiery or Aery, there was no place
for them neither', for the Earth when it lily under the Water was a
folid
IIO
Book).
The Theory of the Earth.
ſolid uniform maſs, campact and cloſe united in its parts, as we
have Thewn before upon ſeveral occations; no Mines or hollow
Vaults for the Vapours to be lodg'd in, no Store-houſes of Fire.
nothing that could make Earthquakes, nor any furt of ruines or
eruptions: Theſe are Engines that cannot play but in an Farth al-
ready broken, hollow, and cavernous. Thir,fore the Authors of
this opinion do in effect beg the queſtion; they aflign ſuch cauſes
of the preſent form of the Earth, as could not take place, ner huve
any activity until the Earth was in this form : Thefe cauſes may
contribute ſomething to increaſe the rudeneſs and inequalities of the
Earth in certain places, but they could not be the original cauſes
of it: And tliat not cnly becauſe of their diſproportion to ſuch
effects, but alſo becauſe of their incapacity, or non-exiſtence at that
time when theſe effects were to be wrought.
Thus much concerning the Philoſophical opinions, or the natu-
ral Cauſes that have been aſſign'd for the irregular form of this
pre-
ſent Earth. Let us now conſider the Theological opinions, how
Mountains were made at firſt, and the wonderful Chancl of the Sea:
And theſe Authors ſay, God Almighty made them immediately
when he made the World; and ſo diſpatcht the buſineſs in a few
words. This is a ſhort account indeed, but we must take heed
that we do not derogate from the perfection of God, by afcribing
all things promiſcuouſly to his immediate action. I have often fug-
geſted that the firſt order of things is regular and ſimple, accord-
ing as the Divine Nature is ; and continues fo till there is ſome
degeneracy in the moral World; I have alſo noted upon ſeveral
occaſions, eſpecially in the Lat. Treat. Cap. II. the deformity and
incommodiouſneſs of the preſent Earth ; and from theſe two cond-
derations we may reaſonably infer, that the preſent ſtate of the
Earth was not Original, but is a ſtate of ſubjection to Vanity,
wherein it muſt continue till the redemption and rellitution of all
things.
But beſides this general conſideration, there are many others, both
Natural and Theological againſt this opinion, which the Author's
of it, I believe, will find unanſwerable. As firſt, S. Peter's di-
ſtinction betwist the preſent Earth and the Ante-diluvian; and
that in oppoſition to certain profane perſons, who ſeem to have
been of the ſame opinion with theſe Authors, namely, That the
Fleavens and the Earth were the ſame now that they had been from
the beginning, and that there had been no change in Nature, either
of late, or in foriner Ages; Theſe S. Peter confutes and upbraids
them with ignorance or forgetfulneſs of the change that was brought
upon Nature at the Deluge, or that the Ante-diluvian Heavens and
Farth were of a different form and conſtitution from the preſent,
whereby that World was obnoxious to a Deluge of Water, as the
preſent is to a Deluge of Fire. Let thcſe Authors put themſelves
in the place of thoſe Objectors, and ſee what anſwer they can make
to the Apoſtle, whom I leave to diſpute the caſe with them. I hope
they will not treat this Epiſtle of S. Peter's ſo rudely' as Didymus
Alexandrinus did, an ancient Chriſtian, and one of S. Jerom's Ma-
ſters, he was of the ſame opinion with theſe Theological Authors,
and
2 Ep. Char.
3.506
Chap. 12. The Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth. u
and fo fierce in it, that ſeeing S. Peter's doctrine here to be contrary,
he ſaid this Epiſtle of S. Peter's was corrupted, and was not to be
receiv'd into the Canon. And all this becauſe it tauglit that the
Heavens and the Earth had chang'd their form, and would do lo
again at the Confagration; ſo as the ſame World would be Tri-
form in ſucceſs of time. Weacknowledge his Expoſition of S.Peters
words to be very true, but what he makes an argument of the cor-
ruption of this Epiſtle, is rather, in my mind, a peculiar argument
of its Divine Inſpiration. In the ſecond place, theſe Writers daſh
upon the old rock, the impoſſibility of explaining the Deluge; if
there were Mountains froin the beginning, and the Earth then in
the ſame form as it is in now. Thirdly, They make the ſtate of
Paradiſe as unintelligible as that of the Deluge; For thoſe proper-
ties that are aſſign’d to Paradiſe by the Ancients, are inconſiſtent
with the preſent form of the Earth: As will appear in the Second
Book. Laſtly, They muſt anſwer, and give an account of all thoſe
marks which we have obſerv'd in Nature (both in this Chapter,
and the Ninth, Tenth, and Eleventh,) of fractions, ruines, and
diſſolutions that have been on the Earth, and which we have ſhown
to be inexplicable, unleſs we admit that the Earth was once in an-
other form.
Theſe arguments being premis d, let us now bring their opinion
cloſe to the Telt, and ſee in what manner theſe Mountains muſt
have beeri iade according to them, and how the Chanel of the
Sea, and all other Cavities of the Earth. Let us to this purpoſe
conſider the Earth again in that tranſient incompleat form which it
had when the Abyſs encompaſt the whole body of it; we both a- Fig.z.f: 37.
gree that the Earth was once in this ſtate, and they ſay that it came
immediately out of this ſtate into its preſent forin, there being
made by a ſupernatural Power a great Chanel or Ditch in one
purt of it, which drew off the Waters from the reſt, and the Earth
which was ſqueez'd and forc'd out of this Ditch, made the Moun-
tains. So there is the Chanel of the Sea made, and the Mountains
of the Eartlı; how the fubterraneous Cavities were made according
to theſe Authors, I do not well know. This I confels ſeems to me
a very groſs thought, and a way of working very un-God-like;
but however let's have patience to examine it.
And in the firſt place, if the Mountains were taken out of the
Chanel of the Sea, then they are equal to it, and would fill it up
if they were thrown in again. But theſe proportions upon exami-
nation will not agrée; for though the Mountains of the Earth
be very great, yet they do not equal by much the great Ocean.
The Ocean extends to half the ſurface of the Earth; and if you
ſuppoſe the greateſt depth of the Ocean to anſwer the height of the
greateſt Mountains, and the middle depth to the iniddle fort of
Mountains, the Mountains ouglit to cover all the dry Land to make
them anſwer to all the capacity of the Ocean; whereas we ſup-
pos'd them upon a reaſonable computation to cover but the tenth
part of the dry Land; and conſequently, neither they, nor the
Sea-chanel, could have been produc'd in this manner, becauſe of
their
great diſproportion to one another. And the ſame thing ap-
pears;
I IZ The Theory of the Earth. Bookl.
pears, if we compare the Mountains with the Abyſs, which cover'd
the Earth before this Chanel was made; for this Chanel being
made great enough to contain all the Abyſs, the Mountains taken
out of it mult alio be equal to all the Abyſs, but the aggregate of
the Mountains will not anſwer this by many degrees; for ſuppoſe
the Abyſs was but half as deep as the deep Ocean, to make this
Calculus anſwer, all the dry Land ought to be cover'd with Moun-
tains, ard with Mountains as high as the Occan is deep, or doubly
high to the depth of the Abyſs, becauſe they are but upon one
half of the Globe. And this is the firit argument againſt the re-
ciprocal production of Mountains and the Sea, their incongruency
or diſproportion.
Secondly, We are to conſider that a great many Mountains of
the Earth are far diſtant from any Seas, as the great in-land Moun-
tains of Aſia and of Africk, and the Sarmatick Mountains, and others
in Europe, how were theſe great bodies llung thorow the Air from
their reſpective Seas, whence they were maken, to thoſe places
where they ſtand? What appearance is there in common reaſon, or
credibility, that theſe huge inaffes of Earth and Stone that Ifand
in the middle of Continents, were dug out of any Seas We
think it ſtrange, and very deſervedly, that a little Chapel ſhould
be tranſported from Paleſtine to Italyover Land and Sea, much more
the tranſportation of Mount Atlas or Taurus thorow the Air, or of
a range of Mountains two or three thouſand miles long, would
ſurely upon all accounts appear incongruous and incredible: Be-
fides, neither the hollow form of Mountains, nor the ſtony matter
whereof they commonly conſiſt, agrees with that ſuppoſition, that
they were preſt or taken out of the Chanel of the Sea.
Laſtly, We are to conſider that the Mountains are not barely laid
upon the Earth, as a Tomb-ſtone upon a Grave, nor ſtand as Sta-
tues do upon a Pedeſtal, as this opinion ſeems to ſuppoſe ; but
they are one continued ſubſtance with the body of the Earth, and
their roots reach into the Abyſs; as the Rocks by the Sea-ſide
as deep as the bottom of the Sea in one continu'd màſs: And 'tis
a ridiculous thing to imagine the Earth firſt a plain ſurface, then
all the Mountains ſet upon it, as Hay-cocks in a field, ſtanding
upon
their fat bottoms. There is no ſuch common ſurface in
Nature, nor conſequently any ſuch ſuper-additions: 'Tis all one
fraine or maſs, only broken and disjoynted in the parts of it. To
conclude, 'Tis not only the Mountains that make the inequalities
of the Earth, or the irregularity of its ſurface, every Country,
every Province, every Field hath an unequal and different ſituation,
higher or lower, inclin'd more or leſs, and ſometimes one way,
ſometimes another, you can ſcarce take a miles compaſs in any place
where the ſurface of the ground continues uniform; and can you
imagine that there were Moulds or Stones brought from the Sća-
chanel to make all thoſe inequalities? Or that Earthquakes have
been in every County, and in every Field? The inner Veins and
Lares, the beds or Strata of the Earth are alſo broken as well as the
ſurface. Theſe muſt proceed from univerſal canles, and all thoſe
that have been alledg’d, whether from Philoſophy or Thcology,
go
are
Chap. 12. I be Deluge and Diſſolution of the Earth. 113
*
i
are but particular or Topical. I ain fully ſatisfied, in contempla
tion of theſe things, and ſo I think every unprejudic'd perſon may
be, that to ſuch an irregular variety of ſituation and conſtruction
as we ſee every where in the parts of the Earth, nothing could an
fwer but ſome univerſal concuſſion or diſlocation, in the nature of
a general ruine.
We have now finiſht this firſt part of our Theory, and all that
concerns the Deluge or diſſolution of the Earth; and we have not
only eſtabliſht our own Hypotheſis by poſitive arguments, but alſo
produc'd and examind all ſuppoſitions that have been offerd
by others, whether Philoſophical or Theological, for the Explica.
tion of the ſame things; fo as nothing ſeems now to remain fur-
ther upon this ſubject.
this ſubject. For a concluſion of all, we will conſider,
if you pleaſe, the reſt of the Earths, or of the Planets within our
Heavens, that appertain to the ſame common Sun; to ſee, ſo far
as we can go by rational conjectures, if they be not of the ſame
Fabrick, and have undergone the like fate, and forms with our
Earth. It is now acknowledg’d by the generality of Learned Men,
that the Planets are Opake bodies, and particularly our next neigh-
bour, the Moon, is known to be a Terraqueous Globe, conſiſting of
Mountains and Valleys, as our Earth does; and we have no rea-
ſon to believe but that ſhe came into that form by a diſſolution,
or from like cauſes as our Earth did. Mercury is ſo near the Sun,
that we cannot well diſcern his face, whether ſpotted or no, nor
inake a judgment of it. But as for lenus and Mars, if the ſpots
that be obſerved in them be their Waters or their Sea, as they are
in the Moon, 'tis likely They are alſo Terraqueous Globes, and
in much what a like forin with the Moon and the Earth, and, for
ought we know, from like cauſes. Particularly as to lenus, 'tis
a remarkable paſſage that S. Auſtin hath preſervd out of Varro, he
faith, That about the time of the great Deluge there was a monderful De Civ. Dei
alteration or Cataſtrophe kappcn’d to the Planet Venus, and that ſhe lik. 21.6.8.
chang'd her Colour, form, figure, and magnitude. This is a great pre-
ſumption that ſhe ſuffer'd her diſſolution about the ſame time that
our Earth did. I do not know that any ſuch thing is recorded
concerning any of the other Planets, but the body of Mars looks
very rugged, broken, and much diſorder'd.
Saturn and Jupiter deſerve a diſtinct conſideration, as having
ſoinething particular and different from the reſt of the Planets.
Saturn is remarkable for his Hoop or Ring, which ſeems to ſtand
off, or higher than his body, and would ſtrongly induce one to
believe, that the exteriour Earth of that Planet, at its diſſolution,
did not all fall in, but the Polar parts ſinking into the Abyſs, the
middle or Æquinoctial parts ſtill ſubfifted, and bore themſelves up
in the nature of an Arch about the Planet, or of a Bridge, as it
were,
built over the Sea of Saturn. And as ſome have obſery'd
concerning the figure of Fupiter, that ie is not wholly Sphærical,
but a Sphæroid, protuberant in the Æquator, and depreſt towards
the Poles : So I ſhould fufpect Saturn to have been much more
ſo, before his diſruption: Namely, That the Body of that Planet
in its firſt ſtate, was more flat and low towards the Poles, and alſo
Q
weaker
.
*
114
The Theory of the Earth. Book 1.
weaker and thinner : und about the Æquator higher, fuller and
ſtronger Built: By reaſon of which figure and conſtruction the
Polar parts did more eaſily fall in, or were ſuckt in (as Cupping-
glaſſes draw in the Fleſh ) when the Abyſs below grew more emp
ty. Whereas the middle parts about the Æquator, being a more
juſt Arch and ſtrongly built, would not yield or fink, but ſtood
firm and unbroken, and continues ſtill in its firſt poſture. Planets
break in different ways, according to the quality of their mat-
ter, the manner of their conſtruction, and the Nature of the
Cauſes that act upon them. Their diſſolutions are ſometimes
total, as in our Earth, ſometimes partial: and both of theſe
may be under great variety. In partial diſſolutions, the middle
parts ſometimes ſtand, and the Polar are broke : or the Polar
Itand and the middle are broke. Or one Hemiſphere, or part of
an Hemiſphere may be ſunk, the reſt ſtanding. There may be
Cauſes and occaſions for all theſe varieties and many more, in
diverſifying the Phänomena of an immenſe Univerſe.' But to re-
turn to Saturn.
That this preſent uncouth form of Saturn was not its Original
form, I am very well ſatisfied, if that Planet riſe froin a Chaos,
as our's did. And if this be an adventitious form, I know no
account can be given of it with inore probability, than by ſup-
poſing it the effect of ſome fraction or diſruption in the Polar
parts. Neither do I know any Phänomenon hitherto obferv'd
concerning Saturn, that does diſprove this Hypotheſis or con-
jecture.
As to Jupiter, that Planet without doubt is alſo turned about
its Axis, otherwiſe how ſhou'd its four Moons be carried round
him? And this is alſo collected from the motion of that perma-
nent Spot (if it be found to be ſo ) that is upon its Body. Which
Spot I take to be either a Lake, or a Chalin and Hiatus into the
Abyſs of the Planet : That is, part of the Abyſs open or unco
ver'd, like the Aperture we made in the Seventh Figure. And this
Chap. 6.9. 46. might either have been left ſo by Providencë, at firſt, for ſome rca-
ſons and cauſes fitting that Earth: or it may have fallen in after-
wards, as Plato's Atlantis, or as Sodom and Gomorrh.1, for ſome judg.
inent upon part of that World.
To conclude, Seeing all the Planets that are plac'd in this Hea-
ven, and are the foſter-children of this Sun, ſeem to have ſome
affinity one with another, and have much-what the ſame counte-
ianceand the ſame general Phenomena ; It ſeems probable thar
they riſe much-what the ſame way, and after the like manner as
our Earth, each one from its reſpective Chaos; And that they
had the ſaine Elementary Regions at firſt
, and an exteriour Orh
form'd over their Abyſs : And laſtly, That every one of them harlı
ſufir'd, or is to ſuffer its Deluge, as our Farth hath done. Theſ,
I fay, are probable conjectures according to the Analogy of Realou
and Nature, ſo far as we can judge concerning things very il-
inote and inacceſſible.
And
Chap. 12. The Deluge and Diffolution of the Earth. 115
1
And theſe things being thus, and our Theory of the Deluge,
and the Diſſolution which brought it, having ſuch a general agree-
ment both with our Heavens and our Earth, I think there is no-
thing but the uncouthneſs of the thing to ſome mens underſtand-
ings, the cuſtom of thinking otherwiſe, and the uneaſineſs of en-
tring into a new ſet of thoughts, that can be a bar or hindrance
to its reception. But it may be improv'd, I doubt not, in many
reſpects, and in ſome particularities rectified. The firſt attempts
in great Things are ſeldom or never perfect: Such is the weak-
neſs of our Underſtandings, and the want of a full Natural Hiſto-
ry. And in aſſigning Cauſes of ſuch great effects, fair conjectures
are to be allowd, till they be diſplac'd by others more evident
and more certain. Accordingly I readily ſubmit to theſe terins,
and leave this, and all other parts of the Theory, to further exa-
mination and enquiries.
F 1 N 1 s.
É IN
Q :
4
THE
THE O RY
OF THE
E A R T H
Containing an Account
OF THE
Original of the Earth.
AND OF ALL THE
GENERAL CHANGES
Which it hath already undergone
OR
IS TO UNDERGO
Throughout the whole Courſe of its Duration.
THE SECOND BOOK
Concerning the PRIM ÆVAL EARTH,
A N D
Concerning PARADISE,
LONDON
Printed by R. N. for Walter Kettilby, at the Biſhop's-
Head in S. Paul's Church-Yard, 1697
1
119
THE
T H E O R Y
OF THE
EARTH
Book II.
Concerning the Primæval Earth, and concern-
ing Paradiſe.
C H A P. I.
The Introduction and Contents of the Second Book. The ge-
neral ſtate of the Primæval Earth, and of Paradiſe.
por E have already ſeen a World begin and periſh;
An Earth rais'd from the rudiments of a Chaos,
and diſſolv'd and deſtroy'd in an Univerſal De-
luge. We have given alſo an imperfect deſcrip-
tion of that primæval Earth, ſo far as was neceſſa-
ry to fhew the Cauſes and manner of its diffolu-
tion. But we muſt not content our felves with
this ; Seeing that Earth was the firſt Theater upon which Mortals
appear'd and acted, and continued ſo for above Sixteen Hundred
Years ; and that with Scenes, as both Reaſon and Hiſtory tell us,
very extraordinary and very different from theſe of our preſent
Earth, 'tis reaſonable we ſhould endeavour to make a inore full
diſcovery and deſcription of it; Eſpecially ſeeing Paradiſe was there :
that ſeat of pleaſure which our firſt Parents loft, and which all their
poſterity have much ado to find again.
In the Firſt Book we fo far deſcrib'd This New-found World,
as to ſhew it very different in form and fabrick from the preſent
Earth; there was no Sea there, so Mountains, nor Rocks, nor
broken Caves, 'twas all one continued and regular maſs, ſinooth,
ſimple and compleat, as the firſt works of Nature uſe to be. But
to know thus inuch only, doth rather cxcite our curioſity thanı
fatistie
I20
Воок 11.
The Theory of the Earth.
ſatisfie it; what were the other properties of this World: how
were the Heavens, how the Eleinents? what accommodation for
humane life? why was it more proper to be the ſeat of Puradile
than the preſent Earth ? Unleſs we know thicſe things, you will
fay, it will ſeem but an aëry Ide to us; and 'tis certain that the
more properties and particularities that we know concerning any
thing, the more real it appears to be.
As it was our chief delign therefore in the precelent Book, to
give an account of the Liniverſal Deluge, by way of a Theory; fo
we propoſe to our felves chiefly in this Pook, froin the ſame Theory
to give an account of Paradiſo; and in performing of this, wc thail
be led into a more full examination and diſplay of that fait Earth,
and of its qualities. And if we be ſo happy, as by the conduct of
the ſame principles and the ſame niethod, to give as fair an ac-
count, and as intelligible of the ſtate of Pardiſe in that Original
Earth, as we have done of the Deluge by the diſſolution of it, and
of the form of this Earth which ſucceeded, one inuſt be very mo-
roſe or melancholy to imagine that the grounds wego upon, all this
while, are wholly falſe or fictitious. A foundation which will bear
the weight of two Worlds without ſinking, muſt ſurely ſtand upon
a firin Rock. And I am apt to promiſe my ſelf that this Theory of
the Earth will find acceptance and credit, inore or leſs, with all but
thoſe, that think it a ſufficient anſwer to all arguments, to ſay it
is a Novelty.
But to proceed in our diſquiſition concerning Paradiſ:, we may
note, in the firſt place, two opinions to be avoided, being both ex-
treams ; one that placeth Paradiſe in the extra-mundane Regions,
or in the Air, or in the Moon; and the other that makes it to in
conſiderable, as to be confin’d to a little ſpot of ground in Mefopo-
tamia, or ſome other Country of 1/11, the Earth kiing now as it
was then. This offends as much in the defect, as the other in the
exceſs. For it is not any ſingle Region of the Earth that can be
Paradiſiacal, unleſs all Nature conſpire, and a certain Order of
and peculiar for that ſtate. Nor is it of leſs importance
to find out this peculiar Order of things, than to find out the
par-
ticular ſeat of Paradiſe, but rather pre-requiſite to it: We will en-
deavour therefore to diſcover and determine both, ſo far as a Theory
can go, beginning with that which is more general.
'Tis certain there were ſome qualities and conditions of Paradiſe
that were not meerly Topical, but common to all the reſt of the
Earth at that time; and theſu we muſt conſider in the firſt place,
examine what they were, and upon what they depended. Hiſtory,
both Sacred and Profane, inuſt tell lis what they were, and our
Theory muſt ſhew us upon what cauſes they depended. I had once,
I confeſs, propos'd to my ſelf another method, independent upon
Hiſtory or Effects ; I thought to have continued the deſcription of
the Primitive or Ante-diluvian Earth from the contemplation of its
cauſes only, and then left it to the judgment of others to deterinine,
whether that was not the Earth wher, the Golden Age was palt,
and where Paradiſe ſtood. For I had obſerv'd three conditions or
characters of it, which I thought were ſufficient to anſwer all that
we
Chap.1. Concerning the Prim.Earth,and Paradiſe. I 21
we knew concer:ving that firſt ſtate of things, viz. The regularity of
des ſurface; The Jitution or poſture of its Body to the Sun; and the Fi
gure of it: From theſe three general cauies, I thought inight be de-
duc d all the chief differences of that Earth from the preſent, and
particularly thoſe that made it more capable of being Paradiſiacal
.
But upon fecond thoughts I judg'd it more uſeful and expedi-
ent to lay aſide the Caules at preſent, and begin with the Effects,
that we might have ſome ſenſible matter to work upon. Bare Idea's
of things are lookt upon as Romantick till Effects be propos'd;
whereof they are to give an account; 'Tis that makes us value the
Cauſes when neceſſity puts us upon enquiry after them; and the
l'eaſons of things are very acceptable, when they eaſe the mind,
anxious, and at a loſs, how to underſtand Nature without their help.
We will therefore, without more ado, premiſe thoſe things that
have been taken notice of as extraordinary and peculiar to the
firit Ages of the World, and to Paradiſe, and which neither
do, nor can, obtain in the preſent Earth; whereof the firſt is a
perpetual Spring or Equinox ; The ſecond, the Longevity of Animals;
and the third Thir produElion out of the Earth, and the great ferti-
lity of the ſoil in all other things.
Theſe difficulties guard the way to Paradiſe like the flaming
Sword, and muſt be remov'd before we can enter; theſe are general
Preliminaries which we muſt explain before we proceed to enquire
aſter the particular place of this Garden of Pleaſure. The Ancients
have taken notice of all theſe in the firſt Ages of the World, or in
their Golden Age, as they call it; and I do not doubt but what they
aſcrib’d to the Golden Age, was more remarkably true of Paradiſe ;
yet was not ſo peculiar to it, but that it did in a good meaſure
extend to other parts of the Earth at that time. And 'tis mani-
felt that their Golden Age was contemporary with our Paradiſ';
for they make it begin immediately after the production and in-
habitation of the Earth ( which They, as well as Mofes, raiſe from
the Chaos ) and to degenerate by degrees till the Deluge; when the
World ended and begun again.
That this parallel may the better appear, we may obſerve, that
as we ſay that the whole Earth was, in ſome ſence, Paradiſiacal
in the firſt Ages of the World, and that there was beſides, one Re.
gion or Portion of it that was peculiarly ſo, and bore the deno-
mination of Paradiſe ; So the Ancients beſides their Golden Age;
which was coinmon to all the Farth, noted ſome parts of it that
were more Goldon, if I may fo ſay, than the reſt, and which did
more particularly anſwer to Paradiſe; as their Elyſian Fields, For-
tunate Islands, Gardens of Hesperides, Alcinous, &c. theſe had a
double portion of pleaſantneſs, and beſides the advantages which
they had common with the reſt of the Earth at that time, had ſome-
thing proper and ſingular, which gave them a diſtinct conſideration
and character from the reſt.
Having made this obſervation, let us proceed, and ſee what An-
tiquity faith concerning that first and Paradiſiacal ſtate of things,
upon thoſe three Heads forementioned ; Firſt, Thit there was a
perpetual Spring, and conſtant ferenity of the Air; This is often
R
repeated
I 22
Book II.
The Theory of the Earth..
repeated by the Ancient Poets, in their deſcription of the Golden
Age:
Virgit.
Non alios primâ creſcentis origine mundi
Illuxiſſe dies, aliumive habuiſſe tenorem,
Crediderim: Ver illud erat, Ver magnus agebat
Orbis, & hybernis parccbant flatibus Euri.
Such days the new-born Earth enjoy'd of old,
And the calm Heavens in this ſame tenour roul'd:
All the great World had then one conſtant Spring,
No cold Eaſt-rinds, ſuch as our W’inters bring,
For I interpret this in the ſame ſence with Ovid's Verſes of the Gol-
den Age:
Ver erat Æternum: placidique tepentibus auris
Mulcebant Zephyri natos fine ſemine flores.
The Spring was conſtant, and ſoft Winds that blem,
Rais'd, without Seed, Flow'rs alırays ſweet and nem.
And then upon the expiration of the Golden Age, He ſays,
Jupiter antiqui contraxit tempora Veris, &c.
When Jove begun to reign be chang'd the lear,
Aud for one Spring four Seafons made appear.
The Ancients ſuppos'd, that in the reign of Saturn, who was an
Ante-diluvian God, as I may ſo call him, Time fow'd with a more
even motion, and there was no diverſity of Seaſons in the Year;
but Jupiter, they ſay, firſt introduc'd that, when he came to ma-
nage affairs. This is expreſt after their way, who feldom give
any ſevere and Philoſophical accounts of the changes of Nature.
And as they ſuppos'd this perpetual Spring in the Golden Age, ſo
they did alſo in their particular Elyſiums; as I could thew largely
from their Authors, if it would not multiply Citations too much.
'Tis true, their Elyſiums reſpected the New Heavens, and New Earth
to come, rather than the paſt, but they are both fram'd upon the
ſame model, and have common properties.
The Chriſtian Authors have no leſs celebrated the perpetual
Spring and Serenity of the Heavens in Paradiſe; ſuch expreſſions or
deſcriptions you will find in Juſtin Martyr, S. B.iſil, Damafcen, I/i-
dore Hiſpalenſis, and others; inſomuch that Bellarmine, I remember,
reflecting upon thoſe Characters of Paradiſe, which many of the
Tathers have given in theſe reſpects, faith, Such things could not
be, unleſs the Sun had then another courſe from what he hath now;
or which is more eaſie, the Earth another ſituation. Which con
jexture will hereafter appear to have been well-grounded. In the
inean time, Ict us ſee the Chriſtian Poetry upon this ſubject, as we
have
De Giat.
frim.bom
Chap.1. Concerning the Prim, Earthand Paradiſe. 123
have ſeen the Roman upon the other. Alcimus Avitus hath thus de-
ſcrib'd Paradiſe in his Notes upon Geneſis:
Nun hîc alterni ſuccedit temporis unquam
Bruma, nec aſtivi redeunt poſt frigora Soles ;
Hic Ver affiduun Gæli clementia ſervat.
Turbidus Aufter abeſt, ſempérque ſub aere ſudo
Nubia diffugiunt, jugi ceffura ferenca
Nec pefcit Natura loci, quos non habet, imbres,
Sed contenta ſuo dotintur germina rore.
Perpetuò viret omne folum, terræque benigria
Bland:z nitet facies : Stant ſemper collibus herbæ,
· Arboribúfque come, &c.
}
No change of Seafors or exceſs oras there,
No Winter chilld, nor Summer ſcorch'd the Air,
But, with a conſtant Spring, Niiture was freſh and fair.
Rough Winds or Rains that Region never knem,
Water'd rrith Rivers and the morning Dew;
The Heav'ns ſtill clear, the Fields ſtill green and
g.zy,
No Clouds above, nor on the Earth decay;
Trees kept their leaves and verdure all the recir,
And Fruits were never out of Seaſon there.
And as the Chriſtian Authors, ſo likewiſe the Jerriſh have ſpoken
of Paradiſe in the fame manner; they tell us alſo that the days
there were always of the ſame length throughout the whole Year';
and that inade them fancy Paradiſe to lie under the Æquinoctial;
as we ſhall ſee in its due place. 'Tis true, we do not find theſe
things mention'd expreſly in the Sacred Writings, but the Effects
that Aow'd from thein are recorded there, and we may reaſonably
ſuppoſe providence to have foreſeen, that when thoſe Effects came
to be ſcan'd and narrowly lookt into, they would lead us to a dif-
covery of the Cauſes, and particularly of this great and general
Cauſe, that perpetual Equinºx and unity of ſeaſons in the Year,
till the Deluge. The Longevity of the Ante-diluvians cannot bé
explain'd upon any other ſuppoſition, as we ſhall have occaſion to
ſhow hereafter ; and that you know is recorded carefully in Scri-
pture: As alſo that there was no Rainborr before the Flood; whichi
goes upon the ſame ground, that there was no variety of Seaſons;
nor any Rain: And this by many is thought to be underſtood by
Mofes his words, Gen, 2.5,6, which he ſpeaks of the firſt and Para.
diſiacal Earth. Laſtly, Sering the Earth then brought forth the
principles of life and all living Creatures ( Man excepted ) according
to Mofes, Gen. 1. 24. we muſt ſuppoſe that the ſtate of the Heaveris
was ſuch as favour'd theſe Conceptions and Births, which could
not poſſibly be brought to perfection, as the Seaſons of the Year are
at preſent. The firſt time that we have mention made in Scripture
of Summer and \Vinter, and the differences of Seaſons, is at the
ending of the Deluge, Gen. 8.2.2. Hence formard all the days of the
Earth, Seed-time and Haruft, Heat and Golds Summer and Winter,
R 2
Dag
124
The Theory of the Earth.
Book II.
11ofes of far greater importance, if it be underſtood as an indicar-
Day and Night ſhall not ceafe. 'Tis true theſe words are ſo lax, that
they may be underſtood either of a new courſe of Nature theo initi-
tuted, or of an old one reſtor'd; but ſeeing it doula appear from
other arguments and conſiderations, that there was at that time a
new courſe of Nature conſtituted, it is inore realonable to inter-
pret the words in that ſence; which, as it is agreeable to truth, ac
cording to Reaſon and Antiquity ; ſo it renders that remark of
ܪ
tion of a new order then ſetled in Nature, which ſhould continus
thenceforwards ſo long as the Earth endur'd. Nor do I at all won
der that ſuch things thould not be exprefly and poliively declar'!
in Scripture, for Natural Myſteries in the Holy Writings, as wul
as Prophetical, are inany times, on ſet purpoſe, incompleatly de-
liver'd, ſo as to awaken and excile our thoughts rather than fully
reſolve them: This being often more ſuitable to the deſigns of Pro-
vidence in the government of the World. But thus much for this
first common or general Character of the Golden Age, and of Para-
diſe, a perpetual Serenity and perpetual Aquinox.
The ricond Character is the LongXvity of Men, and, as is pro-
bable, of all other Animals in proportion. This, methinks, is as
ſtrange and ſurpriſing as the other; and I know no difference be-
twixt the Ante-diluvian World and the preſent, ſo apt to affect
us, if we reflect upon it, as this wonderful diſproportion in the
Ages of Men ; Our fore-fathers and their Pofterity'; They liv'd
ſeven, tight, nine hundred Years and upwards, and 'tis a wonder
now if a Man live to one hundred: Our Oakes do not laſt ſo long
as their Bodies did ; Stone and Iron would ſcarce out-wear them.
And this property of the firſt Ages, or their Inhabitants, how
ſtrange foever, is well atteſted, and beyond all exception, having
the joynt conſent of Sacred and Profane Hiſtory. The Scripture
ſets down the preciſe Age of a ſeries of Ante diluvian Patriarchs,
and by that meaſures the time from the beginning of the World
to the Deluge; ſo as all Sacred Chronology ſtand upon that bot-
Yet I know ſome have thought this ſo improbable and in-
congruous a thing, that to ſave the credit of Moses and the Sacred
Hiſtory, they interpret theſe years of Lunur years or months; and
ſo the Ages of theſe Patriarchs are reduc'd to much what the ſame
meaſure with the common life of man at this time. It may be ob-
ferv'd in this, as in many other inſtances, that for want of a Tho-
ry to make things credible and intelligibile, men of wit and parts
have often depreſt the fence of Scripture ; and that not out of any ill
will to Scripture or Religion, but becauſe they could not oilier,
wiſe, upon the ſtock of their notions, give themſelves a rational
account of things recorded therc. But I hope when we come to
explain the Cauſes of this Longavity, we mall ſhew that it is al-
ingether as ſtrange a thing that Men ſhould have ſuch 1hort lives as
they have now, as that they had ſuch long lives in the firſt Age's
of the World. In the mean time, there are a great many collate
ral reaſons to aſſure us that Lunar years cannot be her? underſtood
by Mofes. for all Antiquity gives the ſame account of thoſe first
Ages of the World, and of the firſt Men, that they were extremely
tom.
long-liv'd.
Chap.I. Concerning the Prim. Earth, and Paradiſe. 125
long-liv'd. We meet with it generally in the deſcription of the
Golden Age ; and not only ſo, but in their Topical Paradiſes alſo
they always ſuppos d a great vivacity or longævity in thoſe that
enjoy'd them. And Fosiphus ſpeaking upon this ſubject, faith, the Bocks Che
Authors of all the learned Nations, Greeks or Barbarians, bear Fers. Ant.
witneſs to Moſes's doctrine in this particular. And in the Mofaical
Hiſtory it ſelf, there are ſeveral circumſtances and marks that dif-
cover plainly, that the years of the Patriarchs cannot be under-
ſtood of Lunar years; as we ſhall have occaſion to ſhow in another
Chat. 4.
place. We proceed in the mean time to the third and lait Cha-
racter, The extraordinary fertility of the Soil, and the production
of Animals out of the new-made Earth.
The firſt part of this Character is unqueſtionable ; All Antiquity
ſpeaks of the plenty of the Golden Age, and of their Paradiſes, whe-
ther Chriſtian or Heathen. The fruits of the Earth at first were
ſpontaneous, and the ground without being torn and tormented,
fatisfied the wants or deſires of Man. When Nature was freſh
and full, all things fow'd from her more eaſily and more pure, like
the firſt running of the Grape, or the Hony-comb; but now ſhe
muſt be prelt and ſqueez’d, and her productions talte more of the
Earth and of bitterneſs. The Ancient Poets have often pleas’d
themſelves in making deſcriptions of this happy ſtate, and in ad-
miring the riches and liberality of Nature at that time, but we
need not tranſcribe their Poetry here, ſeeing this point is not, I think,
conteſted by any. The ſecond pait of this Character, concerning
the ſpontaneous Origin of living Creatures out of that firſt Earth,
is not ſo unqueſtionable, and as to Man, Mofes plainly implies that
there was a particular action or miniſtery of Providence in the for-
mation of his Body, but as to other Aniinals He ſeems to ſuppoſe
that the Earth brought them forth as it did Herbs and Plants.
(Gen. 1. 24. compar'd with the 11. Verf.) And the truth is, there is
no ſuch great diference betwixt Vegetable and Animal Eggs, or
betwixt the Seeds out of which Plants riſe, and the Eggs out of
which all Animals riſe, but that we may conceive, the one as well
as the other, in the firſt Earth: And as foine wairnth and influence
from the Sun is requird for the Vegetation of Seeds, ſo that in-
fluence or impregnation which is neceſſary to make Animal Eggs
fruitful, was imputed by the Ancients to the Ather, or to an
active and pure Element which had the ſame effect upon our great
Mother the Earth, as the irradiation of the Male hath upon the
Females Eggs.
Tum Polter Oinnipotens fæctındis imbribus Ather
Conjugis in gremium læt& defcendit.
In fruitful Show'rs of Ærher Jove did glide
Into the bofom of his joyful Bride.
"Tis true, this opinion of the ſpontaneous Origin of Animals in the
firſt Earth, hath lain under fome Odium, becauſe it was common-
ly reckon’d to be Fpicurus's opinion peculiarly; and he extended
it
126
Bookli.
The Theory of the Earth.
1
it not only to all brute Creatures, but to Mankind alſo, whom he
ſuppos d io grow out of the Earth in great numbers, in leveral Paris
and Countries, like other Animals; which is a notion contrary to
the Sacred Writings; for they declare, that all Mankind, though
diffusºd now through the ſeveral parts and Regions of the Earth,
rile at firſt from one Head or ſingle Man and Woman; which is il
Concluſion of great importance, and that could not, I think, by the
Light of Nature, have ever been diſcover’d. And this makes the
Epicurean opinion the more improbable, for why thould two riſe
only, if they ſprung from the Earth ? or how could they riſe in their
full growth and perfection, as Allam and Eve did? But us ior the
opinion of Animals riſing out of the Earth at firlt, that was not at
all peculiar to Epicurus; The Stoicks were of the fame mind, and
the Pythagoreails, and the Agyptians, and, I think, all that ſup-
pos'd the Earth to riſe from a Chaos. Neither do I know any harın
in that opinion, if duly limited and ſtated; for what inconvenience
is it, or what diminution of Providence, that there ſhould be the
principles of Life, as well as the principles of Vegetation, in the
new Earth? And unleſs you ſuppoſe all the firſt Animals, as well
as the firſt Man, to liave been made at one ſtroke, in their full growth
and perfection, which we have neither reaſon nor authority fuffici
ent to believe; if they were made young, little and wcak, as they
come now into the World, there ſeems to be no way for their pro-
duction inore proper,and decorous,than that they ſhould ſpring from
their great Mother the Earth. Laſtly, conſidering the innumerable
little Creatures that are upon the Earth, Inſects and Creeping things:
and that theſe were not created out of nothing, but form’d out of
the ground: I think that an office nioſt proper for Nature, that
can ſet ſo many hands to work at once ; and that hath hands fit
for all thoſe little operations or inanufactures, how ſmall foever,
that would leſs become the dignity of Superiour Agents.
Thus inuch for the Preliminaries, or three general Characters of
Paradiſe, which were common to it with the reſt of the Prime
val Earth ; and were the chief ingredients of the Golden Age, ſo
much celebrated by the Ancients. I know there were ſeveral other
differences betwist that Earth and this, but theſe are the original;
and ſuch as are not neceſſary to be premisid for the general Ex-
plication of Paradiſe, we reſerve for another place. We may, in
the inean time obſerve, how prepoſterouſly they go to work, that
ſet themſelves immediately to find out furnc pleaſant place of the
Earth to fix Paradiſe in, before they have conlider’d, or laid any
grounds, to explain the gencral conditions of it, wherefocver it was.
Theſe muſt be firſt known and determin'd, and we inuſi take our
aion and directions from theſe, how to proceed further in our in-
quiries after it; otherwiſe we fail without a Coisaſi, er ſtuk a
Port and know not which way it lics. And as we ſhould think him a
very unskilful Pilot that ſought a place in the New World, or Ame-
rici, that really was in the Old; ſo they commit 110 leſs an error,
that ſeek Paradiſe in the preſent Eartlı, as now conſtituted, which
could only belong to the former, and to the ſtate of the firſt World:
As will appear more plainly in the following Chapter.
СНАР.
1
[
Chap.2. Concerning the Prim.Earth and Paradiſe. 127
CHA P. II.
The great Change of the World ſince the Flood, from what
it was in the firſt Ages. The Earth under its preſent
form could not be Paradiſiacal, nor any part of it.
T
HE Scheme of this Horld paſſètly aw.zy, ſaith an holy Author :
The mode and form, both of the Natural and Civil World,
changeth continually more or leſs, but moſt remarkably at certain
Periods, when all Nature puts on another face; as it will do at the
Conflagration, and hath done already from the time of the Deluge.
We may imagine how different a proſpect the firſt World would
make from what we ſee now in the preſent ſtate of things, if we
conſider only thoſe generals by which we have deſcrib'd it in the
foregoing Chapter, and what their influence would be upon Man-
kind and the reſt of Nature. For every new ſtate of Nature doth
introduce a new Civil Order, and a new face and Oeconomy of
Humane affairs: And I am apt to think that ſome two Planets,
that are under the ſame ſtate or Period, do not ſo much differ from
one another, as the ſame Planet doth from it ſelf, in different
pe-
riods of its duration. We do not ſeem to inhabit the ſame World
that our firſt fore-fathers did, nor ſcarce to be the ſame race of
Men. Our life now is ſo ſhort and vain, as if we came into the
World only to ſee it and leave it; by that time we begin to under-
ſtand our felves a little, and to know where we are, and how to
act our part, we inuſt leave the ſtage, and give place to others as
ineer Novices as we were our felves at our first entrance. And this
ſhort life is imploy'd, in a great ineaſure, to preſerve our ſelves
from neceſſity, or diſeaſes, or injuries of the Air, or other incon-
veniencies; to make one Man eaſie, ten muſt work and do drud-
gery ; The Body takes up ſo much time, we have little leiſure for
Contemplation, or to cultivate the mind. The Earth doth not
yield us food, but with much labour and induſtry, and what was
her free will offering before, or an eaſic liberality can ſcarce now
be extorted from her. Neither are the Heavens more favourable,
ſometimes in one extreme, ſometimes in another ; The Air often
impure or infectious, and, for a great part of the year, Nature
her ſelf ſeems to be fick or dead. To this vanity the external
Creation is made ſubject as well as Mankind, and ſo muſt continue
till the reſtitution of all things.
Can we imagine, in thoſe happy Times and Places we are treat-
ing of, that things ſtood in this ſame poſture ? are theſe the fruits
of the Golden Age and of Paradiſe, or conſiſtent with their happi-
neſs! And the rein:dies of theſe evils inuſt be ſo univerſal, you
cannot give them to one place or Region of the Earth, but all muſt
participate : For theſe are things that flow from the courſe of the
Heavens, or ſuch general Cauſes as estend at once to all Nature.
if there was a perpetual Spring, and perpetual Equinox in Para-
diſe,
128
Book ll.
The Theory of the Earth.
vity
diſe, there was at the ſame time a perpetual Æquinox all the Farih
over; unleſs you place Paradiſe in the middle of the Torrid Zone.
So alſo the long-lives of the Ante-diluvians was an univerſal Effect,
and inuſt have had an univerfal Caule. 'Tis true, in fome ſingle
parts or Regions of the prcient Earth, the Inhabitants live generally
longer than in others, but do not approach in any meaſure the
Age of their Ante-diluvian fore-fathers; and that degre: of longir-
which they have above the reſt, they owe to the ciilın. fs and
tranquility of their Heavens and Air ; which is but an imperfect
participation of that cauſe which was once Univerſal, and had is
effect throughout the whole Earth. And as to the fertility of this
Earth, though in ſome ſpots it be eminently more fruitful than in
others, and more delicious, yet that of the firſt Earth was a ferti-
lity of another kind, being ſpontaneous, and extending to the pro-
duction of Animals, which cannot be without a favourable con-
courſe froin the Heavens alfo.
Thus inuch in general; We will now go over thoſe three fore-
mentioned Characters more diſtinctly, to ſhow by their unſuitable-
neſs to the preſent ſtate of Nature, that neither the whole Earth,
as it is now, for any part of it, could be Paradiſiacal. The perpe-
tual Spring, which belong'd to the Golden Age, and to Paradiſe,
is an happineſs this preſent Earth cannot pretend to, nor is capable
of, unleſs we could transfer the Sun from the Ecliptick to the Æ-
quator, or, which is as eaſie, perſwade the Earthi to change its
poſture to the Sun. If Archimedes had found a place to plant his
Machines in for renoving of the Earth, all that I ſhould have de-
fir'd of him, would have been only to have given it an heave at
one end, and ſet it a little to rights again with the Sun, that we
inight have enjoy'd the comfort of a perpetual Spring, which we
have loſt by its diſlocation ever ſince the Deluge. And there being
nothing more indiſpenſably neceſſary to a Paradiſiacal ſtate than
this unity and equality of Seaſons, where that cannot be, 'tisin vain
to ſeek for the reſt of Paradiſe.
The ſpontaneous fruitfulneſs of the ground was a thing peculiar
to the primigenial ſoil, which was ſo temper’d, as made it more
luxuriant at that time than it could ever be afterwards ; and as
that rich temperament was ſpent, ſo by degrees it grew leſs fertile.
The Origin or production of Animals out of the Earth, depended not
only upon this vital conſtitution of the ſoil at firſt, but alſo upon ſuch a
poſture and aſpect of the Heavens, as favour'd, or at leaſt permitted, Na-
ture,to make her beſt works out of this prepar'd matter,and better than
could be made in that manner,after the Flood. Noah, we ſee, had orders
given him to preſerve the Races of living Creatures in his Ark, when
the Old World was deſtroy'd; which is an argument to ine, that
Providence foreſaw that the Earth would not be capable to produce
them under its new forin; and that, not only for want of fitneſs in
the ſoil, but becauſe of the diverſity of Seaſons, which were thin
to take place, whereby Nature would be diſturb’d in her work,
and the ſubject to be wrought upon would not continue long enouglı
in the ſame due temper. But this part of the ſecond Character con
cerning the Original of Animals, deſerves to be further examin' and
explain’d.
THE
í
Chap.2. Concerning the Prim.Earth,and Paradiſe. 129
3
parts, in
The first principles of Lile muri be tender and ductile, that they
inay yield to all the motions and gentle touches of Nature; other-
wile it is not poſſible that they fhould be wrought with that curi-
olity, and drawn into all thoſe little fine threds and textures, that
we ſee and admire in ſome parts of the Bodies of Animals. And as
the matter muſt be ſo conſtituted at firſt, ſo it muſt be kept in a due
teinper
till the work be finiſht, without any exceſs of heat or cold;
and accordingly we ſee that Nature hath made proviſion in all ſorts
of Creatures, whether Oviparous or Viviparous, that the firſt ru-
diments of Life ſhould be preſerv'd from all injuries of the Air,
and kept in a moderate warmth. Eggs are enclos'd in a Shell,
or Film, and muſt be cheriſh'd with an equal gentle heat, to begin
formation and continue it, otherwiſe the work miſcarries : And
in Viviparous Creatures, the materials of life are ſafely lodgʻd in
the Females womb, and conſerv'd in a fit temperature 'twixt
heat and cold, while the Cauſes that Providerice hath imploy'd,
are buſie at work, faſhioning and placing and joyning the
that due order which ſo wonderful a Fabrick requires.
Let us now compare theſe things with the birth of Animals in
the new-made World, when they firit roſe out of the Earth, to ſee
what proviſion could be made there for their ſafety and nouriſh-
ment, while they were a-making, and when newly made; And
though we take all advantages we can, and ſuppoſe both the Hea:
vens and the Earth favourable, a fit foil and a warm and conſtant
temper
of the Air, all will be little enough to make this way of
production feaſible or probable. But if we ſuppoſe there was then
the ſame inconſtancy of the Heavens that is now, the ſame vicillit
tude of ſeaſons, and the ſame inequality of heat and cold, I do not
think it at all poſible that they could be ſo form d, or being new-
form’d, preſervd and nouriſh'd. 'Tis true, ſome little Creatures
that are of ſhort diſpatch in their formation, and find nouriſhment
enough whereſoever they are bred, might be produc'd and brought
to perfection in this way, notwithſtanding any inequality of Sea-
ſons; becauſe they are made all at a heat, as I may ſo ſay, be.
gun and ended within the compaſs of one Seaſon; But the great
queſtion is concerning the more perfect kinds of Animals, that re-
quire a long ſtay in the womb, to make them capable to fuſtain and
nouriſh themſelves when they firſt come into the World. Such Ani-
mals being big and ſtrong, muſt have a pretty hardneſs in their bones,
and force and firmneſs in their Muſcles and Joynīts, before they can
bear their own weight, and exerciſe the common motions of their
body: And accordingly we ſee Nature hath ordain'd for theſe a
longer tiine of geſtation, that their limbs and members might have
time to acquire ſtrength and folidity. Beſides the young ones of
theſe Animals have commonly the milk of the Dam to nouriſh
them after they are brought forth, which is a very proper nouriſh-
ment, and like to that which they had before in the womb; and by
this means their ſtomachs are prepar'd by degrees for courſer food'.
Whereas our Terrigenous Animals muſt have been wean'd as ſoon
as they were born, or as ſoon as they were ſeparated from their Mo-
ther the Earth, and therefore muſt be allow'd a longer time of con-
tinuing there.
$
Theſe
I
130
Book 11.
The Theory of the Earth.
Theſe things being conſider'd, we cannot in reaſon but ſuppoſe,
that theſe Terrigenous Animals were as long, or longer, a periect
:
ing, than our Viviparous, and were not ſeparated from the body
of the Earth for ten, twelve, eighteen or more months, according
as their Nature was ; and ſeeing in this ſpace of time they mult
have ſufferid, upon the common Hypothiſis, all vicillitudes and vid-
riety of ſeaſons, and great exceſſes of heat and cold, which are
things incompatible with the tender principles of life and the for-
mation of living Creatures, as we have ſhown before; we may rea.
fonably and ſafely conclude, that Nature had not, when the World
began, the ſame courſe the hath now, or that the Earth was not
then in its preſent polture and conſtitution : Sceing, I ſay, theſe
firit ſpontaneous Births, which both the Holy Writ, Rcafon, and
Antiquity feem to allow, could not be finiſh d and brought to
maturity, nor afterwards preſervd and nouriſht, upon any other
ſuppoſition.
Longævily is the laſt Character to be conſider'd, and as incon-
ſiſtent with the preſent ſtate of the Earth as any other. There are
many things in the llory of the firſt Ages that ſeem ſtrange, but no
thing ſo prodigy-like as the long lives of thoſe Men; that their
houſes of Clay Thould ſtand eight or nine hundred years and up-
wards, and thoſe we build of the hardeſt Stone or Marble will not
now lait ſo long. This hath excited the curioſity of ingenious and
learned men in all Ages to enquire after the poſſible Cauſes of that
longxvity; and if it had been always in conjunction with innocency
of life and manners, and expir'd when that expir’d, we might have
thought it ſome peculiar bleſſing or reward attending that ; but
'twas common to good and bad, and laſted till the Deluge, where
as mankind was degenerate long before. Amongſt Natural Cauſos,
ſome have imputed it to the fobriety and ſimplicity of their diet
and manner of living in thoſe days, that they eat no fleſh, and
had not all thoſe provocations to gluttony which Wit and Vice
have ſince invented. This might have ſome effect, but not poſſibly
to that degree and mcafure that we ſpeak of. There are many Mo
naſtical perſons now that live abſtemiouſly all their lives, and yet
they think an hundred years a very great age amonglt them. Others
have imputed it to the excellency of their Fruits and ſome unknown
vertue in their Herbs and Plants in thoſe days; But they may as
well ſay nothing, as ſay that which can neither be prov'd nor un-
derſtood. It could not be either the quantity or quality of their
food that was the cauſe of their long lives, for the Earth was ſaid
to be curſt long before the Deluge, and probably by that time
was more barren and juiceleſs ( for the generality) than ours is
now ; yet we do not ſee that their longevity decrcaſt at all, from
the beginning of the World to the Flood. Methufal.zh) was Amal's
Grandfather, but one intire remove froin the Delugc, and he liv'd
longer than any of his Fore-fathers. That food that will nourish
the parts and kecp us in health, is alſo capable to keep us in long
life, if there be no impediments otherwiſe; för to continue hcalth isto
continue life; as that fewel that is fit to raiſe and nouriſha :11714,
will preſerve it as long as you plcaſe, if you add freſh fowel, and
:
no
And if the Ante-diluvians had not enjoy d that advantage in a per
Chap.2. Concerning the Prim.Earth,and Paradiſe. 1 z 1
no external cauſes hinder : Neither do we obfurve that in thoſe
parts
of the preſent Earth where people live longer than in others, ihar
there is any thing extraordinary in their food, but that the diffe-
rence is chiefly from the Air and the temperatenets of the Heavens ;
culiar manner, and ditierently from what any paris oi the Earth
do now, they would never have fuen, leven, eighr, or nine hundred
years go over their heads, though they had been nouriſh d with
NeEtar and Ambroſia.
Others have thought that the long lives of thoſe Men of the old
World proceeded from the ſtrength of their Stamina, or firſt prin-
ciples of their bodies; which if they were now as ſtrong in us,
they think we ſhould ſtill live as long as they did. This could
not be the ſole and adæquate cauſe of their longevity, as will ap-
pear both from Hiſtory and Reaſon. Shen, who was born before
the Flood, and had in his body all the vertue of the Ante-diluvian
Stamina and conſtitution, fell three hundred years ſhort of the age
.
of his fore-fathers, becauſe the grcareſt part of his life was paſt af-
ter the Flood. That their Stamina were ſtronger than ours are, I
am very ready to believe, and that their bodies were greater ; and
any race of frong Men, living long in health, would have children
of a proportionably Nrong conftitution with themſelves ; but then
the queſtion is, How was this interrupted? We that are their
po-
ſterity, why do not we inherit their long lives? how evas this con-
ftitution broken at the Deluge, and how did the Sumina fail ſo
falt when that came? why was there ſo great a Criſis then and
turn of life, or why was that the period of their ſtrength ?
We ſee this longævity ſunk half in half immediately after the
Flood, and after that it ſunk by gentler degrees, but was ſtill in
motion and declenſion till it was fixt at length, before David's time, Pſ. 90.10.
in that which hath been the coinmon ſtandard of Man's Age ever cull'da Pſulm
ſince : As when ſome excellent fruit is tranſplanted into a worſe of Mofes.
Climate and Soil, it degenerates continually till it comes to ſuch a
degree of meanneſs as ſuits that Air and Soil, and then it ſtands.
That the Age of Man did not fall all on a ſudden from the Ante-
diluvian meaſure to the preſent, I impute it to the remaining Sta-
mina of thoſe firſt Ages, and the ſtrength of that priſtine conſtitu-
tion which could not wear off but by degrees. We ſee the Blacks
do not quit their complexion immediately by removing into another
Climate, but their poſterity changeth by little and litele, and after
ſome generations they become altogether like the people of the
Country where they are. Thus by the change of Nature that hap-
pened at the Flood, the unhappy influence of the Air and unequal
Seaſons weaken'd hy degrees the innate ſtrength of their bodies
and the vigour of their parts, which would have been capable to
have laſted ſeveral more hundreds of years, if the Heavens had con-
tinued their courſe as formerly, or the Earth its poſition. To con-
clude this particular, If any think that the Ante-diluvian longevity
proceeded only from the Stamin, or the meer strength of their
bodies, and would have bech ſo under any constitution of the
Heavens, let them reſolve themſelves thefi Qneitions ; firit, Why
there
S2
132
The Theory of the Earth.
Book II.
tléſe Stanina, or this ſtrength of conſtitution faild ? Secondly,
Why did it fail ſo much and fo remarkably at the Deluge? Thirdly,
Why in ſuch proportions as it hath done ſince the Deluge? And
laſtly, Why it hath food ſo long immovable, and without any fur-
ther diminution? Within the compaſs of five hundred years they
ſunk from nine hundred to ninety; and in the compaſs of more
than three thouſand years ſince they have not ſunk ten years,
or ſcarce any thing at all. Who conſiders the reaſons of theſe things,
and the true reſolution of theſe queſtions, will be ſatisti'd, that to
underſtand the cauſes of that longævity fomething more muſt be
conſider'd than the make and ſtrength of their bodies; which,
though they had been made as ſtrong as the Behemoth or Leviathin,
could not have laſted ſo many Ages, if there had not been a par-
ticular concurrence of external cauſes, ſuch as the preſent ſtate of
Nature doth not admit of.
By this ſhort review of the three general Characters of Paradiſe
and the Golden Age, we may conclude how little conſiſtent they
are with the preſent form and order of the Earth. Who can pre-
tend to align any place or Region in this Terraqueous Globe,
Illand or Continent, that is capable of theſe conditions, or that
agrees either with the deſcriptions given by the ancient Heathens of
their Paradiſes, or by the Chriſtian Fathers of Scripture Paradiſe.
But where then, will you ſay, muſt we look for it, if not upon
this Earth? This puts us more into deſpair of finding it than ever;
'tis not above nor below, in the Air or in the ſubrerraneous Re-
gions : no, doubtleſs 't was upon the ſurface of the Earth, but of
the Primitive Earth, whoſe form and properties as they were dif-
ferent from this, ſo they were ſuch as made it capable of being
truly Paradiſiacal, both according to the forementioned Characters,
and all other qualities and privileges reaſonably aſcrib’d to Paradiſe.
CHA P. II.
The Original differences of the Primitive Earth from the
preſent or Poſt-diluvian. The three Characters of Para-
diſe and the Golden Age found in the Primitive Earth.
A particular Explication of each Character.
!
W
E have hitherto only perplext the Argument and our felves,
by ſhowing how inexplicable the ſtate of Paradiſe is ac
cording to the preſent order of things, and the preſent condition
of the Earth. We muſt now therefore bring into view that Ori
ginal and Ante-diluvian Earth where we pretend its ſeat was, and
ſhow it capable of all thoſe privileges which we have deny'd to
the preſent ; in vertue of which privileges, and of the order »
Nature eſtabliſht there, that primitive Earth might be truly PM
diſiacal, as in the Golden Age; and fome Region of it sniglit bi
peculiarly
Chap.3. Concerning the Prim. Earth, and Paradiſe. 133
gure
is now.
peculiarly fo, according to the receiv'd Idea of Paradiſe. And this,
I think, is all the knowledge and ſatisfaction that we can expect,
or that Providence hath allow'd us in this Arguinent.
The Primigenial Earth, which in the firſt Book (Chap. 5.) we
rais'd from a Chaos, and ſet up in an habitable farm, we mult
now ſurvey again with more carc, to obſerve its principal differen-
ces from the preſent Earth, and what influence they will have upon
the queſtion in hand. Theſe differences, as we have ſaid before,
were chiefly three; The form of it, which was ſimooth, even and
regular. The poſture and ſituation of it to the Sun, which was di-
rečt, and not, as it is at preſent, inclin'd and oblique ; And the Fi-
of it, which was more apparently and regularly Oval than it
From theſe three differences flow'd a great many more,
inferiour and ſubordinate; and which had a conſiderable influence
upon the moral World at that time, as well as the natural. But
we will only obſerve here their more immediate effects, and that
in reference to thoſe general Characters or properties of the Golden
Age and of Paradiſe, which we have inſtanc'd in, and whereof
we are bound to give an account by our Hypotbeſis.
And in this reſpect the moſt fundamental of thoſe three differen-
ces we mention'd, was, that of the right poſture and ſituation of
the Earth to the Sun; for from this immediately follow'd a perpe-
tual Æquinox all the Earth over, or, if you will, a perpetual
Spring: and that was the great thing we found a wanting in the
preſent Earth to make it Paradiſiacal,or capable of being ſo. Where-
fore this being now found and eſtabliſht' in the Primitive Earth,
the other two properties, of Longævity and of Spontaneous and
Vital fertility, will be of more eaſie explication. In the mean time
let us view a little the reaſons and cauſes of that regular ſituation
in the firſt Earth.
The truth is, one cannot ſo well require a reaſon of the regular
ſituation the Earth had then, for that was moſt ſimple and natural;
as of the irregular ſituation it hath now, ſtanding oblique and
inclin'd to the Sun or the Ecliptick: Whereby the courſe of the
year is become unequal, and we are caſt into a great diverſity of
Seaſons. But however, ſtating the firſt aright with its circumitan-
ces, we ſhall have a better proſpect upon the ſecond, and ſee from
what cauſes, and in what manner, it came to paſs. Let us there-
fore ſuppoſe the Earth, with the reſt of its fellow Planets, to be
carried about the Sun in the Ecliptick by the motion of the liquid
Heavens; and being at that time perfectly uniform and regular,
having the ſame Center of its magnitude and gravity, it would by
the equality of its libration neceſſarily have its Axis parallel to the
Axis of the fame Ecliptick, both its Poles being equally inclin’d to
the Sun. And this poſture I call a right ſituation, as oppos’d to ob-
lique or inclin'd: or a p:irallel ſituation, if you pleaſe. Now this
is a thing that needs no proof beſides its own evidence; for 'tis the
immediate reſult and common effect of gravity or libration, that
a Body freely left to it ſelf in a fluid medium, ſhould fettle in ſuch a
poſture as beſt anſwers to its gravitation ; and this firſt Earth where-
of we ſpeak, being uniform and every way equally balanc'd, there
W95
134
The Theory of the Earth. Bookli.
was no reaſon why it ſhould incline at one end, more than at the
other, towards the Sun. As if you lhould ſuppole a Ship to ſtand
North and South under the Æquator, if it was equally built and
equally ballaſted, it would not incline to one Pole or other, but
keep its Axis parallel to the Axis of the Earth ; but if the ballaſt
lay inore at one end, it would dip towards that Pole, and riſe pro-
portionably higher towards the other. So thoſe great Ships that
fail about the Sun once a year, or once in ſo many years, whilſt
they are uniforınly built and equally pois'd, they keep fteddy and
even with the Asis of their Orbit ; but if they loſe that equality,
and the Center of their gravity change, the heavier end willincline
more towards the common Center of their motion, and the other
end will recede from it. So particularly the Earth, which makes
one in that aëry Fleet, when it ſcap'd ſo narrowly from being thip-
Wrackt in the great Deluge, was however ſo broken and diſorder'd,
that it loſt its equal poiſe, and thereupon the Center of its gravity
changing, one Pole became inore inclind towards the Sun, and the
other more remov d from it, and ſo its right and parallel ſituation
which it had before to the Axis of the Ecliptick, was chang'd into
an oblique; in which skew poſture it hath ſtood ever ſince, and is
likely fo to do for ſome Ages to come. I inſtance in this, as the
molt obvious cauſe of the change of the ſituation of the Earth,
thio' it inay be, upon this, followed a change in its Magnetiſm, and
that might alſo contribute to the ſame effect.
However, This change and obliquity of the Earth's poſture had
a long train of conſequences depending upon it; whereof that was
the moſt immediate, that it alter'd the form of the year, and brought
in that inequality of Seaſons which hath ſince obtain'd: As, on
the contrary, while the Earth was in its firſt and natural poſture,
in a more eaſie and regular diſpoſition to the Sun, That had alſo
another reſpective train of conſequences, whereof one of the firſt,
and that which we are moſt concern'd in at preſent, was, that it
made a perpetual Æquinox or Spring to all the World, all the parts
of the year had one and the ſame tenour, face and temper'; there
was no Winter or Summer, Seed-time or Harveſt, but a continual
temperature of the Air and Verdure of the Earth. And this fully
anſwers the firſt and fundamnental character of the Golden Age
and of Paradiſe ; And what Antiquity, whether Heathen or Chri-
ſtian, hath ſpoken concerning that perpetual ferenity and conſtant
Spring that reign’d there, which in the one was accounted fabu-
lous, and in the other hyperbolical, we ſee to have been really and
Philoſophically true. Nor is there any wonder in the thing, the
wonder is rather on our ſide, that the Earth ſhould ſtand and con-
tinue in that forc'd poſture wherein it is now, ſpinning yearly about
an Axis, I mean that of the Æquator, that doth not belong to the
Orbit of its motion ; This, I ſay,is more ſtrange than that it once ſtood
in a poſture that was ſtreight and regular ; As we inore juſtly ad
inire the Tower at Piſa, that ſtands crook'd, than twenty otlier
ſtreight Towers that are much higher.
Having got this foundation to ſtand upon, the reſt of our work
will go on more eaſily; and the two other Cliaracters which we
mention's
Chap.3. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 135
A
mention'd, will not be of very difficult explication. The ſpontane-
ous fertility of the Earth, and its production of Animals at that
time, we have in ſome meaſure explaiu'd before ; fuppofing it to
proceed partly from the richneſs of the Primigenial foil, and party
froin this conſtant Spring and benignity of the Heavens, which we
have now eſtabliſht; Theſe were always ready to excite Nature,
and
put
her upon action, and never to interrupt her in any of her
motions or attempts. We have ſhow'd in the Fifth Chapter of the
Firſt Book, how this primigenial ſoil was made, and of what in-
gredients; which were ſuch as compoſe the richeſt and latteft foil,
being a light Earth mixt with unctuous juices, and then afterwards
refrelh'd and diluted with the dews of Heaven all the year long, and
cheriſht with a continual warmth from the Sun. What more hope-
ful beginning of a World than this? You will grant, I believe, that
whatſoever degree or whatſoever kind of fruitfulneſs could be
expected from a Soil and a Sun, might be reaſonably expected
there. We ſee great Woods and Foreits of Trces riſe ſpontaneouſly,
and that ſince the Flood ( for who can imagine that the ancient Fo-
reſts, whereof ſome were ſo vaſtly great were planted by the hand of
Man?) why ſhould we nor then believe that Truit-frees and Corn
roſe as ſpontaneouſly in that firſt Earth? Thai which makes Husban-
dry and Humane Arts ſo necellary now for the Fruits and pro-
ductions of the Earth, is partly indeed the decay of the Soil, but
chiefly the diverſity of Seaſons, whereby they periſh, if care be nor
taken of them; but when there was neither Heat nor cold, Win,
ter nor Summer, every Seaſon was a Seed-time to Nature, and
cvery Seaſon an Harveſt.
This, it may
be
you will allow as to the Fruits of the Earth, but
that the ſame Earth ſhould produce Animals alſo will not be thought
fo intelligible. Since it hath been diſcover'd, that the firſt mate-
rials of all Animals are Eggs, as Seeds are of Plants, it doth not
ſeem ſo hard to conceive that theſe Eggs might be in the firſt Earth,
as well as thoſe Seeds ; for there is a great analogy and ſimilitude
betwixt them; Eſpecially if you compare theſe Seeds firſt with the
Eggs of Inſects or Fiſhes, and then with the Eggs of Viviparous
Animals. And as for thoſe juices which the Eggs of Viviparous
Animals imbibe thorough their coats from the womb, they might
as well imbibe them, or foinething analogous to them, from a con-
veniently temper'd Earth, as Plani-Eggs do; And theſe things be-
ing admitted, the progreſs is much-what the ſame in Seeds as Eggs,
and in one fort of Egas as in another.
'Tis true, Animal-Eggs do not ſeem to be fruitful of themſelves,
without the influence of the Male; and this is not neceſſary in
Plant-Eggs or Vegetable Seeds. But neither doth it ſeem neceſſary
in all Animal Eggs, if there be any Animals Sponte ort.i, as they call
them, or bred without copulation. And, as we obſerv'd before,
iaccording to the beſt knowledge that we have of this Male influence;
ir is reaſonable to believe, that it may be ſupplied by the Heavens
or Æther. The Ancients, both tlte Stoicks and Ariſtotle, liave ſup-
pos'd that there was ſomething of an Æthereal Element in the Mals-
grniture, from whence the vertue of it chiefly proceeded; and if ſo,
why
136
i
Tbe Theory of the Earth. Book II.
why may we not ſuppoſe, at that time, fome general impreſſion or
irradiation of that purer Element to fructifie the new-inade Earth?
Moſes faith there was an incubation of the Spirit of God upon
the
maſs; and without all doubt that was either to form or fructifie it,
and by the mediation of this active principle; but the Ancients
ſpeak more plainly with expreſs mention of this ther, and of the
impregnation of the Earth by it, as betwixt Male and Female. As
in the place before-cited ;
De Civ. D.
lib.
. 4. 6. 10.
Tum Pater omnipotens fecundis imbribus fther
Conjugis in gremium lætæ defcendit ; & omnes
Mignus alit m.igno commixtis corpore, fætus.
Which notion, I remeinher, S. Auſtin faith, l'irgil did not take from
the fictions of the Poets, but out of the Books of the Philoſophers.
Some of the graveſt Authors aimongſt the Romans have reported
that this vertue hath been convey'd into the Wombs of ſome Avi-
mals by the Winds or the Zephyri; and as I eaſily believe that the
firſt freſh Air was more impregnated with this Æthereal principle
than ours is, ſo I ſee no reaſon but thoſe balmy dews that fell every
night in the Primitive Earth, miglit be the Vehicle of it as well
as the Male-geniture is now; and from them the teeming Earth and
thoſe vital Seeds which it contain'd, were actuated, and receiv'd
their firſt fruitfulneſs.
Now this Principle, howſoever convey'd to thoſe rudiments of
life which we call Eggs, is that which gives the firſt ſtroke towards
Animation; and this ſeems to be by exciting a ferment in thoſe
little maſſes whereby the parts are looſen'd, and diſpos’d for that
formation which is to follow afterwards. And I ſee nothing that
hinders but that we may reaſonably ſuppoſe that theſe Animal pro-
ductions might proceed thus far in the Primigenial Earth ; And
as to their progreſs and the formation of the Body, by what Agents
or Principles ſoever that great work is carried on in the womb of
the lemnale, it might by the ſame be carried on there. Neither
would there be any danger of miſcarrying by exceſs of Heat or Cold,
for the Air was always of an equal tempcr and inoderate warinth;
And all other impediments were remov’d, and all principles ready,
whether active or paſſive; fo as we inay juftly conclude, that as Eve
was the Mother of all living as to Mankind, ſo was the Earth the
Great Mother of all living Creatures beſides.
The Third Character to be explain'd, and the moſt extraordinary
in appearance, is that of LONGÆVITY. This ſprung from
the ſame root, in my opinion, with the other ; though the con-
nexion, it may be, is not ſo viſible. We ſhow'd in the forego-
ing Chapter, that no advantage of Diet, or of ſtrong Conſtitutions,
could have carried their lives, before the Flood, to that wonderful
length, if they had been 'expos’d to the ſame changes of Air and of
Seaſons that our Bodies are: But taking a perpetual Æquinox, and
fixing the Heavens, you fix the life of Man too; which was not
then in ſuch a rapid flux as it is now, but ſeem'd to ſtand fill, as
the Sun did once, without declenſion. There is no queſtion but
Every
Chap.3. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 137
every thing upon Earth, and eſpecially the Animate World, would
be much more permanent, if tlie general courſe of Nature was more
ſteddy and uniformi; A ftabi ity in the Heaveris makes a ſtability
in all things telow; and that change and contrariety of qualities
that we have in theſe Regions, is the fountain of corruption, and
ſuffers nothing to be long in quiet : Either by intcltine motions and
fermentations excited within, or by outward impreſſions, Bodies
are no ſooner well conſtituted, but they are tending again to diffo-
lution. The Æther in their little pores and chinks is unequally
agitated, and differently inov'd at different times, and ſo is the Air
in their greater, and the Vapours and Atmoſphere round about
them: All theſe ſhake and unſettle both the texture and continuity
of Bodies. Whereas in a fixt ſtate of Nature, where theſe prin
ciples have always the ſame conſtant and uniform motion, when
they are once ſuited to the forms and compoſitionis of Bodies, they
give them no further diſturbance; they enjoy a long and laſting
peace without any commotions or violence, within or without.
We find our ſelves, ſenſible changes in our Bodies upon the turn
of the Year, and the change of Seaſons; new ferinentations in the
Bloud and reſolutions of the Humours; which if they do not
amount to diſeaſes, at leaſt they diſturb Nature, and have a bad
effect not only upon the Auid parts, but alſo upon the more ſolid;
upon the Springs and Fibres in the Organs of the Body; to weaken
them and unfit them by degrees for their reſpective functions. For
though the cliange is not ſenſible immediately in theſe parts, yet
after many repeated impreſſions every year, by unequal heat and
cold, drineſs and moiſture, contracting and relaxing the fibres,
their tone'at 'length is in a great meaſure deſtroy'd, and brought to
a inanifeſt. debility; and the great Springs failing, the leſſer that
depend upon them, fall in proportion, and all the ſymptoms of
decay and old age follow. We ſee by daily experience, that Bodies
are kept better in the ſame medium, as we call it, than if they ofteri
change their medium, as ſometimes in Air, ſometimes in Water,
moiſten'd and dry'd, heated and coold; theſe different ſtates weak-
en the contexture of the parts: But our bodies, in the preſent ſtatė
of Nature, are put into an hundred different mediums in the courſe
of a Year; ſometimes we are ſteept in Water, or in a iniſty fog.
gy Air for ſeveral days together, ſometimes we are almoſt frozen with
cold, then fainting with heat at another time of the Year; and
the \Vinds are of a different nature, and the Air of a different
weight and preſſure,according to the Weather and the Seaſons : Theſe
things would wear our Bodies, though they were built of Oak,
and that in a very ſhort time in compariſon of what they would
laſt, if they were always incompaſt with one and the fame medium;
under one and the ſame temper, as it was in the Primitive Earth.
The Ancients ſeem to have been ſenſible of this, and of the
true cauſes of thoſe long periods of life ; for wherefoever they af-
ſign'd a great longævity, as they did not only to their Golden Age,
but alſo to their particular and topical Paradiſes, they alſo aflign'd
there a conſtant ſerenity and equality of the Heavens, and ſoine-
times exprefly a conſtant Æquinox; as might be made appear from
T
theit
1
1
138
Book 11.
The Theory of the Earth.
their Authors. And ſome of our Chriſtian Authors have gone
farther, and connected theſe two together, as Cauſe and Effect;
for they ſay that the Longævity of the Ante-diluvian Patriarchs
proceeded from a favourable Aſpect and influence of the Heavensat
that time; which Aspect of the Heavens being rightly interpreted,
is the ſame thing that we call the Poſition of the Heavens, or the
right ſituation of the Sun and the Earth, from whence caine a per-
petual Æquinox. And if we conſider the preſent Farth, I know
no place where they live longer than in that little Illand of the
Bermudas, where, according to the proportion of time they hold
out there, after they are arriv'd from other parts, one may reaforr-
ably ſuppoſe, that the Natives would live two hundred Years. And
there's nothing appears in that Illand that ſhould give long life above
other places, but the extraordinary ſteddineſs of the Weather, and
of the temper of the Air throughout the whole Year, ſo as there is
fcarce any conſiderable difference of Seaſons.
But becauſe it would take up too much time to ſhow in this
place the full and juſt reaſons why, and how theſe long periods of
life depend upon the ſtability of the Heavens: and how on the con-
trary, from their inconſtancy and mutability theſe periods are
ſhorten'd, as in the preſent order of Nature; we will ſet apart
the next Chapter to treat upon that ſubject; yet by way of digreſ-
ſion only, ſo as thoſe that have a mind may paſs to the following,
where the thred of this diſcourſe is continued. In the mean time,
you ſee, we have prepar'd an Earth for Paradiſe, and given a fair
and intelligible account of thoſe three general Characters, which,
according to the rules of method, muſt be determind before any
further progreſs can be made in this Arguunent. For in the do
Etrine of Paradiſe there are two things to be conliderd, the ſtate
of it, and the place of it; And as it is firſt in order of Nature, for
it is much more material, to find out the ſtate of it, than the Re
gion where it ſtood. We need not follow the Windings of Ri-
vers, and the interpretation of hard names, to diſcover this
, we
take more faithful Guides, The unanimous reports of Antiquity, Sa-
cred and Profane, ſupported by a regular Theory. Upon theſe
grounds we go, and have thus far proceeded on our way; which
we hope will grow more eaſie and pleaſant, the nearer we come to
our journeys end.
1
+
i
}
!
!
.
1
1
1
h
}
Super
:
СНАР.
Chap.4. Concerning the Prim.Earth,and Paradiſe. 139
CHAP. IV: :
A digreſſion, concerning the Natural Cauſes of Longavity.
That
the Machine of an Animal conſiſts of Springs, and
which are the two principal. The Age of the Ante-di-
luvians to be computed by Solar not Lunar Years.
T.
O confirm our opinion concerning the reaſons of Longævity in
tlie firſt Inhabitants of the World, it will not be amiis to de-
duce more at large the Natural Cauſes of long or short periods of life.
And when we ſpeak of long or Thort periods of life, we do not
incan thoſe little differences of ten, twenty or forty Years which
we fee amongſt Men now adays, according as they are of
ſtronger or weaker conftitutions, and govern themſelves better or
worſe, but thoſe grand and famous differences of ſeveral hundreds
of Years, which we have examples of in the different Ages of the
World, and particularly in thoſe that liv'd before and ſince the
Flood. Neither do we think it peculiar to this Earth to have ſuch
an inequality in the lives of Men, but the other Planets, if they be
inhabited, have the ſame property, and the ſamedifference in their
different periods; All Plancts that are in their Ante-diluvian ſtate;
and in their firſt and regular ſituation to the Sun, have long-liv'd
Inhabitants; and thoſe that are in an oblique ſituation, have ſhort-
liv'd; unleſs there be ſome counter-cauſes that hinder this general
rule of Nature from taking place.
We are now ſo us'd to a ſhort life, and to drop away after three:
ſcore or fourſcore years, that when we compare our lives with
thoſe of the Ante-diluvians, we think the wonder lies wholly on
their ſide, why they liv'd ſo long; and ſo it doth, popularly ſpeaking,
but if we ſpeak Philoſophically, the wonder lies rather on our ſide,
why we live ſo little, or ſo ſhort a tiine : For ſeeing our Bodies are
ſuch Machines as have a faculty of nouriſhing themſelves, that is,
of repairing their loft or decay'd parts, ſo long as they have good
nouriſhment to make uſe of, why thould they not continue in good
plight, and always the ſame? as a fame does, ſo long as it is ſup-
plied with fewel? And that we may the better ſee on whether ſide
the wonder lies, and from what cauſes it proceeds, we will propoſe
this Problem to be examin’d, Wly the frame or Machine of an humanė
Body, or of another Animal, having that conſtruction of parts and thoſe
faculties which it 1.1th, lapis so ſort a time? And though it fall
into no diſeaſe, nor have any unnatural accident, within the ſpace
of eighty years, more or leſs, fatally and inevitably decays, dics and
periſheth?
That the ſtate and difficulty of this queſtion may the better ap-
prar, let us conſider a Man in the prime and vigour of his life, at
the age of twenty or twenty four years, of an healthful conſtitution,
and all his Vitals found; let him be nouriſh'd with good food,
T2
uſe
140
Book 11,
The Theory of the Earth.
uſe due exerciſe, and govern himſelf with moderation in all othur
things; The Queſtion is, Why this Body Thould not continue in
the ſame plight, and in the fame ftrength, for ļome Agcs? or at
leaſt why it ſhould decay ſo ſoon, and ſo faſt as we live it dues:
We do not wonder at things that happen daily, though the cautes
of them be never ſo hard to find out; We contract a certain tami-
liarity with common events, and fancy we know as much of
them as can be known, though in reality we know nothing of them
but matter of fact; which the vulgar knows as well as the Wift or
the Learned. We ſve daily inſtances of the ſhortneſs of mans life,
how foon his race is run, and we do not wonder at it, becauſe tis
common, yet if we examine the compoſition of the Body, it will be
very hard to find any good reaſons why the frame of it ſhould de-
cay ſo ſoon.
1
I know ’tis eaſie to give general and ſuperficial anſwers and ac-
counts of theſe things, but they are ſuch, as being ſtrictly examind,
give no ſatisfaction to an inquiſitive mind : You would ſay, it may
be, that the Interiour parts and Organs of the Body wear and de-
cay by degrees, ſo as not performing fo well their ſeveral offices
and functions, for the digeſtion and diſtribution of the food and its
juices, all the other parts ſuffer by it, and draws on infenſibly a
decay upon the whole frame of the Body. This is all true; but
why, and how comes this to paſs ? from what cauſes? where is
the firſt failure, and what are the conſequences of it? The inward
parts do not deſtroy themſelves, and we ſuppoſe that there is no
want of good food, nor any diſeaſe, and we take the Body in its
full ſtrength and vigour, why doth it not continue thus, as a Lamp
does, if you fupply it with Oil ? The cauſes being the ſame, why
doth not the ſame effect ſtill follow? why ſhould not the fainc of
life, as well as any other flame, if you give it fewél, continue in its
force without languiſhing or decay
You will ſay, it inay bç, The caſe is not the ſame in a ſimple
Body, ſuch as a Lamp or a Fire, and in an Organical Body; which
being variouſly compounded of multiplicity of parts, and all thoſe
parts put in connexion and dependance one upon another, if any
one fail, it will diſorder the whole frame; and therefore it inult
needs be more difficult for ſuch a body to continue long in the ſainc
ſtate, than for a ſimple Body that hath no variety of parts or ope-
rations. I acknowledge ſuch a Body is much more ſubject to diſ
eaſes and accidents than a more ſimple, but barring all diſeaſes and
accidents, as we do, it might be of as long a duration as any other,
if it was ſuppli’d with nouriſhment adequately to all its parts: As
this Lamp we ſpeak of, if it conſiſted of twenty branches, and
each of thefe branches was to be fed with a different Oil, and thoſe
Oils could be all mix'd together in ſome common Ciſtern, whence
they were to be diſtributed into the ſeveral branches, cither accor-
ding to their different degrees of lightneſs, one riſing higher than
another; or according to the capacity and figure of the little pipes
they were to paſs thorough; ſuch a compounded Lamp, inade up
of ſuch artifices, would indeed be more ſubject to accidents, and to
be out of order, by the obſtruction of ſome of the little pipes, or
foine
Chap.4. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 141
-
fome unfit qualities in the Oils, but all theſe caſualties and diſorders
excepted, as they are in our caſe, if it was ſupplid with conveni-
ent liquors, it would burn as long as any other, though more
plain and ſimple:
To inſtance yet, for more plainneſs, in another ſort of Machine,
ſupppoſe a Mill, where the Water may repreſent the nouriſhment
and humours in our Body, and the frame of Wood and Stone, the
folid
parts;
if we could fuppofe this Mill to have a power of nou-
riſhing it felf by the Water it receiv'd, and of repairing all the parts
that were worn away, whether of the Wood-work or of the Stone,
feed it but with a conſtant ſtrean, and it would ſubliſt and grind
for ever. And 'tis the ſaine thing for all other Artificial Machines
of this nature, if they had a faculty of nouriſhig themſelves, and
repairing their parts. And ſeeing thoſe natural Machines we are
ſpeaking of, the Body of Man, and of other Animals, have and
enjoy this faculty, why ſhould they not be able to preſerve them-
felves beyond that ſhort period of tiine which is now the meaſure of
their life?
Thus much we have ſaid to ſhew the difficulty propos’d and in-
force it; We muſt now conſider the true anſwer and reſolution of
it; and to that purpoſe bring into view again thoſe cauſes which
we have aſſign'd, both of the long periods of life before the Flood,
and of the thort ones ſince. That there was a perpetual Æquinox
and ſtability of the Heavens before the Flood, we have ſhow'd both
from Hiſtory and Reaſon; neither was there' then any thing of
Clouds, Rains, Winds, Storis or unequal weather, as will appear
in the following Chapter ; And to this ſteddineſs of Nature and uni-
verſal calmneſs of the External World, we have inputed thoſe long
periods of life which Men enjoy'd at that time : As on the contrary
when that great cliange and revolution happend to Nature at the
Deluge, and the Heavens and the Earth were caſt in another mould,
then was brought in, beſides many other new Scenes, that ſhortneſs
and vanity in the life of Man, and a general inſtability in all ſublu-
nary things, but eſpecially in the Animate World.
It is not neceſary to ſhow, more than we have done already, how
that Primitive ſtate of Nature contributed to long life ; neither is it
requir'd that it ſhould actively contribute, but only be permiflive,
and ſuffer our Bodies to act their parts ; for if they be riot diſturbid,
rior any harın done them by External Nature, they are built with
art and ſtrength erioug! to last many hundreds of years. And as we ob-
ſerv'd before concerning the poſture of the Earth, that that which
it had at firſt, being ſimple and regular , was not ſo much to be ac-
counted for, as its preſent poſture, which is irregular ; fo likewiſe
for the life of Man, the difficulty is not why they liv'd ſo long in
the old World ; tliat was their cue and proper courſe'; but why
our Bodies being made after the farme manner, ſhould endure ſo Mort
a time now.
This is it therefore which we inuſt now make our
buſineſs to give an account of, namely, how that viciſſitude of Sea-
ſons, inconſtancy of the Air, and unequal courſe of Nature which
caine in at the Deluge, do horten Life; and indeed haſten the dif-
ſolution of all Bodies, Animate or Inanimate:
in
142
Book II.
The Theory of the Earth.
ز
$
In our Bodies we may conſider three ſeveral qualities or diſpo-
ſitions, and according to each whereof tliey ſuffer decay; Firſt, Their
continuity ; Secondly, That diſpoſition whereby they are capable of
receiving nouriſhinent, which we may call Nutribility ; and Third-
ly, The Tone or Tunick diſpolition of the Organs whereby they per-
form their ſeveral functions. In all theſe three reſpects they would
decay in any ſtate of Nature, but far ſooner, and faſter in the pre-
ſent ſtate tlun in the Primxval. As for their Continuity, we have
noted before that all conſiſtent Bodies muſt be leſs durable now,
than under that firſt order of the World, becauſe of the unequal and
contrary motions of the Elements, or of the Air and Ether that
penetrate and pervade them; and 'tis part of that vanity which all
things now are ſubject to, to be more periſhable than in their firſt
Conſtitution. If we ſhould conſider our Bodies only as breathing
Statues, conſiſting of tloſe parts they do, and of that tenderneſs,
the Air which we breath, and wherewith we are continually incom-
paſt, changing ſo often 'twixt moiſt and dry, hot and cold, a flow and
eger motion, there different actions and reſtleſs changes would footer
weaken and deſtroy the union of the parts, than if they were always
in a calm and quiet medium.
But it is not the gros and viſible Continuity of the parts of our
Body that firſt decays, there are finer Textures that are ſpoil'd inten-
ſibly, and draw on the decay of the reſt; ſuch are thoſe other two
we mention'd, That diſpoſition and temper of the parts wherety
they are fit to receive their full nourithment; and eſpecially that con-
ſtruction and texture of the Organs that are preparatory to this
Nutrition. The Nutribility of the Body depends upon a certain tem-
perament in the parts, ſoft and yielding, which makes them oren
to the Blood and Juices in their Circulation and paſſage through
them, and mixing intimately, and univei ſally, hold faſt and retain
many of their Particles ; as inuddy Earth dcth the parts of the Wa-
ter that runs ir.to it and mixeth with it: And when theſe Nutri-
tious Particles retain'd are more tlian the Body ſpends, that Body is
in its growth; as when they are fewer, 'tis in its decay. And as we
cumpard the felh and tender parts when they are young and in a
growing diſpoſition, to a muddy ſoil
, that opens to the Water,
fwells and incorporates with it: ſo when they become hard and dry,
they are like a ſandy Earth, that ſuffers the Water to glide through
it, without incorporating or retaining many of its parts; and the
ſooner tliey come to this temper, the ſooner follows their decay:
For the ſame Cauſes that ſet limits to our Growth, fet alſo limits
to our Life ; and he that can reſolve that Queſtion, urhy the time of
our Growth is ſo ſhort, will alſo be able to reſolve the other in a
good meaſure, why the time of our Life is ſo ſhort. In both caſes,
that which ſtops our progreſs is external Nature, whoſe courſe, while
it was even and Iteddy, and tlie ambient Air mild and balmy, pre-
ſerv'd the Body much longer in a freſh and fit temper to receive its
full nouriſhment, and conſequently gave larger bounds buth to our
Growth and Life.
But the Third thing we mention'd is the moſt conſiderable, The
decay of the Organick parts; and eſpecially of the Organs prepara-
tory
Chap.4. Concerning the Prim.Earth and Paradiſe. 1:43
ya
tory to Nutrition. This is the point chiefly to be examin'd and ex-
plaini'd, and therefore we will endeavour to ſtate it fully and di-
itinctly. There are ſeveral functions in the Body of an Animal, and
ſeveral Organs for the conduct of them; and I am of opinion, that
all the Organs of the body are in the nature of Springs, and that
their action is Tonical. The action of the Muſcles is apparently ſo,
and ſo is that of the Heart and the Stoinach ; and as for thoſe
parts that make ſecretions only, as the Glandules and Parenchymata,
if they be any more than merely pallive, as Strainers, 'tis the Toné
of the parts, when diſtended, that performs the feparation : And
accordingly in all other active Organs, the action proceeds from a
Tone in the parts. And this ſeems to be eaſily prov'd, both as to
our Bodies and all other Bodies : for no matter that is not fuid,
hath any inotion or action in it, but in vertue of ſome Tone; if
matter be Auid, its parts are actually in motion, and conſequently
may impel or give motion to other Bodies; but if it be ſolid or con-
ſiſtent, the parts are not ſeparate or ſeparately mov'd from one an-
other, and therefore cannot impel or give motion to any other, but
in vertuc of their Tone; they having no other motion themſelves.
Accordingly we fee in Artificial Machines there are but two ge-
neral forts, thoſe that inove by foine Aud or volatile inatter, as Wa-
ter, Wind, Air, or ſome active Spirit; And thoſe which more by
Springs, or by the Tonick diſpoſition of ſome part that gives mo-
tion to the reſt: For as for ſuch Machines as act by weights, 'tis not
the weight that is the active principle, but the Air or Æther that
impels it. 'Tis true, the Body of an Animal is a kind of mixt Ma
chine, and thoſe Orgáns that are the Primáry parts of it, partake
of both theſe principles ; for there are Spirits and Liquors that do
aſſiſt in the motions of the Muſcles, of the Heart and of the Stonnach;
but we have no occaſion to conſider them at preſent, but only the
Tone of the folid Organs.
This being obſerv'd in the firſt place, wherein the force of our
Organs conſiſts, we might here immediately ſubjoyn, how this force
is weaken'd and deſtroy'd by the unequal courſe of Nature which
now obtains, and conſequently our Life ſhorten'd; for the whole
ſtate and Oeconomy of the Body depends upon the force and acti-
on of thefe Organs. But to underſtand the buſineſs more diſtinály,
it will be worth our time to cxamine, upon which of the Organs
of the Body Life depends more immediately, and the prolongation
of its that ſo reducing our Inquiries into'a narrower compaſs, wi
may manage them withinore eaſe and more certainty,
In the Body of Man there are ſeveral, Compages, or ſetts of parts,
ſome whereof need not be conſider’d in this queſtion; There is that
Syſteme that ſerves for fence and local-1/otion, which is commonly
call’d the ANIMAL Compages; and that which ſerves for ge
neration, which is calld the GENITAL. Theſe have no influ?
ence uporì long Life, being parts nouriſhed, not nouriſhing, and
tliat are fed from other's as Rivers from their Fountain: Where-
fore having laid there afide, there remain two Compages more,
the NATURAL and VITAL, whicli conſilt of the Heart
and Stomach, with their appendages. Thefe are the Sources of Life,
and
144
The Theory of the Earth. Book II.
and theſe are all that is abſolutely neceſſary to the conſtitution of a
Living Creature ; what parts we find more, few or many, of one
fort or other, according to the ſeveral kinds of Creatures, is acci-
dental to our purpoſe; The formn of an Animal, as we are to con-
ſider it liere, lies in this little compaſs, and what is ſuperadded is
for ſome new purpoſes, beſides that of meer Life, as for Senſe,
Motion, Generation, and ſuch like. As in a Watch, beſides the
Movement, which is inade to tell you the hour of the day, which
conſtitutes a Watch, you may have a fancy to have an Alaruin ad-
ded, or a Minute-motion, or that it ſhould tell you the day of the
Month ; and this ſometimes will require a new Spring, ſometimes
only new Wheels; however if you would examine the Nature of
a Watch, and upon what its motion, or, if I may fo ſay, its Life
depends, you mult lay alide thoſe ſecondary Movements, and ob-
ſerve the main Spring, and the Wheels that immediately depend
upon that, for all the reſt is accidental. So for the Life of an Ani-
mal, which is a picce of Nature's Clockwork, if we would exa-
mine upon what the duration of it depends, we muſt lay aſide
thoſe additional parts or Syſtems of parts, which are for other pur-
poſes, and conſider only the firſt principles and fountains of Life,
and the cauſes of their natural and neceſſary decay.
Having thus reduc'd our Inquiries to theſe two Organs, The Sto-
mach and the Heart, as the two Maſter-Springs in the Mechaniſm
of an Animal, upon which all the reſt depend, let us now ſee what
their action is, and how it will be more or leſs durable and con-
ſtant, according to the different ſtates of External Nature. Wede-
terinin'd before, that the force and action of all Organs in the
Body was Tonical, and of none more remarkably than of theſe
two, the Heart and Stomach ; for though it be not clearly deter-
min'd what the particular ſtructure of theſe. Organs, or of their
Fibres is, that makes them Tonical, yet 'tis inanifeſt by their actions
that they are ſo. In the Stomach, beſides a peculiar ferment that
opens and diffolves the parts of the Meat, and melts them into a
fluor or pulp, the coats of it, or Fibres whereof they conſiſt, have
a motion proper to them, proceeding from their Tone, whereby
they cloſe the stomach, and compreſs the Meat when it is receiv'd,
and when turn'd into Chyle, preſs it forwards, and ſqueeze it into
the Inteſtines ; and the Inteſtines alſo partaking of the fame motion,
puſh and work it ſtill forwards into thoſe little Veins that convey
it towards the Heart. The Heart hath the ſame general inotions
with the Stomach, of opening and ſhutting, and hath alſo a pecu-
liar ferment which rarifies the Bloud that enters into it, and that
Bloud by the Spring of the Heart, and the particular Texture of its
Fibres, is thrown out again to make its Circulation through the
Dody. This is, in ſhort, the action of both theſe Organs; and in-
deed the inyſtery of the Body of an Animal, and of its operations
and Oeconomy, conſiſts chiefly in Springs and Ferments; The
one for the ſolid parts, the other in the Auid.
But to apply this Fabrick of the Organick parts to our purpoſe,
we may obſerve and conclude, that whatſoever weakens the Tone
or Spring of theſe two Organs, which are the Baſes of all Vitality,
weaken
f
Chap.4. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 145
it ;
weaken the principle of Life, and ſhorten the Natural duration of
And if of two Orders or Courſes of Nature, ihe one be favour-
able and eaſie to theſe Tonick principles in the Body, and the other
unealie and prejudicial, that courſe of Nature will be attended with
long periods of Life, and this with thort. And we have ſhewn,
that in the Pinitive Earth the courſe of Nature was even, iteddy
and unchangeable, without either different qualities of the Air;
or unequal Scafons of the Year, which muſt needs be inore caſie to
theſe principles we ſpeak of, and perinit thein to continue longer
in their ſtrength and vigour, than they can poſſibly do under all
thoſe changes of the Air, of the Atmoſphere, and of the Heavens,
which we now ſuffer yearly, monthly, and daily. And though
Sacred Hiſory had not acquainted us with the Longevity of the
Ante-diluvian Patriarchs, nor profane Hiſtory with thoſe of the
Golden Age, I ſhould have concluded; from the Theory alone, and
the contemplation of that ſtate of Nature, that the forms of all
things were much more perinanent in that World than in ours,
and that the lives of Mun and all other Animals had longer pe-
riods.
I confeſs, I am of opinion, that 'tis this that makes not only
theſe living Springs or Tonick Organs of the Body, but all Artificial
Springs alſo, though made of the hardeſt Metal, decay ſo faſt. The
different preſſure of the Atmoſphere, ſoinetimes heavier, ſometimes
lighter, inore rare or more denſe, moiſt or dry, and agitated with
different degrees of motion, and in different manners; this muſt
needs operate upon that nicer contexture of Bodies, which makes
them Tonical or Elaſtick; altering the figure or ininuteneſs of the
pores, and the ſtrength and order of the Fibres upon which that
propriety depends : bending and unbending, cloling and opening
the parts. There is a ſubtle and Æthereal Element that traverſeth
the pores of all Bodies, and when 'tis fraiten’d and pent’up there,
or ſtopt in its uſual courſe and paliage, its motion is inore quick
and eager, as a Current of Water, when 'tis obſtructed or runs
through a narrower Chanel ; and that ſtrife and thoſe attempts
which theſe little active Particles inake to get free, and follow the
ſame tracts they did before do ſtill preſs upon the parts of the Body
that are changd, to redreſs and reduce them to their firſt and Natu-
ral poſture, and in this conlills the force of a Spring. Accordingly
We may obſerve, that there is no Body that is or will be Tonical
or Elaſtick, if it be left to it ſelf, and to that poſture it would take
Naturally; for then all the parts are at eaſe, and the ſubtle matter
moves freely and uninterruptedly within its pores; but if by di-
flention, or by compreſſion, or by flexion, or any other way, the
lituation of the parts and pores he fo alter'd, that the Air ſometimes,
but for the moſt part that ſubtiler Element, is uneaſie and compreſt
too much, it cauſeth that renitency or tendency to reſtitution,
which we call the Tone or Spring of a Body. Now as this diſpo-
ſition of Bodies doth far more eaſily perifh than their Continuity,
fo I think there is nothing that contributes inore to its pefiſhing
( whether in Natural or Artificial Springs ) than the unequalaction
and different qualities of the Æther, Air, and Atmoſphere,
1:1
It
ܪ
146
Book II.
The Theory of the Earth.
It will be objected to us, it may be, that in the beginning of the
Chapter we inſtanc'd in Artificial things, that would continue for
ever, if they had but the power of nouriſhing themſelves, 13 Lamps,
Mills, and ſuch like; why then may not Natural Machines that
have that power, laſt for ever : The caſe is not the ſame as to the
Bodies of Animals, and the things there inſtanc'd in, for thoſe
were ſpringleſs Machines, that act only by ſome external cauſe,
and not in vertue of any Tone or interiour temper of the parts, as
our Bodies do; and when that Tone or temper is deſtroy'd, no
nouriſhinent can repair it. There is ſomething, I ſay, irreparable
in the Tonical diſpoſition of matter, which when wholly loſt
, can-
not be reſtor'd by Nutrition; Nutrition may anſwer to a bare con-
ſumption of parts, but where the parts are to be preſerv'd in ſuch
a temperament, or in ſuch a degree of humidity and drineſs, warmth,
rarity or denlity, to make thein capable of that nouriſhment, as
well as of their other operations, as Organs, (which is the caſe of
our Bodies ) there the Heavens, the Air, and external Cauſes will
change the qualities of the matter in ſpite of all Nutrition; and
the qualities of the matter being chang'd ( in a courſe of Nature,
where the Cauſe cannot be taken away ) that is a fault incorrigible,
and irreparable by the nouriſhment that follows, being hinder'd of
its effect by the indiſpoſition or incapacity of the Recipient. And
as they ſay, a fault in the firſt concoction cannot be corrected in the
ſecond; ſo neither can a fault in the Prerequiſites to all the con-
coctions be corrected by any of thein.
I know the Ancients made the decay and term of Life to de
pend rather upon the humours of the Body, than the ſolid parts,
and ſuppos’d an Humidum radicale and a Calidum innatum, as they
call them, a Radical Moiſture and Congenit heat to be in every Body
from its birth and firſt formation; and as theſe decay'd, life decay”d.
But who's wiſer for this account, what doth this inſtruct ys in?
We know there is heat and moiſture in the Body, and you may call
the one Radical, and the otirer Innote if you pleaſe; this is but a
ſort of Cant, for we know no more of the real Phyſical Cauſes
of that effect we enquir'd into, than we did before. What makes
this heat and moiſture fail, if the nouriſhment be good, and all the
Organs in their due ſtrength and temper? The firſt and original
failure is not in the fluid, but in the ſolid parts, which if they con-
tinued the ſame, the humours would do ſo too. Beſides, What be-
fel this Radical moiſture and heat at the Deluge, that it ſhould de-
cay
ſo faſt afterwards, and laſt ſo long before? There is a certain
temper, no doubt, of the juices and humours of the Body, which
is more fit than any other to conſerve the parts from drineſs and
decay; but the cauſe of that drineſs and decay, or other inhability
in the ſolid parts, whence is that, if not from external Nature?
Tis thither we muſt come at length in our ſearch of the reaſons of
the Natural decay of our Bodies, we follow the fatc and Laws of
that: and, I think, by thoſe Cauſes, and in that order, that we
have already deſcrib'd and explainid.
To conclude this Diſcourſe, we may collect from it what judg.
ment is to be made of thoſe Projectors of Immortality, or under-
takers
Chap.4. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 147
takers to make Men live to the Age of Methuſalah, if they will uſe
their methods and medicines; There is but one izethod for this,
To put the Sun into his old courſe, or the Earth into its firſt poſture;
there is no other ſecret to prolong life; Our Bodies will ſympathize
with the
general courſe of Nature, nothing can guard us irom it,
no Elixir, no Specifick, no Philoſopher's-ſtone. But there are En-
thuſiaſts in Philoſophy, as well as in Religion; Men that go by no
principles, but their own conccit and fancy, and by a Light with-
in, which ſhines very uncertainly, and, for the moſt part, leads
them out of the way of truth. And ſo much for this diſquiſition,
concerning the Cauſes of Longavity, or of the long and ſhort periods
of Life in the different periods of the World.
That the Age of the Ante-diluviin Patriarchs is to be computed by
Solar or common Years, not by Lunar or Months.
Having made this diſcourſe of the unequal periods of life, only
in reference to the Ante diluvians and their fam'd Longævity, leſt
we ſhould ſeem to have proceeded upon an ill-grounded and iniſta-
ken ſuppoſition, we are bound to take notice of, and confute, That
Opinion which makes the Years of the Ante-diluvian Patriarchs to
have been Lunar, not Solar, and ſo would bear us in hand, that
they liv’d only ſo many Months, as Scripture faith they liv'd Years.
Steing there is nothing could drive Men to this bold interpreta-
tion, but the incredibility of the thing, as they fanlied; They having
110 Notions or Hypotheſis whereby it could appear intelligible or
poſſible to them; and ſeeing we have taken away that ſtuinbling-
Itone, and ſhew'd it not only poſſible but neceſſary, according to
the conſtitution of that World, that the periods of Life ſhould be
far longer than in this; by removing the ground or occalion of their
iniſinterpretation, we hope we have undeceiv'd them, and let them
ſee that there is no need of that ſubterfuge, either to prevent an in-
congruity, or ſave the credit of the Sacred Hiſtorian.
But as this opinion is inconſiſtent with Nature truly underſtood,
fo is it alſo with common Hiſtory; for beſides what I have already
mention'd in the firſt Chapter of this Book, Foſephus tells us, that
Lib. 1. Few.
the Hiſtorians of all Nations, both Grecks and Barb.zri.ins, give the Ant. Chap. 4.
fame account of the fưſt Inhabitants of the Earth ; Manetho, urho
nyit the ſtory of the Ægyptians, Beroſus, who writ the Chaldxan Hi-
Jiory, and thoſe Authors that have given us an account of the Phænician
Intiquities; beſides Molus und Heſtixus, and Hieronymnus the Ægyp-
tian; and amongst the Greeks Heſiodus, Hecateus, Hellanicus, Acu-
Gilaus, Ephorus and Nicolaus: We have the Suffrages of all theſe, and
thrir common conſent that in the firſt Ages of the World Men liv'da thou-
Sind lears.Now we cannot well ſuppoſe that all theſe Hiſtorians meant
Lun: Years, or that they all conſpir'd together to make and pro-
pagate a Fable.
Laſtly, as Nature and Profane Hiſtory do diſown and confute
this opinion, ſo much more doth Sacred Hiſtory; not indeed in
profeſs’d terms, for Moſes doch not ſay that he uſeth Sobur Years;
U 2
but
148 The Theory of the Earth. Book II.
A
you ſee
but by ſeveral inarks and obſervations, or collateral Arguments, it
may be clearly collected, that he doth not uſe Lunar. As first, be
cauſe He diſtinguiſheth Months and Years in the Hiſtory of the De-
luge, and of the life of No.zh; for Gen. 7.11. he faith in the fix
hundredth
year
of Noah's life, in the ficond month,&C. It cannot
be imagin'd that in the ſame verſe and ſentence theſe two terins of
Tear and Month 1hould be ſo confounded as to ſignifie the ſame thing;
and therefore Noah's Years were not the faine with Months, nur con-
ſequently thoſe of the other Patriarchs, for we have no reaſon to make
any
difference. Belides, what ground was there, or how was it proper
or pertinent to reckon, as Mofes does there, firſt, ſecond, third
Month, as ſo inany going to a Year, if every one of them was a
Year? And ſeeing the Deluge begun in the ſix hundredth year of
Norh's life, and in the ſecond Month, and ended in the ſix hundredth
and firſt Year (Chap. 8. 13.) the firſt or ſecond Month, all that was
betwixt theſe two terms, or all the duration of the Deluge, made but
one year in Noah's life, or it may be not ſo much ; and we know
Moſes reckons a great many Months in the duration of the Deluge;
ſo as this is a demonſtration that Noah's years are not to be under-
ſtood of Luar. And to imagine that his Years are to be under-
ſtood one way, and thoſe of his fellow-Patriarchs another, would be
an inaccountable fiction. This Argument therefore extends 10 all the
Ante-diluvians; And Noah's life will take in the Poſt-diluvians too,
for
part
of it runs amongſt them, and ties together the two
Worlds : ſo that if we exclude Lunar years from his life, we exclude
them from all, thoſe of his fathers, arid thoſe of his Children.
Secondly, If Lunar years were underſtood in the Ages of the Ante-
diluvian Patriarchs, the interval betwixt the Creation and the Deluge
would be too ſhort, and in many reſpects incongruous. There would
be but 1656 months from the beginning of the World to the Flood;
which converted into common years, make but 127 years, and five
months, for that interval. This perverts all Chronology, and beſides,
makes the ullinber of people ſo ſmall and inconſiderable at the time
of the Deluge, that clėſtroying of the World then was not ſo much
as deſtroying of a Country Town would be now: For from one
couple you cannot well imagine there could ariſe above five hundred
perſons in ſo ſhort a time; but if there was a thouſaud, 'tis not fo
many as we have ſometimes in a good Country Village. And were
the Flood-gates of Heaven open'd, and the great Abyſs broken up
to deſtroy ſuch an handful of people and the Waters rais'd fifteen
Cubits above the higheſt Mountains throughout the face of the Earth,
to drown a Pariſh or two? is not this more incredible tlian our Age
of the Patriarchs ? Beſides, This ſhort interval doth not leave room for
Ten Generations, which we find from Adam to the Flood, nor al-
lows the Patriarchs age enough at the time when they are ſaid to
have got
Children. One hundred twenty ſeven years for Ten Ge
nerations is very ſtrait; and of theſe you muſt take off forty fix years
for one Generation only, or for Noah, for he liv'd ſix liundred ycus
before the Flood, and if they were Lunar, they would come how .
ever to forty ſix of our years ; fu that for the other Nine Genera .
tions you would have but eiglity one years, that is, nine years a-piece ;
1
iit
Chap.4. Concerning the Prim. Eartb,and Paradiſe. 149
ܪ
at wlich Age they muſt all be ſuppos'd to have begun to get Clil-
dren ; which you cannot but think a very abſurd ſuppoſition. Thus
it would be, if you divide t!:e whole time equally amongſt the Nine
Generations, but if you conſider ſonne ſingle inſtances, as they are ſet
down by Moſes, 'tis ſtill worfe ; for Mahaleel and his Grandchild
Enoch are ſaid to have got Children at lixty five years of Age, which
if you ſuppoſe months, they were but five years old at that time; now
I appeal to any one, Whether it is more incredible that men ſhould
live to the age of nine hundred years, or that they ſhould beget Chil-
dren at the age of five years.
You will ſay, it may be, 'tis true theſe inconveniences follow, if
our Hebrew Copies of the Old Teſtament be Authentick; but if the
Greek Tranſlation by the Septuagint be of better Authority, as ſome
would have it to be, that gives a little relief in this caſe; for the Sep-
tuagint inake the diſtance from the Creation to the Flood fix hun-
dred years more than the Hebrew Text does, and fo give us a little
inore room for our Ten Generations: And not only ſo, but they
have ſo conveniently diſpos'd thoſe additional years, as to falve the
other inconvenience too, of the Patriarchs having Children ſo young;
for what Patriarchs are found to have got Children fooner than
the reſt, and ſo foon, that upon a computation by Lun.ir years, they
would be but meer Children themſelves at that time, to theſe, more
years are added and plac'd opportunely, before the time of their
getting Children; ſo as one can ſcarce forbear to think that it was
done on purpoſe to cure that inconvenience, and to favour and
pro-
tect the computation by Lunar years. The thing looks fo like an
artifice, and as done to ſerve a turn, that one cannot but have a leſs
opinion of that Chronology for it.
But not to enter upon that diſpute at preſent, mechinks they have
not wrought the cure effatually enough ; for with theſe ſix inindred
Lunar years added, the ſumin will be only one hundred ſeventy
three common years and odd months ; and from theſe deducting,
as we did before, for Noah, forty fix years, and for Adam, or the
firſt Generation, abouí eighteen, ( for he was two hundred and
thirty years old, according to the Septuagint, when he begot Seth)
there will remain but one hundred and nine years for eight Gene-
rations, which will be thirteen years a-piece and odd months; a
low age to get children in, and to hold for eight Generations toge-
ther. Neither is the other inconvenience we mention'd, well curd
by the Septuagazt account, namely, the finall number of people that
would be in the World at the Deluge; for the Septuagint account,
if underſtood of Lum:r years, adds but forty lix common years to
the Hebreur account, and to the age of the World at the Deluge, in
wliich time there could be but a very ſmall acceſſion to the num-
ber of Mankind. So as both theſe incongruities continue, though
not in the fame degree, and ſtand good in either account, if it be
underſtood of Lunar yell's.
Thirdly, 'Tis manifeſt from other Texts of Scripture, and from
other conſiderations, that our firſt Fathers liv'd very long, and con-
ſiderably longer than men have done ſince; whereas if their years be
interpreted Lunar, there is not one of them that liv'd to the age
that
150 The Theory of the Earth. Book ll.
that Men do now; Methufaulah himſelf did not reach threeſcore and
fifteen years, upon that interpretation; Which doth depreſs them
not only below thoſe that liv'd next to the Flocd, but below all fol-
lowing Generations to this day; and thoſe firſt Ages of the World,
which were always celebrated for ſtrength and vivacity, are made as
weak and feeble as the laſt dregs of Nature. We may obſerve, that
after the Flood for ſome time, till the priſtine Crafts of the Body
was broken by the new courſe of Nature, they liv'd tive, four,
three, two hundied years, and the Life of Men ſhortn’d by degrees;
but before the Flood, when they liv'd longer, there was no ſuch
decreaſe or gradual declenſion in their lives. For Noah, who was
the laſt, liv'd longer than Adam; and Methufalah who was laſt but
two, liv’d the longeſt of all : So that it was not ſimply their di-
ſtance from the beginning of the World that made thein live a
ſhorter time, but foine change which happen'd in Nature after ſuch
a period of time ; namely at the Deluge, when the declenſion begun.
Let's ſet down the Table of both ſtates.
ܪ
A Table of the Ages of the Ante-
diluvian Fathers.
A Table of the Ages of the Poſt-
diluvi:in Finthers, from Shein to
Joſeph.
Years.
Coo
438
Adam
Seth
Erosa
Gainan
Mahaleel
Jared
Enoch
Methuſalah
Laniech
Noah
433
464
239
239
Years.
930 Shem
912 Arphuxad
905
Salah
-910 Eber
- 895 Peleg-
962 Reu
365 Serug
969 Nishor
777 Terah
950 Abraham
Ifaac
Jacob
Joſeph
20
148
205
175
1 80
147
ΙΙΟ
From theſe Tables we ſee that Mens Lives were much longer be-
fore the Flood, and next after it, than they are now; which alſo
is confirin'd undeniably by Jacob's complaint of the ſhortneſs of his
life, in compariſon of his Fore-fathers, when he had liv'd one hun-
dred and thirty years, Gen. 47.9. The days of the years of my pilgri-
mage are an hundred and thirty years; feir and evil have the days of the
years of my life been, and have not attained unto the days of the years of
the life of my Fathers. There was tlien, 'tis certain, long-liv'd men
in the World before Jacob's time; when were they, before the flood
or after ? We ſay both, according as the Tables Diew it? But if
you count by Lunar years, there never were any, either before or
after, and Jacob's complaint was un'uſt and falle'; for he was the
oldeſt Man in the World himſelf, or at leaſt there was none of his
Fore-fathers that liv'd ſo long as he.
TI:
Chap.4. Concerning the Prim. Earth, and Paradiſe. 151
The Patrons of this opinion muſt needs find themſelves at a loſs,
how or where to break off the account of Lunar years in Sacred
History, if they once admit it. If they ſay, that way of counting
muſt only be extended to the Flood, then they make the Poſt-
diluvian Fathers longer livd than the Ante-diluvian; did the Flood
bring in Longevity > how could that be the cauſe of ſuch an effect?
Beſides, if they allow the Poſt-diluvians to have liv'd ſix hundred
common ) years, that being clearly beyond the ſtandard of our
lives, I ſhould never ſtick at two or three liundred years more for
the firſt Ages of the World. If they extend their Lunay account
to the Post-diluvians too, they will itill be intangled in worſe ab:
ſurdities; for they inuſt make their lives miſerably Thort, and their
Age of getting Children altogether incongruous and impoſſible.
Nahor, for example, when he was but two ycars and three months
old muſt have begot Terah, Abrahini's Father:. And all the reſt be-
twixt him and Shem inuſt have had Children before they were three
years old: A pretty race of Pigmies. Then their lives were pro-
portionably ſhort, for this Nabor liv'd but eleven years and ſix
months at this rate; and his Grandchild Abrahani,who is ſaid to have
died in a good old age, and fill of years, (Gen. 25. 8.) was not four-
teen years old. What a ridiculous account this gives of Scripture-
Chronology and Genealogies? But you'll ſay, it may be, theſe Lunar
years are not to be carried ſo far as Abrah.i112 neither ; tell us then
where you'll ſtop, and why you ſtop in ſuch a place rather than
another. If you once take in Lunar years, what ground is there in
the Text, or in the Hiſtory, that you ſhould change your way of
computing, at ſuch a time, or in ſuch a place? Allour Ancient Chro-
nology is founded upon the Books of Mofes, where tlie terms and
periods of times are expreſt by years, and often by Genealogies, and
the Lives of Men ; now if theſe years are foinetiines to be interpre-
ted Lunar, and ſometimes Solar, without any diſtin tion made in the
Text, what light or certain rule have we to go by? let theſe Authors
name to us the parts and places where, and only where, the Lunar
years are to be underſtood, and I dare undertake to ſhow, that their
method is not only arbitrary, but abſurd and incoherent.
To conclude this Diſcourſe, we cannot but repeat what we have
partly obſerv'd before, How necellary it is to underſtand Nature,
if we would rightly underſtand thoſe things in holy Writ that re-
late to the Natural World. For without this knowledge, as we
are apt to think ſome things conſiſtent and credible that are really
impoſſible in Nature; ſo on the other hand, we are apt to look
other things as incredible and impoſſible that are really founded
in Nature. And ſeeing every one is willing ſo to expound Scrip-
ture, as it inay be to them good ſence, and conſiſtent with their
Notions in other things, they are forc'd many times to go againſt
the eaſie and natural importance of the words, and to invent other
interpretations more compliant with their principles, and, as they
think, with the nature of things. We have, I ſay, a great inſtance
of this before us in the Scripture-Hiſtory of the long lives of the
Ante-diluvians, where without any ground or shadow of ground
in the Narration, only to comply with a miſtaken Philoſophy,
and
152
The Theory of the Earth. Book ll.
!
and their ignorance of the Primitive World, many men would
beat down the Scripture account of years into months, and ſink the
lives of thoſe firſt Fathers lelow the rate of the worſt of Ages.
Whereby that great Monument, which Providence hath left us of
the first World, and of its difference from the Second, would not
only be defac'd, but wholly demoliſid. And all this ſprung only
froin the ſeeming incredibility of the thing ; for they cannot ſhow
in any part of Scripture, New or Old, that theſe Lunar years are
made uſe of, or that any computation, literal or Prophetical, pro-
ceeds upon them : Nor that there is any thing in the Text or Con-
text of that place, that argues or intimates any ſuch account. We
have endeavourd, upon this occaſion, efectually to prevent this
miſconſtruction of Sacred Hiſtory, for the future; both by Mhowing
the incongruities that follow upon it, and alſo that there is no ne
ceſſity from Nature of any ſuch Nift or evaſion, as that is : but ra-
ther on the contrary, that we have juſt and neceſſary reaſons to con-
clude, That as the forms of all things would be far more permanent
and laſting in that Primitive ſtate of the Heavens and the Earth; to
particularly the Lives of Men, and of other Animals.
E
1
CHAP. V.
Concerning the Waters of the Primitive Earth: What the
ſtate of the Regions of the Air was then, and how all
Waters proceeded from them ; how the Rivers aroſe, what
was their courſe, and how they ended. Some things in
Sacred Writ that confirm this Hydrography of the firſt
Earth; eſpecially the Origin of the Rainbow.
manner.
HA
Aving thus far cleard our way to Paradiſe, and given a ra-
tional account of its general properties ; before we proceed to
diſcourſe of the place of it, there is one affair of inoment, con-
cerning this Primitive Earth, that muſt firſt be ſtated and explain’d;
and that is, How it was water'd; from what cauſes, and in what
How could lountains riſe, or Rivers fow in an Earth of
that Form and Nature? We have ſhut up the Sea with thick walls
on every ſide, and taken away all communication that could be
'twixt it and the External Earth ; and we have remov'd all the
Hills and the Mountains where the Springs uſe to riſe, and whence
the Rivers deſcend to water the face of the ground: And laſtly, we
have left no iſſue for theſe Rivers, no Ocean to receive them, nor
any other place to disburthen themſelves into: So that our New-
found World is like to be a dry and barren Wilderneſs, and ſo far
from being Paradiſiacal, that it would ſcarce be habitable.
I conſeſs there was nothing in this whole Theory that gave ſuch
a ſtop to my thoughts, as this part of it, concerning the Rivets of
th:
Chap.5. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 153
the firſt Earth; how they riſe, how they flow'd, and how they
ended. It feeind at tirit, that we had wip'd away at once the No-
tion and whole Doctrine of Rivers, we had turn d the Earth ſo
ſmooth, that there was not an Hill or riſing for the head of a
Spring, nor any fall or deſcent for the courſe of a River: Belides,
I had ſuckt in the common opinion of Philoſophers, That ali Rivers
riſe from the ea, and return to it again ; and both thoſe pasſages,
I ſee, were ſtopt up in that Earth. This gave me occaſion to reflect
upon the modern and more ſolid opinion, concerning the Origin of
Fountains and Rivers, That they riſe chiefly from Rains and mel-
ted Snows, and not from the Sea alone; and as ſoon as I had de-
murd in that particular, I ſee it was neceſſary to conſider, and ex-
amine, how the Rains fell in that firſt Earth, to under itand what
the ſtate of their Waters and Rivers would be.
And I had no ſooner appli'd my ſelf to that Inquiry, but I eaſily
diſcover d, that the Order of Nature in the Regions of the Air,
would be then very diffurent from what it is now, and the Meteoro-
logy of that World was of another ſort froin that of the preſent.
The Air was always calin and equal, there could be no violent Me-
teors there, nor any that proceeded from extremity of Cold; as Ice,
Snow or Hail; nor Thunder neither ; for the Clouds could not be
of a quality and conſiſtency fit for ſuch an effect, either by falling
one upon another, or by their diſruption. And as for Winds, they
could not be either impetuous or irregular in that Earth ; ſeeing there
were neither Mountains nor any other inequalities to obſtruct the
courſe of the Vapours; nor any unequal Seaſons, or unequal action
of the Sun, nur any contrary and ſtrugling motions of the Air: Na-
ture was then a ſtranger to all thoſe diſorders. But as for watery
: Meteors, or thoſe that riſe from watery Vapours inore immediately,
as Dews, and Rains, there could not but be plenty of theſe, in ſome
part or other of that Eartlı ; for the action of the Sun in fülling Va-
pours, was very ſtrong and very conſtant, and the Earth was at firſt
moiſt and ſoft, and according as it grew more dry, the Rays of the
Sun would pierce inore deep into it, and reach at length the
great Abyſs which lay underneath, and was an unexhauſted ſtoreliouſe
of new Vapours
. But, 'tis true, the ſame lieat which extracted theſe
Vapours ſo copiouſly would alſo hinder them from condenſing into
Clouds or Rain, in the warmer parts of the Earth; and there being
no Mountains at that time, nor contrary Winds, nor any ſuch cauſes
to ſtop them or compreſs them, we muſt conſider which way they
would tend, and wliat their courſe would be, and whether they
would
any where ineet with cauſes capable to change or condenſe
thein; for upon this, 'tis manifeft, would depend the Meteors of that
Air, and the Waters of that Earth.
And as the heat (if the Sun was chiefly towards the midille
parts
of
the Earth, ſo the copious Vapours rais'd there were inoſt rarified and
agitated ; and being once in the open Air, their courſe would be that
way, where they found leaſt refiltance to their motion, and that
would certainly be towards the Polcs, and the colder liegions of the
Earth. For Eaſt and left they woull meet with as warm an Air,
and Vapours as much agitated as themſelves, which therefore would
X
>
not:
154
Book II.
The Theory of the Earth.
not yield to their progreſs that way; but towards the North and the
South, they would find a incre eaſie pallage, the Cold of thoſe parts
attracting thein, as we call it, that is, inaking way to their motion
and dilatation without much reſiſtance, as Mountains and Cold places
uſually draw Vapours froin the warmer. So as tlie regular and con-
itant courſe of the Vapours of that Earth, which were rais d chiefly
about the Æquinoctial and iniddle parts of it, would be towards
the extreain parts of it, or towards the Poles.
And in conſequence of this, when theſe Vapours were arriv’d in
thoſe cooler Climats, and cooler parts of the Air, they would be
condens'd into Rain; for wanting there the cauſe of their agita-
tion, namely, the heat of the Sun, their motion would ſoon begin
to languiſh, and they would fall cloſer to one another in the form
of Water. For the difference betwixt Vapours and Water is only
gradual, and conſiſts in this, that Vapours are in a Aying motion,
ſeparate and diſtant each froin another ; but the parts of Water
are in a creeping motion, cloſe to one another; like a ſwarm of
Bees, when they are ſetled; as Vapours reſemble the ſame Bies in
the Air before they ſettle together. Now there is nothing puts
theſe Vapours upon the wing, or keeps them fo, but a ſtrong agi-
tation by Heat ; and when that fails, as it muſt do in all colder places
and Regions, they neceſſarily return to Water again. Accordingly
therefore we muſt ſuppoſe they would ſoon, after they rçacht theſe
cold Regions, be condens'd, and fall down in a continual Rain or
Dew upon thoſe parts of the Earth. I ſay a continual Rain; for fee-
ing the action of the Sun, which rais’d the Vapours, was ( at that
time ) always the ſame, and the ſtate of the Air always alike, nor
any croſs Winds, nor any thing elſe that could hinder the courſe
of the Vapours towards the Poles, nor their condenſation when ar-
riv'd there; 'tis manifeſt there would be a conſtant Source or ſtore-
houſe of Waters in thoſe parts of the Air, and in thoſe parts
of
the Earth.
And this, I think, was the eſtabliſht order of Nature in that
World, this was the ſtate of the Ante-diluvian Heavens and Earth;
all their Waters came from above, and that with a conſtant ſupply
and circulation ; for when the croud of Vapours, rais'd about the
middle parts of the Earth, found vent and iſſue this way towards
the Poles, the paſſage being once open'd, and the Chanel inade, the
Current would be ſtill continued without intermiſſion, and as they
were diſſolv’d and ſpent there, they would ſuck in more and more
of thoſe which followed, and came in freſh ſtreains from the hot-
ter Climates. Ariſtotle, I remember, in his Metcors, ſpeaking of
the courſe of the Vapours, faith, there is a River in the 'Air, con
ſtantly Aowing betwixt the Heavens and the Earth, made by the
aſcending and deſcending Vapours; This was more remarkably
true in the Primitive Earth, where the ſtate of Nature was
more conſtant and regular ; there was indeed an uninterrupted
flood of Vapours riſing in one Region of the Earth, and flowing to
another, and there continually diftilling in Dews and Rain, which
made this Aereal River. As may be caſily apprehended from this
Scheme of the Earth and Air.
Thus
1
Chap.5. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 155
!:,
1
st
Book, 24
fig: 1.
P: 155
#
X,
Birthing
K
CA
W
Thus we have found a Source for Waters in the firſt Earth,
which had no communication with the Sea ; and a Source that
would never fail, neither diminiſh or overflow, but feed the Earth
with an equal ſupply throughout all the parts of the year. But
there is a ſecond difficulty that appears at the end of this, Hom theſe
Waters would flow upon the even ſurface of the Earth, or form
themſelves into Rivers ; there being no deſcent or declivity for their
courſe. There were no Hills, nor Mountains, nor high Lands in
the firſt Earth, and if theſe Rains fell in the frigid Zones, or towards
the Poles, there they would ſtand, in Lakes and Pools, having no
deſcent one way more than another ; and ſo the reſt of the Earth
would be no better for them. This, I confeſs, appear'd as great
a difficulty as the former, and would be unanſwerable, for ought
I know, if that firſt Earth was not water'd by Dews only (as I be-
lieve ſome Worlds are ) or had been exactly Spherical ; but we
noted before, that it was Oval or Oblong; and in ſuch a Figure,
'tis manifeſt, the Polar parts are higher than the Æquinoctial, that
is, more remote from the Center, as appears to the eye in this
X2
Scheme
1
1
156 The Theory of the Early Boox!).
Scheme. This affords us a preſent remedy, and ſets us free of the
ſecond difficulty ; for by this means the Waters which fell about
the extreme parts of the Earth, would have a continual deſcent to-
wards the middle parts of it; this Figure gives them motion and
diſtribution, and many Rivers and Rivulets would flow from thoſe
Mother-Lakes to refreſh the face of the Earth, bending their courſe
Itill towards the middle parts of it.
Booke 2d
fig. 27
P.156.
}
'Tis'true, Theſe derivations of the Waters at firſt would be very
irregular and diffuſe, till the Chanels were a little worn and hol
lowed; and though that Earth was ſmooth and uniform, yet 'tis
impoſſible, upon an inclining ſurface, but that Waters ſhould find
a way of creeping downwards, as we ſee upon a ſmooth Table,
or a flagg'd Pavement, if there be the leaſt inclination, Water will
How from the higher to the lower parts of it, either directly, or
winding to and fro: So the ſmoothneſs of that Earth would be
no hindrance to the courſe of the Rivers, provided there was a ge.
neral declivity in the ſite and libration of it, as ’tis plain there was
from the Poles towards the Æquator. The Current indeed would
be eaſie and gentle all along, and if it chanc'd in ſome places to
reſt
1
Chap.5. Concerning the Prim. Sarth and Paradiſe. 157
up by
reft or be ſtopt, it would ſpread it ſelf into a pleaſant i Lake, till by
frelh fupplies it had rais'd its Waters ſo high, as to overflow and
break looſe again ; then it would purſue its way, with many other
Rivers its companions, through all the temperate Climates, as far
as the Torrid Zone.
But you'll ſay, When they were got thither, what would be-
come of them then Hom would thcy end or finiſh their courſe?
This is the third difficulty,concerning the ending of the Rivers in that
Earth ; what iſſue could they have when they were come to the
middle parts of it, whether it ſeems, they all tended. There was
no Sea to loſe themſelves in, as our Rivers do ; nor any Subterra-
neous paſſages to throw themſelves into; how would they die, what
would be their fate at laſt? I anſwer, The greater Rivers, when
they were come towards thoſe parts of the Earth, would be divided
into many branches, or a multitude of Rivulets; and thoſe would
be partly exhald by the heat of the Sun, and partly drunk
the dry and ſandy Earth. But how and in what manner this came
to paſs, requires a little further Explication.
We muſt therefore obſerve in the firſt place, that thoſe Rivers as
they drew nearer to the Æquinoctial parts, would find a leſs decli-
vity or deſcent of ground than in the beginning of former part
of
their courſe; that is evident from the Oval Figure of the Earth,
for near the middle parts of an Oval, the Semidiameters, as I
may
call them, are very little ſhorter one than another; and for this
reaſon the Rivers, when they were advanc'd towards the middle parts
of the Earth,would begin to Auw more ſlowly, and by that weakneſs of
their Current, ſuffer themſelves eaſily to be divided and diſtracted
into ſeveral leſſer ſtreams and Rivulets ; or elſe, having no force to
wear a Chanel, would lie ſhallow upon the ground like a plaih of Wa.
ter; and in both caſes their Waters would be much more expos'd to
the action of the Sun, than if they lrad kept together in a deeper
Chanel, as they were before.
Secondly, We muſt obſerve, that ſeeing theſe Waters could not
reach to the middle of the Torrid Zone, for want of deſcent; that
part of the Earth having the Sun always perpendicular over it, and
being refreſht by no Rivers, would become extremely dry anıl parch’d,
and be converted at lengt! into a kind of fandy Deſart; ſo as all the
Waters that were carried thus far, and were not exhald and con-
ſum'd by the Sun, would be fuckt up, as in a Spunge, by theſe
Sands of the Torrid Zone. This was the common Grave wherein
the Rivers of the firſt Earth were buried; and this is nothing but
what happens still in ſeveral parts of the preſent Earth, eſpecially in
Africk, where many Rivers never How into the Sea, but expire after
the ſame inanner as theſe did, drunk up by the Sun and the Sands.
And one arin of Euphrates dies, as I reineinber, amongſt the Sands
of Arabia, after the manner of the Rivers of the firſt Earth.
Thus we liave conquer'd the greateſt difficulty, in my apprehen-
fion, in this whole Theory, To find out the ſtate of the Rivers in the
Priinitive and Ante diluvian Earth, their origin, courſe, and period.
We have been forc'd to wir: our ground by Inches, and have divided
the difficulty into parts, tliạt we might encounter them ſingle with
illore
158
Book ll.
The Theory of the Earth
more eaſe. The Rivers of that Earth, you fee, were in moſt reſpects
different, and in ſome contrary to ours; and if you could turn our
Rivers backwards, to run from the Sea towards their Fountain-heads,
they would inore reſemble the courſe of thoſe Ante-diluvian Rivers;
for they were greateſt at their firſt ſetting out, and the Current after-
wards, when it was more weak, and the Chanel more ihallow,
was divided into many branches, and little Rivers ; like the Arteries
in our Body, that carry the Blood, they are greateſt at firſt, and the
further they go from the Heart, their Source, the leſs they grow and
divide into a multitude of little branches, which loſe themſelves in-
ſenſibly in the habit of the fleſh, as theſe little Floods did in the
Sards of the Earth.
Book. 22
fig. 3.
p.150.
;
7
سرکل
21:51
Becauſe it pleaſeth more, and makes a greater impreſſion upon us,
to ſee things repreſented to the Eye, than to read their deſcription in
words, we have ventur'd to give a model of the Primæval Earth,
with its Zones or greater Climates, and the general order and tracts
of its Rivers: Not that we believe things to have been in the very
ſame form as here exhibited, but this may ſerve as a general Idea of
that Earth, which may be wrought into more exactneſs, according as
we are able to enlarge or correct our thoughts hereafter. And as the
Zones
Chap.5. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 159
Zones here repreſented reſemble the Belts or Fafciæ of Jupiter, ſo
we ſuppoſe them to proceed froin like cauſes, if that Planet be in an
Ante diluvian ſtare, as the Earth we here repreſent. As for the Polar
parts in that firſt Earth, I can ſay very little of them, they would make
à Scene by themſelves, and a very particular one; The Sun would be
perpetually in their Horizon, which makes me think the Rains would
not fall ſo much there as in the other parts of the Frizid Zones,
where accordingly we have made chcir chief ſeat and receptacle. That
they flow'd from thence in ſuch a like manner as is lerc repreſented,
we have already prov'd; And ſometimes in their pallage fuelling into
Lakes, and towards the end of their courſe parting into ſeveral
ſtreams and branches, they would water thoſe parts of the Earth like
a Garden.
We have before compar'd the branchings of theſe Rivers towards
the end of their courſe to the ramifications of the Arteries in the Body,
when they are far from the Heart near the extream parts; and ſome,
it may be, looking upon this Scheme, would carry the compariſon
further, and ſuppoſe, that as in the Body tle Cloud is not loſt in the
habit of the feil, but ſtrain'd thorough it, and taken up again by
the little branches of the Veins; ſo in that Earth the Waters were
not loſt in thoſe Sands of the Torrid Zone, but ſtrain d or percola-
ted thorough them, and receiv'd into the Chanels of the other Heini-
ſphere. This indeed would in ſome meaſure anſwer the Notion
which ſeveral of the Ancient Fathers make uſe of, that the Rivers of
Paradiſe were trajected out of the other Hemiſphere into this, by Sub-
terraneous patlages. But, I confeſs, I could never ſee it poſſible,
how ſuch a trajection could be made, nor how they could have any
motion, being arriv'd in another Hemiſphere; and therefore I ain
apt to believe, that doctrine amongſt the Ancients aroſe from an in-
tanglement in their principles ; They ſuppos'd generally, that Para-
dife was in the other Hemiſphere, as we all have occaſion to ſhow
hereafter; and yet they believ'd that Tigris, Euphrates, Nile, and
Ganges were the Rivers of Paradiſe, or came out of it; and theſe two
opinions they could not reconcile, or make out, but by ſuppoſing
that theſe four Rivers had their Fountain-heads in the other Heini-
ſphere, and by ſome wonderful trajection broke out ilgain here. This
was the expedient they found out to make their opinions conſiſtent
one with anotlier; but this is a method to ine altogether' uncon-
ceivable ; and, for iny part, I do not love to be led out of my depth,
leaning only upon Antiquity. How there could be any ſuch com-
inunication, either above ground, or under ground, betwixt the two
Heiniſpheres, does not appear, and therefore we muſt ſtill fuppoſe
the Torrid Zone to have been the Barrier betwixt them, which nothing
could paſs either way.
We have now examind and determin’d the ſtate of the Air, and
of the Waters in the Primitive Earth, by the light and conſequences
of reaſon ; and we muſt not wonder to find them different from the
preſent order of Nature; what things are ſaid of them, or relating
to them in Holy Writ, do teftific or imply as much; and it will be
worth our time to make ſome reflection upon thoſe paſſages for our
further confirmation. Mofes tells us, that the Ruinbour was fet in the
Clouds
160
Bookll.
The Theory of the Earth.
2 Epift.
Cap. 3. 5.
Clouds after the Deluge; thoſe Heavens then that never had a Rain-bow
before,were certainly of a conſtitution very different from ours. And
S. Peter doth formally and exprefly tell us, that the Old Havens, or
the Ante diluvian Heavcus had a different conftitution from ours,
and particularly, that they were compus'd or conſtitutod of Water;
which Philoſophy of the Apoſtle's may be ealily underſtood, if we
attend to two things, first, tluat thc Licaveus he ſpeaks of, were not.
the Starry Heavens, but the Aereal Heavens, or the Regions of our
Air, where the Meteors are; Secondly, That there were no Meteors
in thoſe Regions, or in thoſe Heavens, till the Deluge, but watery
Meteors, and therefore, he ſays, they conliſted of Water. And this
ſhows the foundation upon which that deſcription is made, how (0-
herently the Apoſtle argues, and anſwers the objection there propes'd:
how juſtly alſo he diſtinguiſheth the firſt Heavens from the preſent
Heavens, or rather oppoleth them one to another; becauſe as thote
were conſtituted of Water and watery Meteors only, ſo the preſent
H-avens, he faith, have treaſures of Fire, fiery Exhalations and Me-
teors, and a diſpolition to become the Executioners of the Divine
wrathi and decrees in the final Conflagration of the Earth.
This minds me alſo of the Celeſtial Waters, or the Waters above
the Firmaments, which Scripture ſometimes inentions, ard which,
merlinks, cannot be explain'd ſo bitly and emphatically upon any
fuppoſition as this of ouis. Thoſe wlio place them above the Starry
H-avens, feem neitlier to underſarid Aſtronomy nor Philoſophy ;
and, on the other hand, if nothing be underſtood by them, but the
Clouds and the middle Region of the Air, as it is at preſent, me-
thinks that was no ſuch eminent and remarkable thing, as to deſerve
a particular commemoration by Mifes in his ſix days work; but if
we underſtand them, not as they are now, but as they were then,
the only Source of Waters, or the only Source of Waters lipon that
Earth, ( for they had not one drop of Water but what was Celeltial,)
this gives it a new force and Emphaſis: Pelides, the wliole middle
Region having 110 other ſort of Meteors but them, That made it ſtiil
the greater ſingularity, and inore worthy commemoration. As for
the Rivers of Paradiſe, there is nothing ſaid concerning their Source,
or their iſſue, that is either contrary to this, or that is not agreeable
to the general account we have given of the Waters, and Rivers
of the firſt Earth. They are not ſaid to riſe from any Mountain, but
from a great River, or a kind of Lake in Eden, according to the cuſtom
of the Rivers of that Earth: And as for their end and iſſue, Moſes
doth not ſay, that they disburthen'd themſelves into this or that Sea,
as they uſually do in the deſcription of great Rivers, but rather im-
plies that they ſpent themſelves in compaſſing and watering certain
Countries, which falls in again very eaſily with our Hypotheſis. But
I ſay this ratlier to comply with the opinions of others.than of my orn
judgment. For I think that ſuggeſtion about the Supercceleſtial
Waters made by Mofes, was not ſo inuch according to the ſtrict na-
ture and ſpeciality of Cauſes, as for the caſe and profit of the People,
in their belief and acknowledgment of Providunce for fo great a be.
nefit, by what Cauſes foever it was brought to paſs.
Bus
Chap.5. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 161
But to return to the Rainbow, which we inention'd before, and
is not to be paſt over ļo flightly. This we ſay, is a Creature of the
modern World, and was not ſeen nor known before the Flood.
B1ofer ( Gen. 9. 12, 13.) plainly intimates as much, or rather direct-
ly affirms it; for he ſays, The Bow was ſet in the Clouds after the
Deluge, as a confirmation of the promiſe or Covenant which God
made with Noah, that he would drown the World no more with
Water. And how could it be a ſign of this, or given as a pledge
and confirmation of ſuch a promiſe, if it was in the Clouds before,
and with no regard to this promiſe? and ſtood there, it may be,
when the World was going to be drown'd. This would havė been
but cold comfort to Noah,to have had ſuch a pledge of the Divine Ve-
racity. You'll day, it may be, that it was not a lign or pledge that
ſignified naturally, but voluntarily only, and by Divine Inſtitution;
I am or opinion, I confeſs, that it ſignifi'd naturally, and by con-
nexion with the effect, importing thus much, that the ſtate of Na-
ture was chang'd from what it was before, and ſo chang'd, that
the Earth was no more in a condition to periſh by Water. But
however, let us grant that it ſignified only by inſtitution; to make
it ſignificant in this ſence, it muſt be ſomething new, otherwiſe it
could not ſignifie any new thing, or be the confirination of a new
promiſe. If God Almighty had ſaid to Noah, I inake a promiſe to
you, and to all living Creatures, that the World Thall never be de-
ſtroy'd by Water again, and for confirmation of this, Behold, I let
the Sun in the firmament: Would this have been any ſtrengthning of
Noah's faith, or any ſatisfaction to his mind? Why, ſays No.h;
the Sun was in the Firinainent when the Deluge came, and was a
ſpectator of that fad Tragedy; why may it not be ſo again: what
lign or aſſurance is this againſt a ſecond Deluge? when God gives a
ſign in the Heavens, or on the Earth, of any Prophecy or Promiſe
to be fulfill’d, it inuſt be by ſomething new, or by ſome change
wrought in Nature; whereby God doth teſtifie to us, that he is able
and willing to ſtand to liis promiſe. God ſays to Ahaz, Ask a ſign of the lad. 7.
Lord; Ask it either in the depth, or in the height above : And when
Ahaz would ask no lign, God gives one unaskt, Behold, it l'irgin
Shall conceive and bear a Son. So when Zachary was promis'd a Son,
he asketh for a ſign, Whereby Mill I know this? for I am old, and in
Lukes.
llife well dricken in years; and the ſign given him was, that he be-
came dumb, and continued fo till the promiſe was fulfilld. Accord-
ingly, when Abraham :iskt a ſign whereby he might be aſſur'd of
God's promiſe that his ſeed Thou'd inherit the Land of Caruin, Gen.
15.8. 'Tis ſaid (ver. 17.) II ben the Sun urent down and it was d.crk,
bebold a ſmoaking furn.ice and a burning Lamp paſſed betwixt the pieces
of the beaſts that he had cut aſunder. So in other inſtances of ſigns
given in external Nature, as the ſign given to King Hezekiah for his iji. 38.
recovery, and to Gideon for his victory; to confirm the promiſe
inade to Hezekiah, the ſhadow went back ten degrees in Ahiz Dial : Fudg. 7.
And for Gideon, his Fleece u:15 iret, and all the ground about it dry;
and then to change the trial, it was dry, and all the ground izbout it
met. Theſe were all ſigns very proper, fignificant, and ſatisfactory,
having ſomething ſurpriſing and extraordinary, yet theſe were ligns
Y
by
162
Воок ІІ.
The Theory of the Earth.
by inſtitution only, and to be ſuch they muſt have ſomething new
and ſtrange, as a mark of the hand of God, otherwiſe they can
have no force or ſignificancy. Accordingly we ſee Mofis himſelf in
another place ſpeaks this very ſence, when in the Mutiny or Rebel-
lion of Corah and D.uthan, he ſpeaks thus to the People, If these mere
die the common death of men, then the Lord hath not fent me. Pilt if the
Lurd make a new thing, and the Earth open her mouth and ſwallor them
11p, &c. then you ſhall underſtand that theſe men have provoked the Lord,
Num.26.29, 39. So in the caſe of Noah, if God created a new crea-
ture (which are Moſes's words in the forecited place ) the ſign was
effe&tual: But where every thing continues to be as it was before,
and the face of Nature, in all its parts, the very ſame, it cannot
ſignifie any thing new, nor any new intention in the Author of Na-
ture; and conſequently, cannot be a ſign or pledge, a token or af-
ſurance of the accompliſhment of any new Covenant or promiſe
made by him.
This, methinks, is plain to common Senſe, and to every Man's
Reaſon's but becauſe it is a thing of importance, to prove that there
was no Rainbow before the Flood, and will confirin a conliderable
part of this Theory, by diſcovering what the ſtate of the Air was
in the Old World, give me leave to argue it a little further, and to
remove ſome prejudices that may keep others from afſenting to
clear Reaſon. I know 'tis uſually ſaid, that ſigns, like words, fig.
nifie any thing by inſtitution, or may be appli'd to any thing by
the will of the Impofer; as hanging out a white Flag is calling for
mercy, a Buſh at the door, a ſign of Wine to be ſold, and ſuch
like. But theſe are inſtances nothing to our purpoſe, theſe are ſigns
of ſomething preſent, and that ſignifie only by uſe and repeated ex-
perience; we are ſpeaking of ligns of another nature, given in con-
firmation of a promiſe, or threatning, or prophecy, and given with
deſign to cure our unbelief, or to excite and beget in us Faith in God,
in the Prophet, or in the Promiſer, ſuch ſigns, I ſay, when they are
wrought in external Nature, muſt be ſome new Appearance, and muſt
thereby induce us to believe the effect,cr more to believe it, than ifthere
had been no ſign, but only the affirmation of the Promiſer ; for other-
wiſe the pretended ſign is a meer Cypher and ſuperfuity. But a
thing that obtain'd before, and in the ſame manner (even when that
came to paſs, which we are now promis'd ſhall not come to paſs
again ) ſignifies no more, than if there had been no ſign at all: it
can neither ſignifie another courſe in Nature, nor another purpoſe
in God; and therefore is perfectly inſignificant. Some inſtance in
the Sacraments, Jewiſh or Chriſtian, and make thein figns in ſuch a
fence as the Rainbow is: But thoſe are rather Symbolical repre-
ſentations or commemorations; and ſome of them, iparks of di-
ſtinction and conſecration of our felves to God in ſuch a Religion ;
They were alſo new, and very particular when firſt inſtituted; bur
all ſuch inſtances fall ſliort and do not reach the caſe before us ;
we are ſpeaking of ſigns confirmatory of a promiſe ; when there is
ſomething affirm'd de futuro, and to give us a further argument of
the certainty of it, and of the power and veracity of the Promiſir,
a ſign is given: This we ſay, mult indiſpenſably be ſomething new,
othicrivile
Chap.5. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 163
O
1
otherwiſe. it cannot have the nature, vertue; and influence of a
ſign.
We have ſeen how incongruous it would be to admit that the
Rainbow appeard before the Deluge, and how dead, a figia that
would inake it, how forgd, fruitleſs and ineffectual, as tq.tlre promiſe
it was to confirm ; Let us row on the other hand fuppofe, that it
firſt appeard to the Inhabitants of the Earth after the Deluge,
How propei, and how appolite a ſign would this be for. Provi-
dence to pitch upon, to confirm the Promiſe inade to Noah and his
poſterity, That the World: ilould be no more deſtroy:d by Water?
It had a ſecret connexion with tlie effect it ſelf, and was ſo far a
natural ſign ; but however appearing firſt after the Deluge, ard in
a watery Cloud, there was, méthunks, a great eaſineſs, and pro
priety of application for ſuch a purpoſe. And if we ſuppoſe, that
while God Almighty was declaring his promiſe to Noah, and the
lign of its there aţipear'd at the fame time in the Clouds á fair
Rainbow, that marvellous and beautiful Meteor, which Noah had
never ſeen before ; it could not but make a inoſt lively impreſſioni
upon him, quickning his Faith, and giving him comfort and aſſu-
rance, that God would be ſtedfaſt to his promiſe.
Nor ought we to 'ivorider, that lider pieters have commonly
gone the other way, and ſuppos'd that the Rainbow was before the
Flood; This, I fay's was no wonder in them, for they had no Hy-
potheſis that could anſive to any other interpretation. And in the
interpretation of the Texts of Scripture that concern natural things,
they cominonly bring them down to their own Philoſophy and
Notions: As we have a great inſtance in that diſcourſe of S. Peter 5 2 Epift.c. 3. 5.
concerning the Deluge, and the Ante-diluvian Heavens, and Earthi,
which, for want of a Theory, they have been ſcarce able to make
fence of; for they have forc'dly appli'd to the preſent Earth, or the
preſent form of the Earth, wliat plainly reſpected another. A like
inſtance we have in the M Jirical Abyſs, or Tehon-Rabba, by whoſe
diſruption the Teluge was inade; this they knew not well what to
make of, and ſo have generally interpreted it of the Sea, or of our
Subterráneous Waters' ; without any propriety, either as to the
word, or as to the fence. A third inſtance is this of the Rainbow,
where their Philoſophy hath miſguided them again ; for to give
them their due, they do not alledge, nor pretend to alledge, any
thing from the Text, that ſhould make them interpret thus, or
think the Rainbow was before the Flood; but they pretend to go
hy certain reaſons, as that the Clouds were before the Flood, there-
fore the Rainbow ; and if the Rainbow was not before the Flood,
then all things were not made within the ſix days Creation: To
whom theſe reaſons are convictive, they muſt be led into the ſame
belief with them, but not by any thing in the Text, nor in the
true Theory, at lcatif ours be ſo; for by that you ſee that the
Vapours were never condens'd into drops, nor into Rain in the
temperate and inhabited Climates of that Earth, and conſequently
there could never be the production or appearance of this Bow ir
the Clouds. Thus much concerning the Rainbow.
Ý
To
164 The Theory of the Earth.
Book II.
s To 'recolleet our ſelves, and conclude this Chapter, and the whole
diſquiſition concerning the Waters of the Primitive Earth; we feem
to havë fo well ſatisfied the difficulties propos'd in the beginning of
the Chapter, that they have rather given us an advantagt; a better
diſcovery, and ſuch a new proſpect of that Earth, as inakes it
tot only habitable, but more fit to be Paradiſi.ıcal. The pleaſant-
neſs of the ſite of Paradiſe is made to conſiſt chiefly in two things, its
Waters, and its Trees, (Gen. 2. and Chap. 13. 10. Ezek. 31.8.) and
èohlidering the richneſs of that firſt ſoil in the Primitive Eartli; it
could not but abound in Trees, as it did in Rivers and Rivulets;
and be wooded like a Grove, as it was water'd like a Garden, in the
temperate Climates of it; fo as it would not be, methinks, ſo diffi-
cult to find one Paradiſe there, as not to find more than one.
i
CH A P. V I.
A Recolle&tion and Review of what hath been ſaid concern-
ing the Primitive Earth; with a more full Survey of
the State of the firſt World, Natural and Civil, and the
compariſon of it with the preſent World.
E. liave now, in a good meaſure, finiſh'd our deſcription of
the firſt and Ante-diluvian Earth; And as Travellers, when
they ſee ſtrange Countries, make it part of their pleaſure and im-
provement, to compare them with their own, to obſerve the diffe-
rences, and wherein they excel, or come ſhort of one another : So
it will not be unpleaſant, nor unuſeful, it may be, having inade a dif-
covery, not of a new Countrey, but of a new World, and travellid
it over in our thoughts and fancy, now to ſit down and compare
it with our own: and 'twill be no hard task, froin the general dif-
ferences which we have taken notice of already, to obſerve what
leſſer would ariſe, and what the wliole face of Nature would be.
'Tis alſo one fruit of travelling, that by ſeeing variety of places
and people, of humours, faſhions, and forms of living, it frees is,
by degrees, from that pedantry and littleneſs of Spirit, whereby we
are apt to cenſure everything for abſurd and ridiculous, that is
not according to our own way, and the mode of our own Country:
But if inſtead of croſſing the Seas, we could waft our ſelves over to
our neighbouring Planets, we ſhould ineet with ſuch varieties
there, both in Nature and Mankind, as would very much enlarge
our thoughts and Souls, and help to cure thoſe diſeaſes of little minds,
that make thein troubleſome to others, as well as uneaſie to them
falvés.
But ſeeing our heavy Bodies are not made for ſuch Voyages, tho
beſt and greateſt thing we can do in this kind, is to make a Survey
and reflection upon the Ante diluvian Earth,which in fome lence wa .
20theu
Chap.6. Concerning the Prim.Exrth and Paradiſe. 165
another World from this, and it may be, as different as ſome two
Planets are from one another. We have declar'd already the general
grounds upon which we inuſt proceed, and muſt now trace the con-
lequences of thein, and drive them down into particulars, which
will thew us in moſt things, wherein triat Earth, or that World,
differ'd from the preſent. The form of that Earth, and its ſituation
to the Sun, were two of its moſt fundamental differences from ours
As to the form of it, 'twas 'all one ſirootli Continellt, one continued
ſurface of Earth, without any Sea, any Mountains, or Rocks ; any
Holes, Dens or Caverns: 'And the ſituation of it to the Sun was
ſuch as made a perpetual Æquinox. Theſe two joyn’d togetlier, lay
the foundation of a new Aſtronomy, Meteorology, Hydrograplıy and
Geography: ſuch as were proper and peculiar to that World. The
Earth by this itieans having its Axis parallel to the Axis of tlie Eclip-
tick, the Heavens would appear in another poſture: and their diurnal
inotion, which is imputed to the Primum Mobile, and ſuppos'd to be
upon the Poles of the Æquator, would then be upon the fame Polės
with the ſecond and Periodical inotions of tlie Orbs and Planets,
nainely, upon the Poles of the Ecliptick ; by which means the Phe-
pomena of the Heavens would be more ſimple and regular, and inuchi
of that intangledneſs and perplexity, which we find now in Aſtrono-
my, would be taken away. Wliether the Sun and Moon would ſuf-
fer any Eclipſes then, cannot well be determin’d, unleſs one knew
what the courſe of the Moon was at that time, or wliether ſhe was
then come into our neighbourhood: Her preſerice ſeeins to have
been leſs needful when there were no long Winter-niglits; nor the
great Pool of the Sea to move or govern.
As for the Regions of the Air and the Meteors, we have in the
preceding Chapter ſet down what the ſtate of them would be, and
in how much a better oriler, and more peaceable, that Kingdom was;
till the Earth was broken and diſplac'd, and the courſe of Nature
chang'd: Nothing violent, nothing frightful, 11othing troubleſoine or
incommodious to Mankind, came from above, but the countenance of
the Heavens was always finooth and ſerene. I have often thought it
a very deſirable piece of power, if a Man could but command a fair
day, when he had occaſion for it, for hiinſelf, or for liis friends; 'tis
inore than the greateſt Prince or Poteritate upon Earth can do; yet
they never wanted one in that World, rior ever ſee a foul one. Be-
ſides, they had conſtant breezes from the motion of the Eartli, and
the courſe of the Vapours, which cool'dl the open.Plains, and niade the
weather temperate, as well as fair. But we have ſpoken enough iii
Other places upon tliis fubject of tlie Air and the Heavėnis, Let us
now deſcend to the Earth.
The Earth was divided into two Hemiſpheres, ſeparated by the
Torrid Zone, which at that time was uninhabitable, and utterly uil-
paſſable; ſo as the two Hemiſpheres inade two diſtinct Worlds,
which, ſo far as we can judge, had no manner of cofimerce or com-
inunication ore with another. The Southern Hemiſphere the An-
cients call'd Antichthon, the Oppoſite Earth, or the Other World. And
this name and notion remain'd long after the reaſon of it load ceaſt.
Juſt as the Torrid Zone was generally accounted uninhabitable by the
Ancients,
166
Book II.
The Theory of the Earth.
.
This inay
Ancients, even in their time, becauſe it really lud been ſo orice,
and the Tradition remain'd uncorrected, wlien the cauſes were taken
away; namely, when the Earth had chang'd its poſture to the Sun
after the Deluge.
be lookt upon as the firſt diviſion of that Hrimxval Earthi, ,
into two Hemiſpheres, naturally ſever'd and diſunited: But it was
alſo divided into five Zones, two Frigid, iwo Temperate, and the
Torrid betwist them. And this diſtinction of the Globe into tive
Zones, I think, did properly belong to that Original Earth, and Pri-
mitive Geography, and improperly, and by tranſlation only, tu thie
preſent. For all the Zones of our Earth are habitable, and their di-
ftinctions are in a manner but imaginary, not fixt by Nature ;, where-
as in that Earth where the Rivers fail'd, and the Regions became un-
inliabitable, by reaſon of drinels and heat, there begun tlie Torrid
Zone ; and where the Regions became uninhabitable by reaction of cold
and moiſture, there begun the Frigid Zone ; and theſe being deter-
min'd, they became bounds on either ſide to the Temperate. But all
this was alter'd when the poſture of the Earth was chiang'd; and
chang'd for that very purpoſe, as ſome of the Ancients have ſaid;
That the uninhabitable parts of the Earih might become - habitable. Yet
though there was ſo much of the firſt Earth uninhabitable, there re-
main'd as much to be inhabited as we have now; for tlie Sea, ſince
the breaking up of the Abyſs, latlı taken away half of the Earth fre-in
us, a great part whereof was to them goed Land. Beſides, We are
not to ſuppoſe, that the Torrid Zone was of that extent we inake it
now, twenty three degrees and inore on either ſide of the Æquator ;
theſe bounds are ſet only by the Tropicks, and the Tropicks by the
obliquity of the cuurſe of the Sun, or of tlie poſture of the Earth,
which was not in that World. Where the Rivers ſtopt, there the
Torrid Zone would begin, but the Sun was directly perpendicular to
no part of it but the middle.
How the Rivers flow'd in the firſt Earth we have before explain'd
fufficiently, and what parts the Rivers did not reach, were turn’d ini-
to Sands and Defarts by the heat of the Sun; for I cannot eaſily
imagine, that the Sandy Deſarts of the Earth were made ſo at first
,
immediately and from the beginning of the World; from what cauſes
ſhould that be, and to what purpoſe in that age? But in thoſe Tracts
of the Earth that were not refreiht with Rivers and moiſture, which
cement the parts, the ground would moulder and crumble into
little pieces, and thien thoſe pieces by the heat of the Sun were bak'd
into Stone. And this would come to paſs chiefly in the hot an:)
ſcorch'd Regions of the Earth, though it might happen ſometimes
where there was not that extremity of heat, if by any chance a place
wanted Rivers and Water to keep the Earth in due temper ; but
thoſe Sands would not be ſo early cr ancient as the other. As fer
greater looſe Stones, and rough Pebbles, there were none in that
Earth; Deucalion and Pyrrha when the Deluge was over, fouid
new made Stones to caſt behind their backs; the bones of their mo-
ther Earth, which then were broken in pieces, in that great ruine.
As for Plants and Trees, we cannot imagine but that they muſt
needs abound in the Priinitive Earth, ſeeing it was ſo well warcr.l.
and
A
Chap.6. Concerning the Prim.Earth and Paradiſe
. 167
and had a foil ſo fruitful ; A new.unlabour'd foil, repleniſht with
the Seeds of all Vegetables; and a warm Sun that would call upon
Nature early for her Firſt-fruits, to be offer'd up at the beginning
of her courſe. Natura had a wild luxuriancy at firſt, which hu-
mane induſtry by degrees gave forin and order to ; The Waters
flow'd with a conſtant and gentle Current, and were eaſily led
which way the Inhabitants had a mind, for their uſe, or for their
pleaſure; and ſhady Trees, which grow belt in moiſt and warm
Countries, grac'd the Banks of their Rivers or Canals. But that
which was the beauty and crown of all, was their perpetual Spring,
the fields always green, the Flowers always freſh, and the Trees
always cover'd with Leaves and Fruit : But we have occafionally
ſpoken of theſe things in ſeveral places, and inay do again hereat-
ter, and therefore need not inlarge upon them here.
As for Subterraneous things, Metals and Minerals, I believe they
had none in the firſt Earth; and the happier they; no Gold, nor
Silver, nor courſer Metals. The uſe of theſe is either imaginary,
or in ſuch works, as, by the conſtitution of their World, they
had little occaſion for. And Minerals are either for Medicine,
which they had no need of further than Herbs; or for Materials to
certain Arts, which were not then in uſe, or were ſupplid by
other ways. Theſe Subterrancous things, Metals and metallick Mi-
nerals, are Factitious, not Origihal bodies, corval with the Earth 3:
but are made in proceſs of time, after long preparations and con-
coctions, by the action of the Sun within the bowels of the Earthi
And if the Stamina or principles of them riſe froin the lower Re-
gions that lie under the Abyſs, as I am apt to think they do, it
doth not ſeem probable, that they could be drawn through fuch
a maſs of Waters, or that the heat of the Sun could on F ifudden
penetrate ſo deep, and be able to looſen them, and raiſe then into
the exteriour Earth. And as the firſt Age of the World tras call'd .
Golden, though it knew not what Gold was; ſo the following Ages
had their names from ſeveral Metals, which lay then aſleep in the
dark and deep womb of Nature, and ſee not the Suni till many
Years and Ages afterwards.
Having run through the ſeveral Regions of Nature, froin top to
botrom, from the Heavens to the lower parts of the Earth, and
made ſome obſervations upon their order in the Ante-diluvian
World; Let us now look upon Man and other living Creatures, that
make the Superiour and Animate part of Nature. We have ob-
ſerv'd, and ſufficiently ſpoken to that difference betwixt the Men
of the old World, and thoſe of the preſent, in point of Longevity,
and given the reaſons of it; but we muſt not imagine, tltat this
long life was peculiar to Man, all other Animals had their ſhare of
it, and were in their proportion longer-liv'd than they are now.
Nay, not only Animals, but alſo Vegetables, and the forins of all
living things were far more permanent ; The Trees of the Field and
of the Foreſt, in all probability, out-laſted the lives of Men ; and I
do not know but the firſt Groves of Piries and Cedars that grew out
of the Earth, or that were planted in the Garden of God, might be Ezek. 31.8.
ſtanding when the Deluge came, and ſee, from. firſt to laſt; the entire
courſe and period of a World.
Wc
.
1
168
Book II.
The Theory of the Earth.
. Cis, Dei lili.
IS.C. 9.
* Plin.l.7.6.2.
We might add here, with S. Auftin, another obſervation, both
concerning Men and other living Creatures in the firſt World, that
They were greater, as well as longer-liv'd, than they are at pre-
fent. This ſeems to be a very realonable conjecture, for the late
of every thing that hath life; is divided into the time of its growth,
its conliſtency, and its decay; and when the whole duration is
longer, every one of theſe parts, though not always in like
pro.
portions, will be longer. We muſt ſuppoſe then, that the growth
both in Men and other Animals laſted longer in that World thun
it doth now, and conſequently carried their Bodies both to a greater
height and bulk. And in like manner, their Trees would be botli
taller, and every way bigger than ours; neither were they in any
danger there to be blown down by Winds and Storms, or ſtruck
with Thunder, though they had been as high as the Ai yptial
Pyramids ; and whatſoever their height was, if they had Roots
and Trunks proportionable, and were freight and well pois’d,
they would ſtand firm, and with a greater majeſty. The Fouls of
Heaven making their Neſts in their Boughs, and under their ſhadow the
Beaſts of the Field bringing forth their Ycung. When things are fairly
poſſible in their cauſes, and poſſible in ſeveral degrees, higher or
lower, 'tis weakneſs of Spirit in us, to think there is nothing in
Nature, but in that one way, or in that one degree, that we are
us'd to.
And whoſoever believes thoſe accounts given us, both by
the Ancients * and Moderns, of the Indian Trees, will not think it
Strab.l. 17. ſtrange that thoſe of the firſt Earth, 1hould inuch exceed any that
|| Hort, M1 we now ſee in this world. That Allegorical deſcription of the
laber. vol. 3. glory of Aſſyria in Ezekiel Chap. 31. by alluſion to Trees, and par-
ticularly to the Trees of P.tradiſe, was chiefly for the greatneſs and
ſtatelineſs of them; and there is all fairneſs of reaſon to believe,
that in that firft Earth, both the Birds of the Air, and the Beaſts
of the Field, and the Trees and their Fruit, were all, in their ſeve
ral kinds more large and goodly than Nature produces any now.
So much in ſhort concerning the Natural World, Inaniinate or
Animata; We ſhould now take a proſpect of the Moral World
of that time, or of the Civil and Artificial World; what the Or-
der and Oeconomy of theſe was, what the manner of living, and
how the Scenes of humane life were different from Olir's at preſent.
The Ancients, eſpecially the Poets, in their deſcription of the Gol-
den Age, exhibit to us an Order of things, and a Forin of Life,
very remote from any thing we ſee in our days; but they are not to
be truſted in all particulars, many times they exaggerate matters
on purpoſe, that they may ſeem more ſtrange, or more great, and
by that means move and pleaſe us more. A Moral or Philofophick
Hiſtory of the World well writ, would certainly be a very uſeful
work, to obſerve and relate how the Scenes of Humane Life have
chang'd in ſeveral Ages, the modes and Forms of living, in what
fimplicity Men begun at firſt, and by what degrees they came out
of that way, by luxury, ambition, improvement, or changes in Na-
ture; then what new forms and modifications were ſuperadded by
the invention of Arts, what by Religion, what by Superſtition.
This would be a view of things more inſtructive, and more fatis-
factory'.
Chap.6. Concerning the Prim.Earth and Paradiſe. 169
factory, than to know what Kings Reign'd in ſuch an Age, and
what Battles were fought; which cominon Hiſtory teacheth, and
teacheth little inore. Such affairs are but the little under-plots in
the Tragi coinedy of the World; the main deſign is of another ra.
ture, and of far greater extent and conſequence. But to return to
the ſubject;
As the Animate World depends upon the Inanimate, ſo the Civil
World depends upon them both, and takes its meaſures from them :
Nature is the foundation Itill, and the affairs of Mankind are a fu-
perſtructure that will be always proportion'd to it. Therefore we
inuit look back upon the inodel or picture of their Natural World,
which we have drawn before, to inake our conjectures or judgment
of the Civil and Artificial that were to accoinpany it. We obſerv'd
from their perpetual Æquinox,' and the ſmoothneſs of the Earth,
that the Air would be always calm, and the Heavens fair, no cold
or violent Winds, Rains, or Storins, no extreinity of weather in
any kind, and therefore tliey would need little protection from the
injuries of the Air in that ſtate ; whereas now one great part of the
affairs of life, is to preſerve our felves from thoſe inconveniences;
by building and cloathing. How many Hands, and how many Trades
are imploy'd about theſe two things, which then were in a manner
needleſs, or at leaſt in ſuch plainneſs and ſimplicity, that every man
might be his own workman. Tents and Bowers would keep them
from all incommodities of the Air and weather, better than Stone-
walls, and ſtrong Roofs defend us now; and Men are apt to take
the eaſieſt ways of living, till neceſſity or vice put them upon
others
that are more laborious, and more artificial. We alſo obſerv'd and
prov'd, that they had no Sea in the Primitive and Ante-diluvian
World, which makes a vaſt dirtererice 'twixt us and them ; This
takes
up half of our Globe, and a good part of Mankind is buſied
with Sea-affairs and Navigation. They had little need of Merclian-
dizing then. Nature fuppli'd thein at home with all neceſſaries, whiclı
were few, and they were not ſo greedy of ſuperAuities as we are.
We may add to theſe wliat concern’d their Food and Diet; Anti-
quity doth generally ſuppoſe that Men were not Carnivorus in thoſe
Åges of the World, or did not feed upon Fleſh, but only upon
Fruit and Herbs. And this ſeems to be plainly confirm’d by Scripture;
for after the Deluge God Almighty gives Noah and his Poſterity a
Licence to eat Fleſh, (Gen. 9.2, 3. ) Every moving thing that liveth
Shall be meat for you. Whereas before in the new-made Earth God
had preſcribd them Herbs and Fruit for their Diet, Gen. 1.29. Be-
bold, I have given you every Herb be:aritig Seed, which is upon the face
of all the Earth; and every Tree, in the arhich is the Fruit of a Tree
yielding Seed to you it fill be for meat. And of this Natural Diet
they would be provided to their liands, without further preparation,
as the Birds and the Beaſts are.
Upon theſe general grounds we may infer and conclude, that the
Civil World.then, as well as the Natural, had a very different face
ind aſpect from what it hath now; for of theſe Heads, Food and
Cloathing, Building and Traffick, with that train of Arts, Trades
and Manufactures that attend them, the Civil Order of things is in a
7
great
1
170
Book ll.
The Theory of the Earth.
great meaſure conſtituted and compounded : Theſe make the buſi-
neſs of life, the ſeveral occupations of Men, the noiſe and hurry of
the World; Thele till our Cities, and our Fairs, and our Haveus and
Ports; yet all theſe fine things are but the effects of indigency and
neceſſitouſneſs, and were, for the moſt part, needleſs and unknown
in that firſt ſtate of Nature. The Ancients have told us the faine
things in effect, but telling us them without their grounds, which
they themſelves did not know, they lookt like Poetical ſtories, and
pleafant fictions, and with moſt Men paſt for no better. We have
ihewn them in another light, with their Reaſons and Cauſes, de
duc'd from the ſtate of the Natural World, which is the Baſis upon
which they ſtand; and this doth not only give them a juſt and full
credibility, but alſo lays a foundation for after-thoughts, and further
deductions, when they meet with minds diſpos'd to purſue Specula-
tions of this Nature.
As for Laws, Government, natural Religion, Military and Judi-
cial affairs, with all their Equipage, which make an higher order of
things in the Civil and Moral World, to calculate theſe
upon
the
grounds given, would be more difficult, and more uncertain ; nei-
ther do they at all belong to the preſent Theory. But from what
we have already obſerv’d, we may be able to make a better judg.
ment of thoſe Traditional accounts which the Ancients have left us
concerning theſe things, in the early Ages of the World, and the Pri-
mitive ſtate of Nature. No doubt in theſe, as in all other particu-
lars, there was a great eaſineſs and ſimplicity in compariſon of what
is now, we are in a inore pompous, forc'd, and artificial method,
which partly the change of Nature, and partly the Vices and Vani-
ties of Men have introduc'd and eſtabliſht. But theſe things, with
many more, ought to be the ſubject of a Philofophick Hiſtory of the
World, which we mention'd before.
This is a ſhort and general Scheme of the Primnæval World,
compar’d with the Modern ; yet theſe things did not equally run
through all the parts and Ages of it, there was a declenſion and de-
generacy, both Natural and Moral, by degrees, and eſpecially to-
wards the latter end; but the principal form of Nature remaining
til the Deluge and the diſſolution of that Heavens and Earth, till
then alſo this Civil frame of things would ſtand in a great meaſure
And though ſuch a ſtate of Nature, and of Mankir..., - when’tis
propos'd crudely, and without its grounds, appear fabulous or ima-
ginary, yet 'tis really in it ſelf a ſtate, not only poflible, but more
eaſie and natural, than what the World is in at preſent. And if
one of the old Ante-diluvian Patriarchs ſhould riſe from the dead,
he would be more ſurpris’d to ſee our World in that poſture it is,
than we can be by the ſtory and deſcription of his, Às an Indian
hath more reaſon to wonder at the European modes, than we have
to wonder at their plain manner of living.: 'Tis we that lave left
the tract of Nature, that are wrought and ſcrewd up into artifices,
that have diſguis'd our ſelves; and 'tis in our World that the
Scenes are chang’d, and become more ſtrange and Fantaſtical.
I will conclude this Diſcourſe with an balie remark, and without
any particular Application of it. 'Tis a ſtrange power that cuſtom
hath
Chap.7. Concerning the Prim.Earth,and Paradiſe, 171
hath upon weak and little Spirits ; whoſe thoughts reachi no further
than their Senſes; and what they have ſeen and been us'd to, they
make the Standard and Meaſure of Nature, of Reaſon, and of
all Decorum. Neither are there any ſort of Men more poſitive and
tenacious of their petry opinions, than they are; nor more cenſo-
ricus, even to bitterneſs and inalice. And 'tis generally ſo, that
thoſe that have the leaſt evidence for the truth of their beloved opi-
nions, are most peeviſh and impatient in the defence of them.
This fort of Men are the laſt that will be made Wiſe Men, if ever they
be; for they have the worſt of diſeaſes that accompany ignorance,
and do not ſo much as know theinſelves to be fick:
CHAP. VIT.
The place of Paradiſe cannot be determin’d from the Theory
only, nor from Scripture only. What the ſence of Anti-
quity was concerning it, both as to the Jepps and Hea:
thens, and eſpecially as to the Chriſtian Fathers. That
they generally plac'd it out of this Continent, in the
Southern Hemiſphere.
W
É have now prepar’d our work for the laſt finiſhing ſtroaks ;
deſcrib'd the firſt Earth, and compar'd it with the preſents
and not only the two Earths, but in a good meaſure the whole
State and Oeconomy of thoſe two Worlds. It remains only to
determine the place of Paradiſe in that Primával Earth ; I ſay, in
that Primæval Earth, for we have driven the point ſo far al-
ready, that the ſeat of it could not be in the preſent Earth, whoſe
Form, Site, and Air are ſo diſpos'd, as could not conſiſt with the
firſt and moſt indiſpenſable properties of Paradiſe : And according-
ly, we ſee with what ill ſucceſs our modern Authors have rang'd
over the Earth, to find a fit ſpot of ground to plant Paradiſe in;
ſome would ſet it on the top of an high Mountain, that it might
have goud Air and fair weather, as being above the Clouds, and
the middle Region; but then they were at a loſs for Water, which
made a great part of the pleaſure and beauty of that place. Others
therefore would ſeat it in a Plain, or in a River-Illand, that they
might have Water enough, but then it would be ſubject to the in
juries of the Air, and foul weather at the ſeaſons of the Year, from
whiclı
, both Reaſon and all Authority have exempted Paradiſe.
'Tis like ſeeking a perfect beauty in a mortal Body, there are ſo
many things requir'd to it, as to complexion, Features, Proportions
and Air, that they never meet all together in one perſon; neither can
all the properties of a Terreſtrial Paradiſe ever meet together in one
place, though never ſo well choſen, in this preſent Earth.
7, z
Bitt
1
172
The Theory of the Earth. Book II.
But in the Primæval Earth, which we have deſcrib'd, 'tis ealie to
find a Seat that had all thoſe beauties and conveniences. We liave
every where through the temperate Climates, a clear and conſtan
Air, a fruitful Soil, pleaſant Waters, and all the general characters of
Paradiſe ; ſo that the trouble will be rather in that competition, wliat
part or Region to pitch upon in particular. But to come as near it
as we can, we inuſt reineinber in the firſt place, how that Earth was
divided into two Hemiſpheres, diſtant and ſeparated froin one ano-
ther, not by an imaginary line, but by a real boundary that could
not be paſt'; ſo as the firſt inquiry will be, in whether of theſe Hemi-
ſpheres was the Seat of Paradiſe. To anſwer this only according to
our Theory, I confeſs, I ſee no natural reaſon or occaſion to place it
in one Hemiſpliere more thanı in another'; I ſee no ground of diffe-
rence or pre-eirinence, that one had above the other; and I am apt
to think, that depended rather upon the will of God, and the Series
of Providence that was to follow in this Earth, than upon any na-
tural incapacity in one of theſe two Regions more than in the other,
for planting in it the Garden of God. Neither doth Scripture
determine, with any certainty, either Hemiſphere for the place of it;
for when 'tis faid to be in Eder, or to be the Garden of Eden, 'tis
no more than the Garden of pleaſure or delight, as the word figni-
fies: And even the Septuagint, who render this word Eden, as a pro-
per name twice; (Gen. z. verð 3, & 19.) do in the ſame ſtory render
it twice as a common ramie, ſignifying tpups, pleaſure, (Chap. 2. 15.
and Chap. 3. 24.) and ſo they do accordingly renderit in Ezekiel
(Chap. 31.9.16, 18.) where this Garden of Eden is ſpoken of again.
Some have thought that the word Mekiddim (Gen. 2. 8.) was to be
render'd in the East, or Eaſtmard, as we read it, and therefore deter-
mind the ſite of Paradiſe ; but. 'tis only the Septuagint. Tranſlate it
ſo, all the other Greek Verſions, 'and S. Jerome, the l'ulg.itė, the Chal-
dee Paraphraſe; and the Syriack render it from the beginning, cr it the be-
ginning, or to that effect. And we that do not believe the Septuagint to
lave been infallible, or inſpir’d, have no reaſon to prefer their ſingle
authority. above all the reſt. Some alſo think the place of Paradiſe
may be determind by the four Rivers that are 'named as belonging
to it, and the Countries they ran thorough ; but the nainęş of thoſe
Rivers are to me uncertain, and two of them altogether unintelligible
.
Where are there four Rivers in our Continent that come froin one
Head, as theſe are ſaid to have done, either at the entrance or iſſue
of the Garden?. 'Tis true, if you admit our Hypotheſis, concerning
the fraction and diſruption of the Earth at the Deluge, then we can-
fot: expect to find River's low as they were before, the general
Source is chang'd, and their Chanels are all broke up; but if you do
not admit ſuch a diſſolution of thic Earth, but ſuppoſe the Deluge to
have been only like a ſtanding Pool, after it had once cover'd the ſur
face of the Earth, I do not fee why it ſhould make any great liavock
or confuſion in it; and they that go that way, are therefore the more
oblig'd to ſhow us ſtill the Rivers of Puradiſe. ' Several of the Anci-
ents, as we Thall ihow hereafter, ſuppos’d' tlieſe four Rivers to have
their Heads in the other Hemiſpliere, and if ſo, thc Seat of Paradiſe
inight be there too. But let them firſt agree amongſt theinſelves,
concerning
Chap.7. Concerning the Prim.Earth,and Paradiſe. 173
concerning theſe Rivers, and the Countries they run thorough, and
we will undertake to inuw, that there cannot be any ſuch in this
Continerit.
Seeing then neither the Theory doth determine, nor Scripture,
where the place of Paradiſe was, nor in whether Hemiſphere, we
muſt appeal to Antiquity, or the opinions of the Ancients; for I know
no other Guide, but one of theſe three, Scripture, Reaſon, and An-
cient Tradition; and where the two former are filent, it feems very
reaſonable to conſult the third. And that our Inquiries may be com
prehenſive enough, we will conſider what the Feirs, what the Hea-
thens, and wliat The Chriſtian Fathers have ſaid or determin’d con-
cerning the Seat of Paradiſe. The Jems and Hcbrem Doctors place it
in neitliec Hemiſphere, but betwixt both, under the Æquinoctial,
as you may ſee plainly in Abravanel, Manaſſes Ben-Iſrael, Maimoni-
des, Aben Ezra, and others But the reaſon why they carried it no fur-
ther than the Line, is becauſe they ſuppos'd it certain, as Aben Ezra
tells us, that the day's and nights were always equal in Paradiſe, and
they did not know how that couldbe, unleſs it ſtood under the Æqui-
noctial. But we liave thown another inethod, wherein that perpe-
tual Æquinox came to paſs, and how it was common to all tlie parts
and Climates of that Earth, which if they had been aware of, and
that the Torrid Zone at that time was utterly uninhabitable, having
remov'd their Paradiſe thus far from home, tliey would probably
have remov'd it a little further, into the tempcrate Climates of
the other Hemiſphere.
The Ancient Heathens, Poets and Philoſophers, had the notion
of Paradiſe, or rather of ſeveral Paradiſes in the Earth; and 'tis re-
markable, that they plac'd them generally, if not all of tliein, out
of this Continent ; in the Ocean, or beyond it, or in another Orb
or Hemiſphere. The Garden of the Heſperides, the Fortunate Iſlands;
the Flyſian Fields, Ogrgia and Toprabane, as it is deſcrib'd by Diedo
ius Siculus, with others ſuch like; which as they were all characte-
riz'd like ſo many Paradiſes, ſo they were all ſeated out of our
Continent by their Geography and deſcriptions of thein:
Thus far Antiquity ſeems to incline to the other Hemiſphere, or
to ſome place hcyond tlie bounds of our Continent for the Seat of
Paradiſe: But that which we are moſt to depend upon in this affair,
is Chriſtian Antiquity, the Judgment and Tradition of the Fathers
upon this Argument. And we may ſafely ſay in the firſt place,
negatively, that none of the Chriſtian Fathers, Latin or Greek, ever
plac'd Paradiſe in Meſopotamia ; that is a conceit and invention of
ſome Modern Authors, which hath been much encouraged of late,be-
cauſe it gave Men caſe and reſt as to further inquiries, in an argu-
ment they could not well manage. Secondly, We may affirm, that
none of the Chriſtian Fathers have plac'd Paradiſe in any determi-
nate Region of our Continent, Aſia, Africk or Europe. I have read
of one or two Authors, I think, that fanſied Paradiſe to have been
at Ferufalem, buc 'twas ir meer fanſie, 'that nic body regarded or
purſu'd. The controverſie amorìgſt the Fatliers concerning Paradiſe,
was quite another thing from wliat it is not of fate : They diſputed
and controverted, whether Paradiſe was Corporeal or fritellectual
önly;
174 The Theory of the Earth. Book ll.
only, and Allegorical; This was the grand point amongſt them.
Then of thoſe that thought it Corporeal, ſome plac'd it high
in the Air, fome inacceſſible by Deſarts or Mountains, and many
beyond the Ocean, or in another World; And in theſe chiefly con
filted the differences and diverſity of opinions amongſt them; nor
do we find that they nam'd any particular place or Country in the
known parts of the Earth for the Seat of Paradiſe, or that one con-
teſted for one ſpot of ground, and another for another, which is
the vain temerity of modern Authors; as if they could tell to an
Acre of Land where Paradiſe ſtood, or could ſet their foot upon
the Centre of the Garden. Theſe have corrupted and miſrepreſen-
ted the notion of our Paradiſe, juſt as ſome modern Poets have the
notion of the Elyſian fields, which Homer and the Ancients plac'd re-
mote on the extremities of the Earth, and theſe would inake a little
green Meadow in Campania Felix to be the fam'd Elyſium.
Thus much concerning the Fathers, negatively; but to diſcover
as far as we can, what their poſitive Aſſertions were in this Argu-
ment, we inay obſerve, that though their opinions be differently
expreſt, they generally concenter in this, that the Southern Hemi-
Sphere was the Seat of Paradiſe. This, I ſay, ſeems manifefly to be
the ſence of Chriſtian Antiquity and Tradition, ſo far as there is
any thing definitive in the remains we have upon that ſubject. Some
of the Fathers did not believe Paradiſe to be Corporeal and Local,
and thoſe are to be laid alide in the firſt place, as to this point ;
Others that thought it Local, did not determine any thing (as noft
of them indeed did not ) concerning the particular place of it; But
the reſt that did, though they have expreſt themſelves in various
ways, and under various forms, yet, upon a due interpretation,
they all meet in one common and general concluſion, That Para-
diſe was ſeated beyond the Æquinoctial
, or in the other Hemiſphere.
And to underſtand this aright, we inuſt reflect, in the firſt place,
upon the form of the Primæval Earth, and of the two Heiniſpheres
of which it conſiſted, altogether incommunicable one with another,
by reaſon of the Torrid Zone betwixt thein ; ſo as thoſe two He-
mniſpheres were then as two diſtinct Worlds, or diſtinct Earths,
that had no commerce with one another. And this Notion or
Tradition we find among Heathen Authors, as well as Chriſtian,
this Oppoſite Earth being call’d by them Antichthun, and its Inha-
bitants Antichthones: For thoſe words comprehend both the Anti-
podes and Antaci, or all beyond the Line, as is manifeſt from their
beſt Authors, as Achilles Tatius, and Cæfar Germanicus upon Aratus,
Probus Grammaticus, Cenforinus, Pomponius Mela, and Pliny. And
theſe were callid another World, and lookt upon as another ſock
somn. Scip.
and race of Mankind, as appears from Cicero and Microbius: But as
the latter part was their miſtake, ſo the former is acknowledg’d by
Chriſtian Authors, as well as others ; and particularly S. Clement,
in his Epiſtle to the Corinthians, mentions a World, or Worlds beyond
the Ocean, fubje&t to Divine Providence, and the gre.it Lord of Nature
,
as well as ours. This paſſage of S. Clement is alſo cited by S. Ferom,
in his Commentary upon Ephef: 2.2. and by Origen Periarch:09:
Lib. 2.6.3.
where the Inhabitants of that other World are callid Antichilones.
I mnalic
Chap.7. Concerning the Prim. Earth and Paradiſe. 175
1
I make this remark in the firſt place, that we may underſtand
the true ſence and importance of thoſe phraſes and expresions
amongſt the Ancients, when they ſay Piradili was in another II orid.
Which are not to be ſo underſtood, as if they thought Paradiſe was in
the Moon, or in Jupiter, or hung above like a Cloud or a Meteor,
they were not ſo extravagant ; but that Pradife was in another
Hemiſphere, which was call'd Antichthon, another Earth, cranother
IVorld from Ours; and juſtly reputed ſo, becauſe of an impoffibility
of commerce or intercourſe betwixt their reſpective Inhabitants
.
And this remark being premis'd, we will now diſtribute the Chriſti-
an Authors and Fathers that have deliver'd their opinion concerning
the place of Paradiſe, into three or four ranks or orders; and
though they expreſs themſelves differently, you will fee, when duly
examin'd and expounded, they all conſpire and concur in the for
mentioned concluſion, That the Seat of Paradiſe was in the other
Hemiſphere.
In the firſt rank then we will place and reckon thoſe that have
fet Paradiſe in another World, or in another Earth; ſeeing, accord-
ing to the foregoing Explication, that is the ſame thing as to af-
firin it ſeated beyond the Torrid Zone in the other Hemiſphere. In
this number are Ephrem Syrus, Mofes Bar Cepha, Tati.ins, and of
later date Jacobus de Valentit. To theſe are to be added again ſuch
Authors as ſay, that Adam, when he was turnd out of Paradiſ,
was brought into our Earth, or into our Region of the Earth; for
this is tantamount with the former ; And this ſeems to be the fence
of S. Ferom in ſeveral places againſt fovinian, as alſo of Conſtantine,
in his Oration in Eufebius, and is politively aſſerted by Sulpitius Se-
And laſtly, Thoſe Authors that repreſent Paradiſe as re-
mote from our World, and inacceſſible, fo S. Auſtin, Procepius Ga-
zeus, Beda, Strabus Fuldenfis, Hiſtoria Scholiaftica, and others, theſe
I ſay, purſue the ſame notion of Antiquity; for what is remote
from our World (that is, from our Continent, as we before ex-
plain'd it ) is to be underſtood to be that Antichthoni, or Anti-hiemi- Oirsjfér:.
ſphere which the Ancients oppos'd to ours.
Another ſett of Authors that interpret the Flaming Sword that
guarded Paradiſe to be the Torrid Zone, do plainly intimate, that Pa-
vadiſe in their opinion lay beyond the Torrid Zone, or in the Anti-
hemiſphere ; And thus Tertullian interprets the Flaming Sword, and
in ſuch words as fully confirm our fence: Paradiſe, He ſays, by the
Torrid Zone, as by a wall of Fire, iras ſever'd from the communication and
knowledge of our World. It lay then on the other ſide of this Zone:
And S. Cyprian, or the ancient Author tliat pafſeth under his name,
in his Comment upon Geneſis, expreſſeth himſelf to the ſaine effect;
ſo alſo S. Auſtin and Iſidore Hiſpalenſis are thought to interpret it :
And Aquinas who makes Paradiſe inacceſſible, gives this reaſon for
it, Propter vehementiam æſlus in locis intermediis ex propinquitate Solis,
& boc fignificatur per Flammeum Gladium : Becauſe of that vehement
be.lt in the parts betwixt us and that, ariſing from the nearnefs of the
Sun, and this is ſignified by the Flaming Sirord. And this interpreta-
tion of the Flaming Sword receives a remarkable force and Emphaſis
froin our Theory and deſcription of the Primæval Earth, for there
the
verus.
ܪ
176
The Theory of the Earth. Book 11.
De Civ. Dei
lib, 16.6.9.
the Torrid Zone was as a wall of Fire indeed, or a Region of flame
which none could paſs or ſublift in, no more than in a Furnace.
There is another form of expreſſion amongst the Ancients con
cerning Pur:diſe, which, if decyphered, is of the fame force and lig
nification with this we have alrcady initanc'd in ; They fay fome-
times Paradiſe was beyond the Ocean, or that the Rivers of Paradiſe
caine from beyond tlie Occan. This is of the famc import with the
former Head, and poinis ſtill at the other Heiniſphere ; for, as we
noted before, ſome of their fixt their Antichthou and Antichthones
beyond the Occan; that is, ſince there was an Ocean, Since the
form of the Earth was chang'd, and the Torrid Zone become habi-
table, and confequently could not be a boundary or ſeparation be-
twixt the tivo Worlds. Wherefore, as ſome run fill upon the
old diviſion by the Torrid Zone, others took the new divilion by
the Ocean. Which Ocean they ſuppos'd to lie froin Eaſt to Welt
betwixt the Tropicks; as may be ſeen in Ancient Authors, Gemi-
11us, Herodotus, Cicero de republicâ, and Clemens Romanus, whom we
cited before. S. Auſtin alſo ſpeaks upon the ſame ſuppoſition, when
he would confute the doctrine of the Antipodes, or Antichthines ;
and Macrobius, I remember, makes it an argument of Providence,
that the Sun and the Planets, in what part of their courſe foever
they are betwixt the two Tropicks, liave fill the Ocean under
them, that they may be cool'd and nouriſht by its moiſture. They
thought the Sea like a Girdle, went round the Earth, and the tem-
perate Zones on either ſide were the habitable Regions, whereof this
was call'd the Qicouméne, and the other Antichthon.
This being obſerv'd, 'tis not material, whether their Notion was
true or falſe, it ſhews us what their meaning was, and what part
of the Earth they deſign’d, when they ſpoke of any thing beyond
the Ocean; nainely, that they meant beyond the Line, in the other
Hemiſphere, or in the Antichthon ; and accordingly, when they ſay
Paradiſe, or the Fountains of its Rivers were beyond the Ocean,
they ſay the ſame thing in other terms with the reſt of thoſe Au-
thors we have cited. In Moſes Biar Cephe above mention'd, we
find a Chapter upon this ſubject, Quomodo trajecerint Mortales inde
ex Paradiſi terrà in hanc Terram? Hom Minkind paſt out of that Earth
or Goitinent mhere Paradiſe was, into that arhere we are? Namely,
how they paſt the Ocean, that lay betrrixt them, as the anſwer there
given explains it. And ſo Ephrem Syrus is cited often in that Trea
tiſe, placing Paradiſe beyond the Ocean. The Eſſenes alſo, who
were the most Philoſophick Sect of the ferrs, plac'd Paradiſe, ac
cording to Joſephus, beyond the Ocean, under a perfect tempera
ture of Air. And that paſſage in Euſebius, in the Oration of Cun
Stantine, being corrected and reſtor d to the true reading, repreſents
Paradiſe, in like manner, as in inother Continent, froin whence
ildam was brought, after his tranſgreſſion, into this. And lastly,
there are ſome Authors, wlioſe teſlimony and authority inuly dle
ſerve to be conſider’d, not for their own Antiquity, but becauſe
they are profeſs’dly tranſcribers of Antiquity and Traditions, ſuch
as Strabus, Gomeſtor, and the like, who are known to give this il
count or report of Paradiſe from the Ancients that it was inte;
waren
3
}
.
i
}
Chap.7. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 177
jíto Oceano ab Orbe naſtro vel à, Zonâ noftrâ habitabili fecretus, Separa-
ted from our Orb or Hemiſphere by the interpoſition of the Ocean
It is alſo obſervable, that many of the Ancients that took Tigris,
Euphrates; Nile and Ganges for the Rivers of Paradiſe, ſaid that
thoſe Heads or Fountains of them which we liave in our Conti
nent, are but their Capita ſecundı, their ſecond Sources, and that
their firſt Sources were in another Orb where Paradiſe was; and
thus Hugo de Saneto Vittore ſays, Sanctos communiter fenfiſle, That
the Holy Men of old were generally of that opinion. To this ſence
alſo Mofes Bar Cepha often expreſſeth, himſelf; as alſo Epiphanius;
Procopius Gazaus, and Severianus in Gatenâ. Which nation amongfé
the Ancients, concerning the trajection or pallage of the Paradilia:
cal Rivers under-ground, or under-Sea, froin one Continent into an-
other, is to me, I confeſs, unintelligible, either in the firſt or ſecond
Earth ; but however it diſcovers their ſence and opinion of the
Seat of Paradiſe, that it was not to be fought for in Aſia or in Africk's
where thoſe Rivers riſe to us, but in ſome remoter parts of the
World, where they ſuppos'd their firſt Sources to be.
This is a ſhort account of what the Chriſtian Fathers have left
us, concerning the Seat of Paridiſe; and the truth is, 'tis but a
Thort and broken account; yet ’tis no wonder it ſhould be ſo, if
we conſider, as we noted before, that ſeveral of them did not be-
lieve Paradiſe to be Local and Corporeal; Others that did believe it
ſo, yet did not offer to determine the place of it, but left that mat-
ter wholly untoucht and undecided ; and the reſt that did ſpeak to
that point, did it commonly both in general terms, and in expreſſions
that were diſguis’d, and needed interpretation ; but all theſe diffe-
rences and obſcurities of expreſſion, you ſee, when duly ſtated and,
expounded, inay ſignifie one and the ſame thing, and terminate all
in this common Concluſion, That Paradiſe was without our Conti-
nent, according to the general opinion and Tradition of Antiquity.
And I do not doubt but the Tradition would have been both more:
expreſs and more univerſal, if the Ancients had underſtood Geo-
graphy better; for thoſe of the Ancients that did not admit or
believe, that there were Antipodes or Antichthones, as La&tantius,
S. Auſtin, and ſome others, theſe could not joyn in the coinmon
opinion about the place of Paradiſe, becauſe they thought there was
no Land, nor any thing habitable few moixspißuns, or beſides this
Continent. And yet S. Auſtin was ſo cautious, that as he was bound-
ed on the one hand by his falſe Idea of the Earth, that he could not
joyn with Antiquity as to the place of Paradiſe'; ſo on the other
hand he had that reſpect for it, that he would not ſay any thing to the
contrary; therefore being to give his opinion, lie ſays only, Terreſtrena
eſſe Paradiſum, & locum ejus ab hominum cognitione eſſe remotiffimum:
Thiit it is ſomewhere upon the Earth, but the place of it very remote front
ibe knowledge of Men.
And as their ignorance of the Globe of the Earth was one rea-
fon, why the doctrine of Paradiſe was ſo broken and obſcure, ſo
another reaſon why it is inuch more fo at preſent is, becauſe the
chief ancient Books writ upon that ſubject, are loſt; Ephrem Syrus,
who liv'd in the Fourth Century, writ a Commentary in Genelin
Aa
five
178 The Theory of the Earth. Book 11.
Coni. Marc.
lib. 2. c. 2.
(. S.
frve de Ortu rerims, concerning the Origin of the Earth; and by
thoſe renuils that are cited from it, we have reaſon to believe, that
it contain’d inany things reinarkable concerning the firſt Earth, and
concerning Paradiſe. Tertullian alſo writ a Book de Paradiſo, which
is wholly lofts and we fee to what effect it would liave beeni, by his
making the Torrid Zone to be the Flaming Sword, and the partition
betwixt this Earth and Paradiſe; which two Earths lie more than
ortée diſtinguisheth as very diferent from one another. The moſt
ancient Author that I know upon this ſubject, at leaſt' of thoſe that
writ of it literally, is Mofes Bar Cepha, a Syrian Bulliop, wilid liv'd
about ſeven: frundred years ſince, and his Book is tranſlated into La-
tin, by that Learried and Jutlicious Man, Andre.is Mufius. B.17 Cephı
writos upon the fame Views of Paradiſe that we have here'preten.
ted, that it was beyond the Ocean, in another tract of Latid, or ano-
ther Continent from that which we inhabit': As appear's fith the
very Titles of his Eighth, Tentli, and Fourteenth Chapters
. But
we inuſt allow him for his niiſtakon Notions about the form of the
Earth; for he feems to have fanſied the Earth plain, ( not only as
oppos’d to rough and Mountainous, for ſo it was plain ; but as op
pos’d to Splierical ) and the Ocean to liave divi:ld it in two parts,
an Interiour, and an Exterlour, and in that Exteriour part was Pa
radife. Such allowances muſt often be made for Geographical mi-
ſtakes, in exarixining and underſtanding the writings of the Ancients.
The reſt of the Syrian Fathers, as well as Ephrem and Bar Cepha, in-
cline to the famne doctrine of Paradiſe, and ſeem to have retain’d more
of the ancient notions concerning it, than the Greek and Latin Fa-
thers have ; and yet there is in all fome fragments of this doctrine,
and but fragments in the beſt.
We might add in the laſt place, that as the moſt ancient Treati-
ſes concerning Paradife are loſt, ſo alſo the ancient Gloffesand Catena
upon Scripture, where we might have found the Traditions and
Opinions of the Ancients upon this ſubject, are' inany of thein ei-
thier loſt or unpubliſht; And upon this conſideration we did not
think it improper to cite fome Authors of ſmall Antiquity, but ſuch
as have tranſcrib'd ſevera' things out of ancient Manuſcript-gloſſes into
their Commentaries. They living however before Printing was in-
vented, or Learning well reſtor’d, and before the Reforination. I
add that alſo before the Reformation, for ſince that time the Proteſtant
Authors having leſſen’d the Authority of Traditions, the Pontificial
Doctors contenit themſelves to inſiſt only upon ſuch as tliey thought
were uſeful or neceſſary, left by multiplying others that were brit
matter of aurioſity, they ſhould bring the firft into queſtion, arid ren
der the whole doctrine of Traditions more dubious and exceptionable ;
And upon this account, there are ſome Authors that writ an Agt or
two before the Reformation, that have with more freedom told us
the Tenets and Traditions of the Ancients in theſe Speculations, that
are but collateral to Religion, than any have done ſince. And I
muſt confeſs, I an apt to think that what remains concerning this
doctrine of Paradiſe, and the Primæval Earth, is in a good meaſure
Traditional'; for one may obſerve, that thoſe that treat upon theſe
fubjecis, quore the t'ue Opinions, and tell you ſome of the Ancients
!
licle
Chap.7Concerning the Prim. Earth and Paradiſe. 179
1
1
}
;
held ſo and ſo, as That Paradiſe was in another Earth, or higher
than this Earth, That there were rio Mountains before the Flood;
nor any Rain, and ſuch like: yet they do not name thoſe ancient
Authors that held theſe Opinions ; which iħakes me apt to believe,
either that they were convey'd by a Traditional communication
from one to another, or that there were other Books extant upon
thoſe ſubjects, or other Gloſſes, than what are now known.
Finally, To conclude this Diſcourſe concerning the Seat of Para:
diſe, we muſt mind you again upon what Bafis it ſtands. We de-
clar'd freely, that we could not by our Theory alone determine
the particular place of it, only by that we ate aſſur'd that it was in
the Primæval Earth, and not in the preſent; but in what Region,
or in whether Hemiſphere of that Earth it was ſeated, we cannot de
fine from Speculation only. 'Tis true, if we hold faſt to that Scri-
pture-concluſion, That all Mankind riſe from one Head, and from
one and the ſame Stock and Lineage, ( which doth not ſeem to be
according to the ſentiments of the Heathens) we muſt ſuppoſe they
were born in one Herniſphere, and after ſome time tranſlated into
the other, or a Colony of them: But this ſtill doth not determine;
in whether of the two they begun, and were firſt ſeated before their
tranſlation; and I am apt to think that depended rather, as we
noted before, upon the Divine Pleaſure, and the train of affairs that
was to ſucceed, than upon Natural cauſes and differences. Some
of the Ancients, I know, made both the Soil and the Stars more
noble in the Southern Hemiſphere, than in ours, but I do not ſee
any proof or warrant for it; wherefore laying aſide all natural To-
picks, we are willing, in this particular, to refer our ſelves wholly
to the report and majority of Votes amongſt the Ancients; who yet
do not ſeem to me to lay much ſtreſs upon the notion of a parti-
cular and Topical Paradiſe, and therefore uſe general and remote
expreſſions concerning it. And finding no place for it in this con-
tinent, they are willing to quit their hands of it, by placing it in
a Region ſome-where far off, and inacceſſible. This, together with
the old Tradition, that Paradiſe was in another Earth, ſeems to me
to give an account of moſt of their Opinions concerning the Seat
of Paradiſe : and that they were generally very uncertain where to
fix it.
ܪ
A a 2
СНАР.
180.
!
Book II.
The Theory of the Earth.
$
1
CHA P. VII.
in
Thie uſes of this Theory for the illuſtration of Antiquity;
The ancient Chaos explain’d; The inhabitability of the
Torrid Zone'; The change of the Poles of the World;
The do&trine of the Mundane Egg; Hom America was
firſt peopled; Hom Paradiſe within the Circle of the
Moon.
:
W!
E have now diſpatch'd the Theory of the Primæval Earth,
and reviv'd a forgotten World. 'Tis pity the firſt and fair-
eit works of Nature ſhould be loſt out of the ineinory of Man,
and that we ſhould ſo much dote upon the Ruines, as never to
think upon the Original Structure. As the modern Artiſts from
ſome broken pieces of an ancient Statue, make out all the other
parts and proportions ; ſo from the broken and ſcatter'd limbs of
the firſt World we have ſhown you how to raiſe the whole Fabrick
again; and renew the proſpect of thoſe pleaſant Scenes that first
fee the light, and firſt entertain’d Man, when he came to act upon
this new-erected Stage.
We have drawn this Theory chiefly to give an account of the
Univerſal Deluge, and of Paradiſe ; but as when one lights a Candle
to look for one or two things which they want, the light will not
confine it ſelf to thoſe two objects, but thows all the other in
the room ; ſo, methinks, we have unexpectedly caſt a light upon all
Antiquity, in feeking after theſe two things, or in retrieving the
Notion and Doctrine of the Primæval Earth, upon which they de-
pended. For in ancient Learning there are many Diſcourſes, and
iany Concluſions deliver'd to us, that are fo obfcure and confus'd,
and ſo reinote from the preſent ſtate of things, that one cannot well
diftinguifh, whether they are fictions or realities : and there is no
way to diſtinguiſh with certainty, but by a clear Theory upon
the ſame ſubjects; which ſhowing us the truth directly, and inde
pendently upon them, ſhows us alſo by refection, how far they are
true or falſe, and in what ſence they are to be interpreted and un-
derſtood. And the preſent Theory being of great extent, we thall
find it ſerviceable in many things, for the illuſtration of ſuch du-
bious and obſcure doctrines in Antiquity.
To begin with their Ancient CHAOS, what a dark ſtory have they
made of it, both their Philoſophers and Poets ; and how fabulous
in appearance? 'Tis deliver'd as conſus’dly as the Maſs it felf could
be, and hath not been reduc'd to order, nor indeed made inrelli.
gible by any. They tell us of moral principles in the Chaos inſtead
of natural, of ſtrife, and diſcord, and diviſion on the one hand, and
Love, Friendſhip, and Venus on the other; and, after a long conteſt,
Love got the better of Diſcord, and united the diſagreeing principles :
This
Chap.8. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 181
1
This is one part of their ſtory. Then they make the forming of the
World out of the Chaos a kind of Genealogie or Pedigree; Chaos
was the common Parent of all, and from Chaos ſprung, tilt, Night,
and Tartarus, or Oceanus; Night was a teaming Mother, and of
her were born Ærher and the Earth; The Earth conceiv'd by the
influences of Æther, and brought forth Man and all Animals.
This ſeems to be a Poetical fiction rather than Philoſophy; yit
when 'tis ſet in a true light, and compard with our Theory of the
Chaos, 'twill appear a pretty regular account, how the World was
form'd at firſt, or how the Chaos divided it ſelf ſucceſſively into
ſeveral Regions, riſing one after another, and propagated one from
another, as Children and Poſterity from a common Parent. We
ſhow'd in the firſt Book, Chap.5. how the Chaos, from an uniform
maſs, wrought it ſelf into ſeveral Regions or Elements; the groſſelt
part linking to the Center, upon this lay the maſs of Water, and
over the Water was a Region of dark, impure, caliginous Air;
This impure, caliginous Air is that which the Ancients call Night,
and the maſs of Water Oceanus or Tartarus, for thoſe two terms
with them are often of the like force, Tartarus being Oceánus inclos'd
and lock'd up: Thus we have the firſt offſpring of the Chaos, or
its firſt-born twins, Nox and Oceanus. Now this turbid Air puri-
fying it ſelf by degrees, as the more fubtle parts few upwards, and
compos’d the Æther; fo the earthy parts that were mixt with it
dropt down upon the ſurface of the Water, or the liquid inafs;
and that inafs on the other hand ſending up its lighter and inore
oily parts towards its ſurface, theſe two incorporate there, and by
their mixture and union compoſe a body of Earth quite round the
maſs of Waters: And this was the firſt habitable Earıh, which as
it was, you ſee, the Daughter of Nox and Oceanus, ſo it was the
Mother of all other things, and all living Creatures, which at the
beginning of the World ſprung out of its fruitful womb.
This doctrine of the Chaos, for the greater pomp of the buſineſs,
the Ancients call'd their Theogonia, or the Genealogy of the Gods ;
for they gave their Gods, at leaſt their Terreſtrial Gods, an origi-
nal and beginning; and all the Elements and greater portions of
Nature they made Gods and Goddeſſes, or their Deities preſided
over them in ſuch a manner, that the names were us'd promiſcu-
ouſly for one another. We alſo mention'd before ſome moral prin-
ciples, which they plac'd in the Chaos, Eris arid Eros; Strife,diſcord,
and diſaffection which prevaild at firſt, and afterward Love, kind-
neſs and union got the upper hand, and in ſpite of thoſe factious
and dividing principles gather'd together the ſeparated Elements,
and united them into an habitable World. This is all eaſily under
ſtood, if we do but look upon the Schemes of the riſing World, as
we have ſet them down in that fifth Chapter ; for in the firſt com-
motion of the Chaos, after an inteſtine ſtruggle of all the parts, the
Elements ſeparated from one another into ſo many diſtinct bodies
Or inaſſes; and in this ſtate and poſture things continued a good
while, which the Ancients, after their Poetick or Moral way, callid
the Reign of Eris or Cootention, of hatred, night and diſaffection ;
and if things had always continued in that Syſtein, we ſhould never
have
1
1 82 The Theory of the Earth. 1.
Bookll.
iu. 2. 6. 7.
have had an habitable (Vorld. But Love and good Nature con-
quer'd at length, Tinus riſe out of the Sea, and receiv'it into her
boſom, and intangled into her imbraces the falling Æther; viz. The
parts
of lighter carth, which were mixt with the Air in that firft
ſeparation, and gave it the name of Night; Theſe, I ſay, fell down
upon
the oily, parts of the Sea-inals, which lay foating upon the ſur-
face of it, and by that union and conjunction, a new Body, and a
new World was produc d, which was the first habitable Earth.
This is the interpretation of their myſtical Pliilofophy of the Chaos,
and the re:olution of it into plain natural Hiſory: Which you inay
ſee more fully diſcuſs d in the Latin Treatiſe.
In conſequence of this, We have already explain'd, iri ſeveral
places the Golden Age of the Ancients, and laid down ſuch grounds
as will enable us to diſcern what is real, and what Poetical, in the
reports and characters that Antiquity hath given of thoſe firſt Ages
of the World. And if there be any thing amongſt the Ancients
that rufers to another Earth, as Plato's Atlantis, which lie fay's, was
abſorpt by an Earthquake, and an inundation, as the primeval
Earth was; or his Æthereal Earth mention'd in his Phædo, which
he oppoſeth to this broken hollow Earth ; makes it to have long-
livd inhabitants, and to be without Rains and Storms, as that firit
Earth was alſo; or the pendulous Gardens of Alcinous, cr fuch like,
to which nothing anſwers in preſent Nature, by reflecting upon
the ſtate of the firſt Earth, we find an caſie explication of them. We
have alſo explain'd what the Antichthon and Antichthones of the An-
cients were, and what the true ground of that diſtinction was. But
nothing ſeems more remarkable than the inhabitability of the Torrid
Zone, if we conſider what a general fame and belief it had amongſt
the Ancienis, and yet in the preſent form of the Earth we find no
ſuch thing, nor any foundation for it. I cannot believe that this was
ſo univerſally receiv'd upon a llight preſumption only, becauſe it
lay under the courſe of the Sun, if the Sun had then the ſame la-
titude from the Æquator in his courſe and motion that he hath now,
and made the ſame variety of ſeaſons; whereby even the hotteſt
parts of the Earth have a Winter, or ſomething equivalent to it.
But if weapply this to the Primxval Earth, whoſe poſture was di
rect to the Sun, ſtanding always fixt in its Equinoctial, we ſhall
eaſily believe that the Torrid Zone was then uninhabitable by ex-
tremity of heat, there being no difference of ſeaſons, nor any change
of weather, the Sun hanging always over head at the ſame diſtance,
and in the ſame direction. Beſides this, the deſcent of the Rivers
in that firſt Earth was ſuch, that they could never reachithe Equi-
noctial parts, as we have ſhown before; by which means, and the
want of Rain, that Region muſt neceſſarily be turn'd into a dry
Defart. Now this being really the ſtate of the firſt Earth, the fame
and general belief that the Torrid Zone was uninhabitable had this
true Original, and continued ſtill with poſterity after the Deluge,
though the cauſes then were taken away; for they being ignorant
of the change that was made in Nature at that time, kept up
the ſame Tradition and opinion currant, till obſervation and
expe
ricnce taught later Ages to corre&t it. As the true miracles that were
Nill
j!
1
1
$
3
Chap.8. Concerning the Prim. Exrsh, and Paradiſe. 183
in the Chriſtian Church at: firft, occafioni'd a fame and belief ui
their continuance long after tliey had really ceaſt:
This gives an eaſie account, and, I think, the true cauſe, of that
opinion, amongſt the Ancients generally receiv'd; That the Torrid
Zorze was uninhabitable. I ſay, generally receiv’d, for not only the
Poets, both Greek and Latin, but their Philoſophers, Aſtronomers
and Geographers, had the ſame notion, and deliver'd the ſame do-
crrine; as Ariſtotle, Cleomedes, Achilles Tatius, Ptolony, Cicero, Strabo,
Mela, Pling; Macrobius, &c. And to ſpeak tiduth, the whole doctrine
of the Zones is calculated more properly- for the firſt Earth, than
for tlre preſent ; for the diviſions and bounds of them now; are but
arbitrary, being habitable all over, and having no viſible diſtinction;
whereas they were then determin’d by Nature, and the Globe of
the Earth was really divided into fo many Regions of a very
different aſpect and quality ; - which would have appeař'd at a di-
ſtarice, if they had been lookt upon from the Clouds
, or from the
Moon, as Jupiter's Belts, or as ſo many Girdles or Swathing bands
about the body of the Earth': And ſo' the word i'mports, and ſo the
Ancients uſe to call them Cinguli and Faſcie. But in the prefent
forin of the Earth, if it was ſeen at a diſtance, no ſuch diſtinction
would appear in the parts of it, nor ſcarce any other but thrat of
Land and Water, and of Mountains and Valleys, which are no
thing to the purpoſe of Zones. And to add this note further, When
the Earth lay in this regular form, divided into Regions or Walks,
if I may ſo call thein, as this gave occaſion of its diſtinction; by
Zones, ſo if we night conſider all triat Earth as a Paradiſe, and Pa-
iadife as a Garden; (for it is always call'd' ſo in Scripture, and in
Jenrifli Author's ) And as trīs Torrid Zone, båre of Gials and Trees,
made a kind of Gravel-walk in the middle : ſo there was a' green
Walk on either hand of it, inade by the teinperate Zones; and be-
yond thoſe lay a Canal, which water'd the Garden from either ſide. See Fig. 3icis
But to return' to Antiquity; We may add under this Head ano-
ther obſervation or doctrine amongſt the Ancients, ſtrange enough
in appearance, whích' yet receives at eaſie explication from the pre
ceding Theory ; They ſay, The Poles of the World did once change
their ſituation, and were at firſt in another poſture from what they
are in now, till tháť inclination happen'd'; This the ancient Philo-
ſophers often make inention' of, as Anaxagoras, Empedocles, Dioge- See the Lat.
nes, Lercippus, Democritus; as may be ſeen in Laertids, and in Plu. Treat. lib. 2:
tarch; and the Stars; they ſay, at firſt' were carried about the Earth
in a more uniforin manner. This is no more than what we have
obferv'd and told you in other words; namely, That the Earth
chang'd its poſture at the Deluge, and thereby made theſe ſeeining
changes in the Heavens; its Poles before pointed to the Poles of the
Ecliprick, which now point to the Poles of the Æquatot, and its
Axis is become parallel with that Axis; and this is the myſtery and
interpretation of what they ſay in other teims ; this inakes the
different aſpect of the Heavens, and of its Poles : . And I am apt to
think, that thoſe changes in the courſe of the Stars, which the An-
cients fornecimes ſpeak of, and eſpecially thie #gypti.ins, if they did
not proceed from defects in their Calendar, had no other Phiyſical
account than this.
And
C. 1O.
1
184
Book II.
The Theory of the Earth.
....
And as they ſay the Poles of the World were in another ſitua-
tion at firſt, ſo at firſt they ſay, there was no variety of ſeafons in
the Year, as in their Golden Age. Which is very coherent with
all the reſt, and ſtill runs along with the Theory. And you inay ob-
ſerve, that all theſe things we have inſtanc'd in hitherto, are but
links of the ſame chain, în connexion and dependance upon one an-
other. When the Primæyal Earth was made out of the Chaos, its
form and poſture was ſuch, as, of courſe, brought on all thoſe
Scenes which Antiquity hath kept the remembrance of: though now
in another Hate of Nature they ſeem very ſtrange; eſpecially being
diſguis'd, as ſome of them are, by their odd manner of repreſen
ting thein. That the Poles of the World ſtood once in another
poſture; That the Year liad no diverlity of Seaſons ; That the Tor-
rid Zone was uninhabitable; That the two Hemiſpheres had no
poſſibility of intercourſe, and ſuch like; Theſe all hang upon the
ſame ſtring; or lean one upon another as Stones in the fame Build-
ing; whereof we have, by this Theory, laid the very foundation
bare, that you inay ſee what they all ſtand upon, and in what
order.
There is ſtill one remarkable Notion or Doctrine amongſt the An-
cients which we have not ſpoken to; 'tis partly Syınbolical, and the
propriety of the Symbol, or of the Application of it, háth been
little underſtood ; 'Tis their doctrine of the Mundane. Egg, or their
comparing the World to an Egg, and eſpecially in the Original
compoſition of it. This ſeems to be a mean compariſon, the World
and an Egg, what proportion, or what reſemblance betwixt theſe
two things ? And yet I do not know any Syınbolical doctrine, 'or
concluſion, that hath been ſo univerſally entertain’d by the Myfta,
or Wife and Learned, of all Nations; as hath been noted before
in the fifth Chapter of the Firſt Book, and at large in the Latin
Treatiſe. 'Tis certain, that by the World in this ſimilitude, they
do not mean the Great Univerſe, for that hath neither Figure, nor
any
determinate form of compoſition, and it would be a great va
nity and raſhneſs in any one to compare this to an Egg; The works
of God are immenſe, as his r.ature is infinite, and we cannot make
any iinage or reſemblance of either of them; bụt : this compariſon
is to be underſtood of the Sublunary World, or of the Earth; And
for a general key to Antiquity upon this Argument, we may lay
this down as a Maxim or Canon, Thut what the Ancients have ſaid
concerning the form and figure of the World, or concerning the Original of it
from a Chaos, or about its periods and diſſolution are never to be underſtood
of the Great Univerſe, but of our Earth, or of this Sublunary and Terrıſtrial
World. And this obſervation being made, do but reflect upon our Theory
of the Earth, the manner of its compoſition at fiiſt, and the figure
of it, being compleated, and you will need no other interpreter to
underſtand this myſtery. We have ſhow'd there, that the figure
of it, when finiſht, was Oval, and the inward form of it was a
frame of four Regions encompaſſing one another, where that of
Fire lay in the middle like the Yolk, and a ſhell of Earth inclos'd
them all. This gives a ſolution ſo ealie and natural, and ſhows ſuch
an aptneſs and elegancy in the repreſentation, that one cinnot doubt.
Lib. 2.6.10.
Book 1.6. S.
1
upon
Chap.8. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 185
upon a view and compare of circunıſtances, but that we have truly
found out the Riddle of the Mundane Egg.
Amongſt other difficulties ariſing from the Form of this preſent
Earth, That is one, How America could be peopled: or any other
Continent, or Iſland remote from all Continens, the Sea interpo-
ling. This difficulty does not hold in our Theory, of the Firſt Earth,
where there was no Sea. And after the Flood, when the Earth
Was broken and the Sra laid open, the ſame race of Men might con-
tinue there, if ſetled there before. For I do not ſee any neceſſity
of deducing all Mankind from Noah after the Ilood : If America
was peopled before, it might continue ſo; not but that the Flood
was univerſal. But when the great frame of the Earth broke at the
Deluge, Providence fore-law into how many Continents it would
be divided after the ceaſing of the Flood, and accordingly, as we may
reaſonably ſuppoſe, made proviſion to ſave a remnant in every Con-
tinent, that the race of Mankind might not be quite extinct in any
of them. What proviſion he made in our Continent we know from
Sacred Hiſtory, but as that takes notice of no other Continent but
ours, ſo neither could it take notice of any method that was usd
there for ſaving of a remnant of Men; but 'twere great preſumption,
methinks, to imagine that Providence had a care of none but us,
or could not find out ways of preſervation in other places, as well
as in that where our habitations were to be. Aſia, Africk and Ex-
rope were repeopled by the Sons of Noah, Shem, Ham, and Japhet,
but we read nothing of their going over into America, or fending
any
Colonies thither; and that World which is near as big as ours,
muſt have ſtood long without people, or any thing of Humane race
in it, after the Flood, if it ſtood fo till this was full
, or till inen
Navigated the Ocean, and by chance diſcover'd it: it ſeems inore
reaſonable to ſuppoſe, that there was a ſtock providentially reſerv'd
there, as well as here, out of which they ſprung again ; but we do
not pretend in an Argument of this nature to define or determine
any thing poſitively. To conclude, As this is but a ſecondary diffi-
culty, and of no great force, fo neither is it any thing peculiar to
us, or to our Hypotheſis, but alike comnion to both; and if they cani
propoſe any reaſonable way, whereby the Sons of Noah might be
tranſplanted into America, with all my heart; but all the
ways
that
I have met with hitherto, have ſeem'd to me ineer fictions, or meer
preſumptions. Beſides, finding Birds and Beaſts there, which are
no where upon our Continent, for would live in our Countries if
brought hither, 'tis a ſair conjecture that they were not carried from
us, but originally bred and preſerv'd there.
Thus much for the illuſtration of Antiquity in ſome points of Hu-
mane literature, by our Theory of the Primæval Earth; There is
alſo in Chriſtian Antiquity a Tradition or Doctrine, that appears as
obſcure and as much a Paradox as any of theſe, and better deſerves
an illuſtration, becauſe it relates more cloſely and expreſly to our
preſent ſubject : 'Tis that Notion or Opinion amongſt the Ancients
concernirig Paradiſe, that it was ſeated as high as the Sphere of the
Moon, or within the Lunar Gircle. This looks very ſtrange, and in-
decd extravagantly, at firſt ſight, but the wonder will ceaſe, if we
Bb
underſtand
:
1
t
1
186
Book 11.
: The Theory of the Earth.
underſtand this not of Paradiſe taken apart from the reſt of the Earthi,
but of the whole Primæval Earth, wherein the Seat of Paradiſe was;
That was really ſeated much higher than the preſent Earih, and
may be reaſonably ſuppos d to have been as much elevated as the
tops of our Mountains are now. And that phraſe of reaching to
the Sphere of the Moon, fignifies no more than thoſe other expreſſions
of reaching to Heaven, or reaching above the Clouds, which are phraſes
commonly us'd to expreſs tlie height of Buildings, or of Mountains,
and ſuch like things : So the Builders of Babel ſaid, they would make
a Tower ſhould reach to Heaven ; Olympus and Parnaſſus are ſaid
by the Poets to reach to Heaven, or to riſe above the Clouds; And
Pliny and Solinus uſe this very expreſſion of the Lunar Circle, when
Golin. 6. 17.
they deſcribe the height of Mount Atlas, Eductus in vicinam Luna-
ris Circuli. Tlie Ancients, I believe, aim'd particularly by this phraſe,
to expreſs an height above the middle Region, or above our Atmo-
ſphere, that Paradiſe might be ſerene ; and where our Atmoſphere
ended, they reckon'd the Sphere of the Moon begun, and therefore
faid it reacht to the Sphere of the Moon. Many of the Chriſtian Fa-
ther's expreft their opinion concerning the high ſituation of Paradiſe
in plain and formal terms, as S. Bafil, Damaſcen, Mofes Bar Cepha,&c.
but this phraſe of reaching to the Lunar Circle is repeated by ſeve-
ral of them, and ſaid to be of great Antiquity. Aquinas, Albertus,
and others, aſcribe it to Bede, but many to S. Auſtin ; and therefore
Com. in Gen. Ambrofius Catharinus is angry with their great Schoolman, that he
fhould derive it from Bede, feeing S. Auſtin writing to Orofius, de-
liver'd this doctrine, which ſurely, ſays he, S. Auſtin neither feigi'd
nor dream'd only, but had receiv'd it from Antiquity: And from ſo
great Antiquity, that it was no leſs than Apoſtolical, if we credit
Sum. Theol. par. Albertus Magnus, and the ancient Books he appeals to; for He ſays
2.tract. 1 3.9.79 this Tradition was deriv'd as high as from S. Thomas the Apoſtle. His
words are theſe, after he had deliver'd his own opinion, Hoc tamen
dico,&c. But this I ſay, without prejudice to the better opinion, for ?
have found it in fome moſt ancient Books, that Thomas the Apoſtle m.is
the Author of that opinion, which is uſually attributed to Bede and Stra-
bus, namely, Thar Paradiſe was fo high as to reach to the Lunar Circle. But
thus much concerning this Opinion, and concerning Antiquity,
To conclude all, we ſee this Theory, which was drawn only by
a thred of Reafon, and the Laws of Nature, abſtractly from all An-
tiquity, notwithſtanding caſts a light upon many paſſages there,
which were otherwiſe accounted fictions, or unintelligible truths ;
and though we do not alledge theſe as proofs of the Theory, for it
carries its own light and proof with it, yet whether we will or no,
they do mutually confirm, as well as illuſtrate, one another ; And
tis a pleaſurealfo, when one hath wrought out truth by meer dint of
thinking, and examination of cauſes, and propos'd it plainly and
openly, to meet with it again amongſt the Ancients, diſguis’d, and
in an old faſhion'd dreſs: 'fcarce to be known or diſcover'd, but by
thoſe that before-hand knew it very well. And it would be a further
pleaſure and ſatisfaction, to have render'd thoſe Doctrines and No-
tions, for the future, intelligible and uſeful to others, as well as de
lightful to our felves.
CH A P.
Chap.9. Concerning the Prim.Earth and Paradiſe. 187
CHAP. IX.
A general objection againſt this Theory, viz. That if there
had been ſuch a Primitive Earth, as we pretend, the
fame of it would have founded throughout all Antiquity.
The Eaſtern and Weſtern Learning conſider’d. The moſt con-
fiderable Records of both are loft. What footſteps remain
relating to this ſubje&t. The Jewiſh and Chriſtian Learn-
ing conſider’d; how far loft as to this Argument, and
what Notes or Traditions remain. Laſtly, How far the
Sacred Writings bear witneſs to it. The Providential
condu&t of Knowledge in the World. A recapitulation and
ſtate of the Theory.
HA
Aving gone through the two Firſt Parts, and the two First
Books of this Theory, that concern the Primitive World, the
Univerſal Deluge, and the ſtate of Paradiſe, We have leiſure now
to reflect a little, and conlider what may probably be objected
againſt a Theory of this nature. I do not inean ſingle objections
againſt ſingle parts, for thoſe inay be many, and ſuch as I cannot
fore-ſee; but what may be ſaid againſt the body and ſubſtance of
the Theory, and the credibility of it, appearing new and ſurpri-
ling, and
yet
of great extent and importance. This, I fancy, will
induce many to ſay, ſurely this cannot be a reality; for if there
had been ſuch a Primitive Earth, and ſuch a Primitive World as is
here repreſented, and ſo remarkably different from the preſent, it
could not have been ſo utterly forgotten, or lain hid for ſo many
Ages; all Antiquity would haverung of it; the memory of it would
have been kept freſh by Books or Traditions. Can we imagine, that
it Mould lie buried for ſome thouſands of years in deep ſilence and
oblivion ? and now only when the ſecond World is drawing to an
end, we' begin to diſcover that there was a firſt, and that of another
make and order froin this.
To ſatisfie this objection, or ſurmiſe rather, it will be convenient
to take a good large ſcope and compaſs in our Diſcourſe; We muſt
not ſuppoſe, that this Primitive World hath been wholly loſt out
of the memory of Man, or out of Hiſtory, for we have ſome Hiſto-
fy and Chronology of it preſerv’d by Moſes, and likewiſe in the
Monuments of the Ancients, more or leſs; for they all ſuppos'd a
World before the Deluge. But 'tis the Philoſophy of this Primitive
World that hath been loſt in a great meaſure; what the ſtate of
Nature was then, and wherein it differ'd from the preſent or Poſt-
diluvian order of things. This, I confefs, hath been little taken
notice of; it hath been generally thought or preſum'd, that the
World before the Flood was of the fame form and conſtitution
B b 2
with
188
Воок ІІ.
I be I beory of the Earth.
with the preſent World: This we do not deny, but rather think it
deſigu'd and Providential, that there Mould not remain a clear and
full knowledge of that firſt ſtate of things ; and we may ealily fup-
poſe how it inight decay and periſh, if we conſider how little of tlie
remote Antiquities of the World have ever been brought down to
our knowledge.
The Greeks and Rom.1ns divided the Ages of the World into three
periods or intervals, whereof they call’d the frit the Obſcure Period,
the ſecond the Fabulous, and the third Hiſtorical. The dark and
obſcure Period was from the beginning of the World to the Deluge ;
what paſs’d then, either in Nature or amongſt Men, they have no
Records, no account, by their own confeſion; all that ſpace of time
was cover'd with darkneſs and oblivion; ſo that we ought rather
to wonder at thoſe remains they have, and thoſe broken notions of
the Golden Age, and the conditions of it, how they were fav’d out
of the common ſhipwrack, than to expect from them the Philoſo-
phy of that World, and all its differences from the preſent. And as
for tlie other Nations that pretend to greater Antiquities, to more
ancient Hiſtory and Chronology, from
what is left of their Monu
ments, many will allow only this difference, that their fabulous
Age begun more high, or that they had more ancient Fables.
But beſides that our expectations cannot be great from the learn
ing of the Gentiles, we have not the means or opportunity to in-
form our felves well what Notions they did leave us concerning
the Primitive World ; for their Books and Monuments are gene-
rally loſt, or lie hid unknown to us. The Learning of the World
may be divided into the Eaſtern Learning and the Weſtern ; and
I look upon the Eaſtern as far more conſiderable for Philoſophical
Antiquities, and Philoſophical Concluſions; I ſay Goncluſions, for I
do not believe either of them had any conſiderable Theory, or Con-
texture of Principles and Concluſions together : But 'tis certain,
that in the Eaſt, from what Source ſoever it came, Humane or Di-
vine, they had ſome extraordinary Doctrines and Notions diſperſt
amongſt thein. Now as by the Weſtern Learning we underſtand
that of the Greeks and Romans ; ſo by the Eaſtern, that which was
amongſt the Ægyptians, Phænicians, Chaldæans, Aſyrians, Indians,
Athiopians, and Perfians; and of the Learning of theſe Nations, how
little have we now left? except fome Fragments and Citations in
Greek Authors, what do we know of them? The modern Brac-
mans, and the Perſées or Pagan Perſians, have ſome broken remains
of Traditions relating to the Origin and Changes of the World:
But if we had, not only thoſe Books intire, whereof we have now
the gleanings and reverſions only, but all that have periſht beſides,
eſpecially in that famous Library at Alexandria ; if thefe, I ſay,
were all reſtor’d to the World again, we might promiſe our ſelves
the fatisfaction of ſeeing more of the Antiquities, and Natural Hi-
ſtory of the firſt World, than we have now left, or can reaſonably
expect. That Library we ſpeak of, at Alexandria, was a Collection,
beſides Greek Books, "of Ægyptian, Chaldean, and all the Faſtern
Learning; and Cedrenus makes it to conliſt of an hundred thouſand
Volumes : But fofephus faith, when the Tranſlation of the Bible by
the
Chap.9. Concerning the Prim.Earth,and Paradiſe
189
. i
che Septuagint was to be added to it, Demetrius Phalerius ( who was
Keeper or Governour of it ) told the King then, that he had already
two hundred thouſand Volumes, and that he hop'd to make them
five hundred thouſand; and he was better than his word, or his
Succeſſors for him, for Ammianus Marcellinus, and other Authors,
report
them to have increas'd to ſeven hundred thouſand. This Li.
brary was unfortunately burnt in the ſacking of Alexandria by Cafar,
and conlidering that all theſe were ancient Books, and generally of
the Ealtern Wiſdom, 'twas an ineſtiinable and irreparable loſs to the
Commonwealth of Learning. In like manner we are told of a vaſt
Library of Books of all Arts and Sciences, in China, burnt by the
command or caprice of one of their Kings. Wherein, the Chineſes,
according to their vanity, were us’d to ſay, greater riches were loſt,
than will be in the laſt Conflagration.
We are told alſo of the Abyfline or Æthiopick Library as ſomething
very extraordinary. 'Twas formerly in great reputation, but is now,
I ſuppoſe, embezil'd and loſt
. But I was extremely ſurpriz'd by a
Treatiſe brought to me ſome few months ſince, wherein are men-
tion'd ſome Æthiopick Antiquities relating to the Primæral Earth
and the Deluge: To both which they give ſuch characters and pro-
perties, as are in effect the very fame with thoſe aſſign’d them in this
Theory. They ſay the Firſt Earth was much greater than the pre-
ſent, higher and more advanc'd into the Air : That it was ſinootli
and regular in its ſurface, without Mountains or Valleys, but hol-
low within: and was ſpontaneouſly fruitful, without plowing or
ſowing. This was its firſt Itate, but when Mankind became de.
generate and outragious with Pride and Violence, The angry Gods,
as they ſay, by Earthquakes and Concuſſions broke the habitable
Orb of the Earth, and thereupon the Subterraneous Water's guſhing
out, drown'd it in a Deluge, and deſtroy'd Mankind. Upon this
fraction, it came into another Form, with a Sea, Lakes and Rivers,
as we now have. And thoſe parts of the broken Earth, that ſtood
above the Waters, became Mountains, Rocks, Itlands, and ſo muchi
of the Land as we now inhabit. This account is given us by Bar-
nardinus Ramazzinus, ( in his Treatiſe De Fontium Mutinenfium Sca-
turigine *. ) Taken from a Book Writ
by Franciſco Patricio, to whom this * Pag. 41. Franciſcus Patricius, l'ir eru litione fat cla-
wonderful Tradition was deliver'd
rus, in quotan libello fuo de Antiquorum Rhetorici,
Italico idiomate conſcripto, ac lenetiis impreſo fer Fran-
by perſons of credit, from an Athi- ciſcum Senenſem, Dialogo primo fatis lepidam narrationem
opian Philoſoplier then in Spain. I have five Caftilioneo audivifė, pllum verò a Philofopho quodam
not yet had the good fortune to ſee abysſino in Hiſpania accepiſſe. Narrabat ergo Sapiens
that Book of Franciſco Patricio, 'tis writ Ille Aby linus in antiquiſſimis Athiopix Annulilus ile-
in Italian, with this Title, Della Retori: firiptam eſſe hiftoriam perditionis humani generis cum dif-
rustionis totiu's Terrie. In Mündi ſcilicet primordiis fu-
ca degli Antichi: Printed at l'enice, 1562. ille Terram multo ampliorem . quàm nunc eſt, ac cælo
This ſtory indeed, deſerves to be enqui- proximiorem, perfeétè rorundam, fine Montilus, ac Valle-
tus, tot.17 tamen intus inyernol.im ad inſtur ſpongie, ho-
red after, for we do not any where, a mineſque in illi habitantes, ac athere pariſino gau.den-
mongſt the Ancients, meet with ſuch a tes, jucundum vum duxiſſe, Terri ingrati optimis fruges,
full and explicit narration of the ſtate Auxum homines fuperbil clati a prikâ illâ bonitate deſii-
fructus ferente. Cum autem poft diuturnum fæculorum
of the Firſt and Second Earth. That viffent, Dcos iratos Terrans edeo validè concupiffe, ut m.i.
which coines neareſt to it are thoſe ac- jor illius pars intra proprias cavernas deciderit, tue hoc
pacto Ajuim in latebroſis rarellibus ante concilim, ex-
counts we find in Plato, from the Egyp- priflim violenter fuiſſe, asque ita Fontes, Flumina, Licus
+
11.111
190 The Theory of the Earth. Book II.
De Cir, Dei
lib. 6.
Dion. Hallic.
Ant. Rorn.
lib. 4.
Mure ipſum ortum duxiffe. Eam vero Terræ fortionem tian Antiquities, in his Timans, Politicus,
que inıya bas (avernas non decidiſſet, fed reliqui elatior
and Phædo, of another Earth and aro-
ftetiffet, Montium formam 'exhibuifle. Infulas porrò
ligpulos in medio miri nil aliud efe nifi ſegmenti Terre
ther ſtate of Nature and Mankind. But
cavernoſce ab illo totius tertenc molis precipiti caſu Ju-
none of them are ſo full and diſtinctas
ferſtitis.
this Ethiopian Doctrine.
As for the Weſtern Learning, we may remember what the
eyptian Prieſt fays to Solon in Plato's Timæus, Tou Greeks are alw.ips
Children, and know nothing of Antiquity; And if the Grecki were
ſo, much more the Romans, who came after them in time, and for
fo great a People, and ſo much civiliz’d, never any had lefs Philo-
ſophy, and leis of the Sciences amongſt them than the Romans had;
They ſtudied only the Art of Speaking, of Governing, and of Fight-
ing: and left the reſt to the Greeks and Eaſtern Nations, as unprof-
table. Yet we have reaſon to believe, that the beſt Philoſophical
Antiquities that the Romans had, perilht with the Books of Varro,
of Numa Pompilius, and of the ancient Sibyls
. Varro writ, as S. Huſiin
tells us a multitude of Volumes, and of various ſorts, and I had
rather retrieve his works, than the works of any other Roman Author;
not his Etymologies and Criticiſins, where we ſee nothing adini-
rable, but his Theologia Phyfica, and his Antiquit.tes; which in all
probability would have given us inore light into remote times,
and the Natural Hiſtory of the paſt World, than all the Latin Au-
thor's beſides have done. He has left the foremention'd diſtinction
of three Periods of time; He had the doctrine of the Mundane
Egg, as we ſee in Probus Grammaticus; and he gave us that obſerva-
tion of the Star l’enus, concerning the great change ſhe ſuffer'd about
the time of our Deluge.
Numa Pompilius was doubtleſs a contemplative Man, and 'tis
thought that he underſtood the true Syſtem of the World, and re-
preſented the Sun by his l'eſtal Fire ; though, methinks, Teſta does
not ſo properly refer to the Sun, as to the Earth, which hath a Sa-
cred fire too, that is not to be extinguiſht. He order'd his Books
to be buried with him, which were found in a Stone Cheſt by him,
four hundred years after his death ; They were in all Twenty-four,
whereof Twelve contain’d Sacred Rites and Ceremonies, and the
other Twelve the Philoſophy and Wiſdom of the Greeks; The Ro-
mans gave them to the Prætor Petilius to peruſe ; and to make his
report to the Senate, whether they were fit to be publiſht or no:
The Prator made a wiſe politick report, that the Contents of them
might be of dangerous conſequence to the eſtabliſit Laws and Reli
gion; and thereupon they were condeinn'd to be burnt, and Poste
rity was depriv'd of that ancient Treaſure, whatſoever it was. What
the Nine Books of the Sibyl contain’d, that were offer d to King Tar-
quin, we little know; She valued them high, and the higher ſtill,
the more they ſeem'd to Night or neglect thet ; which is a piece of
very natural indignation or contempt, when one is ſatisfied of the
worth of what they offer. 'Tis likely they reſpected, beſides the
fate of Rome, the fate and feveral periods of the World, both past
and to come, and the moſt myſtical paſſages of them. And in thulu
Authors and Monuments are lost the greateſt hopes of Natural and
Philoſophick Antiquities, that we could have had from the Roman
And
T
Chap.9. Concerning the Prim. Eartb,and Paradiſe. 191
1
>
I
1
And as to the Greeks, their beſt and Sacred Learning was not
originally their own; they enricht themſelves with the fpoils of the
Ealt, and the iemains we have of that Eaſtern Learning, is what
we pick out of the Greeks; whoſe works, I believe, if třey were
intirely extant, we ſhould not need to go any further for witneſſes
to confirm all the principal parts of this Theory. With what regret
does one read in Laertius, Suidas, and others, the promiſing titles
of Books writ by the Greek Philoſophers, hundreds or thouſands,
whereof there is not one now extant; and thoſe that are extant are
generally but fragments : Thoſe Authors alſo that have writ their
Lives, or collected their Opinions, have done it confus’dly and
injudiciouſly. I ſhould hope for as much light and inſtruction, as
to the Original of the World, from Orpheus alone, if his works had
been preſerv'd, as froin all that is extant now of the other Greek
Philoſophers. We may fee from what remains of him, that he un-
derſtood in a good meaſure, how the Earth riſe froin a Chaos, what
was its external Figure, and what the form of its inward ſtructure;
The opinion of the Oval Figure of the Earth is aſcrib'd to Orpheus
and his Diſciples; and the doctrine of the Mundane Egg is ſo pecu-
liarly his, that 'tis callid by Proclus, The Orphick Egg; not that he
was the firſt Author of that doctrine, but the firſt that brought it
into Greece.
Thus much concerning the Heathen Learning, Eaſtern and We
ſtern, and the ſmall remains of it in things Philoſophical; 'tis no
wonder then if the account we have lefc us froin them of the Pri-
mitive Earth; and the Antiquities of the Natural World be very
imperfect. And yet we have trac'd (in the precedent Chapter, and
inore largely in our Latin Treatiſe ) the foot-ſteps of ſeveral parts
of this Theory amongſt the Writings and Traditions of the An-
cients : and even of thoſe parts that ſeem the moſt ſtrange and
ſingular, and that are the Baſis upon which the reſt ſtand. We have
ſhown there, that their account of the Chaos, though it feem'd to
many but a Poetical Rhapſody, contain'd the true myſtery of the
forination of the Primitive Earth. We have alſo ſhown upon the tell. Theor.
ſame occaſion, that both the External Figure and Internal Form of lib. 2.6.7.
that Earth was compriz'd and ſignified in their ancient doctrine of
the Mundane Egg, which hath been propagated through all the Ibid. Cap. Io.
Learned Nations. And laſtly, As to the lituation of that Earth,
and the change of its poſture ſince, that the memory of that has
been kept up, we have brought ſeveral teſtimonies and indications
from the Greek Philoſophers. And theſe were the three great and
fundamental properties of the Primitive Earth, upon which all the
other depend, and all its differences from the preſent Order of
Nature. You ſee then, though Providence hath ſuffer'd the ancient
Heathen Learning and their Monuments, in a great part, to periſh,
yet we are not left wholly without witneſſes amongſt them, in a ſpe-
culation of this great importance.
You will ſay, it may be, though this account, as to the Books
and Learning of the Heathen, inay be lookt upon as reaſonable, yet
we inight expect however, from the Jewiſh and Chriſtian Author's,
a more full and ſatisfactory account of that Primitive Earth, and of
the
Ibil
192
Book ll.
The Theory of the Earth.
the Old World. Firſt, as to the Jews, 'tis well known that they
have no ancient Learning, unleſs by way of Tradition, amongit
them. There is not a Book extant in their Language, excepting
the Canon of the Old Teſtament, that hath not been writ lince
our Saviour's time. They are very bad Maſters of Antiquity,
and they may ir fome meaſure be excus'd, becauſe of their ſeveral
captivities, diſperſions, and deſolations. In the Babyloniſh captivity
their Temple was ranſack'd, and they did not preſerve, as is thought,
ſo much as the Autograph or original Manuſcript of the Law, nor
the Books of thoſe of their Prophets that were then extant, and
kept in the Temple ; And at their return from the Captivity after
ſeventy years, they ſeem to have had forgot their Native Language
ſo much, that the Law was to be interpreted to them in Chaldee,
after it was read in Hebrew ; for ſo I underſtand that interpretation
C. 8.7,8. in Nehemiah.
in Nehemiah. 'Twas a great Providence, methinks, that they ſhould
any way preſerve their Law, and other Books of Scripture, in the
Captivity, for ſo long a time ; for 'tis likely they had not the li-
berty of uſing them in any publick worſhip, ſeeing they return'd
ſo ignorant of their own Language, and, as 'tis thought, of their Al-
phabet and Character too. And if their Sacred Books were hardly
preſerv'd, we inay eaſily Believe all others periſht in that publick
deſolation.
Yet there was another deſtruction of that Nation, and their
Temple, greater than this, by the homans ; and if there were any
remains of Learning preſerv'd in the former ruine, or any recruits
made ſince that time, this ſecond deſolation would ſweep them all
away. And accordingly we ſee they have nothing left in their
Tongue, beſides the Bible, ſo ancient as the deſtruction of Jeruſi-
lem. Theſe, and other publick calamities of the Jewiſh Nation,
may reaſonably be thought to have waſted their Records of ancient
Learning, if they had any; for, to ſpeak truth, the Jews are a people
of little curioſity, as to Sciences and Philoſophical enquiries : They
were very tenacious of their own cuſloms, and careful of thoſe
Traditions that did reſpect them, but were not remarkable, that
I know of, or thought great Proficients in any other fort of Learn-
ing. There has been a great fame, 'tis true, of the Jeriſh Gabalai,
and of great myſteries contain'd in it; and, I believe, there was once
a Traditional doctrine amongſt ſome of them, that had extraordi-
nary Notions and Concluſions: But where is this now to be
found? The Eſſenes were the likelieſt Sect, one would think, to re-
tain ſuch doctrines, but 'tis probable they are now ſo mixt with
things fabulous and fantaſtical, that what one ſhould alledge from
thence would be of little or no authority. One Head in this Cabala
was the doctrine of the Sephirith, and though the explication of
vid. Men, ben them be uncertain, the Inferiour Sephiroth in the Corporval World
Ifr. de Creat. cannot ſo well be appli'd to any thing, as to thoſe ſeveral Orbs
probl. 28.
and Regions, infolding one another, whereof the Primigenial Earıb
was compos’d. Yet ſuch conjuitures and applications, I know, are
of no validity, but in confort with better Arguients. I have often
thought alſo, that their firſt and ſecond Temple repreſented the first
and ſecond Earth or World; and thar of Ezekiel's, which is the
tird.
Chap.9. Concerning the Prim.Earth and Paradiſe. 193
.
!
pos
third, is ſtill to be erected, the moſt beautiful of all, when this lice
cond Temple of the World thall be burnt down. If the Prophe
cies of l.rioch had been preſervd, and taken into the Canon by
Ezra, after their return from Babylon, when the Collection of their
Sacred Books is luppos d to have been made, we might probably.have
had a conſiderable account there, both of times paſt and to come, of
Antiquities and futuritions ; for thoſe Prophecies are generally ſup-
d to have contain d both the firſt and ſecond fate of this Earth,
and all the periods of it. But as this Book is loſt to us, ſo I look
upon all others that pretend to be Ante-Mofaical or Patriarchal, as
Spurious and Fabulous.
Thus much concerning the ferrs. As for Chriſtian Authors, their
knowledge muſt be from ſome of theſe foremention’d, Jens or Hea-
theirs; or elſe by Apoßolical Tradition: For the Chriſtian Fathers
were not very ſpeculative, ſo as to raiſe a Theory from their own
thoughts and contemplations, concerning the Origin of the Earth.
We have inſtanc'd, in the lait Chapter, in a Chriſtian Tradition con
cerning Paradiſe, and the high fituation of it, which is fully conſo-
nant to the ſite of the Primitive Earth, where Paradiſe ſtood, and
doth ſeem plainly to refer to it, being unintelligible upon any other
ſuppolition. And 'twas, I believe, this elevation of Paradiſe, and
the penſile ſtructure of that P:zradiſiacal Earth, that gave occaſion to
Celfus, as we ſee by Origen's anſwer, to ſay, that the Chriſtian Para-
dife was taken from the penlile Gardens of Alcinous : But we may
ſee now what was the ground of ſuch expreſſions or Traditions a-
i mongſt the Ancients, which Providence left to keep mens minds a
wake; not fully to inſtruct them, but to confirm thein in the truth,
when it ſhould come to be made known in other methods. We
have noted alſo above, that the ancient Books and Authors amongſt
the Chriſtians, that were moſt likely to inform usin this Argument,
have periſht, and are loſt out of the World, ſuch as Ephrem Syrus
de ortu rerum, and Teriul ian de Paradiſo; and that piece which is ex-
tant, of M.Ses Bar Cepha's upon this ſubject, receives more light
from our Hypotheſis, than from any other I know ; for, correcting
fome miſtakes about the Figure of the Earth, which the Ancients
were often guilty of, the obſcurity or confuſion of that Diſcourſe
in other things, may be eaſily rectifi’d, if compar'd with this The-
ory.
Of this nature alſo is that Tradition that is common both to firs
and Chriſtians, and which we have often mention'd before, that
there was a perpetual ſerenity, and perpetual Equinox in Paradise ;
which cannot be upon this Earth, not ſo much as under the Equi-
noctial; for they have a ſort of Winter and Summer there, a courſe
of Rains at certain times of the Year, and great inequalities of the
Air, as to heat and cold, moiſture and drought. They had alſo
Traditions amongſt them, That there mus 120 Rain from the beginning Lat. Treat.
of the World till the Deluge, and that there arere 120 Muuntains till the Lib. 2.6.10.
Flood, and ſuch like; "Theſe, you fee, point directly at ſuch an
Earth, as we have deſcrib'd. And I call theſe Tv.aditions, becauſe
we cannot find the Original Authors of them; The ancient ordinary
Gloſs ( upon Geneſis ) u bich ſome make Eight hundred years old,
mentions
Сс
194 1
Book II.
The Theory of the Earth.
mentions both theſe Opinions ; ſo does Hiſtoria Scholaftica, Alcuinus,
Rabanus Maurus, Lyranus, and ſuch Collectors of Antiquity. Bede
alſo relates that of the plainneſs or ſmoothneſs of the Antediluvian
Earth. Yet theſe are reported Traditionally, as it were, naming no
Authors or Books from whence they were taken ; Nor can it be
imagin'd that they feign'd them themſelves; to what end or pur-
poſe? it ſerv'd no intereſt; or upon what ground? Seeing they had
no Theory that could lead them to ſuch Notions as theſe, or that
could be ſtrengthen’d and confirm'd by them. Thoſe opinions alſo
of the Fathers which we recited in the ſeventh Chapter, placing
Paradiſe beyond the Torrid Zone, and making it therefore inaccel
fible, ſuit very well to the form, qualities, and bipartitiori of the
Primæval Earth, and ſeem to be grounded upon them.
Thus much inay ſerve for a ſhort Survey of the ancient Learning,
to give us a reaſonable account, why the memory and knowledge
of the Primitive Earth ſhould be ſo much loſt out of the World;
and what we retain of it ſtill, which would be far more, I do
not doubt, if all Manuſcripts were brought to light, that are yet
extant in publick or private Libraries. The Truth is, one cannot
judge with certa nty, neither what things have been recorded and
preſervd in the monuments of Learning, nor what are ſtill; not
what have been, becauſe ſo many of thoſe Monuments are lost:
The Alexandrian Library, which we ſpoke of before, ſeems to have
been the greateſt Collection that ever was made before Chriſtianity,
and the Conſtantinopolitan (begun by Conftantine, and deſtroy'd in
the Fifth Century, when it was rais'd to the number, as is ſaid, of
one hundred twenty thouſand Yolumes) the moſt valuable that was
ever ſince, and both theſe have been permitted by Providence to
periſh in the mercileſs Flames. Beſides thoſe devaſtations of Books
and Libraries that have been made in Chriſtendom, by the Northern
barbarous Nations overflowing Europe, and the Saracens and Turks
great parts of Aſia and Africk. It is hard therefore to pronounce
what knowledge hath been in the World, or what accounts of An-
tiquity ; Neither can we well judge what remain, or of whạt things
the memory may be ſtill latently conſerv'd; for beſides thoſe Ma-
nuſcripts that are yet unexamin’d in theſe parts of Chriſtendom,
there are many, doubtleſs, of good value in other parts ; Beſides
thoſe that lie hid in the unchriſtianiz'd dominions. The Library
of Fez is ſaid to contain thirty two thouſand Volumes in Arabick;
and though the Arabick Learning was moſtwhat Weſtern,and therefore
of leſs account, yet they did deal in Eaſtern Learning too; for
Avicenna writ a Book with that Title, Philofophia Orientalis. There
may be alſo in the Eaſt thouſands of Manuſcripts unknown to us,
of greater value than moſt Books we have: And as to thoſe ſub-
jects we are treating of, I ſhould promiſe my ſelf more light and
conīrmation from the Syriack Authors than from any others. Theſe
things being conſider'd, we can make bur a very imperfect eſtimate,
what evidences are left us, and what accounts of the Primitive
Earth, and if theſe deductions and defalcations be made, both for
what Books are wholly loſt, and for what lie aſleep or dead in Li-
braries, we have reaſon to be ſatisfied in a Theory of this naturo,
to
Chap.9. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 195
to hnd to good atteſtations as we have produc'd for the ſeveral parts
of it; which we purpoſe to enlarge upon conſiderably at another time
and occaſion.
But to carry this Objectiun as far as inay be, let us ſuppoſe it to
be urg'd ſtill in the laſt place, that though theſe Humane Writings
have perilht, or be imperfect, yet in the Divine Writings at leait,
we night expect, that the memory of the Old World, and of the
Priinitive Earth ihould have been preſerv'd. To this I anſwer in
ihort, That we could not expect in the Scriptures any Natural The-
ory of that Earth, nor any account of it, but what was general ;
and this we have, both by the Tehom-Rabba of Moſes, and the de-
ſcription of the faine Abyſs in other places of Scripture, as we have
Thown at large in the Firſt Book, Chap. 7. And alſo by the deſcri-
ption which S. Peter hath given of the Ante-diluvian Heavens and
Earth, and their different conſtitution from the preſent : which is
alſo prov'd by the Rainbow, not ſeen in the firſt World. You will
ſay, it may be, that that place of S. Peter is capable of another inter- 2 Pet. 3. 5,6,
pretation ; ſo are moſt places of Scripture, if you ſpeak of a bare capa-&c.
city; they are capable of more than one interpretation; but that
which is moſt natural, proper and congruous, and ſuitable to the
words, ſuitable to the Argument, and ſuitable to the Context, where-
in is nothing ſuperfluous or impertinent, That we prefer and
accept
of as the moſt realonable interpretation. Beſides, in ſuch Texts as re-
late to the Natural World, if of two interpretations propos’d, one
agrees better with the Theory of Nature than the other, cæteris
paribus, that ought to be prefer'd. And by theſe two rules we are
willing to be try'd, in the expoſition of that reinarkable Diſcourſe of
S. Peter's, and to ſtand to that fence which is found moſt agreeable
to thein.
Give me leave to conclude the whole Diſcourſe with this general
Conſideration ; 'Tis reaſonable to ſuppoſe, that there is a Provi-
dence in the conduct of Knowledge, as well as of cther affairs on the
Earth ; and that it was not deſign d that all the myſteries of Nature
and Providence ſhould be plainly and clearly underſtood throughout
all the Ages of the World; but that there is an Order eſtabliſht for
this, as for other things, and certain Periods and Seaſons; And what
was inade known to the Ancients only by broken Concluſions and
Traditions, will be known (in the latter Ages of the World ) in a
more perfect way, by Principles and Theories. The increaſe of
Knowledge being that which changeth ſo much the face of the World,
and the itate of Humane affairs, I do not doubt but there is a par
ticular care and ſuperintendency for the conduct of it; by what ſteps
and degrees it ſhould come to light, at what Seaſons and in what
Ages; what evidence ſhould be left, either in Scripture, Reaſon, or
Tradition, for the grounds of it; how clear or obſcure, how diſperit
or united; all theſe things were weigh’d and conſider'd, and ſuch
meaſures taken as beſt ſuit the deſigns of Providence, and the general
project and inethod propos'd in the government of the World. And
I make no queſtion but the ſtate both of the Old World, and of that
which is to come, is exhibited to us in Scripture in ſuch a meaſure
and proportion, as is fit for this fore-mentioned purpoſe ; not as the
Cc 2
Articles
3
:
196
Book II.
The Theory of the Earth.
Articles of our Faith, or the precepts of a good Life, which he that
runs may read: but to the attentive and reflexive, to thoſe thit
are unprejudic'd, and to thoſe that are inquilitive, and have their
minds
open and prepar'd for the diſcernment of myſteries of ſuch a
nature.
Thus much in anſwer to that general Objection which might be
made againſt this Theory, That it is not founded in Antiquity. I
do not doubt but there may be many particular Objections againli
Parts and Sections of it, and the expoling it thus in cur own
Tongue may excite ſome or other, it may be, to make them; but
if any be ſo minded, I deſire (if they be Scholars ) that it may ra-
ther be in Latin, as being more proper for a ſubject of this nature;
and alſo that they would keep themſelves cloſe to the ſubſtance of
the Theory, and wound that as much as they can ; but to make
excurſions upon things accidental or collateral, that do not deſtroy
the Hypotheſis, is but to trouble the World with impertinencies
.
Now the ſubſtance of the Theory is this, THAT there was a Pri-
mitive Earth of another form from the preſent, and inhabited by
Mankind till the Deluge; That it had thoſe properties and condi-
tions that we have aſcrib'd to it, namely, a perpetual Equinox or
Spring, by reaſon of its right ſituation to the Sun; Was of an Oval
Figure, and the exteriour face of it ſmooth and uniform, withoni
Mountains or a Sea. That in this Earth Rood Paradiſe; the do
ctrine whereof cannot be underſtood but upon ſuppoſition of this
Primitive Earth, and its properties. Then that the diſruption and
fall of this Earth into the Abyſs, which lay under it, was that which
made the Univerſal Deluge, and the deſtruction of the Old World ;
And that neither Noah's Flood, nor the preſent form of the Earth
can be explain’d in any other niethod that is rational, nor by any
other Cauſes that are intelligible: at leaſt that have been hitherto
propos'd to the World. Theſe are the Vitals of the Theory, and
the primary Affertions, whereof I do freely profeſs my full belief:
and whoſoever by folid reaſons will ſhow me in an Errour, and
undeceive me, I ſhall be very much oblig'd to him. There are
other leſſer Concluſions which fow from theſe, and may be calld
Secondary, as that the LongXvity of the Ante-diluvians depended
upon their perpetual Equinox, and the perpetual equality and ſere
nity of the Air; That the Torrid Zone in the Primitive Earth was
uninhabitable ; And that all their Rivers Aow'd from the extreme
parts of the Earth towards the Equinoctial; there being neither
Rain, nor Rainbow, in the temperate and habitable Regions of it;
And laſtly, that the place of Paradiſe, according to the opinion of
Antiquity, ( for I determine no place by the Theory) was in the
Southern Hemiſphere. Theſe, I think, are all truly deduc'd and
prov'd in their ſeveral ways, though they be not ſuch effential parts
of the Theory, as the former. There are alſo beſides, many par.
ticular Explications that are to be conſider'd with more liberty and
Fatitude, and may be perhaps upon better thoughts, or better obſerva-
tions, corrected, without any prejudice to the General Theory. Thoſe
places of Scripture, which we have cited, I think, are all truly ap-
ply'd ; and I have noi mention d Mofis's Coſinopæia, becauſe I thought
it
:
. 197
Chap. 1o. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe
it deliver'd by him as a Lawgiver, not as a Philoſopher; which i
intend to ſhow at large in another Treatiſe, not thinking that dif
cuſſion proper for the Vulgar Tongue. Upon the whole, we are
to remember; that ſome allowances are to be made for every Hypo-
theſis that is new propos d and untry'd : and that we ought not out
of levity of wit, or any private deſigni, diſcountenance free and fair
Ellays : nor from any other motive, but the only love and concern
of Truth.
CHAP. X.
Concerning the Author of Nature.
SE
Eeing the Theory which we liave propos'd in this work is of
that extent and comprehenſion, that it begins with the firſt foun-
dation of this World, and is to reach to the laſt Period of it, in
one continued Series or chain of Nature ; It will not be improper,
before we conclude, to make ſome reflections and remarks what
Nature is, and upon what ſuperiour Cauſes ſhe depends in all her
Motions and Operations: And this will lead us to the diſcovery of
the Author of Nature, and to the true Notion and ſtate of Natural
Providence, which ſeems to have been hitherto very much neglected,
or little underſtood in the World. And 'tis the more reafonable
and fxting, that we ſhould explain theſe Notions before we fut
up this Treatiſe, leſt thoſe Natural Explications which we have
given of the Deluge, and other things, ſhould be miſtaken or inif-
apply'dd; Seeing ſome are apt to run away with pieces of a Diſ-
courſe, which they think applicable to their purpoſe, or which
they can inaliciouſly repreſent, without attendirig to the ſcope or juſt
limitations of what is ſpoken.
By Nature in general is underſtood All the Powers of Finite Beings,
with the Laws eſtabliſht for their action and conduct according to the
ordinary courſe of things. And this extends both to Intellectual
Beings and Corporeal ; but ſeeing 'tis only the Material (Vorld that
hath been the ſubject of our Diſcourſe, Nature, as to that, may be
defin'd, the Powers of Matter, with the Laws eſtabliſht for their
action and conduct. Seeing allo Matter hath no action, whether
from it ſelf, or impreſt upon it, but Motion, as to the Corporeal
World Nature is no more tliari the powers and capacities of Mat-
ter, with the Laws that govern the Motioris of it. And this defini-
tion is ſo plain and eaſie, that, I believe, all parties will agree
in it; There will alſo be no great controverſie what theſe Laws
are, As that one part of Matrer cannot penetrate another, for be
in ſeveral places at once; That the greater Body overcomes the leſs,
and the ſwifter the flower ; That all motion is in a right line, till
ſomething obſtruct it or divert it; which are points little diſputed
as' to the matter of fact ; but the points concerning which the contro
verſic
1
198
The Theory of the Earth. Book 1
1
1
1
1
verlie ariſeth, and which are to lead us to the Author of Nature,
are theſe, Who or what is the Author of theſe Lams? of this Mo
tion) and even of Matter it ſelf; and of all thoſe modes arid forms
of it which we ſee in Nature ?
Tlie Question uſeth chiefly to be put concerning Motion, how it
came into the World; what the firſt Source of it is, or how Mat-
ter came at firſt to be inov'd ? For the ſimple notion of Matter,
not divided into parts, nur diverſified, doth not imply Motion, tur
Extenſion only; Tis true, froin Extenſion there neceſarily follows
mobility, or a capacity of being mov’d by an External Power, but
not actual or neceſſary Motion
ſpringing from it ſelf. For dimenti
ons, or length, breadth, and depth, which is the idea of Matter, or
of a Body, do no way include local Motion, or tranflation of
parts ;
on the contrary, we do more eaſily and naturally conceive ſimple Ex-
tenſion as a thing Iteddy and fixt, and if we conceive Motion in it,
or in its parts, we muſt ſuperadd ſomething to our firſt thought,
and ſomething that does not flow from Extenſion. As when we
conceive a Figure, a Triangle, Square, or any other, we naturally
conceive it fixt or quieſcent, and if afterwards we imagine it in Mo-
tion, that is purely accidental to the Figure ; in like manner it is ac-
cidental to Matter, that there ſhould be Motion in it, it hath no in-
ward principle from whence that can flow, and its Nature is com-
pleat without it; Wherefore if we find Motion and Action in Mat-
ter, which is of it ſelf a dead in-active Mafs, this ſhould lead us im-
mediately to the Author of Nature, or to ſome External Power di
Itinct from Matter, which is the Cauſe of all Motion in the World.
In ſingle Bodies, and ſingle parts of Matter, we reaclily believe and
conclude, that they do not move, unleſs ſomething move them, and
why ihould we not conclude the ſame thing of the whole maſs? If
a Rock or Mountain cannot move it ſelf, nor divide it felf, either
into great gobbets, or into ſmall powder, why ſhould it not be as impoſ
lible for the whole maſs of Matter to do ſo? 'Tis true, Matter is
capable both of motion and reſt, yet to conceive it undivided, un-
diverſified and unmov'd, is certainly a more ſimple Notion, than to
conceive it divided and moy'd; and this being firit in order of Nature,
and an adequate conceptiun too, we ought to enquire and give our
felves an account how it came out of this ſtate, and by what Cauſes,
or, as we ſaid before, how Motion came firſt into the World.
In the ſecond place, That diverſity which we fee in Nature, both
as to the qualities of Matter, and the compoſitions of it, being one
ſtep further than bare Motion, ought alſo to be a further indication
of the Author of Nature, and to put us upon enquiry into the Cauſes
of this diverſity. There is nothing more uniformi than ſimple Exten-
ſion, nothing more the ſame throughout, all of a piece, and all of a
ſort, ſimilar, and like to it ſelf every where, yeri we find the inatter
of the Univerſe diverſified a thouſand ways, into Heavens and Earth,
Air and Water, Stars, Meteors, Light, Darkneſs, Stories, Wood,
Animals, and all Terreſtrial Bodies; Theſe diverſificaticns are ſtill fur-
ther removes from the natural unity and identity of Matter, and a
further "argument of ſome external and ſuperiour power that haili
given theſe different forinis 10 the ſeveral portions of Matter by the
interventien
1
į
}
1
1
1
Chap. 1o. Concerning the Prim.Earth and Paradiſe. 199
-
you
intervention of Motion. For if you exclude the Author of Na-
ture, and ſuppoſe nothing but Matter in the World, take whether
Hypotheſis you will, either that Matter is without Motion of it felf,
or that it is of it ſelf in Motion, there could not ariſe this diverſity,
and theſe compoſitions in it. If it was without Motion, then the
caſe is plain, for it would be nothing but an hard inflexible lump
of impenetrable extenſion, without any diverſity at all
. And if
ſuppoſe it mov'd of it ſelf, or to have an innate Motion, that would
certainly hinder all ſort of natural concretions and compoſitions,
and in effect deſtroy all Continuity. For Motion, if it be eſſential
to Matter, it is eſſential to every Atome of it, and equally diffus'd
throughout all its parts; and all thoſe parts or Atomes would be
equal to one another, and as little as poſſible ; for if Matter was
divided into parts by its own innate Motion, that would melt it
down into parts as little as poſible, and conſequently all equal to
one another, there being no reaſon why you ſhould ſtop thoſe di-
viſions, or the effect of this innate impetus in any one part ſooner
than in another, or in any part indeed till it was divided as much
as was poſſible ; Wherefore upon this principle, or in this method, all
the Matter of the Univerſe would be one liquid or volatile maſs,
ſmaller than pin duſt, nay, than Air or Æther: And there would
be no diverſity of forms, only another fort of identity froin the
former, when we ſuppos'd it wholly without inotion. And ſo,
upon the whole, you lee, that Matter, whether we allow it Moti-
on, or no Motion, could not come into that variety of tempers and
compoſitions in which we find it in the World, without the influ-
ence and direction of a Superiour External Cauſe, which we call
the Author of Nature.
But there is ſtill a further and ſtronger Argument from this Head,
if we conſider not only the diverſity of Bodies, that the maſs of
Matter is cut into, but alſo that that diverſity is regular, and in ſome
parts of it adınirably artful and ingenious. This will not only
lead us to an Author of Nature, but to ſuch an Author as hath
Wiſdom as well as Power. Matter is a brute Being, ſtupid and
ſenſeleſs, and though we ſhould ſuppoſe it to have a force to
move it ſelf, yet that it ſhould be able to meditate and conſult, and
take its meaſures how to fraine à World, a regular and beautiful
fructure, conſiſting of ſuch and ſuch parts and Regions, and adapt-
ed to ſuch and ſuch purpoſes, this would be too extravagant to
imagine; to allow it not only Motion froin it ſelf, but Wit and
Judgment too; and that before it came into any Organical or Ani-
mate compoſition.
You'll ſay, it may be, The Frame of the World was not the re-
ſult of counſel and conſultation, but of neceſſity; Matter being once
in Motion under the conduct of thoſe Laws that are eſſential to it,
it wrought it ſelf by degrees from one ſtate into another, till at
length it came into the preſent form which we call the World.
Theſe are words thrown out at random, without any, pretence of
Sround, only to ſee if they can be confuted; And ſo they may
vaſily be, for we have ſhown alrcady, that if Matter had innate M16-
tion, it would be ſo far from running into the orderly and well
diſpos’d
1
+
200
Bookli.
The Theory of the Earth.
A
diſpos’d frame of the World, that it would run into no frame at
all, into no forms, or compoſitions, or diverſity of Bodies ; but
would either be all Auid, or all ſolid ; either every ſingle particle
in a ſeparate Motion, or all in one continued mals with an univer
ſal tremor, or inclination to move without actual ſeparation ; and
either of theſe two ſtates is far from the form of a World. Second
ly, As to the Laws of Motion, as ſome of them are eſſential to
Matter, ſo others are not demonftrable, but upon ſupposition of
an Author of Nature. And thirdly, Though all the Laws of Mo-
tion be adınitted, they cannot bring Matter into the form of a
World, unleſs ſome meaſures be taken at firſt by an intelligent Be-
ing; I ſay ſome meaſures be taken to determine the primary Mo-
tions upon which the reſt depend, and to put them in a way that
leads to the formation of a World. The maſs inuſt be divided in-
to Regions, and Centers fixt, and Motions appropriated to them;
and it muſt be conſider'd of what magnitude the firſt Bodies, or
the firſt diviſions of Matter ſhould be, and how mov’l: Beſides,
there muſt be a determinate proportion, and certain degree of moti-
on impreſt upon the Univerſal Matter, to qualifie it for the
pro
duction of a World; if the doſe was either too ſtrong or too weak,
the work would miſcarry; and nothing but infinite Wiſdom could
ſee thorough the effects of every proportion, or every new degree
of Motion, and diſcern which was beſt for the beginning, progreſs
,
and perfection of a World. So you ſee the Author of Nature is
no way excluded, or made uſeleſs by the Laws of Motion ; nor it
Matter was promiſcuouſly mov'd would theſe be ſufficient cules of
themſelves to produce a World, or that regular diverſity of Bodies
that compoſe it.
But 'tis hard to ſatisfie Men againſt their inclinations, or their
intereſt : And as the regularity of the Univerſe was always a great
ſtumbling.ſtone to the Epicuræans; ſo they have endeavour'd to
make ſhifts of all ſorts to give an account and anſwer to it, with-
out récourſe to an Intelligent Principle ; and for their Jait refuge,
they ſay, That Chance might bring that to paſs, which Nature
and Neceſſity could not do; The Atorns might hit upon a lucky
ſert of Motions, which though it were caſual and fortuitous, might
happily lead them to the formning of a World. A lucky hit indeed,
for Chance to frame a World: But this is a meer ſhuffle and col-
luſion; for if there was nothing in Nature but Matter, there could
be no ſuch thing as Chance, all would be pure Mechanical Ne
cility; and ſo this anſwer, though it ſeem very different, is the
ſame in effect with the former, and Epicurus with his Atomiſts are
oblig'd to give a juſt mechanical account, how all the parts of
Nature, the moſt compound and elaborate parts not excepted,
riſe from their Atoms by pure neceſſity: There could be no acci-
dental concourſe or coalition of them, every ſtep, every motion,
every compoſition was fatal and neceſſary, and therefore 'tis non-
fence for an Epicurain to talk of Chance, as Chance is oppes'd to
Neceſſity; and if they oppoſe it to Counſel and Wiſdoon, 'tis little bit.
ter than non-fence, to ſay the World and all its furniture rir by
Chance, in that notion of it. But it will deſerve cur parieuce :)
litil:
Chap. 10.Concerning the Prim.Earth,and Paradiſe. 2ci
little to give a more full and diſtinct anſwer to this, ſeeing it reach.
oth all their pleas and evalions at once.
What proof or demonſtration of Wiſdom and Counſel can be
given, or can be deſir’d, that is not found in ſome part of the
World, Animate or Inanimate? We know but a little portion of
the Univerſe, a meer point in compariſon, and a broken point too,
and
yet
in this broken point, or ſome ſınall parcels of it, there is
inore of Art, Counſel and Wiſdom ſhown, than in all the works of
Men taken together, or than in all our Artificial World, In the
conſtruction of the Body of an Animal, there is more of thought
and contrivance, more of exquiſite invention, and fit diſpoſition of
parts, than is in all the Temples, Palaces, Ships, Theaters, or any
other pieces of Architecture the World ever yet ſee: And not Ar-
chitecture only, but all other Mechaniſm whatſoever, Engines,
clock work, or any other, is not comparable to the Body of a
living Creature. Se.ing then we acknowledge theſe artificial works,
wherefoever we meet with them, to be the effects of Wit, Under-
ítariding and Reaſon, is it not manifeſt partiality, or ſtupidity rather,
to deny the Works of Nature, which excel theſe in alì degrees, tó
proceed from an Intelligent Principle? Let then take any piece of
Hunane Ait, or any Machine fram’d by the Wit of Man, and com-
pare it with the Body of an Animal, either for diverſity and mul-
tiplicity of Workmanthip, or curioſity in the minute parts, or juſt
connexion and dependance of one thing upon another, or fit ſub-
ſerviency to the ends propos'd, of life, motion, uſe and ornament to
the Creature, and if in all theſe reſpects they find it ſuperiour to any
work of Humane production, ( as they certainly muſt doj) why
ſhould it be thought to proceed from inferiour and fenceleſs Cauſes;
ought we not in this, as well as in other things, to proportion the
Cauſes to the Effect? and to ſpeak truth, and bring in an honeſt
Verdict for Nature as well as Art?
In the compoſition of a perfect Animal, there are four ſeveral
frames or compages joynd together, The Natural, Vital, Animal,
and Genital; Let thein examine any one of theſe apart, and try if
thoy can find any thing defective or ſuperfluous, or any way
inept, for inatter or form. Let the view the whole Compages
of the Bones, and eſpecially, the admirable conſtruction, texture,
and diſpoſition of the Muſcles, which are joynd with them for
moving the Body, or its parts. Let them take an account of the
little Pipes and Conduits for the Juices and the Liquors, of their
forin and diſtribution; Or let them take any ſingle Organ to exa-
mine, as the Eye, or the Ear, the Hand or the Heart ; In each of
theſe they may diſcover ſuch arguments of Wiſdom, and of Art, as
will either convince them, or confound them; though::ſtill they
mult leave greater undiſcoverd. We know little the infenſible
form and contexture of the parts of the Body, nor the juft method
of their Altion ;. We know not yet the manner, order and cauſes
of the Motion of the Heart, which is the chief Spring of the whole
Machine: and with how little exactneſs do we underſtand the Brain,
and the parts ,belonging to it? Why of that temper and of that
D d
form?
202
Book 11.
The Theory of the Earth.
form: How Motions are propagated there, and how confervid:
How they anſwer the ſeveral operations of the Mind? Why ſuch
little diſcompoſures of it diiturb our Senſes, and upon what little
differences in this the great differences of Wits and Genius's de-
pend. Yet ſeeing in alĩ theſe Orgaris, whoſe make and manner of
action we cannot diſcover, we ſee however by the Effects, that they
are truly fitted for thoſe offices to which Nature hath deſign'd tliem,
we ought in reaſon to admire that Art which we cannot penetrate.
At leaſt we cannot but judge it a thing abſurd, that what we have
not wit enough to find out or comprehend, we ſhould not allow
to be an argument of wit and underſtanding in the Author, or
Inventor of it. This would be againſt all Logick, common Senſe,
and common Decorum. Neither do I think it poſſible to the mind
of Man, while we attend to evidence, to believe that theſe, and
ſuch like works of Nature came by Chance, as they call it, or with
out Providence, forecaſt and Wiſdom, either in the firſt Cauſes, or
in the proximate; in the deſign, or in the execution ; in the pre-
paration to them, or in the finiſhing of them.
Wherefore, in my judgment, if any be of this perſwaſion, it
cannot be ſo inuch the effect of their underſtanding, as of their
diſpoſition and inclination ; and in moral things, mens opinions du
as often ſpring from the one, as from the other. For my part, I
do generally diſtinguiſh of two ſorts of opinions in all men, Inclina-
tión-opinions, and Reaſon'd-opinions ; Opinions that grow upon Mens
Complexions, and Opinions that are the reſults of their Reaſon ;
and I meet with very few that are of a temperament ſo equal, or
a conſtitution fo even pois’d, but that they incline to one ſett of
Opinions rather than another, antecedently to all proofs of Reaſon:
And when they have eſpous’d their opinions from that ſecret ſym-
pathy, then they find out as gocd Reaſons as they can to maintain
them, and ſay, nay think ſometimes, that 'twas for the ſake of
thoſe Reaſons that they firſt imbrac'd them. We may commonly
diſtinguiſh · theſe Inclination opinions from the Rational, becauſe
we find them accompanied with more Heat than Light, a great
deal of eagerneſs and impatience in defending of them, and but ſlen
der arguments. One inight give inſtances of this, both in Scets of
Religion and Philoſophy, in Platoniſts, Stoicks, and Epicureans, that
are fo by their temper more than their reaſon, but to our pur-
poſe it will be ſufficient to inſtance in one liearty Epicurean, Lu-
cretius, who is manifeſtly ſuch, inore from his inclination, and the
bent of his Spirit, than from the force of Argumerit
. For though
his ſuppoſitions be very precarious, and his reaſonings all along very
flight, he will many times ſtrut and 'triumph, as if he had wreſled
the Thunder out of Hove's riglit hạnd ; and a Mathematician is not
more confident of his demonſtration, than he ſeems to be of the
truth of his ſhallow Plítofophy. From ſuch a principle of natu-
ral Complexion as this, I allow a man may be Atheiſtical, but
never from the calın dictate of his Reaſon ; yet he may be as con
fiderit, and as tenacious of his Concluſion, as if he had a clear and
diſtinct' evidence for it. For I take it to be a true Maxim in ffu
mane
Chap. 1 o. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 203
end
Iiarie lvature, that A ſtrong inclination, with a little evidence is equi-
valent 10 a ſtrong evidence. And therefore we are not to be ſurpris d
if we hind Men contident in their opinions many times far beyond
the owgree of their cvidence, feeing there are other things, beſides
evidence, that incline the Will to one Concluſion rather than anc-
ther. And as I have infanc'd in Natural Complexion, ſo Intereſt
hath the ſame effect upon Humane Nature, becauſe it always be-
gets an incliriation to thoſe opinions that favour our intereſt, and a
diſinclination to the contrary; And this principle may be another
ingredient, and ſecret perſwaſive to Atheiſm ; for when men have
run theinſeives ſo deep into Vice and Immorality, that they ex-
pect no benetit from a God, 'tis in a manner neceſſary to their
quiet, and the eaſe of their mind, that they ſhould fanſie there is
none; for they are afraid, if there be a God, that he will not ſtand
lieuter, and let them alone in another World. This, I ſay, is ne-
cellary to the quiet of their mind, unleſs they can attain that
great
Art, which many labour after, of non-reflection, or an unthinking
faculty, as to God and a World to come, but to return to our Ar
gument, after this ſhort digreſſion------
And as that regular diverlity which we ſee in the forms of Na
ture, and eſpecially in the Bodies of Animals, could not be from
any blind principle, either of Neceſſity or of Chance ; So, in the laſt
place, that Subordination which we ſee in the parts of Nature, and
fubferviency to one another; the lefs Noble to the inore Noblé, the
Inanimate to the Animate, and all things upon Earth unto Man,
muſt needs have been the effect of fome Being higher than Matter
that did wiſely diſpoſe all things ſo at firit, and doth ſtill con-
ſerve thein in the ſame order. If Man had been born into the
World, and a numerous hoſt of Creatures, without any proviſion
or accommodation made for their ſubſiſtence and conveniences, we
might have ſuſpected that they had come by Chance, and there-
fore were ſo ill provided for : but which of them can complain ?
through their various kinds and Orders, what is there awarit-
ing? They are all fitted to their ſeveral Elements, and their ways of
living, Birds, Beaſts, and Fiſhes, both by the form and ſhape of their
Bodies the inanner of their covering, and the quality of their food.
Beſides, They are inſtructed in little Arts and Inſtincts for their con-
fervation; and not only for their proper conſervation, but alſo to
find a way to make and bring up young ones, and leave behind
thern a Póſterity ; And all this in ſo fit a method, and by ſuch a
pretty train of actions, as is really admirable.
Man is the Maſter of all, and of him a double care is taken ;
that he Ghould neither want what Nature can afford, nor what
Art can ſupply. He could not be provided of all conveniences by
Nature only, eſpecially to ſecure him againſt the iniuries of the Air';
but in recompence, Nature hath provided materials for all thoſe
Arts which ſhe fee would be needful in Humane Life, as Building,
Cloathing; Navigation, Agriculture, &c. That ſo Mankind inight
have both wherewithal to anſwer their occaſions, and alſo to im-
ploy their time, and exerciſe their ingenuity. This Oeconomy of
D d 2
Nature,
1
1
1
204
The Theory of the Earth.
Book II.
Nature, as I may call it, or well ordering of the great Family of
living Creatures, is an argument both of Goodneſs and of Wir
dom, and is every way far above the powers of brute Matter. All
regular adıniniſtration we aſcribe to conduct and judgment; If an
Army of Men be well provided for in things necetiary both for
Food, Cloaths, Arms, Lodging, Security and Defence, ſo as no-
thing is awanting in ſo great a multitude, we ſuppoſe it the effect
of care and forecaſt in thoſe perſons that had the charge of it;
they took their meaſures at firſt, computed and proportiond one
thing to another, made good regulations, and gave orders for con
venient ſupplies. And can we ſuppoſe the great Army of Crea-
tures upon Eartlı manag’d and provided for with leſs fore-thought
and Providence, nay, with none at all, by mcer Chance? This is
to recede from all rules and analogy of Rcafon, only to ſerve a turn,
and gratifie an unreaſonable humour.
To conclude this Argument; There are two general Heads of
things, if I recollect aright, which we make the marks and cha-
racters of Wiſdom and Reaſon, Works of Art, and the Conduct
of affairs or dirction of means to an end ; and wherefoever wo
meet, either with regular material works, or a regular ordination
of affairs, we think we have a good title and warrant to derive
them from an intelligent Author ; Now theſe two being found in
the Natural World, and that in an eminent degree, the one in the
Frame of it, and the other in the Oeconomy of it, we liave all the
evidence and ground that can be in arguing from things viſible to
things inviſible, that there is an Author of
Nature, Superiour both
to Humane Power and Humane Wiſdom.
Before we proceed to give any further proofs or diſcoveries of
the Author of Nature, let us reflect a little upon thoſe we have al-
ready inſiſted upon; which have been taken wholly from the Ma.
terial World, and from the common courſe of Nature. The very
exiſtence of Matter is a proof of a Deity, for the Idea of it hath no
connexion with exiſtence, as we ſhall ſhow hereafter; however we
will take leave now to ſet it down with the reſt, in order as they
follow one another.
1. The exiſtence of Matter. 5. The Lans for communication und
2. The Motion of Matter.
regulation of that Motivn.
3. The juſt quantity and degree of 6. The regular effects of it, eſpea
that Motion.
cially in the Animate World.
4. The firſt form of the Univerſe 7. The Oeconomy of Nature, and
upon Motion impreft; both as to fit Subordination of one part of the
the Diviſions of Matter, and the World to another.
Leading Motions
The five firſt of theſe Heads are prerequiſites, and preparatives to
the formation of a World, and the two laſt are as the image and
character of its Maker, of his Power, Goodneſs and Wiſdom, im-
preſt upon it. Every one of them might well deſerve a Chapter to
it ſelf, if the ſubject was to be treated on at large ; but this is only
!
117
Chap. 10.Concerning the Prim. Earth and Paradiſe: 205
an occalional differtation, to late the Powers of Matter, teſt they
ſhould be thought boundleſs, and the Author of Nature unnecella-
ry, as the Epicuræans pretend; but notwithſtanding their vain con-
fidence and credulity, I defie thein, or any man elſe, to make ſence
of the Material World, without placing a God at the Center of it.
To theſe conſiderations taken wholly from the Corporeal World,
give me leave to add one of a mixt nature, concerning the Uni-
on of our Soal and Body. This ſtrange effect, if rightly underſtood,
doth as truly diſcover the Author of Nature, as many Effects that
are accounted more Supernatural
. The Incarnation, as I may ſo
ſay, of a Spiritual Subſtance, is to me a kind of ſtanding miracle ;
That there ihould be ſuch an union and connexion reciprocally
betwixt the motions of the Body, and the actions and paſſions of
the Soul: betwixt a ſubſtance Intellectual, and a parcel of orga-
niz'd Matter : can be no effect of either of thoſe ſubſtances; be-
ing wholly diſtinct in theinſelves, and remote in their natures from
one another. For inſtance, When my Finger is cut, or when 'tis
burnt, that my Soul thereupon ſhould feel ſuch a ſmart and violent
pain, is no conſequence of Nature, or does not follow from any
connexion there is betwixt the Motion or Diviſion of that piece of
Matter, I call my Finger, and the paſſion of that Spirit I call my
Soul; for theſe are two diſtinct Eſlenices, and in themſelves inde-
pendent upon one another, as much as the Sun and my Body are
independent; and there is no more reaſon in ſtrie: Nature, or in the
eſſential chain of Cauſes and Effects, that my Soul ſhould ſuffer,
or be affected with this Motion in the Finger, than that the Sun
ſhould be affected with it; nay, there is leſs reaſon, if leſs can be,
for the Sun being Corporeal, as the finger is, there is ſome remote
poſſibility that there might be communication of Motion betwixt
them; but Motion cannot beget a thought, or a paſſion, by its own
force; Motion can beget nothing but Motion, and if it ſhould pro-
duce a thought, the Effect would be more noble than the Cauſe:
Wherefore this Union is not by any neceſſity of Nature, but only from
a politive Inſtitution, or Decree eſtabliſht by the Author of Na-
ture, that there ſhould be ſuch a communication betwixt theſe two
ſubſtances for a time, viz. during the Vitality of the Body.
'Tis true indeed, if Thought, Apprehenſion, and Reaſon, was
nothing but Corporeal Motion, this Argument would be of no
force ; but to ſuppoſe this, is to admit an abſurdity to cure a diffi-
culty ; to make a Thought out of a local Motion; is like making a
God out of a Stock, or a Stone; for theſe two are as remote in
their Nature, and have as different Idea's in the Mind, as any two
diſparate things we can propoſe or conceive ; Number and Colour,
a Triangle and Vertue, Free-will and a Pyramid are not more
unlike, more diſtant, or of more different forms, than Thought
and local Motion. Motion is nothing but a Bodies changing its
place and ſituation amongſt other Bodies, and what affinity or re-
ſemblance hath that to a Thought? How is that like to Pain; or to a
doubt
206 The Theory of the Earth. Воок І.
A
doubt of the Mind? to Hope or to Deſire ? to the Idea of God?
to any act of the Will or Underſtanding, as judging, conſenting,
reaſoning, remembring, or any other ? Theſe are things of ſeve-
ral orders that have no fimilitude, nor any mixture of one another.
And as this is the nature of Motion, ſo, on the other hand, in a
Thought there are two things, Conſciouſneſs, and a epreſentation ;
Conſciouſneſs is in all Thoughts indifferen:ly, whether diſtinct or
confus d, for no Man thinks but he is conſcious that he thinks, nor
perceives any thing but he is conſcious that he perceives it ; there
is alſo in a Thought, eſpecially if it be diſtinct, a repreſentation;
'tis the image of that we think upon, and makes its Object preſent
to the Mind. Now what hath local Motion to do with either of
theſe two, Conſciouſneſs, or Repreſentativeneſs? How doth it in-
clude either of them, or hold them any way affixt to its Nature ?
I think one may with as good fence and reaſon ask of what colour
a Thought is, green or ſcarlet, as what ſort of Motion it is; for
Motion of what ſort ſoever, can never be conſcious, nor repreſent
things as our Thoughts do. I have noted thus much in general,
only to ſhow the different nature of Motion and Cogitation, that
we may be the more ſenlīble that they have no mutual connexion
in us, nor in any other Creature, from their eflence or eſſential
properties, but by a ſupervenient power from the Author of Na.
ture, who hath thus united the Soul and the Body in their ope-
rations.
زه
We have hitherto only conſider'd the ordinary courſe of Na-
ture, and what indications and proofs of its Author, that affords
us; There is another remarkable Head of Arguments from effects
extraordinary and ſupernatural, ſuch as Miracles, Prophecies, In-
ſpirations, Prodigies, Apparitions, Witchcraft, Sorceries, boc.
Theſe, at one ſtep, lead us to ſomething above Nature, and this is
the ſhorteſt way, and the inoſt popular; ſeveral Argumelits are
ſuited to ſeveral tempers, and God hath not left himſelf without a
proper witneſs to every temper that is not wilfully blivd. Of theſe
witneſſes we now ſpeak of, the moſt congderable are Miracles, and
the moſt conſiderable Records of them are the Books of Scripture ;
which if we conſider only as an Hiſtory, and as having nothing
Sacred in them more than other good Hiftorics, that is, truth.in
matter of fact, we cannot doubt but there have been Miracles
in the World; That Mofes and the Prophets, our Saviour and his
Apoſtles, wrought Miracles, I can no more queſtioni, than that
Cæfar and Alexander fought Battles, and took Cities. So allo that
there were true Prophecies and Inſpiration's, we know from Scri
pture, only conſider'd as a true Hiſtory. But as for other ſuperna-
tural effects that are not recorded there, we have reaſon to exiunin
them more ſtrictly before we receive themi, at leaſt as to particulai
inſtances; for I am apt to think they are like Lotteries, where
there are ten or twenty Blanks for one Drize ; . tut vt if thicie
were no Prizes at all, the Lottery would not leve credit 10 fuh.
ſilt, and would be cry'd down as a perfuat Cheat : So if :1.01.t
holi
Chap. 1o. Concerning the Prim.Earth and Paradiſe. 209
-
i
thoſe many stories of Prodigies, Apparitions, and Witchcrafts,
there were not ſome true; the very fame and thought of them
would die from amongſt Men, and the firſt broachel's of them
would be hooted at as Cheats. As a falſe Religion that hath no-
thing true and folid mixt with it, can ſcarce be fixt upon Mankind;
but where there is a mixture of true and falſe, the ſtrength of
the one ſupports the weakneſs of the other. As for Sorcery, the
inſtances and examples of it are undeniable; not fo much thoſe few
ſcatter'd inſtances that happen now and then amongſt us, but ſuch
as are more conſtant, and in a manner National, in fome Coun.
tries, and amongſt barbarous people. Beſides, the Oracles, and the
Magick that was ſo frequent ainongſt the Ancients, ſhow us that
there have been always fome Power's more than Humane tampering
with the affairs of Mankind. But this Topick from effects Extra-
ordinary and Supernatural, being in a great meaſure Hiſtorical, and
reſpecting evil Spirits as well as the Author of Nature, is not ſo
proper for this place.
There is a third Sett or Head of Arguments, that to ſome tem:
pers are more cogent and convictive than any of theſe, nainely
Arguments abſir.£t and Metaphyſical; And thefe do not only lead
us to an Author of Nature in general, but ſhow us more of his
properties and perfections, repreſent him to us as a ſupream Deity,
infinitely perfect, the fountain of all Being, and the fteddy Center
of all things. But reafons of this order; being of a finer thred,
require more attention, and ſome preparation of Mind to make us
diſcern them well, and be duly fenſible of themWhen a Mari
hath withdrawn himſelf froin the noiſe of this bufie World, lock'd
up
his Senſes and his Pallions, and every thing that would unite
him with it: coinmanded a general ſilence in the Soul, and ſuf-
fers not a Thought to ſtir, but what looks inwards ; Let him then
reflect ſeriouſly, and ask himſelf, What am I, and Hón cäme I into
Being? If I was Author and Original to my felf, ſurely I ought to
feel that mighty Powir, and enjoy the pleaſure of it; but, alas, I
am conſcious of no ſuch force or Vertue, nor of any thing in my
Nature, that ſhould give me neceſſary exiſtence ; It hath no cori-
nexion with any part of ine, nor any faculty in me, that I can diſ-
And now that I do exiſt, froin what Cauſes fçever, Can I se
cure my Jelf in Being? now that I am in poffeffion, ain -1 ſure to keep
it? am I certain that three ininutes hence I' ſhall ſtill exiſt I may
or I may not, for ought I ſee ; Either fęeins poſſible in it ſelf
, and
either is contingent as' to 'ine ; I find nothing in my Nature that can
Warrapt mhy ſubſiſtence for one clay, for one hour, for one moment
longer. I am nothing but Thoughts, Heeting Thoughts, 'that chale
and extinguish one atiother; and my Being; for ought I know, iš
ſucceſſive, and as dying as they are, and renew'd to me every nioment.
This I am ſure of, that fofar as I know my ſelf, and ain conſcious what
I am, there is no principle of immutability, bi of neceſlary and inde-
fectible exiſtence in my Nature; and therefore I ought in reaſon to be-
lieve, that I ſtand or fall at the mercy of other Cauſes, and tiot by my
own will, or my own ſufficiency.
Beſides,
cer 11.
208 The Theory of the Earth. Book 11.
as. Arift.
And indeed all theſe different degrees of higher and higher per:
Beſides, I am very ſenſible, and in this I cannot be miſtaken, that
my Nature is in ſeveral reſpects, weak and imperfc&t ; Loth as to
Will and Underſtanding. I Will many things in vain, and without
effect, and I With often what I have no ability to execute or ob-
tain. And as to my Underſtanding, how defective is it? how little
or nothing do I know in compariſon of wirat I am ignorant of:
Almoſt all the Intellectual World is thut up to me, and the far
great-
eſt part of the Corporeal; And in thoſe things that foll under
my cognizance, how often am I miſtaken ? I am confu'd to a nar-
row ſphere, and yet within that ſphere I often erre; my conceptions
of things are cbſcure and confus'd, my reaferi ſhort-lighted ; I am
forc'd often to correct my ſelf, to acknowledge that I have judg'd
falſe, and conſented to an errour. In-ſumm, all my powers I fitid
are limited, and I can eaſily conceive the fame kind of perfections
in higher degrees than I poſſeſs them, and conſequently there are
Beings, or may be, greater and more excellent than my ſelf, and
TO TÉ AMOR
mestreou to more able to fublilt by their own power. Why ſhould I not there-
quoni STE- fore believe that my Original is froiti thoſe Beings rather than frem
my ſelf? For every Nature, the more great and perfect it is,
the nearer it approacheth to nęceflity of exiſtence, and to a pow-
er of producing other things, Yet, the truth is, it muſt be acknow-
ledg'd, that ſo long as the perfections of thoſe other Beings are li-
mited and finite, though they be far ſuperiour to us, there is no ne-
ceſſity ariſeth from their Nature that they ſhould exiſt; and the
fame Arguments that we have us'd against our ſelves, they may, in
proportion, uſe againſt themſelves ; and therefore we muſt ſtill ad-
vance higher to find a ſelf origipated Being, whoſe exiſtence fiult fic
immediately from his eſſence, or have a neceſſary connexion with it.
fections lead us directly to an higheſt, ur Supream degree, which
is infinite and unliinited Perfection. As ſubordinate caules lead to
the firſt, fo Natures more pe fect one than another lead us to a
Nature infinitely perfect, which is the Fountain of them all. Thi.
ther we muſt go, if we will follow the courſe of Reaſon, which
cannot ſtop at one more than anether, till it arrive there; And
being arriv'd there, at that Soveraign and Original Perfection, it
finils a firm arid iinmoveable ground to ſtand upon; the (teddy Ceil-
ter of all Being, wherein the Mind reſts and is ſatisfied. All the
ſcruples or objections that we inov'd againſt our ſelves; or cther
Creatures, take no place here ; This Deing is, conſcious of an All-
ſufficiency in it felf, and of immutability as to any thing elſe,
including in it all the cauſes of exiſtence, or, to ſpeak more proper-
ly, all neceſſity of exiſtence. Beſides, that we exiſt our Selves., not.
withſtanding the imperfection and inſufficiency of our Nature, is a
jult, collateral proof of the exiſtence of this Şupreai: Being; for
ſuch an effect as this cannot be without its Cauſe, and it can have
no other competent Çauſe but that we mention. And as this Be.
ing is its own Origin, ſo it inuſt needs be capable of producing all
Creatures;
1
Chap. 19. Concerning the Prim.Earth and Paradiſe, 209
Creatures; for whatſoever is poſſible, muſt be poſſible to it; and
t!iat Creatures or finite Beings are poſſible, we both jee by expert,
ence, and may alſo diſcern by Reaſon; for thoſe ſeveral degrees of
perfection, or limitations of it
, which we inention'd before, are all
conliſtent Notions, and conſequently make conſiſtent Natures, arid
ſuch as inay exiſt; but contingently indeed, and in dependance up-
on the firit Cauſe.
Thus we are come at length to a fair reſolution of that great
Queſtion, Whence we are, and how we continue in Being? And this
liath led us by an ealie aſcent to the Supreme Author of Nature,
and the Firſt Cauſe of all things; and preſents us alſo with ſuch a
Scheme and Draught of tlic Univerſe, as is clear and rational; every
thing in its oriler, and in its place, according to the dignity of its
Nature, and the ſtrength of its principles. When the Mind hath
rais'd it ſelf into this view of a Being infinitely perfect, 'tis in a Region
of Light, hath a free proſpect every way, and ſees all things from
top to bottoin, as pervious and tranſparent. Whereas without God
and a Firſt Cauſe, there is nothing but darkneſs and confuſion in the
Mind, and in Nature; broken views of things, ſhort interrupted
glimpſes of Light, nothing certain or demonſtrative, no Baſis of Trutlı,
no extent of Thouglit, no Science, no Contemplation.
You will ſay, it may be, 'Tis true, ſomething muſt be Eternal,
and of neceſſary exiſtence, but why inay riot Mitter be this Eternal
neceſſary Being? Then our Souls and all other Intellectual things
muſt be parts and parcels of Matter ; and what pretenſions can Mat-
ter have to thoſe properties and perfections that we find in our
Souls, how limited foever? much leſs to neceſſary exiſtence, and
thoſe perfections that are the foundation of it? What exiſts Eternal-
ly, and from it ſelf, its exiſtence muſt flow immediately from its ef-
fence, as its cauſe, reaſon or ground; for as Exiſtence hath always
fomething antecedent to it in order of Nature, ſo that which is ante-
cedent to it inuft infer it by a neceſſary connexion, and ſo may be
call d the cauſe, ground, or reaſon of it. And nothing can be ſuch a
ground, but what is a perfection; nor every perfection neither, it
muſt be Sovereign and Infinite perfection; for fruin what elſe can
neceſſary exiſtence flow, or be inferrd ? . Belides, if that Being was
not infinitely perfect, there might be another Being more power-
ful than it, and conſequently able to oppoſe and hinder its. Exi-
ſtence
and what may be hinderd is contingent and arbitrary.
Now Matter is ſo far from being a Nature infinitely perfect, that it
hath no perfection at all, but that of bare ſubſtance ; neither Life,
Senſe, Will or Underſtanding; nor ſo much as Motion, from it
ſelf; as we have ſhow'd before. And therefore this brute inactive
maſs, which is but, as it were, the Drudge of Nature, can have no
right or title to that Sovereign prerogative of Self exiſtence.
;
1
We noted before, as a thing agreed upon, That ſomething or other
111reſt needs be Eternal. For if ever there was a time or ſtate, when
Еe
there
!
21
The I beory of the Earth. Book 11.
there was no Eeing, there never could be any. Secing Nothing
could not produce Smething. Therefore 'tis undeniably true on
all hands, That there was fome Being from Eternity. Now, ac-
cording to our underſtandings, Truth is Eternal: therefore, ſay we,
ſome intellet or Intelligent Being. So alſo the reaſons of Goodnej
and Jufiice appear to us Eternal, and therefore ſome Good and
Juſt Being is Eternal. Thus much is plain, that theſe perfections
which bear the ſignatures of Eternity upon them, are things that
have no relation to Matter, but relate immediately to an Intellectu-
a! Being: therefore ſome ſuch Being, to whom they originally
belong, muſt be that Eternal. Beſides, We cannot poſſibly but
judge fuch a Being more perfect than Matter ; Now every Nature,
the more perfect it is, the more remote it is from Nothing: and the
more remote it is from Nothing, the more it approaches to neceſſity
of exiſtence, and conſequently to Eternal Exiſtence.
Thus we have made a ſhort Survey, ſo far as the bounds of a
Chapter would permit, of thoſe evidences and aſſurances which we
have, from abſtract Reafon, and the External World, that there is
an Author of Nature ; and That, a Being infinitely perfect, which
we call God. We may add to theſe, in the laſt place, that uni-
verſal conſent of Mankind, or natural inſtinct of Religion, which
we ſee, inore or leſs, throughout all Nations, Parbarous or Ci-
vil. For though this Argument, 'tis true, be imore diſputable than
the reſt, yet having ſet down juſt grounds already from whence
this Natural Judgment or perſwaſion might ſpring, we have more
reaſon to impute it to ſome of thoſe, and their inſenſible influ-
ence upon the Mind, than to the artifices of Men, or to inake it
a weakneſs, prejudice, or errour of our Nature. That there is
ſuch a propenſion in Humane Nature, fetins to be very plain; at
leaſt ſo far as to move us to implore, and have recourſe to invi
ſible Powers in our extremities. Prayer' is natural in certain caſes,
and we do at the mecf motion of our natural Spirit, and inde-
liberately, invoke God and Heaven, either in caſe of extreme dan-
ger, to help and aſſiſt us; or in caſe of injuſtice and oppreſſion, to
relieve or avenge us; or in caſe of falſe accuſation, to vindicate our
innocency; and generally in all caſes deſperate and remedileſs as
to Humane Power, we ſeem to appeal, and addreſs our felves to
ſomething higher, And this we do by a ſudden impulſe of Nature,
without réflexion or deliberation. Beſides, as witneſſes of our
Faith and Veracity, we uſe to invoke the Gods, or Superiour
Powers, by way of imprecation upon our ſelves, if we be falſe and
perjur’d; and this hath been us'd in moſt Nations and Ages,if not in all.
Theſe things alſo argue, that there is a Natural Conſcience in Man,
and a diſtinction of moral Good and Evil; and that we look upon
thofe inviſible Powers as the Guardians of Vertue and Honeſty.
There are älſo few or no People upon the Earth but have ſomni
thing of External Religion, true or falſe; and either of them is an
argument of this natural anticipation, or that they have an opinion
that there is ſomething abovc them, and above viſiblc Nature;
thougle
Chap. 1 o.Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 211
though what that ſomething was, they ſeldom were able to make a
good judgment. But to purſue this Argument particularly, would
require an Hiſtorical deduction of Times and Places, which is not
ſuitable to our preſent deſign.
To conclude this Chapter and this Subject; If we ſer Religion
apart, and conſider the Deiſt and Atheiſt only as two Sects in Phi-
loſoply, or their doctrine as two different Hypotheſes propos'd for
the explication of Nature, and in competition with one another,
whether ſhould give the more rational account of the Univerſe, of
its Origin and Phenomenas I ſay, if we conſider them only thus,
and inake an impartial eltimate, whether Syſtem is more reaſon
able, more clear, and more ſatisfactory, to me there ſeems to be
no more compariſon, than betwixt light and darkneſs. The Hypo-
theſis of the Deiſt reacheth from top to bottom, both thorough the
Intellectual and Material World, with a clear and diſtinct light
every where; is genuine, comprehenſive, and ſatisfactory; hath
nothing forc'd, nothing confus'd, nothing precarious; whereas the
Hypotheſis of the Atheiſt is ſtrain’d and broken, dark and uneaſie
to the Mind, commonly precarious, often incongruous and irra-
tional, and ſometimes plainly ridiculous. And this judgment I
ſhould make of them abſtractly from the intereſt of Religion, con-
ſidering their only as matter of Reaſon and Philoſophy; And I
dare affirm with aſſurance, if the faculties of our Souls be true,
that no Man can have a Syſtem of Thoughts reaching thorough
Nature, coherent and conſiſtent in every part, without a Deity for
the Baſis of it.
Ees
CHAP.
212
Book II.
The Theory of the Earth.
1
C H A P. XI.
Concerning
NATURAL PROVIDENCE.
Several incroachments upon Natural Providence, or miſre-
preſentations of it, and falje methods of Contemplation;
A true method propos'd, and a true repreſentation of the
Vniverſe. The Mundane Idea , and the Univerſal Sy-
Atem of Providence ; Several ſubordinate Syſtems, That
of our Earth and Sublunary World; The Courſe and Periods
of it; How much of this is already treated of, and what
remains. The Concluſion.
W
E have fet bounds to Nature in the foregoing Chapter, and
plac'd her Author and Governour upon his Throne, to
give Laws to her Motions, and to direct and limit her Power in
ſuch ways and methods as are moſt for his honour. Let us now
conſider Nature under the conduct of Providence, cr conſider Na-
tural Providence, and the extent of it. And as we were cautious
before not to give too much power or greatneſs to Nature, confi-
der'd apart from Providence, ſo we muſt be careful now, under this
ſecond conſideration, not to contract hier bounds too much; left we
ſhould by too man and narrow thoughts of the Creation, Eclipſe
the glory of its Author, whom we have ſo lately own'd as a Bcing
infinitely perfect.
And to uſe no further Introduction, In the firſt place, we mult
not by any means admit or imagine, that all Nature, and this
great Univerſe, was made only for the ſake of Man, the ineanet
of all Intelligent Creatures that we know of; Nor that this little Pla-
net where we ſojourn for a few days, is the only habitable part of
the Univerſe; Theſe are Thoughts ſo groundleſs and unreaſon-
able in themſelves, and alſo fo derogatory to the Infinite Power,
Wiſdom, and Goodneſs of the Firſt Cauſe, that as they are abſurd
in Reaſon, ſo they deſerve far better to be mark'd and cenſur'd for
Hereſies in Religion, than many Opinions that have been cenſur'd
for ſuch , in former Ages. How is it poſſible that it ſhould enter
into the thoughts of vain Man, to believe himſelf the principal
part of God's Creation: or that all the reſt was ordain'd for him,
for his ſervice or pleaſure? Man, whoſe follies we laugh at every
day, or elſe complain of them; whoſe pleaſures are vanity, and
his Paſſions ſtronger than his Reaſon; Who ſees himſelf every
way weak and impotent, hath no power over external Nature ,
little
Chap. 1 1. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe: 2 1 3
little over himſelf; cannot execute ſo much as his our good refo-
lutions ; murable, irregular, prone to cvil Surely, if we made
the le. It reflection upon our ſelves with impartiality, we ſhould be
alain’d of ſuch an arrogant :Thought. How few of theſe Sons of
Men, for whom, they fuy, all things were made, are the Sons of
Wildom? How fuw i nd'the paths of Life? They ſpend a few days
in folly and fin, and then go down to the Regions' of death and
miſery. And is it poſſible to believe, that all Nature, and all Pro-
vidence, are only, or principally for their fake? Is it nor a more
reaſonable character or concluſion which the Prophet hath made,
Surely every Man is vanity ? Man that comes into the World at the
pleaſure of another, and goes out by an 'hur.dred accidents ; His
Birth and Education generally determine his fate here, and neither
of thoſe are in his own power; His wit alſo is as uncertain as his for-
tune ; He hath not the inoulding of his own Brain, however a
knock on the Head makes him a Fool, ſtupid as the Beaſts of the
Field; and a little exceſs of paſſion or melancholy inakes him worſe,
Mad and Frantick. In his beſt Senſes, he is ſhallow, and of little
underſtanding: and in nothing more blind and ignorant than in
things Sacred and Divine; He falls down before a ſtock or a ſtone,
and lays, Thou art my God; He can believe non-ſence and con-
tradictions, and make it his Religion to do ſo. And is this the great
Creature which God hath made by the might of bis Porrer, and for
the honour of his Mijlty? Upon whom all things muſt wait, to
whom all things mult be ſubſervient? Methinks we have noted
weakneſſes and follies enough in the Nature of Man, this need not
be added as the top and accompliſhment, That with all theſe he
is ſo Vain, as to think that all the reſt of the World was made for his
fake.
And as due huinility and the conſideration of our own meanneſs,
ought to ſecure us from any ſuch vain opinion of our ſelves, ſo the
perfection of other Beings ought to give us more reſpect and ho-
nour for them. With what face can we pretend, that Creatures
far ſuperiour to us, and inore excellent both in Nature and condi-
tion, Thould be made for our fake and ſervice? How prepoſterous
would it be to aſcribe ſuch a thing to our Maker, and how into-
lerable a vanity in us to affect it? We that are next to the Brutes
that periſh by a facrilegious attempt, would make our felves more
conſiderable than the higheſt Dignities. It is thought to have been
the crime of Lucifer, who was thrown down from Heaven to Hell,
that he affected an equality with the Almighty; and to affect to
be next to the Alınighty is 'a crime next to that. We have no rea-
ſon to believe, but that there are, at leaſt, as many orders of Beings
above us, as there are ranks of Creatures below us ; there is a grea-
ter diſtance ſure betwixt us and God Almighty, than there is be-
twixt us and the mcaneſt Worm : and yet we ſhould take it very
ill, if the Worms of the Earth ſhould pretend that we were made
for them. But to paſs from the inviſible World to the viſible and
Corporeal,-----
Was
214
The Theory of the Earth. Book 11.
Was that made only for our fake? King David was more wiſe, ,
and more juſt both to God and Man, in his 8th Plalın; where he
ſays, He wonders, when he conliders the Heavens, that the Maker
of th:m could think on Man. He truly ſuppoſes the Celeſtial Bodies
and the Inhabitants of them, much more conſiderable than we are,
and reckons up only Terreſtrial things as put in ſubjection to Nan.
Can we then bé fo fondias to imagine all the Corporcal Univerſe
made for our uſe? Tis not the Millioneth part of it that is known
to us, much leſs uſeful; We can neither reach with our Eye, nor
our imagination, thoſe Armies of Stars that lie far and deep in
the boundleſs Heavens. If we take a good Glaſs, we diſcover in-
numerably more Stars in the Firmament than we can with our
ſingle Eye; and yet if you take a ſecond Glaſs, better than the frft,
that carries the light to a greater diſtance, you ſee inore ſtill lying
beyond the other; and a third Glaſs that pierceth further, ftiši
makes new diſcoveries of Stars; and ſo forwards, indefinitely and
inexhauſtedly for any thing we know, according to the immenſity of
the Divine Nature and Power. Who can reckon up the Stars of
the Galaxy, or direct us in the uſe of them) And can we believe
that thoſe and all the reſt were made for us? Of thoſe few Stars that
we enoy, or that are viſible to the Eye, there is not a tenth
part
that is really uſeful to Man; and no doubt if the principal end of
thein had been our pleaſure or conveniency, they would have been
put in ſome better order in reſpect of the Earth? They lie careleſly
fcatter'd, as if they had been ſown in the Heaven, like Sced, by
handfuls; and not by a skilful hand neither. What a beautiful
Hemiſphere they would have made, if they had been plac'd in rank
and order, if they had been all diſpos’d into regular figures, and
the little ones ſet with due regard to the greater, then all finiſht
and made up into one fair piece or great Compoſition, according
to the rules of Art and Symmetry. What a ſurprizing beauty
this would have been to the Inliabitants of the Earth? What a
lovely Roof to our little World: This indeed Inight have given one
ſome Temptation to have thought that they had been all made for
us; but left any ſuch vain imagination ſhould now enter into our
thoughts, Providence (beſides inore important Reaforis ) ſeems on
purpofe to have left them under that negligence or diſorder which
they appear in to us.
The ſecond part of this opinion ſuppoſeth this Planet , where
we live, to be the only habitable part of the Univerſe ; and this is
a natural conſequence of the former ; If all things were made to
ſerve us, wlay ſhould any more be made than what is uſeful to us.
But 'tis orily our ignorance of the Syſtem of the World, and of
the grandeur of the Works of God, that betrays us to ſuch narrow
Sce the Lat. thoughts. If we do but conſider what this Earth is , hoth for little-
neſs and deformity, and what its Inhabitants are, we fhall not be apt
c. 10.p. 108, to think that this miſerable Atoine hath ingrofs'd and exhauſted all
the Divine Favours, and all the ridies of his goodneſs, and of his
Providence. But we will not inlarge upon this part of the opinion, left
it ſhould carry us too far from the ſubject, and it will fall, of its own
accord,
Treat. lib. 1.
109,00
A
)
t..
Chap. 1 1. Concerning the Prim. Earth and Paradiſe. 215
accord, wicli the formmer. Upon the whole we iray conclude, that
it was only the Sublunary World that was inade for the ſake of
Nian, and not the Great Creation, either Material or Intellectual
and the cannot adınit or affirm any more, without manifeſt in-
jury, depreſſion, and miſrepreſentation of Providence, as we may
be caſily convinc'd from theſe four Heads; The Meanneſs of Man and
of this Earth, The Excellency of other Beings, The Inimenſity of the
tiniverle, and The infinite perfection of the firſt Cauſe. Which I
leave to your further meditation, and paſs on to the ſecond rule,
concerning Natural Providence.
in the second place th-n, if we would have a fair view and right
apprehenſions of Natural Providence, we muſt not cut the chains
or it too thort, by having recourſe, without neceſſity, either to the
l'irſt Cauſe, in explaining the Origins of things: or to Miracles,
in explaining particular effects. This, I ſay, breaks the chains of
Nacural Providence, whicn it is done without neceſſity, that is, when
things are otherwiſe intelligible from Second Cauſes. Neither is
any thing gaind by it to God Almighty; für 'tis but, as the
Proverb ſays, to rob Peter to pay Paul, to take ſo much from
his ordinary Providence, and place it to his extraordinary. When
a new Religion is brought into the World, 'tis very reaſonable
and decorous that it ſhould be uſher'd in with Miracles, as both the
Ferriſh and Chriſtian were; but afterwards things return into their
Chanel, and do not change or overflow again, but upon extraor-
dinary occaſions or revolutions. The power Extraordinary of God
is to be accounted very Sacred, not to be touch'd or expos'd for
our pleaſure or conveniency ; but I am afraid we often make uſe
of it only to conceal our own ignorance, or to ſave us the trouble
of inquiring into Natural Cauſes. Men are generally unwilling to
appear ignorant, eſpecially thoſe that make profeſſion of know-
ledge, and when they have not skill enough to explain ſome par-
ticular effect in a way of Reaſon, they throw it upon the Firſt
Cauſe, as able to bear all; and ſo placing it to that account, they
excuſe themſelves, and ſave their credit; for all Men are equally
uviſe, if you take away Sicond Caulos; as we are all of the ſame co-
lour, if you take away the Light.
But to ſtate this matter, and ſee the ground of this rule more See Book r.
diſtinctly, we muſt obſerve and conlider, that The Courſe of Nature 6. 8. At the end.
is truly the Will of God; and, as I may ſo ſay, his firſt Will; from
which we are not to recede, but upon clear evidence and neceſſity.
And as in matter of Religion, we are to follow the known reveald
Will of God, and not to truſt to every impulſe or motion of En-
thuſiaſm, as coming from the Divine Spirit, unleſs there be evi-
dent marks that it is Supernatural, and cannot come from our own;
So neither are we, without neceſſity, to quit the known and or-
dinary Will and Power of God eſtabliſht in the courſe of Nature,
and Ay to Supernatural Cauſes, or his extraordinary Will ; for this
is a kind of Enthuſiaſın or Fanaticiſm, as well as the other: And
no doubt that great prodigality and waſte of Miracles which ſome
mike, is no way to the honour of God or Religion. 'Tis true, the
other
216 The Theory of the Earth. Bookll.
other extream is worſe than this, for to deny all Miracles , is in
effect to deny all reveald Religion ; therefore due meaſures are to
be taken betwixt theſe two, ſo as neither to make the Divine Power
too inean and cheap, nor the Power of Nature illimited and all-
fufficient.
In the Third place, To make the Scenes of Natural Providence
conſiderable, and the knowledge of them ſatisfactory to the Mind;
we inult take a true Plailoſophy, or the true principles that govern
Nature, which are Geometrical and Mechanical. . By theſe you dif-
cover the footſteps of the Divine Art and Wiſdom, and trace the
progreſs of Nature itep by ſtep, as diſtinctly as in Artificial things,
where we ſee how the Motions depend upon one another, in what
order and by what neceſſity. God made all things in Number,
Weiht and Meaſure, which are Geometrical and Mechanical Prin-
ciples; He is not ſaid to have made things by Firms and Quali-
ties, or any combination of Qualities, but by theſe three prin-
ciples, which may be conceiv'd to expreſs the ſubject of three Ma-
thematical Sciences, Number, of Arithmetick ; Weight, of Staticks;
and Meaſure and Proportion, of Geometry; If then all things were
made according to theſe principles, to underſtand the manner of
their conſtruction and compoſition, we muſt proceed in the ſearch
of them by the ſame principles, and reſolve them into theſe again.
Beſides, The nature of the ſubject does direct us ſufficiently; for
when we contemplate or treat of Bodies, and the Material World,
we muſt proceed by the modes of Bodies, and their real proper-
ties, ſuch as can be repreſented, either to Senſe or Imagination,
for theſe faculties are made for Corporeal Things; but Logical No-
tions, when appli'd to particular Bodies, are meer ſhadows of
them, without light or ſubſtance. No Man can raiſe a Theory
upon ſuch grounds, nor calculate any revolutions of Nature; nor
render any ſervice, or invent any thing uſeful in Humane Life:
And accordingly we fee, that for theſe many Ages, that this dry
Philoſophy hath govern'd Chriſtendom, it hath brought forth no
fruit, produc'd nothing good, to God or Man, to Religion or
Humane Society.
To theſe True Principles of Philoſophy, we muſt joyn alſo the
True Syſtem of the World. That gives ſcope to our thoughts, and
rational grounds to work upon; but the Vulgar Syſtem, or that
which Ariſtotle and others have propos’d, affords no inatter of con
templation. All above the Moon, according to him, is firm as Ada
mant, and as immutable; no change or variation in the Univerſe,
but in thoſe little removes that happen here below, one quality or
form ſhifting into another; there would therefore be no great ex-
erciſe of Reaſon or Meditation in ſuch a World; no long Series's
of Providence; The Regions above being made of a kind of iminu-
table Matter, they would always remain in the fame form, ſtru.
Eture, and qualities : So as we might lock up that part of the
Univerſe as to any further Inquiries, and we ſhould find it tell
thouſand years hence in the ſame form and ſtate wherein we left it.
Then in this Sublunary World there would be but very final
doings
Chap. 1 1. Concerning the Prim.Earth, and Paradiſe. 217
doings neither, things would lie in a narrow compaſs
, no great re
volution of Nature, no new Form of the Earth, but a few anni-
verſary Corruptions and Generations, and that would be the ſhort
and the long of Nature, and of Providence, according to Ariſtotle.
But if we conſider the Earth, as one of thoſe many Planets that
move about the Sun, and the Sun as one of thoſe innumerable fixt
Stars that adorn the Univerſe, and are the Centers of its greateſt
Motions; and all this ſubject to fate and change, to corruptions and
renovations; This opens a large Field for our Thoughts, and gives
a large ſubject for the exerciſe and expanſion of the Divine Wiſdom
and Power, and for the glory of his Providence.
In the laſt place, Having thus prepard your Mind, and the ſub-
ject, for the Contemplation of Natural Providence, do not content
your
ſelf to conſider only the preſent face of Nature, but look back
into the firſt Sources of things, into their more ſimple and origi-
nal ſtates; and obſerve the progreſs of Nature from one form to
another, through various modes and compoſitions. For there is
no ſingle Effect, nor any ſingle ſtate of Nature, how perfect ſoever,
tliat can be ſuch an argument and demonſtration of Providence,
as a Period of Nature, or a revolution of ſeveral ſtates conſequen-
tial to one another; and in ſuch an order and dependance, that as
they Aow and ſucceed, they ſhall ſtill be adjuſted to the periods of
the Moral World; ſo as to be ready always to be Miniſters of the
Divine Juſtice or beneficence to Mankind. This ſhows the mani-
told riches of the Wiſdom and Power of God in Nature. And
this may give us juſt occaſion to reflect again upon Ariſtotle's Syſtem
and method, which deſtroys Natural Providence in this reſpect alſo;
for he takes the World as it is now, both for Matter and Form, and
ſuppoſeth it to have been in this poſture from all Eternity, and
that it will continue to Eternity in the ſame ; ſo as all the great
turns of Nature, and the principal ſcenes of Providence in the Na-
tural World are quite ſtruck out; and we have but this one Scene
for all, and a pitiful one too, if compar'd with the Infinite Wif-
dom of God, and the depths of Providence. We muſt take things
in their full extent, and from their Origins, to comprehend them
well, and to diſcover the Myſteries of Providence, both in the
Cauſes and in the Conduct of them. That method which David
followed in the Contemplation of the Little World, or in the Body
of Man, we ſhould alſo follow in the Great ; take it in its firſt
maſs, in its tender principles and rudiments, and obſerve the
pro-
greſs of it to a compleat form ; In theſe firſt ſtroaks of Nature are
the ſecrets of her Art; The Eye muſt be plac'd in this point to
have a right proſpect, and fee her works in a true light. David
admires the Wiſdom of God in the Origin and formation of his
Body; My Body, ſays He, mas not hid from thee, when I was made in Pſal. 139.
Secret, curiously wrought in the lower parts of the Earth; Thine
eyes
Jee my substance being yet unperfect, and in thy Book all my members
mere mritten; which in continuance were faſhioned, when as get there
m:1s none of them, or being at firſt in no form. How precious are
thy Thoughts to me, O God, &c. This was the ſubject of David's
Meditations, how his Body was wrought from a ſhapeleſs maſs into
Ff
that
did 18.16.
218
Book II.
I be I heory of the Earth.
tliat marvellous compolition which it had when fully fram'd; and
this, he ſays, was under the Eye of God all along, and the model
of it, as it were, was deſign'd and delineated in the Book of Provi-
dence, according to which it was by degrees faſhion d and wrought
to perfection. Thine eyes did ſee my ſubſtance yet being imperfect, in
thy Book all my members were dr.jiru,&c. Job alſo hath aptly ex-
preſt choſe firſt rudiments of the Lody, or that little Chaos out of
Fob 10.10,11, which it riſeth, Hift thou not poured me out as Milk, and crudled me
like Cheefè? Thou haft cloathed ine writh Skin and Fleſh, and fenced nie
mrith Bories and Sinems. Where he notes the firſt Matter and the
laſt Form of his Body, its compleat and moſt incompleat ſtate. Ac-
cording to theſe examples we muſt likewiſe conſider the Greater
Bodies of Nature, The Earth and the Sublunary World; we muſt
go to the Origin of them, the Seminal Maſs, the Chaos out of
which they rile; Look upon the World firſt as an Embryo-world,
without form or ſhape, and then conſider how its Members were
faihion’d, how by degrees it was brouglit into that diverſity of
Parts and Regions, which it conſiſts of, with all their furniture,
and with all their ornaments. The Idea of all which was before.
hànd, according to David's expreſſion, written in the Divine Mind;
and ive partake of that Wiſdom; according to our capacity, in
ſeeing and admiring the methods of it.
Theſe ſeem to be neceſſary preparatives or directions to thoſe that
would contemplate, with profit, Natural Providence, and the great
Works of God in the Viſible Creation. We confider'd Nature in
the precedent Chapter abſtractly, and in her ſelf, and now we con-
lider her uñder the Conduct of Providence, which we therefore
call Natural Providence; And as we have endeavour'd to remove
thoſe falſe Notions and Suppoſitions that lay as Clouds upon her
face, ſo we muſt now endeavour to repreſent her in a better light,
and in a fuller beauty. By Natural Providence therefore we un
derſtand, The Form or Courſe of Univerſal Nature, as a&tuated by the
Divine Porren: mith all the Changes, Periods, and Viciſſitudes that at-
tend it, according to the method and eſtabliſhment made at firſt, by the
Author of it. I ſaid of Univerſal Nature, through all the Orders of
Beings in the Intellectual World, and all the Regions and Syſtems
of Matter in the Corporeal. För, having prov'd in the foregoing
Chapter, that there is an Author of Nature, a Being Infinitely Per-
fest, by whoſe power and influence alone all finite Natures exiſt
and aft, we have an aſſured ground to conclude, that nothing can
coine to paſs, throughout the whole Creation, without the pre-
ſcience and permiſſion of its Author ; and as it is neceſſary to ſup
poſe that there is an Idea in the Divine Underſtanding of all the
traſs of Beilig's produc'd or Created, according to the ſeveral ranks
and orders wherein they ſtand; ſo there is alſo an Idea there, ac-
cording to which this great Frame moves, and all the parts of it,
in beauty and harmony.
And theſe two things, The Eſſences of all Beings, and the Series
of their Motions, compoſe the MUNDANE İDEA, as I may
fo call it ;
or that great All-comprehenſive Thought in the Di-
vine Underſtanding, which cohtains the Syſtem of Univerſal Pro-
vidence,
f
Chap. 1 1. Concerning the Prim.Earth and Paradiſe. 219
Syſtem, made
vidence, and the Itate of all things, paſt, preſent, or to come. This
glorious Idea is the expreſs Image of the whole Creation, of all the
Works of God, and the diſpolition of thein ; here lie the myſteries
of Providence, as in their Original; The ſucceſſive forms of all
Nature; and herein as in a Glaſs, may be view'd all the Scenes of
Time or Eternity. This is an Abyſs of Sacred Wiſdom, The in-
exhauſted Treaſure of all Science, The Root of Truth, and Foun-
tain of Intellectual Light; and in the clear and full contemplation of
this is perfect liappineſs, and a truly Beatifiek Viſion.
But what concerns the Intellectual World in this ldea, and the
Orders or Natures that compoſe it, is not our preſent buſineſs to
purſue; We are to ſpeak of the Corporeal Univerſe, whereof we
will make now a ſhort and general Survey, as it lies under Pro-
vidence. The Corporeal Univerſe, how immenſe foever it be,
and divided into innumerable Regions, inay be conſider'd all as one
ир
of ſeveral ſubordinate Syſtems. And there is alſo
one iininenſe deſign of Providence co-extended with it, that contains
all the fate, and all the revolutions of this great Maſs. This, I ſay,
is made up of ſeveral ſubordinate Syſtems, involving one another,
and comprehending one another, in greater and greater Orbs and
Compoſitions ; and the Aggregate of all theſe is that which we call
the Univerſi. But what the forin of theſe Compoſitions is, and what
the Deſign of Providence that runs thorough them all, and compre-
hends thein all, this is unſearchable, not only to Humane Under-
ſtanding, but even to Angels and Archangels.
Wherefore leaving thoſe greater Syſtems and Compoſitions of
the Univerſe, as inatter of our admiration, rather than of our
knowledge, There are two or three kinds of letler Syſtems that are
viſible to us, and bring us nearer to our ſubject, and nearer home.
That of a Fixt Star, ſingle; That of a Fixt Star with its Planets,
and That of a ſingle Planet, Primary or Secondary. Theſe three
Syſtems we ſee and enjoy more or leſs. No doubt there are Fixt
Stars ſingle, or that have no Planets about them, as our Sun hath;
nay, 'tis probable, that at firſt the whole Univerſe conſiſted only
of fuch; Globes of liquid Fire, with Spheres about them of
pure
Light and Ætler: Earths are but the dirt and skum of the Crea-
tion, and all things were pure as they came at firſt out of the
hands of God. But becauſe we have nothing particular taught us,
either by the light of Nature or Revelation, concerning the Provi-
dence that governs theſe ſingle Stars, of what uſe they are to Intel-
lectual Beings, how animated by them, what diverſity there is a
mongſt thoſe Æthereal Worlds, what Periods they have, what
Changes or Viciſſitudes they are capable to undergo; becauſe ſuch
Inquiries would ſeem too remote, and carry is too far from our
ſubject, we leave theſe Heavenly Syſteins to the enjoyment and con-
templation of higher and more noble Creatures.
The Sun, with all the Planets that move about him, and de-
pend upon him, inake a good fort of Syſtein'; not conſiderable in-
deed, if compar'd with tlie whole Univerſe, or ſome of the greater
Compoſitions in it, but in reſpect of us, the Syſtem of the Sun is
of vaſt extent; We cannot ineaſure the greatneſs of his Kingdom,
Ff2
and
1
220 I be Theory of the Earth.
Book II.
j
and his Dominion is without end. The diſtance from the higheſt
Planet to the neareſt Fixt Star in the Firmament is unmeaſurable,
and all this belongs to the Empire of the Sun; beſides the ſeveral
Planets and their Osbs, which caſt themſelves cloſer about his Body,
that they may receive a wariner and ſtronger influence from him
for by him they may be ſaid to live and move. But thoſe vaſt ſpaces
that lie beyond thele Opake Bodies, are Regions of perpetual light;
One Planet may Eclipſe the Sun to another, and one Hemiſphere
of a Planet to the other Hemiſphere makes niglit and darkneſs, but
nothing can Eclipſe the Sun, or intercept the courſe of his light to
theſe remote Æthereal Regions; They are always luminous, and
always pure and ſerene. And if the worſt and Planetary parts of
his Dominions be repleniſht with Inhabitants, we cannot luppele
the better to lie as Defarts, uninjoy'd and uninhabited; his Subjects
then muſt be numerous, as well as his Dominions large; and in
both reſpects, this Syſtem of a Fixt Star, with its Planets (of which
kind we may imagine innumerable in the Univerſe, beſides this of
the Sun, which is near and vilible to us) is of a noble Character and
Order, being the habitation of Angels and glorified Spirits, as well
as of Mortal Men.
A Planetary Syſtem is the laſt and loweſt; and of theſe, no
doubt, there is great variety, and great differences ; not only of
Primary and Secondary, or of the principal Planet, and its Moons
or Atteridants, but alſo amongſt Planets of the ſame rank; for they
may differ both in their original conſtitution, and according to the
form and ſtate they are under at preſent ; of which ſort of diffe-
* Book 1. chap. rences we have noted * ſome amongſt our Planets, though they ſeem
laft:p.113, OC to be all of much-what the ſame original conſtitution. Beſides,
according to external circumſtances, their diſtance, manner of mo-
tion, and poſture to the Sun, which is the Heart of the whole Sy-
ſtem, they become different in many things. And we may. ob-
ferve, that thoſe leading differences, though they ſeem little, draw
after them innumerable others, and ſo make a diſtinct face of Na-
ture, and a diſtinct World; which ſtill ſhows the riches and fem
cundity of Divine Providence, and gives new. matter of contem:
plation to thoſe that take pleaſure in ſtudying the works and ways
of God, But leaving all other Planets or Planetary Syſtems to our
meditations only, we muſt particularly conſider our own.
Having therefore made this general Survey of the great Univerſe,
run thorough, the boundleſs Regions of it, and with much ado
found our way home to that little. Planet where our concerns lie,
This Earth or Sublunary. World, we muſt reſt here as at the end
of our courſe.
courſe. And, having undertaken to give the general Theory
of this Earth, to conclude the preſent 'Treatiſe, we'll reflect upon
the whole work, and obſerve wliat progreſs we have hitherto
made in this Theory, and what remains to be treated of hereaf-
ter. This Earth, though it be a ſmall part or particle of the Uni-
verſe, hạth a diſtinct Syſtem of Providence belonging to it, or an
Order, eſtabliſht by the Author of Nature for all its Phenomena
( Natural gr; Moral) throughout the whole Period of its duration,
and every interval of its for as there is nothing ſo great as to the
above
Chap. 1 1. Concerning the Prim.Earth and Paradiſe. 221
3
above the Divine care, ſo neither is there any thing ſo little as to
be below it. All the Changes of our World are fixt, How, or how
often to be deſtroy'd, and how rcrew'd; What different faces of
Nature, and what of Marikind, in every part of its Courſe; What
new Scenes 10 adorn the Stage, and what new parts to be acted
What the Entrance, and what the Conſummation of all. Neither
is there
any
ſort of knowledge more proper, or of more importance
to us that are the Inhabitants of this Earth, than to underſtand
this is Natural and Sacred Hiſtory, as I may ſo call it, both as to
what is paſt, and what is to come. And as thoſe greater Volumes
and Coinpoſitions of the Univerſe are proportion'd to the under-
ſtanding of Angels and Superiour Beings, ſo theſe little Syſtems are
Compendium's of the Divine Wiſdom, more fitted to our capacity and
comprehenſion.
The Providence of the Earth, as of all other Syſteins conſiſts of
two parts, Natural, and Sacred or Theological. I call that Sacred
or Theological that reſpects Religion, and the diſpenſations of it;
the government of the Rational World, or of Mankind whether
under the Light of Nature only, or of a Revelation ; the method
and terms of their happineſs and unhappineſs in a Future Life;
The State, Oeconomy, and Conduct of this, with all the Myſteries
contain'd in it, we call Theological Providence; in the head where-
of ſtands the Soul of the Bleſſed Meſſiah, who is Lord of both
Worlds, Intellectual and Material. When we call the other
part
of Providence Natural, we uſe that word in a reſtrain'd ſence, as
reſpecting only the Material World ; and accordingly this part of
Providence orders and ſuperintends the ſtate of the Earth, the
great Vicillitudes and Mutations of it; for we muſt not imagine,
but that theſe are under the Eye of Providence, as wellas Humané
Affairs, or any revolutions of States and Empires. Now ſeeing
both in the Intellectual and Corporeal World there are certain Pe-
riods, Fulneſſes of Time, and fixt Seaſons, either for ſome great
Cataſtrophe, or ſome great Inſtauration, 'Tis Providence that makes
a due liarmony or Synchroniſin betwixt theſe two, and meaſures out
the concurrent fates of both Worlds, ſo as Nature may be always a.
faithful miniſter of the Divine Pleaſure, whether for rewards or pu-
niſhments, according as the ſtate of Mankind may require. But The-
ological Providence not being the ſubject of this work, we ſhall only
obſerve, as we ſaid before, what account we lave hitherto given of
the Natural ſtate of the Earth, and what remains to be handled in
another Treatiſe, and ſo conclude.
I did not think it neceſſary to carry the ſtory and original of the
Earth, higher than the Chaos, as Zoroaſter and Orpheus ſeem to
have done; but taking that for our Foundation, which Antiquity
Sacred and Profane doth ſuppoſe, and Natural Reaſon approve and
confirm, we have formd the Earth from it. But when we ſay the
Earth riſe from a Fluid Maſs, it is not to be ſo crudely underſtood,
as if a rock of Marble, ſuppoſe, was fluid immediately before it be-
came Marble; no, Things had a gradual progreſſion from one form
to another, and came at length to thoſe more permanent forms they
are now ſetled in: Stone was once Earth, and Earth was once Mud,
and
222
Book.
The Theory of the Earth.
and Mud was once iluid. And ſo other things may have another
kind of progreſſion from Auidity ; but all was once tuid, at least
all the exteriour Regions of this Earth. And even thoſe Stones and
Rocks of Marble which we ſpeak of, ſeem to confeſs they were once
ſoft or liquid, by thoſe mixtures we find in them of Heterogeneous
Bodies, and thoſe ſpots and Veins diſperſt thorough their ſubſtance;
for theſe things could not happen to them after they were hard and
imperietrable, in the form of Stone or Marble. And if we can ſoften
Rocks and Stones, and run them down into their firſt Liquors, as
theſe obſervations ſeem to do, we inay eaſily believe that other Bodies
alſo that compoſe the Earth, were once in a Fluid Maſs, which is that
we call a Claos.
We therefore watch'd the motions of that Chaos, and the ſeveral
transformations of it, while it continued Fluid; and we found at
length what its firſt Coricretion would be, and how it ſetled into the
forin of an habitable Earth. But that form was very different from
the preſent form of the Earth, wliich is not immediately deducible
from a Chaos, by any known Laws of Nature, or by any Wit of
Man; as every one, that will have patience to examine it, may eaſily
be ſatisfie:l. That Tirſt Earth was of a ſmooth regular ſurface, as
the Concretions of Liquors are, before they are diſturb’d or broken;
under that ſurface lay the Great Abyſs, which was ready to ſwallow
up the World that hung over it, and about it, whenroever Gud
ſhould give the command, and the Vault fhuuld break; and this
conſtitution of the Primæval Eartlı gave occaſion to the firſt Cata-
ſtrophe of this World, when it perillit in a Deluge of Water. For
that Vault did break, as we have ſhown at large, and by the diffolu
tion and fall of it, the Great Deep was thrown out of its bed, forc'd
upwards into the Air, and overflow'd,in tliat impetuous Commotion,
the higheſt tops of the Fragments of the ruin'd Earth, which now we
call its Mountains. And as this was the firſt great and fatal Period of
Nature; ſo upon the iſſue of this, and the return of the Waters into
their Chanels, the ſecond face of Nature appear’d, or the preſent
broken form of the Earth, as it is Terraqueous, Mountainous, and
Cavernous. Theſe things we have explain'd fully in the Firſt Book,
and have thereby fetled two great Points, given a rational account
of the Univerſal Deluge, and ſhown the Cauſes of the irregular form
of the preſent or Poſt-diluvian Earth. This being done, we have ap-
ply'd our felves, in the Second Book, to the deſcription of the Pri-
inæval Earth; and the examination of its properties; and this hath
led us by an eaſie tract to the diſcovery of Paradiſe, and of the true
Notion and Myſtery of it; which is not ſo much a ſpot of ground
where a fine Garden ſtood, as a courſe of Nature, or a peculiar
state of the Earth; Paradiſiacal in many parts, but eſpecially in one
Region of it ; which place or Region we have alſo endeavour'd to
determine, though not ſo much froin the Theory, as from the ſuf-
frages of Antiquity, if you will take their judgment.
THUS much is finiſht, and this contains the Natural Theory
of the Earth till this preſent time; for ſince the Deluge all things
have continued in the ſame ſtate, or without any remarkable change.
We
1
Chap. 1 1. Concerning the Prim.Earth and Paradiſe. 223
We are riext to enter upon new Matter and new Thoughts, and
not only ſo, but upon a Series of Things and Times to come, which is
to make the Second Part of this Theory. Dividing the duration
of the World into two parts, Pait and Future, we have diſpatch'd
the firſt and far greater part, and come better half of our way;
And if we make a ſtand here, and look both ways, backwards to
the Chaos, and the beginning of the World, and forwards to the
End and Conſummation of all Things, though the firſt be a longer
proſpect, yet there are as many general Changes and Revolutions
of Nature in the remaining part as have already happen'd; and in
the Evening of this long. Day the Scenes will change faſter, and be
more bright and illuſtrious. From the Creation to this Age the
Earth hath undergone but one Cataſtrophe, and Nature hath had
two different faces. The next Cataſtrophe is the CONFLA.
GRATION, to which a new face of Nature will accordingly
ſucceed, New Heavens and a Nem Earth, Paradiſe renew'd, and ſo 'Amoue te sa-
it is callid the Reſtitution of things, or Regeneration of the World. as, Ilarge
And that Period of Nature and Providence being expir'd, then fol- xroria.
lows the Confummation of all things, or the General Apotheoſis; when
Death and Hell ſhall be ſwallowed up in victory; When the great
Circle of Time and Fate is run; or according to the language of
Scripture, When the Heavens and the Earth ſhall paſs away, and Time
ſhall be 120 more.
Mar we, in the mean time, by a true Love of God above all things,
and a contempt of this Vain World which paſſeth away; By a careful uſe
of the Gifts of God and Nature, the Light of Reaſon and Revelation,
prepare our ſelves, and the State of things, for the great Coming of our
Saviour. To whom be Praiſe and Honour for evermore.
FIN I S.
Τ Η Ε
THE O RY
OF THE
E A R T Η
Containing an Account
OF THE
Driginal of the Earth,
AND OF ALL THE
GENERAL CHANGES
Which it hath already undergone,
OR
IS TO UNDERGO
Till the ConsUMMATION of all Things.
THE TWO LAST BOOKS,
Concerning the Bur NING of the WORLD,
AND
Concerning the New Heavens and New EARTH,
LONDON,
Printed by R. N. for Walter Kettilby, at the Bilhop's-
Head in S. Paul's Church-Yard, 1 697.
mamae
A
Excellent Majeſty.
19 fume to offer the Second to Your
TO THE
1
MOST
MADAM,
AVING bad the bonour to preſent
the firſt part of this Theory to Your
RÓÝÅL ONCLE, I pre-
Majeſty. This part of the Subject,
I bope, will be no leſs acceptable, for certainly 'tis of
no leſs importance. They both indeed agree in this,
That there is a WORLD made and deſtroy'd ir
either Treatiſe. But we are more concern'd in what
is to come, than what is paſt. And as the former
Books repreſented to us the Riſe and Fall of the Firſt
World; ſo 'Theſe give an account of the preſent Frame
of Nature labouring under the lajt Flames, and of
the Reſurrection of it in the New Heavens and
New Earth: wbich, according to the Divine Pro-
miſes, we are to expeét.
Cities that are burnt, are commonly rebuilt more
beautiful and regular than they were before. And
when this World is demoliſlid by the laſt Fire, He
that undertakes to rear it up again, will ſupply the
A 2
defets.
The Epiſtle Dedicatory.
defe&ts, if there were any, of the former Fabrick.
This Theory ſuppoſes the preſent Earth to be little
better than an Heap of Ruines: where yet there is
room enough for Sea and Land, for Iſlands and Con.
tinents, for ſeveral Countries and Dominions : But
when theſe are all melted down, and refin’d in the ge-
neral Fire, they will be caſt into a better mould, and
the Form and Qualities of the Earth will become Pa-
radijahcela
But, I fear, it may be thought no very proper ad.
dreſ, topher Your Majeſty a World laid in aſhes,
where You have ſo great an intereſt Your Self, and
Theh fair Dominions; and then, to recompence the
toys by giving a Reverſion in a Future Earth, But if
thar fåtture Earth be a ſecond Paradiſe, to be en-
joyed for a Thouſand Years; with Peace, Inrie-
cency, and conſtant health: An Inheritance there will
an happy exchange for the beſt Crown in this World.
I confrey, I coald never perſwade my ſelf that the
Kingdom of Chriſt and of bis Saints, which the Scri-
pture peaks of fo frequently, was deſign d to be upon
this preſent Earth. But however, upon all ſuppoa.
tions, They that have done fome eminent Good in this
Life, will be ſharers in the happineſ of that Statc
.
Thimble the Uppreſſors, and reſcue the Oppreſſed
,
out work of Generoſity and Charity that cannot want
its reward; Yet, Madam, They are the greateſt
Benefactors to Mankind, that diſpoſe the World to
become Virtuous : and by their example
, Influence,
and Authority, retrieve that TRUTH and
JUSTICE, that have been toff
, amortalt meie
for many Ages. The School-Divines tell u thoſe
tha
be
,
The Epiſtle Dedicatory.
that a&t or ſuffer great things for the Publick Good,
are diſtinguiſl'd in Heaven by a Circle of Gold abou:
their Heads. One would not willingly vouch for that :
but one may ſafely for what the Prophet Says
which is far greater : namely, that They Mall ſhine
like Stars in the Firmament, that turn many to
Righteouſneſs. Which is not to be underſtood, ſo
much, of the Converſion of ſingle Souls, as of the
turning of Nations and People
, the turning of the
World to Righteouſneſs. They that lead on that
great and happy Work, ſhall be diſtinguiſhidin Glory
from the reſt of Mankind.
We are ſenſible, MAD AM, from Your Great
Example that Piety and Vertue ſeated upon a Throne,
draw many to in: itation, whom ill Principles, or the
courſe of the l'orld, might bave led another way.
Theſe are the beſt, as well as eaſteſt Vi&tories, that are
gain'd without Conteſt. And as Princes are the Vice.
gerents of God upon Earth, ſo when their Majeſty
is in Conjun&tion with Goodneſ, it hath a double Chan
racter of Divinity upon it : and we owe them a double
Tribute, of Fear and Love. Which, with conſtant
Trayers for Your MAJESTIE S preſent and fu-
ture Happineſ, ſhall be always Dutifully paid, by
Your MAJESTY'S
Moſt Humble and moſt
Obedient Subject,
T. BURNET.
A3
PREFACE
PRE FACE
TO THE
RE A DER
5
F
HAVE not much to ſay to the Reader
in this Preface to the Third Part of the
Theory: ſeeing ir treats upon a Subject
own'd by all, and out of diſpute : The
Conflagration of the World. The queſtion
will be only about the bounds and limits of the Con-
flagration, the Cauſes and the Manner of it. Theſe I
have fix'd according to the trueſt meaſures I could
take from Scripture, and from Nature. I differ, I be-
lieve from the common Sentiment in this, that, in fol-
lowing S. Peter's Philoſophy, I ſuppoſe, that the burn-
ing of the Earth will be a true Liquefaction or diſſo-
lution of it, as to the exteriour Region. And that this
lays a foundation for New Heavens and a New Earth;
which ſeems to me as plain a doctrine in Chriſtian Re-
ligion, as the Conflagration it ſelf.
I have endeavour'd to propoſe an intelligible way,
whereby the Earth may be conſum'd by Fire. But if
any one can propoſe another, more probable and more
conſiſtent, I will be the Firſt Man that ſhall give him
thanks for his diſcovery. He that loves Truth for its
own ſake, is willing to receive it from any hand: as he
that truly loves bis Country, is glad of a Victory over
the Enemy, whether himſelf
, or any other, has the glory
of it. I need not repeat here, what I have already ſaid
upon ſeveral occaſions, That 'tis the ſubſtance of this
Theory, whether in this part or in ocher parts, that I
mainly regard and depend upon. Being willing to ſup-
poſe that many ſingle explications and particularities
may be rectified, upon further thoughts and clearer
light.
THE PRE FACE.
light. I know our beſt writings, in this life, are buc
Eſays, which we leave to Pofterity to review and cor-
rect.
As to the Style, I always endeavour to expreſs my
ſelf, in a plain and perſpicuous manner: that the Rea.
der may not loſe time, nor wait too long, to know my
meaning. To give an Attendant quick diſpatch, is a
civility, whether you do his buſineſs or no. I would
not willingly give any one the trouble of reading a
period twice over, to know the ſence of it: left when
he comes to know it, he ſhould not think it a récom-
pence for his pains. Whereas, on the contrary, if you
are eafie to your Reader, he will certainly make you an
allowance for it, in his cenſure.
You muſt not think it ſtrange however, that the
Author ſometimes
, in medicating upon this ſubject is
warm in his thoughts and expreſſions. For co ſee a
World periſhing in Flames, Rocks melting, the Earth
crembling, and an Hoſt of Angels in the clouds, one
muſt be very much a Stoick, to be a cold and uncon-
cerned Spectator of all this. And when we are mov'd
our ſelves, our words will have a tincture of thoſe pal-
fions which we feel. Beſides, in moral reflections which
are deſign'd for uſe, there muſt be ſome heat, as well
as dry reaſon, to inſpire this cold clod of clay, this dull
body of Earth, which we carry about with us; and
you muſt ſoften and pierce that cruſt, before you can
come at the Soul. But eſpecially when things future
are to be repreſented, you cannot uſe too ſtrong Co-
lours, if you would give them life, and make them ap-
pear preſent to the mind. Farewel.
CONTENTS
--
* -
CONTENTS
OF THE
CHAPTER S.
THE THIRD BOOK.
TH
What the Aſtronomers ſay upon this
C H A P. I.
Subječty and upon what they ground
their Calculations. The true nntion
HE Introduktion; with the of the Great Teir, or of the Plato-
Contents and Onder of this nick lear, Yated and expliid.
Treatiſe.
CHAP. V.
CHAP. I I.
Concerning Prophecies that deter-
The true ſtate of the Queſtion is minė tle End of the World; Of
propos’d. 'Tis the general do&trine what order foever, Prophane or sin
of the Ancients, That the preſent cred: Jewiſh or Chriſtian. That 120.
World, or the preſent Frame of Na- certain judgment can be made fronz
ture, is mutable and periſhable: Tomy of theinat nta diftonice medie
which the Sacred Books agree: from 1le Cutlasgration.
Aid 12.1tural Reaſon can alledge no-
thing againſt it.
C H A P. VI.
C Η Α Ρ. ΙΙΙ.
Goncerning the Cauſes of the Con-
flagration. The difficulty of con-
That the World will be deſtroy'd ceiving hoog. this Earth can be ſet on
by Fire, is the doctrine of the Anci- fire: laty a general anſwer to th.it
enis, especially if the Stoicks. That difficubiy Yeto sveppoyd Ctuſes of
the ſame doctrine is. more ancient the Gonflwy cation, hyrhe Sun's dram-
than the Greeks, and deriv'd from ing. Here to the Earth, or the
the Barbarick Philoſophy, and That Earth's throwing on the Gentral
probably froin Noah, the Father of Fire, ex.imind and rejeéted.
all Tradition.iry
Learning. The fame
do&trine exprefly authoriz'd by Re CHAP. VII,
velation, and inroll'd into the Sir-
cred C.1110n.
The Yrities bounds of the luft Fire,
itud har for it is Fatty. The 12.ttu-
CH A P. I V.
ral Grufesian Muaterials of it, cajt
into three ranks. Firſt, ſuch as:
Concerning the Time of the Cotz are Exteriony and viſible upon Earth.
Plagration, and the End of the Wordid. here the Volcano's of this Earth,
and
1
THE CONTENTS .
and their Effexts are conſider'd. Si- greſs of the Conflagration, what part
condly, ſuch Materials as are with of the Earth will firſt be burnt. The
in the Earth. Thirdly, ſuch as are inanner of the future deſtruction of
in the Air.
Rome, according to the Propheti-
CHAP. VIII. cil indications. The laſt state and
confummation of the general Fire.
Some new diſpoſitions towards the
Conflagration, as to the Matter,
CHAP. X I.
Form, and Situation of the Earth.
Goncerning miraculous Cauſes, and An Account of thife Extraordi-
hom far the miniſtry of Angels may nary Phanomena and Wonders in
be engag'd in this work.
Nature, that, according to Scri-
pture, will precede the coming of
CHAP. I X.
Chriſt, and the Conflagration of the
Ilorld.
How the Sea will be diminiſh'd
und conſum’d. Hom the Racks and
CHAP. XII.
Mountains will be thromon doirn and
melted, and the whole exteriour An imperfect deſcription of the
Frame of the Earth diſſolv'd into a coming of our Savi ur, and of the
Deluge of Fire.
$
World on fire.
CH A P. X.
The Concluſion.
Concerning the beginning and pro-
THE FOURTH BOOK.
CHA P. I.
CHAP. III.
TH
1
HE Introdu&tion: That the Concerning the Inhabitants of the
World will not be annihilatd New Earth. That natural reaſon
in the laſt fire. That me are to ex cannot determine this point. Thill,
pect, according to Scripture, and according to Scripture, The Sons of
the Chriſtian Do&trine, New Hea- the firſt Refurrečtion, or the keirs
vens and a New Earth, when theſe of the Millennium, are to be the
are diſolu'd. or buynt up.
Inhabitants of the New Earth, The
Teſtimony of the Philoſophers, and
CHAP. II.
of the Chriſtian Fathers, for the Re-
novation of the World. The first
The Birth of the Nero HeaVENS Propoſition laid domn.
and the New Earth, from the fe-
cond Chaor, or the remains of the
CU AP. IV.
Old World. The form, order and
qualities of the New Earth, accor The Proof of a Millennium, 13
ding to Reaſon and Scripture, of a bleſſed Age to come, fronz Scri
pture. Ai viem of the Apocalypſe
:
THE CONTENTS .
end of the Prophecies of Daniel, in
reference to this Kingdom of Chriſt, CHAP. VIII.
and of his Saints.
Tbe Third Propoſition luid down,
CHAP. V.
concerning the Time and Place of
the Millennium. Sever.il arg14-
A view of other places of Scri- gients us’d to prove, that it cannot
pture, concerning the Millennium, be till after the Confi.zgr.ition: and
or future Kingdom of Chriſt. In that the New Heavens ind New
arhat fence all the Prophets have Earth are the true Seat of the
born Teſtimony concerning it. Bleſſed Millennium.
C H A P. VI.
CHAP. IX.
The fence and teſtimony of the The chief employment of the Mil-
Primitive Church, c ncerning the lennium DEVOTION and
Millennium, or future Kingdom of CONTEMPLATIO N.
Chriſt: from the times of the Apoſtles
to the Nicene Council. The ſec. nd
CHAP. X.
Propoſition laid down. When, by
what means, and for what reaſons, Obje&tions againſt the Millenni-
that doétrine iras afterwards neg- nm, unſwer’d. With ſome conje-
leEted or diſcourtenanc'd.
Etures concerning the ſtate of things
iafter the Millennium : and what
CHA P. VII. will be the final Confummation of
this Vorld.
The true ſtate of the Millennium,
according to Characters taken from
Scripture. Some iniſtakes concern The Review of the whole Theory.
irig it re&tified.
THË
}
1
1
THE
T H E O RY
OF THE
EARTH
Book III:
Concerning the Conflagration.
CHAP. I.
The Introduction ; With the Contents and Order of this
Work
EEING l'rovidence hath planted in all Men a na.
tural deſire and curioſity of knowing things to
come; and ſuch things eſpecially as concern our
particular Happineſs, or the general Fate of Man-
kind : This Treatiſe may, in both reſpects, hope
for a favourable reception amongſt inquiſitive per-
ſons; ſeeing the deſign of it is, to give an account
of the greateſt revolutions of Nature that are expected in future
Ages: and in the firſt place, of the Conflagration of the World. In
which Univerſal Calamity, when all Nature ſuffers, every Man's
particular concern muſt needs be involv'd.
We ſee with what eagerneſs Men pry into the Stars,, to ſee if they
can read there the Death of a King, or the fall of an Empire: Tis
not the fate of any fugle Prince or Potentate, that we Calculate, but
of all Mankind : Nor of this or that particular Kingdom or Empire,
but of the whole Earth. Our enquiries muſt reach to: that great
period of Nature, when all things are to be diffolvid: both hunane
affairs, and the Stage whereon they are acted. When the Hea-
vens and the Earth will paſs away, and the Elements melt with
fervent heat. We deſire, if poſſible, to know what will be the face
of that Day, that great and terrible Day, when the Regions of the
Air will be nothing but mingled flame and Smoak, and the habi-
table Earth turn'd into a Sea of molten Fire.
3
Bic
2
Book Ul.
The Theory of the Earth.
But we muſt not leave the World in this diſorder and confulion,
without examining what will be the Illue and conſequences of it
Whether this will be the End of all Things, and Nature by a ſau
fate, lie eternally diſſolvd and deſolate in this inanner : or whe-
ther we may hope for a Reſtauration : New Heavens üzd a ilen
Earth, which the Holy Writings make inention of, more pure
and perfect than the former. As if this was but as a Refiner's firi,
to purge out the droſs and courſer parts, and then calt the Maſs
again into a new and better Mould. Theſe things, with God's al
ſiſtance, Mall be matter of our preſent enquiry; Theſe make the
gerveral ſubject of this Treatiſe, and of the remaining parts of this
Theory of the Earth. Which now, you ſee, begins to be a kind of
Prophecy, or Prognoſtication of things to come: as it hath been
hitherto án Hiſtory of things paſs'd ; of ſuch ſtates and changes
as Nature hath already undergone. And if that account which
we have given of the Origin of the Earth, its firſt and Paradiſia-
cal form, and the diſſolution of it at the Univerſal Deluge, appear
fair and reaſonable: The ſecond diſſolution by Fire, and the re-
renovation of it out of a Second Chaos, I hope will be deducd
from as clear grounds and ſuppoſitions. And Scripture it ſelf will
be a more viſible Guide to us in theſe following parts of the Theory,
than it was in the former. In the mean time, I take occaſion to de
clare here again, as I have done heretofore, that neither this, nor
any other great revolutions of Nature, are brought to paſs, by
Cauſes purely Natural, without the conduct of a particular. Provi-
dence. And 'tis the Sacred Books of Scripture that are the records
of this Providence, both as to times paſt, and times to come: 15
to all the ſignal Changes either of the Natural World; or of Man
kind, and the different Oeconomies of Religion. In which reſpects,
theſe Books, tho’they did not contain a Moral Law, would botwith-
ftanding be, as the moſt myſtical, ſo alſo the moſt valuable Books
in the World.
This Treatiſe, you ſee, will conſiſt of Two Parts. The former
whereof is to give an account of the Conflagration; and the latter,
of the New Heavens and New Earth following upon it; together
with the ſtate of Mankind in thoſe New Habitations. As to the
Conflagration, we firſt enquire, what the Antients thought con
cerning the preſent frame of this World; whether it was to periſh
or no : whether to be deſtroyed, or to ſtand eternally in this po-
fture. Then in what manner they thought it would be deſtroy'd;
by what forte or violence; whether by Fire or other ways. And
with theſe opinions of the Antients we will compare the doctrine
of the Prophets and Apoſtles, to diſcover and confirm the truth of
them. In the ſecond place, We will examine what Calculations
or Conjectures have been made concerning the time of this great
Cataſtrophe, or of the end of this world. Whether that period be
defineable or no: and whether by Natural Arguments, or by Pro
phecies. Thirdly, We will conſider the Signs of the approaching
Confagration : Whether ſuch as will be in Nature, or in the
ſtate of Humane Affairs; but eſpecially ſuch as are taken notice of
and recorded in Scripture. Fourthly, 'Which is the principal point,
and
!
Chap. I. Concerning the Conflagration.
3
ná
and
yet
that wherein the Ancients have been moſt ſilent, I hair
Gauſes there are in Nature, what preparations, for this Conflagra
tion: Where are the Seeds of this liniverſal Tire, or fewel ſuffi
cient for the nourilhing of it? Laſtly, In what order and by whar
degrees the Conflagration will proceed: In what manter the frame
of the Earth will be diſſolv'd : and what will be the dreadful coun-
tenance of a Burning World.
Theſe heads are let down more fully in the Argument of each
Chapter'; and ſeem to be ſufficient for the explication of this whole
matter: Taking in ſome additional diſcourſes, which, in purſu-
ing theſe heads, enter of their own accord, and make the work more
even and entire. In the Second Part, we reſtore the World that
we had deſtroy'd : Build New Heavens and a New Earth, whereinz
highteonjneſs Mall dwell. Eſtabliſh that new order of things, which
is to often celebrated by the Prophets: A Kingdom of Peace and
of Juſtice, where the Enemy of Mankind Niall be bound, and the
Prince of Peace Mall rule. A Paradiſe without a Serpent, and a
Tree of Knowledge, not to wound, but to heal the Nations. Where
will be neither curſe, nor pain, nor death, nor diſeaſe. Where all
things are new, all things are inore perfect, both the World it ſelf,
and its Inhabitants. Where the Firit-born from the Dead, have the
Firſt-fruits of glory.
We dote upon this preſent World, and the enjoyments of it:
and ’tis not without pain, and fear, and reluctancy, tliat we are
torn from them: as if our hopes lay all within the compaſs of this
life. Yet, I know not by what good fate, my thoughts have been
always fixt upon things to come; more than upon things preſent.
Theſe I know, by certain experience, to be but trifles; and if there
be nothing more conſiderable to come, the whole being of Man is
no better than a trifle. But there is room enough before us in that
we call Eternity, for great and Noble Scenes: and the Mind of Man
frels it ſelf leſſen'd and ſtraitend in this low and narrow late:
wiſhes and waits to ſee ſomething greater. And if it could diſcern
another World a coming, on this ſide Eternal Life; a beginning
Glory, the beſt that Earth can bear, It would be a kind of Immor-
tality to en'oy that proſpect before-hand; To ſee, when this Thea-
ter is diſolv’d, where we ſhall act next, and what parts. What
Saints and Hero's, if I may ſo ſay, will appear upon that Stage ;
and with what luſter and excellency. How eaſie would it be, under
a view of theſe futurities, to deſpiſe the little pomps and honours;
and the momentany pleaſures of a Mortal Life. But I proceed to
our Subject.
1
1
!
B 3
CHAP
:
#
4
Book 01.
The Theory of the Earth.
CHAP. II.
The true fate of the Queſtion is propos d.
'Tis the general do&trine of the Ancients, that the preſent
World, or the preſent frame of Nature, is mutable and
periſhable : To which the Sacred Books agree: and Na-
tural Reaſon can alledge nothing againſt it.
!
W
!
1
Hen we ſpeak of the End or deſtruciion of the World, whe-
ther by Fire or otherwiſe, 'Tis not to be imagin’d that we
underſtand this of the Great Univerſe ; Sun, Moon, and Stars, and
the Higheſt Heavens: as if theſe were to periſh or be deſtroy'd
ſome few years hence, whether by Fire or any other way. This
Queſtion is only to be underſtood of the Sublunary World, of this
Earth and its Furniture; which had its original about ſix thouſand
years ago, according to the Hiſtory of Moſes; and hath once al-
ready been deſtroy'd, when the Exteriour Region of it broke, and
Gen.7i ir.
the Abyſs iſſuing forth, as out of a womb, overflow'd all the ha-
Fab 38.8 bitable Earth. The next Deluge is that of Fire; which will have
the ſame bounds, and overflow the Surface of the Earth much-what
in the ſame manner. But the celeſtial Regions, where the Stars and
Angels inhabit, are not concern'd in this fate: Thoſe are not made
of combuſtible matter, nor, if they were, cou'd our flames reach
them. Poſſibly thoſe Bodies may have changes and revolutions pe
culiar to themſelves, but in ways unknown to us, and after long
and unknown periods of time. Therefore when we ſpeak of the
Conflagration of the World, Theſe have no concern in the queſtion ;
nor any other part of the Univerſe, than the Earth and its depen-
dances. As will cvidently appear when we come to explain the
Manner and Cauſes of the Conflagration.
And as this Conflagration can extend no further than to the
Earth and its Elements, fo neither can it deſtroy the matter of the
Earth; but only the form and faſhion of it, as it is an habitable
World. Neither Fire, nor any other Natural Agent can deſtroy
Matter, that is, reduce it to nothing: It may alter the modes and
qualities of it, but the ſubſtance will always remain. And accord-
ingly the Apoſtle, when he ſpeaks of the mutability of this World,
2 Cor. 7.31. ſays only, The figure or faſhion of this World paſſes away. This
ſtructure of the Earth and diſpoſition of the Elements: And all the
2 Epift. 3: works of the Earth, as S. Peter ſays; All its natural productions, and
all the works of art or humane induſtry; theſe will periſh, melted
or torn in pieces by the Fire; but without an annihilation of the
Matter, any more than in the former Deluxe. And this will be
further prov'd and illuſtrated in the beginning of the following
Book
The queſtion being thus ſtated, we are next to conſider the ſenſe
of Antiquity upon theſe two Points: Firſt, Whether this Sublu-
naty
Chap. 2. Concerning the Conflagration. .
$ 5
great Uni-
nary World is mutable and periſhable. Secondly, By the force and
action of what cauſes, and in what manner it will perilh : whether
by Fire or otherwiſe. Ariſtotle is very irregular in his Sentiment:
about the ſtate of the World ; He allows it neither beginning nor
ending, riſe nor fall, but wou'd have it eternal and immutable.
And this he underſtands not only of the Great Univerſe, but of
tiis Sublunary World, this Earth which we inhabit: wherein he
will not admit there ever have been or over will be, either general
Deluges or Confagrations. And as if he was ambitious to be
thought fingular in his opinion about the Eternity of the World,
He ſays, All the Ancients before him, gave ſome beginning or origin
to the World : But were not indeed ſo unanimous as to its future
fate: Some believing it immutable, or as the Philoſophers call it,
incorruptible; Others, That it had its fatal times and Periods, as
letler Bodies have; and a term of age prefixt to it, by Providence.
But before we examine this point any further, it will be necel-
fary to reliect upon that which we noted before, an ambiguity in the
uſe of the word World, which gives frequent occaſion of miſtakes in
reading the Ancients: when that which they ſpeak of the
verſe, we apply to the Sublunary World: or on the contrary, what
they ſpeak of this Earth, we extend to the whole Univerſe. And
if foine of them, beſides Ariſtotle, inade the World incorruptible,
they might inean that of the Great Univerſe, which they thought
would never be diſſolv'd or periſh as to its Maſs and bulk: But
ſingle parts and points of it (and our Earth is no more ) may be
variouſly transforin'd, and made habitable and unhabitable, ac-
cording to certain periods of time, without any prejudice to their
Philofophy. So Plato, for inſtance, thinks this World will have no
Diſſolution : for, being a work ſo beautiful and noble, the good-
neſs of God, he ſays, will always preſerve it. It is moſt reaſonable to
underſtand this of the Great Univerſe; for, in our Earth, Plato himſelf
admits ſuch diſſolutions, as are made by general Deluges and Con-
flagrations ; and we contend for no other. So likewiſe in other
Authors, if they ſpeak of the immortality of the World, you muſt
obſerve what World they apply it to: and whether to the Matter
or the Form of it: and if you remember that our Diſcourſe pro.
ceeds only upon the Sublunary World, and the Diffolution of its
form, you will find little in antiquity contrary to this doctrine. I
always except Ariſtotle, ( who allow'd of no Providence in this in-
feriour World ) and fome Pythagoreans falſly ſo callid, being either
fictitious Authors, or Apoſtates froin the doctrine of their Maſter.
Theſe being excepted, upon a view of the reſt, you will find very
few diflenters from this general doctrine.
Plato's argument againſt the diffolution of the World, from the
goodneſs and wiſdom of God, wou'd not be altogether unreaſonable,
tho' apply'd to this Earth, if it was ſo to be diſſolv’d, ás never to
be reſor'd again. But we expect New Heavens and a New Earth
upon the diffolution of theſe: Better in all reſpects, inore commo-
dious and more beautiful. And the ſeveral perfections of the Di.
vine Nature, Wiſdom; Power, Goodneſs, Juſtice, Sanctity, cannot
be ſo well diſplay'd and exemplifi’d in any one ſingle ſtatel of Nature,
25
6
Book Ill.
The Theory of the Earth.
1
1
1
Gen. 1.
2 Pet. 2.5.
as in a ſucceſſion of States: fitted to receive one another according
to the diſpoſitions of the Moral World, and the order of Diving
Providence. Wherefore Plato's argument from the Divine Attri-
butes, all things cor.ſideri, doth rather prove a ſucceſſion of Worlds,
than that one ſingle World ſhould remain the faine throughout all
ages, without change or variation. Next to the Platonifts
, the
Stoicks were moſt conſiderable in matters relating to Morality and
Providence : And their opinion, in this caſe, is well known; they
being lookt upon by the Moderns, as the principal authors of the
doctrine of the Conflagr.ition. Nor is it leſs known that the School
of Democritus and Epicurus inade all their Worlds ſubject to diſſolu-
tion; and by a new concourſe of Atomes reſtor'd them again.
Laſtly, The Ionick Philoſophers, who had Thales for their Maſter,
and were the firſt Naturaliſts amongſt the Greeks, taught the ſame
doctrine. We have indeed but an imperfect account left us of this
Sect, and 'tis great pity; for as it was one of the moſt ancient, ſo
it ſeems to have been one of the moſt conſiderable amongſt the
Greeks for Natural Philoſophy. In thoſe remains which Diogenes
Laertius hath preſerv'd, of Anaxagoras, Anaximenes, Archelaus,&c.
All great men in their time, we find that they treated much of the
Origin of the World, and had many extraordinary Notions about
it, which come lame and defective to us. The doctrine of their
Founder, Thales, which made all things to conſiſt of Water, ſeerns
to have a great reſemblance to the doctrine of Moſes and S. Peter,
about the conſtitution of the Firſt Heavens and Earth. But there
is little in Laertius what their opinion was about the Diſſolution of
Ecl. Phyſ. the World. Other Authors inform us more of that. Stobaus joyns
them with Leucippus and the Epicureans: Simplicius with Heracli-
tus and the Stoicks, in this doctrine about the corruptibility of the
World. So that all the Schools of the Greek Philofophers, as we
noted before, were unanimous in this point, excepting the Peripa
teticks; whoſe Maſter, Ariſtotle, had neither modeſty enough to fol-
low the doctrine of his Predeceſſors, nor wit enough to invent any
thing better,
Beſides theſe Sects of Philoſophers, there were Theologers amongſt
the Greeks, more ancient than theſe Sects, and more inyſtical.
Oi gunxei, Ariſtotle often diſtinguiſheth the Naturaliſts and the Theologues. Such
oi sonozoi were Orpheus and his followers, who had more of the Ancient
Oriental Learning than the ſucceeding Philoſophers. But they writ
their Philoſophy, or Theology rather, Mythologically and Poeti-
tically, in Parables and Allegories, that needed an interpretation.
All theſe Theologers ſuppoſed the Earth to riſe from a Chaos:
and as they ſaid that Love was the principle at firſt, that united
the looſe and ſevered Elements, and formed them into an Habitable
World: So they ſuppoſed that if Strife or Contention prevail'd,
that would again diſſolve and diſunite them, and reduce things
into a Chaos : Such as the Earth will be in, upon the Conflagra-
tion. And it further appears, that both theſe Orders of the Learn
ed in Greece ſuppos'd this preſent frame of Nature might periſh,
by their doctrine of Periodical Revolutions, or of the Renovation of
the World: after certain periods of time: which was a doctrine
common
1.1.6. 24•
Chap.2. Concerning the Conflagration.
7
Lib. s.
common amongſt the learned Greeks, and received by them from
the ancient Barbarick Nations. As will appear more at large in the
following Book, Ch. 3. In the mean time we may obſerve that Ori-
ge12
in anſwering Celfus, about the point of the Reſurrection, tells
him, That Doctrine ought not to appear ſo ſtrange or ridiculous to
him, ſeeing their own Authors did believe and teach the Renovan
tion of the World, after certain Ages or Periods. And the truth is,
this Renovation of the World, rightly ſtated, is the ſame thing with
the Firſt Reſurrection of the Chriſtians. And as to the Second and
general Reſurrection, when the Righteous ſhall have Celeſtial Bo-
dies; 'tis well known that the Platoniſts and Pythagoreans cloath'd
the Soul with a Celeſtial Body, or, in their Language, an Ethereal
Vehicle, as her laſt Beatitude or Glorification. So that Origen might
very juſtly tell his adverſary, he had no reaſon to ridicule the Chri-
ſtian Doctrine of the Reſurrection, ſeeing their own Authors had
the main ſtrokes of it in their Traditionary Learning.
I will only addone reinark more, before we leave this Subject,
to prevent a miſtake in the word Immortal or Immortality, when ap-
plyed to the World. As I told you before, the equivocation that
was in that term World, it being us'd ſometimes for the whole
Univerſe, ſometimes for this inferiour part of it where we live;
ſo likewiſe we muſt obſerve, that when this Inferiour World is
ſaid to be Immortal, by the Philoſophers, as ſometimes it is, that
commonly is not meant of any ſingle ſtate of Nature, or any ſingle
World, but of a ſucceſſion of Worlds, conſequent one upon ano-
ther. As a family may be ſaid immortal, not in any ſingle perſon,
but in a ſucceſſion of Heirs. So as, many times, when the Anci-
ents mention the immortality of the World, they do not thereby
exclude the Diſſolution or Renovation of it: but ſuppoſe a viciſſi-
tude, or ſeries of Worlds ſucceeding one another. This obſerva-
tion is not mine, but was long ſince made by Simplicius, Stobæus,
and others, who tell us in what ſenſe ſome of thoſe Philofophers
who allowed the World to be periſhable, did yet affirm it to be im-
mortal : namely, by ſucceſſive renovations.
Thus much is ſufficient to ſhew the fence and judgment of An-
tiquity, as to the chařgeableneſs or perpetuity of the World. But
Ancient Learning is like Ancient Medals, more eſteemed for their
rarity, than their real uſe ; unleſs the Authority of a Prince make
then currant. So neither will theſe Teſtimonies be of any great
effect, unleſs they be made good and valuable by the Authority of
Scripture. We muſt therefore add the Teſtimonies of the Prophets
and Apoſtles to theſe of the Greeks and Barbarians, that the evi-
dence may be full and undeniable. That the Heavens and the
Earth will periſh or be chang'd into another form, is, ſometimes,
plainly expreſt
, ſometimes fuppos'd and alluded to in Scripture.
The Prophet David's teſtimony is expreſs, both for the beginning
and ending of the World : in the 102. Pfalm, Of old haft thou laid
the foundation of the Earth, and the heavens are the work of thy hands.
They ſhall periſh, but thou ſhalt endure : pea, all of them ſhall wax old
like a garment; as a veſture ſhalt thou change them, and they ſhall be
changed. But thou art the fame, and thy Years hall have no end.
The
8
Book III.
The Theory of the Earth.
manner.
Ch. 51. 6.
The Prophet Ejay's teſtimony is no leſs expreſs, to the fame
pur-
poſe. Lift up your Eyes to the heavens, and look upon the Earth be-
neath: for the heavens shall vaniſh amay like finoke, and the Earth Mall
mix old like a garment, and they that duell therein ſhall die in like
Theſe i exts are plain and explicite; and in alluſion to
this day of the Lord, and this deſtruction of the World, the fame
114.13.13.6.24. Prophet often uſeth phraſes that relate to it. As the Concuſſion of the
18,19.c.34. 4. Heavens and the Earth. The Shaking of the founditions of the World.
The diſſolution of the Hoſt of Heaven. And our Sacred Writers have
expreſſions of the like force, and relating to the ſame effect. As the
Hills melting like max, at the preſence of the Lord: Pſal. 97.5. Shat-
tering once more all the parts of the Creation: Hagg. 2.6. Overturn-
ing the mountains, and making the pillars of the Earth to tremble: Job
9:5,6. If you reflect upon the explication given of the Deluge ini
the firſt part of this Theory, and attend to the manner of the Con-
flagration, as it will be explain'd in the ſequel of this Diſcourſe, you
will ſee the juſtneſs and fitneſs of theſe expreſſions: That they are
not Poetical Hyperboles, or random expreſſions, of great and ter-
rible things in general, but a true account of what hath been, or
will be, at that great day of the Lord. 'Tis true, the Prophets ſome-
times uſe ſuch-like expreſſions figuratively, for commotions in States
and Kingdoms, but that is only by way of Metaphor and accommo-
dation; the true balis they ſtand upon, is that ruine, overthrow,
and diſſolution of the Natural World, which was once at the De-
luge, and will be again, after another manner, at the general Con-
flagration.
As to the New Teſtament, our Saviour fays, Heaven and Earth
Sball paſs away, but his words shall not paſs away, Matth.24.35. S.Paul
ſays, the Scheme of this World; the faſhion, form, and compoſition
of it, paſſeth away, Cor. 7:31. And when mention is made of Nero
Heavens and a New Earth, which both the Prophet Iſaiah, and the
11.65.17
66.6.1.2.11. Apoſtles S. Peter and S. John, mention, 'tis plainly imply'd that the
1. 2 Pet. 3.13. old ones will be diffolv'd. The ſame thing is alſo imply'd, when
our Saviour ſpeaks of a Renaſcency or Regeneration, Matt. 19. 28.
and S. Peter, of a Reſtitution of all things, A&t. 3. 2 1, For what is
now, muſt be aboliſh’d, before any former order of things can be
reſtor'd or reduc'd. In a word, If there was nothing in Scripture
concerning this ſubject, but that diſcourſe of S. Peter's, in his ad.
Epiſtle and 3d. Chapter, concerning the triple order and ſucceſſion
of the Heavens and the Earth; paſt, preſent, and to come that
alone wou'd be a conviction and demonſtration to me, that this
preſent World will be diſſolv'd.
You will ſay, it may be, in the laſt place, we want ſtill the teſti
mony of Natural Reaſon and Philofophy to make the evidence com-
pleat. I anſwer, 'tis enough, if they be ſilent, and have nothing to
ſay to the contrary. Here are witneſſes, Humane and Divine, and
if none appear againſt them, we have no reaſon to refuſe their teſti-
mony, or to diſtruſt it. Philoſophy will very readily yield to this
Doctrine, that All material compoſitions are diſſolvable: and ſhe
will not wonder to ſee that die, which ſhe had ſeen born; I mean,
this Terreſtrial World. She ſtood upon the Chaos, and ſee it rowl
it feli
;
Chap: 3. Concerning the Conflagration.
9
wa
1
it ſelf, with difficulty and after many ſtruglings, into the form of
an habitable Earth: And that forın The ſee broken down again at
the Deluge ; and can as little hope or expect now, as then, that it
ſhould be everlaſting and immutable. There would be nothing great
or conliderable in this Inferiour World, if there were not ſuch re-
volutions of Nature. The Seaſons of the Year, and the freſh Pro-
ductions of the Spring, are pretty in their way; But when the Great Annus
Ycar comes about, with a new order of all things, in the Heavens Mugrik.
and on the Earth, and a new dreſs of Nature throughout all her
Regions, far more goodly and beautiful than the faireſt Spring ;
This gives a new Life to the Creation, and ſhows the greatneſs of
its Author. Belides, Theſe Fatal Cataſtrophes are always a puniſh-
ment to degenerate Mankind, that are overwhelm'd in the ruines of
theſe periſhing Worlds. And to inake Nature her ſelf execute the
Divine Vengeance againſt Rebellious Creatures, argues both tlie Po-
wer and Wiſdom of that Providence that governs all things here below.
Theſe things Reaſon and Philoſophy approve of; but if you further
require that they dould ihew, a Neceſſity of this future deſtruction
of the World, from Natural Cauſes, with the time and all other cir-
cumſtances of this effect; your demands are unreaſonable, ſeeing theſe
things do not depend ſolely upon Nature. But if you will content
your ſelf to know what diſpoſitions there are in Nature towards ſuch
á change, how it may begin, proceed, and be conſummate, under
the conduct of Providence, be pleaſed to read the following Diſcourſe
for your further ſatisfaction.
CHA P. III.
That the World will be deſtroy'd by Fire, is the doctrine of
the Ancients, eſpecially of the Stoicks. That the ſame
do&trine is more ancient than the Greeks, and derivd
from the Barbarick Philoſophy, and That probably from
Noah; the Father of all Traditionary Learning. The
ſame do&rine expreſly authoriz’d by Revelation, and in-
rolled into the Sacred Canon.
TH
HAT the preſent World, or the preſent frame of Nature, will
be deſtroy'd, we have already mewn. In what manner this
deſtruction will be, by what force or what kind of fate, inuſt be our
next enquiry. The Philoſophers have always ſpoken of Fire and Wa-
ter, thoſe two unruly Elements, as the only Cauſes that can deſtroy
the World, and work our ruine ; and accordingly they ſay, all the
great and fatal Revolutions of Nature, either paſt or to come, de-
pend upon the violence of theſe Two; when they get the maſtery,
and overwhelin all the reſt and the whole Earth, in a Deluge or Con-
fagration. But as they make theſe Two the Deſtroying Elemerits
, ſo
they alſo make them the Purifying Elements. And accordingly in
their
с
IO
Booi ur,
The Theory of the Earth.
1 Cor.3.13.
their Luſtrations; or their rites and ceremonies for purging fin, Fire
and Water were chiefly made uſe of, both amongſt the Romans, Greeks
and Barbarians. And when theſe Elements over-run the World, it
is not, they ſay, for a final deſtruction of it, but to purge Mankind
and Nature from their impurities. As for purgation by Fire and Wa-
ter; the ſtile of our Sacred Writings dces very much accommodate
it ſelf to that ſence; and the Holy Ghoſt, who is the great Puriter
of Souls, is compared in his operation upon us, and in our regene-
1 Ép. 3. 21. ration, to fire or water. And as for the external world, S. Peter
makes the Flood to have been a kind of Baptziing or renovation of
the World. And S. Paul and the Prophet Malachy make the latt
Mil. 3. 2, 3. Fire, to be a purging and refining fire. But to return to the Anci
ents,
The Stoicks eſpecially, of all other Sects amongſt the Grecks, have
preſerved the doctrine of the Conflagration, and made it a conſider:
able part of their Philoſophy, and almoſt a character of their order.
This is a thing ſo well known that I need not uſe any Citations to
* prove it. But they cannot pretend to have been the firſt Autliors of
it neither. For, beſides that amongſt the Greeks themſelves, Hera-
clitus and Empedocles, more ancient tlian Zeno, the Maſter of the
Stoicks, taught this doctrine, 'tis plainly a branch of the Barbarick
Philoſophy, and taken from thence by the Greeks. For it is well
known that the moſt ancient and myſtick Learning amongſt the
Greeks, was not originally their own, but borrowed of the more
Eaſtern Nations, by Orpheus, Pythagoras, Plato, and many more:
who travel'd thither, and traded with the Prieſts for knowledge and
Philoſophy; and when they got a competent ſtock, returned home,
and ſet up a School, or a Sect, to inſtruct their Country-men. But
before we paſs to the Eaſtern Nations, let us, if you pleaſe, compare
the Roman Philoſophy upon this ſubject, with that of the Greeks.
The Romans were a great people, that made, a fiew of Learning,
but had little in reality, more than Words and Rhetorick. Their
curioſity or emulation in Philoſophical Studies was ſo little, that it
did not inake different Sects and Schuols amongſt them, as 'àingngit
the Greeks. I remember no Philoſophers they had but ſuch as Tully,
Seneca, and ſome of their Poets. And of theſe Lucretius, Luciti and
Ovid, have ſpoken openly of the Conflagration. Ouid's Verſes, are
well known,
1
1
1
0
1
!
)
1
Eſe quoque in fatis reminiſcitur, affore tempus,
luo inare, quo Tellus, correptaque Regia Cæli :
Ardeat, & mundi moles operosa laboret.
is
A Time, decreed by Fatej at length will come,
Wben Heavens and Earth and Seas shall have their dóimp.;
A fiery docm: And Nature's mighty:frame
Shall break, and be diſſolv'd into a flame.
or
We fog-Tully's fence upon this matter in Scipio's Disain. When
the old man ſpeaks to his Nephew Africanus, and therus him from
the cloudā, this ſpot of Earth, where we' live He tells him, tho'our
3
ri
:
1
A
action
Chap.3. Concerning the Conflagration.
upon
actions thould be great, and fortune favour them with ſucceſs, yet:
there wou'd be no room for any laſting glory in this World; for the
World it ſelf is tranſient and fugitive. And a Deluge or a Confia-
gration, which neceſſarily happen after certain periods of time, ſweep
away all records of humane actions. As for Seneca, he being a profeit
Stoick, we need not doubt of his opinion in this point. We may add
here, if you pleaſe, the Sibylline verſi's, which were kept with great
Religion, in the Capitol at Rome, and conſulted with much ceremony
ſolemn occaſions. Theſe Sibyls were the Propheteſles of the
Gentiles, and tho' their Writings now have inany ſpurious additions,
yet none doubt but that the Confiagration of the World was one
of their original Prophecies.
Let us now proceed to the Eaſtern Nations. As the Romans re-
ceiev'd the finall skill they had in the Sciences, from the Greeks ;
ſo the Greeks receiv'd their chief Myſtick Learning from the Barba-
vi.ins: that is, from the Ægyptians, Perſians, Phænicians, and other
Eaſtern Nations : For 'tis not only the Weſtern or Northern people,
that they called Barbarians, but indeed all Nations beſides themſelves.
For that is commonly the vanity of great Empires, to uncivilize in a
manner all the reſt of the World; and to account all thoſe People
Barb.irons, that are not ſubject to their dominion. Theſe however,
whom they callid ſo, were the moſt ancient People, and had the firft
Learning that was ever heard of after the Flood. And amongſt theſe,
the Ægyptians were as famous as any: whoſe Sentiment in this
par-
ticular of the Conflagration is well known. For Plato, who liv'd
amongſt them ſeveral years, tell us in his Timans, that it was the
doctrine of their Prieſts, that the fatal Cataſtrophes of the World
were by Fire and Water. In like manner the Perſians made their
beloved God, Fire, at length to conſume all things that are capable
of being conſum’d. For that is ſaid to have been the doctrine of
Hydaſpes, one of their great Magi or Wiſe Men. As to the Phæni- Fut. Mai.
cians, I ſuſpect very much that the Stoicks had their Philofophy from Apol
. 2.
them, and ainongſt other things the Conflagration. We ſhall take
notice of that hereafter.
But to comprehend the Arabians alſo, and Indians, give ine leave
to reflect a little upon the ſtory of the Phænix. A ſtory well known,
and related by ſome ancient Authors, and is in ſhort this. The Pha-
nix, they ſay, is a Bird in Arabia, India, and tliofe Eaſtern parts,
fingle in her kind, never more than one at a time, and very long-
liv'd: appearing only at the expiration of the Great Tear, as they
call it: "And then ſhe makes her ſelf a Neſt of Spices, which being
ſet on fire by the Sun, or ſome other ſecret power, The hovers upon
it, and conſumes her ſelf in the faiñes. But, which is moſt won-
derful, out of theſe aſhes riſeth a ſecond Phanix; fo that it is not fo
much a death as a renovation. I do not doubt but the ſtory is a
as to any ſuch kind of Bird, fingle in her ſpecies, living and
dying, and reviving in that manner : But 'tis an Apologue, or a
Fable with an interpretation, and was intended as an Emblem of the
World : which, after a long age, will be coríſum'd in the laſt fire:
and from its aſhes or remains will ariſe another World, or a new
form'd Heavens and Earth. This, I think, is the true myſtery of
C 2
the
fable,
I 2
Book UI.
The Theory of the Earth.
L. 4.
the Phænix, under which Symbol the Eaſtern Nations preſerv'd the
doctrine of the Cont'agration and Renovation of the World.
They tell ſomewhat a like ſtory of the Earle, ſoaring a-loft ſo near
the Sun, that by his warmth and enlivening rays, the renew's her
age and becomes young again. To this the Pſalmiſt is thought to al-
lude, Pfal. 103.5. Thy Teuth Mall be river'd like the Eagles: which
the Chaldee Paraphraſt renders, In mundo venturo renovabis, ſicut H-
quile, juventutem tuam. Theſe things to me feemi plainly to be Sym-
bolical, repreſenting that World to come, which the Paraphraft men-
tions, and the firing of this. Ard this is after the imanner of the
Eaſtern Wiſdom; which always lov'd to go fine, clcath'd in figures
and fancies.
And not only the Eaſtern Barb:ıri.ins, but the Northern and We
ſtern alſo, had this doctrine of the Conflagration amongſt them.
The Scythians, in their diſpute with the Aigyptians about Antiquity,
argue upon both ſuppoſitions, of Fire or Water, deftroying the Lalt
World, or beginning This. And in the Weſt, the Celts, the moſt
Ancient People there, liad the ſaine Tradition ; for the Druids, who
were their Prieſts and Philoſophers, derivd, not from the Greeks,
but of the old race of Wiſe Men, that had their Learning traditio-
nally, and, as it were, hereditary from the Firſt Ages: Thele, as
Strabo tells us, gave the World a kind of Immortality by repeated re-
novations ; and the principle that deſtroy'd it, according to them,
was always Fire or Water. I had forgot to mention in this Liſt,
Nat. Quaft.
the Chaldeans : whoſe opinion we have from Beroſus in Sencca.
They did not only teach the Conflagration, but alſo fixt it to a cer-
tain period of time, when there ſhould happen a great Conjunction
of the Planets in Cancer. Laſtly, We may add, to cloſe the account,
the Modern Indian Philoſophers, the reliques of the old Bragmans ;
L. 16. Hiji.Ind. Theſe, as Maffeus tells us, declare, that the World will be renew'd,
after an Univerſal Corflagration.
You ſee of what extent and univerſality throughout all Nations,
this doctrine of the Conflagration hath been. Let us now conſider
what defects or exceſſes there are in theſe ancient opinions, con-
cerning this fate of the World, and how they may be rectified:
That we inay admit theni no further into our belief, 'than they are
warranted by reaſon, or by the authority of Chriſtian Religion.
The firit fault they ſeem to have committed about this point, is this,
That they made theſe revolutions and renovations of Nature, in-
definite or endleſs: as if there would be ſuch a ſucceſſion of De-
luges and Conflagrations to all eternity. This, the Stoicks feem
plainly to have aſſerted, as appears from Numenins, Philo, Simplici-
kuli. 60,
us, and others. S. Jerome imputes this Opinion alſo to Origen: but
he does not always hit the true ſence of that Father, or is not fair
and juſt in the repreſentation of it
. Whoſoever held this Opinion,
'tis a manifeft errour, and may be eaſily rectified by the Chriſtian
Revelation; which teaches us plainly, that there is a final period
and conſummation of all things that belong to this Sublunary or
Terreſtrial World. When the Kingdom ſhall be deliver'd up
Father: and Time ſhall be no inore.
3.6. 29.
10 the
Another
Chap. 3. Concerning the Conflagration. 13
Another Errour they committed in this doctrine, is, the Identity,
or ſameneſs, if I may ſo ſay, of the Worlds ſucceeding one another.
They are inade indeed of the ſame Lump of Matter, but th:y ſup-
pos'd them to return alſo in the fame Forin. And, which is worſe,
that there would be the ſame face of humane affairs; The ſame Per-
fons and the ſame actions over again; So as the Second World would
be but a bare repetition of the former, without any variety or di-
verſity. Such a revolution is commonly call'd the Platonick lear:
A period, when all things return to the ſame poſture they had ſome
thouſands of years before; As a Play acted over again, upon the
fame Stage, and to the ſame Auditory. This is a groundles and
injudicious ſuppoſition. For, whether we conſider the Nature of
things, The Earth after a diſſolution, by Fire or by Water, could
not return into the ſame forin and faſhion it had before; Or whe-
ther we conſider Providence, it would no ways ſuit with the Divine
Wiſdom and Juſtice to bring upon the ſtage again thoſe very Scenes,
and that very courſe of humane affairs, which it had fo lately con-
demn’d and deſtroy'd. We may be aſſured therefore, that, upon
the diſſolution of a World, a new order of things, both as to Na-
ture and Providence, always appears: And what that new order
will be, in both reſpects, after the Conflagration, I hope we fhall,
in the following Book, give a ſatisfactory account.
Theſe are the Opinions, true or falſe, of the Ancients; and chiefly
of the Stoicks, concerning the myſtery of the Conflagration. It will
not be improper to enquire in the laſt place, how the Stoicks came
by this doctrine: whether it was their diſcovery and invention,
or from whom they learned it. That it was not their own inven.
tion, we have given fufficient ground to believe, by ſhewing the
antiquity of it beyond the times of the Stoicks. Beſides, what a man
invents himſelf, he can give the reaſons and cauſes of it, as things
upon which he founded his invention: But the Stoicks do not thuis,
but according to the ancient traditional way, deliver the conclu-
ſion without proof or premiſſes. We nam'd Heraclitus and Empe-
docles amongſt the Greeks to have taught this doctrine before the
Stoicks : And, according to Plutarch, Hefiod and Orpheus, authors De defec.
of the higheſt antiquity, ſung of this laſt Fire, in their Philoſo. Otac
phick Poetry. But I ſuſpect the Stoicks had this doctrine from the
Phænicians; for if we enquire into the original of that Sect, we
Thall find that their Founder Zeno, was a Barbarian or Semi-barba-
rian, deriv'd from the Phænicians, as Laertius and Cicero give an
account of him. And the Phænicians had a great ſhare in the Ori-
ental knowledge, as we ſee by Sanchoniuthor's remains in Eufebius.
And by their myſtical Books which Suidas mentions, from whence
Pherecydes, Pythagoras his Maſter, had his learning. We may there-
fore reaſonably preſume that it might be from his Country-men,
the Phænicians, that Zeno had the doctrine of the Conflagration. Not
tliat he brought it firſt into Grecce, but ſtrongly reviv'd it, and
made it almoſt peculiar to his Sect.
So much for the Stoicks in particular, and the Greeks in general.
We have alſo, you ſee, trac'd theſe Opinions higher, to the firſt
Barbarick Philoſophers: who were the firſt race of Philosophers
after
14
The Theory of the Earth. Book III.
1.1. c. 3.
Ketu
Sveid ja .
after the Flood. But Jofephus tells a formal ſtory of Pillars fet
ир
by Seth, before the flood; implying the forehnowledge of this
Fiery deſtruction of the World, even from the beginning of it. His
words are to this effect, give what credit to them you think fit.
Seth and his fellow ſtudents having found out the knowledge of the cæleſti-
al Bodies, and the order and diſpoſition of the llniverſe ; and having alſo
receivid from Adam a Prophecy, that the World ſhould have a double de-
Struction, one by later, another by Fire; To preſerve and tranſmit their
knowledge, in either caſe, to pofterity, They raiſed tro Pill.irs, one of
Brick, another of Stone, and ingv.av'd upon them their Philoſophy and
inventions. And one of theſe pillars, the Author lays, tras ſtunding in
Syria, even to his time. I do not preſs the belief of this ſtory; there
being nothing, that I know of, in Antiquity Sacred or prophane,
that gives a joynt teſtimony with it. And thoſe that ſet up theſe
Pillars, do not ſeem to me to have underſtood the Nature of the
Deluge or Conflagration; if they thought a Pillar, either of Brick or
Stone, would be ſecure, in thoſe great diflolutions of the Earth.
But we have purſued this doctrine high enough without the help
of theſe ante-diluvian Antiquities: Namely, to the earlieſt people
and the firſt appearances of Wiſdom after the Flood. So that, i
think, we inay juſtly look upon it as the doctrine of Noah, and of
his immediate poſterity. And as that is the higheſt ſource of learn-
ing to the preſent World; ſo we ſhould endeavour to carry our
Philoſophical Traditions to that Original: for I cannot perſwade iny
ſelf but that they had amongſt them, even in thoſe early days, the
main ſtrokes or concluſions of the beſt Philoſophy: or, if I may fu
ſay, a form of found doctrine concerning Nature and Providence
of which matter, if you will allow me a Thort digreſſion, I will
ſpeak my thoughts in a few words.
In thoſe Firſt Ages of the World after the flood, when Noah and
his Children peopled the Earth again, as he gave them Precepts of
Morality and Piety for the conduct of their Manners; which are
uſually call’d Præcepta Noachidarum, the Precepts of Noah, frequent-
ly mention'd both by the Jews and Chriſtians: So alſo he deliver'd
to them, at leaſt, if we judge aright, certain Maxims or Concluſions
about Providence, the ſtate of Nature, and the fate of the World:
And tlieſe, in proportion, may be call’d Dogmata Noachidarum, the
Doctrines of Noah, and his Children. Which made a Syſtein of Phi-
loſophy or ſecret knowledge amongſt them, deliver'd by Tradition
from Father to Son; but eſpecially preſerv'damongſt their Prieſts and
Sacred Perſons, or ſuch others as were addicted to Contemplation.
This I take to be more ancient tlian Mofes himſelf, or the Jewiſh
Nation. But it would lead me too far out of my way, to ſet down
in this place, the reaſons of my judgment. Let it be ſufficient to
have pointed only at tliis Fountain head of knowledge, and ſo return
to our Argument.
We have heard, as it were, a Cry of Fire, throughout all Anti-
quity, and throughout all the People of the Earth. But thoſe ala-
rums are ſometimes falſe, or make a greater noiſe than the thing de
ſerves. For my part, I never truſt Antiquity barely upon its ow'n
account, but always require a ſecond witneſs either from Nature, or
from
Chap.j• Concerning the Conflagration.
15
b.
from Scripture: What the voice of Nature is, we ſhall hear al}
along in the following Treatiſe: Let us then examine at preſent,
what teſtimony the Prophets and Apoſtles give to this ancient do
Etrine of the Contlagration of the World. The Prophets fee the
World a-fire at a diſtance and more imperfe&tly, as a brightneſs
in the Heaveris, rather than a burning Hame: but S. Peter de
ſcribes it, as if he had been ſtanding by, and ſeen the Heaven-
and Earth in a red fire: heard the cracking Aames and the tumbling
Mountains: 2 Pet. 3.10. In the day of the Lord, The Heavens shall
paſs away with a great noiſe, and the Elements ſhall melt with fervent
beat: The Earth alſo, and the works that are therein, ſhall be burnt
ups
Then, after a pious Ejaculation, he adds, Ver. 12. Looking for and
baſtering the coining of the day of God, wherein the Heavens, being on
fire, Thall be diſſolved; and the Elements shall melt with fervent heat.
This is as lively, as a Man could expreſs it, if he had the dreadful
ſpectacle before his Eyes. S. Peter had before taught the ſame do-
ctrine ( ver. 5.6,7.) but in a more Philoſophick way; deſcribing the
double fate of the World, by Water and fire, with relation to the
Nature and Conſtitution of either World, paſt or preſent. The
Heavens and the Earth were of old, conſiſting of water and by. rrater :
whereby, the World that then was, being overflow'd with water, periſh'd.
But the Heavens and the Earth which are now, by the ſame Word are kept
in ftore, reſerved unto fire gainſt the day of Judgment, and. perdition of
ungodly, or Atheiſtical men. This teſtimony of S. Peter being full, di-
rect, and explicit, will give light and ſtrength to ſeveral other parla-
ges of Scripture, where the faine thing is expreit obfcurely or by
alluſion. As when S. Paul ſays, The fire ſhall try every man's murk in 1 Cor.3.12,13;
that day. And our Saviour ſays, The tares. Mill be burnt in the fire,
at the end of the World. Accordingly it is ſaid, buth by. tlie Apoſtles
and Prophets, that God will come to judgment in Fire · S. Paul to
the Thesſalonians, promiſeth the perſecuted Righteous, reſt and eaſe, 2 Theſſ. 2. 7,8.
When the Lord Shall be revealed from Hequen, with his mighty Angels
,
in flaming fire: taking vengeance on them that know not God, c. Ånd
ſo to the Hebrews $. Paul ſays, that for wilful Apoſtates tliere remain. ch. 10. 27.
eth no, inpyeSacrifice for ſin, but a certain ferrful looking for of judgment,
and fiery ivdignation, which Sall devour tbe adverf.aries, or enemies of
God. And in the 12th. Chapter, he alludes to the ſame thing, when ver. 26, 27,
after he had ſpoken of Shaking the Heavens and the Earth once more,
he exhorteth, as S. Peter does upon the ſame occaſion, to reverence
and godly fear, For our God is a conſuming Fire.
In like manner the Prophets, when they ſpeak of deſtroying the
wicked, and the Enemies of God and Chriſt, at the end of the
World, repreſent it as a deſtruction by Fire. Pfalm the 11th. 6.
Ilpon the micked the Lord Shill rain ccals, fire, and brimſtone, anda burn-
ing tempeſt : This ſhall be the portion of their Cup. And Pfal. 50. z.
Our God Mall come, and will not be ſoir: A fire ſhall devour before him,
and it ſhall be very tempeſtuous round about him. And in the begin
ning of thoſe two triumphal Pſalms, the ſixty-eighth, and ninety-ſe-
venth, we ſee plain alluſions to this coming of the Lord in fire.
The other Prophets ſpeak in the ſame ſtyle, of a fiery indignationi
againſt the wicked, in the day of the Lord : As in Iſaiah 66. 15.
Fur
Satt, I 3. 402
41, 42.
28, 296
16
Book III.
T be Tbeory of the Earth.
and ch. 34.
8, 9, 1O.
45
1
For behold the Lord will come - ith fire, and with his Ch.triots like di
whirl-wind, to render his anger with fury, and his rebuke rrith flames of
fire. And in Daniel, (€.7.9, 10.) The Ancient of days is plac d
upon his Seat of Juiigment, coverd in Aames. I beheld till the
Thrones were ſet, and the Ancient of days did ſit, whoſe garment was white
ſnow, and th: hair of his head like the pure wool : His Throne mas
like the fiery flame, his wheels as burning fire. A fiery Stream iſſued and
came forth from before him: Thouſand thouſands miniſtred unto him,
and ten thouſand times ten thouſand flood before him: The judgment was
fet, and the Books were opened. The Prophet Malachy (c. 4. 1.) de-
ſcribes the Day of the Lord to the ſame effect, and in like colours ;
Behold the Day cometh, that ſhall burn as an Oven : and all the proud,
yea, and all that do mickedly ſhall be as ſtubble ; and the day that cometh
mall burn them up, ſaith the Lord of Hofts, that it shall leave them nei-
ther root nor branch. And that nature her ſelf, and the Earth ſhall
ſuffer in that fire, the Prophet Zephany tells us, (c. 3.8.) All the Earth
shall be devoured with the fire of my jealoufie. Laitly, This conſun-
ption of the Earth by fire, even to the foundations of it, is exprelt
livelily by Moſes in his Song, Deut. 32. 22. A fire is kindled in 01
anger, and Mall burn unto the lomeji Hell: and Mall conſume the E.irth
mith her increaſe, and ſet on fire the foundations of the Mountains.
If we reflect upon theſe Witneſſes; and eſpecially the firſt and
laſt, Moſes and S. Peter: at what a great diſtance of time they writ
their Prophecies, and yet how well they agree, we muſt needs con-
clude that they were acted by the ſame Spirit: and a Spirit that
ſee thorough all the Ages of the World, from the beginning to the
end. Theſe Sacred Writers were ſo remote in time from one an-
other, that they could not confer together, nor conſpire, either in
a falſe teſtimony, or to make the ſame prediction. But being un-
der one common influence and inſpiration, which is always conſi-
ſtent with it ſelf, they have dictated the ſame things, tho' at two
thouſand years diſtance ſometimes from one another. This, beſides
many other conſiderations, makes their authority inconteſtable. And
upon the whole account, you ſee, that the doctrine of the future
Gonflagration of the World, having run through all Ages and Nations,
is, by the joynt conſent of the Prophets and Apoſtles, adopted into
the Chriſtian Faith.
1
L
1
;
!
.
1
1
1
}
;
}
t
CHAN
Chap-4.
17
Concerning the Conflagration.
CHAP. IV.
Concerning the time of the Conflagration, and the end of the
World. What the Aſtronomers ſay upon this Subject, and
upon what they ground their Calculations; The true
notion of the Great Year, or of the Platonick. Year, ſtated
and explained.
H
AVING, in this Firſt Section, laid a ſure foundation as to
the Subject of our Diſcourſe; the truth and certainty of the
Conflagration whereof we are to treat ; we will now proceed to en-
quire after the Time, Cauſes, and Manner of it. We are naturally
more inquiſitive after the End of the World, and the Time of that
Fatal Revolution, than after the Cauſes of it: For theſe, we know,
are irreſiſtible, whenſoever they come, and therefore we are only
follicitous that they ſhould not overtake us, or our near poſterity.
The Romans thought they had the fates of their Empire in the
Books of the Sibyls, which were kept by the Magiſtrates as a Sacred
Treaſure. We have alſo our Prophetical Books, more ſacred and
more infallible than theirs, which contain the fate of all the King-
doms of the Earth, and of that glorious Kingdom that is to ſuc-
ceed. And of all futurities, there is none can be of ſuch impor-
tance to be enquired after, as this laſt ſcene and cloſe of all liu-
mane affairs.
If I thought it poſſible to determine the time of the Conflagration
froin the bare intuition of Natural Cauſes, I would not treat of it
in this place, but reſerve it to the laſt; after we had brought into
view all thoſe Cauſes, weigh'd their force, and exainin'd how and
when they would concur to produce this great effect
. But I am
ſatisfied that the excitation and concourſe of thoſe Cauſes does not
depend upon Nature only; and thio' the Cauſes may be ſufficient
when all united, yet the union of them at ſuch a time, and in ſuch
a manner, I look upon as the effect of a particular Providence :
and therefore no foreſight of ours, or inſpection into Nature can
diſcover to us the time of this conjuncture. This method therefore
of Prediction from Natural Cauſes being laid aſide as impracticable,
all other inethods may be treated of in this place, as being indepen-
upon any thing that is to follow in the Treatiſe; and it will
be an eaſe to the Argument to diſcharge it of this part, and clear
way by degrees to the principal point, which is, the Cauſes and
Manner of the Conflagration.
Some have thought it a kind of impiety in a Chriſtian to enquire
after the End of the World; becauſe of that check which our Savi-
our gave his Diſciples, when, after his Reſurrection, enquiring of
him about the time of his Kingdom, He anſwer'd, It is not for you Að. 119
to know the times or the seaſons, which the Father hath put in his own
pomer. And, before his death, wlien he was diſcourſing of the
D
Conſum
dent
the
18
Book III,
The Theory of the Earth.
D. l. 2.
Conſummation of all things, He told them exprelly, that tho' there
Mert. 24.36. ſhould be ſuch and ſuch previous Signs as lie had menciond, jer
Of that day and bour kloveth 110 m.17. No, not the Angels that itit orb
Heaven, but my Father only. Be it ſo, that the Diſciples delerv d a
reprimand, for deliring io know, by a particular revelation from
our Saviour, the liate of future tillits; vlien Cany viher things
were more neceſſary for their inſtruction, and for their miniſtery.
Be it alſo admitted, that the Angels, at that diſtance of time, could
not ſee thorow all events to the End of the World; it does not at
all follow from thence that they do not know it now; when, in
the courſe of Sixteen Hundred Years, many things are come to paſs,
that
may
be marks and directions to them to make a judgment of
what remains, and of the laſt period of all things. However there
will be no danger in our enquiries about this matter, ſeeing they are
not ſo much to diſcover the certainty, as the uncertainty of that
pe-
riod, as to humane knowledge. Let us therefore conſider what me
thods have been uſed, by thoſe that have been curious and buſie
to meaſure the duration of the World.
The Stoicks tell us, When the Sun and the Stars have drunk up
the Sea, then the Earth thall be burnt. A very fair Prophecy: but
how long will they be a drinking: For unleſs we can determine
that, we cannot determine when this combuſtion will begin. Many
Cicer. de Nar. of the Ancients thought that the Stars were nouriſh'd by the va-
pours of the Ocean and of the moiſt Earth: and when that nou
riſhment was ſpent, being of a fiery nature, they would prey upon
the Body of the Earth it felf, and conſume that, after they had con
ſum'd the Water. This is old-faſhion'd Philofopliy, and now, that
the nature of thoſe Bodies is better known, will ſcarce paſs for cur-
'Tis true, we muſt expect ſome diſpoſitions towards the com
buſtion of the World, from a great drought and deſiccation of the
Earth: But this helps us nothing on our way; for the queſtion ſtill
returns, When will this immoderate drought or dryneſs happen?
and that's as ill to reſolve as the former. Therefore, as I ſaid be
fore, I have no hopes of deciding the queſtion by Phyſiology or Na-
tural Cauſes; let us then look up from the Earth to the Heavens,
To the Aſtronomers and the Prophets ; Theſe think they can define
the
age and duration of the World ; The one by their Art, and the
other by Inſpiration,
We begin with the Aſtronoiners: whoſe Calculations are found-
ed either upon the Aſpects and Configurations of the Planets, or
upon the Revolutions of the Fixt Stars: Or laſtly, upon that which
thcy call Annus Magnus, or the Great Tear, whatſoever that Notion
proves to be when it is rightly interpreted. As to the Planets, Be-
SEA Nat. qu. roſus tells us, The Chaldeans ſuppoſe Deluges to proceed from a great
conjunction of the Planets in Capricorn: and from a like coniunction
in the oppoſite Sign of Cancer, the Conflagration will enſue. So
that if we compute by the Aftronomical Tables how long it will
be to ſuch à Conjunction, we find at the ſame time how long it will
be to the Conflagration. This doctrine of the Chaldeans ſome Chri-
ftian Authors have owned, and followed the fame principles and
method.
If
rant.
1.3.6.29.
4.
Chap 4. Concerning the Conflagration.
19
tu
If th:fe Authors would deal fairly with Mankind, they ſhould
Thew us ſome connexion betwixt theſe Cauſes and the Effects which
they make conſequent upon them. For 'tis an unreaſonable thing
to require a man's aſſent to a Propoſition, where he ſees no depen-
dence or connexion of Terins; unleſs it come by Revelation, or
from an infallible Authority. If you ſay, The Conflagration will
be at the firſt great Con unction of the Planets in Cancer, and I ſay
it will be at the next Eclipſe of the Moon, if you thew no more
reaſon for your affertion than I for mine, and neither of us pre-
send to revelation or infallibility, we may juſtly expect to be equal-
ly credited. Pray what reaſon can you give why the Planets, wlien
they meet, Mould plot together, to ſet on Fire their Fellow-Planet,
the Earth, who never did them any harm? But now there is a
plauſible reaſon for my opinion; for the Moon, when Eclips'd
inay think herſelf affronted by the Earth, interpoſing rudely be-
twixt her and the Sun, and leaving her to grope her way in the
dark; She therefore may juſtly take her revenge as ſhe can. But
you'll ſay, 'tis not in the power of the Moon to ſet the Earth on Fire,
if ſhe had malice enough to do it. No, nor, fay I, is it in the
power of the other Planets, that are far more diſtant from the Earth
than the Moon, and as ſtark dull lumps of Earth, as ſhe is. The
plain truth is, The Planets are ſo many Earths ; and our Earth is as
inuch a Planet as the brighteſt of thein. 'Tis carried about the Sun
with the ſame common ſtream, and ſhines with as much luſtre to
them, as they do to us: neither can they do any more harm to it,
than it can do to thein. 'Tis now well known,that the Planets are dark
opake Bodies, generally made up of Earth and Water, as our Globe
is; and have no force or action, but that of reverberating the light
which the Sun cafts upon then. This blind ſuperſtitious fear or
reverence for the Stars, had its original from the ancient Idolaters;
They thought them Gods, and that they lad domination over hu-
mane affairs. We do not indeed worſhip them, as they did; but
ſome men retain ſtill the ſame opinion of their vertues, of their
rule and influence upon us and our affairs, which was the ground
of their worſhip. 'Tis full time now to ſweep away theſe cobwebs
of ſuperſtition, theſe reliques of Paganiſm. I do not ſee how we
are any more concern'd in the poſtures of the Planets, than in the
poſtures of the Clouds; and you may as well build an art of
pre-
diction or divination upon the one as the other. They muſt not
know much of the Philoſophy of the Heavens, or little conſider it,
that think the fate, either of ſingle perſons, or of the whole Earth,
can depend upon the aſpects or figur'd dances of thoſe Bodies.
But you'll ſay, it may be, tho' no reaſon can be given for ſuch
effects, yet experience does' atteſt the truth of them. In the firſt
place, I anſwer', no experience can be produc'd for this effect we are
ſpeaking of, the Conflagration of the World. Secondly, Experi-
ence fallaciouſly recorded, or wholly in favour of one ſide, is no
proof. If a publick Regiſter was kept of all Aſtrological Predictions,
and of all the Events that followed upon them, right or wrong,
agreeing or diſagreeing, I could willingly refer the cauſe to the de
termination of ſuch a Regiſter, and ſuch experience. But that which
D 2
they
20
Book III.
The Theory of the Earth.
they call experience, is ſo ſtated, that if One Prediction of Ten, hits
right or near riglıt, it ſhall make more noiſe, and be more taken
notice of, than all the Nine that are falſe. Juſt as in a Lottery,
where many Blanks are drawn for one Prize, yet theſe make all tlie
noiſe, and thoſe are forgotten. If any one be ſo lucky as to draw a
good Lot, then the Trumpet ſounds, and his Name is regiſter'd,
and he tells his good fortune to every body he meets: whereas thoſe
that loſe, go ſilently away with empty Poikets, and are aſham'd to
tell their loſſes. Such a thing is the Regilter of Aſtrological expe
riences; they record what makes for their credit, but drop a!! ]
blank inſtances, that would diſcover the vanity or cheat of their
Art.
So much for the Planets. They have alſo a pretended calcula
tion of the End of the World from the fixt Stars and the Firina-
ment. Which in ſhort is this: They ſuppoſe theſe Bodies, beſides
the hurry of their Diurnal Motion from Eaſt to Weſt, quite round
the Earth in four and twenty hours, to have another retrograde
Motion, from Weſt to Eaſt; which is more flow and leiſurely;
And when they liave finilh'd the Circle of this retrogradation, and
come up again to the ſame place from whence they ſtarted at the be-
ginning of the World, then this courſe of Nature will be at an end;
and either the Heavens will ceaſe from all motion, or a new ſet of
motions will be put a foot, and the World begin again. This is a
bundle of fictions tied up in a pretty knot. in the firſt place, there
is no ſuch thing as a ſolid Firmament, in which the Stars are fixt, as
nails in a board. The Heavers are as fluid as our Air, and the
higher we go, the more thin and ſubtle is the ethereal matter. Then,
the fixt Stars are not all in one Surface, as they ſeem to us, nor at
an equal diſtance from the Earth, but are plac'd in ſeveral Orbs high-
er and higher; there being infinite room in the great Deep of the
Heavens, every way, for innumerable Stars and Spheres behind one
another, to fill and beautify the immenſe ſpaces of the Univerſe.
Laſtly, The fixt Stars have 110 motion common to them all, nor any
motion ſingly, unleſs upon their own Centres; and therefore, ne
ver leaving their ſtations, they can never return to any common fia-
tion, which they would ſuppoſe them to have had at the beginning
of the World. So as this period they ſpeak of, whereby they would
meaſure the duration of the World, is meerly imaginary, and hath
no foundation in the true Nature or Motion of the Celeſtial
Bodies.
But in the third place, They ſpeak of an ANNUS AGNUS,
la Great Year ; A revolution ſo call’d, whatſoever it is, that is of the
fâme extent with the length of the World. This Notion, I confeſs,
is more Ancient and Univerſal, and therefore I am the more apt to
believe that it is not altogether groundleſs. But the difficulty is.
to find out the true notion of this Great Year, what is to be under
ſtood by it, and then of what length it is. They all agree that it is
a time of ſome grand inſtauration of all things, or a Reſtitution of
the Heavens and the Earth to their former ſtate; that is, to the ſtate
and poſture they had at the beginning of the World; ſuch therefore
as will reduce the Golden Age, and that happy fate of Nature
where'n
Chap.4. Concerning the Conflagratio.
21
chat go
wherein things were at firſt. If ſo, if theſe be the marks and
pro-
perties of this Revolution, which is call’d the Gre.it Year, we need
not go ſo far to find the true notion and interpretation of it. Thoſe
that have read the Firſt Part of this Theory, may remember that in
the Second Book we gave an account what the poſture of the Earth
was at the beginning of the World, and what were the conſequen-
ces of that poſture, A perpetu:al Spring and Equinox throughout all
the Earth: And if the Earth was reſtor'd again to that polture and
ſituation, all that is imputed to the Great lear, would iinmediately
follow upon it, without ever diſturbing or moving the fix'd Stars,
Firmament, or Planets; and yet at the ſame time all theſe three
would return or be reſtor'd to the ſame poiture they had at the be-
ginning of the World; ſo as the whole character of the Great Tear
would be truly fulfill'd, tho' not in that way which they imagin'd;
but in another, more compendious, and of eaſier conception. My
meaning is this, If the Axis of the Earth was rectilied, and ſet paral.
lel with the Axis of the Ecliptick, upon which the Planets, Firma-
ment and fix'd Stars are ſuppos'd to move, all things would be as
they were at firſt; a general harmony and conformity of all the ino-
tions of the Univerfe wauld preſently appear, ſuch, as they ſay,
was in the Golden Age, before any diſorder came into the Natural
or Moral World.
As this is an eaſie, ſo I do not doubt, but it is a true account of
that which was originally call'd the Great Tear, or the Great In-
ſtauration ; which Nature will bring to paſs in this ſimple method,
by rectifying the Axis of the Earth, without thoſe operoſe revolu-
tions, which fome Aſtronomers have fanſied. But however, this
account being admitted, how will it help us to define what the
Age and duration of the World will be? 'Tis true, many have
undertaken to tell us the length of this Great lear, and conſequent-
ly of the World; but, beſides that their accounts are very different,
and generally of an extravagant length, if we had the true account,
it would not aſſure us when the World would end ; becauſe we
do not know when it did begin, or what progreſs we have already
made in the line of Time. For I am fatisfied, the Chronology of
the World, whether Sucred or Prophane, is loſt; till Providence
Thall pleaſe to retrieve it by fome new diſcovery. As to Prophane
Chronology, or that of the Heathens, the Greeks and the Romans
knew nothing above the Olympiads; which fell ſhort inany Ages of
the Deluge, much more of the beginning of the World. And the
Eaſtern Barbarous Nations, as they diſagreed amongſt themſelves,
fo
generally they run the Origin of the World to ſuch a prodigious
height, as is neither agreeable to Faith, nor Reaſon. As to Sacred
Chronology, 'tis well known, that the difference there is betwixt
the Greek, Hebrew, and Samaritan Copies of the Bible, makes the
Age of the World altogether undetermin'd: And there is no way
yet found out, how we may certainly diſcover which of the three
Copies is moſt Authentick, and conſequently what the Age of the
World is, upon a true computation. Seeing therefore we have no
affurance how long the world hath ſtood already, neither could
we be afſur'd how long it brath to ſtand, though, by this Anna's
Magnus,
22
Book III.
The Theory of the Earth.
Mignus, or any other way, the total ſuin, or whole term of its
duration was truly known.
I am ſorry to ſee the little ſucceſs we have had in our firſt ſearch
after the End of the World, from Aſtronomical Calculations. But
tis an uſeful piece of Knowledge to know the bounds of our know-
ledge; that ſo we may not ſpend our time and thoughts about
tlings that lie out of our reach. I have little or no hopes of re-
ſolving this point by the Light of Nature, and therefore it only
remains now to enquire, whether Providence hath made it known
by any ſort of Prophecy or Revelation. Which ſhall be the Sub-
ject of the following Chapter.
CHAP. V.
Concerning Prophecies that determine the end of the World;
Of what order foever, Prophane or Sacred; Jewiſh or
Chriſtian. That no certain judgment can be made from
any of them, at what diſtance we are now from the Con-
flagration.
THI
HE bounds of humane knowledge are ſo narrow, and the
deſire of knowing ſo vaſt and illimited, that it often puts
Mankind upon irregular methods of inlarging their knowledge.
This hath made them find out arts of commerce with evil Spirits,
to be inſtructed by them in ſuch Events as they could not of them-
ſelves diſcover. We meddle not with thoſe myſteries of iniquity:
but what hath appear d under the notion of Divine Prophecy, re-
lating to the Chronology of the World: giving either the whole
extent of it, cr certain marks of its expiration : Thele we purpoſe to
examine in this place. How far any thing may, or may not, be
concluded from them, as to the reſolution of our Problem, Home
long the World will laſt.
Amongſt the Heathens I do not remember any Prophecies of this
nature, except the Sibylline Oracles, as they are uſually call’d. The
Ancient Eaſtern Philoſophers have left lis no account that I can
call to mind, about the time of this fatality. They ſay when the
Phenix returns we muſt expect the Conflagration to follow; but
the age of the Phænix they inake as various and uncertain, as they
Symbolum
do the computation of their Great Tear: which two things are in-
Strong-lasti otws deed one and the ſame in effect. Some of them, I confeſs, men-
moduxerís; tion Six Thouſand Years for the whole Age of the World : which
Apol. l. 2.6.57. being the famous Prophecy of the Jews, we ſhall ſpeak to it large-
ly hereafter: and reduce to that head what broken Traditions re-
main amongſt the Heathens of the ſame thing. As to the Sibyline
Oracles, which were ſo much in reputation amonglt the Greeks and
Romans, they have been tamper'd with ſo much, and chang'i so
often, that they are becoine now of little authority. They ſeem to
hare
Chap..
23
Concerning the Conflagration.
have divided the duration of the World into Ten Ages, and the
laſt of theſe they make a Golden Age, a ſtate of Peace, Righte.
ouſneſs and Perfection: but ſeeing they have not determin'd, in
any
definite numbers, what the length of every Age will be, nor
given us the ſumm of all, we cannot draw any concluſion from this
account as to the point in queſtion before us,
But muſt proceed to
the Jewiſh and Chriſtian Oracles.
The Jerrs have a remarkable Prophecy, which expreſſeth both
the whole and the parts of the World's duration. The World, they
ſay, will ſtand Six Thouſand Years: Two Thouſand before the Lim,
Two Thouſand under the Law, and Two Thouſand under the Meſſiah. This
Prophecy they derive from Elias; but there were two of the Name,
Elias the Thesbite, and Elias the Rabbin, or Cabbalift: and’tis fup-
pos'd to belong immediately to the latter of theſe. Yet this does
not hinder in my opinion, but that it might come originally from
the former Elias, and was preſerv'd in the School of this Elias the
Rabbin, and firſt made publick by him. Or he added, it may be,
that diviſion of the time into three parts, and ſo got a Title to the
whole. I cannot eaſily imagine that a Doctor that liv'd two hun-
dred years or thereabouts, before Chriſt, when Prophecy had ceas'd
for ſome Ages amongſt the Jews, ſhould take upon him to dictate a
Prophecy about the duration of the World, unleſs he had been ſup-
ported by ſome antecedent Cabbaliſtical Tradition: which being kept
more ſecret before, he took the liberty to make publick, and ſo was
reputed the Author of the Prophecy. As many Philoſophers amongſt
the Greeks, were the reputed Authors of ſuch doctrines as were much
more ancient than themſelves: But they were the publiſhers of them in
their Country, or the revivers of them after a long ſilence ; and
ſo, by forgetful poſterity, got the honour of the firſt invention.
You will think, it may be, the time is too long and the diſtance
too great betwixt Elias the Thesbite, and this Elias the Rabbin, for a
Tradition to ſubſiſt all the while, or be preſerv'd with any compe-
tent integrity. But it appears from S. Jude's Epiſtle, that the Prophe-
cies of Enoch, (who liv'd before the floud) relating to the day of
judgment and the end of the World, were extart in his time, either
in Writing or by Tradition : And the diſtance betwixt Enoch and
S. Jude was vaſtly greater than betwixt the two Elias's. Nor was
any fitter to be inſpir'd with that knowledge, or to tell the firſt news of
that fatal period, than the old Prophet Elias, who is to come again
and bring the alarum of the approaching Conflagration. But how-
ever this conjecture may prove as to the original Author of this Pro-
phecy, the Prophecy it ſelf concerning the Sexmillennial duration
of the World, is very much inſiſted upon by the Chriſtian Fathers.
Which yet I believe is not ſo much for the bare Autliority of the
Tradition, as becauſe they thought it was founded in the Hiſtory of
the Six days Creation, and the Sabbath ſucceeding: as alſo in ſome
other Typical precepts and uſages in the Law of Moſes
. But before
we ſpeak of that, give me leave to name ſome of thoſe Fathers to
you, that were of this judgment, and ſuppoſed the great Sabbatiſm
would ſucceed after the World liad ſtood Six Thouſand Years. Of
this opinion was S. Barnabas in his Catholick Epiſtle, ch.15. Where
he
24
The Theory of the Earth.
Book III.
30.
C. D. 1. 20.
6.7.
he
argues
that the Creation will be ended in Six Thouſand Years,
as it was tinilh'd in Six Days: Every day according to the Sucred
and myſtical account, being a Thouſand Yeurs. Of the fame judg-
ment is S. Irenæus, both as to the concluſion and the reaſon of it.
L. 5.1.18, 29,
He faith, the Hiſtory of the Creation in fix days, is a 1.19ration as
to what is paſt, and a Prophecy of whit is to come.
As the Work was
faid to be conſummated in lix days, and the Sabbath to be the le-
venth: So the conſummation of all things will be in Six Thouſand
Years, and then the great Sabbatiſın to come on in the bleſled reign
of Chriſt. Hippolitus Martyr, diſciple of Irenæus, is of the ſame judg-
iment, as you may fee in Photius, ch. 202. LaElantius in his Divisie
Inſtitutions, 1.7.c.14. gives the very fame account of the ſtate and
continuance of the World, and the ſame proofs for it. And ſo does
S. Cyprian, in his Exhortation to Martyrdum, ch. II. S Jerome more
than once declares himſelf of the faine opinion; and S. Auſtin, tho
he wavers and was doubtful as to the Millennium, or Reign of
Chriſt upon Earth,yet he receives this computation without heſitancy,
and upon the foremention'd grounds. So Johannes Damafcenus de
fide Orthodoxâ, takes ſeven Millennaries for the entire ſpace of the
World, from the Creation to the general Reſurrection, the Sabba-
tiſın being included. And that this was a received and approv'd
opinion in early times, we may collect from the Author of the file-
jhions and a frers ad Orthodoxos in Juſtin Martyr. Who giving an an-
ſwer to that enquiry about the ſix thouſand years term of the World,
fays, We may conjecture from many places of Scripture, that thoſe are in
the right, that ſay fix thouſand years is the time prefixt for the duration
of this preſent frame of the World. Theſe Authors I have examin'd
my ſelf: but there are many others brought in confirmation of this
opinion: as S. Hilary, Anaftafius Sinaitu, Sanctus Gaudentius, Q.Ju-
lius Hilarion, Junilius Africanus, Iſidous Hiſpalenſis, Caffiodorus, Gre-
gorius Magnus, and others, which I leave to be examin'd by thoſe
that have curioſity and leiſure to do it.
In the mean time it muſt be confeſt that many of theſe Fathers
were under a miſtake in one reſpect, in that they generally thought
the World was near an end in their time. An errour, which we
need not take pains to confute now ; ſeeing we, who live twelve hun-
dred or fourteen hundred years after them, find the World ſtill in
being, and likely to continue ſo for ſome conſiderable time. But it
is eaſie to diſcern whence their miſtake proceeded: nut from this
Prophecy alone, but becauſe they reckon'd this Prophecy according
to the Chronology of the Septuagint : which ſetting back the be-
ginning of the World many Ages beyond the Hebrew, theſe ſix thou-
ſand years were very near expir’d in the time of thoſe Fathers ;
and that made them conclude that the World was very near an end.
We will make no reflections, in this place, upon that Chronology
of the Septuagint, leſt it ſhould too much interrupt the thred of our
diſcourſe. But it is neceſſary to ſhew how the Fathers grounded
this computation of Six Thouſand Years, upon Scripture. 'Twas
chiefly, as we ſuggeſted before, upon the Hexameron, or the Crea-
tion finiſh'd in Six Days, and the Sabbath enſuing. The Sabbath,
they ſaid, was a type of the Sabbatiſm, that was to follow at the
end
Chap.. Concerning the Conflagration.
25
erid of the World, according to S. Paul to the Hebrews; and then by ch. s.
analogy and conſequence, the ſix days preceding the Sabbath, muſt
note the ſpace and duration of the World. If therefore they could
dilcover how much a Day is reckon’d for, in this myſtical compu-
tation, the ſum of the ſix days would be eaſily found out. And
they think, that according to the Pſalmiſt
, (Pfal.90.4.) and S. Peter,
( 2 Epift. 3.8.) a Day inay be eſtimated a thouſand years; anil conſe-
quently lix days muſt be counted fix thouſand years, for the dura-
tion of the World. This is their interpretation, and their inference:
but it muſt be acknowledged, that there is an eſſential weakneſs in all
typical and allegorical argumentations, in compariſon of literal. And
th s being allow'd in diminution of the proof, we may be bold to
ſay, that nothing yet appears, either in Nature, or Scripture, or Hu-
mane Affairs, repugnant to this ſuppoſition of Six Thouſand Years:
which hath Antiquity, and the Authority of the Fathers, on its
lide.
We proceed now to the Chriſtian Prophecies concerning the end
of the World. I do not mention thoſe in Daniel, becauſe I am
not ſatisfied that any there (excepting that of the Fifth Kingdom it
ſelf ) extend ſo far. But in the Apocalypſe of S. John, which is the
laſt Revelation we are to expect, there are ſeveral Prophecies that
reach to the Conſuinmation of this World, and the Firſt Reſurrection.
The Seven Seals, the Seven Trumpets, the Seven Vials, do all termi.
nate upon that great Period." But they are rather Hiſtorical
Prophecies than Chronological ; they tell us, in their Language,
the Events, but do not meaſure or expreſs the time wherein they
come to paſs. Others there are that may be call'd Chronological,
as the treading under foot the holy City, forty and two months, Apoc.11.2.
The Witneſſes oppoſing Antichriſt, one thouſand tmo hundred and fixty
days
, Apoc. 11. 3. The Aight of the Woman into the Wilderneſs, for the
ſame number of days, or for a Time, Times, and half a Time, Apoc.
12.6.& 14. And laſtly, Tlie War of the Beaſt againſt the Saints,
forly two months, Apoc. 13. 5. Theſe all, you ſee, expreſs a time for
their completion; and all the ſame time, if I be not miſtaken : But
they do not reach to the End of the World. Or if ſome of them
did reach ſo far, yet becauſe we do not certainly know where to
fix their beginning, we muſt ſtill be at a loſs, when, or in what
year they will expire. As for inſtance, If the Reign of the Beaſt, or
the Preaching of the Witneſſes be 1260 years, as is reaſonably fup-
pos’d; yet if we do not know certainly when this Reign, or this
l'reaching begun, neither can we tell when it will end. And the
Epocha's or beginnings of theſe Prophecies are ſo differently calcu-
lated, and are things of ſo long debate, as makes the diſcuſſion of
them altogether improper for this place. Yet it muſt be confeſt,
that the beſt conjectures that can be made concerning the approaching
End of the World, muſt be taken from a judicious examination of
theſe points: and according as we gather up the Prophecies of the
Apocalypſe, in a ſucceſſive completion, we ſee how by degrees we
draw nearer and nearer to the concluſion of all. But till ſome of
theſe enlightning Prophecies be accompliſh’d, we are as a Man that
awakes in the Night, all is dark about him, and he knows not how
E
far
܀
26
The Theory of the Earth. Book UI.
far the Night is ſpent : but if he watch till the light appears, the
firſt glimpſes of that will reſolve his doubts. We muſt have a little
patience, and, I think, but a little ; ftill eyeing thoſe Prophecies of
the Reſurrection of the Witneſſes, and the depreſſion of Antichriſt : till
by their accompliſhment, the day dawn, and the Clouds begin to
change their colour. Then we ſhall be able to make a near gueſs,
when the Sun of righteouſneſs will ariſe.
So much for Prophecies. There are alſo Signs, which are look'd
upon as forerunners of the coming of our Saviour : and therefore
may give us ſome direction how to judge of the diſtance or approach
of that great Day. Thus many of the Fathers thought the coming of
Antichriſt would be a ſign to give the World notice of its approach-
ing end. But we may eaſily ſee, by what hath been noted before,
what it was that led the Fathers into that miſtake. They thought
their ſix thouſand years were near an end, as they truly were, ac
cording to that Chronology they followed: and therefore they
concluded the Reign of Antichriſt muſt be very ſhort, whenfoever
he came, and that he could not come long before the end of the
World. But we are very well aſſur'd from the Revelation of Saint
John that the reign of Antichriſt is not to be ſo ſhort and tranſient ;
and from the proſpect and hiſtory of Cliriſtendom, that he hath
been already upon his Throne many hundreds of Years. Therefore
this Sign wholly falls to the ground; unleſs you will take it from
the fall of Antichriſt, rather than from his firſt entrance. Others
expect the coming of Elias to give warning of that day, and prepare
the way of the Lord." I am very willing to admit that Elias will
come, according to the ſence of the Prophet Malachi, but he will
not come with obfervation, no more than he did in the Perſon of
John the Baptiſt; He will not bear the name of Elias, nor tell us he
is the Man that, went to Heaven in a fiery Chariot, and is now come
down again to give us warning of the laſt Fire. But ſome divine
perſon inay appear before the ſecond coming of our Saviour, as
there did before his firſt coming, and by giving a new light and life
to the Chriſtian Doctrine, inay diſſipate the miſts of error, and abo-
liſh all thoſe little controverſies amongſt good men, and the divifi-
ons and animofities that ſpring from them :. enlarging their Spirits
by greater diſcoveries, and uniting them all in the bonds of love
and charity, and in the common ſtudy of truth and perfc&tion.
Such an Elias, the Prophet ſeems to point at; And may he come
and be the great Peace-maker and preparer of the ways of the Lord
But at preſent, we cannot from this Sign make any judgment when
the World will, end.
Anotliei Sign preceeding the end of the World, is, The Converſi
on of the Jews , and this is a wonderful ſign indeed. S. Paul ſeem
exprefly to affirm it, Rom. 11. 25, 26. But it is differently under
ſtood, either of their Converſion only, or of their Reſtoration
their own Countrey, Liberties and Dominion. The Prophets bra
hard upon this ſence ſometimes, as you may fee in Iſaiah, Ezekie
Hoſea, Amos
. And to the ſame purpoſe the ancient promiſe of Moje
is interpreted, Deut. 30. Yet this ſeems to be a thing very u
conceivable ; unleſs we ſuppoſe the Ten Tribes to be ſtill in fom
Ch. 4. 5. 6.
hidde
Chap.5.
Concerning the Conflagration.
Ź
mana
hidden corner of the World, from whence they may be conducted
again into their own Countrey, as once out of Egypt, by a miracu-
lous Providence, and eſtabliſh'd there. Which bling known, will
give the alarum to all the other Jers in the World, and make an
univerſal confluence to their old home. Then our Saviour by an ex- Foh. 19. 37.
traordinary appearance to them, as once to S. Paul: and by Pro-Apoc. 1.7.
Mat. 23.39.
pliets rais'd up amongſt them for that purpoſe, may convince thein
that he is the true Meſſiah, and convert them to the Chriſtian
laitli; which will be no more ſtrange, than was the firſt Conver-
lion of the Gentile World. But if we be content with a Converſion
of the Fems, without their reſtoration ; and of thoſe Two Tribes
only which are now diſperſt throughout the Chriſtian World and
other known parts of the Earth: That theſe ſhould be Converted
to the Chriſtian Faith, and incorporated into the Chriſtian Com-
monwealth, loſing their national character and diſtinction. If this, I
ſay, will ſatisfie the Prophecies, it is not a thing very difficult to be
conceived. For when the World is reduc'd to a better and purer
ſtate of Chriſtianity, and that Idolatry in a great meaſure, remov’d,
which gave the greateſt ſcandal to the Jers, they will begin to have
better thoughts of our Religion, and be diſpos’d to a more ingenu-
ous and unprejudic'd examination of their Prophecies concerning
the Meſſiah : God raiſing up men ainongſt them of divine and en-
larged Spirits, Lovers of Truth more than of any particular Sect or
Opinion; with light to diſcern it, and courage to profeſs it. Laſtly,
it will be a cogent argument upon thein, to ſee the Age of the
World ſo far ſpent, and no appearance yet of their long expected
Melliah. So far ſpent, I ſay, that there is no room left, upon any
computation whatſoever, for the Oeconomy of a Meſſiah yet to
come. This will make them reflect more carefully and impartially
upon him whom the Chriſtians propoſe, Jeſus of Nazareth, whom
their Fathers Crucified at Jeruſalem. Upon the Miracles he wrought,
in his life and after his death : and upon the wonderful propagati-
on of his Doctrine throughout the World, after his Aſcenſion. And
laſtly, upon the deſolation of Jeruſalem, upon their own ſcatter'd
and forlorn condition, foretold by that Prophet, as a judgment of
God upon an ungrateful and wicked People.
This I have ſaid to ſtate the caſe of the Converſion of the
Jers, which will be a ſign of the approaching reign of Chriſt. But
alas, wliat appearance is there of this Converſion in our days, or
what judgment can we make from a ſign that is not yet come to
paſs? 'Tis ineffectual as to us, but may be of uſe to poſterity. Yet
even to them it will not determine at what diſtance they are from
the end of the World, but be a mark only that they are not far
from it. There will be Signs alſo, in thoſe laſt days, in the Heavens,
and in the Earth, and in the Sea, forerunners of the Gonflagration ;
as the obſcuration of the Sun and Moon, Earth-quakes, roarings of
the troubled Sea, and ſuch like diſorders in the natural World. 'Tis
frue, but theſe are the very pangs of death, and the ſtrugglings of
Nature juſt before her diffolution, and it will be too late then to
aware of our ruine when it is at the door. Yet theſe being Signs
or Prodigies taken notice of by Scripture, we intend, God willing,
after
be
E2
$
28
Boor WI.
The Theory of the Earth.
after we have explained the cauſes and manner of the Conflagrationi,
to give an account' alſo whence theſe unnatural commotions will
proceed, that are the beginnings or immediate introductions to the
laſt Fire,
Thus we liave gone through the Prophecies and Signs that con
cern the laſt day and the laſt fate of the World. And how little
have we learned from them as to the time of that great revolution:
Propliecies riſe ſometimes with an even gradual light, as the day
riſeth upon the Horizon: and ſometimes break out ſuddenly like a
fire, and we are not aware of their approach till we ſee them ac-
compliſh’d. Thoſe that concern the end of the World are of this
latter fort to unobſerving inen ; but even to the moſt obſerving,
there will ſtill be a latitude; We muſt not expect to calculate the
coming of our Saviour like an Eclipſe, to minutes and half-minutes.
There are Tinies and Seaſons which the Father hath put in his own porrer.
f it was deſigned to keep theſe things ſecrei, we muſt not think to
out-wit Providence, and from the Prophecies that are given us,
pick out a diſcovery that was not intended we ſhould ever make.
It is determin'd in the Councils of Heaven juſt how far we ſhall
know theſe events before-hand, and with what degree of certainty:
and with this we muſt be content whatſoever it is
. The Apocalypſe
of S. John is the laſt Prophetical declaration of the Will of God, and
contains the fate of the Cliriſtian Religion to the end of the World,
its purity, degeneracy, and reviviſcency. The head of this degene
racy is callid The Beaſt, the falſe Prophet, the Whore of Babylon, in
Prophetical terms: and in an Eccleſiaſtical term is commonly callid
Antichrist. Thoſe that bear Teſtimony againſt this degeneracy, are
callid the Witneſſes: who, after they have been a long time, in a
mean and perſecuted condition, are to have their Reſurrection and
Aſcenſion: that is, be advanc'd to power and Authority. And this
Reſurrection of the Witneſſes and depreſſion of Antichrift, is that
which will make the great turn of the World to righteouſneſs, ani
the great Criſis whereby we may judge of its drawing to an end.
A106. 6. 9.
'Tis true, there are other marks, as the palling away of the Second
Woe : which is commonly thought to be the Ottoman Empire: and
Apoc. c. 16.
the Effuſion of the Vials. The firſt of theſe will be indeed a very
ch. 11. 14. conſpicuous mark, if it follow upon the Reſurrection of the Wit-
neſſes, as by the Prophecy it ſeems to do. But as to the Vials, tho’
they do plainly reach in a Series to the end of the World, I am not
ſatisfied with any expoſition I have yet met with, concerning their
preciſe time or contents.
In a word, 'Tho the ſum and general contents of a Propliecy be
very intelligible, yet the application of it to Time and Perſons may
be very lubricous. There muſt be obſcurity in a Prophecy, as well
as ſhadow in a Picture. All its lines muſt not ſtand in a full liglit.
For if Prophecies were open and bare-fac'd as to all their parts and
circumſtances, they would check and obſtruct the courſe of hu-
inane affairs į and hinder, if it was poſſible, their own accomplilli-
ment. Modeſty and Sobriety are in all things commendable, but in
nothing more than in the explication of theſe Sacred Myſteries ; and
we have ſeen ſo many iniſcarry by a too cloſe and particular appli-
Gation
Chap 6. Concerning the Conflagration.
29
cation of them, that we ought to dread the Rock about which we
ſee ſo many ſhipwrecks. He that does not err above a Century in
calculating the laſt period of Time, from what evidence we have at
preſent, hath, in iny opinion, çaſt up his accounts very well. But
the Scenes will change faſt towards the Evening of this long day,
and when the Sun is near ſetting, they will inore eaſily coinpute
how far he hath to run,
C H A P. VI.
Concerning the Cauſes of the Conflagration.
The difficulty of conceiving how this Earth can be ſet on fire.
With a general anſwer to that difficulty. Two ſuppos’d
cauſes of the Conflagration, by the Sun's drawing nearer
to the Earth, or the Earth's throwing out the central fire,
examind and reje&ted.
W
E have now made our way clear to the principal point, The
Cauſes of the Conflagration: How the Heavens and the Earth
will be ſet on fire, what materials are prepar'd, or what train of
Cauſes, for that purpoſe. The Ancients, who have kept us com-
pany pretty well thus far, here quite deſert us. They deal more in
Concluſions than Cauſes, as is uſual in all Traditional Learning.
And the Stoicks themſelves, who inculcate ſo inuch the doctrine of
the Conflagration, and make the ſtrength of it ſuch as to diſſolve
the Earth into a fiery Chaos, are yet very ſhort and ſuperficial in
their explications, how this ſhall come to paſs. The latent ſeeds of
fire, they ſay, ſhall every where be let looſe, and that Element will
prevail over all the reſt, and transform every thing into its own na-
ture. But theſe are general things that give little ſatisfaction to in-
quiſitive Perſons. Neither do the modern Authors that treat of the
fame ſubject, relieve us in this particular : They are willing to ſup-
poſe the Confagration a ſuperficial effect, that ſo they may excuſe
themſelves the trouble of enquiring after cauſes. 'Tis, no doubt, in
a ſort, ſupernatural: and ſo the Deluge was: yet Moſes ſets down
the Cauſes of the Deluge, the rains from above, and the diſruption
of the Abyſs. So there inult be treaſures of fire provided againſt
that day, by whoſe eruption this ſecond Deluge will be brought
upon tlic Earth.
To ſtate the caſe fairly, we muſt firſt repreſent the difficulty of
ſetting the Earth on Fire: Tie the knot, before we looſe it, that
lo we may the better judge whether the Cauſes that ſhall be brought
into view, may be ſufficient to overcome ſo great oppoſition. The
difficulty, no doubt, will be chiefly from the great quantity of Wa
ter that is about our Globe ; whereby Nature ſeems to have made
proviſion againſt any invaſion by Fire, and ſecur'd us from that
enemy
1
30
The Theory of the Earth. Book III.
1
enemy more than any other. We fee half of the Surface of the
Earth cover'd with the Seas: whoſe Chanel is of a vaſt depth and
capacity. Beſides innumerable Rivers, great and ſmall, that water
the face of the dry Land, and drench it with perpetual moiſture.
Then within the bowels of the Earth, there are Store houſes of ſub-
terraneous Waters: which are as a reſerve, in caſe the Ocean and
the Rivers ſhould be overcome. Neither is Water our only fecurity,
for the hard Rocks and ſtony Mountains, which no Tire can bite
upoil, are ſet in long ranges upon the Continents and Iſlands: and
muſt needs give a ſtop to the progreſs of that furious Enemy, in
caſe he ſhould attack us. Laſtly, The Earth it ſelf is not combuſtible
in all its parts. 'Tis not every Soyl that is fit fewel for the Fire.
Clay, and Mire, and ſuch like Soyls will rather choak and ſtife it,
than help it on its way. By theſe means one would think the Body
of the Earth ſecur'd; and tho' there may be partial fires, or inun-
slations of fire, here and there, in particular regions, yet there can-
not be an Univerſal Fire throughout the Earth. At leaſt one would
hope for a ſafe retreat towards the Poles, where there is nothing
but Snow, and Ice, and bitter cold. Theſe regionis ſure are in no
danger to be burnt, whatſoever becomes of the other climates of
the Earth.
This being the ſtate and condition of the preſent Earth, one
would not imagine by theſe preparations, 'rwas ever intended that
it ſhould periſh by an Univerſal Fire. But ſuch is often the method
of Providence, that the exteriour face of things looks one way, and
the deſign lies another; till at length, touching a Spring, as it were,
at a certain time, all thoſe affairs change poſture and aſpect, and
thew us which way Providence inclines.
Providence inclines
. We muſt therefore ſup-
poſe, before the Conflagration begins, there will be diſpoſitions and
preparatives ſuitable to ſo great a work: and all antiquity, ſacred
and prophane, does ſo far concur with us, as to admit and ſuppoſe
that a great drought will precede, and an extraordinary heat and
drineſs of the Air, to uſher in this fiery doom. And theſe being
things which often happen in a courſe of Nature, we cannot diſal-
low ſuch eaſie preparations, when Providence intends ſo great acon-
ſequence. The Heavens will be ſhut up, and the Clouds yield no
rain; and by this, with an immoderate heat in the Air, the Springs
of Water will become dry, the Earth chap'd and parch'd, and the
Woods and Trees made ready fewel for the Fire. We have inſtan-
ces in Hiſtory that there have been droughts and heats of this Na-
ture, to tliat degree, that the Woods and Foreſts have taken fire,
and the outward Turf and Surface of the Earth, without any other
cauſe than the drineſs of the Seaſon, and the vehemency of the Sun.
And which is more conſiderable, the Springs, and Fountains being
dry'd up, the greater Rivers have been ſenſibly leſſen'd, and the
leſſer quite emptied and exhald. Theſe things which happen fre-
quently in particular Countreys and Climates, may at an appointed
time, by the diſpoſition of Providence, be more univerſal through
out the Earth; and have the ſame effects every where, that we ſee
by experience they have had in certain places. And by this means we
may
conceive it as feiſible to ſet the whole Earth on fire in ſome little
ſpace
1
Chap.6. Concerning the Conflagration.
31
ſpace of time, as to burn up this or that Countrey after a great
drought. But I niean this, with exception ſtill to the main Body of
the Sea: which will indeed receive a greater diminution from theſe
Cauſes than we eaſily imagine, but the final conſumption of it will
depend upon other reaſons, whereof we muſt give an account in the
following Chapters.
As to the Mountains and Rocks, their lofty heads will ſink when
the Earthquakes begin to roar, at the beginning of the Conflagra-
tion: as we ſhall ſee hereafter. And as to the Earth it ſelf, 'tis true
there are ſeveral forts of Earth that are not proper fewel for fire 3
but thoſe Soils that are not ſo immediately, as clayey Soils, and
ſuch like, may by the ſtrength of Fire be converted into Brick, or
Stone, or Earthen Metal, and ſo imelted down and vitrijed. For, in
concluſion there is ſo Terreſtrial Body that does not fnally yield
to the force of Fire, and may either be converted into flame, incor-
porated fire, or into a liquor more ardent than either of them. Laſt-
ly, As to the Polar Regions, which you think will be a ſafe retreat
and inacceſſible to the fire; Tis true, unleſs Providence hath laid ſub-
terraneous treaſures of fire there unknown to us, thoſe parts of the
Earth will be the laſt conſum'd. But it is to be obſerv'd, that the
culd of thoſe regions proceeds from the length of their Winter, and
their diſtance from the Sun when he is beyond the Æquator; and
both theſe cauſes will be remov'd at the Conflagration. For we
fuppoſe the Earth will then return to its primitive ſituation, which
we have explain’d in the 2d, Book of this Theory; and will have Ch.g.
the Sun always in its Æquator; whereby the ſeveral Climates of
the Earth will have a perpetual Equinox, and thoſe under the Poles
a perpetual day. And therefore all the exceſs of cold, and all the
conſequences of it, will ſoon be abated. However, the Earth will
not be burnt in one day, and thoſe parts of the Earth being unin-
habited, there is no inconvenience that they ſhould be more flow-
ly conſum'd than the reſt.
This is a general anſwer to the difficulty propos'd about the poſſi-
bility of the Conflagration ; and being general only, the parts of it
muſt be inore fully explain’d and confirm'd in the ſequel of this
diſcourſe. We ſhould now proceed directly to the cauſes of the
Conflagration, and ſhow in what manner they do this great execu-
tion upon Nature. But to be juſt and impartial in this enquiry, we
ought firſt to ſeparate the ſpurious and pretended Cauſes from thoſe
that are real and genuine; to make no falſe iufters, nor any
ſhow of being ſtronger than we are ; and if we can do our work
with leſs force, it will be more to our credit; as a Victory is tnore
honourable that is gain’d with fewer Men.
There are two grand capital Cauſes which fome Authors make
uſe of, as the clief Agents in this work, the Sun, and the Central
Fire. Theſe two great Incendiaries, they fay, will be let looſe upon
us at the Conflagration. The one drawing nearer to the Earth, and
the other breaking out of its bowels into theſe upper regions. Theſe
are potent Cauſes indeed, more than enough to deſtroy this Earth,
if it was a thouſand times bigger than it is. But for that very rea-
fon, I ſuſpect they are not the true Cauſes; for God and Nature do
not
32
Book III.
The Theory of the Earth.
5
not uſe to employ unneceſſary ineans to bring about their deſigns.
Diſproportion and over-ſufficiency is one ſort of falſe ineaſures, and
'tis a ſign we do not thorouglıly underſta:id our work, when we put
more ſtrength to it than the thing requires. Men are forward to
call in extraordinary powers, to rid their hands of a troubleſome
argument, and ſo make a lhort diſpatch to ſave themſelves the pains
of further enquiries : but ſuch inethods, as they commonly have no
prcof, ſo they give little ſatisfaction to an inquiſitive mind. This
ſuppoſition of burning the Earth, by the Sun drawing nearer and
nearer to it, ſeems to be made in imitation of the fiory of Phaeton,
who driving the Chariot of the Sun with an inſteddy hand, came
fo near the Earth, that he ſet it on fire. But however we will not
re’ect any pretenſions without a fair trial; Let us examine therefore
what grounds they can have for either of theſe ſuppoſitions, of the
Approximation of the Sun to the Earth, or the Eruption of the
Central Fire.
As to the Sun, I delire firſt to be ſatisfied in preſent matter of Fact :
whether by any inſtrument or obſervation it hath or can be diſco
ver'd, that the Sun is nearer to the Earth now, than he was in for-
mer ages ? or if by any reaſoning or comparing calculations ſuch
a conclufion can be made? If not, this is but an imaginary cauſe,
and as eaſily deny'd as propos’d. Aſtronomers do very little agree in
their opinions about the diſtance of the Sun, Ptolomy, Albategnius,
Copernicus, Ticho, Kepler, and others more modern, differ all in
their calculations ; but not in ſuch a manner or proportion, as
ſhould make us believe that the Sun comes nearer to the Earth, but
rather goes further from it. For the niore modern of them make
the diſtance greater than the more ancient do. Kepler ſays, the di-
ſtance of the Sun from the Earth lies betwixt 700 and 2002 ſemi-
diameters of the Earth : but Ricciolus makes it betwixt 700 and
7000. And Gottefrid Il'endeline hath taken 14656. ſemidiaireters, for
a middle proportion of the Sun's diſtance; to which Kepler himſelf
came very near in his later years. So that you ſee how groundleſs
our fears are from the approaches of an enemy, that rather fies
from us, if he change poſture at all. And we have more reaſon to
believe the report of the modern Aftronomers than of the ancient,
in this matter ; both becauſe the nature of the Heavens and of the
celeſtial Bodies is now better known, and alſo becauſe they have
found out better inſtruments and better methods to make their
obſervations.
If the Sun and Earth were come nearer to one another, either
the circle of the Suns diurnal arch would be leſs, and ſo the day
Thorter : or the Orbit of the Earths annual courſe would be leſs,
and ſo the Year (horier : Neither of which we have any experience
of. And thoſe that ſuppoſe us in the centre of the World, need not
be afraid till they fee Mercury and Venus in a combuſtion, for they
lie betwixt us and danger ; and the Sun cannot come fo readily at
us with his fiery darts, as at them, who ſtand in his way. Laſtly,
this languishing death by the gradual approaches of the Sun, and
that irreparable ruine of the Earth which at laſt muſt follow from
it, do neither of them agree with that Idea of the Conflagration,
which
Chap.6. Concerning the Conflagration.
33
:
which the Scripture hath given us; for it is to come ſuddenly and
unexpectedly, and take us off like a violent Feaver, not as à lingring
Conſumption. And the Earth is alſo ſo to be deſtroyed by Fire, as
not to take away all hopes of a Reſurrection or Renovation. For wie
are aſſur'd by Scripture that there will be new Heavens and a neut
Earth after theſe are burnt up. But if the Sun ſhould come fo near
us as to make the heavens paſs away with a noiſe, and melt the Ele-
ments with fervent heat, and deſtroy the form and all the works of
the Earth, what hopes or poſſibility would there be of a Renovation
while the Sun continued in this poſture? He would more and more
conſume and prey upon the Carcaſs of the Earth, and convert it at
length either into an heap of Alhes, or a lump of vitrified me-
tal.
So much for the Sun. As to the Central Fire, I am very well ſatis.
fied it is no imaginary thing. All Antiquity hath preſerv'd ſome ſa-
cred Monument of it. The Veſtal fire of the Romans, which was ſo
religiouſly attended : The Prytoneia of the Greeks were to the ſame
purpoſe, and dedicated to Veſta : and the Pyretbeia of the Perſians
where fire was kept continually by the Magi. Theſe all, in my opi-
nion, had the ſame origine and the ſame ſignification. And tho’ I
do not know any particular obſervation, that does directly prove or
demonſtrate that there is ſuch a maſs of fire in the middle of the
Earth; yet the beſt accounts we have of the generation of a Planet,
do ſuppoſe it ; and 'tis agreeable to the whole Oeconomy of Nature;
as a fire in the heart, which gives life to her motions and producti.
ons. But however the queſtion is not at preſent, about the exiſt-
ence of this fire, but the eruption of it, and the effect of that Erup-
tion : which cannot be, in my judgment, ſuch a Conflagration as is
deſcrib'd in Scripture.
This Central Fire muſt be enclos'd in a ſhell of great ſtrengtli and
firmneſs; for being of it ſelf the lighteſt and moſt active of all Bo-
dies, it would not be detained in that loweſt priſon without a ſtrong
guard upon it. 'Tis true, we can make no certain judgment of what
thickneſs this ſhell is, but if we ſuppoſe this fire to have a twentieth
part of the ſemidiameter of the Earth, on either ſide the centre, for
its ſphere, which ſeems to be a fair allowance ; there would ſtill
remain nineteen parts, for our ſafeguard and ſecurity. And theſe
nineteen parts of the ſemidiameter of the Earth will inake 3268
miles, for a partition-wall betwixt us and this Central Fire. Who
wou'd be afraid of an Enemy lock'd up in ſo ſtrong a prifon? But
you'l ſay, it may be, tho' the Central Fire, at the beginning of the
World,might have no more room or ſpace than what is mentioned :
yet being of that activity that it is, and corroſive nature, it may, in
the ſpace of ſome thouſands of years, have eaten deep into the ſides
of its priſon; and ſo come nearer to the ſurface of the Earth, by
ſome hundreds or thouſands of miles than it was at firſt. This would
be a material exception if it could be made out. But what Phæno-
menon is there in Nature that proves this ? How does it appear by
any obſervation that the Central Fire gains ground upon us? Or is
increaſed in quantity, or come nearer to the ſurface of the Earth?
I know nothing that can be offered in proof of this: and if there
F
be
I
1
34
Book III.
The Theory of the Earth.
be no appearance of a change, nor any ſenſible effect of it, 'tis an
argument there is none, or none, conſiderable. If the quantity of
that fire was conſiderably increas'd, it inuſt needs, belides other
effects, have made the Body of the Earth conſiderably lighter. The
Earth ha ving, by this converſion of its own ſubſtance into fire; loft
ſo much of its heavieſt matter, and got ſo niuch of the lighteſt and
moſt active Element in ſtead of it: and in both theſe reſpects its
gravity would be manifeſtly leſſen'd. Which if it really was in any
conſiderable degree, it would diſcover it ſelf by ſome change, either
as to the motion of the Earth, or as to its place or ſtation in the Hea-
vens. But there being no external change obſervable, in this or any
other reſpect, 'tis reaſonable to prefume that there is no conſiderable
inward change,or no great conſumption of its inward parts and ſub-
ſtance: and conſequently no great increaſe of the Central Fire.
But if we ſhould admit both an encreaſe and eruption of this fire,
it would not have that effect which is pretended. It might caufe
ſome confuſion and diſorder in thoſe parts of the Earth where it
broke out, but it would not make an univerſal Conflagration, ſuchi
as is repreſented to us in Scripture. Let us ſuppoſe the Earth to be
open or burſt in any place, under the Pole, for inſtance, or under
the Æquator : and let it gare as low as the Central Fire. At this
chaſm or rupture we ſuppoſe the fire would guſh cuit ; and what
then would be the conſequence of this when it came to the ſurface
of the Earth? It would either be diſſipated and loſt in the air, or
fly ſtill higher towards the Heavens in a maſs of flame. But what
execution in the mean time would it do upon the Body of the
Earth ?: 'Tis but like a flaſh of lightning, or a flame iſſuing out of a
pit, that dies preſently. Beſides, this Central Fire is of that ſub-
tilty and tenuity that it is not able to inflame groſs Bodies : no
more than thoſe Meteors we call Lambent Fires, inflame the bodies
to which they ſtick. Laſtly, in explaining the manner of the Con-
flagration, we muſt have regard principally to Scripture ; for the
explications given there are more to the purpoſe, than all that the
Philoſophers have ſaid upon that ſubject. Now, as we' noted be
fore, 'tis manifeſt in Scripture that after the Conflagration there
will be a Reſtauration, New Heavens and a New Earth. 'Tis the ex-
preſs;doctrine of S. Peter, beſides other Prophets : We muſt there.
fore ſuppoſe the Earth reduc'd to ſuch a Chaos by this laſt fire, as
2 Pet 3:12,13. will lay the foundation of a new World. Which can never be, if
the inward frame of it be broke, the Central Fire exhauſted, and
the exterior region fuck'd into thoſe central vacuities. This muſt
needs make it loſe its fornier poiſe and libration, and it will there-
upon be thrown into ſome other part of the Univerſe, as the uſeleſs
thell of a broken Granado, or as a dead carkaſs and unprofitable
matter.
Theſe reaſons may be fufficient why we ſhould not depend upon
thoſe pretended cauſes of the Conflagration, The Suns advance to-
wards the Earth, or ſuch a rupture of the Earth as will let out the
Central Fire: Theſe Caufes, I hope, will appear ſuperfluous, when
we ſhall laave given an account of the Conflagration without them.
But young Philoſophers, like young Soldiers, think they are never
fufficient
Chap17 Concerning the Conflagration.
35
fufficiently armed ; and often take more weapons, than they can
inake uſe of, when they come to fight. Not that we altogether re-
jilt the influence of the Sun, or of the Central Fire ; eſpecially the
latter. For in that great eſtuation of Nature, the Body of the
Earth will be much open’d and relaxated ; and when the pores
are enlarg’d, the ſteams of that fire will ſweat out more plentifully
into all its parts ; but ſtill without any rupture in the veſſels or ini
the skin. And whereas theſe Authors ſuppoſe the very Veins burſt,
and the vital blood to guſi out,as at open flood-gates, we only allow
a more copious perſpiration, and think that ſufficient for all purpo-
fcs in this caſe.
1
1
CHA P. VII.
!
The true bounds of the Laſt Fire, and how far it is fatal.
The natural Cauſes and Materials of it
, caſt into three
ranks : Firſt, ſuch as are exterior and viſible upon the
Earth; where the Volcano's of the Earth, and their ef-
fe&ts
, are conſider'd. Secondly, ſuch materials as are
within the Earth. Thirdly, ſuch as are in the Air.
1
S we have, in the preceding Chapter, laid aſide thoſe Cauſes
A of the Conflagration, which we thought too great and cum-
berſome ; ſo now we muſt, in like manner, examine the Effect, and
reduce that to its juſt meaſures and proportions ; that there may
be
nothing leit ſuperfluous on either ſide : Then, by comparing the
real powers with the work they are to do, both being ſtated within
their due bounds, we may the better judge how they are proporti.
on'd to one another.
We noted before, that the Conflagration had nothing to do with
the Stars and ſuperiour Heavens,but was wholly confin’d to this Sub-
lunary World. And this Deluge of Fire will have much what the
fame bounds, that the Deluge of Water had forinerly. This is ac-
cording to St. Peter's doctrine, for he makes the ſame parts of the
Univerſe to be the ſubject of both : namely, the inferiour Heavens
and the Earth. The Heavens and the Earth which were then, periſh'd , Pet. 3.5, 6.
in a Deluge of Water: But the Heavens and the Earth that are now, are ver. 7,
referu'd to fire. The preſent Heavens and Earth are ſubſtituted in
the place of thoſe that periſh'd at the Deluge, and theſe are to be
over-run and deſtroy'd by fire, as thoſe were by water. So
that the Apoſtle takes the ſame Regions, and the fame ſpace and
compaſs for the one as for the other, and makes their fate different
according to their different conſtitution, and the different order of
Providence. This is the fence St. Auftin gives us of the Apoſtle's
words, and theſe are the bounds he ſets to the laſt Fire; whereof
a modern Commentator is ſo well aſſur'd, that he ſays, They neither
Eftims file
underſtand Divinity, nor Philofophy, that would make the Conflagration
reach above the Elementary Heavens.
F 2
Let
36
Book III.
The Theory of the Earth.
Rev. 15.2
2 Pet. 3. 1o.
indi
Let theſe be then its limits upwards, the Clouds, Air, and At-
möſplété of the Eartli. But the queſtion ſeems inore doubiful, Hur
far it. will extend downwards, into 'thie bowels of the Earth. I
anſwer Itili;:-to the fame depth that the Waters of the Deluge reach'd :
To the loweſt Abyſſes and the deepeſt Gaveins within the ground.
And ſeeing 110 Claverns are deeper or lower, at leaſt according to our
Theory, thari the bottom of the great Ocean, to that depth, I ſup-
poſe; the rage of this fire will penetrate, and devour all before it.
And therefore we muſt not imagine, that only the outward turf
and habitable ſurface of the Earth will be put into a fiame and laid
waſt; the whole exieriour region of the Earth, to the depth of
the deepeſt part of the Sca, will ſuffer in this Fire ; and ſuffer to
that degree, as to be med deull, and -the frame of it diffolv'd.
For we are not to conicil'f thai Ule Earth will be only fcorcht op
charkt in the laſt Fire, the Pit! be a ſort of liquefaction and diſ-
folution; it will become and Si mingled with fire, according to
the expreſſion of Scripture, fiind this diſolution may reaſonably be
Pſal. 97. 8. fuppošd to reach as fow as uie warth hath' hay hollowneſės, or can
give venind finale and faites
Wlienfond taking theſe far the bounds and limits of tire-laſt great
Fire,, the kai-thing to be chquir'd intò, are the Natural Cauſes of
it. How this fange. fate will ſeize upon the Sublunary. World,
arid will ali, titellible füry'ſubdue all things to it felf. But when
I ſay the Lanferily Would not be fo underſtood, as if thought
the Conflagration was a pure Natural Fatality, as the Stoicks ſeem
to da:) Nol 'tis a mixt Fatality; The · Cauſes indeed are Natural,
but tlie: adminiftration of them is from an higher land. Fire is the
Inſtruinont, or the exeautive power, and hath no more force given
it, than what it hath naturally ; but the concurrence of theſe
Cauſes, or of theſe fiery powers, at ſuch a time, and in such a
Manneity and the conduct of thein to carry on and compleat the
whole work without ceſſation or interruption, that I look upon us
more than what material Nature could effect of it ſelf, orthan could
be brought to paſs by ſuch a government of matter, 'a's is the bare
reſult, of its own laws; and determinations. . When a Ship fails
gently before the Wind; the Mariners may ſtand idle z. but, to guide
her in a forin, all hands muſt be at work. There alle dates and
meaſures to be obſery'd, even in theſe tumults and defolations of
Naturea in ogleſtroying , # World, as well as in making one, and
therefore;i: both it.isIdafojiable to ſuppoſe a more than ordinary
;.
?. ¿
Providence to ſuperintendshę work. Letjuşnot therefore beitoo poſt-
tive 94sipelumptuous in que conjectures-about theſe trings, for. if
there be anyjaviſible handts Divine, or Angelical
, tlaat; tõuches the
Springs and Wlavels - it will not be eaſie for us to determine, with
eçrgaining the order of their motions. However tiso
, par duty to
ſearch into the ways and works of Gode: as far as we çawa: And
we anayinyithout: offence look into the Magazines, of Nature, fue
wląt proviljons are made and what preparations for this great
Day, and in what method 'tis moſt likely, the deſign wiļl be exe-
ALY,
x + sác
C. n,
Bur
ܟ . ;»
cuted. ?
از
لواز) )
:
in
1
.
1
1
1
0
Chap17: Concerning the Conflagration,
37
But before we proceed to mark out Materials for this Fire, give
me leave to obſerve one condition or property in the form of this
preſent Earth, that makes it capable of Inflammation... 'Tis the
inanner of its conſtruction, in an hollow cavernous forin; By reai
ſon whereof, containing much Air in its cavities, and liaving many
inlets and outlets, 'tis in molt places capable of ventilation, pervious
and pailable to the Winds, and conſequently to the Fire. Thoſe
that have read the former part of this Theory, know how the Earth Book 1. ch.624.
came into this hollow and broken forin, from what cauſes and at
wliat time; nainely, at the Univerſal Deluge; when there was a
diſruption of the exteriour Earth that fell into the Abyſs, and ſo,
for a time, was overtiow'd with water. Theſe Ruines recover's
from the Water, we inhabit, and theſe Ruines only will be burnt
up; For being not only unequal in their Surface, but alſo hollow;
looſe, and incompact within, as ruines uſe to be, they are made there-
by cap.ble of a ſecond fatė; by inflammation. Thereby; I ſay, they
are made combuſtible; for if the exteriour Regions of this Earth
were as cloſe and compact in all their parts; as we have reaſon'to
believe the interiour Regions of it to be, the Fire could have little
power over ik nor ever reduce it to ſuch a ſtate as is requir'd in a
compleat Confagration, ſuch as ours is to be.
This being adinitted, that the Exteriour Region of the Earth ſtands
hollow, as a well ſet Fire, to receive Air freely into its parts, and
hath iſſues for ſinoke and fame: It remains to enquire what fewel
or Materials Nature liath fitted to kindle this Pile, and to continue
it on Fire till it be conſum'd; or, in plain words, What are the Na-
tural Canſes and preparatives for a Gonflagration. The firſt and moſt
obvious préparations that we ſee in Nature for this effect, are the
Burning Mountains or Volcano's of the Earth. Theſe are leſſer El-
ſays or preludes to the general Fire; fer on purpoſe by Providence
to keep us awakė, and to mind us continually, and forewarn us of
what we are to expect at laſt. The Earth you ſee is already kind-
led, blow but the Coal, and propagate the Fire, and the work will
go on. Tophet is prepar'd nf old, and when the Day of Doom is 15a, 30.337
come, and tlie Date of the World expir’d, the breath of the Lord ſhall
Thake it burni
But beſides theſe Burning Mountains, there are Lakes of pitch
and brimſtone and oily Liquors diſperſt in ſeveral parts of the Earth.
Theſe are to enrage thic Fire as it goes, and to fortifie it againſt any
reſiſtance or oppoſition. Then all the vegetable productionis upon
the Surface of the Eartlı, as Trees, ſhrubs, graſs, corn, and ſuch
Ike; Every thing that grows out of the ground, is fewel for the
Fire; and tho they are now accominodated to our uſe and ſervice,
they will tlien turn all againſt us; and with a mighty blaze,' and
tapid courſe, make a devaſtation of the outward furniture of the
Earth, whether natural or artificial. But theſe things deferve ſome
further conſideration, eſpecially that ſtrange Phänomenon of the
Volcano's or Burning Mountains, which we will now conſider more
particularly.
There is nothing certainly more terrible' in all Nature'than Fiery
Mountains, to thoſe that live within the view or noiſe :of ther';
but
38
Book III.
The Theory of the Earth.
but it is not eaſie for us, who never ſee theni 11or heard them, to
repreſent them to our felves with ſuch juſt and lively imaginations
as Thall excite in us the ſame paſſions, and the ſame horrour as they
would excite, if preſent to our ſenſes. The time of their eruption
and of their raging, is, of all others, the moſt dreadful; but, many
times, before their eruption, the fyinptoines of an approaching fit
are very frightful to the People. The Mountain begins to roar and
bellow in its hollow caverns; cries out, as it were, in pain to be
deliver'd of ſome burthen, too heavy to be born, and too big to be
eaſily diſcharg'd. The Earth fhakes and trembles, in apprehenſion
of the pangs and convulſions that are coming upon her ; And the
Sun often hides his head, or appears with a diſcolour'd face, pale,
or dusky, or bloudy, as if all Nature was to ſuffer in this Agony.
After theſe forerunners or ſymptomes of an eruption, the wide jaws
of the Mountain open: And firſt, clouds of ſmoke iſſue out, then
flames of fire, and after that a mixture of all ſorts of burning mat.
ter; red hot ſtones, lumps of metal, half-diſſolv'd ininerals, with
coals and fiery alhes. Theſe fall in thick ſhowres round about the
Mountain, and in all adjacent parts; and not only ſo, but are car-
ried, partly by the force of the expulſion, and partly by the winds,
when they are aloft in the Air, into far diſtant Countries. As from
Italy to Gonftantinople, and croſs the Mediterranean Sea into Africk;
as the beſt Hiſtorians, Procopius, Ammianus Marc linus, and Dion
Caffius, have atteſted.
Theſe Volcano's are planted in ſeveral regions of the Earth, and
in both Continents, This of ours, and the other of America. For
by report of thoſe that have view'd that new-found World, there.
are many Mountains in it that belch out Smoke and Fire; ſome
conſtantly, and others by fits and intervals. In our Continent Pro-
vidence hath variouſly difperft them, without any rule known to
us; but they are generally in Iſlands or near the Sea. In the Afi-
atick Oriental Mands they are in great abundance, and Hiſtorians
tell us of a Mountain in the Iſand Java, tliat in the year, 1586. at
one eruption kill'd ten thouſand people in the neighbouring Cities
and Country. But we do not know ſo well the Hiſtory of thoſe
remote Volcano's, as of ſuch as are in Europe and nearer home.
In Iſeland, tho' it lie within the Polar Circle, and is ſcarce habitable
by reafon of the extremity of cold, and abundance of Ice and Snow,
yet there are three burning Mountains in that Iſland; whereof the
chief and moſt remarkable is Hecla. This liath its head always co-
ver'd with Snow, and its belly always fild with Fire; and theſe
are both ſo ſtrong in their kind, and equally powerful, that they
cannot deſtroy one another. It is ſaid to caſt out, when it rages,
beſides Earth, ſtones and aſhes, a ſort of flaming water. As if all
contrarieties were to meet in this Mountain to make it the more
perfect reſemblance of Hell, as the credulous inhabitants fancy it
to be.
But there are no Volcano's in my opinion, that deſerve our ob-
ſervation ſo much, as thoſe that are in and about the Mediterranean
Sea; There is a knot of them called the Vulcanian Iſlands, from
their fiery eruptions, as if they were the Forges of Vulcan ; as
Struinbolo,
1
Chap17: Concerning the Conflagration.
3.9
Strombolo, Lipara, and others, which are not ſo remarkable now as
they have been formerly. However, without diſpute, there are
none in the Chriſtian World to be compared with Atna and ve-
ſuvius; one in the Illand of Sicily, and the other in Campania, over-
looking the Port and City of Naples. Theſe two, from all memo-
ry of Man and the moſt ancient Records of Hiſtory, have been fam'd
for their Treaſures of ſubterraneous Fires: which are not yet ex-
haulted, nor diminiſh'd, ſo far as is perceivable ; for they rage
ſtill, upon occaſions, with as much fierceneſs and violence, as they
ever did in former Ages ; as if they had a continual ſupply to an-
ſwer their expences, and were to ſtand till the laſt Fire, as a type
and prefiguration of it, throughout all generations,
Let us therefore take theſe two Volcano's as a pattern for the
reſt; ſeeing they are well known, and ſtand in the heart of the
Chriſtian World, where, 'tis likely, the laſt fire will make its firft
aſſault. Atna, of the two, is more ſpoken of by the ancients, both
Poets and Hiſtorians; and we ſhould ſcarce give credit to their rela-
tions concerning it, if fome later eruptions did not equal or exceed
the faine of all that hath been reported from former ages. That it
heated the Waters of the Sea, and cover'd them over with alhes
crack'd or diſſolv'd the neighbouring Rocks; darkened the Sun and
the Air; and caſt out, not only mighty ſtreams of fame, but a
Houd of melted Ore and other Materials; Theſe things we can
now believe, having had experience of greater, or an account of them
from ſuch as have been eye-witneſſes of theſe fires, or of the freſh
ruines and ſad effects of them.
There are two things eſpecially, in theſe "Eruptions of Atit?
that are moſt prodigious in themſelves and moſt remarkable for our
purpoſe. The Rivers of fiery matter that break out of its bowels,
or are fpew'd out of its mouth; and the vaſt burning ſtones which
it ſlings into the Air, at a ſtrange height and diſtance. As to theſe
fiery Rivers or Torrents, and the matter whereof they are compoun-
ded, we have a full account of them by Alphonſus Burellus, a learned
Mathematician at Piſz; who, after the laſt great Eruption in the
year 1669. went into Sicily, while the fact was freſh, to view and
ſurvey what Ætna lad done or ſuffer'd. And he ſays the quantity
of matter thrown out of the Mountain at that time, upon ſurvey
amounted to Ninety three millions, eight hundred thirty eight thou.
ſand, ſeven hundred and fifty cubical paces. So that if it had been
extended in length upon the ſurface of the Earth, at the breadth
and depth of 3 foot, it would have reacht further than ninety three
millions of paçes ; which is more than four times the Circuit of
the whole Earth, taking a thouſand paces to a mile. This is ſtrange
to our imagination and almoſt incredible, that one Mountain ſhould
throw out ſo much fiery imatter, beſides all the aſhes that were diſ
perſt through the Air, får and near, and could be brought to ņo
account.
'Tis true, all this matter was not actually inflam'd or liquid fide.
But the reſt that was ſand, ſtore and gravel, might have fun into
glaſs or ſome inelted liquor like to it, if it had not been thrown out
before the heat fully reácht it. However, fixty million paces of this
matter,
40
The Theory of the Earth. Book III.
matter, as the ſame Author computes, were liquid fire, or came
out of the mouth of the pit in that form. This made a River of
fire, ſometimes two miles broad, according to his computation ; but
according to the obſervation of others who alſo viewed it, the Tor-
Fent of fire was ſix or ſeven miles broad, and ſometimes ten or fif-
teen fathoms deep; and forc'd its way into the Sea near a mile, pre-
ſerving it ſelf alive in the midſt of the waters.
This is beyond all the infernal Lakes and Rivers, Acheron, Phlege-
ton, Cocytiis, all that the l'oets have talkt of. Their greateſt fičti-
ons about Hell liave not come up to the reality of one of our bur-
ning Mountains upon Earth. Imagin then all our Volcano's raging
at once in this manner ---------But I will not purſue that ſuppoſition
yet ; Give me leave only to add here what I mentioned in the fe-
cond place, The vaſt Burning Stones which this Mountain, in the
time of its rage and eſtua ion, threw in o the Air with an incredi-
ble force. This ſame Author tells us of a ſtone fifteen foot long, that
was ſlung out of the mouth of the pit, to a miles diſtance. And
when it fell, it came from ſuch an height and with ſuch a violence,
that it buried it ſelf in the ground eight foot deep. What trifles
are our Mortar-pieces and Bombes, when compard with theſe En-
gines of Nature? When ſhe fings out of the wide throat of a Vol-
cano, a broken Rock, and twirles it in the air like a little bullet ;
then lets it fall to do execution here below, as Providence ſhall
point and direct it. It would be hard to give an account how ſo
great an impulſe can be given to a Body ſo ponderous. But there's
no diſputing againſt matter of fact; and as the thoughts of God are
not like our thoughts, ſo neither are his works like our works.
Thus much for Ætna. Let us now give an inſtance in t'e-
ſuvius, another Burning Mountain upon the coaſt of the Medi-
terranean, which hath as frequent Eruptions, and ſome as ter-
rible as thoſe of Ætna. Dion Caſſius (one of the beſt writers of
the Roman Hifto;y) hath given us an account of one that happened
in the time of Titus l'eſpatian; and tho' he hath not ſet down
particulars, as the former Author did, of the quantity of fiery
matter throun out at that time : yet fuppoſing that proportion.
able to its fierceneſs in other reſpects, this ſeems to me as dreadful
an Eruption as any we read of; and was accompanied with ſuch
Prodigies and commotions in the Heavens and the Earth, as made
it look like the beginning of the laſt Conflagration. As a prelude to
this Tragedy, He ſays there were ſtrange ſighs in the air, and after
that followed an extraordinary drought, Then the Earth begun to
tremble and quake, and the Concuffions were ſo great that the ground ſeem'd
to riſe and boyl up in forne places, and in others the tops of the mountains
funk in or tumbled down. At the ſame time were great noiſes and ſounds
beard, ſome were ſubterraneous, like thunder within the Earth ; others
above ground, like groans or bellowings. The Sea roar’d, The heavens
ratled with a fearful noife, and then came a ſudden and mighty crack, as
if the frame of Nature had broke, or all the mountains of the Earth had
faln down at once. At length Veſuvius burſt, and threw out of its womb,
firft, huge ſtones, then a vaſt quantity of fire and finoke, ſo as the air it as
all darkned, and the Sun was hid, as if he had been under a great Eclipſe
.
Lib. 66;
Tbe
Chap17. Concerning the Conflagration. 41
The diry was turn'd into night, and light into darkneſs; and the frighted
peuple thought the Gyants were making war againjt heaven, and fanfied
they ſee the shapes and images of Gy.ints in the finoak, and heard the
sound of their trumpets. Others thought the World w.1s returning to its
pist Chaos, or going to be all conſum'd writh fire. In this general confxſión
and conſternation they know not where to be ſafe, fome run out of the fields
into the houſes, others out of the houſes into the fields ; Thoſe that mere at
Sen haſten d to Land, and thoſe that were at Land endeavour'd to get to
Sea; Will thinking every place ſafer than that where they were. Beſides
groffer lumps of matter, there iras throrn out of the Mountain ſuch a pro-
digious quantity of ashes, as cover'd the Land and Sea, and fill'd the Air,
fas, beſides other damages, the Birds, Beaſts, and Fiſhes, with Men;
Women and Children, were deſtroy’d, within ſuch a compaſs; and tnio en-
tire Cities, Herculanium and Pompeios, mere overwhelm’d with
fhowre of aſhes, as the People were ſitting in the Theater. Nay, theſe
aſhes were carried by the winds over the Mediterranean into Africk,and
jizto Ägypt and Syria. And at Rome they choak’d the Air on a ſudden,
ſo as to hide the face of the Sun. Whereupon the People, not knorring the
cauſe, as not having yet got the News from Campania of the Eruption of
Veſuvius, could not imagine what the reafoiz should be ; but thought the
Herveis and the Earth were coming together, The Sun coming dorn, and
the Earth going to take its place above. Thus far the Hiſtorian
You ſee what diſorders in Nature, and what an alarum, the Erup-
tion of one fiery Mountain is capable to make ; Theſe things, no
doubt, would have made ſtrong impreſſions upon us, if we had been
eye-witneſſes of them ; But I know, repreſentations made from
lead hiſtory, and at a diſtance, though the teſtiniony be nerer ſo
credible, have a much leſs effect upon us than what we ſee our
felies, and what our ſenſes immediately inform us of. I have only
given you an account of two Volcano's, and of a ſingle Eruption in
either of them ; Theſe Mountains are not very far diſtant from one
another: Let us ſuppoſe two ſuch Eruptions, as I have mention'd,
to lappen at the ſame time, and both theſe Mountains to be raging
at once, in this manner ; By that violence you have ſeen in each of
them lingly, you will eaſily imagine what a terrour and deſolation
they would carry round about, by a conjunction of their fury and
all their effects, in the Air and on the Earth. Then, if to theſe
two, you ſhould joyn two more, the Sphere of their activity would
ſtill be enlarg’d, and the Scenes become more dreadful. But, to
compleat the ſuppolition, Let us imagine all the Volcano's of the
whole Earth, to be prepar'd and ſet to a certain time; which time
being come, and a ſignal given by Providence, all theſe Mines be-
gin to play at once; I mean, All theſe Fiery Mountains burſt out,
and diſcharge themſelves in flames of fire, tear up the roots of the
Earth, throw hut burning ſtones, ſend out ſtreams of Howing Me-
tals and Minerals, and all other ſorts of ardent matter, which Na-
ture hath lodg'd in thoſe Treaſuries. If all theſe Engines, I ſay, were
to play at once, the Heavens and the Earth would ſeem to be in a
Name, and the World in an univerſal combuſtion. But we may rea-
ſonably preſume, that againſt that great Day of vengeance and exe-
cution, not only all theſe will be employ'd, but alſo new Volcano's
G
will
42
Book 1
The Theory of the Earth.
ز
will be open'd, and new Mountains in every Region will break out
into ſmoke and flame; juſt as at the Deluge, the Abyſs broke out
from the Womb of the Earth, and from thoſe hidden ſtores fent an
iinmenſe quantity of water, which, it may be, the Inhabitants of
that World never thought of before. So we muſt expect new Erup-
tions, and alſo new fulphureous Lakes and Fountains of Oyl, to
boyl out of the ground, And theſe all united with that Fewel that
naturally grows upon the Surface of the Earth, will be ſufficient to
give the firſt onſet, and to lay waſt all the habitable World, and the
Furniture of it.
But we ſuppoſe the Conflagration will go lower, pierce under-
ground, and diffolve the fubfance of the Earth to ſome conſidera
ble depth; therefore beſides theſe outward and viſible preparations,
we muſt conſider all the hidden inviſible Materials within the Veins
of the Earth ; Such are all Minerals or Mineral juices and concreti-
ons that are igniferous, or capable of inflammation ; And theſe can
not eaſily be reckon'd up or eſtimated. Some of the moſt common
are, Sulphur, and all ſulphureous bodies, and Earths impregnated
with Sulphur, Bitumen and bituminous concretions; inflammable
Salts, Coal and other foſſiles that are ardent, with innumerable
mixtures and compoſitions of theſe kinds, which being open’d by
heat, are unctuous and inflammable; or by attrition diſcover t'ie
latent ſeeds of fire. But be ides conſiſtent Bodies, there is alſo much
volatile fire within the Earth, in fumes, fears, and exudations,
which will all contribute to this effect. From theſe ſtores under-
ground all Plants and Vegetables are fed and ſupply'd, as to their
oily and ſulphureous parts; And all hot Waters in Baths or Foun-
tains, muſt have their original from ſome of theſe, ſome mixture or
participation of thein. And as to the Britiſh Soyl, there is ſo much
Coal incorporated with it, that whien the Earth ſhall burn, we have
reaſon to apprehend no ſmall danger from that ſubterraneous
Enemy.
Theſe diſpoſitions, and this Fewel we find, in and upon the Eartlı
,
towards the laſt lire. The third ſort of Proviſion is in the Air ;
All fiery Meteors and Exhalations engender'd and form’d in thoſe
Regions above, and diſcharg'd upon the Earth in ſeveral ways.
I
believe there were no fiery Meteors in the ante-diluvian Heavens ;
which therefore St. Peter ſays, were conſtituted of water ; had nothing
in them but what was watery. But he ſays, the Heavens that are non
have treaſures of fire, or are reſerv'd for fire, as things laid up in a
itore houſe for that purpoſe. We have thunder and lightning, and
fiery tempefts, and there is nothing more vehement, impetuous,
irreſiſtible, where their force is directed. It ſeems to me very re-
markable, that the Holy Writers deſcribe the coming of the Lord, and
the deſtruction of the wicked, in the nature of a tempeſt, or a ſtorm
Pfal. 11.6. of fire. Upon the iricked the Lord fhall rain coals, fire and brimſtone, and
a burning tempeft, this shall be the portion of their cup. And in the
lofty Song of David (Pfal. 18.) which, in my judgment, reſpects
both the paſt Deluge and the future Conflagration, 'tis faid, The
Ver.13, 14, 15. Lord alfo thandred in the heavens, and the Higheſt gave his voice,
hail.
fones and coals of fire. Tea, he jent forth his arrows and ſcattered there
, ,
and
and
Chap17. Concerning the Conflagration. 43
and he ſhot out lightnings and diſcomfited then. Then the Chanels of
waters were ſeen, and the foundations of the Ifurld were diſ-over'd; at the
rebuke, O Lord, at the blaft of the breath of thy noſtrils. And a like
kery coming is deſcribd in tlie ninety ſeventh Palm, as alſo by Iſaiah, 114. 66. 15.
Daniel, and S. Paul. And laſtly, in the Apocalyple, when the World Dan. 7. 9, 10,
diaws to a concluſion, as in the ſeventh Trumpet (ch. U. 19.) and 2 Theſſ. 1. 2.
the ſeventh Vial (ch. 16.18.) we have ſtill mention made of this
Fery Tempeſt of Lightnings and Thunderings.
We may therefore reaſonably ſuppoſe, that, before the Conta
gration, the Air will be ſurcharg'd every wliere, (by a precedent
drought) with hot and fiery exhalations; And as againſt the Deluge,
thoſe regions were burthened with water and inoiſt vapours, which
were pour'd upon the Earth, not in gentle flowres, but like river's
and cataracts from Heaven; ſo they will now be filld with hot
fumes and ſulphureous clouds, which will ſometimes flow in ſtreams
and fiery impreſſions through the Air, ſometimes make Thunder and
Lightnings, and fornetimes fall down upon the Earth in fouds of
Fire. In general, there is a great analogy to be obſerved betwixt
the two Deluges, of Water and of Fire; not only as to the bounds
of them, which were noted before; but as to the general cauſes and
fources upon which they depend, from above and from below. At
the Floud the Windows of Heaven were opened above, and the
Abyſs was opened below; and the Waters of theſe two oyn'd to-
gether to overflow the World. In like manner, at the Conflagra-
tion, God will rain down Fire from Heaven, as he did once upon
Sodom ; and at the ſame time the fubterraneous ſtore houſes of Fire
will be broken open, which anſwers to the diſruption of the Abyſs :
And theſe two meeting and n:ingling together, will involve all the
Haven and Earth in flames.
This is a ſhort account of the ordinary ſtores of Nature, and the
ordinary preparations for a general Fire; And in contemplation of
theſe, Pliny the Naturaliſt, ſaid boldly, It was one of the greateſt won-
ders of the World, that the World iras not every day ſet on fire. We
will conclude this Chapter with his words, in the ſecond Book of
his Natural Hiſtory; having given an account of ſome fiery Moun- chariot, rang
tains, and other parts of the Earth that are the ſeats and ſources of
Fire, He makes this reflection; Seeing this Element is ſo fruitfub that
it brings forth it ſelf, and multiplies and encreaſes from the leaſt Sparks,
nhat are we to expe&t from ſo many fires already kindled on the Earth?
How does nature feed and ſatisfie lo devouring an Element, and ſuch a
: great voracity throughout all the World, without loſs or diminution of her
ſelf? Add to theſe fires we have mentioned, the Stars and the Great
Sun, then all the fires made for humane uſes; fire in Stones, in wood,
in the clouds and in thunder; IT EXCEEDS ALL MIRAGLES,
IN MY OPINION, THAT ONE DAY SHOULD PASS
NITHOLT SETTING THE WORLD ALL ON FIRE.
ܕ݂ ܨܶܐ
CHAPI
44
Book III.
The Theory of the Earth.
CHAP. VIII.
Some new diſpoſitions towards the Conflagration, as to the
matter, form, and ſituation of the Earth. Concerning
miraculous Cauſes, and how far the miniſtery of Angels
miay be engaged in this work.
W
E have given an account, in the preceding Chapter, of
the ordinary preparatious of Nature for a general fire; We
now are to give an account of the extraordinary, or of any new
diſpoſitions, which towards the End of the World, may be ſuper-
added to the ordinary ſtate of Nature. I do not, by theſe, mean
things openly miraculous, and ſupernatural, but ſuch a change
wrought in Nature as thall ſtill have the face of Natural Cauſes,
and yet have a greater tendency to the Conflagration. As for ex-
ample, ſuppoſe a great Drought, as we noted before, to precede
this fate, or a general heat and dryneſs of the Air and of the Earth;
becauſe this happens ſometimes in a courſe of Nature, it will not be
lookt upon as prodigious. 'Tis true, ſoine of the Ancients ſpeak of
a Drought of Forty Years, that will be a forerunner of the Con-
flagration, ſo that there will not be a watery Cloud, nor a Raini-
bow ſeen in the Heavens, for ſo long time. And this they impute
to Elias, who, at his coming, will ſtop the Rain and ſhut up the
Heavens to make way for the laſt Fire. But theſe are exceſſive and
ill-grounded ſuppoſitions, for half forty years drought will bringan
univerſal ſterility upon the Earth, and thereupon an Univerfal Fa-
mine, with innunerable diſeaſes ; ſo that all mankind would be
deſtroyed before the Conflagration could overtake thein.
But we will readily admit an extraordinary drought and defic-
cation of all bodies to uſher in this great fatality. And therefore
whatſoever we read in Natural Hiſtory, concerning former droughts,
of their drying up Fountains and Rivers, parching the Earth and
making the outward Turf take fire in ſeveral places ; filling the
Air with fiery impreſſions, making the Woods and Foreſts ready
Fewel, and ſometimes to kindle by the heat of the Sun or a fall
of Lightning: Theſe and what other effects have come to paſs in
former droughts, may come to paſs again; and that in an higher
meaſure, and ſo as to be of more general extent. And we muſt
alſo allow, that by this means, a great degree of inflammability, or
eaſineſs to be ſet on Fire, will be ſuperinduc'd, both into the body
of the Earth, and of all things that grow upon it. The heat of
the Sun will pierce deeper into its bowels
, when it gapes to receive
his beams, and by chinks and widened pores makes way for their
paſſage to its very heart. And, on the other hand, it is not im-
probable, but that upon this general relaxation and incaleſcency
of the Body of the Earth, the Central Fire may have a freer efflux,
and diffuſe it ſelf in greater abundance every way; ſo as to affea
even
Chap. 8.
Concerning the Conflagration.
45
even theſe exteriour Regions of the Earth, ſo far as to make thein
Itill more catching and more combuſtible.
From this external and internal heat acting upon the Body of
the Earth, all Minerals that have the feeds of tire in them, will be
open d, and exhale their effluvium's more copiouſly: as Spices, when
warmd, are more cdoriferous, and fill the Air with their perfumes ;
ſo the particles of fire, that are fiut up in ſeveral bodies, will eaſily
fie abroad, when by a further degree of rclaxation you ſhake off
their chains, and open the Priſon-doors. We cannot doubt, but
there are many ſorts of Minerals, and many ſorts of Fire-ſtones, and
of Trees and Vegetables of this nature, which will ſweat out their
oily and ſulphureous atomes, when by a general heat and drineſs
their parts are looſen'd and agitated.
We have no experience that will reach ſo far, as to give us a full
account what the Itate of Nature will be at that time; I mean, af-
ter this drought, towards the end of the world; But we may help,
our imagination, by comparing it with other ſeaſons and tempera-
ments of the Air. As therefore in the Spring the Earth is fragrant,
and the Fields and Gardens are filld with the ſweet breathings of:
Herbs and Flowers ; eſpecially after a gentle rain, when their Bodies
are ſoftned, and the warmth of the Sun makes them evaporate more ;
freely; So a greater degree of heat acting upon all the bodies of the
Earth, like a ſtronger fire in the Alembick, will extract another fort
of parts or particles, more deeply incorporated and more difficult
to be diſintangled; I mean oily parts, and ſuch undiſcover'd parcels
of fire, as lie fix'd and impriſon'd in hard bodies. Theſe, I imagine,
will be in a great ineaſure ſet a-float, or drawn out into the Air,
which will abound with hot and dry Exhalations, more than with
vapours and moiſture in a wet ſeaſon; and by this means, all Ele-
ments and elementary Bodies will ſtand ready, and in a proximale
diſpoſition to be infam’d.
Thus much concerning the laſt drought, and the general effects.
of it. In the next place, we muſt conlider the Earthquakes that
uvill precede the Conflagration, and the conſequences of them. i
noted before, that the cavernous and broken conſtruction of the
preſent Earth, was that which made it obnoxious to be deſtroy'd by
fire; as its former conſtruction over the Abyſs, made it obnoxiouş
to be deſtroy'd with Water. This hollowneſs of the Earth is moſt
ſenſible in mountainous and hilly Countreys, which therefore I look
upon as inoſt ſubject to burning; but the plain Countreys may alſo
be made hollow and hilly by Earth quakes, when the vapours not
finding an eaſie vent, raiſe the ground and make a forcible eruption,
as at the ſpringing of a Mine. And tho'plain Countreys are not ſo
ſubject to Earthquakes as Mountainous, becauſe they have not ſo
many cavities and ſubterraneous Vaults to lodge the vapours in ;
yet every Region hath more or leſs of them: And after this drought
the vacuities of the Earth being every where enlarg'd, the quantity. :
of exhalations much encreas'd, and the motion of them inore ſtrong
and violent, they will have thcir effects in many places where they
never had any before. Yet I do not ſuppoſe that this will raiſe new
riciges of Mountains, like the illpes or Pyreneans, in thoſe Countreys
that
40
The Theory of the Earth. Book III.
that are now plain, but that they will break and looſen the ground,
make greater inequalities in the ſurface, and greater cavities with
in, than what are at preſent in thoſe places; And by this means,
the fire will creep under them, and find a pallage (fiorew them,
with more eaſe, than if th:y were compact, and every where con-
tinued and unbroken.
But
you will ſay, it may be, how does it appear, that there will
be more frequent Earth-quakes towards the end of the World? If
this precedent dronght be admitted, 'tis plain that fiery exhalations
will abound every where within the Earth, and will have a greater
agitation than ordinary; and theſe being the cauſes of Earth-quakes
,
when they are rarified or inflam’d, 'tis reaſonable to ſuppoſe that in
ſuch a ſtate of Nature, they will inore frequently happen, than at
other times. Beſides, Earth-quakes are taken notice of in Scripture,
as ſigns and forerunners of the laſt day, as they uſually are of all
great changes and calamities. The deſtruction of Jeruſalem was a
type of the deſtruction of the World, and the Evangeliſts always
mention Earthquakes amongſt the ominous Prodigies that were
to attendit. But theſe Earth-quakes we are ſpeaking of at preſent,
are but the beginnings of ſorrow, and not to be compar'd with thoſe
that will follow afterwards, when Nature is convulſt in her laſt
agony, juſt as the flames are ſeizing on her. Of which we ſhall have
occaſion to ſpeak hereafter.
Theſe changes will happen as to the matter and furin of the Earth,
before it is attack'd by the laſt fire; There will be alſo another
change as to the ſituation of it; for that will be rectified, and the
Earth reſtor’d to ihe poſture it had at firſt, namely, of a right aſpect
and converſion to the Sun. But becauſe I cannot determine at what
time this reſtitution will be, whether at the beginning, middle, or
end of the Confagration, I will not preſume to lay any ſtreſs upon
it. Plato ſeems to have imputed the Conflagration to this only;
which is ſo far true, that the Revolution callid The Great Tear, is
this very Revolution, or the return of the Earth and the Heavens
to their firſt poſture. But tho' this may be contemporary with the laſt
fire, or ſome way concomitant; yet it does not follow that it
is the cauſe of it, much leſs the only caule. It may be an occaſion
of making the fire reach more eaſily towards the Poles, when by this
change of ſituation their long Nights and long Winters ſhall be taken
away.
Theſe new diſpoſitions in our Earth which we expect before that
great day, may be look'd upon as extraordinary, but not as Mira-
culous, becauſe they may proceed froin Natural Cauſes. But now
in the laſt place, we are to conſider miraculous caufes: What in
fluence they may have, or what part they may bear, in this great
revolution of Nature. By miraculous caufes. we underſtand either
God's immediate Omnipotency, or the Miniſtery of Angels; and
what may be perforin'd by the latter, is very improperly and unde
cently thrown upon the former. 'Tis a great ſtep to Omnipotency :
and 'tis hard to define what Miracles, on this ſide Creation, require
an infinite power. We are ſure that the Angels are Miniſtring Spirits,
and ten thouſand tiines ten thouſand ſtand about the Throne of the
Almighty.
d
Chap.8.
47
Concerning the Conflagration.
ܪ
Almighty, to receive his commands and execute his judgments.
That perfect knowledge they have of the powers of nature, and of
conducting thoſe powers to the beſt advantage, by adjuſting cauſes
in a fit ſubordination one to another, makes them capable of per-
torming, not only things far above our force, but even above our
imagination. Beſides, they have a radical inherent power, belong-
ing to the excellency of their nature, of determining the motions of
matter, within a far greater ſphere than humane Souls can pretend
to. We can only command our ſpirits, and determine their moti
ons within the compaſs of our own Bodies; but their activity and
empire is of far greater extent, and the outward World is much
more ſubject to their dominion than to ours. From theſe conſide-
rations it is reaſonable to conclude, that the generality of miracles
may be and are perform’d by Angels ; It being leſs decorous to em-
ploy a Sovereign power, where a ſubaltern is ſufficient, and when
we haſtily caſt things upon God, for quick diſpatch, we conſult our
own eaſe more than the honour of our Maker.
I take it for granted here, that what is done by an Angelical
hand, is truly providential, and of divine adminiſtration ; and alſo
juſtly bears the character of a miracle. Whatſoever may be done
by pure material cauſes, or humane ſtrength, we account Natural;
and wliatſoever is above theſe we call ſupernatural and miracu-
lous. Now what is ſupernatural and miraculous is either the effect
of an Angelical power, or of a Sovereign and Infinite
power. And
we ought not to confound theſe two, no more than Natural and
Supernatural; for there is a greater difference betwixt the higheſt
Angelical power and Omnipotency, than betwixt an Humane pow-
er and Angelical. Therefore as the firſt Rule concerning miracles is
this, That we muſt not fie to miracles, where Man and Nature are
ſufficient; ſo the ſecond Rule is this, that we muſt not flie to a fove.
reign infinite power, where an Angelical is fufficient. And the rea-
ſon in both Rules is the ſame, namely, becauſe it argues a defect of
Wiſdoin in all Oeconomies to employ more and greater means than
are ſufficient.
Now to make application of this to our preſent purpoſe, I think
it reaſonable, and alſo ſufficient, to admit the miniſtery of Angels
in the future Conflagration of the World. If Nature will not lay
violent hands upon her ſelf, or is not ſufficient to work her own de-
ſtruction, Let us allow Deſtroying Angels to intereſt themſelves in the
work, as the Executioners of the Divine Juſtice and Vengeance up-
on a degenerate World. We have examples of this fu frequently
in Sacred Hiſtory, how the Angels have executed God's Judgments
upon a Nation or a People, that it cannot ſeem new or ſtrange, that
in this laſt judgment, which by all the Prophets is repreſented as
the Great Day of the Lord, the day of his Wrath and of his Fury,
the ſame Angels ſhould bear their parts, and conclude the laſt ſcene
of that Tragedy which they had acted in all along. We read of the
Dejlroying Angel in Ægypt; of Angels that preſided at the deſtructi- Gen. 12. 13?
on of Sodom, which was a Type of the future deſtruction of the Gen. 19. 13.
World, (Jude 7.) and of Angels that will accompany our Saviour * Theill:1-7,8.
when he comes in Hames of Fire: Not, we ſuppoſe, to be Spectators
only,
48
The Theory of the Earth. Book III.
I/1. 30. 26.
Rev. 26. 8.
only, but Actors and Superintendants in this great Cataſtrophies :
This miniſtery of Angels may be either in ordering and conduct.
ing ſuch Natural Cauſes as we have already given an account of, or
in adding new ones, if occaſion be ; I mean, encreaſing the quantity
of Fire, or of fiery materials, in and about the Earth. So as that
Element ſhall be more abundant and inore predominant, and over-
bear all oppoſition that either Water, or any other Body, can maku
againſt it. It is not material whether of theſe two Suppoſitions we
follow, provided we allow that the Confiagration is a work of Pro.
vidence, and not a pure Natural Fatality. If it be neceſſary that
there ſhould be an augmentation made of Fiery Matter,'tis not hard
to conceive how that inay be done, either from the Heavens or from
the Earth. The Prophets ſometimes ſpeak of multiplying or
ſtrengthning the Light of the Sun, and it may as eaſily be conceiv'd
of his heat as of his light; as if the Vial that was to be pour'd up-
on it, and giưrie it a power to ſcorch men with fire, had ſomething of a
Natural fence as well as Moral But there is another ſtrean of Ethe-
real matter that fows from the Heavens, and recruits the Central
Fire with continual ſupplies; This may be encreas'd and ſtrength-
ned, and its effects convey'd throughout the whole Body of the
Earth.
But if an augmentation is to be inade of Terreſtrial Fire, or of
ſuch terreſtrial principles as contain it moſt, as Sulphur, Oyl, and
fuch like, I ain apt to believe, theſe will encreaſe of their own ac-
cord, upon a general drought and deſiccation of the Earth. For I
am far from the opinion of ſome Chymiſts, that think theſe princi-
ples iinmutable, and incapable of diminution or augmentation. I
willingly admit that all ſuch particles may be broken and disfigurd,
and thereby loſe the r proper and ſpecifick virtue, and new ories
may be generated to ſupply the places of the former. Which ſupplies,
or new productions being made in a leſs or greater meaſure, accor-
ding to the general diſpoſitions of Nature ; when Nature is height
ned into a kind of Feaver and Ebullition of all her juices and hu-
inours, as the will be at that time, we muſt expect that inore parts
than ordinary, ſhould be made inflammable, and thoſe that are in-
flam'd ſhould become more violent. Under theſe circumſtances,when
all Cauſes lean that way, a little help from a ſuperior power will
have a great tffect, and make a great change in the ſtate of the
World. And as to the power of Angels, I am of opinion that it is
very great as to the Changes and Modifications of Natural Bodies ;
that they can diſſolve a Marble as eaſily as we can crumble Earth
and Moulds, or fix any liquor, in a moment, into a ſubſtance as
hard as Cryſtal. That they can either make flames more vehement
and irreſiſtible to all ſorts of Bodies ; or as harmleſs as Lambent
Fires, and as ſoft as Oyl. We ſee an inſtance of this laſt, in Nebu.
chadnezzar’s fiery Turnace, where the three Children walk'd uncon-
cern'd in the midſt of the Flaines, under the charge and protection
of an Angel. And the ſaine Angel, if he had pleas’d, could have
made the ſame Furnace feven times hotter than the wrath of the
Tyrant had made it.
Dun. 3. 28.
7
We
:
Chap.9.
Concerning the Conflagration.
49
We will therefore leave it to their miniſtery to manage this great
Furnace, when the Heaveris and the Earth are on Fire. To conſerve;
encreaſe, direct, or temper the flames, according to inſtructions gi-
ven them, as they are to be Tutelary or Deſtroying. Neither let any
body think it a diminution of Providence to put things into the
hands of Angels; 'Tis the true rule and method of it ; For to em-
ploy an Almighty power where it is not neceſſary, is to debaſe it,
and give it a task fit for lower Beings. Some think it devotion and
piety to have recourſe immediately to the arm of God to ſalve all
things ; This may be done ſometimes with a good intention, but
commonly with little judgment. God is as jealous of the glory
of his Wiſdom, as of his Power; and Wiſdom conliſts in the con-
duct and ſubordination of ſeveral cauſes to bring our purpoſes to
effect; but what is diſpatched by an imınediate Supreme Power,
leaves no room for the exerciſe of Wiſdom. To conclude this
point, which I have touch'd upon inore than once, We muſt not
be partial to any of God's Attributes, and Providence being a com-
plexion of many, Power, Wiſdom, Juſtice, and Goodneſs, when
we give due place and honour to all theſe, then we moſt honour
DIVINE PROVIDENCE.
CHAP. IX.
How the Sea will be diminiſhid and conſumid. Hop the
Rocks and Mountains will be thrown down and melted,
and the whole exteriour frame of the Earth diſolu'd in-
to a Deluge of Fire.
E have now taken a view of the Cauſes of the Conflagra-
tion, both ordinary and extraordinary : It remains to con-
ſider the manner of it ; How theſe Cauſes will operate, and bring
to paſs an effeit ſo great and ſo prodigious. We took notice be-
fore, that the grand obſtruction would be from the Sea, and from
the Mountains; we muſt therefore take theſe to task in the firſt
place; and if we can remove them out of our way, or overcome
what reſiſtance and oppoition they are capable to make, the reſt of
the work will not be unealie to us.
The Ocean indeed is a vaſt Body of Waters ; and we muſt uſe all
our art and skill to dry it up, or conſume it in a good meaſure, be-
fore we can compaſs our delign. I remember the advice a Philofo-
pher gave Amaſis King of Egypt, when he had a command ſent him
from the King of Æthiopia, Thnt he ſhould drink up the Sea. Amalis
being very anxious and follicitous what anſwer he ſhould inake to
this ftrange command, the Philoſopher Bias advis'd him to make
this round anſwer to the King; That he was ready to perform his con-
mand and to drink up the Sea, provided he would stop the rivers from
flowing into his cup while he was drinking. This anſwer baffled the
H
King;
3
*
*
50
Book 11.
The Theory of the Earth.
King, for he could not ſtop the rivers; but this we muſt do, or we
ſhall never be able to drink up the Sea, or burn up the Earth.
Neither will this be ſo impoſſible as it ſeeins at firſt night, if we re
flect upon thoſe preparations we have made towards it, by a gene
ral drought all over the Earth. This we ſuppoſe will precede the
Connlagration, and by drying up the Fountains and Rivers, which
daily feed the Sea, will by degrees ſtarve that Monſter, or reduce
it to ſuch a degree of weakneſs, that it ſhall not be able to make
any great reliſtance. More than half an Ocean of Water flows into
the Sea every day, from the Rivers of the Earth, if you take them
all together. This I ſpeak upon a moderate computation. Ariſtotle
ſays the Rivers carry more water into the Sea, in the ſpace of a
year, than would equal in bulk the whole Globe of the Earth.
Nay, ſome have ventur'd to affirm this of one ſingle River, The
Volga, that runs into the Caſpian Sea. 'Tis a great River indeed,
and hath ſeventy mouths; and ſo it had need have, to diſgorge a
maſs of Water equal to the Body of the Earth, in a years time. But
we need not take ſuch high meaſures ; There are at leaſt an hun-
dred great Rivers that flow into the Sea, from ſeveral parts of the
Earth, Illands and Continents, beſides ſeveral thouſands of leſier
ones ; Let us ſuppoſe theſe, all together, to pour as much water in-
to the Sia-chanel, cvery day, as is equal to half the Ocean. And we
ſhall be eaſily convinc'd of the reaſonableneſs of this ſuppoſition, if
we do but examine the daily expence of one River, and by that
make an eſtimate of the reſt. This we find calculated to our hands
in the River Po in Italy; a River of much what the ſame bigneſs
with our Thames, and disburthens it ſelf into the Gulph of l’enice.
Baptiſta Riccioli hath computed how inuch water this River diſchar-
ges in an hour, viz. 18000 000. cubical paces of Water, and conſe
quently 43200000o. in a day; which is ſcarce credible to thoſe that
do not diſtinctly compute it. Suppoſe then an hundred Rivers as
great as this or greater, to fall into the Sea from the Land , belides
thouſands of leſſer, that pay their tribute at the ſaine time into the
great Receit of the OceanTheſe all taken together, are capable to
renew the Sea every twice four and twenty hours. VVhich ſuppo-
lītions being admitted, if by a great and laſting drought theſe Ri-
vers were dried up, or the Fountains from whence they flow, wliat
would then become of that vaſt Ocean, that before was ſo formida-
ble to us?
'Tis likely you will ſay, Theſe great Rivers cannot be dry'd up,
tho' the little ones may, and therefore we muſt not ſuppoſe ſuch an
Univerſal fop of waters, or that they will all fail, by any drought
whatſoever. But great Rivers being made up of little ones, if theſe
fail, thuſe muſt be diminiſh’d, if not quite drain’d and exhauſted.
It may be all Fountains and Springs do not proceed from the ſame
cauſes, or the ſame original ; and ſome are much more copious tharı
others; for ſuch differences we will allow what is due ; but ſtill
the drineſs of the Air and of the Earth continuing, and all the four-
ces and ſupplies of moiſture, both from above and from below, be-
ing leffend or wholly diſcontinued, a general decay of all Foun-
tains and Rivers muſt neceſſarily follow, and conſequently of the
Sea,
Chap.9. Concerning the Conflagration.
51
Sea, and of its fulneſs that depends upon them. And that's enough
for our prefent purpoſe.
The firſt ſtep therefore towards the Conſumption of the Ocean
will be the diminution or ſuſpenſion of the Rivers that run into it:
The riext will be an Evacuation by Subterraneous paflages; and the
laſt, by Eruptions of Tires in the very Chanel of it, and in the
midst of the Waters. As for Subterraneous Evacutions, we catinot
doubt but that the Sea hath out-lets at the bottom of it; whereby
it diſcharges that valt quantity of Water that flows into it every day,
and that could not be diſcharg'd ſo faſt as it comes from the wide
mouths of the Rivers, by percolation or ſtraining thorough the Sands.
Seas alſo communicate with one another by theſe internal paſſages;
as is manifeſt from thoſe particular Seas that have no external out-
let or iſſue, tho' they receive into them many great Rivers, and
ſometimes the influx of other Seas. So the Caſpian Sea receives not
only Volga, which we mention'd before, but ſeveral other Rivers,
and yet hath no viſible iſſue for its Waters. The Mediterranean Sea,
belides all the Rivers it receives, hath a current flowing into it, at
either end, from other Seas; from the Atlantick Ocean at the ſtreights
of Gibralter, and from the Black Sea, above Conſtantinople : and yet
there is no paſſage above-ground, or viſible derivation of the Médi-
terranean waters out of their Chanel ; which ſeeing they do not
overfil, nor overflow the Banks, 'tis certain they muſt have ſome
ſecret conveyances into the bowels of the Earth, or ſubterraneous
communication with other Seas. Laſtly, Froin the Whirl-pools of
the Sea, that ſuck in Bodies that come within their reach, it ſeems
plainly to appear, by that attraction and abſorption, that there is a
deſcent of waters in thoſe places.
Wherefore when the current of the Rivers into the Sea is ſtopt,
or in a great meaſure diminiſh'd; The Sca continuing to empty
it
ſelf by theſe ſubterraneous pallages, and having little or none of thoſe
fupplies that it us'd to have from the Land, it muſt needs be fen-
ſībly lefſen'd; and both contract its Chanel into a narrower com-
paſs, and alſo have leſs depth in the waters that reinain. And in
the laſt place, we muſt expect fiery eruptions in ſeveral parts of the
Sea-chanel, which will help to fuck up or evaporate the remaining
Waters. In the preſent ſtate of Nature there have been ſeveral in-
ſtances of fuch eruptions of Fire from the bottom of the Sea ; and
in that laſt ſtate of Nature, when all things are in a tendency to in-
Hammation, and when Earth quakes and Eruptions will be more
frequent every where, we muſt expect them alſo more frequently by
Sea, as well as by Land. 'Tis true, neither Earth-quakes nor Erup
tions can happen in the middle of the Great Ocean, ur in the deep-
eſt Abyſs, becauſe there are no cavities, or mines below it, for the
vapours and exhalations to lodge in ; But 'tis not inuch of the Sea.
chanel that is ſo deep, and in other parts, eſpecially in ſtreights and
near Illands, ſuch Eruptions, like Sea-Volcano's, have frequently
happen'd, and new Iſlands have been made by ſuch fiery inatter
thrown up from the bottom of the Sea. Thus, they ſay, thoſe
Illands in the Mediterranean call'd the Tulcani.in Iſlands, had their
original; being matter caſt up from the bottom of the Sea, by the
H 2
force
5 2
Book III.
The Theory of the Earth.
Lib. 1,
force of Fire; as new Mountains ſometimes are rais'd upon the Earth.
Another Iland in the Archipelago had the ſame original, whereof
Strabo gives an account. The flames, he ſays, ſprung up through the
Waters, four days togeth.r, ſo as the whole Sea n'as lot and burning;
and they rais’d by degrees, as with Engines, a maſs of Earth, which
made a new Illuind, twelve furlongs in compaſs. And in the ſame Ar-
chipelago, fames and ſmoke have ſeveral times (particularly in the
year 1650.) riſe out of the Sea, and fill'd the Air with ſulphureonis
ſcerits and vapours. In like manner, in the Illand of S. Michel, one
of the Tercera's, there have been, of later years, ſuch eructations of fire
and flames; ſo ſtrong and violent, that, at the depth of an hun
dred and ſixty fathoms, they forc'd their way through the midſt of
the Waters, from the bottom of the Sea into the open Air. As
has been related by thoſe that were eye-witnelles.
In theſe three ways I conceive, the great force of the Sea will be
broken, and the mighty Ocean reduc'd to a ſtanding Pool of putrid
waters, without vent and without recruits. But there will ſtill re-
inain in the midſt of the Chanel a great maſs of troubled liquors,
like dregs in the bottom of the veſſel ; which will not be drunk
up
till the Earth be all on fire, and torrents of melted and ſulphureous
matter flow from the Land, and mingle with this Dead Sea. But
let us now leave the Sca in this humble poſture, and go on to attack
the Rocks and Mountains which ſtand next in our way.
See how ſcornfully they look down upon us, and bid defrance
to all the Elements. They have born the Thunder and Lightning
of Heaven, and all the Artillery of the Skies, for innumerable Ages ;
and do not fear the crackling of thorris and of ſhrubs that burn at
their feet. Let the Towns and Cities of the Earth, ſay they, be laid
in alhes, Let the Woods and Foreſts blaze away; and the fat Soyl of
the Earth fry in its own greaſe; Theſe things will not affect us ; We can
ſtand naked in the midſt of a Sea of Fire, with our roots as deep as
the foundations of the Earth, and our heads above the Clouds of
the Air. Thus they proudly delie Nature ; and it muſt be confeft,
that theſe, being, as it were, the Bones of the Earth, when the
Body is burning, will be the laſt conſum'd ; And I am apt to think, if
they could keep in the ſame poſture they ſtand in now, and pre-
ſerve themſelves from falling, the fire could never get an entire
power over them. But Mountains are generally hollow, and that
inakes them ſubject; to a double caſualty; Firſt, Of Earth quakes,
Secondly, Of having their roots eaten away by Water or by Fire ;
but by Fire eſpecially in this caſe : For we ſuppoſe there will be
innumerable ſubterraneous Fires ſmothering under ground, before
the general Fire breaks out; and theſe by corroding the bowels of
the Earth, will make it more hollow and more ruinous; And when
the Earth is ſo far diſſolv'd, that the cavities within the Mountains
arc fill'd with Lakes of Fire, then the Mountains will fink, and fall
into thoſe boyling Caldrons; which, in time, will diſſolve them,
tho' they were as hard as Adamant.
There is another Engine that will tear the Earth with great vio
lence, and rend in pieces whatſoever is above or about thoſe parts
of it. And that is the Element of Water, ſo gentle in it ſelf, ivhen
undifturb'i?
Chap.9. Concerning the Conflagratior.
53
undiſturb'd. But 'tis found by experience, that when Water falls in-
to liquid Metals, it flies about with an incredible impetuoſity, and
breaks or bears down every thing that wou'd ſtop its niotion and ex-
panſion. This force I take to come from the ſudden and ſtrong
farefaction of its parts: which make a kind of exploſion, wlien it
is ſudden and vehement: And this is one of the greateſt forces we
know in Nature. Accordingly I am apt to think, that the marvel-
lous force of Volcano's, when they throw out lumps of Rocks,
great fragments of Earth, and other heavy Bodies, to ſuch a vaſt
height and diſtance, that it is done by this way of exploſion : And
that exploſion made by the ſudden rarefaction of Sea-water's, that
fall into Pans or receptacles of molten Ore and ardent Liquor's
within the cavities of the Mountain: and thereupon follow the
noiſes, roarings, and eruptions of thoſe places. 'Tis obſerv'd that
Volcano's are in Mountains, and generally, if not always, near the
Sea: And when its waters by ſubterraneous paſſages, are driven
under the Mountain, either by à particular Wind, or by a great
agitation of the Waves, they meet there with Metals and fiery Mine-
rals diſſolv'd, and are immediately, according to our ſuppoſition,
rarefied, and by way of exploſion fly out at the mouth or funnel of
the Mountain, bearing before them whatſoever ſtands in their way.
Whether this be a true account or no, of the preſent Volcano's and
their Eruptions, 'tis manifeſt that ſuch caſes as we have mention’d,
will happen in the Conflagration of the Earth, and that ſuch
erup:
tions or diſruptions of the Earth will follow thereupon: and that
theſe will contribute very much to the ſinking of Mountains, the
ſplitting of Rocks, and the bringing of all ſtrong Holds of Nature
under the power of the General Fire.
To conclude this point, the Mountains will all be brought low,
in that ſtate of Nature, either by Earthquakes or ſubterraneous
fires ; Every valley ſhall be exalted, and every mountain and bill ſhall iſt. 40.40
be made loir. Which will be literally true at the ſecond coming of
our Saviour, as it was figuratively apply'd to his firſt coming. Now, Luk. 3.59
being once leveld with the reſt of the Earth, the queſtion will only
be, how they ſhall be diſſolv’d. But there is no Terreſtrial Body
indiſſolvable to Fire, if it have a due ſtrength and continuance;
and this laſt Fire will have both, in the higheſt degrees; So that it
cannot but be capable of diffolving all Elementary compoſitions, how
hard or ſolid foever they be.
'Tis true, theſe Mountains and Rocks, as I ſaid before, will have
the priviledge to be the laſt deſtroy’d. Theſe, with the deep parts
of the Sea, and the Polar Regions of the Earth, will undergo a ſlower
fate, and be conſum'd more leiſurely. The action of the laſt Fire
may be diſtinguiſh'd into two Times, or two aſfaults ; The firſt af-
fault will carry off all Mankind, and all the works of the Earth that
are eaſily combuſtible; and this will be done with a quick and ſud-
den motion. But the ſecond aſſault, being employ'd about the con-
ſumption of ſuch Bodies or ſuch Materials as are not ſo eaſily ſub-
jected to fire, will be of long continuance, and the work of ſome
years. And 'tis fit it ſhould be lo; that this I'lamning World may be
view'd and conſider'd by the neighbouring Worlds about it, as a
dreadful
54
Book Ill.
The Theory of the Earth.
dreadful ſpectacle, and monument of God's wrath againſt diſloyal
and diſobedient Creatures. That by this example, now before their
eyes, they may think of their own ſate, and what may befal thein,
as well as another Planet of the ſame Elements and compoſition.
Thus inuch for the Rocks and Mountains; which, you ſee, accor-
ding to our Hypothelis, will be leveld, and the whole face of the
Earth: reduc'd to plainneſs and equality; nay, which is more, melted
an:1 diffolv'd into a Sea of liquid Fire. And becauſe this may ſeem a
Paradox, being more than is uſually ſuppoſed, or taken notice of,
in the doctrine of the Confagration, it will not be improper in this
place to give an account, wherein our Idea of the Confagration and
its effects, differs from the common opinion and the uſual repreſen-
tation of it. Tis commonly ſuppos'd, that the Confagration of
the World is like the burning of a City, where the Walls and ma-
terials of the Houſes are not melted down, but fcorch'd, inflam’d,
demoliſh'd, and made unhabitable. So they think in the Burning
of the World, ſuch Bodies, or ſuch parts of Nature, as are lit
Fewel for the Fire, will be inflam'd, and, it may be, conſum’d, or
reduc'd to ſmoke and ales; But other Bodies that are not capable
of Intammation, will only be ſcorch'd and defac'd, the beauty and
furniture of the Earth ſpoil'd, and by that means, ſay they, it will
be laid waſt and become unhabitable. This ſeems to me a very ſhort
and imperfect Idea of thie Conflagration ; neither agreeable to Scri.
pture, nor to the deductions that may be made from Scripture. We
therefore ſuppoſe that this is but half the work, this deſtroying of
the cutward garniture of the Earth is but the firſt onſet, and that
the Confagration will end in a diffolution and liquefaction of the
Elements and all the exteriour region of the Earth: ſo as to become
a tjue Deluge of Fire, or a Sea of Fire overſpreading the whole
Globe of the Earth. This ſtate of the Conflagration, I think, may
be plainly prov'd, partly by the expreſſions of Scripture concerning
it, and partly from the Renovation of the Earth that is to follow
it. S. Peter, who is our chief Guide in the doctrine of the
= Ps. 3.10,11. Conflagration, ſays, The Elements will be melted with fervent beat
beſides burning up the works of the Earth. Then adds, Seeing all
theſe things ſhall be diſſolv’d,&c. Theſe terms of Liquefa&tion and
Diſſolution cannot, without violence, be reſtrained to ſiniple devaſta-
tion and ſuperficial ſcorching. Such expreſſions carry the work a
great deal further, even to that full fence which we propoſe. Be-
sja. 34. 3, 4. fides, the Prophets often ſpeak of the melting of the Earth, or of the
Hills and Mountains, at the preſence of the Lord, in the day of his
Pl. 97. 5.
wrath. And S. John ( Apoc. 15. 2.) tells us of a Sea of Glaſs, mingled
with Fire; where the Saints ſtood, ſinging the ſong of Mofes
, and
triumphing over their enemies, the Spiritual Pharaoh'and his hoſt,
that were ſwallowed up in it. The Sea of Glaſs muſt be a Sea of
inolten glaſs; it muſt be fluid, not ſolid, if a Sea; neither can a
ſolid ſubſtanice be ſaid to be mingled with Fire, as this was.
And to
this anſwers the Lake of fire and brimſtone, which the Beaſt and falſe
Prophet were thrown into alive, Apoc. 19.20. Theſe all refer to
the end of the World and the laſt Fire, and alſo plainly imply, or
exprefs rather that ſtate of Liquefaction which we ſuppoſe and aſſert
.
upon it.
De 4.1,..
Nih. J. S.
Further
Chap.iọ. Concerning the Conflagratio.
55
1
}
Furtherinore, The Renovation of the World, or The New Heavens
and New Earth, which S. Peter, out of the Prophets, tells us thall
ſpring out of theſe that are burnt and diſſolved, do ſuppoſe this
Earth reduc'd into a fluid Chaos, that it may lay a foundation for a
ſecond World. If you take ſuch a Skeleton of an Earth, as your
ſcorching Fire would leave behind it; wliere the fleſh is torn from
the bones, and the Rocks and Mountains ſtand naked and ſtaring
upon you; the Sea, half empty, gaping at the Sun, and the Cities
all in ruines and in rubbiſh ; How would you raiſe a New World
froin this ? and a World fit to be an habitation for the Righteous; for
ſo S. Peter makes that to be, which is to ſucceed after the Conflagra- 2 Pet. 3. 35.
tion. And a VVorld alſo without a Sea, ſo S. John deſcribes the New Apoc. 21. I.
Earth he ſaw. As theſe characters do not agree to the preſent Earth,
ſo neither would they agree to your Future one ; for if that dead
lump could revive and become habitable again, it would however
retain all the imperfections of the former Earth, beſides fome ſcars
and deformities of its own. VVherefore if you would caſt the
Earth into a new and better mould, you muſt firſt melt it down;
and the laſt Fire, being as a Refiner's fire, will make an improve-
ment in it, both as to matter and form. To conclude, it muſt be
reduc'd into a fluid Mars, in the nature of a Chaos, as it was at firſt;
but this laſt will be a Fiery Chaos, as that was Watery; and from
this ſtate it will emerge again into a Paradiſiacal World. But this
being the Subject of the following Book, we will diſcourſe no more
of it in this place.
A
CH A P. x.
Concerning the beginning and progreſs of the Conflagration,
what part of the Earth will firſt be Burnt. The manner
of the future deftru&tion of Rome, according to Prophe-
tical Indications. The laſt ſtate and conſummation of the
general Fire.
|
I
H
Aving remov'd the chief obſtructions to our deſign, and ſhow'd
a method for weakning the ſtrength of Nature, by draining
the Trench, and beating down thoſe Bulwarks, wherein the ſeems
to place her greateſt confidence: we muſt now go to work; making
choice of the weakeſt part of Nature for our firſt attack, where the
fire
may
be the ealieſt admitted, and the beſt maintain'd and pre-
ſerv'd.
And for our better direction, it will be of uſe to conſider what
we noted before, viz. That the Conflagration is not a pure Natural
Fatality, but a mixt Fatality; or a Divine Judgment ſupported by
Natural Cauſes. And if we can find ſome part of the Earth, or of
the Chriſtian World, that hath inore of theſe natural diſpoſitions
ro Inflammation than the reſt; and is alſo repreſented by Scripture
AS
56
Book III.
The Theory of the Earth.
Dan. 7.92
IO, II.
as a more peculiar object of God's Judgments at the coming of our
Saviour, we inay juftly pitch upon that part of the World as firſt to
be deſtroyed. Nature and Providence conſpiring 10 make that the
firft Sacrifice to this Fiery Vengeance.
Now as to Natural diſpoſitions, in ariy Country or Region of thie
Earth, to be ſet on Fire, They ſeem to be chiefly theſe two, Sul-
phureouſneſs of the Soil, and an hollow, mountainous conſtruction
of the ground. Where theſe two diſpoſitions meer in the fame
tract or territory, (the one as to the quality of the matter, and the
other as to the forin) it ſtands like a Pile of fit materials, ready fer
to have the Fire put toit. And as to Divine Indications where this
General Fire will begin, the Scripture points to the Seat of Anti-
chriſt whereſoerer that is, for the beginning of it. The Scripture,
I fay, points at this, two ways, Firſt, in telling us thatour Saviour
2 Theff. 1.7 at his coming in flames of Fire ſhall conſume the wicked One, The Man
ch. 2. 8. of fin, the Son of perdition, with the Spirit of his mouth, and shall de-
Äroy him rrith the brightneſs of his preſence. Secondly, under the
name of Myſtical Babylon; which is allowed by all to be the Seat of
Antichriſt, and by Scripture always condemn’d to the Fire. This
v. 8. we find in plain words aſſerted by S. Juhn in the 18th Chap. of his
ver. 19. Revelations, and in the 19th. (ver. 3.) under the name of the Great
Ibere ; which is the ſame City and the faine Seat, according to the
ch. 17.18. interpretation of Scripture it ſelf. And the Prophet Daniel when
lie had ſet the Ancient of Days upon his fiery Throne, ſays, The Body
of the Beaſt wis given to the burning flame. Which I take to be the
fame thing with what S. John ſays afterwards, (Apoc. 19. 20.) The
Beaſt and the falſe Prophet were. cast alive into a Lake of fire-burning
with brimſtone. By theſe places of Scripture it ſeems inanifeſt, that
Antichriſt, and the Seat of Antichriſt, will be conſumed with Fire,
at the coining of our Saviour. And ’tis very reaſonable and deco-
rous, that the Grand Traitor and Head of the Apoſtaſie ſhould be
made the firſt example of the divine vengeance
Thus much being allow'd from Scripture, letius now return to
Nature again; to ſeek out that part of the Chriſtian World, that
from its own.conſtitution is moſt ſubject to burning ; by, the Sul-
phureouſneſs of its Soil, and its fiery Mountains and Caverns. This
we ſhall eaſily find to be the Roman Territory, or the Country of
Italy: which, by all accounts, ancient and modern, is a ſtore-houſe
of fire; as if it was condemn’d to that fate by God and Nature, and
to be an Incendiary, as it were, to the reſt of the VVorld. And ſee-
ing Myſtical Babylon, the Seat of Antichriſt, is the ſame Rome, and
its Territory; as it is underſtood by moſt Interpreters, of former
and later Ages; you ſee both our lines meet in this point ; And that
there is a fairneſs, on both hands, to conclude, that, at the glorious
appearance of our Saviour, the Conflagration will begin at the City
of Rome and the Roman Territory.
Nature hath ſav'd us the pains of kindling a fire in thoſe of
the Earth, for, ſince the memory of man, there have always been
fubterraneous fires in Italy. And the Romans did not preſerve their
Veſtal fire with inore conſtancy, than Nature hath done her fiery
Mountains in ſome part or other of that Territory. Let us then ſup
1
parts
pore,
C Chap. O. Concerning the Conflagration.
57
to
ز
1
}
sole, when the fatal time draws near, all theſe Burning Mountains
be filld and repleniſh'd with fit materials for ſuch a delign ; and
when our Saviour appears in the Clouds, with an Hoſt of Angels;
that they all begin to play, as Fire-works at the Triumphal Entry of
a Prince. Lut l'eſuvils, Ærna, Strongyle, and all the Vulcanian
Illands, break out into fames; and by the Earth-quakes, which
then will rage, let us ſuppoſe new Eruptions, or new Mountains
open'd, in the ilpennines, and near to Rome ; and to vomit out fire
in the ſame manner as the old Volcanu's. Then let the fulphureous
ground take fire; and ſeeing the Soil of that Country, in ſeveral
places, is ſo full of brimſtone, that the ſteams and ſmoke of it viſi-
bly riſe out of the Earth; we may reaſonably ſuppoſe, that it will
burn openly, and be inflam’d, at that time. Laſtly, the Lightnings
of the Air, and the flaming ſtreams of the melting Skies, will min-
g'e and joyn with theſe burnings of the Earth. And theſe three
Cauſes meeting together, as tliey cannot but make a dreadful Scene,
ſo they will eaſily deſtroy and conſume whatſoever lies within the
compaſs of their fury.
Thus you may ſuppoſe the beginning of the General Fire ; And
it will be carried on by like cauſes, thoʻin leiſer degrees, in other
parts
of the Earth. But as to Rome, there is ſtill, in my opinion, a
more dreadful fate that will attend it; namely, to be abſorpt or
ſwallowed up in a Lake of fire and brimſtone, after the manner of
Sodom and Gomorrha. This, in my judgin.ent, will be the fate and fi-
nal concluſion of Myſtical Babylon, to ſink as a great Milſtone into
the Sea, and never to appear more. Hear what the Prophet ſays,
A mighty Angel took up a jione, like a great Milftone, and caſt it into the Açoc. 18. 47)
Seu, Saying, thus, with violence, Shall that great City Babylon be thrown
down; and Mall be found no more at all. Simply to be burnt, does not
at all anſwer to this deſcription of its periſhing, by linking like a
Milftone into the Sea, and never appearing more, nor of, not having its
place ever more found ; that is, leaving no remains or marks of it.
A City that is only burnt, cannot be ſaid to fall like a Milftone into
the Sea; or that it can never more be found : For after the burning of
a City, the ruines ſtand, and its place is well known. Wherefore,
in both reſpects, beſides this exteriour burning, there muſt be an
abſorption of this Myſtical Babylon, the Seat of the Beaſt; and there.
upon a total diſappearance of it. This alſo agrees with the ſudden-
neſs of the judgment, which is a repeated character of it. Chap. 18.
8,10, 17, 19. Now what kind of abſorption this will be into
what, and in what manner, we may learn from what St. John ſays
afterwards, (ch. 19. 20.) The Beaſt and the falſe Prophets were caſt a
live into a Lake of fire and brimſtone. You muſt not imagine that they
were bound, hand and foot, and ſo thrown headlong into this
Lake, but they were ſwallowed up alive, they and theirs, as Corah
and his company. Or, to uſe a plainer example, after the manner
of Sodom and Gonorrhi'; which periſht by fire, and at the ſame time
ſunk into a Dead Sea, or a Lake of brimſtone.
This was a lively type of the fate of Rome, or Myſtical Babylon ;
and 'tis fit it ſhould referblc Sodom, as well in its puniſhment, as in
its crimes. Neither is it a hard thing to conceive how ſuch an ab-
I
forption
!
58
Book III.
The Theory of the Earth.
-
ſorption may come to paſs; That being a thing ſo uſual in Earth-
quakes, and Earth-quakes being ſo frequent in that Region. And
laſtly, that this ſhould be after the manner of Sodorii, turn’d into
a Lake of fire, will not be at all ſtrange, if we conſider, that
there will be many ſubterraneous Lakes of fire at that time,
when the bowels of the Earth begin to melt, and the Moun-
tains ſpew out ſtreams of liquid fire. The ground therefore
being hollow and rotten in thoſe parts, wlien it coines to be
ſhaken with a inighty Earth-quake, the founda ions will ſink, and
the whole fraine fall in:o an Abyſs of fire below, as a Milftone
into the Sia., And this will give occaſion to that Cry, B.ubylon the
Great is fallen; is fallen, and lhall never more be found.
This ſeems to be a probable account, according to Scripture and
reaſon, of the beginning of the general fire, arid of the particular
fate of Rome. But it may be propos'd here as an objection againſt this
Hypotheſis, that the Mediterranean Sea, lying all along the Coaſt of
Italy, muſt needs be a ſufficient guard to that Country againſt the
invaſion of fire ; or at leaſt muſt needs extinguiſh it, before it can
do much miſchief there, or propagate it ſelf into other Countreys.
I thought we had in a good meaſure prevented this objection be
fore, by ſhuwing how the Ocean would be diminiſh'd before the
Conflagration, and eſpecially the Arms and Sinus's of the Ocean;
and of theſe none would be more ſubject to this diminution than
the Mediterranean ; For, receiving its ſupplies from the Ocean and
the Black Sea, if theſe came to ſink in their chanels, they would
not riſe fo high, as to be capable to flow into the Mediterranean,
at either end. And theſe ſupplies being cut off, it would ſoon emp-
ty it ſelf ſo far, partly by evaporation, and partly by ſubterraneous
paſſages, as to ſhrink from all its ſhores, and become only a ſtanch
ing Pool of water in the middle of the Chanel. Nay, 'tis pollible,
by flouds of fire deſcending from the many Volcano's upon its
mores, it inight it ſelf be converted into a Lake of fire, and rather
help than obitruct the progreſs of the Conflagration.
It may indeed be made a queſtion, whether this fiery Vengeance
upon the ſeat of Antichriſt, will not precede the general Conflagra-
tion, at ſome diſtance of time, as a forerunner and forewarner to
the World, that the reſt of the People may have ſpace to reperit ;
And particularly the Jerrs, being Spectators of this Tragedy, and of
the miraculous appearance of our Saviour, may ſee the hand of
God in it, and be convinc'd of the truth and divine authority of
the Chriſtian Religion. I ſay, tliis ſuppoſition would leave room for
theſe and fome other propherick Scenes, which we know not well
where to place : But ſeeing The Day of the Lord is repreſented in
Scripture as one entire tliing, without interruption or diſcontinua-
tion, and that it is to begin with the deſtruction of Antichriſt, we
have warrant enough to purſue the reſt of the Conflagration from
this beginning and introduction.
Let us then ſuppoſe the ſame preparations made in the other parts
of the Earth' to continue the Fire ; for the Conflagration of the
World being a work of Providence, we may be fure ſuch meaſures
are taken, as will effectually carry it on, when once begun. The
Body.
:
1
59
Chap.1). Concerning the Conflagration.
ann
ز
Body of the Earth will be looſen'd and broken by Earth-quakes,
the inore ſolid parts impregnated with ſulphur, and the cavities
fill'd with untuvus fumes and exhalations; to as the whole Mars
will be but as one great funeral Pile, ready built, and wanting 10
thing but the hand of a deſtroying Angel, to give ir ise. I will not
take upon me to determine which way this devouring Enemy will
ſteer his courſe from Italy, or in what order he will advance and en
ter the ſeveral Regions of our Continent ; that would be an under-
taking, as uncertain, as uſeleſs. But we cannot doubt of his fuc-
ceſs, which way ſoever he goes: unleſs where the Chanel of the
Ocean may chance to ſtop him. But as to that, we allow, that diffe-
rent Continents may have different Fires ; not propagated from
one another, but of diſtinct ſources and originals, and ſo likewiſe
in remote Iſlands; and therefore no long paſſage or trajection will
be requir'd from ſhore to Thore. And even the Ocean it ſelf, will
at length be as Fiery as any part of the Land ; But that, with its
Rocks, like Death, will be the laſt thing ſubdued.
As to the Animate World, the Fire will over-run it with a ſwift
and rapid courſe, and all living Creatures will be ſuffocated or con-
ſumed, at the firſt aſſault. And at the ſame time, the beauty of
the Fields and the external decorations of Nature will be defac'd.
Then the Cities and the Towns, and all the works of man's hands,
will burn like ſtubble before the wind. Theſe will be ſoon diſpatch'd;
but the great burtlien of the Work ſtill remains; which is that Li
quefaction we mention'd before, or a melting fire, much more ſtrong
and vehement than theſe tranſient blazes, which do but ſweep the
ſurface of the Earth. This Liquefaction, I ſay, we prov'd before
out of Scripture, as the laſt ſtate of the fiery Deluge. And 'tis this,
which at length, will make the Sea it ſelf a Lake of fire and brimſtone.
wegg
When inſtead of Rivers of Waters which uſed to flow into it from
the Land, there come ſtreams and rivulets of Sulphureous Liquors,
and purulent melted matter, which following the tract of their
natural gravity will fall into this great drain of the Earth. Upon
which mixture, the remaining parts of ſweet water will ſoon evapo-
rate, and the falt mingling with the Sulphur will make a Dead Sea.
an Aſphaltites, a Lake of Sodom, a Cup of the dregs of the Wine of
the fierceneſs of God's Wrath.
We noted before two remarkable effects of the Burning Mountains,
which would contribute to the Confagration of the World; and
zave inſtances of both in former Eruptions of Etn. and Viſuvius.
One was, of thoſe Balls or lumps of Fire, which they throw about
in the time of their rage ; and the other, of thoſe torrents of liquid
Fire, which rowl down their ſides to the next Seas or Valleys. In
the firſt reſpect theſe Mountains are as fo many Batteries, planted by
Providence in ſeveral parts of the Earth, to fling thoſe fiery Bombs
Into ſuch places, or ſuch Cities, as are marked out for deſtruction.
And in the ſecond reſpect, they are to dry up the Waters, and the
Rivers, and the Sea it ſelf, when they fall into its Chanel. T. Fiz-
zellus, a Sicilian, who writ the Hiſtory of that Illand, tells us of dec. 1:62.64
ſuch a River of fire (upon an eruption of Ætna) near twenty eight
miles long; reaching from the Mountain to Port Longinu; and
might
}
)
Amal. Sic
I 2
1
60
Book 111.
The Theory of the Earth.
might have been inuch longer if it liad not been ſtopt by the Sea.
Many ſuch as theſe, and far greater, we ought in reaton to imagin,
when all the Earth begins to melt, and to ripen towards a diflolu-
tion. It will then be full of thefe Sulphureous juices, as Grapes with
Wine ; and theſe will be ſqueez'd out of the Earth into the Sea, as
out of a wine-preſs into the Receiver"; to fill up that Cup, as we ſaid
before, with the wine of the fiercenefs of God's wrath.
If we may be allowd to bring Prophetical paſſages of Scripture
to a natural ſemace, as doubtlefs fome of thoſe muſt
that reſpect the
end of the World, thefe phraſes which we have now ſuggeſted, of
Apoc. 14.10,19.
the Wine-preſs of the wrath of God. Drinking the fierceneſs of his
ch. 16.19. wine, poured, without mixture, into the cup of his indignation, with ex-
ch. 19. IS. preſſions of the like nature that occur fometimes in the old Prophets,
but eſpecially in the Apocalypſe; Theſe, I ſay, mnight receive a ſují
and emphatical explication from this ſtate of things which now lies
before us.
I would not exclude any other explication of leſs force,
as that of alluding to the bitter czip or mixt potion that us’d to be
given to malefactors : but that methinks, is a low ſence when ap-
plyed to theſe places in the Apocalypſe. That theſe phraſes ſignifie
God's remarkable judgments, all allow, and here they plainly relate
to the end of the World, to the laſt Plagues, and the laſt of the laſt
Plagues, chap. 16.19. Beſides, The Angel that preſided over this
judgment, is ſaid to be an Angel that had power over fire; And thoſe
who are to drink this potion, are ſaid to be tormented avith fire and
brimſtone, ch. 14. 10. This preſiding Angel ſeeins to be our Saviour
himſelf (c. 19.15.) who when he comes to execute Divine Ven-
geance upon the Earth, gives his orders in theſe words, Gather the
ch.14:18,19. cluſters of the Vine of the Earth, for her grapes are fully ripe. And
thereupon the Deſtroying
Angel thruſt in his fickle into the Earth, and
gathered the Vine of the Earth, and caſt it into tke great Wine-preſs of
the Wrath of God. And this made a potion compounded of ſeveral in-
melic dinegre, gredients, but not diluted with water ; (ch. 14. 10.) and was indeed a
potion of fire and brimſtone and all burning materials mixt toge-
ther. The ſimilitudes of Scripture are ſeldom nice and exact, but ra-
ther bold, noble and great; and according to the circumſtances which
we have obſerv'd, This Vineyard ſeems to be the Earth, and this
Vintage the end of the World; The preſſing of the Grapes into the
cup or veſſel that receives them, the diſtillation of burning liquors
from all parts of the Earth into the trough of the Sea ; and that
lake of red Fire, the bloud of thoſe Grapes ſo flowing into it.
'Tis true, This judgment of the Vintage and Wine-preſs, and the
effects of it, ſeem to aim more eſpecially at ſome particular region
of the Earth, ch, 14. 20. And I am not againſt that, provided the
ſubſtance of the explication be ſtill retained, and the univerſal Sea
of Fire be that which follows in the next Chapter, under the name
of a Sea of Glaſs, mingled with Fire ; This I think expreſſes the high-
eſt and compleat ſtate of the Conflagration ; when the Mountains
are fled away, and not only ſo, but the exterior region of the
Earth quite diffolv’d, like wax before the Sun ; The Chanel of the
Sea fill'd with a maſs of fluid fire, and the ſame fire overfowing all
the Globe, and covering the whole Earth, as the Deluge, or the
Tžnonsero-
che16. 2.
firin
Chap. II. Concerning the Conflagration. 61
firſt Abyſs
. Then will the Triumphal Songs and Hallelujah's be
ſung for the Victories of the Lamb over all his Enemies and over
Nature it felf. Great and marvellous are thy works, Lord God Almigh- Apoc, 15. 3,4
ty: Juſt and true are thy rrays, thou King of Saints. Who shall noi
fear ihee, O Lord, and glorifie thy name for thou only art holy : fox
all nations shall come and worſhip befure thee; for thy judgments are made
manifeſt.
1
CHAP. X I.
An account of thoſe extraordinary Phenomena and Wonders
in Nature, that, according to Scripture, will precede the
coming of Chriſt, and the Conflagration of the World,
F we redest upon the Hiſtory of Burning Mountains, we cannot
but obſerve, that, before their Eruptions, there are uſually ſome
changes in the Earth or in the Air, in the Sea or in the Sun it ſelf;
as ſigns and forerunners of the enſuing ſtorm. We may then eaſily
conclude that when the laſt great Storm is a coming, and all the
Volcano's of the Earth ready to burſt, and the frame of the World
to be diſſolv'd, there will be previous ſigns, in the Heavens and on
the Earth, to introduce this Tragical fate. Nature cannot come to
that extremity, without ſome fyinptomes of her illneſs, fior die fi-
lently, without pangs or complaint. But we are naturally heavy
of belief as to Futurities, and can ſcarce fancy any other Sceries, or
other ſtate of Nature, than what is preſent, and continually before
our eyes; we will therefore, to cure our unbelief, take Scripture
for our guide, and keep within the limits of its Predictions.
The Scripture plainly tells us of Signs or Prodigies that will pre.
cede the coming of our Saviour, and the end of the World; both in
the Heavens and on the Earth. The Sun, Moon, and Stars, will be
diſturb’d in their motion or aſpect; The Earth and the Sea will
roar and tremble, and the Mountains fall at his Preſence. Theſe
things both the Prophets and Evangeliſts have told us; But what
we do not underſtand, we are ſlow to believe; and therefore thoſe
that cannot apprehend how ſuch Changes ſhould come to paſs in
the Natural World, chuſe rather to allegorize all theſe expreſſions
of Scripture, and to make them ſignilie no more than political
charīges of Governments and Empires , and the great confuſions
that will be amongſt the People and I'rinces of the Earth towards
the end of the World. So that darkning of the Sun, Making of the
Earth, and ſuch like phraſes of Scripture, according to theſe Inter-
preters, are to be underſtood only in a moral ſence.
And they think they have a warrant for this interpretatiori from
the Prophetick ſtyle of the Old Teſtament, where the deſtruction
of Cities
, and Empires, and great Princes, is often deſcrib'd by
ſuch Figures, taken from the Natural World. So much is true in
deed
62
Book III.
I be Theory of the Earth.
deed as to the phraſe of the old Prophets in fore places; but I
take the true reaſon and delign of that, to be a typical adumbration
of what was intended ſhould literally come to pals in the griat
and univerſal deſtruction of the World; whereof theſe partial de-
ſtructions were only ſhadows and prefigurations. But to determine
this caſe, Let us take the known and approved rule for interpreting
Scripture, Not to recede from the literal ſence without neceflity, or
where the nature of the ſubject will admit of a literal interpretation.
Now as to thoſe caſes in the Old Teſtainent, Hiſtory and inatter of
fact do ſhow that they did not come to paſs literally, therefore
muſt not be fo underſtood ; But as for thoſe that concern the end
of the World, as they cannot be determini'd in that way, feeing they
are yet future ; So neither is there any Natural repugnancy or im
probability that they ſhould come literally to paſs : On the con-
trary, from the intuition of that ſtate of Nature, one would rather
conclude the probability or neceſſity of thein; That there may
and muſt be ſuch diſorders in the external World before the
ge-
neral diffolution. Beſides, If we admit Prodigies in any caſe, or
Providential indications of God's judgments to come, there can be
no caſe ſuppos'd, wherein it will be more reaſonable or proper to ad-
mit them, than when they are to be the Mellengers of an univerſal
Vengeance and Deſtruction.
Let us therefore conſider what ſigns Scripture hath taken notice
of, as deſtin'd to appear at that time, to publiſh, as it were, and
proclaim the approaching end of the World, and how far they
will admit of a natural explication, according to thoſe grounds we
have already given, in explaining the cauſes and manner of the Con
flagration. Theſe Signs are chiefly, Earth-quakes, and extraordi.
nary commotions of the Seas. Then the darkneſs or bloudy colour
of the Sun and Moon; The Making of the Powers of Heaven, the
fulgurations of the Air and the falling of Stars. As to Earth-quakes,
we have upon ſeveral occaſions ſhown, that theſe will neceſſarily be
multiplied towards the end of the World; when, by an exceſs of
drought and heat, exhalations will more abound within the Earth;
and, from the ſame cauſes, their inflammation alſo will be more fre-
quent, than in the ordinary ſtate of Nature. And as all Bodies,
when dry'd, become more porous and full of Vacuities; ſo the
Body of the Earth will be at that time: And the Mines or Cavi-
ties wherein the fumes and exhalations lodge, will accordingly be of
greater extent, open into one another, and continued through long
tracts and regions ; By which means, when an Earth-quale comes,
as the ſhock will be more ſtrong and violent, ſo it may reach to a
vaſt compaſs of ground, and whole Inands or Continenis he ſhaken
at once, when theſe trains have taken fire. The effects alſo of ſuch
concuſſions, will not only affect Mankind, but all the Elements and
the Inhabitants of thein.
I do not wonder therefore that frequent and great Earth-quakes
Mould be inade a ſigri of an approaching Conflagration ; and the
highelt expreſſions of the Prophets concerning the Day of the Lord,
may be underſtood in a literal fence, if they be finally referr'd to
the general deſtruction of the World, and not terminated folely
upon
Chap. I. Concerning the Conflagration. 63
1
22
19, 20,
upon thoſe particular Countries or · People, to whom they are at
firit directed. Hear what Ezekiel lays upon this ſubje&t: For in my Ch. 38. 19, 2013
Jealoitſy and in the fire of my wrath have I ſpoken ; ſurely in that Day
i here skall be a great shaking in the Land of Iſrael. So that the Fiſhes
of the Sea, sind the Forrls of the Heaven, and the Beaſts of the Field,
and all creeping things that creep upon the Earth; and all the Men that
are upon the face of the Earth, Tall Shake at my prefence; and the
Mountains shall be throun dorn, and the fieep places ſhall full, and every
wall Mal fall to the ground.--------- And I will rain an
---- And I will rain an over-floving řain,
: ind great hail ftones, fire and brimſtone. The Prophet Iſaias deſcribes ch. :4. 18.
theſe judgments in terms as high, and relating to the Natural
World : The Wind ws from on high are open, and the foundations of
the Earth do shake. The Earth is utterly broken dorn, the Earth is
clean diſſolv'd, the Earth is moved exceedingly
. The Earth ſhall reel to
and fro like it drunkard, and shall be removed like a Cottage, and the
tranſgreſſion thereof ſhall be heavy upon it, and it shall fall änd not riſe
gain.
To răſtrain all theſe things to Judæi, as their adequate and final
object, is to force both the words and the ſence. Here are inani-
felt alluſions and foot-ſteps of the deſtruction of the World, and the
diſſolution of the Earth ; partly as it was in the Deluge, and part-
ly as it will be in its laſt ruine; torn, broken, aud Thatter'd. But
moſt Men have fallen into that errour, To fancy both the deſtructi-
ons of the World, by Water and by Fire, quiet, noiſeleſs things ;
executed without ariy ruines or ruptures in Nature; Tliat the De-
luge was but a great Pool of ſtill Waters, made by tlie rains and in-
undation of the Sea: and the Conflagrátion will be only a ſuper-
ficial ſcorching of the Earth, with a running fire. Theſe are falle
Idea's, and unſuitable to Scripture : for as the Deluge is there re-
preſented a Diſruption of tłe Abyſs, and conſequently of the
then habitable Earth; ſo the future coinbuſtion of it, according to
the repreſentations of Scripture, is to be ulher'd in and accompanied
with all ſorts of violent impreſſions upon Nature; and tlie chief in-
ftrument of theſe violences will be Earth-quakes. Theſe will tear
the Body of the Earth, and ſhake its foundations; rend the Rocks,
and pull down the tall Mountains, ſometimes overturn, and ſome-
times ſwallow up Towns and Cities; diſturb and diſorder the Éle-
ments, and make a general confuſion in Nature.
Next to Earth-quakes, we may conſider the roarings of a troubled
Sea. This is another ſign of a dying World. S. Luke hath ſet down Ch. 21. 25,
a great many of them together ; Let us hear his words: And there
Shall be figris in the Sun, and in the Moon, and in the Stars; and uporz
the Earth diſtreſs of Nations, writh perplexity; The Sea and the l'aves
roaring. Mens hearts failing them for fear, and for looking after thoſe
things which are coming on the Earth: for the porrers of Heaven shall
be ſhaken. And then ſhall they Jce the Son of Man coming in a cloud,
with porrer and greut glory, &c. As ſome would allegorize theſe Signs,
which we noted before; to others would confine them to the de-
ſtruction of Jeruſalem. But 'tis plain, by this coming of the Son of t'er. 28.
man in the clouds, and the redemption of the faithful, and at the ſame
time, the ſound of the last trumpet, which all relate to the end of the Matt. 240 310
World,
26, 27,
64
The Theory of the Earth. Book III.
ces.
1
World, tliat ſoinething further is intended than the deſtruction of
Jeruſalem. And though there were Prodigies at the deſtruction of
that City and State, yet not of this force, nor with theſe circumſtan-
'Tis true, thoſe partial deſtructions and calamities, as we ub-
ſery'd before, of Babylori, Jeruſalim, and the Roman Empire, being
types of an univerſal and final deſtruction of all God's Enemies,
have, in the pictures of them, ſome of the ſame ſtrukes, to flow they
are all from the ſame hand ; decreed by the ſame wiſdon, forecold
by the fame Spirit; and the ſame power and Providence that have
already wrought the one, will alſo work the other, in due time;
the former being ſtill pledges, as .well as prefigurations, of the
latter.
Let us then proceed in our explication of this fign, The roaring of
the Sea, and the Il'aves, applying it to the end of the World. I do
not look upon this ominous noiſe of the Sea, as the effect of a tem-
peſt, for then it would not brike ſuch a terror into the Inhabi-
tanis of :he Eart'. nu all it-tliein apprehenſive of ſome great evil
coming upon tlic l'orini, wwiin's vill do ; what proceeds from vi-
fible cauſes, and ſuch as risklippa il å common courſe of Na-
ture, does not ſu 17?uch amir ili nor affiight us. Therefore 'tis
more likely theſe diſtur bances oi cho Sea proceed from below, part-
ly by ſympathy and revulſions from the Land; by Earth-quakes
there, and exhauſting the ſubterraneous cavities of Waters, which
will draw again from the Seas what ſupplies they can : And partly
by Earth quakes in the very Sea it ſelf; with exhalations and
fiery Eruptions from the bottom of it. Things indeed that happen
at other timnes, more or leſs, but at this con uncture, all cauſes con-
ſpiring, they will break out with more violence, and put the whole
Body of the Waters into a tumultuary motion. I do not ſee any
occaſion, at this time, for high Winds; neither can think a ſuperti-
cial agitation of the Waves would anſwer this Phänomenon ; but
'tis rather from Contorſions in the bowels of the Ocean, which make
it roar, as it were, for pain. Some Cauſes impelling the Waters one
way, and ſoine another, make inteſtine ſtruglings and contrary
inotions; from wh:nce proceed unuſual noiſes, and ſuch a troubled
ftate of the Waters, as does not only make the Sea innavigable, but
alſo ſtrikes terror into all the Maritime Inhabitants, that live within
the view or found of it.
So much for the Earth and the Sea. The face of the Heavens
alſo will be chang'd in divers reſpects. The Sun and the Moon
darkned, or of a bloudy, or pale countenance; The Celeſtial Powers
ſhaken, and the Stars unſetled in their Orbs. As to the Sun and
Moon, their obfcuration or change of colour is no more than what
happens commonly before the Eruption of a fiery Mountain; Dion
Caſ]:15, you fee, haih taken notice of it in that Eruption of Atna
which he deſcribes ; and others upon the like occaſions in l'eſuvius.
And 'tis a thing of caſie explication; for according as the Atmoſphere
is more or leſs clear or turbid, the Luminaries are more or leſs
conſpicuous; and according to the nature of thoſe fuines or ex-
halations that ſwim in the Air, the face of the Sun is diſcolourd
ſometimes one way, ſometimes another. You ſee, in an ordinary Ex-
periment,
.
Chap.II.
65
Concerning the Conflagrátion.
53
periment, when we look upon one another through the fumes of
Sulphur, we appear pale like ſo many Ghoſts, and in ſome foggy
days the Sun hangs in the Fırmament as a lump of Bloud. And both
the Sun and Moon at their riſing, when their light comes to us
through the thick vapours of the Earth, are red and fiery. Theſe
are not changes wrought in the ſubſtance of the Luminaries, but in
the modifications of their light as it flows to us. For colours are
but Light in a fort of diſguiſe; as it paſſes through Mediums of dif-
frent qualities, it takes different forms' ; but the matter is ſtill the
fame, and returns to its funplicity when it comes again into a pure
air.
Now the air may be changed and corrupted to a great degree,
the' there appear no viſible change to our eye. This is manifeſt froin
infectious airs, and the changes of the air before ſtorms and raius
which we feel commonly fooner than we fee, and ſome other ci ea-
tures perceive much fooner than we do 'Tis no wonder then if be-
fore this mighty ſtorm the diſpoſitions of the Air be quite alter'd
eſpecially if we conſider, what we have ſo often noted before, that
there will be a great abundance of fumes and exhalations through
the whole Aimoſphere of the Earth, before the laſt Fire breaks out ;
whereby the Light of the Sun may be tinctur'd in ſeveral ways.
And laſtly, it inay be fo order'd providentially, that the Body of
the Sun may contract at that time ſome Spots or Maculæ far greater
than uſual, and by that means be really darkened ; not to us only,
but to all the neighbouring Planets. And this will have a propor-
tionable effect upon the Moon too, for the diminution of her light.
So that upon all ſuppoſitions theſe Phänomena are very intelligible,
if not necesſary forerunners of the Conflagration.
The next Sign given us, is, that the porrers of heaven will be shaken.
By the Heavens in this place is either underſtood the Planetary Hea-
Tens, or that of the Fix'd Stars; but this latter being vaſtly diſtant
from the Farth, cannot be really affected by the Conflagration. Nor
the powers of it, that is, its inotions or the Bodies contain'd in it,
any way fhaken or diſorder'd. But in appearance theſe celeſtial
Bodies
nay
ſeem to be ſhaken,and their inotions diſorder'd; as in a
tempeft by night, when the ſhip is toſs’d with contrary and uncer-
tain motions, the Heavens ſeem to fluctuate over our heads, and the
Stars to reel to and fro, when the motion is only in our own Vel-
ſel
. So poſſibly the uncertain motions of the Atmoſphere, and ſome-
times of the Earth it ſelf, may ſo vary the fight and aſpect of this
ſtarry Canopy', that it may ſeem to ſhake and tremble.
But if we underſtand this of the Planetary Heavens, They inay
really be ſhaken. Providence either ordering ſome great changes
in the other Planeis previouſly to the Conflagration of our Planet s
as 'tis probable there was a great change in l'enus, at the time of our
Deluge. Or the great ſhakings and concuſſions of our Globe at that
time, affecting ſome of the neighbouring Orbs, at leaſt that of the
Moon, may cauſe Andmalies and irregularities in their motions.
But the ſence that I ſhould pitch upon chiefly for explaining this
phraſe of Shaking the powers of heaven, comprehends, in a good mea-
fare, both theſe Heavens, of the Fix'd Stars and of the Planets
2
K
'Tis
66
Воок В.
The Theory of the Earth.
ܪ
Ija. 34. 4.
'Tis that change of ſituation in the Axis of the Earth, which we
have formerly mention'd; whereby the Stars will ſeem to change
their places, and the whole Liniverſe to take another poſture. This
is ſufficiently. known to thoſe that know the different confequences
of a ſtrait or oblique pofture of the Earth. And as the heavens and
the earth were, in this fence; once ſhaken before ; namely aë the
Deluge, when they loſt their firſt ſituation ; ſo now they will be
fhaken again, and thereby return to the poſture they had before
that firſt concuſſion And this I take to be the true literal fence of
Ch. 2.6. the Propher Haggai, repeated by S. Paul, Yet once more I ſhake not the
Heb. 12. 26. Earth only, but aljo heaven.
The laſt Sign we ſhall take notice of, is that of Falling Stars. And
the Stars shall full from Heaven; ſays our Saviour, Matt. 24. 29. We
are ſure, from the nature of the thing, that this cannot be under-
ftood eith:r of fix'd Stars or Planets ; for if either of theſe ſhould
tumble from the Skies, and reach the Earth, they would break it all
in pieces, or ſwallow it up, as the Sea does a ſinking ſhip; and at
the ſaine time would put all the inferiour univerſe into confuſion
It is neceſſary therefore by theſe Stars to underſtand either fiery
Meteors falling from the middle Region of the Air, or Comets and
Blazing Stars. No doubt there will be all ſorts of fiery Meteors at
that time; and amongſt others, thoſe that are callid Falling Stars ;
which, tho' they are not conſiderable ſingly, yet if they were mul-
tiplied in great numbers, falling, as the Prophet ſays, as leafs from
the l'ine, or figs from the fig tree, they would make an aſtoniſhing ſight.
But I think this expreſſion does chiefly refer to Comets; which are
dead Stars, and may truly be ſaid to fall from heaven, when they
leave their ſeats above, and thoſe ethereal regions wherein they
were fixt, and ſink into this lower World; where they wander a
bout with a blaze in their tail, or a flame about their head, as if
they came on purpoſe to be the Meſſengers of ſome fiery Vengeance.
If numbers of theſe blazing Stars ſhould fall into our heaven toge-
ther, they would make a dreadful and formidable appearance ; And
I am apt to think that Providence hath ſo contrivd the periods o?
their motion, that there will be an unuſual concourſe of thein at
that time, within the view of the Earth, to be a prelude to this laſt
and moſt Tragical Scene of the Sublunary World.
I do not know any inore in Scripture relating to the laſt Fire,that,
upon the grounds laid down in this diſcourſe, may not receive a fa-
tisfactory explication. It reaches, beyond the Signs before inenti-
on’d, to the higheſt expreſſions of Scripture, As Lakes of fire and
brimſone, a molten Sea mingled with fire, the Liquefaction of Mountains,
and of the Earth it ſelf. We need not now lock upon theſe things
as Hyperbolical and Poetical ſtrains, but as barefac'd Prophecies,
and things that will literally come to paſs as they are predieted.
One thing inore will be expected in a juſt hypotheſis or Theory of
the Conflagration, namely, that it ſhould anſwer, not only all the
conditions and characters belonging to the laſt Fire, but ſhould alſo
make way and lay the foundation of another World to ſucceed
this, or of New Heavens and a Nem Earth. For S. Peter hath taught
this doctrine of the Renovation of the World, as poſitively and ex-
prcfly
Chap. 2. Concerning the Conflagration.
67
prelly as that of its Conflagration. And therefore they that ſo ex-
plain the deſtruction of the preſent World, as to leave it afterwards
in an eternal rubbiih, without any hopes of reſtoration, do not an-
ſwer the Chriſtian Doctrine concerning it. But as to our Hypothe-
ſis, we are willing to ſtand this farther trial, and be accountable for
the conſequences of the Conflagration, as well as the Antecedents
and manner of it. And we have accordingly in the following Book,
from the Aſhes of this, rais’d a New Earth ; which we leave to the
enjoyment of the Readers. In the inean time, to cloſe our diſcourſe,
we will bid farewel to the preſent World, in a ſhort review of its
laſt fames.
C H A P.
XII.
An imperfe&t deſcription of the Coming of our Saviour, and
of the World on Fire.
1
>
YErtainly there is nothing in the whole courſe of Nature, or of
Humane Affairs, ſo great and ſo extraordinary, as the two
laſt Scenes of them, THE COMING OF OUR SAVIOUR, and the
BURNING OF THE WORLD. If we could draw in our minds
the Pictures of theſe, in true and lively colours, we ſhould ſcarce be
able to attend to any thing elſe, or ever divert our imagination from
theſe two objects. For what can more affect us than the greateſt
Glory that ever was viſible upon Earth, and at the ſame time the
greateſt Terror. A God deſcending in the Head of an Army of An-
gels, and a Burning World under liis feet.
Theſe are things truly above expreſſion ; and not only ſo, but
ſo different and remote from our ordinary thoughts and concepti-
ons, that he that comes neareſt to a true deſcription of them, ſhall
be look'd upon as the moſt extravagant. 'Tis our unhappineſs to
be ſo much uſed to little trifling things in this life, that when any
thing great is repreſented to us, it appears phantaſtical: An Idea,
made by ſome contemplative or melancholy perſon. I will not
venture therefore, without premiſing ſome grounds out of Scri-
pture, to ſay any thing concerning This Glorious Appearance. As
to the Burning of the World, I think we have already laid a foun-
dation ſufficient to ſupport the higheſt deſcription that can be made
of it; But the coming of our Saviour being wholly out of the way
of Natural Cauſes, it is reaſonable we ſhould take all directions we
can from Scripture, that we may give a more fitting and juſt account
of that Sacred Pomp.
I need not mention thoſe places of Scripture that prove the fe-
cond coming of our Saviour in general, or his return to the Earth
31. AT.1.17
again at the end of the World : no Chriſtian can doubt of this, 'tis ° 3. 20, 21,
ſo often repeated in thoſe Sacred Writings. But the manner and A Cor;?:
. .
circumſtances of this Coming, or of this Appearance, are the things
we now enquire into. And in the firſt place, we may obſerve
K 2
that
Mitr, 24.300
40
68
Book U1.
The Theory of the Earth.
that Scripture tells us our Saviour will come in Flaming Fire, and
1 Ep. 1. 1. with an Hoft of mighty Augels ; fo ſays S. Paul to the Theffalonians
,
The Lord Jefus Sall be revealed from Heaven with nighty Angels; inz
flaming fire, taking vengeance ou them that know hot God, and obey not
the Goſpel of our Lord Jeſus Chriſt. In the ſecond place, our Saviour
Mart. 16. 27. ſays himſelf, The Son of man lball come in the glory of his Father with
bis Angels. From which two places we may learn, firſt, that the
appearance of our Saviour will be with fames of Fire. Secondly,
With an Hoft of Angels. Thirdly, In the glory of his father. By
which Glory of the Father I think is underſtood that Throne of
Glory repreſented by Daniel for the Ancient of Days. For our Savi-
our ſpeaks here to the Jews, and probably in a way intelligible to
them ; And the Glory of the Father which they were moſt likely
to underſtand, would be either the Glory wherein God appeared at
Mount Sinai, upon the giving of the Law, whereof the Apoſtle
ch. 12. 18, 19, ſpeaks largely to the Hebrews ; or that which Danich repreſents
20, 21.' Him in at the day of Judgment. And this latter being more proper
to the ſubject of our Saviour's diſcourſe, 'tis more likely this ex-
preſſion refers to it. Give me leave therefore to ſet down that de-
ſcription of the Glory of the Father upon his Throne, from the Pro-
* "Tis ill ren- phet Daniel, ch. 7.9. And I beheld till the Thrones were * ſet, and the
derd. in the Ancient of days did ſit, whoſe garnent was white as (nor, and the hair
Emelih
, cajt of his head like the pure wool : His Throne was like the fiery flame, and
his wheels as burning fire. A fiery ſtream iſſued and came forth from
kfore him, thouſand thouſands miniſtred unto him, and ten thoufand times
ten thouſand ſtood before him. With this Throne of the Glory of the
Father, let us if you pleaſe, compare the Throne of the Son of God,
as it was ſeen by S. John in the Apocalypſe, ch. 4. 2, &c. And imme-
diately I was in the Spirit: and behold a throne was ſet in heaven, and
one ſat on the Throne. And be that fat, was to look upon like a Jaſper
,
and a Sardine Stone: and tbere mas a Rain-bom round about the Throne,
appearance like unta an Emerald. And out of the Throne proceeded
Lightnings, and Tbunderings, and l'oices, &c. and before the Throne was
Sea of glaſs like unto Gryftal.
In theſe repreſentations you have ſome beams of the Glory
of the Father and of the Son; which may be partly a direction to
us, in conceiving the Luftre of our Saviour's appearance. Let us fur-
ther obſerve, if you pleaſe, how external Nature will be affected at
the fight of God, or of this approaching Glory. The Scripture often
takes notice of this, and in terms very high and eloquent.
The
Pſalmiſt ſeems to have lov'd that ſubject above others; to ſet out
the greatneſs of the day of the Lord, and the conſternation of all
Nature at that time. He throws about his thunder and lightning,
makes the Hills to melt like wax at the preſence of the Lord, and
the very foundations of the Earth to tremble, as you may ſee in the
18th. Pfalm, and the 97, and the 104. and ſeveral others, which are
too long to be here inſerted. So the Prophet Habakkuk, in his
Prophetick Prayer, Chap. zd. hath many Ejaculations to the like
purpoſe. And the Prophet Nahum ſays, 'The mountains quake at him,
and the bills melt, and the Earth is burnt at his preſence: gea, the world
and all that doelt theriin.
B17
in
a
,
Chap.
69
12.
Concerning the Conflagration.
But more particularly, as to the face of Nature juſt before the
coming of our Saviour, that may be beſt collected from the ligns of
his coming mention’d in the precedent Chapter. Thoſe all meeting
together, help to prepare and make ready a Theater, fit for an an-
gry God to come down upon. The countenance of the Heavens wille
be dark and gloomy; and a Veil drawn over the face of the Sun.
The Earth in a diſpoſition every where to break into open flames.
The tops of the Mountains ſmoaking ; the Rivers dry; Earth-
quakes in ſeveral places; the Sea ſunk and retir'd into its deepeſt
Chanel, and roaring, as againſt ſome miglity ſtorin. Theſe things
will make the day dead and melancholy, but the Niglit-Scenes will
have more of horrour in them. When the Blazing Stars appear, like
ſo many Furies, with their lighted Torches, threatning to ſet all on
fire. For I do not doubt but the Comets will bear a part in this
Tragedy, and have ſomething extraordinary in them, at that time;
either as to number, or bigneſs, or nearneſs to the Earth. Be'ides,
the Air will be full of faining Meteurs, of unuſual forins and mag-
nitudes; Balls of fire r'owling in the Skie, and pointed lightnings
darted againſt the Earth; mixt with claps of thunder, and unuſual
noiſes from the Clouds. The Moon and the Stars will be confus'd
and irregular, both in their light and motions ; as if the whole
frame of the Heavens was out of order, and all the laws of Nature
were broken or expir'd.
When all things are in this languiſhing or dying poſture, and
the Inhabitants of the Earth under the fears of their laſt end; The
Heavens will open on a ſudden, and the Glory of God will appear.
A Glory ſurpalling the Sun in its greateſt radiancy; which, tho' we
cannot deſcribe, we may ſuppoſe it will bear ſome reſemblance or
proportion with thoſe repreſentations that are made in Scripture,
of God
upon
his Throne. This wonder in the Heavens, whatſoever
its form may be, will prefently attract the eyes of all the Chriſtian
World. Nothing can more affect thein than an object fu unuſual
and ſo illuſtrious; and tliat, (probably) brings along with it their
laſt deſtiny, and will put a period to all humane affairs.
Some of the Ancients have thought that this coming of our Sa- 2 Pet. 3. 10.
viour would be in the dead of the night, and his firſt glorious ap-
pearance in the midſt of darkneſs. God is often deſcrib'd in Scrip-
ture as Light or Fire, with darkneſs round about him. He bowed
the Heavens and came down, and darknefs was under bis feet
. He made Pfal.18. 9, I!;
darkneſs bis ſecret place : His pavilion round about him mere dark IIxters Pſal. 97.
and thick Clouds of the Skies. At the brightneſs that was before him, the
thick Clouds paſſed. And when God appear'd upon Mount Sinai, the Deut. 4. 11.
Mountain burnt with fire unto the midſt of Heaven with darkneſs, clouds,
and thick darkneſs : Ör, as the Apostle expreſſes it, with blackneſs and Hebr. 12. 18.
darkneſs, and tempeft. Light is never inure glorious than when fur-
rounded with daikneſs; and it inay be the Sun, at that time, will
be ſo obſcure, as to make little diſtinction of Day and Night. But
however this Divine Light over-bears and diſtinguiſhes it ſelf from
common Light, the’ it be at Mid-day, 'Twas about Noon that the
Light ſhin'd from leaven and ſurrounded St. Panl. And 'twas on A4.22.6.
the Day-time that St. Stephen ſaw the Heavens opened : Som the glory 417.9.55,56
of
ILI
70
Book III.
The Theory of the Earth.
of God, and Jefus Standing at the right hand of God. This light, which
Hows from a more vital ſource, be it Day or Night, will always be
predominant.
That appearance of God upon Mount Sinai, which we mention’d,
if we reflect upon it, will help us a little to forin an Idea of this laſt
appearance. When God had declar'd, that he would come down in
the light of the People; The Text ſays, There were thunders and light-
nings, and a thick Cloud upon the Mount, and the voice of the Trumpet
exceeding loud; so that all the people that was in the Camp trembled. Annet
Mount Sinai was altogether on a ſinoke, becaule the Lord defcended upora
it in fire. And the Jinuke thereof aſcended as the finoke of a furnace, and
the whole Mount quaked greatly. If we look upon this Mount as an
Epitome of the Earth, this appearance gives us an imperfect reſem-
blance of that which is to come. Here are the ſeveral paris or main
ſtrokes of it ; firſt, the Heavens and the Earth in ſmoke and fire,
then the appearance of a Divine Glory, and the ſound of a Trumpet
in the preſence of Angels. But as the ſecond coining of our Saviour
is a Triumph over his Enemies, and an entrance into his Kingdom,
and is acted upon the Theater of the whole Earth ; ſo we are to ſup-
poſe, in proportion, all the parts and circumſtances of it, more
great and magnificent.
When tlierefore this mighty God returns again to thạt Earth,
where lie had once been ill treated, not Mount Sinai only, but all
the Mountains of the Earth, and all the Inhabitants of the World,
will tremble at his preſence. At the firſt opening of the Heavens,
che brightneſs of his Perſon will ſcatter the dark Clouds, and ſhoot
Streams of light throughout all the Air. But that firſt appearance,
being far from the Earth, will ſeem to be only a great maſs of
ight, without any diftinct form ; till, by nearer approaches, this
bright Body ſhows it ſelf to be an Army of Angels, with this King
of kings for their Leader. Then you may imagine how guilty Man-
kind will tremble and be aſtoniſh'd ; and while they are gazing at
this heavenly Hoſt, the Voice of the Archangel is heard, the ſhrill
found of the Trumpet reaches their ears. And this gives the gene-
ral Alarum to all the World. For he cometh, for he cometh, they
cry, to judge the Earth. The crucified God is return’d in Glory, to
take Vengeance upon his Enemies: Not only upon thoſe that pierc'd
his Sacred Body, with Nails and with a Spear, as Jeruſalem ; but
thoſe alſo that pierce him every day by their prophaneneſs and
hard ſpeeches, concerning his Perſon and his Religion. Now they
fee that God whom they have mock’d, or blaſphein’d, laugh’t at his
meanneſs, or at his vain threats ; They ſee Him, and are confoun-
ded with ſhame and fear ; and in the bitterneſs of their anguiſh
and deſpair call for the Mountains to fall upon them. Fly into the
clefts of the Rocks, and into the Caves of the Earth, for fear of the
K47,6, 16, 17. Lord, and the glory of his Majeſly, when he arifeth to Shake terribly the
Earth.
As it is not poſſible for us to expreſs or conceive the dread and
majeſty of this appearance ; ſo neither can we, on the other hand,
expreſs the paſſions and conſternation of the People that behold it.
Theſe things exceed the meaſures of humane affairs, and of humane
4. iyo
.
thoughts ;
Chap 12.
Concerning the Conflagration. 71
5
part
thoughts; we have neither words, nor compariſons, to inake them
known by. The greateſt pomp and magnificence of the Einperors
of the Eaſt
, in their Armies, in their Triumphs, in their Inaugura
kons, is but like the ſport and entertainment of Children, if com-
par'd with this Solemnity: Whien God condeſcends to an extern:1.
lory, with a viſible Train and Equipage : When, from all the
Provinces of his vaſt and boundleſs Empire, he ſummons his Nobles,
as I may ſo fay: The ſeveral orders of Angels and Arch-Angels, to
attend his perſon; tho' we cannot tell the form or inanner of this
Appearance, we know there is nothing in our experience, or in the
whole Hiſtory of this World, that can be a juſt repreſentation of the
left
of it. No Armies fo numerous as the Floſt of Heaven : and
in the midſt of thoſe bright Legions, in a flaming Chariot, will fit
the Son of Man, when he comes to be glorified in his Saints, and
triumph over his Enemies. And inſtead of the wild noiſes of
the rabble, which makes a great part of our worldly ſtate : This
bleſſed company will breath their Hallelujahs into the open Air; and
repeated acclamations of Salvation to God, which ſits up:n the Throne, Apoc. 7. 10.
and to the Lamb. Now is come ſalvation and ſtrength, and the kingdom ( 12.10.
of our God, and the power of his Chriſt.
But I leave the reſt to our ſilent devotion and admiration. Only
give me leave, whilſt this object is before our eyes, to make a ſhort
reflection upon the wonderful hiſtory of our Saviour ; and the diffe-
rent ſtates, which that Sacred Perſon, within the compaſs of our
knowledge, hath undergone. We now ſee him coming in the
Clouds in glory and triumph, ſurrounded with innumerable Angels.
This is the fame Perſon, who, ſo many hundred years ago, enter'd
Jeruſalem, with another ſort of Equipage : mounted upon an Afs's
Colt, while the little people and the multitude cry'd, Hoſanna to the
Son of David. Nay, This is the ſame Perſon, that, at his firſt come.
ing into this World, was laid in a Manger inſtead of a Cradle; A
naked Babe dropt in a Crib at Bethlehem: His poor Mother not Luke 2.12
having wherewithal to get her a better Lodging, when ſhe was to
be deliver'd of this Sacred Burthen. This helpleſs Infant, that often
wanted a little Milk to refreſh it, and ſupport its weakneſs : That
hath often cry'd for the Breaſt, with hunger and tears: now appears
to be the Lord of Heaven and Earth. If this Divine Perſon had
faln from the Clouds in a mortal Body, cloath'd with Fleſh and
Bloud, and ſpent his life here amongſt ſinners ; That alone had been
un infinite condeſcenſion. But as if it had not been enough to take
upon him Humane Nature, he was content, for many inonths, to
live the life of an Aninal, or of a Plant, in the dark Cell of a Wo-
mans Womb. This is the Lord's doing, it is marvellous in our eyes.
Neither is this all that is wonderful in the ſtory of our Saviour.
If the manner of his death be compar'd with his preſent glory, we
fall think, either the one, or the other, incredible. Look up, firſt, into
the Heavens: ſee how they bow under him, and receive a new light
from the Glory of his Preſence. Then look down upon the Earth,
and ſee a naked Body hanging upon a curſed Tree in Golgotha?
Crucified betwixt Two Thieves: wounded, ſpit upon, mock'd,
abus'd. Is it poſſible to believe that one and the fame perſon can
act
72
The Theory of the Earth.
Book ||
powe
Gen. 18.
+
act or ſuffer ſuch different parts? That he, that is now Lord ar
Maſter of all Nature: not only of Death and Hell, and the
of darkneſs: but of all Principalities in heavenly places : is the fan
Infant Jeſus, the ſame crucit.ed Jeſus, of whoſe life and death it
Chriſtian records give us an account? The Hiſtory of thus Perlo
1 Pet.1.11,12. is the Wonder of this World; and not of this World only, but
the Angels above, that deſire to look into it.
Let us now return to our Subject. We left the Earth in a lar
guilliing condition, ready to be made a Burnt-offering, to appea
the wrath of its offended Lord. When Sodom was to be deſtroy d
Abraham interceded with God that he would ſpare it for the Righ
2 Sam. 24. 17. teous fake : And D.vid interceded to ſave his guiltleſs People from
God's Judgments and the Deitroying Angel. But here is no Inter
ceſtor for Mankind in this laſt extremity : None to interpoſe where
the Mediator of our Peace is the party offended. Shall then the righ-
teous periſh with the wicked? Shall not the Judge of all the Earth do
right? Or if the Righteous be tranſiated and delivered from This
Fire, what thall become of innocent Children and Infants? Mull
theſe all be given up to the mercileſs fames, as a Sacrifice to Moloch?
and their tender Heſh, like burnt incenſe, ſend up fumus to feed
the noſtrils of evil Spirits ? Can the God of Iſrael ſmell a ſweet
favour from ſuch Sacrilices? The greater half of Mankind is made
up of Infants and Children: and if the wicked be deſtroyed, yet
theſe Lainbs, what have they done? Are there no bowels of compal-
ſion for ſuch an harınleſs multitude? But we leave them to their
Guardian Angels, and to that Providence which watches over all
things.
It only remains therefore, to let fall that Fire from Heaven, which
is to conſume this Holocauſt
. Imagine all Nature now ſtanding in
a ſilent expectation to receive its laſt doom: The Tutelary and De
atroying Angels to have their inſtructions: Every thing to be ready
for the fatal hour: And then, after a little ſilence, all the Hoſt of
Heaven to raiſe their voice and ſing aloud, LET GOD ARISE:
Let his enemies be ſcatter'd. As ſmoak is driven away, ſo drive them
away, is max melteth before the fire, fu LET the wricked periſh it
the preſence of God. And upon this, as upon a ſignal given, all the
ſublunary World breaks into Flames, and all the Treaſuries of Fire
are cpen d, in Heaven and in Earth.
Thus the Conflagration begins. If one ſhould now go about to
repreſent the World on Fire, with all the confuſions that neceſſarily
inult be, in Nature and in Mankind, upon that occafion, it would
ſeem to moft Men a Romantick Scene. Yet we are ſure there muſt
be ſuch a Scene. The heavens will paſs away with a noiſe, and the
Elements will melt with fervent heat, and all the norks of the Earth will
be burnt up. And theſe things cannot come to paſs without the
eſt diſorders imaginable, both in the minds of Men and in external
Nature: and the ſaddeſt ſpectacles that eye can behold.
We think
it a great matter to ſee a ſingle perſon burnt alive: here are Milli-
ons, Thrieking in the flames at cnce. 'Tis frightful to us to look
upon a great City in flames, and to ſee the diſtractions and miſery
of the people : here is an Univerſal Fire through all the Cities of
M207.18.10.
great-
the
Chap. 12. Concerning the Conflagration.
73
Laran
,
the Earth, and an Univerſal Mallacre of their Inhabitants. What-
ſoever the Prophets foretold of the deſolations of Judea, Jerufa- la.14
Icon, or Babylon, in the higheſt ſtrains, is more than literally accom- Fer.si.
pind in this laſt and general Calamity: And thoſe only that are
Spectators of it, can make i s Hiſtory.
The diſorders in Nature and the inanimate World will be no leſs,
nor leſs ſtrange and unaccountable, than thoſe in Mankind. Every Ele-
ment, and every Region, ſo far as the bounds of this Fire extend,
will be in a tumult and a fury, and the whole habitable World
running into confuſion. A World is ſooner deſtroyed than made,
and Nature relapſes haſtily into that Chaos-ſtate, out of which ſhe
came by flow and leiſurely motions. As an Army advances into
the field by juſt and regular marches, but when it is broken and
routed, it fies with precipitation, and one cannot deſcribe its poſture.
Fire is a barbarous Enemy, it gives no mercy; there is nothing but
fury, and rage, and ruine, and deſtruction, whereſoever it pre-
vails. A ſtorm or Hurricano, tho' it be but the force of Air, makes
a Itrange havock where it comes; but devouring lames, or exha-
lations ſet on Fire, have still a far greater violence, and carry more
terror along with them Thunder and Earthquakes are the Sons of
Fire: and we know nothing in all Nature, more impetuous, or
more ii reliltibly deſtructive than theſe two. And accordingly in this
lait war of the Elements, we may be ſure, they will bear their
parus, and do great execution in the ſeveral regions of the World.
Earthquakes and Subterraneous Eruptions will tear the body and
bowels of the Earth; and Thunders and convulſive motions of the
Air, rend the Skies. The waters of the Sea will boyl and ſtruggle
with ſtreams of Sulphur that run into thein; which will make them
fure, and ſmoak, and roar, beyond all ſtorins and tempeſts
. And
theſe noiſes of the Sea will be anſwered again from the Land by
falling Rocks and Mountains. This is a ſmall part of the diſorders of
:
that day.
But 'tis not poſſible, from any ſtation, to have a full proſpect of
this laſt Scene of the Earth: for 'tis a mixture of fire and dark-
neſs. This New Temple is fill'd with ſmoak, while it is conſecra-
ting, and none can eritcr into it. But I amapt to think, if we could
look down upon this burning World from above the Clouds, and
have a full view of it, in all its parts, we Mhould think it a lively re-
preſentation of Hell it ſelf. For, Fire and darkneſs are the two
chief things by which that ſtate, or that place, uſes to be deſcrib'd:
and they are both here mingled together : with all other ingredi-
ents that make that Topher that is prepard of old. Here are Lakes
of fire and brimſtone: Rivers of melted glowing matter : Ten thou-Iſa
. 30:
fand Volcano's vomiting fames all at once. Thick darkneſs, and
Pillars of ſmoak twiſted about with wreaths of fame, like fiery
Snakes. "Mountains of Earth thrown up into the Air, and the Hea-
vens dropping down in lumps of fire. Theſe things will all be li-
terally true, concerning that day, and that ſtate of the Earth. And
if we ſuppoſe Beelzebub, and his Apoſtate crew, in the midſt of this
fiery furnace: (and I know not where they can be elſe.) It will be
vard to find any part of the Univerſe, or any ſtate of things, that
anſwers
L
74
The Theory of the Earth. Book Ull.
anſwers to ſo many of the properties and characters of Hell, as this
which is now before us.
But if we ſuppoſe the form over, and that the fire hath got an
entire victory over all other bodies, and ſubdued every thing to it
ſelf, the Conflagration will end in a Deluge of fire: Or; in a Sea of
fire, covering the whole Globe of the Earth. For, when the exte
rior region of the Earth is melted into a fluor, like molten glaſs, or
running metal; it will, according to the nature of other Fluids, fill
all vacuities and depreſſions, and fall into a regular ſurface, at an
equal diſtance, every where, from its center. This Sea of fire, like
the firft Abyſs, will cover the face of the whole Earth: make a kind
of ſecond Chaos : and leave a capacity for another World to riſe
from it. But that is not our preſent buſineſs. Let us only, if you
pleaſe, to take leave of this ſubject, reflect upon this occaſion, on
the Vanity and tranſient glory of all this habitable World. How,
by the force of one Element, breaking looſe upon the reſt, all the
Varieties of Nature, all the works of Art, all the labours of Men
aſe reduc'd to nothing. All that we admir'd and ador'd before,
as great and magnificent, is obliterated or vaniſh'd. And another
form and face of things, plain, ſimple, and every where the ſame,
overſpreads the whole Earth. Where are now the great Empires
of the World, and their great Imperial Cities? Their Pillars, Tro-
phees, and Monuments of glory? Show me where they ſtood: read
the Inſcription, tell me the Victor's name. What remains, what
impreſſions, what difference or diſtinction do you ſee in this maſs
of fire? Ronze it ſelf, Eternal Rome, the Great City, the Empreſs of
the World, whoſe domination and ſuperſtition, ancient and modern,
make a great part of the Hiſtory of this Earth: What is become of
her now? She laid her foundations deep, and her Palaces were
ftrong and ſumptuous: She glorified her ſelf, and liv’d deliciouſly: and
ſaid in her heart, I fit a Queen, and ſhall ſee no forrom. But her hour
is come, ſhe is wip'd away from the face of the Earth, and buried in
perpetual oblivion. But ’tis not Cities only, and works of Men's
hands, but the everlaſting Hills, the Mountains and Rocks of the
Earth, are melted as Wax before the Sun; and their place is no where
found. Here ſtood the Alpes, a prodigious range of Stone, the Load
of the Eartli, that cover'd many Countries, and reach'd their arms
from the Oceán to the Black Sea ; This huge maſs of Stone is
foften'd and diſſolv'd, as a tender Cloud into rain. Here ſtood the
African Mountains, and Atlas with his top above the Clouds. There
Was frozen Caucaſus, and Taurus, and Imaus, and the Mountains of
Afià. And yonder towards the North ſtood the Riphaan Hills
,
cloath'd in Ice and Snow. All theſe are vaniſh’d, dropt away as the
Snow upon their heads: and ſwallowed up in a red Sea of fire.
Revel
. 15. 3i Great and marvellous are thy Works, Lord God Almighty: Fuft and true
are thy ways, Thoxe King of Saints. Hallelujah.
f
1
The
Concerning the Conflagration.
75
The CONCLUSION.
?
TF the Conflagration of the World be a reality, as, both by Scrip-
ture and Antiquity, we are aſſur’d it is ; If we be fully perſwa
ded and convinc'd of this: 'Tis a thing of that nature, that we can-
not ke p it long in our thoughts, without making ſome moral re-
flections upon it. 'Tis both great in it ſelf, and of univerſal concern
to all Mankind. Who can look upon ſuch an Object, A World iiz
Hames, without thinking with himſelf, Whether Thall I be in the
midſt of thelu tlumes, or no? What is my ſecurity that I Thall not
fall under this fiery vengeance, which is the wrath of an angry
God ? St. Peter, when he had deliver'd the doctrine of the Confia-
gration, makes this pious reflection upon it: Seeing then that all theſe 2 Epift. 3. 11
things ſhall be diſſolv'd, what manner of perſons ought you to be, in boly
converſation and godlineſs? The ſtrength of his argument depends
chieny upon what he had ſaid before in the 7th. Verſe, where he
told us, that the preſent Heavens and Earth were reſerv'd unto fire, a-
gainſt the Day of Judgment, and the perdition of irreligious men. We
mult avoid the crime then, if we would eſcape the puniſhment.
But this expreſſion of irreligious or ungodly men, is ſtill very general.
St. Paul, when he ſpeaks of this fiery indignation, and the Perſons
it is to fall upon, is more diſtinct in their characters. He ſeems to
mark out for this destruction, three ſorts of men chietiy, The Atheiſts,
Infidels, and the Tribe of Antichriſt. Theſe are his words : When the
2. Thell. 5.7,8.
Lord Jeſus ſhall be revealed from Heaven, with his mighty Angels, in fla-
ming fire, taking vengeance on them that know not God: and that obey
10t the Gospel of our Lord Jeſus Chriſt. Then as for Antichriſt and
his adherents, he ſays, in the 2d. Chapt. and 8th. Verſe, The Lord
Jhall conſume that Wicked one with the Spirit of his mouth, and ſhall de-
ftroy him with the brightneſs of his coming, or of his Preſence. Theſe,
you ſee, all refer to the faine time with St. Peter : namely, to the
coming of our Saviour, at the Conflagration; and three forts of
Perſons are cliaracteriz'd as his Enemies, and ſet out for deſtruction
at that time. Firſt, thoſe that know not God: that is, that acknow-
ledge not God, that will not own the Deity. Secondly, thoſe that
hearken not to the Goſpel; that is, that reject the Goſpel and Chri-
Stian Religion, when tliey are preach'd and inade known to them.
muſt not think that it is the poor barbarous and ignorant
Heathens, that ſcarce ever heard of God, or the Goſpel, that are
threaten’d with this fiery vengeance. No, 'tis the Heathens, that
live amongſt Chriſtians, thoſe that are Infidels, as to the exiſtence
of God, or the truth of Cliriſtian Religion, tho' they have had a
full manifeſtation of both. Theſe are properly the Adverſaries of
God and Chriſt. And ſuch adverſaries, St. Paul ſays in another
place, a fearful judgment, and fiery indignation shall devour: which Heb. 10:27
Mill refers to the ſame time, and the ſame Perſons we are ſpeaking
of. Then as to the third fórt of Men, Antichriſt and his Followers,
beſides this Text of St. Paul to the Theſſalonians, 'tis plain to me in
the
Tor
you
L 2
76
Book III.
The Theory of the Earth.
the Apocalypſe, that Myſtical Babylon is to be conſum’d by fire: and
the Beaſt and Falſe Prophet to be thrown into the Lake that burns with
fire and brimſtone : Which Lake is no where to be found till the Con-
flagration.
You ſee then for whom Tophet is prepar'd of old. For Atheiſts,
Infidels, and Antichriſtian Perſecutors. And they will have for their
Companions, the Devil and his Angels, the heads of the Apoftalie.
Theſe are all in open rebellion againſt God and Chriſt, and at defi
ance, as it were, with Heaven. Excepting Antichriſt, who is ra-
ther in a ſecret conſpiracy, than an open rebellion. For, under a
pretended Commiſſion from Jeſus Chriſt,He perſecutes his Servants,
diſhonours his Perſon, corrupts his Laws and his Government, and
makes War againſt his Saints. And this is a greater affront and pro-
vocation, if poſible, than a bare fac'd oppoſition would be.
There are other Men, beſides theſe, that are unacceptable to God:
All ſorts of ſinners and wicked perſons : but they are not fo
proper-
ly the Enemies of God, as theſe we have mention'd. An intemperate
Man is an Enemy to himſelf, and an injuft Man is an Enemy to his
Neighbour : But thoſe that deny God, or Chriſt, or perſecute their
Servants, are directly and immediately Enem es to God. And there
fore when the Lord comes in flames of fire to t. iumph over his Ene-
inies: To take vengeance upon all that are Rebels or Conſpirators
againſt him and his Chriſt: theſe Monſters of Men will be the
firſt and moſt exemplary Objects of the divine wrath and indig.
nation,
Toundertake to ſpeak to theſe three Orders of men, and convince
them of their errour, and the danger of it, would be too much for
the Concluſion of a ſhort Treatiſe. And as for the third ſort, the
Subjects of Antichriſt, none but the Learned amongſt them are al
low'd to be inquiſitive, or to read ſuch things as condemn their
Church, or the Governours of it. Therefore I do not expect that
this English Tranſlation ſhould fall into many of their hands. But
thoſe of them, that are pleas’d to look into the Latin, will find, in
the Concluſion of it, a full and fair warning to come out of Baby-
lon: which is there prov'd to be the Church of Rome. Then as to
thoſe that are Atheiſtically inclin’d, which I am willing to believe
are not many, I deſire them to conſider, How mean a thing it is, to
have hopes only in this Life: and how uneaſie a thing, to have no
thing but fears as to the Future. Thoſe, ſure, muſt be little nar-
row Souls, that can make themſelves a portion and a ſufficiency out
of what they enjoy here : That think of no more, that deſire no
For what is this life, but a circulation of little mean acti-
ons ? We lie down and riſe again: dreſs and undreſs: feed and wax
hungry: work, or play, and are weary: and then we lie down a-
gain, and the circle returns. We ſpend the day in trifles, and
when the Night comes, we throw our ſelves into the Bed of folly,
amongſt dreams and broken thoughts and wild imaginations. Our
reaſon lies aſleep by us; and we are, for the time, as arrant Brutes,
as thoſe that ſleep in the Stalls, or in the field. Are not the Capa:
cities of Man higher than theſe? and ought not his ambition and
expectations to be greater ? Let us be Adventurers for another
more,
World:
Concerning the Conflagration.
77
World: 'Tis, at leaſt, a fair and noble Chance : and there is no
thing in this, worth our thoughts or our paſſions. If we ſhould be
diſappointed, we are ſtill no worſe than the reſt of our fellow-mor-
tals : and if we ſucceed in our expectations, we are eternally
happy.
For my part, I cannot be perſwaded, that any man of Atheiſtical
inclinations can have a great and generous Soul. For there is no-
thing great in the World, if you take God out of it. Therefore
ſuch a perſon can have no great thought, can have no great aims,
or expectations, or deſigns : for all muſt lie within the compaſs of
this Life, and of this dull Body. Neither can he have any great in-
ſtincts or noble paſſions : For it he had, they would naturally excite
in him greater Ideas, inſpire him with higher notions, and open
the Scenes of the Intellectual World. Laſtly, He cannot have any
great ſence of Order, Wiſdom, Goodneſs, Providence, or any of
the Divine Perfections. And theſe are the greateſt things that can
enter into the thoughts of man, and that do moft enlarge and en-
noble his mind. And therefore I ſay again, That, He that is natu-
rally inclined to Atheiſm, being alſo naturally deftitute of all theſe,
muſt have a little and narrow ſoul.
But you'l ſay, it may be, This is to expoſtulate rather than to
prove: or to upbraid us with our make and temper, rather than
to convince us of an error in ſpeculation. 'Tis an error it may be
in practice, or in point of prudence; but we ſeek Truth, whether
it make for us or againſt us: convince us therefore by juſt reaſon-
ing and direct arguments, That there is a God, and then wee'l en-
deavour to correct theſe defects in our natural complexion. You
ſay well; and therefore I have endeavour'd to do this before, in
another part of this Theory, in the Second Book, ch. 11. Concern-
ing the Author of Nature : where you may ſee, that the Powers of
Nature, or of the Material World, cannot anſwer all the Phæno-
mena of the Univerſe, which are there repreſented. This you may
conſult at leiſure. But, in the mean time, 'tis a good perſwalive
why we ſhould not eaſily give our ſelves up to ſuch inclinations or
opinions, as liave neither generoſity, nor prudence on their lide.
And it cannot be amiſs, that theſe perſons Thould often take into
their thoughts, this laſt ſcene of things, The Gonflagration of the
World. Seeing if there be a God, they will certainly be found in
the number of his Enemies, and of thoſe that will have their porti-
on in the Lake that burns with Fire and Brimſtone.
The Third ſort of perſons that we are to ſpeak to, are the Incre-
dulous, or ſuch as do not believe the truth of Chriſtian Religion, tho
they believe there is a God. Theſe are commonly men of Wit and
Pleaſure, that have not patience enough to conſider, coolely and in
due order, the grounds upon which it appears, that Chriſtian Re-
ligion is from Heaven, and of Divine Authority. They ought, in
the firſt place, to examine matter of fact, and the Hiſtory of our
Saviour : That there was ſuch a Perſon, in the Reigns of Auguſtus
and Tiberius, that wrought ſuch and ſuch Miracles in Judaa; taught
ſuch a Doctrine: was Crucified at Jeruſalem : riſe froin the dead the
Third Day, and viſibly aſcended into Heaven. If theſe matters of
Fact
78
Book !!
The Theory of the Earth.
Fact be denied, then the controverſie turns only 10 an Hiftorical
queſtion, Whether the Evangelical Hiſtory be a fabulous, or true
Hiſtory: which it would not be proper to examine in this place.
But if matter of Fact recorded there
of Fact recorded there, and in the Acts
of the Apuliles, and the firſt Age; of Chriſtianity, be ac-
knowledged, as I ſuppoſe it is, then the Queſtion that remains
is this, II kether ſuch matter of Fact does not ſufficiently prove
thie divine authority of Jeſus Chriſt and of his Doctrine. We
ſuppoſe it polible , for a perſon to have ſuch Teſtimonials of
divine authority, as may be ſuficient to convince Mankind, or
the inore realisable part of Mankind ; And if that be poſſible,
what, pray, is a-wanting in the Teſtimonies of Jeſus Chriſt? The
Prophecies of the Old Teſtament bear witneſs to hiin : His Birth
was a miracle, and his Life a train of Miracles : not wrought out of
levity and vain oſtentation, but for uſeful and charitable purpoſes.
His Doctrine and Morality not only blameleſs, but Noble: deſigned
to remove out of the World the imperfect Religion of the Jers,
and the falſe Religion of the Gentiles : All Idolatry and Superſtition:
and thereby to improve Mankind, under a better and more perfect
diſpenſation. He gave an example of a ſpotleſs innocency in all his
Converſation, free from Vice or any evil; and liv'd in a neglect of
all the Pomp or Pleaſures of this Life, réferring his happineſs whol-
ly to another World. He Propheſied concerning his own Death,
and his Reſurrection: and concerning the deſtruction of Jeruſalem :
which all came to paſs in a ſignal manner. He alſo Propheſied of the
Succeſs of his Goſpel : which, after his Death, immediately took
root, and ſpread it ſelf every way throughout the World: mau-
gre all oppoſition or perſecution, from Jerrs or Heathens. It was
not ſupported by any temporal power for above three hundred
Years: nor were any arts us’d, or meaſures taken, according to hu-
mane prudence, for the conſervation of it. But, to omit other
things, That grand ar.icle of his Riſing from the Dead, Aſcending
viſibly into Heai en, and pouring down the miraculous Gifts of the
Holy Ghoſt,' (according as he had promis’d) upon his Apoſtles and
their followers : This alone is to ine a Demonſtration of his Divine
Authority. To conquer Death: To mount, like an Eagle, into the
Skies: and to inſpire his followers with inimitable gifts and facul-
ties, are things, without controverſie, beyond all humane power :
and may and ought be eſteemed ſure Credentials of a perſon ſent
from Heaven.
Froin theſe matters of Fact we have all poſſible aſſurance, that
Jeſus Chriſt was no Impoſtor or deluded perſon : (one of which
two Characters all unbelievers muſt fix upon him) but Commiſſion'd
by Heaven to introduce a New Religion: to reform the World , to
remove Judaiſın and Idolatry; The beloved Son of God, the great
Prophet of the later Ages, the True Meſſiah that was to come.
It may be, you will confeſs, that theſe are great arguments that
the Author of our Religion was a Divine Perſon, and had fuperna-
tural powers : but withal, that there are ſo many difficulties in
Chriſtian Religion, and ſo many things unintelligible, that a ratio-
szal man knows not how to believe it, tho' he be inclin'd to admire
the
Concerning the Conflagration.
170
-
1
}
the perſon of Jeſus Chriſt. I anſwer, If they be ſuch difficulties as
are inade only by the Schools and diſputacious Doctors, you are
not to trouble your ſelf about them, for they are of no Authority.
But if they be in the very words of Scripture, tlien 'uis either in
things practical, or in things meerly ſpeculative. Aš to the Rules of
Practice in Chriſtian Religion, I do not know any thing in Scripture,
obſcure or unintelligible. And as to Speculations, great diſcretion
and moderation is to be us'd in the conduct of them. If theſe mat-
ter's of Fact, which we have alledg'd, prove the Divinity of the
Revelation, keep cloſe to the Words of that Revelation, aſſerting
no more than it afferts, and you cannot err. But if you will expa-
tiate, and determine modes, and forms, and conſequences ; you may
eaſily be puzled by your own forwardneſs. For beſides ſome things that
are in their own nature, Infinite and Incomprehenſible, there are
many other things in Chriſtian Religion that are incompleatly re-
veald; the full knowledge whereof, it has pleaſed God to reſerve to
another life, and to give us only a ſummary account of them at pre-
ſent. We have ſo much deference for any Government, as not to
expect that all their Councels and ſecrets ſhould be made known
to us, nor to cenſure every action whoſe reaſons we do not fully coin-
prehend; much more in the Providential adıniniſtration of a World,
we muſt be content to know ſo much of the Councels of Heaven and
of ſupernatural Truths, as God has thought fit to reveal to us. And
if theſe Truths be no otherwiſe than in a general inanner, ſummari.
ly and incompleatly revealed in this life, as commonly they are, we
muſt not thereforé throw off the Governinent, or reject the whole
Diſpenſation: of whoſe Divine Authority we have otherways full
proof and ſatisfactory evidence. For this would be, To loſe the Sub-
ſtance in catching at a Shadow.
But Men that live continually in the noiſe of the World, amidit
buſineſs and pleaſures, their time is commonly ſhar'd betwixt thoſe
two. So that little or nothing is left for Meditation; at leaſt, not
enough for ſuch Meditations as require length, juſtneſs, and order.
They Thould rerire from the crowd for one month or two, to ſtudy
the truth of Chriſtian Religion, if they have any doubt of it. They
retire ſometimes to cure a Gout, or other Diſeaſes, and diet them
ſelves according to rule: but they will not be at that pains, to cure
a diſeaſe of the Mind, which is of far greater and more fatal conſe-
quence. If they periſh by their own negligence or obſtinacy, the
Phyſician is not to blame. Burning is the laſt remedy in ſome di-
ſtempers : and they would do well to remember, that the World
will fame about their heads one of theſe days: and whether they
be amongſt the Living, or amongſt the Dead, at that time, the
Apoſtle makes them a part of the Fewel, which that fiery venge-
ance will prey upon. Our Saviour hath been true to his Word hi-
therto: whether in his Promiſes, or in his Threatnings · He pro-
mis'd the Apoſtles to ſend down the Holy Ghoſt upon them after his
Aſcenſion, and that was fully accompliſh’d. He foretold and
threaten 'd the deſtruction of Ferufalem: and that came to paſs ac-
cordingly, ſoon after he had left the World. And he hath told us
alſo, that he will come again in the Clouds of Heaven, with power and Mite: 24. 307
t
1
1
great
i
80
Book III.
The Theory of the Earth.
Lion
l'et. 41.
8, 9.
6 25.32,05. great glory; and that will be to judge the World. When the Son of
Man ſhall come in his glory, and all the holy Angels with him, then shall
he lit upon the Throne of his glorg. And before him shall be gåther'd all
Nations, and he will ſeparate the good from the bad; and to the
wicked and unbelievers he will ſay, Depart froin me je curſed, into
everlaſting fire, prepured for the Devil and his Angels. This is the ſame
Coming, and the fame Fire, with that which we mention'd before
2 Thell
. 1. 7,
out of S.Paul. As you will plainly ſee, if you compare S. Mat
their's words with S. Paul's, which are theſe, When the Lord Jeſus
Shall be revealed from heaven, mith his mighty Angels: In framing fire,
taking vengeance on them that know not God, and that hearken nut to
the Gospel of our Lord Jeſus Chriſt. 11ho shall be puniſhed with ever.
laſting deftruction, from, or by the preſence of the Lord, and the glory of
his porrer. This, ine-thinks, ſhould be an awakening thought, ihat
there is ſuch a threatning upon record, (by one who never yet fail'd
in his word) againſt thoſe that do not believe his Teſtimony. Thoſe
that reject him now as a Dupe, or an Impoſtor, run a hazard of
ſeeing him, hereafter coming in the Clouds to be their Judge. And
it will be too late then to correct their errour, when the bright Ar-
mies of Angels fill the Air, and the Earth begins to melt
at the
Preſence of the Lord.
Thus much concerning thoſe three ranks of Men, whom the
Apoſtle S. Paul ſeems to point at principally, and condemn to the
flames. But; as I ſaid before, the reſt of ſinners and vitious Perſons
aniongſt the Profeſſors of Chriſtianity, tho' they are not ſo directly
the Enemies of God, as theſe are; yet being tranſgreſſors of his Law,
they muſt expect to be brought to Juſtice. In every well-governd
State, not only Traitors and Rebels, that offend more immediatcly
againſt the Perſon of the Prince, but all others, that notoriouſly
violate the Laws, are brought to condign puniſlıment, according to
the nature and degree of their crime. So in this caſe, The fire Mall
try every man's work, of what fort it is'Tis therefore the concern
of every man to reflect often upon that Day, and to conſider what
his fate and ſentence is likely to be, at that laſt Trial. The Feis
have a Tradition that Elias ſits in Heaven, and keeps a Regiſter of
all Mens actions, good or bad. He hath his Under Secretaries for
the ſeveral Nations of the World, that take minutes of all that paſſes:
and ſo hath the Hiſtory of every Man's life before him, ready to be
produc'd at the Day of Judgment. I will not vouch for the literal
truth of this, but it is true in effect. Every Man's fate (iall be de-
termind that Day, according to the hiſtory of his Life: according
to the works done in the Aeſh, whether good or bad. And there-
fore it ought to have as much infueuce upon us; as if every ſingle
action was forinally regiſter'd in Heaven.
If Men would learn to contemn this World, it would cure a
great many Vices at once. And, methinks, S. Peter's argument,
from the approaching diſſolution of all things, ſhould put us out of
conceit with ſuch periſhing vanities. Luſt and Ambition are the
two reigning Vices of great Men: and thoſe little fires might be
ſoon extinguiſh'd, if they would frequently and ſeriouſly meditate
on this laſt and Univerſal Fire; which will put an end to all Paſſions
and
Concerning the Conflagration.
81
and all Contentions. As to Ambition, the Heathens themſelves
made uſe of this argument, to abate and repreſs the vain affectation
of glory and greatneſs in this world. I told you before the leſſon
that was given to Scipio Africanus, by his Uncle's Ghoſt, upon this
Subject. And upon a like occaſion and conſideration, Cæfar hath a
leſſon given him by Lucan, after the Battle of Pharſalia; where
Pompey loſt the day, and Rome its liberty. The Poet ſays, Cæfar took
pleaſure in looking upon the dead Bodies, and would not ſuffer
them to be buried, or, which was their manner of burying, to be
burnt. Whereupon he ſpeaks to him in theſe words:
Hos, Cæſar, populos fi nunc non ufſerit Ignis,
Uret cum Terris, uret cum gurgite Ponti.
Communis mundo fupereft Rogus, oſſibus afira
Miſturus. Quocunque Tuam Fortuna vocabit,
Hæ quoque eunt Anima ; non altiùs ibis in auras,
Non meliore loco Stygiâ ſub nocte jacebis.
Libera fortuna Mors eſt: Capit omnia Tellus
Quæ genuit ; Cælo tegitur Qui non habet urnam.
Cxfar,
If nor theſe Bodies want their pile and urni,
At laſt, with the whole Globe, they're ſure to burn.
The World expects one general Fire: and Thou
Muſt go where theſe poor Souls are wand'ring norr.
Thou'l reach no higher, in th’ Ethereal Plain,
Nor 'mongst the Shades a better place obtain.
Death levels all : And He that has 1100 room
To make a Grave, Heaven's Vault shall be his Toms.
Theſe are inortifying thoughts to ambitious Spirits. And ſurely
our own Mortality, and the Mortality of the World it ſelf, may be
enough to convince all conſidering Men, That, l'anity of l'anities, all
is wanity under the Sun: any otherwiſe than as they relate to a bet-
ter Life.
1
i
.
F 1 N I S.
M
THE
1
11
mano
THE
1
I
THEORY
OF THE
1
E A R T H
1
Containing an Account
OF THE
Original of the Earth,
AND OF ALL THE
GENERAL CHANGES
Which it hath already undergone,
OR
IS TO UNDERGO
Till the ConsUMMATION of all Things.
THE FOURTH BOOK,
Concerning the New Heavens and New EARTH,
AND
Concerning the Consummation of all Things.
LONDON,
Printed by R. N. for Walter Kettilby, at the Biſhop's-
Head in S. Paul's Church-Yard, 1697.
j
PREF A CE
TO THE
READER
Y
.
1
Ou ſee it is ſtill my lot, to travel into New Worlds : having
never found any great ſatisfaction in this
. As an active people
leaves their habitations in a barren foil, to try if they can make
their fortune better elſewhere. I forft bookt backmards, and waded through
the Deluge, into the Primæval World: to ſee how they liv’d there, and
horp Nature ſtood in that original conftitution. Nom I am going forwards,
to viem the New Heavens and New Earth, that will be after the Confla-
gration. But, Gentle Reader, let me not take you any further, if you
be weary. I do not love a querulous Companion. Unlefs your Genius there-
fore prefs you forwards, chuſe rather to reſt here, and bé content mith th.it
part of the Theory which you have ſeen already. Is it not fair, to have fol.
lored Nature ſo far as to have ſeen her trice in her ruins? Why Should
Doe fitill purſue her, even after death and diſſolution, into dark and remote
Futurities? To whom therefore ſuch diſquiſitions feem needlefs, or over-cu-
Tious, let them reſt here; and leave the remainder of this Work, which is
kind of PROPHECY concerning the STATE of things after the
Conflagration, to thoſe that are of a diſpoſition ſuited to ſuch ſtudies and
enquiries.
Not that any part of this Theory requires much Learning, Art, or Sci-
ence, to be Maſter of it; But a love and thirſt after Truth, freedom of Judg-
ment, and a reſignation of our Underſtandings to clear Evidence, let it car-
ry us which may it will. An honeſt Engliſh Reader that looks only at the
Sence as it lies before him, and neither conſiders 120r cares whether it be
New or old, so it be true, may be a more competent Judge than a great
Scholar full of his own Notions and puffd up with the opinion of his mighty
knowledge.
For ſuch men think they cannot in honour own any thing to be
true, which they did not know before. To be taught any new knowledge,
is to confeſs their former ignorance; and that leſſens them in their own opi-
nion, and, as they think, in the opinion of the World; urhich are both
uneaſie refleEtions to them. Neither muſt we depend upon age only for
Soundneſs of Fudgment. Men in diſcovering and owning truth feldom
change their Opinions after threeſcore : eſpecially if they be leading Opini-
0125. It is then too late, me think, to begin the World again ; and as me
grozr old, the Heart contracts, and cannot open mide enough to take in a
great thought.
The Spheres of mens Underſtandings are as different, as Proſpects upon
the Earth. Some stand upon a Rock or a Mountain, and fee far round a-
bout ; Otlxers are in an hollore, or in a Cave, and have no prospect at all.
Some men conſider nothing but what is preſent to their Sentés : Others ex
tend
.
THE PREFACE.
1
before 1
tend their thoughts both to wb.it is paſt and what is future. And jeti!
faireſt proſpect in this Life is not to be compar'd to the leaſt we shall hive
in another. Our clearest d.zy here, is miſty and hazy : Ile jee not far, und
what we do sië is in a bad light. But when we have got better Bodies in
the firſt Resurrection, whercof are are going to Trout; better Senges and .
better l! nderſt.inding, a clever light and why higher ſtation, our Horizu2
will be enl.ırg'd curry may, both us to the Natural Iförld and as to the In-
tellectuel.
Two of the greateſt Speculations that we are capable of in this Life, are,
in my Opinion, The REVOLUTION OF WORLDS, and the REIO
LUTION OF SOULS ; one for the Material World, and the other for
the Intelle&tual. Toward the former of theſe Our Thecry is an Eſay: and
in this our Planet, (arhich I hope to conduct into a Fix'd Star,
have done with it) we give an inſtance of what may be in other Planets.
'Tis true, we took our viſe 10 higher than the Chaos : becauſe that was a
known principle, and we were not vrilling to amuſe the Reader with too
many ſtrange Stories: as that, I am ſure, would have been thought one,
TO HAVĚ brought this Earth from a Fix'd Star, and then carried it
up
again into the fame Sphere. Il'hich yet I believe, is the true circle of Na-
tural Providence.
As to the Revolution of Souls, the footſteps of that Speculation are
anore obſcure than of the former. For tho' me are aſſurd by Scripture,
that all good Souls will at length have Celeſtial Bodies; yet, that this is
a returning to a Primitive State, or to urhat they had at their firſt Crea-
ti011
, that, Scripture has not acquainted us with. It tells us indeed that
Angels fell from their Primitive Celeſtial Glory ;, and conſequently me
might be capable of a lapſe as well as they, if we had been in that high
condition with them. But thiit me ever were there, is not declared to us by
anly revelation. Reafun and Morality would indeed fuggeſt to us, that an
innocent Soul, freſh and pure from the hands of its Maker, could not be
immediately caſt into Priſon, before it had, by any act of its own Will, or
any uſe of its own Underſtanding, committed either error or fin. I call this
Body a Priſon, both beciinje it is a confinement and reſtraint upon our beſt
Faculties and Gupacities, and is alſo the ſeat of diſeaſes and loathſoonefs ;
and, as priſons uſe to do, cummonly tends more to debauch mens Natures,
thar to improve them.
But tho? we cannot certainly tell under what circumſtances humane
Souls mere plac'd at firſt, yet all Antiquity agrees, Oriental and Occi-
dental, concerning their pre exiſtence in general, in reſpect of theſe mor-
tal Bodies. And inr Siviour never reproaches or corrects the Jews, when
they Speak upon that ſuppoſition, Luk. 9. 18, 19. Joh.9. 2. Beſides, it
Joh. 3. 13. & ſeems to me beyond all controverſie, that the Soul of the Meſſiah did exift
9.38. & 62. before the Incarnation, and voluntarily deſcended from Heaven to take up-
or it a Mortal Body. And tho’ it does not appear that all humane Souls
mere at firſt plac'd in Glory, yet, from the example of our Saviour, we ſee
Something greater in them : Namely, a capacity to be united to the God-
head. Ånd mhat is poſſible to one, is poſſible to more. But theſe thoughts
are too high for us : irhile we find our ſelves united to nothing, but di ſesſid
bodies and houſes of clay.
The greateſt fault we can commit in ſuch Speculations, is to be cver.pof.
tive and Dogmatical
. To be inquiſitive into the ways of Providence and the
& 17.3.
1
I
I
1
I
Orosh
THE PRE FACE.
on 3
works of God, is ſo far from being a fault, that it is our greateſt perfe&ti-
We cultivate the higheſt principles and beſt inclinations of our Nature;
while we are thus emplıy'd : and 'tis littleneſs or ſecularity of Spirit, that
is the greateſt Enemy to Contemplation. Thoſe that would have a true co12-
tempt of this World, muſt ſuffer the Soul to be ſometimes upon the Wing,
and to raiſe her ſelf above the ſight of this little dark Point, mhich we nom
inhabit. Give her a large and free profpe&t of the immenſity of God's works,
and of his ine xhauſted miſdom and goodneſs, if you would make her Great
and Good. As the warm Philoſopher Says,
Give me a Soul ſo great, ſo high,
Let her dimenſions ſtretch the Skie :
That comprehends within a thought,
The whole extent 'twixt God and Nought.
And from the World's firſt birth and date,
Its Life and Death can calculate :
With all th’adventures that ſhall paſs,
To ev'ry Atome of the Maſs.
But let Her be as GOOD as GREAT,
Her higheſt Throne a Mercy-Seat.
Soft and diſſolving like a Cloud,
Loling her ſelf in doing good.
A Cloud that leaves its place above,
Rather than dry, and uſeleſs move :
Falls in a ſhowre upon the Earth,
And gives ten thouſand Seeds a birth.
Hangs on the Flow’rs, and infant Plants,
Sucks not their Sweets, but feeds their Wants.
So let this mighty Mind diffuſe
All that's her own to others uſe;
And free from private ends, retain
Nothing of SELF, but a bare Name:
THE
89
THE
THE ORY
OF THE
ht
EARTH H.
Book IV.
Concerning the new Heavens and new Earth,
A N D
Concerning the Conſummation of all things.
C H A P. 1.
THE INTRODVCTION.
That the World will not be annihilated in the laſt Fire.
That we are to expe&t, according to Scripture and the
Chriſtian Doctrine, New Heavens and a Nepp Earth,
when theſe are diſolv'd or burnt up.
NN
QE are now fo far advanc'd in the Theory of the
Earth, as to have ſeen the End of Two Worlds:
One deſtroy'd by Water, and another by Fire. It
remains only to conſider, whether we be yet come
to the final period of Nature: The laſt Scene of
all things, and conſequently the utmoſt bound of
our enquiries. Or, whether Providence, which is
inexhauſte: in Wiſdoin and Goodneſs, will raiſe up, from this
dead Maſs, New Heavens and a New Earth. Another habitable
World, better and more perfect than that which was deſtroyed.
That, as the firſt World began with a Paradiſe, and a ſtate of Inno-
cency, ſo the laſt may be a kind of Renovation of that happy ſtate;
whoſe Inhabitants ſhall not die, but be tranſlated to a bleſſed Im
inortality
N
I know
go
The Theory of the Earth Book IV
I know 'tis the opinion of ſome, that this world will be anni.
hilated, or reduc'd to nothing, at the Conflagration : and that would
put an end to all further enquiries. But whence do they learn this
:
from Scripture, or Reaſon, or their own imagination? What iin-
ſance or example can they give us, of this they call Annihilation or
what place of Scripture can they produce, that ſays the World, in
the laſt Fire, Thall be reduc'd to nothing? If they have neither in
ſtance, nor proof of what thty affirm, 'tis an empty Imagination of
their own: neither agreeable to Philoſophy, nor Divinity. Firo
does not conſume any ſubſtance: It changes ihe form and qualities
of it, but the matter remains. And if the deſign had been Anni-
bilation, the employing of fire would have been of no uſe or effect.
For ſmoak and aihes are at as great a diſtance from Nothing, as the
bodies themſelves out of which they are made. But theſe Authors
ſeem to have but a ſinall tincture of Philoſophy, and therefore it
will be more proper to confute their opinion from the words of Scri-
pture; which hath left us ſufficient evidence, that another World
will ſucceed after the Conflagration of that we now inhabit.
The Prophets, both of the Old and New Teſtament, have left
us their predictions concerning New Heavens and a Nem Earth. So
ſays the Prophet Iſaiah, ch. 65. 17. Behold I create Nero Heavens and
a Nell Earth, and the former ſhall not be remeinbred, or come into mind.
As not worthy our thoughts, in compariſon of thoſe that will ariſe
when theſe paſs away. So the Prophet S. Juhmn, in his Apocalypſe
,
when he was come to the End of this World, ſays, and I a nene
heaven and a nem earth. For the firyt heaven and the firſt earth were
paſſed away, and there was no more Sea. Where he does not only
give us an account of a New Heaven and á New Earth, in general :
but alſo gives a diſtinctive cliaracter of the Nem Earth : that it hall
have 110 Sea., And in the 5th. ver. He that fat ujón the Throne,
fays, Behold I inake all things New; which, conſider'd with the an.
piederts and confequents, cannot be othertvile underſtood than of a
New word.
But fome Men make evaſions here as to the words of the Pro-
phets, and ſay tlicy are to be underſtood in a figurate and allegorical
ſence : and to be applyel to the times of the Goſpel, either at firſt
or totvards the latter end of the World. So as this Nem Heaven
and Nert Edrth ſignifię only a great change in the moral World. But
How can that be, ſeeing S. John places thein after the end of the
World? And the Prophet ſaiah connects ſuch things with his
New Heavens and New Earth, as are not competible to the preſent
ftate of Nature ? However to avoid all ſhuffling and tergiver ſation
Hi this poitit; let us appeal to S. Peter, who uſes a plain literal ſtyle
,
and diſcourſe's down-right concerning the Natural World. In his
zd. Epift
. aitdi zd. Chap. when he had foretold and explain'd the Fu-
tuc Conflagration, he adds, But we expect New Heavens and a Nem
Farth according to his promiſes. Theſe Promiles were made by the
Prophets?" and this gives us full authority to interpret their Nero
Henvers arid New Earth to be after the Conflagration. S. Peter, wher
he had deſcrib'd the Dillolution of the World in the laſt Fire, in
full and emphatical terins, as the palling aray of the Heavens with a
Apoc. 21. 1
ch.65.
noiſe :
Chap.I. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
91
3
Jeu
1
wife: the melting of the Ehments, and burning up all the works of the
Entb: he fuboyns, Nevertheless, notwithſtanding this total diſſo.
lution of the preſent World, We, according to his promiſes, look for
den bestens and I nem earth: wherein dwelleth Righteouſneſs
. As if
the Apoſtle thould have ſaid, Notwithſtanding this ſtrange and vio-
kent diffolution of the prefent Heavens and Earth, which I have de-
fcibd to you, we do not at all diſtruſt God's Promiſes concerit-
ing New Heavens and a New Earth, that are to ſucceed theſe, and
to be the ſeat of the Righteous.
Here's no room for Allegories or allegorical expoſitions: unleſs
will make the Condagration of the World an Allegory. For,
as Heaters and Earth were deſtroy'd, fo Heavens and Earth are re-
lored: and if in the firſt place you underſtand the natural inaterial
World, you muſt alſo underſtand it in the ſecond place: They are
boch Allegories, or neither. But to make the Conflagration an Al-
itgory, is not only to contradict S. Peter, but all Antiquity, Sacred
or Prophane. And I deſire no more aſſurance that we ſhall have
New Heavens and a New Earth, in a literal Sence, than we have
that the preſent Heavens and Earth ſhall be deſtroyed in a literal
Serice, and by material Fire. Let it therefore reſt upon that iſſue as
to this firſt evidence and argument from Scripture.
Some will fancy, it may be, that we ſhall have New Heavens and
Farth, and yet that theſe ſhall be annihilated; They would have
Theſa first reduc'd to nothing, and then others created, ſpick and
fpan New, out of nothing. But why ſo, pray, what's the humour
of that? Left Omnipotency ſhould want employment, you would
have it do, and undo, and do again. As if new-inade Matter, like
new Clothes, or new Furniture, had a better Gloſs, and was more
creditable. Matter never wears: as fine Gold, melt it down ne-
per ſo often, it loſes nothing of its quantity. The ſubſtance of the
World is the fame, burnt or unburnt: ard is of the fame Value
and Virtue, New or Old: and we muſt not multiply the actions of
Omnipotency without neceſſity. God does not make, or unmake
things, to try experiments: He knows before hand the utmoſt ca-
jucities of every thing, and does no vain or ſuperfluous work. Such
inaginations as theſe proceed only from want of true Philoſophy,
or the true knowledge of the Nature of God and of his Works;
which ſhould always be carefully attended to, in ſuch Speculations as
concern the Natural World. But to proceed in our Subject
.
If they ſuppoſe part of the World to be annihilated, and to con-
tinue ſo, they Philofophize ſtill worſe and worſe. How high ſhall
this Annihilation reach? Shall the Sun, Moon, and Stars be re-
duc'd to nothing but what have They done, that they ſhould uri-
dergo ſo hard a fate? muſt they be turn'd out of Being for our
Qaults? The whole inaterial Univerſe will not be Annihilated at
this bout, for we are to have Bodies after the Reſurrection, and to
live in Heaven. How much of the Univerſe then will you leave
or low ſhall it ſubliſt with this great l'acuum in the heart
of it? This Miell of a World is but the fiction of an empty Brain:
for God and Nature in their works, never admit of ſuch gaping
vacities and emptineſſes.
If
Standing:
N
92 The Theory of the Earth. Book IV.
Ver. 21)
Mart. 19.
If we conſult Scripture again, we ſhall find that that makes men-
tion of a Reſtitution and Reviviſcency of all things: At the End of
A. 3: the World, or at the Coming of our Saviour. S. Peter, whoſe do
ctrine we have hitherto followed, in his Sermon to the Jews after
our Saviour's Aſcenſion, tells them that He will come again, and
that there will be then a Reſtitution of all things: ſuch as was pro-
miſed by the Prophets. The Heavens, ſays he, muſt receive him un-
til the time of Reſtitution of all things; which God hath Spoken by the
mouth of his holy Prophets, ſince the world began. If we compare this
paſſage of S. Peter's, with that which we alledged before out of his
ſecond Epiſtle, it can ſcarce be doubted but that he refers to the
ſame Proiniſes in both places : and what he there calls a New Heaven
and a New Earth, he calls here a Reſtitution of all things. For the
Heavens and the Earth comprehend all, and both theſe are but
different phraſes for the Renovation of the World. This gives us
alſo light how to underſtand what our Saviour calls the Regenera-
28, 29. tion or Reviviſcency, when he ſhall ſit upon his Throne of Glory
,
and will reward his followers an hundred fold, for all their Lories
in this World: Beſides Everlaſting Life as the Crown of all. !
know, in our Engliſh Tranſlation, we ſeparate the Regeneration from
fitting upon his Throne: but without any warrant from the Origi-
nal. And ſeeing our Saviour ſpeaks here of Bodily goods, and ſeems
to diſtinguiſh them from everlaſting life, which is to be the final
reward of his Followers, This Regeneration ſeems to belong to his
Second Coming, when the World ſhall be renew'd or regenerated:
and the Righteous ſhall poſſeſs the Earth.
Other places of Scripture that foretel the fate of this Material
World, repreſent it always as a Change, not as an Annihilation.
S. Paul ſays, The Figure of this World paſſes away: i Cor. 7. 31. The
form, faihion and diſpoſition of its parts: But the ſubſtance ſtill re-
mains. As a Body that is melted down and diſſolv'd, the Form pe-
Pfal. 102:26. riſhes, but the matter is not deſtroy’d. And the Pfaliniſt ſays, The
Heavens and the Earth ſhall be chang’d: which anſwers to this
Transformation we ſpeak of. The ſame Apoſtle, in the Eighth
L'e. 21,22, 23, Chapter to the Romans, ſhows alſo that this change ſhall be, and Thall
24. be for the better: and calls it a Deliverance of the Creation frori
vanity and corruption: and a participation of the glorious liberty of
the Children of God. Being a ſort of Redemption, as they have a Re-
demption of their Bodies.
But, ſeeing the Renovation of the World is a Doctrine generally
receiv’d, both by ancient and modern Authors, as we Mall have
occaſion to ſhow hereafter: We need add no more, in this place
,
for confirmation of it. Some Men are willing to throw all things in-
to a ſtate of Nothing at the Conflagration, and bury them there
,
that they may not be oblig'd to give an account of that ſtate of things
,
that is to ſucceed it. Thoſe who think themſelves bound in 10
nour, to know every thing in Tlieology that is knowable : and
find it uneaſie to anſwer ſuch queſtions and ſpeculations, as would
ariſe upon their admitting a New World, think it more adviſeable
to ſtifle it in the birth, and foto bound all knowledge at the Con-
Nagration. But ſurely, ſo far as Reaſon or Scripture lead us, we
May
Chap.2. Concerning the New Heavens,&c. .
93
2
inay and ought to follow : otherwiſe we ſhould be ungrateful to
Providence, that ſent us thoſe Guides. Provided, we be always du-
y consible of our own weakneſs: and, according to the difficulty of
che ſubject, and the meaſure of light that falls upon it, proceed
with that modeſty and ingenuity, that becomes ſuch fallible enqui-
rers after Truth, as we are. And this rule I deſire to preſcribe to
my ſelf, as in all other Writings, ſo eſpecially in this: where, tho’
I look upon the principal Concluſions as fully prov'd, there are ſe.
veral particulars, that are rather propos’d to exainination, than po.
ſtively aſſerted.
CHAP. II.
The Birth of the new Heavens and the new Earth, from
the ſecond Chaos, or the remains of the old World. The
form, order, and qualities of the new Earth, according to
Reaſon and Scripture.
Aving prov'd from Scripture, that we are to expect Nero Heda
11 vens, and a New Earth, after the Confiagration ; it would be
Tome pleaſure and ſatisfaction to ſee how this new Frame will ariſe :
and what foundation there is in Nature for the accompliſhment of
theſe promiſes. For, tho’the Divine Power be not bound to all the
Laws of Nature, but may diſpence with them when there is a ne-
ceſſity; yet it is an eaſe to us in our belief, when we ſee them both
conſpire in the ſame effect. And in order to this, we muſt conſider
in what poſture we left the demoliſh'd World: what hopes there is
of a Reſtauration. And we are not to be diſcourag'd, becauſe we ſee
things at preſent wrapt up in a confus’d Maſs : for, according to the
methods of Nature and Providence, in that dark Womb uſually,
are the ſeeds and rudiments of an Embryo.World.
Neither is there, poſibly, ſo great a confuſion in this Mafs, as we
imagine. The Heart and interiour Body of the Earth is ſtill entire:
and that part of it that is conſum'd by the fire, will be divided, of
its own accord, into two Regions. What is diffolv'd and melted,
being the hcavieſt, will deſcend as low as it can: and cover and en-
cloſe the kernel of the Earth round about, as a molten Sea or Abyſs:
according as is explain’d and ſet down in the precedent Book. But
what is more light and volatile, will float in the Air: as fumes,
ſmoak, exhalations, vapours of Water, and whatſoever terreſtrial
parts can be elevated and ſupported by the ſtrength of fire. Theſe
all mingled together, of different ſizes, figures, and motions, will
conſtitute an opake Cloud, or thick region of darkneſs round the
Earth: So as the Globe of the Earth, with its Atmoſphere, after the
Conflagration is finiſh’d, will ſtand much what in the form repre.
fented in this Scheme.
Now
Tlse Thery of the Earth.
Book IV.
1
TS
..
A
A
1
+
Now as to the lower of theſe two regions, the region of melted
matter, A. A. We thall have little occaſion to take notice of it: ſee-
ing it will contribute nothing to the formation of the new World.
But the upper region, or all above that Orb of fire, is the true
draught of a Chaos : or a mixture and confuſion of all the Ele-
ments, without order or diſtinction. Here are particles of Earth,
and of Air, and of Water, all promiſcuouſly jumbled together, by
the force and agitation of the fire. But when that force ceaſes, and
every one is left to its own inclination, they will, according to their
different degrees of gravity, ſeparate and ſort themſelves after this
manner. Firſt, the heavieſt and groſſeft parts of the Earth will
fubſide ; then the watery parts will follow ; then a lighter ſort of
Earth ; which will ſtop and reſt upon the Surface of the Water,
and compoſe there a thin filin or mernbrane; this membrane op
tender Orb is the firſt rudiment or foundation of a new liabitable
Earth. For according as terreftrial parts fall upon it, from all the
regions
Chap.2. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
95
regions and heighths of the Atmoſphere, or of the Chaos, this Orb
will grow more firm, ſtrong, and immoveable : able to ſupport it
ſelf and Inhabitants too. And having in it all the Principles of a
fruitful Soil, whether for the production of Plants or of Animals,
it will want no property or character of an habitable Earth. And
particularly, will become ſuch an Earth, and of ſuch a form, as the
firit Paradiſiacal Earth was. Which hath been fully deſcrib'd in the
firſt and ſecond Books of this Theory.
There is no occaſion of examining more accurately the formation
of this Second Earth, feeing it is ſo much the ſame with that of the
Firſt; which is fer down fully and diſtinctly in the Fifth Chapter of
the firſt Book of this Theory. Nature here repeats the ſame work,
and in the ſame method ; only the materials are now a little more
retin'd and purg'd by the fire. They both riſe out of a Chaos, and
That, in effect, the ſame in both caſes; For though in forming the
firſt Earth, I ſuppos'd the Chaos or conſus’d Maſs to reach down
to the Center, I did that only for the eaſe of our imagination ; that
to the whole Maſs inight appear more ſimple and uniform. But in
reality, that Chaos had a ſolid kernel of Earth within, as this hath
and that inatter which fluctuated above in the regions of the Air,
was the true Chaos, whoſe parts, wlien they came to a ſeparation,
made the ſeveral Elements, and the form of an habitable Earth be-
twixt the Air and Water. This Chaos upon ſeparation, will fall
into the ſame form and Elements: and ſo in like manner create or
conſtitute a ſecond Paradiſiacal World.
I ſay a Paradiſiacal World: for it appears plainly, that this new-
form’d Earth muſt agree with that Primigenial Earth, in the two
principal and fundamental properties. Firſt, It is of an even, en-
tire, uniform and regular Surface, without Mountains or Sea. Se-
condly, That it hath a ſtraight and regular ſituation to the Sun, and
the Axis of the Ecliptick. From the inanner of its formation, it ap-
pears inanifeſtly, that it muſt be of an even and regular Surface.
For the Orb of liquid fire, upon which the firſt deſcent was made,
being ſimooth and uniform every where, the matter that fell upon
it would take the ſame forin and mould. And ſo the ſecond of
third Region, that were ſuperinduc'd, would ſtill imitate the faſhi-
on of the firſt: there being no cauſe or occaſion of any inequality.
Then as to the ſituation of its Axis, this uniformity of figure would
determine the center of its gravity to be exactly in the middle, and
conſequently there would be no inclination of one Pole more than
another to the general center of its inotion ; But, upon a free li-
bration in the liquid Air, its Axis would lie parallel with the Axis
of the Ecliptick wliere it moves. But theſe things having been de-
duc'd more fully in the ſecond Book about Paradiſe and the Primi-
genial Earth, they need no further explication in this place.
If Scripture had left us ſeveral diſtinct Characters of the Nera
Heavens, and the New Earth, we might, by compare with thoſe,
have made a full proof of our Hypotheſis
. One indeed St. John hath
left us in very expreſs terms, There was no Sea there, He fáys. His
words are theſe: And I ſaw a New Heaven, and a New Earth: for the
first Heaver and the firſt Earth were paſſed away; AND THER 5
WAS
96
Book IV.
The Theory of the Earth.
Ch.65.17, 18.
WAS NO MORE SE H. This character is very particular, and
you ſee it exactly anſwers to our Hypothelis : for in the new-forin'd
Earth, the Sea is cover'd and inconſpicuous: being an Abyſs,not a Sca;
and wholly lodg’d in the Womb of the Earth. And this one Cha-
racter, being inexplicable upon any other ſuppoſition, and very dif .
ferent from the preſent Earth, makes it a ſtrong preſumption that
we have hit upon the true model of the New Heavens and New
Earth which S. John ſaw.
To this light of the New Heavens and New Earth, S. John imme-
diately ſubjoyns the light of the New Jeruſalem, ver. 2. as being con-
temporary, and in ſome reſpects the ſame thing. 'Tis true, the
Characters of the New Jeruſalem in theſe two laſt Chapters of the
Apocalypſe, are very hard to be underſtood : ſome of them being in-
competible to a Terreſtrial ſtate, and ſome of them to a Celeſtial; fo
as it ſeems to me very reaſonable to ſuppoſe, that the New Jeru-
falem ſpoken of by S. John, is twofold: That which he ſaw himſelf,
ver. 2. and that which the Angel ſhewed him afterwards, der. 9.
For I do not ſee what need there was of an Angel, and of taking him
up
into great and high mountain, only to ſhew him that which he had
ſeen before,at the foot of the Mountain. But however that be,we are
to conlider in this place the Terreſtrial New Jeruſalem only, or that
which is in the New Heavens and New Earth. And as St. John hatlı
joyned theſe two together, ſo the Prophet Iſaiah had done the ſame
thing before; when he had promiſed New Heavens and a New Earth,
he calls them, under ariother name, Jeruſalem : and they botli uſe
the ſame character in effect, in the deſcription of their Jeruſalem.
Iſaiah ſays, And I will rejoyce in Jeruſalem, and joy in my people : and
the voice of weeping ſhall be no more heard in her, izor the voice of crying.
Aſoc. 21. 3, 4. S. John fays alſo in his Jeruſalemn, God Mall drell with thim, and
they hall be his people : And he Mall wipe away all tears from their
and there Mall be no more death, neither forroir, nor crying, neither shall
there be any more pain. Now in both theſe Prophets, when they
treat upon this ſubject, we find they make frequent alluſions to Pa-
radiſe and a Paradiſiacal ſtate ; ſo as that may be juſtly taken as a
Scripture-Character of the New Heavens and the New Earth. The
Prophet Iſaiah ſeeins plainly to point at a Paradiſiacal ſtate,
throughout that Chapter, by an univerſal innocency, and harmleſ-
neſs of animals; and peace, plenty, health, longævity or immorta-
lity of the inhabitants. S. John alſo hath ſeveral alluſions to Paradiſe,
Ch. 21. 6 ch. in thoſe two Chapters wherс he deſcribes the New Jeruſalem. And
in his diſcourſe to the ſeven Churches, in one place (ch. 2. 7.) To
him that overcometh is promiſed to eat of the tree of life, which is in the
midſt of the Paradiſe of God. And in another place (ch. 3. 1 2.) to him
that overcometh is promiſed, to have the name of the Nem Jeruſalem
writ upon him. Theſe I take to be the ſame thing, and the ſame re-
ward of Chriſtian Victors, The New Jerufalem or the New Heavens
and New Earth, and the Paradiſe of God. Now this being the ge.
neral Character of the New Earth, That it is Paradiſiacal : and the
particular Character, That it hath no Se1: and both theſe agreeing
with our Hypotheſis, as apparently deducible from thoſe principles
and that manner of its formation which we have ſet down: We
T'ey. 19.
eyes:
cannot
Chap.2. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
97
I
1
}
cannot but allow, that the Holy Scriptures and the Natural Theory
agree in their Teſtimony, as to the conditions and properties of the
Vew Heavens and New Earth.
From what hath been ſaid in this and the precedent Chapter, it
will not be hard to interpret what S. Paul meant by his Habitable Thoixemellerin
Earth to come : which is to be ſubjected to our Saviour, and not to i uimace
the Angels. In the ſecond chapter to the Hebrers, ver.s. he ſays, mutes and no
For unto the Angels hath he not put in ſubjection the IFORLD TO Iſa. 9.6.
COME: So we read it, but, according to the ſtricteſt and plaineſt
Tranſlation, it thould be the habitable Earth to come. Now. what
Earth is this, where our Saviour is abſolute Soveraign : and where
the Government is neither Huinane, nor Angelical, but peculiarly
Theocratical? In the frſt place, this cannot be the preſent World
or the preſent Earih, becaule the Apoſtle calls it Future, or the Earth
to come. Nor can it be underſtood of the days of the Goſpel: fee-
ing the Apoſtle acknowledges, ver. 8. That this ſubjection, whereof
he ſpeaks, is not yet made. And ſeeing Antichriſt will not finally
be deſtroy'd till the apppearance of our Saviour, (2 Theſſ. 2.8.) nor
Satan bound, while Antichriſt is in power: during the reign of
theſe two, (who are the Rulers of the darkneſs of the World) our Ephef.6. 12.
Saviour cannot properly be ſaid to begin his reign here. 'Tis true,
He exerciſes his Providence over his Church, and ſecures it from be-
ing deſtroy'd : He can, by a power paramount, ſtop the rage either
of Satan or Antichriſt; Hitherto Shall yću go and no further. As fome-
times when he was upon Earth, he exerted a Divine Power, which
yet did not deſtroy his ſtate of Humiliation; ſo he interpoſes now
when he thinks fit, but he does not finally take the power out of
the hands of his Enemies, nor out of the hands of the Kings of the
Earth. The Kingdom is not deliver'd up to him, and all dominion,
and power ; That all Tongues and Nations ſhould ſirve him. For S.Paul
ch.7.13
can inean 110 leſs in this place than that Kingdom in Daniel : See-
ing he calls it putting all things in ſubječtion under his feet, and ſays Hebr. 2. 8.
that it is not yet done. Upon this account alſo, as well as others, our
Saviour might truly ſay to Pil.ite ( foh. 18. 36.) my kingdom is not of
ibis Vorld. And to his Diſciples, The Son of man came not to be mi-
niſtred unto, but to miniſter, Mitt. 20. 28. When he comes to re-
ceive his Kingdom, he comes in the clouds of Heaven (Dan. 7. 13,
14.) not in the womb of a Virgin. He comes with the equipage of
a King and Conqueror ; with thouſands and ten thouſands of Angels:
not in the form of a Servant, or of a weak Infant; as he did at his
firſt coming.
I allow the phraſe aiwy podaw, or in the Hebrew X29 Dhry,
The World to come, is ſometimes us'd in a large ſence, as compre.
hending all the days of the Meſſiah, whether at his Firſt or Second
Coming, ( for theſe two Comings are often undiſtinguiſh'd in Scri-
pture ) and reſpect the Moral World as well as the Natural. But
the word oixdušín, Orbis habitabilis, which S. Paul here uſes, does
primarily ſignifie the Natural World, or the Habitable Earth, in
the
proper uſe of the word amongſt the Greeks, and frequently in
Scripture, Luke 4.5. and 21. 26. Rom. 10. 18. Heb. 1.6. Apoc. 3. 10.
Neither do we here exclude the Moral World, or the Inhabitants of
the
1
25,26.
98
Book IV.
The Theory of the Earth.
the Earth, but rather neceſſarily include them. Both the Natural
and Moral World to come, will be the ſeat and ſubject of our Saviours
Kingdom and Empire, in a peculiar manner. But when you un-
derſtand nothing by this plırale but the preſent moral World, it nei
ther anſwers the proper ſignification of Ménaoca nor of oix sufin, of
the firſt or ſecond part of the expreſſion; And tho ſuch like phraſes
inay be us’d for the Diſpenſation of the Meſſiah in oppoſition to that
of the Law, yet the height of that diſtinction or oppoſition, and
the fulfilling of the expreſſion, depends upon the ſecond coming of our
Saviour ; and upon the Future Earth or 'habitable World, where he
ſhall Reign, and which does peculiarly belong to Him and His
Saints.
Neitlier can this world to come, or this Earth to come, be under-
ſtood of the Kingdom of Heaven. For the Greek word will not
bear that ſence, nor is it ever us'd in Scripture for Heaven. Beſides,
the Kingdom of Heaven, when ſpoken of as future, is not properly
till the laſt reſurrection and final judgment. Wliereas This World
to come, which our Saviour is to govern, muſt be before that time,
and will then expire. For all his Government, as to this World,
1 Cor. 15. expires at the day of Judgment, and he will then deliver up the king
24, 66. dom into the hands of his father : that he way be all in all. Having
reigned firſt himſelf, and put down all rule and all authority and
pomer.
So that S. Paul, in theſe two places of his Epiſtles, refers plainly to
the famie time and the ſame reign of Chrift: which muſt be in a
future World, and before the laſt day of Judgment : and therefore
according to our deductions, in the New Heavens and the New
Eartlı,
CHAP. III.
Concerning the Inhabitants of the New Earth. That Natural
Reaſon cannot determine this point. That according to
Scripture ; The Sons of the firſt Reſurrection, or the
Heirs of the Millennium, are to be the Inhabitants of
the New Earth. The Teſtimony of the Philoſophers, and
of the Chriſtian Fathers, for the Renovation of the World.
The firſt Propoſition laid down.
TAN
HUS we have ſetled the True Notion, according to Reafun
and Scripture, of the New Heavens and New Earth. But
where are the Inhabitants, you'l ſay? You have taken the pains to
make us a New World, and now that it is made, it muſt ſtand
empty. When the firſt World was deſtroyed, there were Eight
Perſons preſerv'd, with a Set of Living Creatures of every Kind, as
a Seminary or foundation of another World: But the Fire,
it
ſeems, is morė mercileſs than the Water; for in this deltruction of
the
i
Chap.3. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
99
1
I
the World, it does not appear that there is one living Soul left, of
any ſort, upon the face of the Earth. No hopes of pofterity, nor
of any continuation of Mankind, in the uſual way of propagation.
And tire is a barren Element, that breeds no living Creatures in it,
nor hath any nourillıment proper for their food or ſultenance.
We are perfectly at a loſs, therefore, ſo far as I fee, for a new
race of Mankind, or how to People this new-form'd World. The
Inhabitants, if ever there be any, muſt either come from Heaven,
or ſpring froin the Earth: There are but theſe two ways. But Na-
tural Reaſon can determine neither of theſe: fees no tract to follow
in theſe unbeaten paths, nor cari advance one ſtep further. Farewel
theri, dear Friend, I muſt take another Guide: and leave you here,
as Mofes upon Mount Piſgah, only to look into that Land, which
you cannot enter. I acknowledge the good ſervice you have
done, and what a faithful Companion you have been, in a long
journey ; from the beginning of the World to this hour, in a tract
of time of ſix thouſand years. We have traveld together through
the dark regions of a Firſt and Second Chaos: ſeen the World twice
ſhipwrackt. Neither Water, nor Fire, could ſeparate us. But now
you muſt give place to other Guides.
Welcom, Holy Scriptures, The Oracles of God, a Light ſhining
in darkneſs, a Treaſury of hidden Knowledge, and, where humane
faculties cannot reach, a ſeaſonable help and ſupply to their defects.
We are now come to the utinoſt bounds of their dominion: They
have made us a New World, but, how it ſhall be inhabited, they
cannot tell : know nothing of the Hiſtory or affairs of it. This
we muſt learn froin other Maſters, inſpir'd with the knowledge of
things to come. And ſuch Maſter's we know none, but the holy
Prophets and Apoſtles. We muſt therefore now put our ſelves whol-
ly under their conduct and inſtruction, and from them only receive
our information concerning the moral ſtate of the futute habitable
Earth.
In the firſt place therefore, The Prophet Iſaiah tells us, as a pre- Iſa. 45.18.
paration to our further enquiries, The Lord God created the Heavens,
God himſelf that forined the Earth, He created it 110t in vain, he form-
ed it to be inhabited. This is true, both of the preſent Earth and the
Future, and of every habitable World whatſoever. For to what
purpoſe is it inade habitable, if not to be inhabited ? That would
be, as if a man ſhould manure, and plough, and every way pre-
pare his ground for ſeed, but never fow it. We do not build houſes
that they ſhould ſtand empty, but look out for Tenants as faſt as we
can; as ſoon as they are made ready, and become Tenantable. But
if inan could do things in vain and without uſe or deſign, yet God
and Nature never do any thing in vain ; much leſs ſo great a work
as the making of a World. Which if it were in vain, would com-
prehend ten thouſand vanities or uſeleſs preparations in it. We may
therefore in the firſt place, ſafely conclude, That the New Earth will
be inhabited.
But by mbon zrill it be inhabited? This makes the ſecond eriquiry. .
S. Peter anſwers this queſtion for us, and with a particular applica-
tion to this very ſubject of the New Heavens and New Earth. They
02
Thall
1
!
I OO The Theory of the Earth. Book IV
ſhall be inhabited, he ſays, by the 1ſt or the Righteous. His words,
which we cited before, are theſe. When he had deſcrib'd the Con
flagration of the World, he adds, But we expe&t New Heavens and
Nem Earth, H'HEREIN DIELLETH RIGHTEOUS
NESS. By Righteouſneſs here, it is generally agreed muſt be un-
derſtood Righteous Perſons. For Righteouſneſs cannot be without
Righteous Perſons: It cannot hang upon Trees, or grow out of the
ground; 'Tis the endowment of realonable Creatures. And there
Righteous Perſons are eminently ſuch, and therefore call'd Righte-
ouſneſs in the abſtract, or purely Righteous without mixture of
Vice.
So we liave found Inhabitants for the New Earth: Perſons of au
high and noble Character. Like thoſe deſcrib'd by S. Peter, ( 1 Ep.
2. 9.) choſen generation, a loyal Prieſthood, an Holy Nation, a pe-
Apoc21. 29. culiar People. As if into that World, as into S. John's New Jerufa
lem, nothing impure or unrigliteous was to be admitted. Theſe
being then the happy and holy Inhabitants: The next enquiry is,
Whence do they come? From what off-ſpring, or from what Origi-
nal? We noted before, that there was no remnant of Mankind
left at the Conflagration, as there was at the Deluge: nor any
hopes of a Reſtauration that way. Shall we then imagine that theſe
New Inhabitants are a Colony wafted over from foine neighbour-
ing World: as from the Moon, or Mercury, or ſome of the higher
Planets. You may imagine what you pleaſe, but that ſeems to me
not imaginary only but impracticable ; And that the Inhabitants of
thoſe Planets are Perſons of fo great accompliſhments, is more than
I know: but I am ſure they are not the Perſons here underſtood.
For theſe muſt be ſuch as inhabited this Earth before. W E look
for New Heavens and New Earth, ſays the Apoſtle: Surely to have
ſome ſhare and intereſt in them; otherwiſe there would be no com-
fort in that expectation. And the Prophet Iſaiah ſaid before, I
create New Heavens and a New Earth, and the former Bhall come
ng more into remembrance: But be rou glad and rejoyce for ever
in that which I create. The truth is, none can have ſo good preten-
fions to this ſpot of ground we call the Earth, as the Sons of Men,
feeing they once polſeſt it. And if it be reſtor'd again, 'tis their pro-
priety and inheritance. Byt 'tis not Mankind in general that muſt
poſſeſs this New World, but the Ifrael of God, according to the Pro-
jhet Vaiah; or the Fuſt, according to S. Peter
. And eſpecially
thoſe that have ſųffer'd for the ſake of their Religion. For this is
that Palingeneſia, as we noted before, that Renovation, or Regenera-
tion of all things where our Saviour ſays, Thoſe, that fuffer loſs for
his fake, ſhall be recompenced: Matt. 19. 28, 29.
But they inuſt then be raiſed from the Dead. For all Mankind
was deſtroy'd at the Conflagration: and there is no reſource for
Apoc. 20. them any other way, than by a Refurrection. 'Tis true: and S.John
gives us a fair occaſion to make this ſuppofition, That there will be
fome raiſed from the Dead, before the General Day of Judgment
,
For he plainly diſtinguiſhęth of a Firſt and Second Reſurrection, and
inakes the first to be a Thouſand Years before the Second, and be
fore the general Day of Judgment. Now, If there be truly and
really
Chap.3. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
IOT
+
1
)
1
really a two-fold Reſurrection, as St. John tells us ; and at a thou-
fand Ycars diſtance from one anocher : It may be very rationally
profum'd, that, Thoſe that are raiſed in the firſt Reſurrection, are
thote Fuft that will inhabit the New Hervens and new Earth.Or whom
our Saviour promis'd to reward in the Renovation of the World.
For otherwiſe, who are thoſe Juſt that ſhall inhabit the Nem
Earth, and whence do they come? Or when is that Reſtauration
which our Saviour ſpeaks of, wherein thoſe that ſuffer'd for the
fake of the Goſpel ſhall be rewarded : St. John ſays, the Martyrs, at
this firſt Reſurrection, all live again and reign with Chriſt. Which
ſe:ms to be the reward promis'd by our Saviour, to thoſe that fuf-
ferd for his ſake: and the ſame Perſons in both places. And I ſam
the Souls of them, ſays St. John, that were beheaded for the iwitneſs of Apoc. 20.4.
Jefus, and for the Word of God: and which had not worſhipped the
Beaft, &c. and They lived and reigned with Chriſt a thouſand years.
Thele, I ſay, feem to be the ſame Perſons tù whom Chriſt had be-
fore promisid and appropriated a particular reward. And this re
wa d of theirs, or this Reign of theirs, is upon Earth : upon ſome
Eartlı, new or old: not in Heaven. For, bélides that we read nu .
thing of their Aſcenſion into Heaven after their Reſurrection : There
are ſeveral marks that ſhew it muſt neceſſarily be underſtood of a
ſtate upon Earth. For Gog and Magog came from the four quarters
of the Earth, and belieged the Camp of the Saints, and the beloved City. Ver. sa
That Camp and that City therefore were upon the Earth. And fire
came dorruz from Heaven and devoured them. If it came down from
Heaven, it came upon the Earth. Furthermore, thoſe Perſons that
are rais'd from the Dead, are ſaid to be Priefits of God and of Chriſt,
and to reign with him a thouſand years. Now theſe muſt be the ſame
Perſons with the Prieſts and Kings, mention’d in the Fifth Chap-
ter : which are there ſaid exprefly to reign upon Earth, or that
they ſhould reign upon Earth. It renains therefore only to de-
terinine, hat Earth this is, where the Sons of the firſt
Refurrection will live and reign. It cannot be the preſent Earth,
in the ſame ſtate, and under the ſame circumſtances it is now. For
what happineſs or priviledge would that be, to be callid back inte
a mortal life, under the neceſſities and inconveniences of ſickly Bo-
dies, and an incommodious World - ſuch as the preſent ſtate of
mortality is, and muſt continue to be, till ſome change be made in
Nature. We may be ſure therefore, that a change will be made in
Nature before that time, and that the ſtate they are rais'd into, and
the Earth they are to inhabit, will be, at leaft, Paradiſiacal: And
conſequently can be 10 other than the New Heaves and Neir Earth,
which we are to expect after the Consagration.
From theſe Conſiderations, there is a great fairneſs to conclude,
both as to the Characters of the Perſons, and of the place or ſtate,
that the Sons of the firſt Refurre&tion, will be Inhabitants of the Natio
Earth, and reign there with Chriſt a thouſand years. But ſeeing
this is one of the princip.11 and peculiar Concluſions of this Dil-
courſe, and bears a great part in this laſt Book of the Theory of the
Earth, it will deſerve a more full explication, and a more ample
proof, to make it out. We muſt therefore take a greater compaſs
in
Ver.
ht, To
.
102
Book IV.
The Theory of the Earth.
in our diſcourſe, and give a full account of that State which is uſu-
ally call'd the Millennium : The Reign of the Saints a thouſand years,
or the Kingdom of Chriſt upon Earth. But before we enter upon
this new Sub;ect, give me leave to cloſe our preſent Argument, a-
bout the Renovation of the Ilirld, with ſome Teſtimonies of the An-
cient Philoſophers, to that purpoſe. 'Tis plain to me, that there
were amongſt the Ancients ſeveral Traditions, or traditionary con-
cluſions, which they did not raiſe themſelves, by reaſon and obſer-
vation, but receiv'd them froin an unknown Antiquity. An inſtance
of this is the Conflagration of the World : A Doctrine, as ancient, for
any thing I know, as the World it ſelf. At leaſt as ancient as we
have any Records. And yet none of thoſe Ancients that tell us of
it, give any argument to prove it. Neither is it any wonder, for
they did not invent it themſelves, but receiv'd it from others with
put proof, by the ſole authority of Tradition. In like manner the
Renovation of the World, which we are now ſpeaking of, is an anci
ent Doctrine: both amongſt the Greeks and Eaſtern Philoſophers :
But they ſhew us no inethod hom the World may be reneur'd, nor
make any proof of its future Renovation ; For it was not a diſco.
very which they firſt made, but receiv'd it, with an implicite faith,
froin their Maſters and Anceſtors. And theſe Traditionary Doctrines
were all fore-runners of that Light that was to ſhine mure clearly
at the opening of the Chriſtian diſpenſation ; to give a more full
account of the fate and revolutions of the Natural World, as well
as of the Moral.
The Fers, 'tis well known, held the Renovatiin of the World, and
a Sabbath after fix thouſand years : according to the Prophecy that
was currant amongſt them, whereof we have given a larger ac-
count in the precedent Book, ch. 5. And that future ſtate they callid
Olam Hava, or the World to come, which is the very ſame with St.
Paul's Habitable Earth to come, Heb. 2. 6. Neither can I eaſily be-
ji od xxcévn lieve,, that thoſe conſtitutions of Moſes that proceed ſo much upon
a pénisico a Septenary, or the number Seven, and have no ground or reaſon,
in the nature of the thing, for that particular number : I cannot ea-
ſily believe, I ſay, that they are either accidental or humourſome :
without deſign or ſignification. But that they are typical, or re-
preſentative of ſome Septenary ſtate, that does eminently deſerve
and bear that Character. Mofes, in the Hiſtory of the Creation,
makes ſix days work, and then a Sabbath. Thien, after ſix years,
he makes a Sabbath-year : and after a Sabbath of years a year of Ju-
bilee, Levit. 25. All theſe leſſer revolutions ſeem 1o me to point at
the grand Revolution, the great Sabbath or Jubilee, after lix Millena-
ries, which as it anſwers the type in point of time, ſo likewiſe in
the nature and contents of it: Being a ſtate of Reſt from all labour
and trouble and ſervitude: a ſtate of joy and triumph : and a ſtate
of Renovation, when things are to return to their firſt condition and
priſtine order. So much for the Jers.
The Heathen Philoſophers, both Greeks and Barbarians, had the
ſame doctrine of the Renovation of the World, currant amongſt them.
And that under ſeveral nam:s and phraſes ; as of the Great Year,
the Reſtauration, the Mundane periods, and ſuch like. They ſuppos’d
עולם
הבא
ſtated
Chap.3. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
103
Ev. 1.7.6.23
ſtated and fix'd periods of time, upon expiration whereof there
would always follow ſome great revolution of the World, and the
face of Nature would be renew'd. Particularly after the Confla-
gration, the Stoicks always ſuppos'd a new World to ſucceed, or
another frame of Nature to be erected in the room of that which
was deſtroy'd. And they uſe the ſame words and phraſes upon this
occaſion that Scripture uſeth ; Chryfippus calls it Apocataſtaſis, as St. La&t.l.7.6.23.
Peter does, A&t. 3. 21. Marciis Antoninus in his Meditations ſeveral
t mes calls it Palingeneſia, as our Saviour does, Mat. 19. 28. And
Numenius liath two Scripture-words, Refurreétion and Reſtitution, to Euſeb, prap.
expreſs this renovation of the World. Then as to the Platonicks,
that Revolution of all things, hath commonly been call'd the Plato-
nick year, as if Plato had been the firſt author of that opinion; But
that's a great miſtake; he receiv’d it from the Barbarick Philofo-
phers, and particularly from the Ægyptian Prieſts, amongſt whom
he liv'd ſeveral years, to be inſtructed in their learning. But I do
not take Plato neither to be the firſt that brought this doctrine into
Greece: for, beſides that the Sibylls, whoſe antiquity we do not
well know, ſung this Song of old, as we ſee it copyed from thein
by Virgil in his fourth Eclogue: Pythagoras taught it before Plato:
and Orpheus before them both. And that's as high as the Greek Phi-
loſophy reaches.
The Barbarick Philoſophers were more ancient : namely the
Agyptians, Perſians, Chaldeans, Indian Brackmans, and other Eaſtern
Nations. Their Monuments indeed are in a great meaſure loft, yet
from the remains of them which the Greeks lave tranſcrib'd, and
ſo preſerv’d, in their writings, we ſee plainly they all had this
do&trine of the Future Renovation. And to this day the poſterity of
the Brackmans in the Eaſt Indies, retain the ſame notion, That the
World will be renewed after the laſt Fire. You may ſee the cita-
tions, if you pleaſe, for all theſe Nations, in the Latin Treatiſe,
Ch.5. Which I thought would be too dry and tedious to be render'd
into Engliſh
.
To theſe Teſtimonies of the Philoſophers of all Ages, for the Fu-
ture Renovation of the World, we might add the Teſtimonies of
the Chriſtian Fathers : Greek and Latin, ancient and modern. I will
only give you a bare Liſt of them, and refer you to the Latin Trea-
tiſe for the words or the places. Amongſt the Greek Fathers, Fuſtin Chap. 9.
Mirtyr, Ireneus, Origen ; The Fathers of the Council of Nice, Euſe-
bius, Baſil; The two Cyrils
, of Jeruſalem and Alexandria ; The
Gregorys, Nazianzen and Nyſjen; S. Chryfoftom, Zachari.is Mitylenen-
fis; and of later date, Damafcen, Oecumenius, Euthymius, and others.
There have all ſet their hands and Seals to this Doctrine. Of the Late
tin Fathers, Tertullian, Luiftantius, S. Hilary, S. Ambroſe, S. Auſtin,
S. Jerome ; and many later Ecclefiaftical Authors. Theſe, with the
Philoſophers before mentioned, I count good authority, Sacred and
Prophane : which I place here as an out-guard upon Scripture, where
our principal force lies. And theſe three united and acting in con-
junction, will be ſufficient to ſecure this firſt post, and to prove our
firſt Propoſition, which is this : Th.it after the Confligration of this Propoſ
. I.
World, there will be New Heavens and it Neir E.urihi and that Earth
will be inhabited.
СНАР.
104
Book IV.
The Theory of the Earth.
CHA P. IV.
The proof of a Millennium, or of a bleſſed Age to come, from
Scripture. A view of the Apocalypſe, and of the Prophe-
cies of Daniel, in reference to this Kingdom of Chriſt
and of his Saints.
W
prece-
come.
ܪ .
E have given fair preſuinptions, if not proofs, in the
dent Chapter, That the Sons of the firſt Reſurrection will
be the perſons that ſhall inhabit the Nem Earth, or the World to
But to make that proof compleat and unexceptionable, I
told you it would be neceſſary to take a larger compaſs in our diſ-
courſe, and to examine what is meant by That Reign with Chriſt a
thouſand years, which is promis'd to the Sons of the firſt Refurretion ;
by St. John in the Apocalypſe ; and in other places of Scripture is
uſually call'd the Kingdom of Chriſt, and the reign of the Saints. And
by Eccleliaftical Authors, in imitation of S. John, it is commonly
ſtyled the Millennium. We ſhall indifferently uſe any of theſe words
or phraſes ; and examine, Firſt, the truth of the Notion and Opini-
on; whether in Scripture there be ſuch an happy ſtate promiſed to
the Saints, under the conduct of Chriſt. And then we will
pro-
ceed to examine the nature, characters, place and time of it. And
I am in hopes when theſe things are duly diſcuſs’d and ſtated, you
will be ſatisfied that we have found out the true Inhabitants of the
New Heavens and New Earth: and the true myſtery of that ſtate
which is callid the Millennium, or the Reign of Chriſt and of his
Saints.
We begin with S. John; whoſe words, in the twentieth Chapter
of the Apocalypſe, are expreſs, both as to the firſt Reſurrection, and
as to the reign of thoſe Saints, that riſe, with Chriſt, for a thou-
fand years. Satan in the mean time being bound, or diſabled from
doing miſchief and ſeducing inankind. The words of the Prophet are
t'ei, 1, 2, 4, 5, theſe, And I ſaw an Angel come down from heaven, having the key of the bot-
tomleſs pit, and a great chain in his hand. And he laid hold on the Dragoiz,
that old Serpent, irhich is the Devil and Satan ; and bound him a thou-
ſand years. Ind I ſaw Thrones, and they ſat upon them, and judgment was
ginen unto them; and I ſaw the Souls of them that were beheaded for the
witneſs of Jefuss and for the word of God, and which had not worſhipped
the beaſt
, neither his image, neither had received his mark upon their
fore-heads, or in their hands; and they lived and reigned with Chriſt
thouſand years. But the reſt of the dead lived not again
until the thouſand
years were finiſhed. This is the firſt Reſurrection. Bleſſed and holy is he
that hath part in the firſt Reſurrection : on ſuch the ſecond death hath 120
power, but they ſhall be prieſts of God, and of Chriſt, and ſhall reign with
him a thouſand years. Theſe words do fully expreſs a Reſurrection,
and a reign with Chriſt a thouſand years. As for that particular
ſpace of time, of a thouſand years, it is not much material to our
preſent purpoſe: but the Reſurrection here ſpoken of, and the reign
with
ka
.
105
Chap.4. Concerning the New Heavens, &c.
1
1
with Chriſt, make the ſubſtance of the controverlie, and in effect
prove all that we enquire after at preſent. This Reſurrection, you
lee, is callid the Firſt Refurretion, by way of diſtinction from the
Second and general Reſurrection; which is to be placd a thouſand
years
after the Firſt. And both this Firſt Reſurrection and the Reign
of Chriſt, ſeem to be appropriated to the Martyrs in this place. For
the Prophet ſays, The Souls of thoſe that were beheaded for the witness
of Jeſus,&c. They lived and reigned with Chriſt a thouſand years. From
which words, if you pleaſe, we will raiſe this Doctrine: That, Those
that have ſuffered for the ſake of Chriſt and a goud Conſcience, Mall be
raiſed from the dead a thouſand years before the general Refurretion,
: and reign with Chriſt
, in an happy ſtate. This Propoſition ſeems to be
plainly iricluded in the words of S. John, and to be the intended
lence of this Viſion; but you muſt have patience a little as to your
enquiry into particulars, till, in the progreſs of our diſcourſe, we
have brought all the parts of this concluſion into a fuller light.
In the mean time, there is but one way, that I know of, to
evade the force of theft words, and of the concluſion drawn from
them; and that is, by ſuppoíing that the First Refurretion here
mentioned, is not to be underſtood in a literal ſenie, but is Allego-
rical and myſtical; fignifying only a Reſurrection from ſin to a Spi-
ritual Life. As we are ſaid to be dead in fin, and to be riſen mith
Chriſt, by Faith and Regeneration. This is a manner of Speech
which S. Paul does ſometimes uſe: as Ephef.2.6. and 5.14. and
But how can this be applyed to the prefent caſe? Were
the Martyrs dead in ſin? 'Tis they that are here rais'd from the
dead. Or, after they were beheaded for the witneſs of Jeſus, natu-
rally dead and laid in their graves, were they then regenerate by
Faith? There is no congruitiy in allegories ſo applyed. Beſides,
Why ſhould they he ſaid to be regenerate a thouſand years before
the day of Judgment: Or, to reign with Chriſt, after this Spiri.
tual Reſurrection, ſuch a limited time, a Thouſand Years? Why not
to Eternity? For in this allegorical ſence of riſing and reigning, they
will reign with him for everlaſting. Then, after a Thouſand Year's
muſt all the wicked be regenerate, and riſe into a Spiritual Life ?
Tis ſaid here, The reſt of the Dead lived not again, until the thouſand
years were finiſhed. That implyes, that at the end of theſe thouſand
years, the reſt of the dead did live again; which, according to the
Allegory muſt be, that, after a thouſand years, all the wicked will
regenerate, and rais'd into a Spiritual Life. Theſe abſurdities
ariſe upon an allegorical expoſition of this Reſurrection, if apply'd
to ſingle Perſons.
But Dr. Hammond, a Learned and worthy Divine, (but one that
loves to contract and cramp the ſence of Prophecies ) making this
Firſt Reſurrection allegorical, applies it not to ſingle Perſons, but to
the ſtate of the Church in general ; Tlie Chriſtian Church, he
ſays
, ihall have a Reſurrection for a thouſand years : that is, íhall
riſe out of Perſecution, be in a proſperous condition, and an un-
diſturb’d profeſſion of the true Religion, for ſo long a time. But
agrces with the Prophecy as little as the former ; If it be a ſtate
of the Church in general
, and of the Church then in being, why
P
Col. 3. 1.
1
VEY. .
be
this
19
106 The Theory of the Earth. Book IV:
ver. S.
is this Reſurrection apply'd to the Martyrs? Why are they ſaid to
riſe ? ſeeing the ſtate they liv'd in, was a troubleſome ſtate of the
Church, and it would be no happineſs to have that reviv'd again;
Then as to the Time of this Reſurrection of the Church, where will
you fix it? The Prophet Daniel places this Reign of Chriſt
, at, or
after the diſſolution of the fourth Monarchy: and S. John places
it a thouſand years before the laſt Day of Judgment. How will
you adjuſt the Allegorical Reſurrection of the Church to theſe limits
Or if, in point of time, you was free, as to Prophecy; yet how
would you adjuſt it to Hiſtory? Where will you take theſe thou-
ſand years of happineſs and proſperity to the Church? Theſe Au.
thors ſuppofe them paſt, and therefore muſt begin then either from
the Erſt tiines of the Goſpel, or from the time of Conſtantine. Un-
der the firſt Ages of the Goſpel, were, you know, the great Per-
fecutions by the Heathen Emperours: Could thoſe be calld the
Reign of Chriſt and of His Saints? Was Sathan then bound? or
was this Epocha but a thouſand years before the Day of Judgment?
And if you begin this Reſurrection of the Church from the days
of Conſtantine, when the Empire became Chriſtian, how will
you
reckon a thouſand years from that time, for the continuance of the
Church in peace and purity? for the reign of Chriſt and of his
Saints muſt neceſſarily imply both thoſe Characters. Beſides, who
are the reſt of the Dead, that liv'd after the expiration of thoſe
thouſand years, if they begun at Conſtantine? And why is not th:
Second Reſurrection and the Day of Judgment yet come? Laſtly,
You ought to be tender of interpreting the Firſt Reſurrection in an
Allegorical ſence, leſt you expoſe the ſecond Reſurrection to be made
an allegory alſo.
To conclude, The words of the Text are plain and expreſs for
a literal Reſurrection, as to the Firſt, as well as the Second ; and
there is no Allegorical interpretation that I know of, that will hold
through all the particulars of the Text, conſiſtently with it ſelf and
with Hiſtory. And when we Mall have prov'd this future King-
dom of Chriſt from other places of the Apocalypſe, and of Holy
Writ, you will the more eaſily admit the literal ſence of this place:
Which, you know, according to the receiv'd rule of Interpreters
,
is never to be quitted or forſaken, without neceſſity. But when I
ſpeak of confirming this Doctrine from other paſſages of Scripture,
I do not mean as to that definite time of a thouſand years, for that
is no where elſe mention'd in the Apocalypſe or in Scripture, that
I know of; and ſeems to be mentioni'd here, in this cloſe of all
things, to mind us of that type that was propos’d in the begir.ning
of all things, Of Six days and a Sabbath. Whereof each Day com-
prehends a thouſand years, and the Sabbath, which is the Millennial
ſtate, hath its thouſand. According to the known Prophecy of
Book 3. ch.s. Elias, which, as I told you before, was not only receiv'd amongſt
the Jews, but alſo owu'd by very many of the Chriſtian Fathers
.
To proceed therefore to other parts of S. John's Prophecies, that
ſet forth this Kingdom of Chriſt. The Viſion of the Seven Trunk
pets is one of the moſt remarkable in the Apocalypſe; and the Se
venth Trumpet, which plainly l'eaches to the end of the World,
and
Chap.4. Concerning the New Heavens, &c.
107
(ver.
and the Reſurrection of the Dead, opens the Scene to the Millenni-
um. Hear the ſound of it. The ſeventh Angel ſounded, and there were great ch.11.15, 16,
voices in heaven, Suying, The kingdoms of this world are become the king- 17, 18.
doms of our Lord, and of his Chriſt, and he shall reign for ever and
And the four and twenty Elders, which fat before God on their
Seats, fell up.n their faces, and worſhipped God : Saying, We give thee
thinks, O Lord God Almighty, which art, and wraſt, and art to come ;
becauſe thou haſt taken to thee thy great power and haſt reigned. And the
Vations were angry, and thy wrath is come, and the time of the Dead,
that they ſhould be judged, and that thou ſhouldejt give reward unto the
firvants the Prophets, and to the Saints, and them this fear tby Name,
ſmall and gieat, and ſhouldeſt deſtroy them that deſtroy the Earth, &c.
This is manifeſtly the Kingdom of Chriſt: and with this is joyn'd
the Reſurrection of the Dead, and the rewarding of the ſuffering
Prophets and Saints; as in the 20th. Chapter. This is that myſtery
of God that was to be finiſh'd in the days of the voice of the ſeventh
Angel: as is faid in the 20th. Chap. ver. 7. As he hath declared to his
ferv.ints the Prophets. Namely, the myſtery of this Kingdom, which
was foretold by the Prophets of the Old Teſtament: and more efpe-
cially by Daniel, as we ſhall ſee hereafter.
The New Jernfalein, (as it is ſet down, Apic.2 I. 2, 3, 4,5,6,7.)
is another inſtance or image of this Kingdom of Chriſt. And the Palma
beuring Company, Chap. 7.9,&c. are ſome of the Martyrs that ſhall
enjoy it. They are plainly deſcrib'd there as Chriſtian Martyrs ;
(ver. 14.) And their reward, or the ſtate of happineſs they are to
enjoy, (ver. 15, 16, 17.) is the ſame with that of the Inhabitants of
the Nem Jeruſalem: Ch. 21. 2, 3, 4, &c. as, upon comparing thoſe
two places, will eaſily appear. Furthermore, at the opening of the
Seals, Chap.5. which is another principal Viſion, and reaches to the
end of the World, there is a proſpect given us of this Kingdom of
Chriſt, and of that reward of liis Saints. For when they ſing the
new Song to the Lamb, ( ver. 9,10.) they fay, Thou art worthy to
take the Book, and to open the Seals thereof : For thou waft ſlain und h.1ſt
redeemed us to Gid, ky thy bloud. Avd haſt made us unto our God Kings
and Prieſts: and we shall reignz 012 the Earth. This muſt be the ſame
Itate, and the ſame thouſand-years-reign mention'd in the 20th.
Chapter. Where 'tis ſaid, (ver.6.) the partakers of it all be Prieſts
of God, and of Chriſt, and ſhall reign with him it thouſand years.
Another completory Viſion, that extends it felf to the end of the
World, is that of the ſeven l'ials, Ch. 15,816. And as at the open-
ing of the Seals, fo at the pouring out of the Vials, a triumphal
Song is ſung, and 'tis call d the Song of Mofes and of the Lumb. 'Tis ch. 15.3.
plainly a Song of Thankſgiving for a Deliverance: but I do not look
upon this deliveranice as already wrought, before the pouring out of
the Vials, though it be plac'd before them: as often the grand deſign
and iſſue of a Vilion is plac'd at thc beginning. It is wrought by the
Vials themſelves, and by their effuſion, and therefore upon the
pouring out of the laſt Vial, The Voice came out of the Temple of
Heaven, from the Throne, ſaying, Confummatum eft: It is done. Now (11.16. 17.
the Deliverance is wrought, now the work is at an end: or, The mja
llery of God is finish'd, as the plıraſe was before, concerning the 7th
Trumpet :
P2
108
Book IV.
The Theory of the Earth.
ch. 15.2.
Trumpet: Ch.19.7. You ſee therefore this termirates upon the
ſame time, and conſequently upon the fame fate, of the Millennium.
And that they are the ſame Perſons that triumph here, and reign
there, Ch. 27. You may ſee by the fame Characters given to both
of them. Here, thoſe that triumph, are ſaid to have gotten the qi-
Etory over the Bealt, and over his Image, and over his murk, and our
ch. 20.4. the number of his 11:1me. And there, Thoſe that reign with Chrilt,
are faid to be thoſe that had not worſhipped the Beast
, neither his images
neither had received his m.irk upon their foreheads, or in their hands.
Theſe are the fame Perfons therefore, triumphing over the ſame
Encinies, and enjoying the faine reward.
And you thall ſeldorn find any Doxology or Hallelujah in the Ap.o-
calypſe, but 'tis in proſpect of the Kingdom of Chriſt
, and the Mil
lennial itate. That is still thic burtlen of tlie Sacred Song: The coin-
plement of every grand Viſion, and the life and frength of the
whole Syſteme of Propliecics in that Book. Even thoſe Halleluja's
06.19.6,7. that are ſung at the deſtruction of Babylon, in the 19th. Chapter, are
rais'd upon the vicw of the ſucceeding ſtate, the Reign of Christ. For
the Text fay's, And I beard as it nere a voice of a great multitude, and
as the voice of many orters, and as the voice of mightythunders, living,
H.:llelujah. FOR TIJE LORD GOD OMNIPOTINT REIGNKI
Let us be glad and rejoyce and give honour to him: IOR THI
MIRRLIGE OF THE LAMB IS COME, AND HIS ITE:
HATH MADE HER SELF READY. This appears plainly to be
the New Jeruſalem, if you conſult the 21th.ch. ver. 2. And I folufion
the Holy City, New Jeruſalem, coming down from God out of Heaven,
PREPARED AS A BRIDE ADORNED FOR HER HUSBAND.
"Tis, no doubt, the ſame Bride and Bridegroom, in both places ;
the finie marriage or preparations for marriag? ; which are com-
pleated in the Millennial bliſs, in the Kingdom of Chriſt and of his
Saints.
I muſt ſtill be your patience a little longer, in purſuing this ar
gument throughout the Apocalypſe. As towards the latter end of
S. Fohu's Revelation this Kingdom of Chriſt ſhines out in a more
full glory, ſo there are the dawnings of it in the very beginning and
entrance into his Prophecics. As at the beginning of a Poem, we
have commonly in a few words the deſign of the Work, in like
manner S. John makes this Preface to his Prophecies, From Filius
Chriſt, mho is the firithful witneys, the firſt begotten of the dead, an!
the Prince of the Kings of the Earth: unto him that loved us, and was
ed us froin our ſins in his own bloud: And hath made 115 Kings aid
Prieſts unto God and his Father; to him be glory and dominion for (7'
and ever, Amen. Behold, he cometh in the clouds, &c. In this Prologue
the grand argument is pointed at, and that happy Cataſtrophe and
laſt Scene which is to crown the Work: The Reign of Chriſt and of
his Saints at his ſecond coming. He liath made 115 Kings und Prirfly
urto God: This is always the Characteriſtick of thoſe that are to
enjoy the Millennial Happineſs, as you may ſee at the opening
the Scals, ch. 5. 10. and, in tlic Sons of the Firſt Refurrcflion, ch. 20.6.
And this being joyned to the coining of our Saviour'
, puts it
ſtill inore out of doubt. That expreſſion alſo, of being ::
ch. 1.5.6.
01
from
Chap.4. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
109
f
Ch. 2. To
Che 2. II.
from our ſins in his blond, is repeated again both at the opening of the
Seals, Chap. 5.9. and in the Pailm-bearing Company, Chap. 7. 14.
both which places we have cited before as referring to the Millenni
al State.
Give ine Icave to add further, that as in this general Preface, ſo
alſo in the Introductory viſions of the Seven Churches, there are, co-
vertly or exprelly, in the concluſion of eachi, glances upon the Mil-
lennium. As in the first to kipheſus, the Prophet concludes, He that
bath an car, let him bear, what the Spirit ſays to the Churches : TO
HIM THAT OFERCOMETH WILL I GIVE TO EAT OF THE
TREE OF LIFE, WHICH IS IN THE MIDST OF THE PARA-
DISE OF GOD. This is the Millennial happineſs which is promi-
fed to the Conquerour ; as we notcci before concerning that phraſe.
In like manner in the ſecond to Smyrna, He concludes: He that over-
cometh, shall not be hurt of the ſecond death. This implyes, he ſhall be
partaker of the firſt Reſurrečtion, for that's the thing underſtood;
as you may ſee plainly by their being joyn'd in the 20th. Ch. ver. 6.
Bluffed ind holy is he that hath part in the firſt Reſurrection : on ſuch the
ſecond cło:tt ha bul'h 10 poirer : but they thall be Prieſts of God and of Chriſt,
and Mall reign with him a thouſand years. In the 3d tv Pergamus, the Ch. 2. 17.
promiſe is, 10 Cuit of the hidden Manni, to have a rhile fone, and a
neur 12.11e written in it. But ſeeing the Prophet adds, which zu man
knoweth living lic that receivcth it, we will not preſume to interpret
that new ftate, wlia:ſoever it is. In Tloyatiru, tle reward is, To th. 2.26, 27.
have power over the Nations, and to have the Morning Star. Which
is to reign with Chriſt, who is the Morning Star, in his Millennial
Empire : both theſe phraſes being us’d in that ſence in the cloſe of
this Book. In Sardis the promiſe is, To be clothed in white raiment, and Ch. 3.5.
nat to be blotted out of the Book of Life. And you ſee afterwards the
Palm-bearing Company are clothed in white robes; and thoſe that are Ch.7.9, 141
admitted into the New Jerufalem, are ſuch as are written in the
Ch. 3. 12.
Lamb's book of life, Ch. 21. 27. Then as to Philadelphia, the reward
promiſed there does openly inark the Millennial ſtate, by the City of
God, New Jerufilem which cometh down out of Heaven from God : com-
par'd with Chap. 21. 2. Laſtly, to the Church of Laodicea is faid, Ch. 3. 21
To him thit overcurrcth will I grant to fit with me in my Throne. And
that is the uſual phraſe to expreſs the dignity of thoſe that reign
with Chriſt, in his Millennial Kingdom: as you may ſee, Apoc.20.4.
Mit. 19. 28. Dan. 7.9, 13, 14. So all theſe promiſes to the Churches
aim at one and the ſame thing, and ierininate upon the ſame point ;
'Tis the ſame reward expreſs’d in different ways ; and ſeeing 'tis ſtill
upon a victory, and appropriated to thoſe that overcome, it
does the morc eaſily carry our thoughts to the Millennium, which is
the proper reward of Victors, that is, of Martyrs and Confeſſors.
Thus
you fee how this notion and myſtery of the Millennial King-
doin of Christ, does both begin and end the ilpoc.tlypſe, and run
thorough all its parts : As the Soul of that Body of Prophecies : A
Spirit or ferment that actuates the whole maſs.' And if we could
thoroughly underſtand that illuſtrious Scene at the opening of this
Apocalyptical Theatre in the 41h. and 5th. Chap. I do not doubt buit
We thould find it a Repreſentation of the Majeſty of our Saviour in
the
fixt
LIO
Book IV
The Theory of the Earth.
l'ex. 342 35.
tije Glory of his future Kingdom. But I dare not venture upon the
explication of it, there are ſo many things of difficult and dubious
interpretation, coucht under thoſe Schemes. Wher, fore having
inace theſe obſervations upon the Prophecies of St. John, we will
now add to them ſome reflections upon the Prophecies of Daniel. That
by the agreement and concurrence of theſe two great Witnelles, the
Concluſion we pretend to prove, may be fully eſtabliſhed.
In the Prophecies of D.iniel there are two grand Viſions, that of
the Statue or Image, Chap. 2. and that of the four Beaſts, Chap. 7.
And both theſe Viſions terminate upon the Millennium, or the King.
dom of Chriſt. In the Viſion of the Statue, repreſenting to us the
four great Monarchies of the World ſuccellively, (where of, by the
general conſent of Interpreters, The Roman is the fourth and laty
after the diſſolution of the laſt of them, a fifth Monarchy, the King
dom of Chriſt, is openly introduc'd, in theſe words : And in the
Ch. 2. V. 44. days of the fe kingdoms, ſhall the God of heaven ſet up a kingdom, which
Shall ni ver be deyiroy'd, and the kingdom ſhall not be left to other people,
but it ſhall break in pieces and conſume all thoſe kingdi mis „and it ſhall stund
for ever. This may be verified, in foine meaſure, by the firſt coining
of our Savicur in the days of the 4th. Kingdom; when his Religion
from ſmall beginnings, in a ſhort time overſpread the greateſt
rart
of the known World. As the ſtone cut out without hands, became a
great mountain and filled the whole Earth. But the full and final accom-
pliſhment of this Prophecy cannot be till the ſecond coming of our
Saviour. For not till theni, will he break in pieces and conſumi all thojë
IV. 35.
kingdons ; and th;it in ſuch a manner, that they shall become like the
chat of the Suinmer tlrelhing-floor, carried away by the urind : ſo as 120
place Mall be found for them. This, I ſay, will not be done, nor an
ei erlaſting kingdoin erected in their place, over all the Nations of
the Earth, till his Second Coming, and his Millennial Reign.
Put this Reign is declared mure expreſly, in the Viſion of the
four Beaſts, Chup. 7. For after the deſtruction of the fourth Beaſt,
Ch. 7:13: the Prophet ſays, I fim in the night, Viſions, and behold one like th: Soi
of m11, cime with the clouds of heaven, and came to the Ancient of days,
and they brought him near before him : And there was given him dominion,
und glory, and a kingdom, that all people, nations, and languages Should
perve him : His dominion is an everlaſting dominion, which shall not p.1/s
andy: and his kingdoin that which Mill not be deſiroy'd. Accordingly he
fays, ver. 21,22. The laſt Beaſt and the little Hurri made war againſt the
Suints, until the Ancient of days came, and judgment was given to the
Saints of the moſt. High ; and the time came that the Saints poſſeſſed the
kingdom. And laſtly, in purſuit ſtill of the ſame argument, he con-
cludes to the fine effect in fuller words, ver. 26, 27. But the Judg-
went shall fit, and they ſhall take away his dominion, to conſume and 10
deltowy it into the end. sind the kingdom and dominion, and the gre.tuels
of the kingdi m under the whole heaven, Jhall be given to the people of the
Saints of i he moſt High: whoſe kingdom is an everlaſting kingdom, and all
dominions shall ſerve and obey him.
Here is the end of the matter : ſays the Prophet. Here is the up-
Ch. 12. 13. ſhot and reſult of all. Here terminate both the Prophecies of Daniel
and St. John : and all the affairs of the Terreſtrial World. Daniel
brings
Ch.7.28.
Chap.5. Concerning the New Heavens,&c. .
brings in this kingdom of Chriſt, in the concluſion of two or three
Vitions ; but St. John hath interwoven it every where with his Prc-
phecies, from firit tu lat. And you may as well open a Lock withi-
out a Key, as interpret the Apocalypſe without the Millennium. But
after theſe two great Witnelles, the one for the Old Teſtament, the
otlier for the New, we muſt look into the reſt of the Sacred Writers;
for tho' every ſingle Author there, is an Oracle, yet the concur-
rence of Oracles is ſtill a further demonſtration, and takes away all
remains of doubt or incredulity.
C H A P.
V.
.
A View of other places of Scripture concerning the Millen-
nium or future Kingdom of Chriſt
. In what ſence all the
Prophets have born Teſtimony concerning it.
THI
i
1
HE Wife of Zebedee came to our Saviour, and begg’d of him, Mar. 34 di
lika fond Mother, that her two Sons might fit, one at his
right hand, th’other at his left, when he caine into his Kingdom.
Our Saviour does not deny the ſuppoſition, or general ground of
her requeſt, that he was to have a Kingdom ; but tells her, The ho-
nours of that Kingdoin were not then in his diſpoſal. He had not
drunk his Cup, nor been baptiz’d with his laſt Baptiſm: which were
conditions, both to him and others, of entring into that Kingdom.
Yet, in another place, our Saviour is ſo well aſſur'd of his intereſt Mút. 59. 18,
and authority there, by the good will of his Father, that he promi-
ſes to hii Diſciples and followers, that for the lofies they ſhould ſu-
ftain here, upon his account, and for the ſake of his Goſpel, they
ſhould receive there an hundred ſold ; and ſit upon Thrones with
hiin, judging the Tribes of Iſrael. The words are theſe : And Jefus
Said unto them, verily I ſay unto you, that ye which have followed me, in
the Regeneration or Renovation, when the Son of man ſhall fit in the
Throne of his glory, ye a'lo Shall ſit upon trelve Thrines, judging the trelve
tribes of Iſrael. Theſe Thrones, in all reaſon, inult be underſtood
to be the ſame with thoſe which we inention'd in the foregoing
Chapter, out of Daniel and the Apocalypſe: and therefore mark the Dum. 7.9.
ſame time and the fame ſtate. And ſeeing, in thoſe places, they Apoc. 20. 4.
plainly lignified the Millennial ſtate, or the Kingdom of Chriſt and
of his Saints, they muſt here lignitic the ſaine, in this promiſe of our
Saviour to his ſuffering Followers. And as to the word Palingeneſia,
which is here tranſlated Regeneration, 'tis very well known, that,
hoth the Greek Philoſophers, and Greek Fathers, uſe that very word
for the Renovation of the World. Which is to be, as we ſhall hereafter
make appear, at or before the Millennial ſtate.
Our Saviour alſo, in his Divine Sermon upon the Mount, makes
this one of his Beatitudes, Bleſſed are the Mick, for they thill inherit
ile Earth. But bor, I pray, or where, or when, do the Meek inherit
the
1
i
I 12 The Theory of the Earth. Book IV.
a
the Earth ? neither at preſent, I am ſure, nor in any paſt Ages. 'Tis
the Great Ones of the World, ambitious Princes and Tyrants, that
Nice the Earth amongſt them : and thoſe that can flatter them belt,
or ſerve them in their intereſts or pleaſures,have the next beſt ſhares.
But a meek, modeſt, and humble Spirit, is the moſt unqualified
Perſon that can be for a Court, or a Camp: to ſcramble for Prefer-
ment, or Plund:r. Both He, and his ſelf-denying notions, are ri-
diculd, as things of no uſe, and proceeding from meanneſs and
poorneſs of Spirit. David, who was a Perſon of an admirable devo-
tion, but of an unequal Spirit; ſubject to great dejections, as well
as elevations of mind; was ſo inuch affected with the proſperity of
the wicked in this World, that he could ſcarce forbear charging
Providence with injuſtice. You inay ſee ſeveral touches of a repi-
ning Spirit in his Pſalms: and in the Seventy-third Pſalm, compos’d
upon that Subject, you have both the wound and the cure. Now
this Beatitude pronounc'd here by our Saviour, was ſpoken before
by David, Pſil
. 37. 11. The fame David that was always ſo ſenli
ble of the hard uſage of the Juſt in this life. Our Saviour alſo, and
his Apoſtles, preach the Doctrine of the Croſs every where, and
foretell the ſufferings that ſhall attend the Righteous, in this world.
Therefore neither David, nor our Saviour, could underſtand this
inheritance of the Earth, otherwiſe than of ſome future ſtate, or of
a ſtate yet to come. But as it muſt be a future ſtate, ſo it muſt be
Terreſtrial ſtate; for it could not be callid the inheritance of the Earth,
if it was not fo. And’tis to be a ſtate of peace, as well as plenty, accor-
ding to the words of the Pſalmiſt, But the meek Shall inherit the Earth,
and Mall delight themſelves in the abundance of peace. It follows there-
fore froin theſe premiſſes, that, both our Saviour, and David, muſt
underſtand ſome future ſtate of the Earth, wherein the Meek wil
enjoy both peace and plenty. And this will appear to be the future
Kingdom of Chriſt, when, upon a fuller deſcription, we ſhall have
given you the marks and characters of it.
In the mean time, why ſhould we not ſuppoſe, this Earth, which
the Meck are to inherit, to be that habitable Earth to come, which
St. Paul mentions (Hebr. 2. 6.) and repreſents as ſubject to our Sa-
viour in a peculiar manner : at his diſpoſal and under his Govern-
inent, as his Kingdom: Why ſhould not that Earth be the ſubject
of this Beatitude: The promis'd Land, the Lot of the Righ-eous ?
This I am ſure of, that both this Text and the former deſerve our
ſerious thoughts ; and tho' they do not exprefly,and in terms,proie
the future Kingdom of our Saviour, yet upon the faireſt interpreta-
tions they imply ſuch a ſtate. And it will be very uneaſie to give a
ſatisfactory account, either of the Regeneration or Renovation, when
our Saviour and his Diſciples ſhall lit upon Thrones: Or of that
Earth which the Meek Shall inherit : Or laſtly,of that Habitable World,
which is peculiarly ſubject to the dominion of Jeſus Chriſt, without
ſuppoling, on this ſide Heaven, ſome other reign of Chriſt and his
Sain:s, than what we ſee, or what they enjoy, at preſent.
But to proceed in this argument. It will be neceſiary, as I told
you, to ſit down ſome notes and characters of this Reign of Chriſt
and of his Saints, whereby it may be diſtinguiſh'd from the preſent
ſtate,
.
Chap.5. Concerning the New Heavens, &c.
113
ſtate, and preſent Kingdoms of the World. And theſe characters are
chiefly three, Juſtice, Peace, and Divine Preſence or Conduct, which
uſes to be called Theocrafie
. By theſe characters it is ſufficiently diſtin-
guilh'd from the Kingdoms of this World; which are generally un-
juſt in their titles or exeiciſe: itain'd with bloud: and ſo far from
being under a particular Divine Conduct, that humane pallions and
humane vices, are the Springs that commonly give motion to their
greatelt deſigns. But more particularly and reſtrainedly, the Govern-
ment of Chriſt, is oppoſed to the Kingdom and Government of An-
tichriſt, whoſe characters are diametrically oppolite to theſe, being
injuſtice, cruelty, and humane or diabolical artifices.
Upon this thort view of the Kingdom of Chriſt, let us make en
quiry after it amongſt the Prophets of the Old Teſtament. And we
ihall tind, upon examination, that there is ſcarce any of them,
greater or leſſer, but take notice of this myſtical kingdom; either
exprefly, or under the types of Iſrael, Sion, Jeruſalem, and ſuch like.
And therefore I am apt to think, that, when S. Peter in his Sermon
to the Jews, A&t. 3. ſays, All the holy Prophets ſpoke of The Reſti-
tution of all things, he does not mean the Renovation of the World
ſeparately from the Kingdom of Chriſt, but complexly, as it may-
imply both. For there are not many of the old Prophets that have
ſpoken of the Renovation of tlie Natural World; but a great many
have ſpoken of the Renovation of the Moral, in the Kingdom of
Chriſt. Theſe are Ș. Peter's words: A&t. 3. 19, 20, 21, Repent ye
therefore and be converted, that your fins may be blotted out, when the
times of refreſhing Shall come from the preſence of the Lord. And he
ſhall ſend Jeſus Chriſt which before was preached unto ye: whom the
heavens muſt receive until the times of RESTITUTION OF ALL
THINGS. The Apoſtle here mentions three things, The Times of
refreſhing, The Second Coming of our Saviour, And the Times of Re-
flitution of all things. And to the laſt of theſe he immediately ſub.
joyns, which God hath Spoken by the mouth of all bis holy Prophets, ſince
the world began. This Reſtitution of all things, I ſay, muſt not be
underſtood abſtractly from the reign of Chriſt, but as in conjunction
with it; and in that ſence, and no other, it is the general ſubject of
the Prophets.
1
To enter therefore into the Schools of the Prophets, and enquire
their fence concerning this Myſtery, let us firſt addreſs our ſelves to
the Prophet Iſaiah, and the Royal Prophet David; who ſeem to have
had many noble thoughts, or inſpirations, upon this ſubject. Iſaiah
in the 65th chap. from the 17th ver. to the end, treats upon this ar-
gument : and joyns together the Renovation of the Natural and
Moral World ; as S. Peter, in the place forementioned, ſeems to do.
And accordingly the Prophet, having ſet down ſeveral natural cha-
l'acters of that State, as indolency and joy, longevity, eaſe, and plen-
ty, from ver. 18. to the 24th. He there begins the moral characters,
of divine favour, and ſuch a particular protection, that they are
heard and anſwer'd before they pray. And laſtly, He repreſents it
as a ſtate of univerſal. peace and innocency, ver. 23. The Wolf and
the Lamb ſhall feed together, &c.
Q
This
114 The Theory of the Earth. Book IV.
--
This laft character, which comprehends Peace, Juſtice, and Inno-
cency; is more fully diſplay'd by the ſame Prophet, in the 11th.
chap. where he treats allo of the Kingdom of Christ. Give me leave
to let down his words, ver. 4,5,6,7,8,9. But with Righteouſneſs
Shall he judge the poor, and reprov. with equity for the meek of the Earth'.
and he shall ſmite the Earth arith the rod of his mouth, and with the
breath of his lips ſhall be play the wicked. And righteouſneſs ſhall be the
girdle of kis loins, and faithfulneſs the girdle of his reins. The Wolf alſo
Jeall dwell with the Lamb, and the Leopard Mall lye down with the Kiš:
And the Calf and the young Lyon, and the fatling together, and a little
child shall lead them. And the Cow and the Bear ſhall feed, their
Joung
ones shall lye down together: and the Lyon Mall eat Straw like the Ox.
And the ſuckling ohild ſhall play on the hole of the Afp, and the weaned
child shall put his hand on the Cock.itrice-den. They ſhall not hurt, nur
deſtroy iiz all my holy mountain: for the Earth ſhall be full of the know-
ledge of the Lord, as the waters cover the Sea. Thus far the Pro-
phet: Now if we joyn this to what we noted before, from his
65th. chap. concerning the fame ſtate, 'twill be impoſſible to under-
ſtand it of any order of things, that is now, or hath been hitherto
in the World. And conſequently it muſt be the Idea of ſome ſtate
to come, and particularly of that which we call the Future King-
dom of Chriſt,
The ſame pacifick temper, Innocency and Juſtice, are celebra-
tel by this Prophet when the Mountain of the Lord ſhall be eſtabliſhed
su the top of the mountains, chap. 2. 2, 4. And he ſhall judge amongſt the
nations, and ſhall rebuke many people; and they ſhall beat their ſwords
into plow-Shares, and their ſpears into pruning-hooks. Nation shall not
lift up ford againſt nation, neither shall they learn war any more. And
as to righteouſneſs, he ſays in the 2 3. chap. Behold a King Mall reign.
in righteouſneſs, and Princes ſhall rule in judgment, &c. Theſe places,
I know, uſually are applyed to the firſt coming of our Saviour ;
the peaceableneſs of his doctrine, and the propagation of it through
all the World. I willingly allow this to be a true fence, fu far as
it will go. But 'tis one thing to be a true ſence, to ſuch a degree ;
und another thing to be the final ſence and accompliſhment of a
Prophecy. The affairs of the firſt and ſecond coming of our Savi-
our are often mingled together in the Prophecies of the Old Teſta-
merit; but in that mixture there are ſome characters whereby you
inay diſtinguiſlı what belongs to his firſt, and what to his ſecond
coining; what to the time when he came to ſuffer, and what to
the time when he ſhall come to reign. For inſtance, In theſe Pro-
phecies recited, though there are many things very applicable to his
firſt coming, yet that Regality which is often ſpoken of, and that uni-
verſal Peace and Innocency that will accompany it, cannot be veri-
fied of his coming in the flelh. Seeing it is plain, that in his ſtate
of humiliation he did not come as a King, to rule over the Nations
of the Earth. And he ſays himſelf exprelly, That his Kingdom is not
I uk. 23.42. of this World, John 18.36. And the Prayer of Salome, and of the good
Thief upon the
the Croſs, ſuppoſe it not then preſent, but to come.
Then as to the eſtabliſhment of Peace in his Kingdom, it does not at
all appear to me that there is more Peace in the World now than
21.111.20.21.
there
Chap.5. Concerning the New Heavens, &c.
115
3
parts
there was before our Saviour came into it; or that the Chriſtian
of the World are more peaceable than the unchriſtian. There
fore theſe great promiſes of a Pacifick Kingdom, which are exprelt
in terms as high and emphatical as can be imagin d, muſt belong to
fome other days, and ſome other ages, than what we have ſeen hi
therto.
You'l ſay, it may be, 'tis not the fault of the Goſpel that the World
is not peaceable, but of thoſe that profeſs it, and do not practiſe it.
This is true, but it do:s not anſwer the Prophecy; for that makes
no ſuch exception. And by ſuch a reſerve as this, you may elude
any Prophecy. So the Jews ſay, Their Meſſiah defers his coming
beyond the time appointed by Prophecy, becauſe of their ſins: but
we do not allow this for a good reaſon. The Ifraelites had their
promiſed Canaan, tho’ they had render'd themſelves unworthy of
it; and by this miethod of interpreting Prophecies, all the happineſs
and glory promiſed in the Millennial Kingdom of Chriſt may coine
to nothing, upon a pretended forfeiture. Threatnings indeed
may
have a tacit condition; God may be better than his word, and, up-
on repentance, divert his judgments; but he cannot be worſe than
his word, or fail of performance, when, without any condition ex-
prelt, he promiſes or propheſies good things to come. This would
deſtroy all aſſurance of Hope or Faith. Laſtly, This Prophecy con-
cerning Pacifick times or a Pacifick Kingdom, is in the 65th.chap. ſub- 112.65
joyn'd to the Renovation of the Heavens and the Earth, and ſeveral
marks of a change in the Natural World; which things we know did
not come to paſs at the firſt coming of our Saviour: there was no
change of Nature then, nor has been ever ſince. And therefore this
happy change, both in the Natural and Moral World, is yet to
1
come.
5
But, as we ſaid before, we do not ſpeak this excluſively of the
firſt coining of our Saviour, as to other parts of theſe Prophecies; for no
doubt that was one great deſign of them. And in the Prophecies
of the Old Teſtament, there are often three gradations, or gradual
accomplifliments; The firſt, in ſome King of Iſrael, or ſome Per-
fon or affair relating to Iſrael, as National only. The ſecond, in
the Melliah at his firſt coming. And the laſt, in the Meſſiah, and
his Kingdom at his ſecond coming. And that which we affirm and
contend for, is, that the Prophecies foremention'd have not a final
and total accomplifliment, either in the Nation of the Jers, or at
the firſt coming of our Saviour. And this we 'bide by.
The next Prophet that we mention'd as a witneſs of the future
Kingdom of Chriſt, is David. Who, in his Pſalıns, ſeems to be
pleas'd with this ſubject above all others; And when he is inoſt ex-
alted in his thoughts and Prophetical raptures, the Spirit carries hiin
into the Kingdom of the Melliah, to contemplate its glory, to ſing
praiſes to its King, and triumph over his Enemies: Pſal. 68. Let God
ariſe, let his enemies be ſcattered: Let them alſo that hate him flie before
him. As Smoke is driven away, ſo drive them array; as wax melteth
before the fire, ſo let the wicked periſh at the preſence of God. But les
the Righteous be glad, &c. The plain ground he goes upon in this
Pſalm, is the Deliverance out of Ægypt, and bringing the Iſraelites
Q 2
into
116
The Theory of the Earth. BOOK IV.
Ver. 18.
16.
1
unto the Land of C:inaan ; But when he is once upon the wing, he
foars to an higher pitch: from the type to the Antitype: To the
Ver. 32, &c. days of the Mefliah, the Aſcenſion of our Saviour; and, at length,
to his Kingdom and Dominion over all the Earth. The 45th. Plalm
is an Epithalamium to Chriſt and the Church, or to the Lumil
and his Sp.uſe. And wlien that will be, and in what ſtate, we may
learn from S. John, Apoc. 19.7,8. and ch. 21.2,9. Namely, after the
deſtruction of Babylon, in the New Jeruſalem glory. The words and
matter of the Two Prophets anſwer to one another; Here, in this
Pſalm, there is a Fight and Victory celebrated as well as a Marriage: and
PS.45.3, 4, 6. ſo there is in that 19th. Chapter of S. Fol.n. Here, the Prophet ſays,
Gird thy ſverd upon thy thigh, O moft Mighty, zrith thy glory and the
Majeſty. And in thy Majeſty ride proſperouſly, becauſe of truth and meek-
neſs and righteouſneſs: and thy right hand ſhall teach thee terrible things
.
Thy Throne, O God, is for ever and ever; The Scepter of thy Kingdom
Apoc. 19.15, is a right Scepter, &c. There S. John ſays, having deſcrib’da Conque-
rour on a white Horſe, Out of his mouth goeth a Marp Sword, that
with it he should finite the Nations : and he ſhall rule them rrith a rod
of Iron: and be treadeth the l'inc-preſs of the fierceneſs and rruth of
ilmighty God. And he hath on his veſture, and on his thigh a Name
written KING of KINGS, and LORD of LORDS. This is
the ſame glorious Conqueror and Bridegroom in both places: and
this Victory is not gain’d, nor theſe Nuptials compleated till the ſecond
coming of our Saviour.
In many other Pſalms, there are reflections upon this happy King-
doin, and the triumph of Chriſt over luis Enemies: as Pfal.2.Pſal.
9. Pfal.21. and 24. and 47. and 85. and 110, and others. In theſe,
and ſuch like Pſalms, there are lineaments and colours of a fairer
ſtate, than any we have yet ſeen upon Earth. Not but that in their
firſ inſtances and grounds they inay ſometimes reſpect the ſtate of
Ifrael, or the Evangelical ſtate: but the eye of the Prophet goes fur
ther, this does not terininate his ſight: His Divine Enthuſiaſın reaches
into another World: A World of Peace and Jniftice, and Holineſs :
of Joy, and Victory, and Triumph over all the wicked: and con-
ſequently ſuch a World, as neither we, nor our Fathers, have yet
ſeen.
This is an account of Two Prophets, David and Iſaiah: and of
what they have more openly declar'd concerning the future King-
dom of Chriſt. But to verifie S. Peter's words, in that forementi-
ond placé, AEŁ. 3. 21. viz. That all the Holy Prophets ſince the World
began, have ſpoken of the Reſtauration of all things at the ſecond
coming of Chriſt
. I ſay, to verifie this aſſertion of S. Peter's, we
muſt ſuppoſe, that, where the Prophets ſpeak of the Reſtauration
and future glory of Judab and Jeruſalem, they do, under thoſe Types,
repreſent to us the glory and happineſs of the Church in the future
Kingdom of Chriſt. And moſt of the Prophets, in this ſence, and
under theſe forms, have ſpoken of this Kingdom: In foretelling the
Reſtauration of Jeruſalem and Sion; and happy days, peace, plenty,
and proſperity to the People of Iſvizel.
Moſt of the Prophets, I ſay, from Moſes to Malachy, have ſpoken
of this Reſtauration. Moſes in the zoth. of Deut. ver.4,5,9. David, in
mail)
Chap.5. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
117
.
many of thoſe Pſalms we have cited. Jaiah, berides the places fore-
mention'd, treats amply of this ſubjcit, Chap. 51. and in ſeveral o-
ther plac-s * Solikewiſe the Prophet Ezekiel, Daniel, Hofel, Joel, * flie's .....
Amos, Obadiah, Mical), Z«plany, Huggi, Zachary, Malachy. All 13,77.ch.66
theſe have, either exprefly, or under the Types of Jeruſalem and Lickiel, ch.28.
Sion, foretold happy days, and a glorious triumph to the Church of the 37. Hef chos
God. And ſeeing in the New Teitament, and in the Prophecies of 3.18. Anosch.
St. John, the Chriſtian Church is still repreſented, as under perfe- 9. Obad. veta
cution and diſtreſs, till ille fall of Antichriſt, and the Millennial ch.4. ches
Kingdom ; 'Tis then, and not till then, that we muſt expect the Zeph. 3,14,676.
full accompliſlıment of tliete Prophecies; The Reſtauration that St. Haz. cons. 20cm
Peter ſays was ſpoken of, by all the Prophets: and the myſtery, which ch.9.9,000.00
St. John fays, (Apoc
. 19. 7.) was declared by his Servints the Prophets, sh. 14. Mil.ch.
.
and would be finiſh'd under the Seventh Trumpet, which ulhers in
the Kingdom of Chriſt.
It would be too long to examine all theſe places in the Prophets,
which you may conſult at leiſure. However it cannot ſeem ſtrange
that Jeruſalem ſhould be us`d in a typical or allegorical ſence, ſeeing
we often find ſuch applications of it in the New Teſtament: as Gal.
4.26. Heb. 12. 22. Apoc. 3. 12. And 'tis very natural that Jeruſalem
reſtor'd, thould fignifie tlie ſame thing as New Jerujiil.m; and therefore
that S. John, by his New Jeruſalem, intended the ſame thing, or the
ſame ſtate,that the ancient Prophets did by their Reſtauration of Feru-
ſalem. And if neither can be underſtood in a literal ſence, which, I be-
lieve, you will not contend for: they muſt both be interpreted of the
future happineſs and glory of the Church in the kingdom of Chriſt.
But to conclude this point wholly as to Scripture; If we make
reflection upon all the paſſages alledg’d in this and the foregoing
Chapter, whether out of the Old or New Teſtament, we muſt at
leaſt acknowledge thus inuch; That there are happy days, at one
time or other : Days of Peace and Righteouſneſs: of Joy and Tri-
umph : of external Proſperity and internal Sanctity : when Vertue
and Innocency thall be in the Throne, and Vice and vitious Men out
of
power or credit. That there are ſuch happy days Propheſied of
in Scripture, and promiſed to the Church of God. Whether you
call this the Reign of Chriſt and of his Saints, or by any other name,
it is not material at preſent to determine ; let the title be what you
will, as to the ſubſtance it cannot be denied to be a general Do-
Etrine of Prophetical Scripture. And we muſt not imagine, that the
Prophets writ like the Poets : feigned an Idea of a Romantick ſtate,
that never was, nor ever will be ; only to pleaſe their own fancies,
or the credulous people. Neither is it the itate of Heaven and eter-
nal life that is here meant or intended : For, beſides that they had
little or no light concerning thoſe Notions, in the Old Teſtament :
The Prophets generally in their deſcription of this happineſs, either
expreſs the Earth, or at leaſt give plain inarks of a Terreſtrial ſtate.
Wherefore the only queſtion that remains, is this, Whether theſe
happy Days are paſt already, or to come : Whether this bleſſed
ſtate of the Church is behind us, or before us: whether our Prede-
ceſſors have enjoy'd it, or our pofterity is to expect it? For we are
very ſure that it is not preſent; The World is full of Wars, and
rumours
118
Book IV,
The Theory of the Earth.
that at pre-
rumours of Wars : of Vice and Knavery, of Oppreſion and l'erre.
cution: and theſe are things d rectly contrary to the genius and
characters of the ſtate which we look after.
And if we look for it in times paſt, we can go no furtlier back
than the beginning of Chriſtianity. For S. John, the laſt of the Apo-
ftles, Propheſied of theſe times, as to coine : and plac’d them at the
end of his ſyſteme of Prophecies ; whereby one might conclude
that they are not only within the compaſs of the Chriſtian ages, but
far advanc'd into thein. But however, not to inlift upon
ſent, where will you find a thouſand years, from the birth of Chri-
ſtianity to this preſent age, that deſerves the name, or anſwers to
the characters of this Fure and Pacifick ſtate of the Church. The firſt
ages of Chriſtianity, as they were the inuſt pure, ſo likewiſe were
they the leaſt peaceable. Continually, more or leſs, under the Per-
ſecution of the Heathen Emperours; and ſo far from being the
Reign and Empire of Chriſt and his Saints over the Nations, that
Chriſtians were then, every where, in ſubjection or Navery; A
sour, feeble, helpleſs people, thruſt into Priſons, or thrown to the
Lyons, at the pleaſure of their Princes or Rulers. 'Tis true, when
the Empire became Chriſtian under Conſtantine, in the fourth Cen-
tury, there was, for a time, peace and proſperity in the Church,
and a good degree of Purity and Piety. But that peace was foon
diſturb’d, and that piety ſoon corrupted. The growing pride and
ambition of the Eccleſiaſticks, and their eaſineſs to admit or intro-
duce Superſtitious Practices, deſtroy'd the purity of the Church.
And as to the peace of it, Their conteſts about Opinions and Do.
Etrines, tore the Chriſtians themſelves into pieces; and, ſoon after,
an inundation of Barbarous People fell into Chriſtendom, and put
it all into flames and confuſion. After this Eruption of the Nor-
thern Nations, Mahometaniſm roſe in the Eaſt; and ſwarms of Sa.
racens, like armies of Locuſts, invaded, conquer'd, and planted
their Religion in ſeveral parts of the Roman Empire, and of the
Chriſtianiz'd World. And can we call ſuch tiines the Reign of
Chriſt, or the impriſonment of Satan? In the following ages, the
Turks over-run the Eaſtern Empire and the Greek Church, and ſtill
hold that miſerable people in ſlavery. Providence ſeems to have ſo
order'd affairs, that the Chriſtian World ſhould never be without
a WO E upon it, leſt it ſhould fanſie it ſelf already in thoſe happy
days of Peace and Proſperity, which are reſerv'd for future times.
Laſtly, whoſoever is ſenſible of the corruptions and perſecutions
of the Church of Rome, ſince ſhe came to her greatneſs; whoſoever
allows her to be myſtical Babylon, which muſt fall before, the King-
dom of Chriſt comes on; will think that Kingdomn duly plac'd by
S. John at the end of his Prophecies, concerning the Chriſtian
Church: and that there ſtill remains, according to the words of St.
Paul, (Hebr. 4.9.) a Sabbatiſm to the people of God.
СНАР.
Chap.6.
119
Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
CHAP. V I.
The ſence and teſtimony of the Primitive Church concerning
the Millennium, or future Kingdom of Chriſt: from the
times' of the Apoſtles to the Nicene Council. The ſecond
Propoſition laid down. When, by what means, and for what
reaſons, that doétrine was afterwards neglected or diſ-
countenanc'd.
.
N
1
Y.
ou have heard the voice of the Prophets and Apoſtles, decla-
ring the future Kingdom of Chriſt
. Next to theſe, the Pri-
mitive Fathers are accounted of good authority - Let us therefore
now enquire into their Sence concerning this Doctrine, that we
may give ſatisfaction to all parties ; And both thoſe that are guided
by Scripture alone, and thoſe that have a Veneration for Antiquity,
may find proofs ſuitable :o their inclinations and judgment.
And to make few words of it, we will lay down this Concluſi-
0:1, That the Millennial Kingdom of Chriſt was the general DoEtrine of
the Primitive Church, from the times of the Apoſtles to the Nicene
Council , incluſively. S. John out-liv'd all the reſt of the Apoſtles,
and towards the latter end of his life, being baniſh'd into the Ille
of Pathmos, he writ his Apocalypſe ; wherein he hath given us a more
full and diſtinct account of the Millennial Kingdom of Chriſt, than
any of the Prophets or Apoſtles before him. Papias, Biſhop of Hie-
rapolis, and Martyr ; one of S. J. br’s Auditors, as Irenæus teftities; Iren.
Lib. 5.6.336
taught the ſame Doctrine after S. John. He was the familiar friend
of Polycarp, another of S. John's Diſciples; and either from him, or
iminediately from S. John's mouth, he might receive this Doctrine.
That he taught it in the Church, is agreed on by all hands; both
hy thoſe that are his followers, as Irenæus ; and thoſe that are not
well-wiſhers to this Doctrine, as Euſebius and Jerome.
There is alſo another chanel wherein this Doctrine is Tradition-
ally deriv’d from S. John, namely by the Clergy of Aſia ; as Irenæus
tells us in the ſame Chapter. For, arguing the point, he ſhows that
the Blefing promis'd to Facob from his Father Ifaac, was not made
good to him in this life, and therefore he ſays, without doubt thoſe
words had a further aim and profpe&t upon the times of the Kingdom :
(ſo they us'd to call the Millennial ſtate) when the Juſt riſing from the
dead, ſhall reign: and when Nutture renew'd and ſet at liberty, Jb.ill yield
plenty and abundıınce of all things; being bleft with the dew of Heaven,
and
a great fertility of the E.zrth. According as has been related by thoſe
Eccleſiaſticks or Glergy, who fie St. John, the Diſciple of Chriſt ; and
heard of him WHAT OUR LORD HAD TAUGHT CONCERNING
THOSE TIMES. This, you ſee, goes to the Fountain-head. The
Chriſtian Clergy receive it from St. John, and St. John relates it
from the mouth of our Silviour.
So much for the Original authority of this Doctrine, as a Tradi-
rion : that it was from St. John, and by hijn from Chrift. And as
:
?
1
120
Book IV.
The Theory of the Earth.
to the popagation and prevailing of it in the Primitive Church, we
Dial. with can bring a witneſs beyond all exception, Juſtin Martyr, Contem-
Tryphon the
porary with Irenæus, and his Senior. He ſays, that himself
, and all
Few.
the Orihodox Chriſtians of his time, did acknowledge the Refurrection of
the flesh (ſuppoſe the firft Reſurrection) and a thouſand years riign in
Ferufalem reſtor’d, or in the New Jeruſalem. According as the Pro-
phets, Ezekiel, arid Ijuiah, and Others, atteſt with common conſent. As
St. Peter had ſaid before, A&t. 3. 21. That all the Prophets had spoken
of it. Then he quotes the 65th. Chapter of Iſaiah, which is a bul-
wark for this Doctrine, that never can be broken. And to thew
the Jem, with whom he had this diſcourſe, that it was the ſence of
our l'rophets, as well as of theirs, He tells him, that a certain Man
zmongſt us Chriſtians, by name "Fohn, one of the Apoſtles of Chriſt, in a
Revelation made to him did propheſie, that the faithful believers in Chriſt
Should live a thouſand years in the New Jeruſalem ; and after that ſhould
be the general Refurretion and day of Judgment. Thus you have the
thoughts and ſentiment of Juſtin Martyr, as to himſelf : as to all the
reputed Orthodox of his time; As to the ſence of the Prophets in
the Old Teſtament, and as to the ſence of St. John in the Apocalypſe
.
All conſpiring in confirmation of the Millenary Doctrine.
To theſe three Witneſſes, Papi.is, Irenæus, and Juſtin Martyr, we
inay add two more within the ſecond Age of the Church: Melito,
Bishop of Sardis, and St. Barnabas, or whoſoever was the Author of
the Epiſtle under his name. This Melito, by ſome is thought to be
the Angel of the Church of Sardis, to whom St. John directs the
Epiſtle to that Church : Apoc. 3. 1. But I do not take him to be fo
ancient ; However he was Bishop of that place, at leaſt in the ſecond
Century, and a Perſon of great Sanctity and Learning. He writ
many Books, as you may ſee in St. Jerome : and, as He notes out of
De Script. Ec- Tertulliari, mas by moſt Chriſtians reputed a Prophet. He was alſo a de.
clef.
clar'd Millenary, and is recorded as ſuch, both by Jerome and Gen-
Hadius. As to the Epiſtle of Barnabas, which we mention'd, it muſt
be very ancient, whoſoever is the Author of it, and before the third
Century; ſeeing it is often cited by Clemens Alexandrinus, who was
himſelf within the ſecond Century. The genius of it is very much
Millenarian, in tlie interpretation of the Sabbath, the promis'd Land,
a Day for a thouſand years, and concerning the Renovation of the World.
In all which, He follows the foot-ſteps of the Orthodox of thoſe times:
that is, of the Millenarians.
So much for the firſt and ſecond Centuries of the Church. By
which thort account it appears, that the Millenary Doctrine was
Orthodox and Catholick in thoſe early days. For theſe Authors do not
fet it down as a private opinion of their own, but as a Chriſtian Do-
čtrine, or an Apoſtolical Tradition. 'Tis remarkable what Papias ſays
of himſelf, and his way of Learning, in his Book call’d, The Expla-
Da Srist. Ec- nation of the Words of the Lírd, as St. Jerome gives us an account of
it: He lays in his Preface, He did not follow various opinions, but had
the Apoſtles for his Authors. And that he conſider'd what Andrew, what
Peter ſaid ; what Philip, what Thomas, and other Diſciples of the Lord.
As alſo what Ariſtion, and John the Senior, Diſciples of the Lord, what
they jpoke. And that he did not profit ſo much by reading Books, as by the
living
Dogm. Eccl.
. ک ک .
Chap.6. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
I 2 I
Lucinium.
living voice cif theſe perfons which refounded from them to that day. This
hath very much the air of Truth and Sincerity, and of a Man, that,
in good earneſt, fought after the Chriſtian Doctrine, from thoſe
that were the molt Authentick Teachers of it. I know Euſebius in
his Ecclefiaftical Hiſtory, gives a double Character of this Papias ; in
one place, he calls liiin, A very eloquent Man in all things, and ſkil vide Hieron.
ful in Scripture; and in another, he makes him a Man of a finali un- Epiſt. 28. ad
derſtanding. But what reaſon there is to ſuſpect Eufebius of partia-
lity in this point of the Millennium; we ſhall make appear hereafter:
However, We do not depend upon the Learning of Papias, or the
depth of his underſtanding: allow him but to be an honeſt Man,
anii a fair Witneſs, and 'tis all we delire. And we have little reaſon
to quellion his teltimony in this point, ſeeing it is backt by others
of good credit; and alſo becauſe there is no counter-evidence, nor
any witneſs that appears againſt him. For there is not extant, either
the Writing, Name, or Memory, of any Perſon, that conteſted this
doctrine in the firſt or ſecond Century. I ſay, that callid in
que-
ition this Millenary Doctrine, propos d after a Chriſtian manner ;
unleſs ſuch Hereticks as deny'd the Reſurrection wholly : or ſuch
Chriſtians as deny'd the Divine Authority of the Apocalypſe.
We proceed now to the Third Century. Where you find Tertul
limu, Origen, l'i&torinus, Biſhop and Martyr: Nepos Ægyptius, Cyprian,
and, at the end of it, Lactantius: All operily profelling, or impli-
citly favouring the Millenary Doctrine. We do not mention Cle-
wels Alexandrinus, contemporary with Tertullian, becauſe he hath
not any thing, that I know of, exprefly either for, or againſt the
Millennium. But he takes notice that the Seventh Day hath been
accounied Sacred, both by the Hebrews and Greeks, becauſe of the
Revolution of the World, and the Renovation of all things. And giving
this as a reaſon why they kept that day Holy, ſeeing there is not a
Revolution of the World every ſeven days, it can be in no other
fence than as the Seventh Day repreſents the ſeventh Millenary, in
which the Renovation of the World and the Kingdom of Chriſt, is
to be. As to Tertuliun, S. Jerome reckons him, in the firſt place,
amongſt the Latin Millenaries. And tho' his Book, about the Hope
of the Faithful, as alſo that about Paradiſe, which ſhould have given
us the greateſt light in this affair, be both loſt or ſuppreſs’d; yet
there are ſufficient indications of his Millenary opinion in his Tracts
againſt Marcion, and againſt Hermogenes. S. Gyprian was Tertullian's
admirer, and inclines to the fame opinion, fo far as one can judge,
in this particular ; for his period of Six Thouſand Years, and inaking
the Seventh Millenary the Conſunimation of all, is wholly according
to the Analogy of the Millenary Doctrine. As to the Two Biſhops,
l'ictorinus and Nepas, S. Ferome vouches for them. The Writings of
the one are loſt, and of the other ſo chang'd, that the fence of the
Author does not appear there now. But Lactantius, whom we
nam'd in the laſt place, does openly and profuſely teach this doctrine,
in his Divine Inſtitutions: and with the fame aſſurance that he does Book z.
other
parts of the Chriſtian Doctrine. For he concludes thus, ſpeak-
ing of the Milleunium, This is the dottrine of the Holy Prophets, which
are Chriflians follow. This is our wriſilom, &c. Yet he acknowledges
there
!
i
1
R
122
Book IV.
The Theory of the Earth.
3
there that it was kept as a myſtery or ſecret amongit the Chriſtiulis,
left the Heathens ſhould make any perverſe or odious interpretation
of it. And for the ſame or like rcafon, I believe, The Book of the
Apocalypſe was kept out of the hands of the Vulgar for ſome time,
and not read publickly, leſt it hould be found to have ſpoken
too openly of the fate of the Romuan Empire, or of this Millennial
State,
So much for the Firſt, Second, and Third Century of the Church,
But, by our concluſion, we engag'd to make out this proof as fir
as the Nicene Council, incluſivelyThe Nicene Council was about
the year of Chriſt 325. and we may reaſonably ſuppoſe, L.Etan-
tius was tlien living; at least he came within the time of Lontan-
tine's Empire. But however the Fathers of that Council are them-
ſelves our witnefles in this point. For, in th:ir Ecclefiaftical Forms
or Conſtitutions, in the chapter about the Providence of God, and about
the World, They ſpeak thus; The World zras inade meaner or leſs per-
felt, providentially; for God foreſee that man mould fin. Wherefore ne
expeł New Hiavens and a Nem Earth, according to the Holy Scriptures:
At the appearance atid Kingdom of the great God, and our Saviour Feu
sus Chriſt. And then, as Daniel ſays (ch. 7. 18.) The Saints of the
Doft High Skall take the Kingdom. And the Earth ſhall be Pure, Holy,
the Land of the Living, not of the dead. Which David foreſeeing by
the eye of Keith, ayes ont (P1.27.13.) I believe to ſee the good things
of the Lord, in the Land of the Living. Our Saviour ſays, Happy are
the nieek , for they ſhall inherit the Earth, Matt. 5:5. and the Prophet
Iſaiah färs, ( chap.26.6.) the feet of the meek and lomly ſell tread upon
So you ſee, according to the judgment of theſe Fathers, there
will be a Kingdom of Chriſt upon Earth; and moreover, that it will
be in the New Heavens and the New Earth. And, in both theſe
points, they cite the Prophets and our Saviour in confirmation of
them.
Thus we have diſcharg’d our promiſe, and given you an account
of the doctrine of the Millennium, or future Kingdom of Chriſt,
throughout the Three Firſt Ages of the Church, before any con
filerable corruptions were crept into the Chriſtian Religion. And
thoſe Authorities of ſingle and ſucceſſive Fathers, we have ſeald up
all together, with the declaration of the Nicene Fathers, in a Body.
Thoſe thát think Tradition a Rule of Faith, or a conſiderable mo-
tive to it, will find it hard to turn off the force of theſe Teſtimonies.
And thoſe that do not go ſo far, but yet have a reverence for Anti-
quity and the Primitive Church, will not eaſily produce better Au-
thorities, more early, more numerous, or more uncontradicted, for
any
Article that is not Fundamental. Yet theſe are but Seconds to
the Prophers and Apoſtles, who are truly the Principals in this
Cauſe. I will leave them altogether, to be examin'd and weigh'd
by the Impartial Reader. And becauſe tliey ſeem to me to make a
full and undeniable proof, I will now at the foot of the account ſet
down our ſecond Propoſition, which is this, That there is a Millen-
nial State, or a Future Kingdom of Chriſt and his Saints, Propheſied of
and Prooniſed, in the Old and Nem Teſtament; and receiv'd by the Pri-
initive Church as a Chriſtian and Catholick Do&trine.
11.
Profol. z.
HAVING
Chap.6. Concerning the New Heavens, &c.
123
'
HAY
AVING diſpatchd this main point. To conclude the Chap
ter and this Head of our Diſcourſe, it will b: ſome ſatisfaction
poffibly to ſee, How a Doctrine ſo generally receiv'd and approvºd,
came to decay and almoſt wear out of the Church, in following
Ages. The Chriſtian Millenary Doctrine was not call'd into queſti-
on, ſo far as appears from Hiſtory, before the middle of the third
Century ; when Dionyſius Alexandrinus writ againſt Nepos, an A
gyptian Biſhop, who had declar'd himſelf upon that ſubject
. But
we do not find that this Book had any great effect; for the declara-
tion or conſtitution of the Nicene Fathers was after: and in S. Fe-
rome's time, who writ towards the end of the fourth Century,
this Doctrine had ſo much Credit, that, He, who was its greateſt
adverſary, yet durſt not condemn it, as he ſays himſelf. lua licet
1012 fequamur, tamen damnare 1200 poffumus; quià multi Ecclefiaftico-
rum virorum & Martyres ifta dixerunt. Ilhich things, or do&trines,
ſpeaking of the Millennium, tho' me do not follorr, yet we cannot con-
demn. Becauſe many of our Church-men, and M.irtyrs, have affirmed
theſe things. And when Apollinarius replyed to that Book of Diony-
fius, S. Jerome ſays, that, not only thoſe of his omi Set, but a great
multitude of other Chriſtians did agree with Apollinarius in that parti-
cular. Ut præfaga mente jam cernam, quantorum in me rabies concitanda
fit. That I now foreſee, how many will be enrag'd ag.iinſt me, for what
Thive Spoken againſt the Millenary Dvetrine.
We may therefore conclude that in S. Ferome's time the Millena-
ries inade the greater party in the Church; for a little matter would
not have frighted him from cenſuring their opinion. S. Jerome was
a rough and rugged Sairit, and an unfair adverſary, that uſually run
down, with heat and violence, what ſtood in his way. As to liis
unfairneſs, he ſhews it fufficiently in this very cauſe, for he gene-
rally repreſents the Millerary Doctrine after a Judaical rather than a
Chriſtian manner. And in reckoning up the chief Patrons of it, he
always skips Juſtin Martyr. Who was not a Man ſo obſcure as to be
overlook'd : and he was a Man that had declar'd himſelf ſufficierit-
ly
upon this point, for he ſays, both himſelf and all the Orthodox of
his time, were of that judgment, and applyes both the Apocalypſe of
1. Jolini, and the 65th chip. of Iliriah, for the proof of it. As we
noted before.
As S. Ferome was an open enemy to this Doctrine, ſo Eufebius was
a back friend to it ; and repreſented every thing to its diſadvantage,
ſo far as was tolerably conliſtent with the fairneſs of an Hiſtorian.
He gives a flight character of Papias, without any authority for
it ; and brings in one Gains that 'imakes Cerinthus to be the Author
Ecclef. Hift.
of the Apocalypſe and of the Millennium: and calls the Viſions there 3.22.
umſtrous ſtories. He himſelf is willing to shuffle off that Book from Teeglonozáasi
Fihn the Evangeliſt to another fohn a Presbytcr: and to thew his
skill in the interpretation of it, lie makes the New Jeruſalem ini 13:32
. de vita
Conftan
R2
the
124
Book IV.
The Theory of the Earth.
the 21th chap. to be Conftantine's Jeruſalem, when he turn'd the
Heathen Temples there into Chriſtian. A wonderful invention. As
S. Jerome by his flouts, ſo Euſibilis by luiſter inſinuations, cndea
vour'd to leſſen the reputation of this Doctrine; and the Art they
both usd, was, to miſrepreſent it as Judaic.il. But we muſt not
caſt off every doctrine which the Jews believ'd, only for that rca-
ſon; for we have the ſame Oracles which they had, and the fame
Prophets: and they have collected from them the ſame general doctrine
that we have, nainely, that There will be an happy and pacifick State
of the Church, in future times. But as to the circumſtances of this
ftate we diffur very much ; They ſuppoſe the Mofaical Law will be
reſtor'd, with all its pomp, rites, and ceremonies : whereas we ſup-
poſe the Chriſtian Worihip, or ſomething more perfect, will then
take place. Yet S. Ferome has the confidence, even there where he
fpeaks of the many Chriſtian Clergy and Martyr's that held this
doctrine: has the confidence, I ſay, to repreſent it, as if they held
that Circumciſion, Sacrifices, and all the Judaical rites, ſhould then
be reſtor'd. Which ſeems to me to be a great flander, and a great
inſtance how far mens paſſions will carry them, in iiſrepreſenting
an opinion which they have a mind to diſagrace.
But as we have reaſon to blame the partiality of thoſe that op-
poſed this doctrine, ſo, on the other hand, we cannot excuſe the
Patrons of it from all indiſcretions. I believe they might partly
themſelves make it obnoxious; by mixing ſome things with it, from
pretended Traditions, or the Books of the Sibylls, or other private
Authorities, that had ſo ſufficient warrant from Scripture; and
things, ſometimes, that Nature would not eaſily bear. 'Beſides, in
later ages, they ſeem to have dropt one half of the doctrine, namely,
the Renovation of Nature, which Irenæus, Juſtin Martyr, and the An-
çients, joyn inſtparably with the Millennium. And by this omiſſion,
the doctrine hath been made leſs intelligible, and one part of it in-
conſiſtent with anvther. And when their pretenſions were to reign
upon this preſent Earth, and in this preſent ſtate of Nature, it gave
a jealouſie to Temporal Princes, and gave occaſion likewiſe to many
of Fanatical Spirits, under the notion of Saints, to aſpire to domini
on, after a violent and tumultuary manner. This I reckon as one
great cauſe that brought the doctrine into diſcredit. But I liope by
reducing of it to the true ſtate, we ſhall cure this and other ahuſes,
for the future.
Laſtly, It never pleas'd' the Church of Rome; and ſo far as the
influence and authority of that would go, you may be ſure it would
be depreſt and diſcouritenanc'd. I never yet met with a Popith
Doctor that held the Millennium; and Baron us would have it paſs
for an Hereſie, and Papias for the Inventor of it; whereas, if Irenæus
may be credited, it was receiv'd from S. John, and by hiin from the
inolith of our Saviour. And neither S. Jerome, nor his friend Pope Da-
maſus, durſt ever condemn it for an hereſie. It was always indeed un
eaſie, and gave offence, to the Church of Roone, becauſe it does not
fuit to that Scheme of Chriſtianity, which they have drawn. They
ſuppoſe Chriſt reigns already, by his Vicar, the Pope: and treads
upon the Necks of Emperors and Kings. And if they could buit
fuppreſs
ma
home
Chap.7. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
125
ſuppreſs the Northern Hereſie, as they call it, they do not know what
a Millennium would ſignifie, or low the Church could be in an hap-
pier condition than ſhe is. The Apocalypſe of St. John does ſuppoſe
the true Church under hardſhip and perſecution, more or leſs, for
the greateſt part of the Chriſtian Ages : nainely for 1260 years,
while the Witneſſes are in Sack-cloth. But the Church of Rome hath
been in proſperity and greatneſs, and the commanding Church in
Chriſtendom, for ſo long or longer, and hath ruld the Nations
with a Rod of Iron; fo as that mark of the true Church, does not
favour her at all. And the Millennium being properly a reward and
triumph for thoſe that come out of Perſecution, ſuch as have liv'd
always in pomp and proſperity can pretend to no ſhare in it, or be-
nefit by it. This has made the Church of Rome have always an ill
eye upon this Doctrine, becauſe it ſeein'd to have an ill eye
upon her. And as ſhe grew in ſplendor and greatneſs, ſhe eclips'd
and obſcur'd it inore and more : ſo that it would have been loft
nut of the World as an obſolete errour, if it had not been reviv'd
by ſome of the Reforination.
CHA P. VII.
The true ſtate of the Millennium, according to Characters
taken from Scripture ; ſome miſtakes concerning it, ex-
amin'd.
W
E have made ſufficient proof of a Millennial ſtate, from
Scripture and Antiquity; and upon that firm Balis have
ſerled our ſecond Propolition. We ſhould now deterinine the Time
and Place of this future Kingdom of Chriſt : Not whether it is to
be in Heaven, or upon Earth: for that we ſuppoſe determin'd al-
ready; but whether it is to be in the preſent Earth, and under the
preſent conſtitution of Nature, or in the New Heavens, and Nem
Eirth, which are promis'd after the Conflagration. This is to make
our Third Propoſition : and I ſhould have proceeded immediately to
the examination of it, but that I imagine it will give us ſome light
in this affair, if we enquire further into the true ſtate of the Mil-
lennium, before we determnine its Time and Place.
We have already noted ſome moral Characters of the Millennial
ſtate ; And the great Natural Character of it, is this in general,
That it will be Paradiſucal
. Free from all inconveniences, either of
external Nature, or of our own Bodies. For my part, I do not un-
derſtand how there can be any conſiderable degree of happineſs
without Indolency: nor how there can be Indolency, while we have
ſuch Budies as we have now, and ſuch an external conſtitution of
Nature. And as there muſt be Indolency, where there is happineſs ;
ſo there muſt not be Indigency, or want of any due comforts of life.
For where there is Indigency, there is ſollicitude, and diſtraction, and
uneaſineſs, and fear: Paſſions, that do as naturally diſquiet the Soul,
as
+
126
Book IV.
The I becry of the Earth.
1
as pain does the Body. Therefore Indolency and Plenty ſeem to be
two efſential Ingredients of every happy ftale; and theie two in con-
junction male lat ſtate we call Paradiſiucal.
Now the Scripture ſeems plainly to exempt the Sons of the Nem
Ferufalem, or of the Millennium, from all pain or nunt, in thoſe
words, Apoc. 21. 4. And God Jhall uripe away all tears from their eyes.
And there ſhall be no more death, neither forror, nor crying : neither Jhall
there be any more pain : for the former things are paſſed away. And the
Lord of that Kingdom, He that ſate upon the Throne, ſaid, Behold I
make all things new, ver. 5. This Renovation is a reſtauration to ſome
former ſtate: and I hope not to that ſtate of indigency, and miſery,
and diſeaſedneſs, which we languiſh under at preſent. But to that
priſtine Paradiſiacal ſtate, which was the bleſſing of the firſt Heavens
and the first Eartlı.
As Health and Plenty are the Bleſſings of Nature, fo, in Civil af-
fairs, Peace is the greateſt bleſſing. And this is inſeparably annext
to tlie Millennium: an indelible character of the Kingdom of Chriſt.
And by Pezice we underſtand, not onely freedown from Perſecution
upon religious accounts, but that Nation Sh.ill not riſe up againſt Nati-
on, upon any account whatſoever. That bloody Monſter, War, that
hath devour'd ſo many Millions of the Sons of Adam, is now at
length to be chain d up: and the Furies, that run throughout the
Earth, with their Snakes and Torches, ſhall be thrown into the
Abyſs, to ſting and prey upon one another. All evil and miſchierous
paſſions ſhall be extinguiſhi’d: and that not in men onely, but even
in Brute creatures, according to the Prophets. The Lamb and the Lyon
Mall lie down together, and the fucking Child Mall play with the Bafilisk.
Happy days, when not onely the Temple of Janus ſhall be ſhut up
for a thouſand years, and the Nations ſhall beat their forords into plum.
Thares: but all enmities and antipathies ihall ceaſe, all acts of hoſti-
lity, throughout all nature. And this Univerſal Peace is a demon-
ftration alſo of the former character, Univerſal Plenty : for where
there is want and neceſſitouſneſs, there will be quarrelling.
Fourthly, 'Tis a Kingdom of Righteouſneſs, as well as of Peace.
Theſe alſo muſt go together; for unrighteous Perſons will not live
long in peace, no more than indigent Perſons. The Pſalmiſt there
fore joyns them together : and Plenty alſo, as their neceſſary preſer
vative: in his deſcription of the Kingdom of Chriſt: Pfal. 85.10,11,
12. Mercy, and truth are met together : Righteouſneſs and
kiſſed each other. Truth Ssall Spring out of the Earth, and righteonfireſ,
Shall look down from Heaven. Tea the Lord Shall give good, and our Land
Shall yield her increaſe. This will not be a medley-ſtate, as thic preſent
World is, good and bad mingled together ; but a chofen generation,
a royal Prieſthood, an holy Nation, a peculiar people. Thoſe that have a
part in the firſt Reſurrection, the Scripture pronounceth tliemn Holy
and Bleſſed: and ſays, the ſecond death ſhall have no porrer over them
Satan alſo is bound and ſhut up in the bottomleſs Pit, and has no
liberty of tempting or ſeducing this People, for a thouſand years :
but at the end of that time, he will incet with a degenerate cren,
ſeparate and aliens to the Holy City, that will make war againſt il,
Apoc.5. 9, and periſh in the attempt. In a word, thoſe that are to enjoy !!11*
date
pe.ice 6.122
Chap.7. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
127
Ch. 14. 3, 4
Ch. 21. 27
שכינה
ſtate, are always diſtinguiſh'd from the multitude, as People re.
deem'd from the Earth; That have waſh'd their Robes, and made Ch.7.14
them white in the blood of the Lamb; and are repreſented as Victors
over the World; with ſuch other Characters as are incompetible to
any but the righteous.
Fifthly, Th:s will be a ſtate under a peculiar divine preſence and
conduct. It is not eaſie indeed to determine the manner of this
pre-
ſence, but the Scripture plainly implies ſome extraordinary divine
preſence to enlighen and enliven that ſtate. When the Nem Jerufat-
lem was come down), St. John ſays, And I heard a great voice out of. Aſoc. 21. 3.
Heaven, Suying, Behold the Tabernacle of God is with men: and be wilt
dwell with them, and they Jhall be his people : and God himſelf Mall be
urith them and be their God. And the like is promis'd to the Palin-
bearing Company, Chap. 7.15. where they are admitted to the pri-
viledges of the New Jerufalem. When our Saviour was incarnate,
and vouchſafed to dwell ainongſt the Children of Men, the ſame
phraſe is us’d by this fame Author, Joh. 1. 14. The Word was made Esxnvase.
flesh, and Tabernacled amongſt usi and we beheld his glory, &c. We
read it, He dwelt amongſt us, but render'd more cloſely, it is, He ſet
his Tabernacl amongſt us. And that which tlie Hebren's call the She was
kinah, or divine preſence, comes from a word of the like ſignificati- Nev. par. 1. 6.
on and ſound with the Greek word here us’d. Therefore there will 25.
be a Shekinah in that kingdom of Chrift; but as to the mode of it,
I am very willing to confeſs my ignorance.
The laſt Character that belongs to this ſtate, or rather to thoſe
that enjoy it, is, that they are Kings and Prieſts unto God. This is a
character often repeated in Scripture, and therefore the more to be
regarded. It occurs thrice in the Apocalypſe in formal terms, Ch. 1.6.
Ch. 5. 10. Ch. 20. 6. And as to the Regal dignily apart, that is fur-
ther expreft, either by the Donation of a Kingdom, as in Daniel's
phraſe, Chap. 7.18,22, 27. Or by placing upon Thrones, with a judi-
cial power ; which is the New Teſtament Ityle, Mat. 19. 28. Luk.
22.29, 3p. Revel. 20.4. Theſe two Titles, no doubt, are intended
10 comprehend the higheſt honours that we are capable of: theſe
being the higheſt dignities in every Kingdom; and ſuch as were by
the Ancients, buih in the Eaſt and in the Weſt, commonly united
in one and the fame Perſon. Their Kings being Prieſts, like Melchi.
fedeck : : or as the Ronian Emperour was Pontifex Maximus. But as to
the Sacerdotal character, that ſeems chiefly to reſpect the temper
of the mind; to lignilie a People dedicated to God and his Service:
Separate from the World, and from ſecular affairs : Spending their
time in devotion and contemplation, which will be the great em.
ployments of that happy Itate. For where there is eaſe, peace, and
plenty of all things ; l'efin'd' Bodies, and purified Minds, there will
be more inclination to intellectual exerciſes and entertainments :
which they may attend upon, without any diſtraction, having nei-
ther want, pain, nor worldly buſineſs-
The Title of King implies a confluence of all things that conſtitute
temporal happineſs. 'Tis the higheſt thing we can with any in this
World, to be a King. So as tlie Regal dignity ſeems to comprehend
all the Goods of Fortune, or external felicity : And the Sacerdotal,
the
128
Book V.
The Theory of the Earth.
the Goods of the Mind, or internal : Both which concur in the c011-
ftitution of true happineſs. There is alſo a further force and empha-
fis in this notion, of the Saints being made Kings, if we conlider it com-
paratively, with reſpect to what they were before in this World:
where they were not only mean and deſpicable, in ſubjection and
ſervility, but often under perſecution, abus’d and trainpied upon,
by the ſecular and Eccleliaftical Powers. But now the Scene is
chang’d, and you ſee the reverſe of Providence, according as Abra-
ham ſaid to the Rich m:112, Son, remember that thou in thy life time re-
eived/t thy good things, and likewiſe Lazarus evil things. But now he is
comforted, and thou art tormented. Now they are ſet upon Thrones
and Tribunals, who were before arraigned as Criminals, and
brought before tyrannical Judicatures. They are now Laws and
Law-givers to themſelves: in a true ſtate of Royal Liberty, neither
under the domination of evil men, nor of their own evil paf-
tions.
Some poſſibly may think, that this high character of being made
Prieſts and Kings to God, is not general to all that enjoy the M llen-
02271, but a prerogative belonging to the Apoſtles and ſome of the
chiei Martyrs, who are eminently rewarded for their eininent fer-
vices. But Scripture, as far as I perceive, applyes it to all that inhe
rit that Kingdomn. The redeemed out of every kindred, and tongue, ind
people, and nation, are made Kings and Prieſts to God, and ſhall reign
012 i he earth, ilpoc. 5.9, 10. And in the 20th chap, ver. 6. all the Sons
of the firſt Reſurrection are made Prieſts of God and ſhall reign with
him a thouſand years. Here is no diſtinction or diſcrimination thus
ar. Not that we ſuppoſe an univerſal equality of conditions in the
Millennial ſtate, but as to all theſe characters which we have given
of it, I do not perceive that they are reſtrain’d or confin'd by Scrip-
tule to ſingle perſons, but inake the general happineſs of that ſtate,
and are the portion of every one that is admitted into the New Je
ruſalem.
Others poſſibly may think that this priviledge of the firſt Refurre-
Etion is not cominon to all that enjoy the Millennial State. For tho
S. John, who is the only perſon that hath made expreſs mention of
the firſt Refurrection, and of the thouſand years reign of Chriſt, does
joyn theſe two as the ſame thing, and common to the ſame perfons ;
yet I know there are ſome that would diſtinguiſh them as things of
a different extent, and alſo of a different nature. They ſuppoſe the
Martyrs only will riſe from the dead ; and will be immediately
tranſlated into Heaven, and there paſs their Millennium in celeſtial
glory. While the Church is ſtill here below, in her Millennium, ſuch
as it is ; a ſtate indeed bet er than ordinary, and free from perſecu-
tion: but obnoxious to all the inconveniences of our preſent mortal
life, and a medly of good and bad people, without ſeparation. This
is ſuch an Idea of the Millennium, as, to my eye, hath neither beau-
ty in it, nor foundation in Scripture. That the Citizens of the Nem
Jeruſalem are not a iniſcellaneous company, but a Community of
righteous perſons, we have noted before: and that the ſtate of na-
ture will be better than it is at preſent. But, beſides this, what war-
rant liave they for this Aſcenſion of the Martyrs into Heaven at that
time?
Chap.8. Concerning the New Heavens,&c. 129
time? Where do we read of that in Scripture? And in thoſe things
that are not matters of Natural Order, but of Divine economy,
we ought to be very careful how we add to Scripture.
The Scripture ſpeaks only of the Reſurrection of the Martyrs, Apoc.
20.45. But noť a word concerning their Alienfion into Heaven. Will
that be viſible? We read of our Saviour's Reſurrection and Aſcenſion,
and therefore we have reaſon to affirm them both. Wę read alſo
of the Reſurrection and Aſcenſion of the Witneſſes, ( Apoc. 11.) in a
figurate fence, and in that ſence 'we may álfert them upon good
grounds. But as to the Martyrs, we read of tlreir Reſurrection on-
ly, without any thing expreſt or imply'd about their Aſcenſion. By
what Authority then ſhall we add this New Notion to the Hiſtorý
or Scheme of the Millennium? The Scripture on the contrary, makes
mention of the deſcent of the New Jerufalem, Apoc. 2 1.2, making the
Earth the Theatre of all that affair. And the Camp of the Saints
is
upon the Earth, ver. 9. and theſe Saints are the ſame perſons, ſo
far as can be collected from the text, that riſe from the dead, and
reign’d with Chriſt, and were Prieſts to God, ver.4,5,6. Neither is
there any diſtinction made, that I find, by S. John, of two ſorts of
Saints in the Millennium, the one in Heaven, and the other upon
Earth. Laſtly, The four and twenty Elders, ch.5.10. tho' they were
Kings and Prieſts unto God, were content to reign upon Earth. Now
who can you ſuppoſe of a ſuperiour order to theſe four and twenty
Elders: Whether they repreſent the twelve Patriarchs and twelve
Apoſtles, or whomſoever they repreſent, they are plac'd next to him
· that fits upon the Throne, and they have Crowns of Gold upon their
ch. T. IA
heads, ch.4.4. There can be no marks of honour and dignity greater
than theſe are; and therefore ſeeing theſe higheſt Dignitaries in the
Millennium or future Kingdom of Chriſt
, are to reign upon Earth,
there is no ground to ſuppoſe the aſſumption of any other into Hea-
ven upon that account, or upon that occaſion.
This is a ſhort and general draught of the Millennial ſtate, or fu-
ture Reign of the Saints, according to Scripture. Wherein I have
endeavour'd to rectifie ſome miſtakes or miſconceptions about it:
That viewing it in its true Nature, we may be the better able to
judge, when and where it will obtain. Which is the next thing to
be conſider'd.
1
}
+
.
1
$
СНАР.
130
Book IV:
The Theory of the Earth,
I
CHAP. VIII.
The Third Propoſition laid down, concerning the Time and
Place of the Millennium. Several Arguments us’d to
prove that it cannot be till after the Conflagration : and
that the New Heavens and the New Earth are the true
Seat of the bleſſed Millennium.
W
Propol. 3.
E come ñow to the Third and laſt head of our Diſcourſe:
To determine the Time and Place of the Millennium. And
ſeeing it is indifferent whether the proofs lead or follow tle Con-
cluſion, we will lay down the Concluſion in the firſt place; that our
buſineſs may be more in view; and back it with proofs in the fol-
lowing part of the Chapter. Our Third and laſt Propoſition therefore
is this, That the Bleſſed Millennium, (properly ſo called ) according as
it is defcribd in Scripture, cannot obtain in the preſent Earth, nor under
the preſent conſtitution of Nature and Providence ; but is to be celebrated
in the New Heavens and New Farth, after the Gonflagration. This
Propoſition, it may be, will ſeem a Paradox or fingularity to many,
even of thoſe that believe a Millennium ; We will therefore make it
the buſineſs of this Chapter, to ſtate it, and prove it ; by ſuch Ar-
guments as are manifeſtly founded in Scripture and in Reaſon.
And to prevent miſtakes, we muſt premiſe this in the firſt place ;
That; thio' the Bleſſed Millemium will not be in this Earth; yet we
allow that the ſtate of the Clurch here, will grow much better
than it is at preſent. There will be a better idea of Chriſignifty, and
according to the Prophecies, a full Refurre Elicr of the Witneſſes, and
an Aſcenſion into power, and the tenth part of the City will fall;
which things imply eaſe froin Perſecution, The Converfion of fome
part of the Chriſtian World to the reformed Faitly, and a conſider-
able dimination of the power of Antichriſt. But this ſtill comes
ſhort of the happineſs and glory wherein the future Kingdom of
Chriſt is repreſented. Which cannot come to paſs till elie Man of Siva
be deſtroy'd, with a total deſtruction. After the Reſurrection of
the Witnelles, there is a Third WO E yet to come: and how long
that will laſt, does not appear. If it bear proportion with the pre-
ceding WOES, it may laſt ſome hundreds of years. And we can
not imagine the Millennium to begin till that WO E be finiſh’d. As
neither till the Vials be poured out, in the 15th. chap. which cannot
be all pour'd out till after the Reſurrection of the Witneſſes; thoſe
Vials being the last plagues that compleat the deſtruction of Anti-
chriſt. Wherefore allowing that the Church, upon the Reſurrection
and Aſcenſion of the Witneſſes, will be advanc'd into a better con-
dition, yet that condition cannot be the Millennial ſtate; where the
Beaſt is utterly deſtroy'd, and Satar. bound, and cait into the bot-
tomleſs pit.
This being premis’d, let us now examine what grounds there are
for the Tranſlation of that bleſſed ſtate into the New Heavens and
New
Chap.8. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
131
Iww Earth: ſeeing that Thought, it may be, to many perfonis,
will appear new and extraordinary. In the fir!t place, We ſuppolo
it out of diſpute, that tiere will be New Heavers and a New Earth
after the Conflagration. This was our firſt.Propofition, and we de
pend upon it, as ſufficiently provid both from Scripture and Anti-
quity. This being admitted, How will you flock this New Earth?
Whät uít will you put it to? 'Twill be a much nobler Earth, and
beter built than the preſent: and 'tis pity it ihould only float about,
empty and uſeleſs, in the wild Air. If you will not make it the ſeat
and habitation of the Juſt i:1 the ble led Millenz:,i1m, what will you
inake it? How will it turn to account? What hath Providence de-
find it for? We muſt 1100 ſuppoſe New Worlds made without
countel or delign. And as, on the one hand, you cannot tell what
to do with this New Creation, if it be not thus employd: ſo, on
the other hand, it is every way fitted and ſuited to be an happy and
Paradiſiacal habitation, and anſwers all the natural Characters of
the Millennial ſtate;, which is a great preſumption that it is deſign'd
for it.
But to argue this more cloſely upon Scripture-grounds. S. Peter
fays, the Righteous ſhall inhabit the New Heavens and the New
Earth: 2 Pet. 3. 13. Nevertheleſs, according to his promiſe, we look
Verr Hervens and New Earth, WHEREIN DH'ELLETH RIGH-
TEOUSNESS: that is, a Righteous People, as we have thewn be-
fore. But who are theſe Righteous People ? That's the great que-
ſtion. If you compare S. Peter's New Heavens and New Earth with
S. John's, Apoc. 2 1. 1. 2. it will go far towards the reſolution of this
queſtion : For S. John ſeems plainly to make the Inhabitants of the
Nem Jeruſalem to be in this New Earth. I ſam, ſays he, Nem Hea-
vens and a Nero Earth: and the New Jeruſalem deſcending from God
out of Heaven ; therefore deſcending into this New Eurth, which he
had mention'd immediately before. And there the Tabernacle of God
was urith men, ver. 3. and there He that fat upon the Throne, ſaid,
Behold I make all things Nem. Referring ſtill to this New Heavens
and New Earth, as the Theatre where all theſe things are acted, or
all theſe Scenes exhibited: from the firſt Verſe to the eighth. Now
the New Jeruſalem ſtate being the ſame with the Millennial, if the
one be in the New Heavens and New Earth, the other is there alſo.
And this interpretation of S. Fohn's word is confirm'd and fully
aſſur'd to us by the Prophet Iſaiah; who alſo placeth the joy and re-
joycing of the New Jeruſalem in the New Heavens and New Earth :
Chap.05.17, 19. For behold I create new Heavons and a new Earth :
and the former Jhall not be remembred: but be gou glad and rejoyce for
ever in that which I create: for behold, I create Jerufalem a rejoycing,
and her peuple a joy. Namely, in that New Heavens and New Earth.
Which anſwers to S. John's Viſion of the New Jeruſalem being let
down upon the New Earth.
To theſe Reaſons, and deductions froin Scripture, we might add
the teltimony of ſeveral of the Fathers ; I mean of thoſe that were
Millenaries. For we are ſpeaking now to ſuch as believe the Mil-
lennium, but place it in the preſent Earth before the Renovation
whereas the ancient Millenaries, fuppos’d the regeneration and re-
novation
)
(
4
S:
132 The Theory of the Earth. Book IV
1
. ر32
M290.
reſpon. 93.
novation of the World before the kingdom of Chriſt caine. As
* Li. s.ch.
you may ſee in * Irenæus, (a) Juſin Martyr, (b) Tertullian, (c) Lél.1):-
trus, and (d) the Author ad Orthodoxos. And the neglect of this, I
a) Dial. cum look upon as one reaſon, as we noted before, that brought that do.
(b) Contra Etrine into diſcredit and decay. For when they plac'd the Kingdom
of the Saints upon this Earth, it became more capable of being abus'd,
(c) Li, 7.
(d) Quast.co by fanatical ſpirits, to the diſturbance of the World, and the inva-
fion of the rights of the Magiſtrates, Civil or Eccleſiaſtical, under that
notion of Saints. And inade them alſo dream of ſenſual pleaſures,
ſuch as they ſee in this life : Or at leaſt gave an occaſion and oppor-
tunity to thoſe, that had a mind to make the doctrine odious, of
charging it with theſe conſequences. All theſe abuſes are cut off,
and theſe ſcandals prevented, by placing the Millennium aright.
Namely, not in this preſent Life, or on this preſent Earth, but in the
New Creation, where Peace and Righteouſneſs will dwell. And this
is our firſt Argument why we place the Millennium in the New
Heavens and New Earth: and 'tis taken partly, you fee, from the
reaſon of the thing it felf, the difficulty of aſligning any other uſe
of the New Earth, and its fitneſs for this; and partly from Scri-
pture-evidence, and partly from Antiquity.
The ſecond argument for our opinion, is this; The preſent con-
ftitution of Nature will not bear that happineſs, that is promis d
in the Millennium, or is not conſiſtent with it. The diſeaſes of our
Bodies, the diſorders of our Paſſions, the incommodiouſneſs of exter-
nal Nature; Indigency, ſervility, and the unpeaceableneſs of the
World; Theſe are things inconſiſtent with the happineſs that is pro-
mis'd in the Kingdom of Chriſt. But theſe are conſtant attendants
upon this Life, and inſeparable from the preſent ſtate of Nature.
Suppoſe the Millennium was to begin Nine or Ten Years hence, as
ſoine pretend it will. How ihall this World, all on a ſudden, be
AJOC. 21. 4. metamorphos'd into that happy ſtate? No more forror, nor crying,
izor pain, nur death, ſays S. John: All former things are paſt array. But
how paft away? Shall we not have the ſame Bodies: and the fame
external Nature: and the fame corruptions of the Air : and the
ſame excefles and intemperature of Seaſons ? Will there not be the
ſame barrenneſs of the ground: the ſame number of People to be
fed : and inuft they not get their living by the ſweat of their brows,
with ſervile, labour and drudgery? How then are all former evils paſt
away? And as to publick affairs, while there are the ſame neceſſities
of humane Life, and a diſtinction of Nations, thoſe Nations ſoine-
times will have contrary intereſts, will claſh and interfere one with
another: whence differences, and conteſts, and Wars will ariſe, and
the Thouſand Years Truce, I am afraid, will be often broken. We
miglit add alſo, that if our Bodies be not chang'd, we ſhall be ſub-
ject to the ſame appetites, and the ſame paſſions: and
vices will grow: aš bad fruit upon a bad Tree. To conclude, ſo
long as our Bodies are the ſaine: external Nature the ſame: The
neceſſities of humane Life the ſame : which things are the roots
of evil; you may call it a Millennium, or what you pleaſe, but
there will be ſtill diſeaſes, vices, wars, tears and cries,' pain and
ſorrow in this Millenuium; and if ſo, 'tis a Millennium of your
upon thoſe,
OWO
1
Chap.8. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
133
own making; for that which the Prophets deſcribe is quite another
thing.
Furthermore, if you ſuppoſe the Millennium will be upon this
Earth, and begin, it may be, ten or twenty years hence, How will
it be introducd; how ſhall we know when we are in it, or when
we enter upon it? If we continue the ſame, and all Nature continue
the ſame, we ſhall not diſcern when we flip into the Millennium.
And as to the Moral ſtate of it, ſhall we all, on a ſudden, become
Kings and Prieſis to God? wherein will that change conſiſt, and
how will it be wrought? St. John makes the First Reſurrection intro-
duce the Millennium ; and that's a conſpicuous mark and bounda-
ry. But as to the moderni or vulgar Millennium, I know not how
'tis uther’d in. Whether they ſuppoſe a viſible reſurrection of the
Martyrs, and a viſible Aſcenſion: and that to be a Signal to all the
World that the Jubilee is beginning : or whether 'tis gradual and
creeps upon us inſenlībly: or the fall of the Beaſt marks it. Theſe
things need both explication and proof; for to me they ſeem either
arb.trary, or unintelligible.
But to purſue our deſign and Subject. That which gives me the
greateſt ſcandal in this doctrine of the vulgar Millennium, is, their
joyning things together that are really inconſiſtent ; a natural
World of one colour, and a moral World of another. They will
make us happy in ſpight of Nature: as the Stoicks would make a
man happy in Phalaris his Bull; ſo muſt the Saints be in full bliſs in
the Millennium, tlo' they be under a fit of the Gout,or of the Stone.
For my part, I could never reconcile pain to happineſs : It ſeems to
me to deſtroy and drown all pleaſure, as a loud noiſe does a ftill
voice. It affets the Nerves with violence, and over-bears all other
motions. But if, according to this modern ſuppoſition, they have
the fame Bodies, and breath the ſame air, in the Millenniuin, as we
now,
there will be both private and Epidemical diſtempers, in
the ſame manner as now; Suppoſe then a Plague comes and ſweeps
away
half an hundred thouſand Saints in the Millennium, is this no
prejudice or dishonour to the State ? Or a War inakes a Nation des
ſolate: or, in lingle Perſons, a lingring diſeaſe inakes life a burthen :
or a burning Fever, or a violent Colick tortures them to death.
Where ſuch evils as theſe reign, chriften the thing what you will,
it can be no better than a Mock-Millennium. Nor ſhall I ever be per-
ſwaded that ſuch a ſtate as our preſent life, where an akeing Tooth,
or an akeing Head, dous ſo diſcompoſe the Soul, as to make her un-
fit for buſineſs, ſtudy, devotion, or any uſeful employment : And
that all tlie powers of the mind, all its vertue, and all its wiſdom,
are not able to ſtop theſe little motions, or to ſupport them with
tranquillity: I can never perſwade my ſelf, I ſay, that ſuch a ſtate
was deſigned by God or Nature, for a ſtate of happineſs.
Our third argument is this : The future Kingdom of Chriſt will
not take place, till the Kingdom of Antichrift be wholly deſtroy'd.
But that will not be wholly destroy'd till the end of the World, and
the appearing of our Saviour. Therefore the Millennium will not
be till then. Chriſt and Antichriſt cannot reign upon Earth toge-
ther : their Kingdoms are oppoſite, as Light to darkneſs. Beſides,
the
do
134 The Theory of the Earth.
Book IV,
*
the kingdom of Chriſt is univerſal, extends to all the Nations, and
leaves no room for other Kingdoms at that tiine. Thus it is deſcrib'd
in Daniel, in the place mention'd before, Chap.7.13, 14. I fiuw in the
Night viſions, and be hold, one like the S. n of mail, came with the Clouds
of He.sven, and came to the diicient of days ; And there was given him
dominion and glory, and a Kingdom ; that all People, Nations, and
Language , Jhould ſerve him. And azain, ver. 27. And the Kingdom
and dominion and the greatneſs of the Kingdom under the irhole heaven,
Shall be given to the people of the Saints of the moſt High; whoſe King-
dion is an everlaſting Kingdom, and all dominion ſhall ſerve and obey him.
The ſame character of univerſality is given to the Kingdom of
Pfal. z.
Pſal. 72.
Chriſt by David, Iſaiah, and other Prophets. But the moſt direct
I/4. 2.2. prunf of this, is froin the Apocalypſe : where the Beaſt and falſe Pro-
phet are thrown into the Lake of Fire and Brimſtone, (Chap. 19.20.)
before the Millennium comes on: ch. 20. This, being caſt into a Lake
of fire burning with brimſtone, muſt needs ſignifie utter deſtruction.
Not a diminution of power only, but a total perdition and con-
ſumption. And that this was before the Millennium, both the or-
der of the narration thows, and its place in the Prophecy; And al-
ſu becauſe notice is taken, at the end of the Millennium, of the
Beaſt and falſe Prophet's being in the Lake of fire, as of a thing paſt
,
and formerly tranſacted. For when Satan, at length, is thrown in-
to the faine Lake, 'tis faid, He is thrown into the Lake of fire and
brimſtone, where the Beaſt and fulfe Prophet are : Apoc. 20. 10. They
were there before, it ſeems ; namely, at the beginning of the Mil-
lennium ; and now at the concluſion of it, the Devil is thrown in
to them. Belides, the Ligation of Satan proves this point effectually.
For ſo long as Antichriſt reigns, Satan cannot be ſaid to be bound;
but he is bound at the beginning of the Millennium, therefore An-
tichriſt's reign was thien totaliy expir’d. Laſtly, the deſtruction of
Babylon, and the deſtruction of Antichriſt co together : but you ſee
Babylon utterly and finally deſtroy'd, (Apoc. 18. and 19.) before the
Millennium coines on. Iſay utterly and finally deſtroy'd. For ſhe is not
only ſaid to be made an utter defolation, but to be conſum'd by fire:
and abſorpt as a Milftone thrown into the Sea : and that he ſhall be
found no more at all, Chap. 18. 21. Nothing can expreſs a total and
univerſal deſtruction more effectually, or more emphatically. And
this is before the Millennium begins ; as you may ſee both by the
order of the Prophecies, and particularly, in that upon this deſtru-
Etion, the Hallelujah’s are ſung, Chap. 19. and concluded thus, (ver.
6. 7.) Hallelujah, for the God omnipotent reigneth. Let us be glad and re-
joyce and give honour to-him ; for the marriage of the Lamb is come, and
his wife hath made her ſelf ready. This, I ſuppoſe, every one allows to
be the Millennial ſtate, which now approaches, and is making ready,
upon the deſtruction of Babylon.
Thus much for the firſt part of our argument, That the Kingdom
of Chriſt will not take place, till.the Kingdom of Antichriſt be
wholly deſtroy’d. We are now to prove the ſecond part: That the
Kingdoin of Antichriſt will not be wholly deſtroy'd till the end of
the World, and the coming of our Saviour. This, one would think,
is ſufficiently prov'd from St. Paul's words alone, 2 Thell.2, 8. The
Lord
ܫܫܝܫ.
Chap.8. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
135
Lord ſhall conſume the man of (in, who is ſuppos’d the ſame with An-
tichrift, with the Spirit of his month, and Mall deſtroy him with the
brightneſs of his coming. He will not then be deſtroy'd before the
coming of our Saviour : and that will not be till the end of the
World. For St. Peter ſays, AEt: 3. 21. Th: Heaven inuſt receive him,
ſpeaking of Chriſt, until the times of reſtitution of all things: that is,
the renovation of the World. And if we conſider that our Saviour's
coming will be in flames of fire, as the ſame Apoſtle St. Paul tells us,
2 Theff. 1.7,8. 'tis plain that his coining will not be till the Confla-
gration: in which laſt faites Antichriſt will be univerſally de-
ſtroy’d. This manner of deſtruction agrees alſo with the Apocalypſe,
and wich Daniel, and the Prophets of the Old Teſtament. As to the
Apocalypſe, Babylonz, the ſeat of Antichrift, is repreſented there as
deſtroy'd by Fire, Chap. 13. 8, 18. Chap. 14. 11. Chap.19.3, 20. And
in Daniel, when tlie Beaſt is deſtroy’d, Chap. 7. 11. His body was gi-
ven to the burning flame. Tlien as to the other Prophets, they do
not, you know, Ipeak of Antichriſt or the Beaſt in terms : but un-
der the Types of Baliylon, Tyrc, and ſuch like ; and theſe places or
Princes are iepreſenied by them as to be deſtroy'd by fire, Ifa. 13.19.
Jer.51.25. Ezek.28.18.
So much for this third Argument. The fourth Argument is this
The Future Kingdom of Chriſt will not be till the day of Judgment
and the Refurrection. But that will not be till the end of the World.
Tlierefore neither the Kingdom of Chriſt. By the day of Judgment
here I do not mean the final and univerſal Judginent: Nor by tlie
Reſurrection, the final and univerſal Reſurrection : for theſe will not
be till after the Millennium. But we underſtand here the firſt day of
Judgment and tlie firf Reſurrection, which will be at the end of this
preſent World; according as S. John does diſtinguiſh them, in the
zoth. Chap. of the Apocalypſe. Now that the Millennium will not
be till the day of Judgment in this ſence, we liave both the Teſti-
monies of Daniel and of S. Jóhr. Daniel in the 7th. Chap. ſuppoſes Ver. 9, St.
Pet. 26,66
the Beaſt to rule till judgment Shall fit, and then they shall take away
his dominion, and it liall be given to the people of the Saints of the
moſt High. S. John makes an explicite declaration of both theſe, in
his 20th. Chap. of the Apocalypſe, which is the great Directory in this
point of the Millennium ; He ſays there were Thrones ſet, as for a
Judicature. Tlieri there was a Reſurrection from the Dead: and
thoſe that riſe, reigned with Chriſt a Thouſand years. Here's a ſu-
dicial Seſſion, a Reſurrection, and the reign of Chriſt joyned toge-
ther. Tliere is alſo another pallage in S. John, that joyns the judg-
ment of the Dead with the Kingdom of Chriſt. 'Tis in the uth.
Chap. under tlie ſeveritly Trumpet. The words are theſe, ver.15. And
the ſeventh Angel ſounded, and there were great voices in he.iven, ſaying,
the kingdoms of this world 10 become the kingdoms of our Lord and of his
Chrift: and he Mill reign for ever and ever. And the four and twenty
&c. And the nati'ns were angry, and thy mrath is come, and the
lime of the Dead, that tInnbould be judged, and that thou shouldjt give
reward unto thy ſervants the Prophets, and to the Saints, cord them th.it
fear thy name.
Here are two things plainly expreſs’d and link'd to
gether, The judging of the Dead, and the Kingdom of Chriſt; where-
in
Ver. 4
Elder's,
136 The Theory of the Earth. BookIV:
in the Prophets and Sainis are rewarded. Now as the judging of
the Dead is not in this life, ſo neither is the reward of the Prophets
and Saints in this life: as we are taught ſufficiently in the Goſpel
and by the Apoſtles, Mat. 19.28. i Theſ. 1.7. 2 Tim.4. 8. 1 Pet. 1.
7.
and Gh.5.4.) Therefore the Reign and Kingdom of Chriſt which is
joyned with theſe two, cannot be in this life, or before the end of
the world. And as a further teſtimony and confirination of this,
We may obſerve that S. Paul to Timothy, hath joyn’d together theſe
three things · The appearance of Chriſt, the Reign of Chriſt, and the
judging of the Dead. I charge thee therefore before God and the Lord
Jeſus Chriſt, urho Shall judge the quick and the dead, at his appearing, and
his Kingdom, 2 Tim. 4. I.
This might alſo be prov'd from the order, extent, and progreſs,
of the Prophecies of the Apocalypſe; whereof ſome are ſuch as reach
to the end of the World, and yet muſt be accompliſh'd before the
Millennium begin : as the Vials. Others are ſo far already advanc'd
towards the end of the World, as to leave no room for a thouſand
years reign ; as the Trumpets. But becauſe every one hath his own
interpietation of theſe Prophecies, and it would be tedious here to
prove any ſingle Hypothelis in contradiſtinction to all the reſt, we
will therefore leave this remark, to have more or leſs effect,
according to the minds it falls upon. And proceed to our fifth
Argument.
Fifthly, The New Jeruſalem-ſtate is the ſame with the Millennial
ſtate : But the Nem Jeruſalem ſtate will not be till the end of the
World, or till after the Conflagration : Therefore neither the Mil-
Fennium. That the New Jeruſalem-Itate is the ſame with the Millen-
nium, is agreed upon, I think, by all Millenaries, Ancient and Mo-
dern. Juſtin Martyr, Irenæus, and Tertullian, (peak of it in that
ſence; and ſo do the later Authors, ſo far as I have obſerv'd. And
St. John ſeems to give them good authority for it. In the 20th. Chap.
of the Apocalypſe, be ſays, the Camp of the Saints, and the Beloved
City were belieg'd by Satan and his Gigantick crew at the end of
the Millenniun. That Beloved City is the New Jeruſalem, and you
ſee it is the ſame with the Camp of the Saints, or, at leaſt, contem-
porary
with it. Belides, the Marriage of the Lamb was in, or at
the appearance of the New Jeruſalem, for that was the Spouſe of
the Lamb, Apoc. 21. 2. Now this Spouſe was ready, and this Mar-
riage was ſaid to be come, at the deſtruction of Babylon : which was
the beginning of the Millennium, Chap. 18.7. Therefore the New
Jeruſalem run all along with the Millennium, and was indeed
the ſame thing under another name. Laſtly, What is this New
Jeruſalem, if it be not the ſame with the Millennial ſtate? It is pro-
mis'd as a reward to the ſufferers for Chrift, Apoc. 3. 12. and you
ſee its wonderful priviledges, Ch. 21. 3,4. and yet it is not Heaven
and eternal Life ; for it is ſaid to come down from God out of
Heaven, Ch. 21. 2. and Ch.3.12. It can therefore be nothing but the
glorious Kingdom of Chriſt upon Earth, where the Saints ſhall reign
with him a Thouſand Years.
Now
Chap.8. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
137
}
1
1
1
Now as to the ſecond part of our Argument, that the Nerv Jeru-
falem will not come down from Heaven till the end of the World:
of this S. John ſeeins to give us a plain proof or demonſtration: for
he places the New Jeruſalem in the New Heavens and New Earth,
which cannot be till after the Conflagration. Let us hear his words,
Apoc. 21.1,2. And I ſaw a New Heaven and a New Earth, for the firſt
beuren and the firſt earth were paſſed away, and there was no more fea.
And I John Juw the Holy City, New Jeruſalem, coming down from God
out of Heaven : prepared as a Bride adorned for her husband. When
the New Earth was made, he ſees the New Jeruſalem coming down
upon
it; and this Renovation of the Earth not being till the Con-
flagration, The New Jeruſalem could not be till then, neither. The
Prophet Iſaiah had long before ſaid the ſame thing, though not in
terms ſo expreſs; He firſt ſays, Behold I create new heavens and a nem
Ifa.65.17,78.
earth, wherein you shall rejoyce. Then ſubjoyns immediately, Behold,
I create Jeruſalem a rejoycing. This rejoycing is ſtill in the ſame place;
in the New Heavens and New Earth, or in the New Jeruſalem.
And S. John in a like method, firſt ſets down the New Earth, then
the New Jeruſalem ; and expreſſes the mind of the Prophet Iſaiah
more diſtinctly.
This leads me to a Sixth Argument to confirm our Concluſion,
The tiine of the Reſtitution or Reſtauration of all things, ſpoken of by
S. Peter and the Prophets, is the ſame with the Millennium: But that
Reſtauration will not be till the coming of Chriſt, and the end of
the World: Therefore neither the Millennium. That this Reſtitu-
tion of all things will not be till the coming of our Savivur, S. Peter
declares in his Sermon, A&t. 3. 21. and that the coming of our Saviour
will not be till the end of the World, or till the Conflagration,
both S. Paul and S. Peter ſignifie to us, 1 Theſſ.1.7,8. 2 Pet. 3. 10.
Therefore it remains only to prove, that this Reſtitution of all things
ſpoken of here by the Apoſtle, is the ſame with the Millennium. I
know that which it does directly and immediately ſignifie, is the Re.
novation of the World ; but it muſt include the Moral World as
well as the Natural: otherwiſe it cannot be truly ſaid, as S. Peter
does there, that all the Prophets have ſpoken of it. And what is
the Renovation of the Natural and Moral World, but the New Je-
ruſalem or the Millennium.
Theſe Arguments, taken together, have, to me, an irreſiſtible
evidence for the proof of our Concluſion; That the Bleſſed Millen-
nium cannot obtain in the preſent Earth, or before the Conflagra
tion; But when Nature is renew'd, and the Saints and Martyrs rais'd
from the Dead, then they ſhall reign together with Chriſt, in the
New Heavens and New Earth, or in the New Jeruſalem ; Satan
being bound for a Thouſand Years.
}
1
1
}
1
1
1
}
T
СНАР,
138
Book 1V.
The Theory of the Earth.
CHA P. IX,
The chief employment of the Millenniun, DEVOTION
and CONTEMPLATIO N.
W!
E have now done with the ſubſtance of our Diſcourſe;
which is comprehended in theſe Three Propoſitions :
1. After the Conflagration of this World, there will be New Heavens
and a Nem Earth: and That Earth will be inhabited.
1
II. That there is an happy Millennial ſtate ; Or a future Kingdom of
Chriſt and his Saints, propheſied of and promis'd in the Old and
New Teſtament: and receiv'd by the Primitive Church, as a
Chriſtian and Catholick Do&trine.
III. That this bleſſed Millennial ſtate, according as it is deſcrib'd in
Scripture, cannot take place in the preſent Earth, nor under the
prefent conſtitution of Nature and Providence: But is to be cele-
brated in the New Heavens and Nem Earth, after the Confie-
gration.
1
3
1
Theſe Three Propoſitions ſupport this Work; and if any of them
be broken, I confeſs my deſign is broken, and this Treatiſe is of
no effect. But what remains to be ſpoken toin theſe laſt Chapters,
is more circumſtantial or modal; and an error or miſtake in ſuch
things, does not wound any vital part of the Argument. You
muſt now therefore lay aſide your ſeverity, and rigorous cenſures ;
we are very happy, if, in this Life, we can atrain to the ſubſtance
of truth: 'and make rational conjectures concerning modes and
circumſtances; where every one hath right to offer his ſence, with
modeſty and ſubmiſſion. Revelations made to us from Heaven in
this preſent ftare, are often incompleat, and do not tell us all : as if
it was on purpoſe to ſet our thoughts a-work to ſupply the reſt ;
which we may lawfully do, provided it be according to the analogy
of Scripture and Reaſon.
To proceed therefore; We ſuppoſe, as you ſee, the new Heavens
and the new Earth to be the feat of the Millennium ; and that new
Creation to be Paradiſiacal. Its Inhabitants alſo to be Righteous Per-
fons, the Saints of the moſt High. And ſeeing the ordinary employ-
ments of our preſent Life, will then be needleſs and ſuperſeded, as
Military affairs, Sea-affairs, inoſt Trades and Manufactures, Law,
Phyſick, and the laborious part of Agriculture : it inay be wonder'd,
how this Happy People will beſtow their time: What entertain-
inent they will find in a ſtate of ſo much eaſe, and ſo little action.
To this one might anſwer in Niort, by another queſtion, Hom would
they have entertain'd themſelves in Paradiſe, if Man had continued
in Innocency? This is a revolution of the ſame ſtate, and there-
fore
!
1
1
Chap.9. Concerning the New Heavens, &c.
132
5
fore they may paſs their time as well now as they could liave done
then. But to anſwer more particularly, beſides all innocent diver-
tions, ingenuous converſations, and entertainments of friend!hip,
the greatest part of their time will be ſpent in Devotion and Cosi
templation. O happy employinent; and next to that of Heaven it
self. What do the Saints above, but fing Praiſes unto God, and con-
template his Perfections. And how mean and deſpicable, for the
molt part, are the employments of this preſent Life, if compar'd with
thoſe Intellectual Actions. If Mankind was divided into ten parts,
nine of thoſe ten employ their time to get bread to their belly, and
cloaths to their back; And what impertinences are theſe to a reaſon-
able Soul, if The was free from the clog of a Mortal Body ; or if that
could be provided for, without trouble or loſs of time? Corporeal
Labour is froni need and neceſſity, but intellectual exerciſes are mat-
ter of choice, that pleaſe and perfect at the ſame time.
Devotion warms and opens the Soul, and diſpoſes it to receive
Divine Influences. It ſometimes raiſes the mind into an heavenly
ecſtaſie, and fills it with a joy that is not to be expreſt. When it is
pure, it leaves a ſtrong impreſſion upon the heart, of Love to God;
and inſpires us with a contempt of this World, having taſted the
pleaſures of the World to come. In the ſtate which we ſpeak of,
ſeeing the Tabernacle of God will be with men, we may reaſonably ſup- Apoc. 21. ?
poſe that there will be greater effuſions and irradiations of the Holy
Spirit, than we have or can expect in this region of darkneſs: and
conſequently, all the ſtrength and comfort that can ariſe from private
devotion.
And as to their publick Devotions, all beauties of Holineſs, all
perfection of Divine Worſhip, will ſhine in tlieir Aſemblies. What-
foever David ſays of Sion and Jeruſalem, are but ſhadows of this New
Pfal. 84
Jeruſalem, and of the glory that will be in thoſe Solemnities. Ima- Pſal. 870
gine what a Congregation will be there of Patriarchs, Prophets,
Apoſtles, Chriſtian Martyrs, and Saints of the firſt rank, throughout
all Ages. And theſe all known to one another by their Names and
Hiſtory. This very meeting together of ſuch Perſons, muſt needs
create a joy unſpeakable: But when they unite in their praiſes to
God and to the Lainb, with pure hearts full of divine Love: when
they ſing their Hallelujahs to him that fits upon the Throne, that
hath waih'd them in his blood, and redeem'd them out of
every
Kingdon, and Tongue and People, and Nation. When, with their
Palms in their hands, they triumph over Sin, and Death, and Hell,
and all the Powers of Darkneſs : can there be any thing, on this
ſide Heaven, and a Quire of Angels, more glorious or more joyful?
But why did I except Angels? Why may not they be thought to
be preſent at theſe Aſſemblies? In a Society of Saints and purified
Spirits, Why ſhould we think their converſe impoſſible? In the
Golden Age, the Gods were always repreſented, as having freer in-
tercourſe with Men; and before the Flood, we may reaſonably be-
lieve it fo. I cannot think, Enoch was tranſlated into Heaven with-
out any converſe with its Inhabitants before he went thither. And
ſeeing the Angels vouchſaf’d often, in former Ages, to viſit the
Patriarchs upon Earth, we may with reaſon judge, that they will
much
T 2
140
Book IV.
The Theory of the Earth.
1
much inore converſe with the fame Patriarchs and holy Prophets,
now they are riſen from the Dead, and cleans i from their fins, and
feated in the New Jeruſalem. I cannot but call tu mind upon thu
occaſion, That repreſentation which S. Paul makes to lis, of a glori-
ous ſtate and a glorious Affembly, too high for this preſent Earth:
Tis Hebr. 12.22,88c. in theſe words: But you are come uno Mount
Sio!?, and unto the City of the living Gud, th: heulverly Jerufilem, and
to an innumerable company of digels; To the gener.il Allembly and Church
of the Firſt-born, which ire pritten in Heaven; and to God the Judge
of all, and to the Spirits of juſt men made perfe&t. This, I know, le-
veral apply to the Times and ſtate of the Goſpel, in oppoſition to
that of the Law; and it is introduc'd in that manner ; But liere are
ſeveral expreſſions too high for any preſent ſtate of things ; They
mult reſpect a future ſtate, either of Heaven, or of the Millennial
Kingdom of Chriſt. And to the later of theſe the expreffions agree,
and have a peculiar fitneſs and applicability to it. And what follows
in the context, ver, 26, 27, 28. About ſhaking the Heavens and the Earth
once more : Removing the former Scenes, and bringing on a New
Kingdom that cannot be thaken : All this, I ſay, anſwers to the King-
dom of Chriſt, which is to be eſtabliſh'd in the New Heavens and
New Earth.
But to proceed in their Publick Devotions ; Suppoſe this Auguſt
Aſſembly, intam'd with all Divine Paſſions, met together to celebrate
the Name of God; with Angels intermixt; to bear a part in this
Holy Exerciſe. And let this concourſe be, not in any Temple made
with hands, but under the great roof of Heaven, (the True Temple
of the moſt High,) ſo as all the Air may be fillid with the chearful
harmony of their Hymns and Hallelujahs. Then, in the heighth of
their Devotion, as they ſing Praiſes to the Lamb, and to Himn that
ſirs upon the Throne, ſuppoſe the Heavens to open, and the Son
of God to appear in his glory, with Thouſands and Ten Thoufands
of Angels round about him; That their eyes may ſee him, who,
for their lakes, was crucified upon Earth, now encircled with Light
and Majeſty. This will raiſe them into as great tranſports as hu-
mane nature can bear: They will wiſh to be diſſolv'd, they will ſtrive
to fly up to him in the clouds, or to breath out their Souls in ie-
peated doxologies of Bleſſing, and bonour, and glory, and power, to him
th.it fits upon the Throne, and to the Lamb, for ever and ever.
But we cannot live always in the flames of Devotion. The weak-
neſs of our Nature will not ſuffer us to continue long under ſuch
ſtrong Paſſions, and ſuch intenſeneſs of Mind. The queſtion is there-
fore, What will be the ordinary employment of that Life? How
will they entertain their thoughts, or ſpend their time ? For we ſup-
poſe they will not have that multiplicity of frivolous buſineſs that we
have now: About our Bodies, about our Children: in Trades
and Mechanicks : in Traffick and Navigation: or Wars by Sea or
Land. Theſe things being ſwept away, wholly or in a great mea-
fure, what will coine in their place ? how will they find work or
entertainment for a long life? If, we conſider, who they are that
will have a part in this firſt Reſurrection, and be Inhabitants of that
World that is to come, we may eaſily believe that the moſt conſtant
employ-
. ;;!!
Chap.9.
141
Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
employment of their life will be CONTEMPLATION. Not that I
exclude any innocent diverlions, as I ſaid before: The entertain-
ments of friendſhip, or ingenuous converſation, but the great buſi-
neſs and delign of that life is Contemplation : as preparatory to
Heaven and eternal Glory. Ut paulatim aſſueſcant capere Deum, as L. 5.6. 32.
Irenæus ſays: That they may, by degrees, enlarge their capacities,
fit and accufiom themſelves to receive God. Or, as he ſays in another
place, Thüt they may become capable of the glory of the Father, tliat is,
capable of bearing the glory and preſence of God: capable of the
higheſt enjoyment of him, which is uſually call'd the Beatifical Vi-
fion; and is the condition of the Bleſſed in Heaven.
It cannot be deny'd, that in ſuch a Millennial ſtate, where we
ſhall be freed from all the incumbrances of this life, and provided
of better Bodies and greater light of Mind : It cannot be doubted, I
ſay, but that we ſhall then be in a diſpoſition to make great profici-
ency in the knowledge of all things, Divine and Intellectual: and
conſequently of making happy preparations for our entring upon a
further ſtate of glory. For there is nothing certainly does more
prepare the mind of man for the higheſt perfections, thian Contem-
plation: with that Devotion which naturally flows from it, as heat
follow's light. And this Contemplation hath always a greater or leſs
effect upon the mind according to the perfection of its object. So as
the Contemplation of the Divine Nature, is, of all others, the moſt
perfective in it ſelf, and to us, according to our capacities and de-
gree of abſtraction. An Immenſe Being does ſtrangely fill the Soul :
and Omnipotency, Omniſciency, and Infinite Goodneſs, do enlarge
and dilate the Spirit, while it fixtly looks upon them. They raiſe
ſtrong pallions of Love and Admiration, which melt our Nature,
and transform it into the mould and image of that which we con-
template. What the Scripture ſays of our Transformation into the Di-
vine likeneſs : what S. John and the Platoniſts ſay of our Union with
God. And whatever is not Cant in the Myſtical Theology, when they
tell us of being Deified; all this muſt ſpring from theſe ſources of
Devotion and Contemplation. They will change and raiſe us froin
perfe Stion to perfection, as from glory to glory : into a greater ſimi-
litude and nearer ſtation to the Divine Nature.
The Contemplation of God and his Works, comprehends all
things. Tor, the one inakes the uncreated World, and the other
the Created. And as the Divine Effence and Attributes are the
greateſt object that the mind of man can ſet before it ſelf; fu next
to that are the effects and emanations of the Divinity, or the Works
of the Divine Goodneſs, Wiſdom, and Power, in the Created World.
This hath a vaſt extent and variety, and would be ſufficient to enter-
tain their time, in that happy ftate, much longer than a thouſand
years. As you will eaſily grant, if you allow me but to point at the
ſeveral heads of thoſe speculations.
The Contemplation of the Created World divides it ſelf into three
parts, that of the Intellectual World: that of the Corporal : And the
Government and Adminiſtration of both, which is uſually callid
Providence. Theſe three, drawn into one thought, with the rea-
funs and proportions that reſult froin them, compoſe that GRAND
IDEA,
142
T be Theory of the Earth. Book IV
IDEA, which is the treaſury and comprehenſion of all Knowledge.
Whereof we have ſpoken more largely in the last Chapter of the
Second Book of this Theory, under the name of the Mundane ldea.
But at preſent we ſhall only mention ſuch particulars, as may be
thought proper fubjects for the meditations and enquiries of thoſe
who ſhall enjoy that happy ſtate which we now treat of.
As to the Intellectual World, excepting our own Souls, we knows
little, in this region of darkneſs where we are at preſent, more than
bare names. We hear of Angels and Archangels, of Cherubins and
Seraphins, of Principalities and Powers and Thrones and Domini
ons. We hear the ſound of theſe words with admiration, but he
know little of their natures; wherein their general notion, and
wherein their diſtinction, coolilts : what peculiar excellencies they
have, what offices and employments : of all this we are ignorant.
Only in general, we cannot but ſuppoſe that there are more orders
and degrees of Intellectual Beings, be:wixt us and the Almighty,
than there are kinds or ſpecies of living Creatures upon the face of
the Earth: betwixt Man, their Lord and Maſter, and the leaſt worm
that creeps upon the ground. Nay, than there are Stars in Heaven,
or Sands upon the Sea-lhore. For there is an infinite diſtance and in
terval betwixt us and God Almighty: and all that, is fill'd with
created Beings of different degrees of perfection, ſtill approaching
nearer and nearer to their Maker. And when this inviſible World
thall be open'd to us: when the Curtain is drawn, and the celeſtial
Hierarchy ſet in order before our eyes, we ſhall deſpiſe our ſelves,
and all the petty glories of a inortal life, as the dirt under our
feet:
As to the Corporeal Univerſe, we have ſome ſhare already in the
Contemplation and knowledge of that : tho' little in compariſon of
what will be then diſcover'd. The doctrine of the Heavens, fix'd
Stars, Planets and Coinets, both as to their matier, motion and
form, will be then clearly demonſtrated: and what are myſteries to
us now, will become matter of ordinary converſation. We thall
be better acquainted with our neighbouring Worlds, and make
new diſcoveries as to the ſtate of their affairs. The Sun eſpecially,
the Great Monarch of the Planetary Worlds: whoſe Dominion
reaches from Pole to Pole, and the greatneſs of his Kingdom is un-
der the whole Heaven. Who ſends his bright Meſſengers every day
through all the regions of his vaſt Empire; throwing his beains of
light round about himn, ſwifter and further than a thought can fol.
low. This noble Creature, I ſay, will make a good part of their
ftudy in the ſucceeding World. Eudoxus the Philoſopher, wilh'd
he might die like Phaeton, in approaching too near to the Sun ; pro-
vided he could fly ſo near it, and endure it ſo long, till he had diſ
cover'd its beauty and perfection. VVho can blame his curioſity:
who would not venture far to ſee the Court of ſo great a Prince :
who hath more VVorlds under his command than the Emperors of
the Earth have Provinces or Principalities. Neither does he make
his Subjects flaves to his pleaſure, or tributaries to ſerve and ſupply
his wants ; on the contrary, They live upon him, he nouriſhes and
preſerves them : gives them fruits every year, corn, and wine, and
all
Chap.g. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
143
1
2
all the comforts of life. This glorious Body, which now we can
only gaze upon and admire, will be then better underſtood. A maſs
of Light and Flame, and Ethereal matter, ten thouſand times big-
ger than this Earth : Enlightn.ng and enlivening an Orb that ex.
ceeds the bulk of our Globe, as much as that does the leaſt fand
ир-
on the Sea-ſhore, may reaſonably be preſum'd to have ſome great
Being at the Centre of it. But what that is, we muſt leave to the
enquiries of another life.
The Theory of the Earth will be a common leſſon there : carried
through all its viciſſitudes and periods from firſt to laſt, till its en-
tire revolution be accompliſh’d. I told you in the Preface, The Re-
volution of World, was one of the greateſt Speculations that we are
capable of in this life: and this little World where we are, will be
the firſt and eaſieſt inſtance of it ; ſeeing we have Records, Hiſtori-
cal or Prophetical, that reach from the Chaos to the end of the new
Heavens and new Earth : which courſe of time makes up the grea-
teſt part of the Circle or Revolution. And as what was before the
Chaos, was but, in my opinion, the firſt remove from a Fixt Star,
ſo what is after the thouſand years Renovation, is but the laſt ſtep
to it again.
The Theory of humane Nature is alſo an uſeful and neceſſary ſpe-
culation, and will be carried on to perfection in that ſtate. Having
fixt the true diſtinction betwixt Matter and Spirit, betwixt the
Soul and the Body, and the true nature and laws of their union :
The original contract, and the terms ratified by Providence at their
firſt conjunction : It will not be hard to diſcover the ſprings of acti-
on and paſſion : how the thoughts of our mind, and the motions of
our body ae in dependance one upon another. What are the pri-
mary differences of Genius's and complexions, and how our Intel-
lectuals or Morals depend upon them. What is the Root of Fatality,
and how far it extends. By theſe lights, they will ſee into their
own and every Man's breaſt, and trace the foot-ſteps of the Divine
wiſdom in that ſtrange compoſition of Soul and Body.
This indeed is a mixt fpeculation, as moſt others are: and takes
in ſomething of both Worlds, Intellectual and Corporeal : and may
alſo belong in part to the Third Head we mention’d, Providence.
But there is no need of diſtinguiſhing theſe Heads ſo nicely, provi-
ded we take in, under ſome or other of them, what may be thought
beſt to deſerve our knowledge, now, or in another World. As to
Providence, what we intend chietiy by it here, is the general æco-
nomy of our Religion, and what is reveal'd to us in Scripture, con-
cerning God, Angels, and Mankind. Theſe Revelations, as moſt
in Sacred Writ, are ſhort and incompleat: as being delign'd for prad
ctice more than for ſpeculation, or to awaken and excite our
thoughts, rather than to ſatisfie them. Accordingly we read in
Scripture of a Triune Deity: of God made neſh, in the Womb of
Virgin : Barbarouſly crucified by the Fews : Deſcending into Hell:
riſing again from the Dead: viſibly aſcending into Heaven: And fit-
ting at the right hand of God the Father, above Angels and Arch-
Angels. Theſe great things are imperfectly reveal’d to us in this life;
which we are to believe ſo far as they are reveald: In hopes theſe
myſteries
a
144
I be Theory of the Earth. Book IV,
Mit. 3. 16.
Art. 2.
Mart, I. 18.
Luk. 1. 35
myſteries will be made more intelligible, in that happy ftate to
come, where Prophets, Apoſtles, and Angels, will meet in conver
ſation together.
In like manner, how little is it we understand concerning the
Holy Ghoſt. That he deſcended like a Dove upon our Saviour: Like
cloven Tongues of fire upon the Apoſtles; The Place being fillid
with a rushing mighty Wind : That he over-ſhadowed the Bleſſed
Virgin, and begot the Holy Infant. That He made the Apoſtles
ſpeak all ſort of Tongues and Languages ex tempore, and pour'd out
ftrange Vertues and Miraculous Gifts upon the Primitive Chriſtians.
Theſe things we know as bare matter of fact, but the method of
theſe operations we do not at all underſtand. Who can tell us now,
what that is which we call INSPIRATIOV? VVhat change is
wrought in the Brain, and what in the Soul : and how the effect
follow's ? VVho will give us the juſt definition of a Miracle? VVhat
the proximate Agent is above Man, and whether they are all from
the ſame power ? How the manner and proceſs of thoſe miraculous
changes in matter, may be conceiv'd ? Theſe things we ſee darkly,
and hope they will be ſet in a clearer light, and the Doctrines of our
Religion more fully expounded to us, in that Future VVorld. For
as ſeveral things obſcurely expreſt in the Old Teſtament, are more
clearly reveal'd in the New ; So the ſame inyſteries, in a ſucceeding
ftate, may ſtill receive a further explication.
The Hiſtory of the Angels, Goud or bad, nakes another part of
this Providential Syſteme. Chriſtian Religion gives us ſome notices,
of both kinds, but very imperfect; VVhat intereſt the Good Angels
have in the Government of the VVorld, and in ordering the affairs
of this Earth and Mankind: What ſubjection they have to our Sa-
viour, and what part in his Miniſtry: Whether they are Guardians
to particular Perſons, to Kingdoms, to Empires: All that we know
at preſent, concerning theſe things, is but conjectural. And as to
the bad Angels, who will give us an account of their Fall, and of
their former condition? I had rather know the Hiſtory of Lucifer,
than of all the Babylonian and Perſian Kings ; Nay, than of all thie
Kings of the Earth. What the Birth-right was of that mighty Prince:
what his Dominions : where his Imperial Court and Reſidence ?
How he was depos’d: for what Crime, and by what Power ? How
he ſtill wages War againſt Heaven, in his exile : What Confede-
rates he hath: What is his Power over Mankind, and how limited?
What change or damage he ſuffer'd by the coming of Chriſt, and
how it alter'd the poſture of his affairs. Where he will be impri-
fon'd in the Millennium : and what will be his laſt fate and final
doom: whether he may ever hope for a Revolution or Reſtaurati-
on? Theſe things lie hid in the ſecret Records of Providence, which
then, I hope, will be open'd to us.
With the Revolution of Worlds, we mention'd before the Revolu
tion of Souls; which is another great Circle of Providence, to be
ſtudied hereafter. We know little here, either of the pre-exiſtence
or poſt-exiſtence of our Souls. VVe know not what they will be,
till the loud Trump awakes us, and calls us again into the Corpo-
real VVorld. VVho knows how many turns he ſhall take upon
this
fta
. ܥ
Chap.y. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
145
ever.
ſtage of the Laith, and how many trials he thall have, before his
duom will be inally concluded. Wlio knows where, or what, is
the ſtate of Hell: where the Souls of the wicked are ſaid to be for
What is the true ſtate of Heaven: What our Celeſtial Bodies :
and What that Sovereign Happineſs that is calld the Beatifical 12-
1.12? Our knowledge and conceptions of theſe things, are, at pre-
fent, very general and ſuperficial ; but in the future Kingdom of
Chriſt, which is introductory to Heaven it ſelf, theſe imperfections,
in a great meaſure, will be done away; and ſuch preparations wroucht,
both in the Will and Underſtanding, as may Et us for the Life of
Angels, and the enjoyment of God in Eternal Glory.
Thus you fee in general, whiar will be the employment of the
Saints in the blefied Milienniui. And tho' they have few of the
trifling buſinelies of this life, they will not want the beſt and nobleſt
of diverſions. 'Tis an happy thing when a Man's pleaſure is alſo liis
perfection : for moſt Men's pleaſures are ſuch as debaſe their nature.
We cominonly gratiri ouir lower faculties, our Paſſions, and our
Appetites: and theſe do not improve, but depreſs the Mind. And
belides, they are ſo groſs, that the fineſt tempers are ſurfeited in a
little time. There is nu laſting pleaſure, but Contemplation. All
others grow fat and inlipid upon frequent uſe; and when a Man
hath run thorow a Sett of Vanities, in the declenſion of his Age, he
knows not what to do with himſelf, if he cannot Think. He faun-
teis about, from one dull buſineſs to another, to wear out time: And
hath no reaſon to value Life, but becauſe he's afraid of Death. But
Contemplation is a continual ſpring of freſh pleaſures. Truth is
inexhauſted, and when you are once in the right way, the further
you go, the greater diſcoveries you make, and with the greater joy.
We are ſometimes highly pleas'd, and even tranſported, with little
inventions in Mathematicks, or Mechanicks, or Natural Philoſophy ;
All theſe things will inake part of their diverſion and entertaininent
in that ſtate ; All the doctrine of Sounds and Harmony : Of Light,
Colours, and Perſpective, will be known in perfection. But there
I call Diverſions, in compariſon of their higher and more ſerious Spe-
culations, which will be the buſineſs and happineſs of that Life.
Do but imagine, that they will have the Scheine of all humane
affairs lying before them: from the Chaos to the laſt period. The
univerſal hiſtory and order of Times. The whole ceconomy of the
Chriſtian Religion, and of all Religions in the World. The Plan
of the undertaking of the Melliah: with all other parts and ingre-
dients of the Providence of this Earth. Do but imagine this, I ſay,
and you will ealily allow, that when they contemplate the Beauty,
Wiſdom, and Goodneſs, of the whole deſign, it inuſt needs raiſe
great and noble Paſſions, and a far richer joy than either the plea-
fures or ſpeculations of this Life can excite in us. And this being
the laſt Act and cloſe of all humane affairs, it ought to be the more
exquiſite and elaborate : that it may crown the work, ſatisfie the
Spectators, and end in a general applauſe. The whole Theatre re-
founding with the praiſes of the great Dramatiſt, and the wonder-
ful Art and Order of the compoſition.
3
1
1
1
u
CHAP
146
Book IV.
The Theory of the Earth.
CH A P.X.
Obje&tions againſt the Millennium, anſwer'd. With ſome
Conje&tures concerning the ſtate of things after the Mil-
lennium: and what will be the final Confummation of
this World.
YM
ou ſee how Nature and Providence have conſpir'd, to make
the Millennium as happy a ſtate, as any Terreſtrial ſtate can
be. For, belides Health and Plenty: Peace, Truth, and Righteoul-
neſs will fouriſh there, and all the evils of this Life ſtand excluded.
There will be no Ambitious Princes, ſtudying miſchief one againſt
another; or contriving methods to bring their own Subjects into la
very. No mercenary Stateſmen, to aſſiſt and intrigue with them. No
oppreſſion from the Poweriul, no ſnares or traps laid for the Inno.
cent. No treacherous Friends, no malicious Enemies. No Knaves,
Cheats, Hypocrites; the Vermin of this Earth, that ſwarm every
where. There will be nothing but Truth, Candor, Sincerity, and
Ingenuity: as in a Society or Commonwealth of Saints and Philofo.
phers. In a word, 'twill be Paradiſe reſtor’d: both as to Innocency
of Țemper, and the Beauties of Nature.
I believe yoy will be apt to ſay, If this be not True, 'tis pity but
that it ſhould be Trụe, For 'tis a very defirable ſtate, where all good
People would find themſelyes mightily at eaſe. What is it that
hinders it then? It muſt be ſome ill Genius. For Nature tends to
ſuch a Renayation, as we ſuppoſe: and Scripture fpeaks loudly of
an happy ftate to be, ſome time or other, on this ſide Heaven.
And what is there, pray, in this preſent World, Natural or Moral,
if I may ask with ſeverence, that could make it worth the while
før God to create it, if it never was better, nor ever will be better?
Is there not more Miſery than Happineſs: Is there not inore Vice
ihan Virtue, in this World? as if it had been made by a Manickean
God. The Earth þarren, the Heavens inconſtant: Men wicked and
God oftended. This is the poſure of our Affairs: ſuch hath our
World been hitherto : with Wars and Bloudſhed, Sickneſs and
Diſeaſes, Poverty, ſervitude and perpetual Drudgery for the neceffa-
ries of a Mortal Life. We may therefore reaſonably hope, from a
God infinitely good and powerful, for better Times and a better State,
before the lift period and conſummation of all things.
But it will be objected, it may be, that, according to. Scripture,
the vices and wickedneſs of Men will continue to the end of the
Work!; and fo there will be no room for fuch an happy ftate, as
we hope for. Dur Saviour ſays, When the fon. of man cometh, Mall be
Bind faith, upon the Earth. They ſhall eat and drink and play, as before
the deſtruction of the old World, or of Sodom, (Luk. 17.26,&c.) and
the wickedneſs of thofe Men, you know, continued to the taſt.
This objection may pinch thoſe that fupport the Millennium to be
in the preſent Earth, and a thouſand years before the coming of
Luk. 18.8.
Oull
Chap. 10. Concerning the New Heavens, &c.
147
I
our Saviour: for his words ſeem to imply that the World will be in
a Itate of wickedneſs even till his coming. Accordingly Antichriſt
or the Man of Sin, is not ſaid to be deſtroy'd till the coming of our
Saviour, 2 Theff. 2.8. and till he be deſtroy'd, we cannot hope for a
Millennium. Laſtly, The coming of our Saviour is always repreſen-
ted in Scripture as ſudden, ſurpriſing and unexpected. As Light-
uing breaking ſuddenly out of the clouds, ( Luk. 17.24. and ch. 21.
34, 35.) or as a thief in the night, i Theſſ. 5. 2,3,4. 2 Pet
. 3. 19. Apoc.
16.15. But if there be ſuch a forerunner of it as the Millennial
ſtate, whoſe bounds we know, according as that expires and draws
to an end, Men will be certainly advertis’d of the approaching of
our Saviour. But this objection, as I told you, does not affect our
Hypotheſis, for we ſuppoſe the Millennium will not be till after the
coining of our Saviour, and the Conflagration. And alſo that his
cuming will be ſudden and ſurpriſing: and that Antichriſt will
continue in being, tho' not in the fame degree of power, till that
tiine. So that they that place the Millennium in the preſent Earth,
are chieily concern'd to anſwer this firſt objection.
But you will object, it may be, in the ſecond place, That this
Millennium, whereſoever it is, would degenerate at length, into ſen-
ſuality, and a Mahoinetan Paradiſe. For where there are earthly
pleaſures and earihly appetites, they will not be kept always in or-
der without any exceſs or luxuriancy: eſpecially as to the ſenſes of
Touch and Taſte. I am apt to think this is true, if the Soul have no
more power over the Body than ſhe hath at preſent: and our Sen-
ſes, Paſſions, and Appetites be as ſtrong as: they are now. But ac-
cording to our explication of the Millenniuni, we have great reaſon
to hope, that the Soul will have a greater dominion over the Refur-
rection-body, than ſhie hath over this. And you know we ſuppoſe
that none will truly inherit the Millennium, but thoſe that riſe
from the Dead. Nor do we admit any propagation there, nor the
trouble or weakneſs of Infants. But that all riſe in a perfect age,
and never die : being tranſlated, at the final judgment, to meet our
Saviour in the clouds, and to be with him for ever. Thus we eaſi-
ly avoid the force of this objection. But thoſe that place the Mil-
lenniuin in this Life, and to be enjoy'd in theſe Bodies, muſt find
out ſome new preſervatives againſt vice: otherwiſe they will be
continually ſubject to degeneracy.
Another objection may
be taken from the perſonal Reign of Chriſt
upon Earth : which is a thing incongruous, and yet aſſerted by
many modern Millenaries. That Chriſt Mould leave that right
hand of his Father, to come and paſs a thouſand years here below :
living upon Earth in an heavenly Body: This, I confefs, is a thing
I never could digeſt, and therefore I am not concern'd in this ob-
jection; not thinking it neceſſary that Chriſt ſhould be perſonally
preſent and reſident upon Earth in the Millennium. I am apt to
believe that there will be then a Celeſtial Preſence of Chriſt, or a She-
kinah, as we noted before: As the Sun is preſent to the Earth, yec
never leaves its place in the Firmament; fo Chriſt may be viſibly
conſpicuous in his Heavenly Throne, as he was to S. Stephen: and A&. 7:ssist
yet never leave the right hand of his Father. And this would be a
U 2
more
148 The Theory of the Earth. Book IV.
1
more glorious and illuſtrious preſence, than if he thould deſcend,
and converſe amongſt Mer in a perſonal Diape. But theſe things not
being diſtinctly reveald to us, we ought not to determine any thing
concerning them, but with modeſty and ſubmiſſion.
We have thus far pretty well eſcap'd, and kept our felves out of
the reach of the ordinary.objections againſt the Millennium. Eut
there remains one, concerning a double Refurre&tion, which muſt fall
upon every Hypothelis: and 'tis this. The Scripture, they ſay,
fpeaks but of one Reſurrection: whereas the doctrine of the Millen-
nium ſuppoſes two; cne at the beginning of the Millennium, for the
Martyrs, and thoſe that enjoy that happy ſtate, and the other at the
end of it; which is univerſal and final, in the laſt day of judgment.
'Tis true, Scripture generally ſpeaks of the Reſurrection in grofs:
without diſtinguishing firit and ſecond; and ſo it ſpeaks of the Com-
ing of our Saviour, without diſtinction of firſt or fecond; yet it
does not follow from that, that there is but one Coming of our Ca-
viour: ſo neither that there is but one Reſurrection. And ſecing
there is one place of Scripture that ſpeaks diſtinctly of two Reſur-
re&tions; namely; the 20th chap. of the Apocalypſe : that is to us a
fufficient warrant for aſſerting two. As there are foine things in
one Evangelist that are not in another, yet we think them Authen-
tick if they be but in one. There are alſo ſome things in Daniel,
concerning the Meffian, and concerning the Refurretion, that are
not in the rest of the Prophets: yet we look upon his ſingle teſtimo-
ny, as good authority. S. John writ the laſt of all the Apoftles :
and as the whole leries of his Prophecies is new, reaching through
the later times to the Gonfummation of all things; ſo we cannot
wonder if he had Lowtetlting more particular reveald to him con-
cerning the Refurrection'; That which was ſpoken of before in gene-
fal, beitz: diftinguiſh'd now into Firſt and Second, or particular and
See My. Mede. univerſal, in this laſt Prophet. Some think S. Paul means no leſs
,
when he makes an order in the Reſurrection: ſome riſing ſooner,
fome later: 1 Cor.15.23,.24. i Thef.4. 14, 15,&c. blit whether that
be ſo or no, S. John might liave a more diſtinct revelation concerning
it, thari S.Pul had; or any one before him.
After thefe Objections, a great many Queries and difficulties
might be propos'd relating to the Millennium. But that's no more
than what is found in all other inatters, remote from our know-
lédge. Who can anſwer all tlie Queries that may be made concerning
Heavew, Or Hell, or Paradiſe? When we know a thing as to the
fubſtance, we are not to let go our hold; tho' there remain ſome
difficulties uhrefolv'd: otherwiſe we ſhould be eternally Sceptical in
moſt matters of Knowledge. Therefore, tho' we cannot, for ex-
ampleji give a full account of the diſtinction of habitations and inha-
bitánts in țhe Fatare! Earth: or, of the order of the Firſt Refurre&tion;
whether it be performed by degrees and ſucceſſively, or all the In-
habitants of the New Jeruſalem riſe at once, and continue through-
out the whole Millenniuin. I ſay, tlo' we cannot give a diſtinct ac-
count of theſe, or ſuch like particulars, we ought not tlierefore to
.17527
deny.or doubt whether there will be a Nem Earth, or a Firſt Refur.
reEtödni For the Revelation goes clearly ſo far: and the obſcurity is
only
Chap. 10. Concerning the New Heavens &c.
149
only in the conlequences and dependances of it. Which Providence
thought fit, without further light, to leave to our ſearch and diſqui-
sition.
Scripture mentions one thing, at the end of the Millennium,
which is a common difficulty to all; and every one muſt contribute
their beſt thoughts and conjectures towards the ſolution of it. 'Tis
the ſtrange doctrine of Gog and Magog; which are to riſe up in re-
Apoc, 20.829?
bellion againſt the Saints, and beliege the holy City, and the holy
Camp. And this is to be upon the expiration of the thouſand years,
when Satan is luoſen'd. For no ſooner will his Chains be knock'd
off, but he will put himſelf in the head of this Army of Gyants, or
Sons of the Earth, and attack Heaven, and the Saints of the muft
High. But with ill ſucceſs, for there will come down fire and light-
ning from Heaven, and conſume them. This, methinks, hath a great
affinity with the Hiſtory of the Gyants, rebelling and afſaulting
Heaven and ſtruck down by thunder-bolts. But that of ſetting moun-
tains upon mountains, or toſling them into the Skie, that's the Po-
etical part, and we muſt not expect to find it in the Prophecy. Tlie
Poets told their Fable, as of a thing paſt, and ſo it was a Fable;
But the Prophets ſpeak of it, as of a thing to come, and ſo it will
be a reality. But how and in what fence it is to be underſtood and
explain’d, every one has the liberty to make the beſt judgment he
8
can.
Ezekiel mentions Gog and Magog : which I take to be only types Ch.38.6 392
and ſhadows of theſe which we are now ſpeaking of: and not yet
exemplified, no more than his Temple. And ſeeing this people is
to be at the end of the Millennium, and in the ſame Earth with it,
We muft, according to our Hypotheſis, plant them in the Future
Earth; and therefore all former conjectures about the Turks, or Scy-
thians, or other Barbarians, are out of doors with us, ſeeing the
Scene of this action does not lie in the preſent Earth. They are al-
ſo repreſented by the Prophet, as a People diſtinct and ſeparate from
the Saints, not in their manners only, but alſo in their ſeats and ha-
bitations ; For they are ſaid to come up from the four corners of Apoc. 20. 8, 9
the Earthi, upon the breadth of the Earth : and there to beliege the
Camp of the Saints and the beloved Gity: This makes it ſeem probable
to me, that there will be a double race of Mankind in that Future
Earth: very different one from another, both as to their temper and
diſpoſition, and as to their origine. The one born from Heaven,
Sons of God, and of the Reſurrection : who are the true Saints and
heirs of the Millennium. The others born of the Earth, Sons of the
Earth, generated from the ſlime of the ground, and the leat of the
Sun, as brute Creatures were at firſt. This ſecond Progeny or Ge-
neration of Men in the Future Earth, I underſtand to be ſignified by
the Prophet under theſe borrowed or feigned names of Gog and
Magog... And this Earth-borri race, encreaſing and multiplying after
the manner of Men, by carnal propagation, after a thouſand years,
grew numerous, as the Sand by the Sea ; and thereupon made an
Jrruption or inundation upon the face of the Earth, and upon the
habitations of the Saints; As the barbarous Nations did formerly
upon Chriſtendom: Or as the Gyants are faid to lave made War
againſt
150
Book IV.
The I beory of the Earth.
1
-
againſt the Gods. But they were foun confounded in their impious
and ſacrilegious deſign, being ſtruck and conſum'd by fire from
Heaven.
Some will think, it may be, that there was ſuch a double race of
Mankind in the firſt VVorld alſo. The Sons of Adam, and the Sons of
God: becauſe it is ſaid, Gen. 6. When men began to multiply upon the
face of the Earth, that the SONS OF GOD SAW THE DAUGH-
TERS OF MEN, that they were fair, and they took thein Wives of all
that they lik d. And it is added preſently, ver. 4. There were Gyants in
the Earth in thoſe days ; and alſo after that, when the Sons of God came
in into the daughters of men, and they bare children to them : the firme
became mighty men, which were of old men of renown. Here ſeem to be
two or three orders or races in this Ante-diluvian VVorld. The
Sons of God: The Sons and Daughters of Adam : and a third ſort ari-
ſing froin the mixture and copulation of theſe, which are call’d
Mighty men of old, or Hero's. Beſides, liere are Gyants mention’d,
and to which they are to be reduc'd, it does no: certainly ap-
pear.
This mixture of theſe two Races, whatſoever they were, gave,
it ſeems, ſo great offence to God, that he deſtroy'd that World
upon it, in a Deluge of Water. It hath been matter of great
difficulty to determine, who theſe Sons of God were, that fell in
love with and married the daughters of men. There are two con-
jectures that prevail moſt: One that they were Angels : and another,
that they were of the Pofterity of Seth, and diſtinguiſh'd from the
reſt, by their Piety, and the worſhip of the true God: ſo that it
was a great crime for them to mingle with the reſt of mankind,who
are ſuppos’d, to have been Idolaters. Neither of theſe opinions is to
me ſatisfactory. For as to Angels ; Good Angels neither marry, nor
are given in marriage ; Matt. 22. 30. and bad Angels are not call’d
the Sons of God. Belides, if Angels were capable of thoſe mean plea-
ſures, we ought in reaſon to ſuppoſe, that there are female Angels,
as well as inale ; for ſurely thoſe capacities are not in vain through
a whole. Species of Beings. And if there be female Angels, we can-
not imagine, but that they muſt be of a far more charming beauty
than the dowdy daughters of men. Then as to the line of Seth, It
does not appear that there was any ſuch diſtinction of Idolaters and
true Worſhippers before the Flood, or that there was any ſuch
thing, as Idolatry, at that time : nor for ſome Ages aſter. Beſides,
it is not ſaid, that the Suns of Cod fell in love with the Daughters of
Cain, or of any degenerate race, but with the Daughters of Adam:
which may be the Daughters of Seth, as well as of any other. Theſe
conjectures therefore ſeem to be ſhallow and ill-grounded. But what
the diſtinction was of thoſe two orders, remains yet very uncer-
tain.
St. Paul to the Galatians, (Chap. 4. 21, 22, &c.) makes a diſtincti-
on alſo of a double Progeny: that of Sarah, and that of Hagar. One
was born according to the fleſh, after a natural manner: and the
other by the divine power, or in vertue of the divine promiſe. This
diſtinction of a natural and ſupernatural origine, and of a double
progeny: the one born to ſervitude, the other to liberty : repreſents
very
Chap 10. Concerning the New Heavens,&c.
# 151
very well ether the manner of our preſent birth, and of our future.
at the Reſurreciiuil. Or th.it double progeny and double inanner of
birth, which we luppoſe in the Future Earth. 'Tis true, St. Paul ap
plies this to the Law and the Goſpel ; but Typical things, you kno:v;
have different aſpects and complecions: which are not exclusive of
one another : and ſo it may be here. But however this double race
of Mankind in the Future Earth, to explain the Doctrine of Gog
and Migog, is but a conjecture : and does not pre:end io be other
wife conlider'd.
The lait thing that remains to be conlider'd and accounted for, is
the upſhot and conclulion of all: namely, what will become of the
Earth after the thouſand years expir'd? Or after the Day of Judg.
ment paft, and the Saints tranſlated into Heaven, what will be the
face of things here below? There being nothing expreſly reveal'd
concerning this, we muſt not expect a poſitive reſolution of it. And
the difficulty is not peculiar to our hypotheſis : for though the Mil.
lennium, and the final Judgment were concluded in the preſent
Earth, the Quare would ſtill remain, What would become of this
Earth after the Laſt Day. So that all parties are equally concern'd,
and equally free, to give their opinion, What will be the last state
and Confummation of this Earth. Scripture, I told you, hath not de-
fin'd this point; and the Philoſophers ſay very little concerning it.
The Stoicks indeed ſpeak of the final reſolution of all things into
Fire, or intu Æther : which is the pureſt and ſubtleſt ſort of fire.
So that the whole Globe or Maſs of the Earth, and all particular
bodies, will, according to them., be at laſt diſſolv'd into a liquid
fiam. Neither was this Doctrine firſt invented by the Stoicks : Hen
raclitus taught it long before them: and I take it to be as ancient as
Orpheus himſelf: who was the firſt Philoſopher amongſt the Greeks.
And he deriving his notions from the B.urbarick Philofophers, or the
Sages of the Eaſt, that School of Wiſdom may be look'd upon as
the true ſeminary of this Doctrine : as it was of inost other natural
knowledge.
But this diſſolution of the Earth into lire, may be underſtood two
ways ; either that it will be diffoly'd into a looſe dame, and ſo dif-
fipated and loſt as Lightning in the Air, and vaniſh into nothing 5
or titulić will be diſſolv’d into a fist tiaine, ſuch as the Sun is, or
a fixt Star. And I am of opinion, that the Earth after the laſt Day
of Judgment, will be chang’d into the nature of a Sun, or of a tixt
Star; and ſhine like them in the Firmainent. Being all melted down
into a maſs of Æthereal matter, and enlightning a Sphere or Orb
round about it, I have no direct and demonſtrative proof of this, I
confeſs ; But if Planets were once fixt Stars, as I believe they were;
their revoluiion to the ſame ſtate again, in a great Circle of Time,
ſeems to be according to the methods of Providence ; which loves
to recover what was loſt or decay'd, after certain periods : and
what was originally good and happy, to make it ſo again ; All Na-
ture, at latt, being transform’d into a like glory with the Sons of Røn. 8. 2 1.
Goal.
I will not tell you what foundation there is in Nature, for this
change or transformation ; from the interiour conftitution of the
Earth,
152 The I heory of the Earth. Book IV.
។
Ver, 23
Ver. 25.
ܪ
Ver. 21.
Earth, and the inſtances we have ſeen of new Stars appearing in the
Heavens. I thould lead the Engliſh Reader too far out of his way,
to diſcourſe of theſe things. But if there be any paſſages or expreri-
ons in Scripture, that countenance ſuch a ſtate of things afier the
day of judgment, it wiil not be improper to take notice of unin.
That radiant and illuſtrious Jeruſalem, deſcrib'd by St. John, Apoc.
21. ver. 10, 11, 12, &c. compos'd all of Gemms and bright materi-
als, clear and ſparklin?, as a Star in the Firmament: Who can give .
an account u hat that is ? Its found itions, walls, gates, ſtrets, all
tlie Body of it, reſplendent as light or fire. What is there in Nature,
or in this lluiverſe, that bears any reſemblance with ſuch a Phäno-
menon as this, unleſs it be a Sun or a fist Star ? Eſpecially if we
add and conſider what follows, That the Gity had no need of the Sun,
nor of the Moon, to ſhine in it. And that there was no night there. This
can be no Terreſtrial Body ; it muſt be a ſubſtance luminous in it
ſelf, and a fountain of liglit, as a fixt Star. And upon ſuch a change
of the Eaith, or transforination, as this, would be brought to pails
the ſaying that i written, DEATH IS SIV ALLOWED UP LV
PICTORY. Which indeed S. Paul ſeems to apply to our Bodies
in particular, 1 Cor. 15:54. But in the Eighth Chapter to the Ro-
mans He extends it to all Nature. The Creation it ſelf alſo Mall be deli-
ver'd from the bondage of Corruption, into the glorious liberty of the Sons
of God. And accordingly S. John, ſpeaking of the ſame time with St.
Paul in that place to the Corinthians, namely of the general Refur-
rection and day of Judgment, ſays, Death and Hades, which we
render Hell, were caſt into the lake of fire. This is their being ſwalloin-
Apoc. 20. 14.
ed up in victory, which S. Paul ſpeaks of; when Death and Hades,
that is, all the Region of mortality : The Earth and all its depen-
dances : are abſorpt into a maſs of Fire; and converted, by a glo-
rious Victory over the powers of darkneſs, into a Luminous Body
and a region of Light.
This great Ilue and Period of the Earth, and of all humane af
fairs, tho' it ſeem to be founded in nature, and ſupported by ſele-
ral expreſſions of Scripture ; yet we cannot, for want of full infru-
Etion, propoſe it otherwiſe than as a fair Conjecture. The Heavens
and the Earth thall flie away at the day of Judgment, ſays the Text:
sípoc. 20. II. And their place ſhall not be found. This muſt be under-
ſtood of our Heavens and our Earth. And their flying away muſt be
their removing to ſome other part of the Univerſe ; ſo as their
place or relidence Thall not be found any more here below. This is
the eaſie and natural fence of the Words; and this tranſlation of
the Earth will not be without ſome change preceding, that makes it
leave its place, and, with a lofty fight, take its ſeat amongſt the
Stars.....--...There we leave it ; Having conducted it for the ſpace of
Seien Thouſand Years, through various changes, froin a dark Chuur
to a bright Star.
F
F 1 N IS.
A
R E VIEW
OF THE
1
THEORY
OF THE
E ARTH
And of its
PROOF S
ESPECIALLY
IN REFERENCE TO
SCRIPTURE.
LONDON,
Printed by R. N. for Walter Kettilby, at the Biſhop's
Head in S. Paul's Church-Yard, 1697.
155
--
A
REVIEW
OF THE
T H E O R Y
OF THE
E ART H
T
O take a review of this Theory of the Earth, which we have
now finiſh'd, We muſt conſider, firſt, the extent of it:
and then the principal parts whereof it conſiſts. It reaches,
as you ſee, from one end of the World to the other: From
the firſt Chaos to the laſt day, and the Conſummation of all things.
This, probably, will run the length of Seven Thouſand Years:
which is a good competent ſpace of time to exerciſe our Thoughts
upon, and to obſerve the ſeveral Scenes which Nature and Provi-
dence bring into View within the compaſs of ſo many Ages.
The matter and principal parts of this Theory, are ſuch things as
are recorded in Scripture. We do not feign a Subject, and then de-
ſcant upon it, for diverſion ; but endeavour to give an intelligible
and rational account of ſuch matters of Fact, paſt or future, as are
there ſpecifi’d and declar'd. What it hath ſeem'd good to the Holy
Ghoſt to communicate to is, by Hiſtory or Propliecy, concerning
the ſeveral States and general Changes of this Earth, makes the Ar-
gument of our Diſcourſe. Therefore the things themſelves muſt
be taken for granted, in one ſence or other : ſeeing beſides all other
proofs, they have the Authority of a Revelation; and our buſineſs
is only to give ſuch an explication of them, as ſhall approve it ſelf
to the faculties of Man, and be conformable to Scripture.
We will therefore firſt ſet down the things themſelves, that make
the ſubject matter of this Theory: and remind you of our explica-
tion of them. Then recollect the general proofs of that explication,
from Reaſon and Nature: but niore fully and particularly ſhew how
it is grounded upon Scripture. The primary Phenomena whereof we
are to give an account, are theſe five or Six.
I. The original of the Earth from a Chaos.
II. The ſtate of Paradiſe, and the Ante-diluvian World.
III. The Univerſal
, Deluge.
IV. The Univerſal Conflagration.
V. The Renovation of the World, or the New Heavens and New Earth.
VI. The Confummation of all things.
X2
Theſe
156
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
Theſe are unqueſtionably in Scripture: and theſe all relate, as
you fee, to the ſeveral forms, ſtates and revolutions of this Earth.
We are therefore oblig'd to give a clear and coherent account of
theſe Phänomena, in that order and conſecution wherein they ſtand
to one another.
Tliere are alſo in Scripture ſome other things, relating to the
ſame Subjects, that may be call’d the Secondary Ingredients of this
Theory, and are to be referr'd to their reſpective primary heads.
Such are, for inſtance,
1
I. The Longevity of the Ante-diluvians.
II. The Rupture of the Great ibyſs, at the Deluge.
III. The appearing of the Rainbow after the Deluge: as a ſign that
there never ſhould be a ſecond Flood.
+
+
7
ture.
Theſe things Scripture hatlı alſo left upon record : as directions
and indications how to underſtand the Ante-diluvian ſtate, and the
Deluge it ſelf. Whoſoever therefore ſhall undertake to write the
Theory of the Earth, muſt think himſelf bound to give us a juſt ex-
plication of theſe ſecondary Phänomena, as well as of the primary;
and that in ſuch a dependance and connexion, as to make them giie
and receive light from one another.
The former part of the Task is concerning the World behind us,
Times and Things paſt, that are already come to light. The later
is concerning the World before us, Times and Things to come:
That lie yet in the boſom of Providence, and in the ſeeds of Na-
And theſe are chiefly the Conflagration of the World, and the
Renovation of it. When thefe are over and expir'd, then comes the
1 Cor. Isi end, as S. Paul ſays. Then the Heavens and the Earth fly away, as
$. John ſays. Then is the Gonſumenation of all things, and the laft
Afor. 20.
period of this ſublunary World, whatſoever it is. Thus far the
Theoriſt muſt go, and purſue the motions of Nature, till all things
are brought to reſt and ſilence. And in this latter part of the Theory,
there is alſo a collateral Phänomenon, the Millennium, or Thouſand
Years Reign of Chriſt and his Saints, upon Earth, to be conſider'd.
For this according as it is repreſented in Scripture, does imply a
change in the Natural World, as well as in the Moral: and there-
fore muſt be accounted for, in the Theory of the Earth. At leaſt it
muſt be there determind, whether that ſtate of the World, which is
ſingular and extraordinary, will be before or after the Contia ra-
tion.
Theſe are the Principals and Incidents of this Theory of the Earth,
as to the Matter and Subject of it: which, you fee, is both imper
fant, and wholly taken out of Scripture. As to our explication of
theſe points, that is ſufficiently known, being ſet down at large in
four Books of this Theory. Therefore it remains only, having ſeen
the Matter of the Theory, to exarnine the form of it, and the proofs
of it: for from theſe two things it muſt receive its cenſure. As to
the form, the characters of a Regular Theory ſeem to be theſe three;
Few and eaſie Poftulatums : Union of Parts: and a Fitness 10 anfirer,
fully and clearly, all the Phenomena to which it is to be apply’d.
We
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
157
We think our Hypotheſis does not want any of theſe Characters.As
to the Firſt, we take but one ſingle Poſtulatum for the whole Theory:
and that an eaſie one, warranted both by Scripture and Antiquity :
Namely, That this Earth riſe, at firſt, from a Chaos. As to the ſecond,
Union of Parts, The whole Theory is but one Series of Cauſes and
Effects from that firſt Chaos. Beſides, you can ſcarce admit any one
part of it, firſt, laſt, or intermediate, but you muſt, in conſequence
of that, admit all the reſt. Grant me but that the Deluge is truly
explain'd, and I'le deſire no more for proof of all the Theory. Or,
if you begin at the o. her end, and grant the New Heavens and Nero
Earth after the Conflagration, you will be led back again to the firſt
Heavens and firſt Earth that were before the Flood. For St. John
ſays, that New Earth was without a Sea : Apoc. 21. 1. And it was a
Ren.vation, or Reſtitution to ſome former ſtate of things : there was
therefore ſome former Earth without a Sea; which not being the
preſent Earth, it muſt be the Ante diluvian. Beſides, both St. John,
and the Prophet Iſaias, have repreſented the New Heavens and New
Earth, as Paradiſiacal ; According as is prov'd, Book the 4th. chap. 2.
And having told us the form of the New-future-Earth, that it will
have no Sea, it is a reaſonable inference that there was no Sea in the
Paradiſiacal Earth. However from the form of his Future Earth,
which St. . hu repreſents to us, we may at leaſt conclude, That an
Earth without a Sea is no Chimæra, or impoſſibility: but rather a fit
ſeat and habitation for the Juſt and the Innocent.
Thus you ſee the parts of the Theory link and hold faſt one ano-
ther : according to the ſecond character. And as to the third, of be-
ing ſuited to the Phenomena, we muſt refer that to the next head, of
Proofs. It may be truly ſaid, that bare coherence and union of parts
is not a ſufficient proof ; The parts of a Fable or Romance may hang
aptly together, and yet have no truth in them. This is enough in-
deed to give the title of a juft Compoſition to any work, but not of
a true one : till it appear that the concluſions and explications are
grounded upon goud natural evidence, or upon good Divine au-
thority. We muſt therefore proceed now to the third thing to be
conſider'd in a Theory, What its Proofs are: or the grounds upon
which it ſtands, whether Sacred or Natural.
According to Natural evidence, things are proved from their
Cauſes or their Effects. And we think we have this double order of
proofs for the truth of our Hypotheſis. As to the method of Cauſes,
we proceed from what is more ſimple, to what is more compound :
and build all upon one foundation. Go but to the Head of the
Theory, and you will ſee the Cauſes lying in a train before you,
from firſt to laſt
. And tho' you did not know the Natural Hiſtory of
the World, paſt or future, you might, by intuition, foretell it, as
to the grand revolutions and ſucceſſive faces of Nature,through a long
ſeries of Ages. If we have given a true account of the motions of
the Chaos, we have alſo truly form'd the firſt habitable Earth. And
if that be truly form’d, we have thereby given a true account of
the ſtate of Paradiſe, and of all that depends upon it. And not of
that only, but alſo of the univerſal Deluge. Both theſe we have
Thewn in their cauſes. The one from the form of that Earth, and
the
158
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
the other from the Fall of it into the Abyſs. And tho we had not
been inade acquainted with theſe things by Antiquity, we might,
in contemplation of the Cauſes, lave truly conceiv'd them, as pro-
perties or incidents to the Firſt Earth. But as to the Deluge, I do not
ſay, that we might have calculated the Time, manner, and other
circum{tances of it: Theſe things were regulated by Providence, in
ſubordination to the Moral World. But that there would be, at one
time or o. her, a diſruption of that Earth, or of the Great Abyſs :
and in conſeque..ce of it, an univerſal Deluge : So far, I think, the
light of a Theory might Carry us.
Furthermore, In conſequence of this diſrup:ion of the Primeval
Theor. Book 3. Earth, at ihe Deiuge, the preſent Earth was made hollow and ca-
ch. 7, 8.
vernous: and by that means, due preparations being uſed) capable
of Combuſtion, or of purithing by an univerſal Fire : Yet,to ſpeak in-
genuouſly, This is as hard a ſtep to be made, in vertue of Natural
cauſes, as any in the whole Theory. But in recompence of that de-
fect, the Conflagration is ſo plainly and literally taught us in Scrip-
ture, and avow'd by Antiquity, that it can fall under no diſpute, as
to the thing it ſelf. And as to a capacity or diſpoſition to it in the
preſent Earth, that I think is ſufficiently made out.
Then, the Conflagration admitted, in that way it is explain'd in
the Third Book: The Earth, you ſee, is, by that fire, reduc'd to a
ſecond Chaos. A Chaos truly ſo call’d. And from that, as from the
Firſt, ariſes anotlier Creation, or New Heavens and a Nem Earth;
By the ſame cauſes, and in the ſame form, with the Paradiſiacal. This
is the Renova!ion of the World: The Reſtitution of all things : men-
tioned both by Scripture and Antiquity : And by the Prophet Iſaiah,
St. Peter and St. John, call'd the New Heavens and New Earth. With
this, as the laſt period, and moſt glorious Scene of all humane af-
fairs, our Theory concludes, as to this method of Cauſes, whereof
we are now ſpeaking.
I ſay, here it ends as to the method of Cauſes. For tho' we purſue
the Earth ſtill further, even to its laſt Diſſolution : which is callid
the Conſummation of all things : yet all, that we have ſuperadded
upon that occaſion, is but Problematical : and may, without preju-
dice to the Theory, be argued and diſputed on either hand. "I do
not know, but that our conjectures there may be well grounded :
but however, not ſpringing fo directly from the ſame root, or, at
leaſt, not by ways, ſo clear and viſible, I leave that part undecided.
Eſpecially ſeeing we pretend to write no more than the Theory of
the Earth, and therefore as we begin no higher than the Chaos, ſo
we are not obliged to go any further than to the laſt ſtate of a Ter.
reſtrial conſiſtency: which is that of the New Heavens and the New
Earth.
This is the firſt natural proof, From the order of Cauſes. The ſe-
cond is f.om the conlideration of Effects. Namely of ſuch effects as
are already in being. And therefore this proof can extend only to
that part of the Theory, that explains the preſent and paſt form
and Phänomena of the Earth. Whiat is Future, muſt be left to a fur-
ther trial, when the things come to paſs, and preſent themſelves to
be examin’d and compar'd with the Hypothelis
. As to the preſent
Form
#
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
159
Form of the Earth, we call all Nature to witneſs for us: The Rocks
and the Mountains, the Hills and the Valleys, the deep and wide Sea,
and the Caverns of the Ground : Let theſe ſpeak, and tell their ori-
gine: How the Body of the Earth came to be thus torn and man-
gled: If this ſtrange and irregular ſtructure was not the effect of a
ruine: and of ſuch a ruine as was univerſal over the face of the
whole Globe, But we have given ſuch a full explication of this, in
the firſt part of the Theory, froin Chapt. the 9th. to the end of that
Treatiſe, that we dare ſtand to the judgment of any that reads thoſe
four Chapters, to determine if the Hypotheſis does not anſwer all
thoſe Phänomena, eaſily and adequately.
The next Phænomenon to be conſider'd, is the Deluge, with its
adjuncts. This alſo is fully explain’d by our Hypotheſis, in the 2d.
3d. and 6th. Chapters of the firſt Book, Where it is ſhewn, that the
Mofaical Deluge, that is, an univerſal Inundation of the whole
Earth, above the tops of the higheſt Mountains, made by a break-
ing open of the Great Abyſs, (for thus far Mofes leads us) is fully ex-
plain'd by this Hypotheſis, and cannot be conceiv'd in any other me-
thod hitherto propos'd ? There are no ſources or ſtores of Water
ſufficient for ſuch an effect, that may be drawn upon the Earth, and
drawn off again, but by ſuppoſing ſuch an Abyſs, and ſuch a Dif-
ruption of it, as the Theory repreſents.
Laſtly, As to the Phänomena of Paradiſe and the Ante-diluvian
World, we have ſet them down in order in the ad. Book : and ap,
ply'd to each of them its proper explication, from the ſame Hypo-
theſis. We have alſo given an account of that Character which An-
tiquity always aſſign’d to the firſt age of the World, or the Golden
Age, as they call'd it : namely, Equality of Seaſons throughout the
Year, or a perpetual Equinox. We have alſo taken in all the ad-
juncts or concomitants of theſe States, as they are mention’d in Scrip:
ture. The Longevity of the Ante-diluvians, and the declenſion of their
age by degrees, after the Flood. As alſo that wonderful Phænoine-
non, the Rainbow : which appear'd to Noah for a Sign,that the Earth
ſhould never undergo a ſecond Deluge. And we have ſhewn, Theor. Book
2. chap. s.
wherein the force and propriety of that Sign conſiſted, for confirm-
ing Noah's faith in the promiſe and in the divine veracity.
Thus far we have explain'd the paſt Phänomena of the Natural
World. The reſt are Futurities, which ſtill lie hid in their Cauſes;
and we cannot properly prove a Theory from effects that are not
yet in being. But ſo far as they are foretold in Scripture, both as to
ſubſtance and circumſtance, in proſecution of the fame Principles
we have ante-dated their birth, and ſhew'd how they will come to
paſs
. We may therefore, I think, reaſonably conclude, That this
Theory lias performed its task, and anſwer'd its title : having givesi
an account of all the general changes of the Natural World, as far
as either Sacred Hiſtory looks backwards, or Sacred Prophecy looks
forwards. So far as the one tells us what is part in Nature, and the
other what is to come. And if all thiş be nothing but an appearance
of truth, 'tis a kind of fatality upon us to be deceivid.
SO
16о
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
1
SA
O much for Natural Evidence, from the Cauſes or Effets. We
now proceed to Scripture, which will inake the greateſt part
of this Review. The Sacred Balīs upon which the whole Theory
ſtands, is the doctrine of S. Peter, deliver'd in his Second Epiſtle and
Third Chapter, concerning the Triple Order and Succeſſion of the Hea-
vens and the Earth. That comprehends the whole extent of our
Theory: which indeed is but a large Commentary upon S. Peter's
Text. The Apoſtle ſets out a threefold ſtate of the Heaveris and
Earth: with ſome general properties of each : taken from their dif-
ferent Conſtitution and different Fate. The Theory takes the ſame
threefold ſtate of the Heavens and the Earth: and explains more
particularly, whe, ein their different Conſtitution conſiſts : and
how, under the conduct of Providence, their different fate depends
upon it. Let us ſet down the Apoſtle's words, with tlie occaſion of
them: and iher plain ſence, according to the moſt eaſie and natu-
ral explication.
i
}
1 Pet. 3.
Ver. 3. Knowing this firſt, that there ſhall comin the laſt days Scof
fors, walking after their own lufts.
4. und sizing, Where is the promiſe of his coming ? for ſince the fa-
thers fell ijleep, all things continue as they were from the beginning of the
creation
5. For this they willingly are ignorant of, that by the word of God, the
heavens were of old, and
the earth conſiſting of water and by water.
6. Where'iy the world that then was, being overflowed with water,
periſhed.
7. But the heavens and the earth that are now, by the ſ me rrord, are
kept in fiore, reſerved unto fire againſt the day of judgment, and perdition
of ringodly men.--------
10. Ibe day of the Lord will come as a thief in the night, in the mbich
the heavens ſhall paſs away with a great noiſe, and the elements ſhall melt
with fervent heat; the earth alſo and'the works that are therein ſhall be
bærizt up.
13. Nevertheleſs we, according to his promiſe, look for nem heavens
ind a nemr earth, wherein dwelleth righteouſneſs.
This is the whole Diſcourſe ſo far as relates to our Subject. S Peter,
you fee, had met with ſome that ſcoff 'd at the future deſtruction
of the World, and the coming of our Saviour ; and they were men,
it ſeems, that pretended to Philoſophy and Argument; and they
uſe this argument for their opinion, Seeing there hath been no change
in Nature, or in the World, from the beginning to this time, why should
ure think there will be any change for the future?
The Apoſtle anſwers to this, That they willingly forget or are
ignorant that there were Heavens of old, and an Earth, lo and ſo
conſtituted ; conſiſting of Water and by Water s by reaſon where-
of that World, or thoſe Heavens and that Earth, periſh'd in a De
luge of Water. But, faith he, the Heavens and the Earth that are
now, are of another conſtitution, fitted and reſerved to another
fute
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
161
fate, namely, to periſh by Fire. And after theſe are perilh'd, there
will be New Heavens and a New Earth, according to God's promiſe.
This is an eaſie Paraphraſe, and the plain and genuine ſence
of the Apoſtle's diſcourſe; and no body, I think, would ever look
after any other ſence, if this did not carry them out of their uſual
road, and point to concluſions which they did not fancy. This fence,
you ſee, hits the objection directly, or the Cavil which theſe ſcoffers
inade; and tells them, that they vainly pretend that there liath been
no change in the World ſince the beginning, for there was one fort
of Heavens and Earth before the Flood, and another fort now;
the firſt having bien deſtroy'd at the Deluge. So that the Apoſtle's
argument ſtands upon this Foundatiori, That there is a diverſity be-
twixt the preſent Heavens and Earth, and the Ante-diluvian Hea-
vers and Earth ; take away that, and you take away all the force
of his Anſwer
Then as to his Nem Heavens and New Earth after the Conflagra-
tion, they muſt be inaterial and natural, in the ſame ſence and ligni-
fication with the former Heavens and Earth; unleſs you will offer open
violence to the Text. So that this Triplicity of the Heavens and the
Earth, is the firſt, obvious, plain fence of the Apoitle's diſcourſe :
which every one would readily accept, if it did not draw after it a
long train of Conſequences, and lead them into other Worlds than
they ever thought of before, or are willing to enter upon now.
But we ſhall have occaſion by and by, to examine this Text more
fully in all its circumſtances. Give me leave in the mean time to
obſerve, That S. Paul alſo implyes that triple Creation which S. Peter
expreſſes. S. Paul, I ſay, in the 8th Chap. to the Rom. ver.20,21. tells
us of a Creation that will be redeem'd from Vanity: which are the
New Heavens and New Earth to come. A Creation in ſubjection to
l'unity : which is the preſent ſtate of the World, And a Creatiin that
was ſubjected to Vanity, in hopes of being reſtor’d: which was the
firſt Paradiſiacal Creation. And theſe are the Three States of the
Natural World, which make the ſubject of our Theory.
To theſe two places of S. Peter and S. Paul, Iinight add that third
in S. Fohn, concerning the New Heavens and New Earth; with that
diſtinguiſhing. Character, that the Earth was without a Sea. As
this diſtinguiſheth it from the preſent Earth, ſo, being a Reſtitution
or Reſtauration, as we noted before, it muſt be the ſame with ſome
former Earth: and conſequently, it implies that there was another
precedent ſtate of the Natural World, to which this is a Reſtitution.
Theſe three places I alledge, as comprehending and confirming the
Theory in its full extent. But we do not ſuppoſe them all of the ſame
force and clearneſs. S. Peter leads the way, and gives light and
ſtrength to the other two. When a Point is prov'd by one clear
Text, we allow others, as auxiliaries, that are not of the fame clear-
neſs ; But being open'd, receive light from the primary Text, and
reflect it upon the Argument.
So much for the Theory in general. We will now take one or
two principal heads of it, which vertually contain all the reſt, and ex-
amine them more ſtrictly and particularly, in reference to their agree-
ment with Scripture. The two Heads we pitch upon, Ihall be, our
Y
Expli-
1
A
162
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
!
T
1
Explication of the Deluge, and our Explication of the New Heavens
and New Earth. We told you before, theſe Two were as the
Hinges, upon which all the Theory inoves, and which hold the pars
of it in firm union one with another. As to the Deluge, if I bave
explain’d that aright, by the Diſruption of the Great Abyſs, and
the Diſſolution of the Earth that cover'd it, all the reſt follows in
ſuch a chain of Conſequences, as cannot be broken. Wherefore in
order to the proof of that Explication, and of a!l that depends upon it,
I will make bold to lay down this Propoſition, That onr Hypotheſis
concerning the Univerſal Deluge, is not only more agreeable to Reifon and
Philofophy than any other yet propos'd to the World, but is alſo more agree.
able to Scripture. Nainely, to ſuch places of Scripture, as reflect up-
on the Delugė, the Abyſs, and the form of the firſt Earth. And par-
ticularly, to the Hiſtory of Noah's Flood, as recorded by Moſes. If I
can make this good, it will, doubtleſs, give ſatisfaction to all that are
free and intelligent. And I deſire their patience, if I proceed ſlowly
and by ſêveral ſteps. We will divide our task into parts, and exa-
mine them ſeparately: Firſt, by Scripture in general
, and then by
Moses his Hiſtory and deſcription of the Flood.
Our Hypotheſis of the Deluge conſiſts of Three Principal Heads, or
differ's remarkably in Three things from the common Explication.
Firšt, In that we ſuppoſe the Ante-diluvian Earth to have been of
another Form and Conſtitution from the preſent Earth : with the
Abyſs placed under it.
Secondly, In that we ſuppoſe the Deluge to have been made, not
by any inundation of the Sea, or overflowing of Fountains and Ri-
vers : nor (principally ) by any exceſs of Rains : but by a real diſfo-
lution of the Exteriour Earth, and diſruption of the Abyſs which
it cover’d. Theſe are the two principal points, to which inay be
added, as a Corollary,
Thirdly, That the Deluge was not in the nature of a ſtanding Pool:
The Waters lying every where level, of an equal depth and with an
uniform Surface : But was made by a fluctuation and commotion of
the Abyſs upon the diſruption: Which commotion being over, the
Waters retired into their Chanels, and let the dry Land appear.
Theſe are the moſt naterial and fundamental parts of our Hypo-
theſis: and theſe being prov'd conſonant to Scripture, there can be
no doubt of the reſt.
We begin with tlie first: That the Ante-diluvian Earth was of
another form and conſtitution from the preſent Earth, with the Abyſs
placed under it. This is confirm’d in Scripture, both by ſuch places
as affert a diverſity in general: and by other places that intimate
to us, wherein that diverſity conſiſted, and what was the form of the
firſt Earth. That diſcourſe of S. Peter's, which we have ſet before
you concerning the paſt, preſent, and future, Heaver.s and Earth,
is ſo full a proof of this diverſity in general, that you muſt either al-
low it, or make the Apoſtle's argumentation of nó effect. He ſpeaks
plainly of the Natural World, The Heavens and the Earth: And he
makes a plain diſtinction, or rather oppoſition, betwixt thoſe before
and after the Flood : fo that the leaſt we can conclude from his
words, is a diverſity betwixt them; in anſwer to that Identity or
Immuta
T
?
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
163
Immutability of Nature, which the Scotfers pretended to have been
ever ſince the beginning.
But tho’the Apoſtie, to me, ſpeaks plairıly of the Natural World;
and diſtinguiſhes that which was before the Flood, from the preſint:
Yet there are ſome that will allow neither of theſe to be contain'd in
S. Peter s words; and by that means would make this whole Dif-
courſe of little or no effect, as to our purpoſe. And ſeeing we, on the
contrary,
have made it the chief Scripture-baſis of the whole Theory
of the Earth, we are oblig'd to free it from thoſe falſe gloſſes or
mif-interpretations, that leiten the force of its teſtimony, or make it
wholly ineffectua!.
Thiele Interp:eter's ſay, That S. Peter meant no more than to mind
there Scoffers, that the World was once deſtroy'd by a Deluge of
Water: meaning the Animate World, Mankind and living Creatures.
And that it hall be deſtroy d again by another Element, namely by
Firc. So as there is no oppoſition or diverſity betwixt the two Na-
tural Worlds, taught or intended by the Apoſtle; but only in re-
ference to their different fate or manner of periſhing, and not of
their different nature or conſtitution.
Here are two main points, you ſee, wherein our interpretations
of this diſcourſe of the Apoſtles, differ. Firſt, In that they make the
Apoſtle (in that fixth verſe) to underſtand only the World Animate,
or Men and brute Creatures. That theſe were indeed deſtroy'd, but
not the Natural World, or the form and conſtitution of the then
Earth and Heavens. Secondly, That there is no diverſity or oppofi-
tion inade by S. Peter betwixt the ancient Heavens and Earth, and
the preſent, as to their form and conſtitution. We pretend that theſe
are miſ-apprehenſions, or miſ-repreſentations of the fence of the A-
- poſtle in both reſpects, and offer theſe reaſons to prove them to be ſo.
For the firſt point ; That the Apoſtle ſpeaks here of the Natural
World, particularly in the 6th Verſe; and that it perilli’d, as well as
the animate, Theſe Conſiderations ſeem to prove.
Firit, Becauſe the Argument or ground theſe Scoffers went up-
on, was taken from tlie Natural World, its conſtancy and perma-
nency in the ſame ſtate from the beginning; Therefore if the Apoſtle
anſwers ad idem, and takes away their Argument, he muſt under-
ſtand the fame Natural World, and ſhow that it hath been chang'd,
or hath periſh'd.
You will ſay, it may be, the Apoſtle doth not deny, nor take away
the ground they went upon, but denies the conſequence they inade
from it ; That Therefore there would be no change, becauſe there had been
none. No, neither, doth he do this, if by the World in the 6th, ver.
he underſtands Mankind only; for their ground was this, there hath
been no change in the Natural World; Their conſequence, this, There-
fore there will be none, nor any Confagration. Now the Apoſtle's
anſwer, according to you, is this, You forget that Mankind hath been
deſtroyed in a Deluge. And wliat then? what's this to the Natural
World, whereof they were ſpeaking? This takes away neither an-
tecedent nor conſequent, neither ground nor inference; nor any way
toucheth their Argument, which proceeded from the Natural World
to the Natural World. Therefore you muſt either ſuppoſe that the
Apoſtle
Y 2
164
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
Apoſtle takes away their ground, or he takes may nothing.
Secondly, What is it that the Apoitle tells theſe Scoffers they wert
ignorant of? That there was a Deluge, that deſtroyed Mankind -
They could not be ignorant of that, nor pretend to be fo; It was
therefore the conſtitution of thoſe Old Heavens and Earth, and the
change or deſtruction of them at the Deluge, that they were ignorant
of, or did not attend to; and of this the Apoſtle minds them:
Theſe Scoffers appear to have been Jems by the phraſe they uſe,
ſince the Fathers fell aſleep, which in both parts of it is a Judaical
expreſſion; and does S. Peter tell the Jews that had Mofes read to
thein every Sabbath, That they were ignorant that Mankind was once
deſtroyed with a Deluge in the Days of Noah? or could they pretend
to be ignorant of that without making themſelves ridiculous both to
Ferrs and Chriſtians ? Beſides, theſe do not ſeem to have been or
the vulgar ainongſt them, for they bring a Philoſophical Argument
There was a for their opinion; and alſo in their very argument they refer to the
a Sect amongſt
the Fews that Hiſtory of the Old Teſtament, in ſaying. Since the Fathers fell aſleep,
held this per. amongſt which Fathers, Noah was one of the moſt remarkable.
immutability of Nature; and Maimonides himſelf was of this principle, and gives the ſame reaſon for it with the
Scofiers here in the Text, Quod mundus retinet o fequitur conſuetudinem ſuam. And as to thoſe of the Fews
that were Ariſtoteleans, it was very fuitable to their principles to hold the incorruptibility of the World, as
petuity and
their Miaſter did, l'it. died. in loc.
Thirdly, The deſign of the Apoſtle is to prove to them, or to
diſpoſe them to the belief of the Conflagration, or future deſtruction
of the World; which I ſuppoſe you will not deny to be a deſtruction
of the Natural World; therefore to prove or perſwade this, he muß
uſe an argument taken from a precedent deſtruction of the Natural
World; for to give an inſtance of the periihing of Mankind only,
would not reach home 10 liis purpoſe. And you are to obſerve
here that the Apoſtle does not proceed againſt them barely by Au-
thority; for what would that have booted? If theſe Scoffers would
have ſubmitted to Authority, they had already the Authority of
the Prophets and Apoſtles in this 'point : but he deals with them
at their own weapon, and oppoſes reaſons to reaſons; What hath
been done may be done, and if the Natural World hath been once
deſtroyed, 'tis not hard, nor unreaſonable, to ſuppoſe thoſe:Prophe-
cies to be true, that ſay it ſhall be deſtroyed again.
Fourthly, Unleſs we underſtand here the Natural World, we make
the Apoſtle both redundant in his diſcourſe, and alſo very ubſcure
in an eaſie Argument. If his deſign was only to tell thein that Man-
kind was once deſtroy'd in a Deluge, what's that to the Heavens
and the Earth? The 5th Verſe would be ſuperfluous; which
ſeems to make the foundation of his diſcourſe. He might have told
them how Mankind had periſh'd before with a Deluge, and aggra-
vated that deſtruction as much as he pleas’d, without telling them
how the Heavens and the Earth were conſtituted then ; what was
that to the purpoſe, if it had no dependance or connection with
the other ? In the precedent Chaptér, ver. 5. when he ſpeaks only of
the Floods deſtroying Mankind, he mentions nothing of the Heavens
or the Earth: and if you make him to intend no more here, what
le ſays more is ſuperfluous.
I alſo
yet he
1
1
A Review of the I beory of the Earth.
165
I alſo add, that you make the Apoſtle very obſcure and operoſe
in a very eaſie arguinent. How eaſie had it been for him, without
this Apparatus, to have told them, as he did before, that God
brought a Flood upon the World of the ungodly, and not given
us ſo much difficulty to underſtand his fence, or ſuch a ſuſpicion
and appearance, that he intended ſomething more; for that there is
at leaſt a great appearance and tendency to a further ſence, I think
none can deny; And St. Auſtin, Didymus Alex. Bede, as we ſhall ſee
hereafter, underſtood it plainly of the natural World: Alſo mo-
dern Expolitors and Criticks ; as Cajetan, Eſtius, Druſius, Heinſius,
have extended it to the na:ural Word, more or leſs ; tho they
had no Theory to miſlead them, nor ſo much as an hypotheſis to
ſupport thuin; but aitended only to the tenor of the Apoſtle's dif-
courſe, whicii conſtrain'd them to that ſence, in whole or in
part.
Frihly, the oppoſition carries it upon the natural World. The
oppoſition lies betwixt the oi fx Tanar d'esvos sej 2ñ and ót dūv s'eavol
og yñ, the Heav ns that were of old, and the Earth, and the preſent
Havens and Earth, or the two natural Worlds. And if they will
not allow them to be oppos’d in their natures (which yet we ſhall
prove by and by) at leaſt they muſt be oppos’d in their fate; and as
This is to periſh by fire, ſo That periſh'd by water ; And if it
pe-
riſh'd by water, it periſli’d; which is all we contend for at pre-
ſent.
Laſtly, if we would be as eaſily govern'd in the expoſition of this
place, as we are of other places of Scripture, it would be enough
to ſuggeſt, that in reaſon and fairneſs of interpretation, the ſame
World is deſtroy'd in the 6th. verſe, that was deſcrib'd in the fore-
going verſe ; but it is the Natural World that is deſcrib'd there, the
Heavens and the Earth, ſo and ſo conſtituted ; and therefore in
fairneſs of interpretation they ought to be underſtood here ; that
World being the ſubject that went innmediately before, and there
being nothing in the words that reſtrains them to the animate
World or to Mankind. In the 2d ch, ver. 5. the Apoſtle does re-
ſtrain the word scoouQ by adding doeßwr, the World of the ungodlys
but here 'tis not only illimited, but according to the context, both
preceding and following, to be extended to the Natural World. I
ſay by the following context too, for ſo it anſwers to the World
that is to periſh by Fire ; which will reach the frame of Nature as
well as Mankind.
For a concluſion of this firſt point, I will ſet down S. Auſtin's
judgment in this caſe, who in ſeveral parts of his works hath inter-
preted this place of S. Peter, of the natural xrorld. As to the heavens,
he hath theſe words in his Expoſition upon Geneſis, Hos etiam aerios
cælos quondam periiſſe Diluvio, in quâdam earum qua Canonica appellan-
tur, Epiſtolâ legimus. We read in one of the Epiſtles called Canonical,
this of S. Peter's, that the aerial heavens periſh'd in the De-
luge. And he concerns himſelf there to let you know that it was not
the ſtarry heavens that were deſtroy'd, the waters could not reach
ſo high; but the regions of our air. Tlien afterwards he hath theſe
words, Faciliùs eos (cælos) ſecundum illius Epiſtolæ authoritatem credi-
meaning
MINS
166 A Review of the Tbeory of the Earth.
I
mus periiſſe, & alios, ficut ibi fcribitur, repoſitos. He di riore eaſily be-
lieve, according to the authority of that Epiſtle, thoſe be17cus to baie
pe-
riſh'd; and others, as it is there written, ſubſtituted in their place. In
like manner, and to the ſame ſence, he hath theſe words upon Phil.
101. Aerii utique cæli perierunt ut propinqui Terris, fecundum quod dicun-
tur volucres cæli; funt autem & cæli cælorum, ſuperiores in Firmamento;
ſed utrùm & ip/? perituri ſint igni, an hi ſoli, qui etiam diluvio perierunt,
diſceptatio eft aliquanto ſcrupulofior inter deftos. And in his Book de Civ.
Dei, he hath ſeveral paſſages to the ſame purpoſe, Quemadmodum in
Apoftolicâ illâ Epiftolâ à toto pars accipitur, quod diluvio periiſſe diétus cft
mundus, quamvis fola ejus cum fuis cælis pars ima perierit. Theſe being
to the ſame effect with the firſt citation, I need not make thein En-
gliſh ; and this laſt place refers to the Earth as well as the Heavens,
as fereral other places in S. Auſtin do, whereof we shall give you an
account, when we come to lhew his judgment concerning the ſecond
point, the diverſity of the ante-diluvi.in and poſt-diluvi in World. This be-
ing but a foretaſie of his good will and inclinations towards this
Doctrine.
Theſe conſiderations alledg’d, ſo far as I can judge, are full and
unanſwerable proofs, that this diſcourſe of the Apoſtle's compre
hends and refers to the Natural World; and conſequently they war-
tant our interpretation in this particular, and deſtroy the contrary.
We have but one ſtep more to make good, That there was a change
made in this natural world at the Deluge, according to the Apoſtle ;
and this is to confute the ſecond part of their interpretation, which
ſuppoſeth that S. Peter makes no diſtinction or oppoſition betwixt
the antediluvian Heavens and Earth, and the preſent Heavens and
Earth, in that reſpect.
This ſecond difference betwixt us, methinks, is ſtill harſher than
the firſt; and contrary to the very form, as well as to the matter of
the Apoſtle's diſcourſe. For there is a plain antitheſis, or oppoſition
made betwixt the Heavens and the Earth of old (ver. the 5th.) and
the Heavens and the Earth that are now (ver. the 7th.) o extrañar
gegevor vej zñ and oi xův vegooi sj ign, and the adverſative particle,
but, you ſee marks the oppoſition; ſo that it is full and plain accor-
ding to Grammar and Logick. And that the parts or members of
this oppoſition differ in nature from one another, is certain froin
this, becauſe otherwiſe the Apoſtle's argument or diſcourſe is of no
effect, concludes nothing to the purpoſe; he makes no anſwer to
the objection, nor proves any thing againſt the Scoffers, unleſs you
admit that diverlity. For they ſaid, All things had been the ſame fro92
the beginning in the Natural World, and unleſs he ſay, as he manifeſt-
ly does, that there hath been a change in Nature, and that the Hea-
vens and Earth that are now, are different from the ancient Heavens
and Earth, wbich periſh d at the Flood, he ſays nothing to deſtroy
their argument, nor to confirm the Prophetical doctrine of the fu.
ture deſtruction of the Natural World.
This, I think, would be enough to ſatisfie any clear and free
mind concerning the meaning of the Apoſtle; but becauſe I deſire
to give as full a light to this place as I can, and to put the ſence of
it out of controverſie, if poſſible, for the future, I will make ſoine
further remarks to confirm this expoſition.
And
A Review of the 7 beory of the Earth.
167
nen
a quas.
And we may obſerve that ſeveral of thoſe reaſons which we have
given to prove, That the Natural World is underſtood by S. Peter, are
double reaſons ; and do alſo prove the other point in queſtion, a di-
verſity betwixt the tiro Natural Worlds, the Ante diluvian and the pre-
fent. As for inſtance, unleſs you admit this diverſity betwixt the
two natural Worlds, you make the 5th. verſe in this Chapter ſuper-
fluous and uſeleſs: and you muſt ſuppoſe the Apoſtle to make an in-
ference here without premiſes. In the 6th. verſe he makes an infe-
rence, * Whereby the World, that then was, periſh'd in a Deluge ; * di&r,
what does this whereby relate to? by reaſon of what ? ſure of the
per quæ. Vul-
par-
gat. Quam
ticular conſtitution of the Heavens and the Earth immediately be- obrem. beza
.
fore deſcrib’d. Neither would it have ſignified any thing to the Scof. Rui de causa,
fers, for the Apoſtle to have told them how the Ante-diluvian Hea- interprerum
vens and Earth were conſtituted, if they were conſtituted juſt in the reddidit Siar
fame manner as the preſent.
per quas ; ſub-
intelligenda
Hoc enim argumentationem Apoſtolicam tolleret, ſupponeretque illuſfores illos ignorälſe quod olim fuerit Diluvium ; Quod
fupponi non pofle Juprà oftendimus.
Beſides, what is it, as I ask'd before, that the Apoſtle teils there
Scoffers they were ignorant of? does he not ſay formally and ex-
preſly (ver. 5.) that they were ignorant that the Heavens and the
Earth were conſtituted fo and ſo, before the Flood ? but if they
were conſtituted as theſe preſent Heaveris and Earth are, they were
not ignorant of their conftitution ; nor did pretend to be ignorant,
for their own (miſtaken) argument ſuppoſeth it.
But before we proceed any further, give me leave to note the im-
propriety of our Tranſlation, in the sth. Verſe, or latter part
of it
Εξ ύδατG- και δι' υδάτων (vel δι' ύδατG.) συνερωσα, This we tranflate
ſtanding in the water, and out of the water, which is done manifeſtly in
compliance with the preſent form of the Eaith, and the notions of
the Tranſlators : and not according to the natural force and ſence
of the Greek words. If one inėt with this ſentence * in a Greek Au- * This phraſe
thor, who would ever render it ſtanding in the water and out of the
ſpeech ouresa
mater? nor do I know any Latin Tranſlator that hath ventur'd to var én vele
render them in that ſence'; nor any Latin Father ; St. Auſtin and St. is not unuſual
Jerome l'ın ſure do not, but Conſiſtens ex aquâ, or de aquâ, & per a thors, and up-
quam : for that later phraſe alſo oureçaran di udarQ does not with oh a like ſub-
ject; Plato
to good propriety ſignifie to ſtand in the water, as to conſiſt or ſubliſt
faith, τόν
by water, or by the help of water, T.inquam per caufam fuftinentem ; xóquer our
as St. Auſtin and Jerome render it. Neither does that inſtance they severe en mua
give from 1 Pet. 3. 20. prove any thing to the contrary, for the Ark dress, zñiss
was ſuſtain’d by the waters, and the Englijb does render it accor- but he that
flate Plato, The
World ſtands
out of fire, water, O'. would be thought neither Gracian, nor Philoſopher. The ſame phraſe is us'd in reciting
Heraclitus his opinion, tai név Te én mueo's ouveçável, xj eis rôto dvalutats. And alſo in Thales his
, which is
nearer to the ſubject, és gő Údarós, po, ourisával menta, which Cicero renders, ex aqua, dixit, conftare
omnia. So that it is eaſie to know the true importance of this phraſe, and how ill it is render'd in the Engliſh,
standing out of the water.
The Tranſlation being thus rectified, you ſee the ante diluvian
Heavens and Earth conſiſted of Water, and by water; which inakes
way
ܕܽ
or manner of
ſhould tran-
dingly.
till
168
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
refer the
way for a ſecond obſervation to prove our ſence of the Text; for
if you admit no diverlity betwixt thoſe Heavens and Earth, and the
preſent, ſhew us 'pray, how the preſent Heavens and Earth confift
of water, and by water. What watery conftitution have they? The
Apoſtle implies rather, that The now Heavens and Earth have a fiery
conſtitution. We have now Meteors of all ſorts in the air, winds,
hail, ſnow, lightning, thunder, and all things engender'd of fiery.
Book 2.6. 5. exhalations, as well as we have rain ; but according to our Theory,
p. 233
the antediluvian Heavens, of all theſe Meteors had none but dews
and vapors, or watery Meteors only; and therefore might very
aptly be ſaid by the Apoſtle to be conſtituted of water, or to liave a
watery ouçaois. Then the Earth was ſaid to conſiſt by rrater, becauſe
it was built upon it, and at firſt was ſuſtain’d by it. And when ſuch
a Key as this is put into our hands, that does ſo ealily unlock this
hard paſſage, and makes it intelligible, according to the juſt force
of the words, why ſhould we pertinaciouſly adhere to an interpre.
Whether you tation, that neither agrees with the words, nor makes any ſence
words - that is conſiderable ?
dar, y no
olar. ſeparately, to the Heavens and the Earth, or both to the Earth, or both to boch, it will make no great
difference as to our interpretation.
Thirdly, If the Apoſtle had made the ante-diluvian Heavens and
Earth the ſame with the preſent,his apodolis in the 7th. Verſe,ſhould
not have been ől d'ɛ vũ v degvos, but rý oi a'utoi s'envoi xjá z ñ teOno aveco-
uévoi cici, &c. I ſay, it thould not have been by way of antitheſis,
but of identity or continuation ; And the ſame Heavens and Earth are
kept in ſtore reſerv'd unto fire, &c. Accordingly we ſee the Apoſtle
ſpeaks thus, as to the Logos, or thelford of God, Verſe 7. Tớ. auta
ców, by the ſame Word of God; where the thing is the ſame, he ex-
prelſeth it as the ſame ; And if it had been the ſame Heavens and
Earth, as well as the ſame Word of God, Why ſhould he uſe a
mark of oppoſition for the one, and of identity for the other ? 10
this I do not ſee what can be fairly anſwer'd.
Fourthly, the ante diluvian Heavens and Earth were different
from the preſent, becauſe, as the Apoſtle intimates, they were ſuch;
and ſo conſtituted, as made them obnoxious to a Deluge ; whereas
Theor. 1 Bookco ours are of ſuch a form, as makes them incapable of a Deluge, and
obnoxious to a Conflagration ; the juſt contrary fate.
If you ſay there was nothing of natural tendency or diſpoſition
in either World to their reſpective fate, but the first inight as well
have periſh'd by fire, as water, and this by water as by fire, you un-
hinge all Nature and natural providence in that method, and con-
tradict one main ſcope of the Apoſtle in this diſcourſe. His firft ſcope
is to aſſert, and mind them of that diverſity there was betwixt the
ancient Heavens and Earth, and thie preſent; and from that, to
prove againſt thoſe Scoffers, that there had been a change and revo-
lution in Nature; And his ſecond ſcope ſeems to be this, to ſhow
that diverſity to be ſuch, as, under the Divine conduct, leads to a
different fate, and expos’d that World to a Deluge ; for when he
Irad deſcrib'd the conſtitution of the firſt Heavens and Earth, he ſub-
oyns, δι' ών και τοτε κόσμG ύδατι κατακλυθείς απόλυτο, Quid talis
Cras,
3
11
A Review of the Theory of the Earth. 169
before?
erat, faith Grotius, qualem diximus, cinſtitutio & Terræ & Cæli.
WEHREBr the then World periſh'd in a Flood of Water. This
whereby notes ſome kind of cauſal dependance, and muſt relate to
ſoine means or conditions prec. dent. I cannot relate to Logos, or
the Word of God, Grammar will not permit that; therefore it muſt
relate to the ſtate of the Ante-diluvian Héavens and Earth iminedi
ately premis’d. And to what purpoſe indeed ſhould he premiſe the
deſcription of thoſe Heavens and Earth, if it was not to lay a ground
for this interence?
Having given theſe Reaſons for the neceſſity of this Interpretation;
in the laſt place, let's conſider S. iluſtin's judgment, and his ſence
upon this place, as to the point in queſtion. As alſo the reflections
that ſome other of the Ancients have inade upon this doctrine of
S. Peter's. Didymus Alexandrinus, who was for ſome time S. Jerome's
Mifter, made ſuch a ſevere reflection upon it, that he ſaid this Epiſtle
was corrupted, and thould not be admitted into the Canon, becaufe
it taught the doctçine of a Triple or Trifarm_lForld in this third
Chapter. As you may ſee in his Enarr. in Epiſt. Canonicas. Now
this threefold World is frſt that in the 6th ver. The Ilorld that then
was. In the 7th ver. The Heavens and the Earth that are nom. And
in the 13th ver. We expe&t niew Heavens arid a nem Earth, according to
his promiſe. This ſeems to be a fair account that S. Peter taught the
doctrine of a Triple World ; And I quote this teſtimony, to ſhow
what S. Peter's words do naturally import, even in the judgment of
one that was not of his mind. And a Man is not prone to make an
expoſition againſt his own Opinion, unleſs he think the words
very
pregnant and expreſs.
But S. Auſtin owns the authority of this Epiſtle, and of this do-
Etrine, as deriv'd from it, taking notice of this Text of S. Peter's in
ſeveral parts of his Works. We have noted three or four places al.
ready to this purpoſe, and we may further take notice of ſeveral
paſſages in his Treatiſe, de Civ. Dei, which confirın our expofi-
tion. In his 20th. Book, ch. 24. he diſputes againſt Porphyry, who
had the ſame Principles with theſe Eternaliſts in the Text; or, if I
may ſo call them, Incorruptarians; and thought the World never
had, nor ever would undergo any change, eſpecially as to the Hea-
vens. S. Auſtin could not urge Porphyry with the authority of S. Peter,
for he had no veneration for the Chriſtian Oracles; but it ſeems hé
had ſome for the Jewiſh, ind arguing againſt him, upon that Text
in the Pſalms, Cæli pcribunt, he lows upon occaſion how he under-
ſtands S. Peter's deſtruction of the Old World. Legitur Cælum E
Terra tranfibunt, Mundus tranfit, fed puto quod præterit, tranſit, tranfi-
bunt aliquantò mitiùs di&ta funt quàm peribunt. In Epiſtolâ quoque Petri
Apoſtoli, ubi aquâ inundatus, qui tum erat, periiſſe di&tus eft Mundus,
Satis clarum eft quæ pars nundi à toto ſignificata eſt, & quatenùs peri-
iſſe di&ta fit, & qui cæli repofiti igni refervandi. This he explains
more fully afterwards by ſubjoyning a caution (which we cited
that we muſt not underſtand this paſſion of S. Peter's, con-
cerning the deſtruction of the Ante diluvian World, to take in the
whole Univerſe, and the higheſt Heavens, but only the aerial Hea-
vens, and the ſublunary World. In Apoſtolicâ illâ Epiftolâ à toto pars
Z
accipitur,
170
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
accipitur, quod Diluvio periiffe diflus elt mundus quamvis folsz ejus, cum
ſuis cælis, pars ima perierit. In that Apoftolical Epiſtle, a part is ſignified
by the whole, rhen the World is ſaid to have perijb’d in the Deluge, al-
though the lorrer part of it only, with the Heavens belonging to it, peri-
shed: that is, The Earth with the regions of the Air that belong to
it. And conſonant to this, in his expoſition of that hundred and
firſt Pfalın, upon thoſe words, The Heavens are the work of thy hands,
They shall periſh, but thou ſhalt endure. This periſhing of the Hea-
vens, he fays, S. Peter tells us, hath been once done already, naine-
ly, at the Deluge; Apertè dixit hcc Apoſtolus Petrus, Cæli erant olim
& Terra, de aquâ & per aquam conſtituti, Dei verbo ; per quod qui fa-
Etus eft mundus, aquâ inundatus deperiit ; Terra autem & cæli qui nunc
funt, igni referv.intur. Jam ergo dixit periiſſe cælos per
Diluvium.
Theſe places thew us that S. Auftii underſtood S. Peter's diſcourſe
to aim at the Natural World, and his periit or periiſſe ( ver. 6.) to
be of the ſame force as peribuut in the Pſalms, when 'tis ſaid the
Heavens Bhall periſh; and conſequently that the Heavens and the
Earth, in this Father's opinion, were as really chang’d and trans-
form'd at the time of the flood, as they will be at the Conflagra-
tion. But we inuſt not expect from S. Auſtin, or any of the Anci
ents a diſtinct account of this Apoftolical Doctrine, as if they knew
and acknowiedy'd the Theory of the Firſt World; that does not at
all appear ; but what they faid was either from broken Tradition, or
extorted from them by the force of the Apoſtle's words and their
own ſincerity:
There are yet other places in S. Auſtin worthy our conſideration
upon this ſubject; eſpecially his expoſition of this 3d. chap. of S. Pe
ter, as we find it in that ſame Treatiſe de Civ. Dei. There he com-
pares again, the deſtruction of the World at the Deluge, with that
which Tall be at the Confiagration, and ſuppoſeth both the Hea-
vens and Earth to have periſh d. spuſtolus commemorans fa&tum ante
Diluvium, videtur admonuiſſe quodammodo quatenùs in fine hujus ſeculi
mundum iftum periturum effe credamus. Nam & illo tempore periiſſe
dixit, qui tunc erat, mundum; nec folum orbem terra, verùm etiam cælos.
Then giving his uſual caution, That the Stars and Starry Heavens
ſhould not be comprehended in that inundane deſtruction, He goes
on, Atque hoc modo ( penè totus aer) cum terra perierat; cujus Terra
utique prior facies ( nempe ante-diluviana ) fuerat deleta Diluvio. Qui
autem nunc ſunt cæli & terra eodem verbo repofiti funt igni refervandi ;
Proinde qui cæli @ã qua Terra, id eſt, qui mundus, pro eo mundo qui
Diluvio periit, ex eâdem cquâ repofitus eft, ipſe igni noviſſimo referva-
tur. Here you ſee S. Auſtin's ſence upon the whole matter ; which
is this, That the Natural World, the Earth with the Heavens about
it, was deſtroyed and chang’d at the Deluge into the preſent Hea-
veris and Earth ; which ſhall again in like manner be deſtroyed and
cap. 16. chang'd by the laſt Fire. Accordingly in another place, to add no
more, he faith the figure of the (ſublunary) World Mall be
chang'd at the Conflagration, as it was chang’d' at the Deluge.
Tunc figura huius mundi, &c. cap. 16.
you ſee, we have S. Juftin cn our ſide, in both parts of our
interpretation ; tlmat S. Peter's diſcourſe is to be referr'd to the na-
tuin
cap. 18.
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
171
tural inanimate World, and that the preſent Natural World is di-
itmct and different from that which was before the Deluge. And
S. luftin having applyed this exprelly to S. Peter's doctrine by way
of Commentary, it will free us from any crime cr affectation of lin-
gularity in the expoſition we have given of that place.
Venerable Bedê hath followed S. Auſtin s footſteps in this doctrine;
for, interpreting S. Peter's Original World ( Apgaia Kóou.) 2. Pet.
2. j. he refers both that and this (chap. 3.6.) to the natural inani-
müte World, which he ſuppoſeth to have undergone a change at
the Deluge. His words are theſe, Idem ipſe mundus eſt (nempe quoad
itiateriain) in quo nunc kumanum genus habitat, quem inhabitaverunt
hi qui ante diluvium fuerunt, fed tamen rectè Originalis Mundus, quafi
ulius dicitur ; quia ficut in conſequentibus hujus Epiftolæ firiptum conti-
retur, ille tunc mundus aquâ inundatus periit. Cælis videlicet qui erant
priùs, id eſt
, cuntis aeris hujus turbulenti Spaciis, aquarum accreſcen-
tium altitudine conſumplis, ac Terrâ in alteram faciem, excedentibus
aquis, immutatâ. Nam etfi montes aliqui atque convalles ab initio faéti
creduntur, 1101 tamen tanti quanti nunc in orbe cernuntur univerſo. Tis
the ſame World ( namely, as to the matter and ſubſtance of it) which
mankind lives in him, and did live in before the Flood, but yet that is
truly callid the ORIGINAL WORLD, being as it mere ano-
ther from the preſent. For’tis ſaid in the ſequel of this Epiſtle that the
World that was then, periſh'd in the Deluge ; namely, The regions of
the air were conſumed by the height and exceſs of the waters, and by the
ſame waters the Earth was chang'd into another form or face. For al
though ſome Mountains and Valleys are thought to have been made from
the beginning, yet not ſuch great ones as now we ſee throughout the mhole
Eurth.
You ſee this Author does not only own a change made at the
Dzluze, but offers at a further explication wherein that change con-
liſted, viz. That the Mountains and inequalities of the Earth were
made greater than they were before the Flood ; and ſo he makes
the change or the difference betwixt the two Worlds gradual, rather
than ſpecifical, if I may ſo term it. But we cannot wonder at that,
if he had no principles to carry it further, or to make any other
fort of change intelligible tu him. Bede alſo purſues the ſame fence De 6. djer.
and notion in his interpretation of that fountain, Gen. 2.5. that wa- credt.
tered the face of the Earth before the Flood. And many other
tranſcribers of Antiquity have recorded this Tradition concerning a
difference, gradual or ſpecifical, both in the Ante-diluvian heavens
(Glofl.Ordin. Gen. 9. de Iride. Lyran.ibid. Hift. Scholaſt.c. 35. Rab. M.14-
rus & Gloff. Inter. Gen. 2. 5,6. Alcuin. Quæft. in Gen. inter. 135.) and in
the Ante-diluvian Earth, as the ſame Authors witneſs in other places.
As Hift. Schol. c. 34. Glof.Ord. in Gen. 7. Alcuin. Inter. 118,85°C. Not
to inſtance in thoſe that tell us the properties of the Ante-diluvian
World under the name and notion of Paradiſe.
Thus much concerning this remarkable place in S. Peter, and the
true expoſition of it ; which I have the more largely inſiſted upon,
becauſe I look upon this place as the chief repoſitory of that great
Natural Myltery, which in Scripture is communicated to us con-
Cerning the Triple State-or Revolution of the World. And of thoſe
Men
!
z 2
172
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
I
Men that are ſo ſcrupulous to admit the Theory we have propos’d,
I would willingly know whether they believe the Apoſtle in what
he ſays concerning the New Heavens and the New Earth to come, ver:
13. and if they do, why they ſhould not believe him as much con-
cerning the old Heavens and the Old Earth, paſt; ver.5; & 6. which
he mentions as formally, and deſcribes more diſtinctly than the other.
But if they believe neither part nor to come, in a natural fence,
but an unchangeable ſtate of Nature from the Creation to its anni-
hilation, I leave them then to their Fellow Eternaliſts in the Text,
and to the character or cenſure the Apoſtle gives them, Karatis
ιδίας αυτών καθυμίας πορευόμδυοι, men that go by their own private
humour and paflions, and prefer that to all other evidence.
They deſerve this cenſure, I am ſure, if they do not only disbe-
lieve, but alſo fceff, at this Prophetick and Apoftolick doctrine con-
cerning the Viciſſitudes of Nature and a Triple World; The Apoſtle
in this diſcourſe does formally diſtinguiſh Three Worlds (for 'tis
well kuown that the Hebrers have no word to ſignifie the Natural
World, but uſe that Periphraſis, The Heavens and the Earth) and
upon each of them engraves a Name and Title that bears a note of
diſtinction in it; He calls them the Old Heavens and Earth, the Pre-
ſent Heavens and Earth, and the New Heavens and Earth. "Tis true,
theſe Three are one, as to Matter and Subſtance; but they muſt dif-
fer as to Form and Properties; otherwiſe wliat is the ground of this
diſtinction and of theſe three different appellations ? Suppoſe the femr's
had expected Fzekiel's Temple for the Third, and Laſt, and moſt per
fect; and that in the time of the Second Temple they had ſpoke of
them with this diſtinction, or under theſe different names, The Old
Temple, the Preſent Temple, and the New Temple we expect: Would
ariy have underſtood thoſe Three of one and the ſame Temple; ne-
ver demolith'd, never chang’d, never rebuilt ; always the faine both
as to Materials and Form? no, doubtleſs, but of Three ſeveral Temples
ſucceeding one anotlier. And have we nor the ſame reaſon to un-
derſtand this Temple of the World, whereof S. Peter fpeaks, to be
threefold in ſucceſſions ſeeing he does as plainly diſtinguiſh it into
the Old heavens and earth, the Prefent heavens and earth, and the
New heavens and earth. And I do the more willingly uſe this com-
pariſon of the Temple, becauſe it hath been thought an Emblein of
the outward World.
I know we are naturally averſe to entertain any thing that is in-
conliſtent with the general frame and texture of our own thoughts
That's to begin the World again ; and we often reject ſuch thing's
without examination. Neither do I wonder that the generality of
Interpreters beat down the Apoſtle's words and ſence to their own
notions ; They had no other grounds to go upon, and Men are not
willing, eſpecially in natural and comprehenſible things, to put ſuch
a meaning upon Scripture, as is unintelligible to themſelves; They
rather venture to offer a little violence to the words, that they may
pitch the ſence at ſuch a convenient height, as their Principles will
reach to. And therefore though ſome of our modern Interpreters,
whom I mention'd before, have been ſenſible of the natural tenden-
cy of this diſcourſe of S. Peter's, and have much ado to bear of the
force
ܪ
A Review of the I beory of the Earth.
173
+
1
1
force of the words, ſo as not to acknowledge that they import a
real diverſity betwixt the two Worlds ſpoken of; yet having no
Principles to guide or ſupport them in following that Tract, they
are forc'd to ftop or divert another way. 'Tis like entering into the
mouth of a Cave, we are not willing to venture further than the
light gues. Nor are they much to blame for this, the fault is only
in thoſe Perſons that continue wilfully in their darkneſs, and when
they cannot otherwiſe reſiſt the light, ſhut their eyes againſt it, or
turn their head another way.---------- but I am afraid I have ſtaid too
long upon this argument : not for my own fake, but to ſatisfie 0-
thers.
You may pleaſe to remember that all that I have ſaid hitherto,be-
longs only to the firſt Head : To prove a Diverſity in general betwixt
the Ante-diluvian Heavens and Earth, and the preſent: not expref-
ding what their particular form was. And this general diverſity may
be argued alſo by obſervations taken from Mofes his Hiſtory of the
World, before and after the Flood. From the Longevity of the An-
rediluvians : The Rainbow appearing after the Deluge: and the
breaking open an Abyſs capable to overflow the Earth. The Heavens
that had no Rainbow, and under whoſe benign and ſteddy influ- Book 2. coas
See Theor.
cnice, Men liv'd ſeven, eight, nine hundred years and upwards,
muſt have bien of a different aſpect and conſtitution from the pre-
ſent Heavens. And that Earth that had ſuch an Abyſs, that the diſ-
ruption of it made an univerſal Deluge, muſt have been of another
form than the preſent Earth. And thoſe that will not admit a diver.
lity in the two worlds, are bound to give us an intelligible account
of theſe Phænomena : How they could poſſibly be in Heavens and
Earth, like the preſent. Or if they were there once, why they do
not continue ſo ſtill, if Nature be the ſame.
We need ſay no more, as to the Ante-diluvian Heavens : but as
to the Earth, we muſt now, according to the ſecond Part of the
firſt Head; enquire, If that Particular Form, which we have allign'd
it before the Fuod, be agreeable to Scripture. You know how we
have deſcrib'd the Forin and ſituation of that Earth: namely, that
it was built over the Abyſs, as a regular Orb, covering and incom-
paſſing the waters round about : and founded, as it were, upon them.
There are many paſſages of Scripture that favour this deſcription :
Some more exprefly, othicrs upon a due explication. To this purpoſe
there are two expreſs Tests in the Pſalins : as Pful.24.1,2. The Earth
is the Lords, and the fulneſs thereof: The habitable lorld, and they that
dwell therein. FOR he has founded it upon * the Sea', and eftabliſh'd it * I know fome
upon the Floods. An Earth founded upon the Seas, and eſtablith'd up this placeket
on the Waters, is not this the Earth we have deſcrib’d? the firſt no effect by
rendering the
Hilreno particle yy juxta, by or ne.ir to ; ſo they would read it thus, He bath founded the Earth by the Sea-file, and
eſtablith'd it by the Floods. What is there wonderful in this that the ſhores ſhould lie by the Sea-ſide ; Where could
they lie elle? What reaſon or argunent is this, why the Earth ſhould be the Lord's The Earth is the Lord's
, for
he hath founded it near the Seas, Where is the conſequence of this ? But
if he founded it upon the Seas.which could
not be done by any other hand but liis, it ſhows both the Workinan and the Maſter. And accordingly in that other
place, Pſal. 136.6. it you render it, he ſtretched out the Earth near the Waters. How is that one of God's grear
wonders? as it is there repreſented to be. Becaule in ſome few places this particle is render'd otherwile, where
the ſenſe will
bear it, muſt we therefore render it to when we pleaſe, and where the fence will not bear it? This
being the moſt uſual ſignification of it, and there being no other word that ſignifies above more frequently or deter-
minately than this does, Why mult it lignitie otherwife in this place ? Men will wriggle any way to get from un-
der the force of a Text, that does not suit to their own Notions.
Earth
1
V
174
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
1
Earth, as it came from the hands of its Maker. Where can we now
find in Nature, ſuch an Earth as has the Seas and the Water for its
foundation ? Neither is this Text without a ſecond, as a fellow-wit-
nefs to confirm the ſame truth: For in the 136. Pfal. ver. 4, 5, 6.
we read to the fame effect, in theſe words : To him, who alone does
great ronders : To him that by wiſdom made the Heavens: To h m that
Jtretched out the Earth above the Haters. We can hardly expreſs that
form of the Ante-diluvian Earth, in words more determinate than
theſe are ; Let us then in the ſame ſimplicity of heart, follow the
words of Scripture; ſeeing this literal ſence is not repugnant to Na-
ture, but, on the contrary, agreeable to it upon the itricteſt exami-
nation. And we cannot, without ſome vivlence, turn the words to
any other ſence. What tolerable interpretation can theſe admit of,
if we do not allow the Earth once to have encompaſs’d and over-
ſpread the face of the Waters ? To be founded upon the waters, to be
eft. bliſk'd upon the waters, to be extended upon the waters, what
rational or ſatisfactory account can be given of theſe phraſes and ex-
preſſions from any thing we find in the preſent ſituation of the Earth:
or how can they be verified concerning it ? Conſult Interpreters,an-
cient or modern, upon theſe two places: ſee if they anſu er your ex-
pectation, or anſwer the natural importance of the words, unleſs
they acknowledge another form of the Earth, than the preſent. Be-
cauſe a Rock hangs its noſe over the Sea, muſt the body of the Earth
be ſaid to be ſtretch:d over the waters ? Or becauſe there are waters
in ſome ſubterraneous cavities, is the Earth therefore founded upon
the Seas? Yet ſuch lame explications as theſe you will meet with;
and while we have no better liglit, we muſt content our ſelves with
them; but when an explication is offer'd, that anſwers the proprie-
ty, force, and extent of the words, to reject it, unely becauſe it is
not fitted to our foriner opinions, or becauſe we did not firſt think
of it, is to take an ill method in expounding Scripture. This Foun-
dation or Eſtabliſhment of the Earth upon the Seas, this Extenſion of
it above the waters, relates plainly to the body, or whole circuit of
the Earth, not to parcels and particles of it; as appears from the
occaſion, and its being joyn’d with the Heavens, the other part of
the World. Beſides, David is ſpeaking of the Origin of the World,
and of the Divine power and wiſdom in the conſtruction and litua-
tion of our Earth, and theſe attributes do not appear from the holes
of the Earth, and broken Rocks; which have rather the face of a
ruin, than of wiſdom ; but in that wonderful libration and expan-
fion of the firft Earth -over the face of the waters, ſuſtained by its
own proportions, and the hand of his Providence.
Theſe two places in the Pſalms being duly conſider'd, we ſhall
more eaſily underſtand a third place, to the ſame effect, in the Pro-
verbs; delivered by WISDOM,concerning the Origin of the World,
and the form of the firſt Earth, in theſe words, Chap. 8. 27. When
he prepared the Heavens I was there, when HE SET an Orb or Sphere
upon the face of the Abyſs. We render it, when we ſet a Compaſs up-
on the face of the Abyſs ; but if we have rightly interpreted the Pre-
phet David, 'tis plain enough what compaſs is here to be under-
ſtood ; not an imaginary circle, (for why ſhould that be thought one
of
A Review of the I beory of the Earth.
175
--
of the wonderful works of God) but that exterior Orb of the Earth
that was ſet upon the waters. That was the Maiter-piece of the Di-
vine art in frainirig of the firſt Earth, and therefore very fit to be
taken notice of by Wiſclum. And upon this occaſion, I defire you to
reflect
upon St. Peter's expreſſion, concerning the firſt Earıl, and to
compare it with Solomon's, to ſee if they do not anſwer one another.
St. Peter calls it, zñ xabeçãou diusarov, An Earth conſiſting, ſtanding,
or Jujiuined by the uraters. And Solomon calls it Dinne sy 210. An
Orb drawn upon the face of the tibyſs. And St. Peter ſays, that was done
TQ 2679 rõ Õed by the wiſdom of God: which is the ſame AQ or
zriſdom, that here declares hier ſeif, to have been preſent at this work.
Add now to theſe two places, the two foremention’d out of the Pſal-
mifts In Earth founded upon the Seas, (Pſal. 24. 2.) and an Earth
Jlretched out above the waters : (Pfal. 136.6.) Can any body doubt or
queſtion, but all theſe four Texts refer to the ſame thing? And ſee-
ing St. Peter's deſcription reſers crtainly to the Ante-diluvian Earth,
they muſt all refer to it; and do all as certainly and evidently agree
with our Theory concerning the forin and ſituation of it.
The pendulous forir, and poſture of that firſt Earth being prov'd
from theſe four places, 'tis more calie and emphatical to interpret
in this ſence that pallage in Jub ch. 26. 7. He ſtretcheth out the North
over the Tohu, (for ſo it is in the original) and biingeth the Earth ирон
nothing. And this ſtrange foundation or no foundation of the exte-
riour Earth ſeems to be the ground of thoſe noble queſtions propos'd
to Job by God Almighty, Ch. 38. IT here waſt thou when I laid the foun-
dations of the Earth? Declare if thou haſt underſtanding. Whereupon are
the foundations thereof faſtned, and who laid the corner-ſtone? There was
neither foundation, nor corner-Itone, in that piece of Architecture;
and that was it which inade the art and wonder of it. But I have
ſpoken inore largely to theſe places in the Theory it ſelf. And if the Book 1:
four Texts before-mentioned be coniider'd without prejudice, I think R. 38.
there are few maiters of natural Speculation that can be ſo well
provid out of Scripture, as the Forn which we have given to the
Ante-diluvian Earth.
But yet it may be thought a juſt, if not a neceſſary appendix to
this diſcourſe, concerning the form of the Ante diluvian Earth, to
give an account alſo of the Ante-diluvian Abyſs, and the ſituation of
it according to Scripture ; for the relation which theſe two have
to one another, will be a further means to diſcover if we have right-
ly determind the form of that Earth. The Abyſs or Tebom-Rabbah is
a Scripture notion, and the word is not us’d, that I know of, in that
diſtinct and peculiar fence in Heathen Authors
. 'Tis plain that in
Scripture it is not always taken for the Sea (as Gen. 1. 2.& 7. 11. &
49.25. Deut. 33.13. Job 28.14. & 38.16. Pfal.33.7.& 71.20.€
78.15.
@ 135.6. Apoc.20.1.3.) but for ſome other maſs of waters,or ſubter-
raneous itore-houſe. And this being obſerv'd, we may ealily diſco-
Ver the nature, and ſec down the Hiſtory of the Scripture-Abyſs.
The Mother-Abyſs is no doubt that in the beginning of Geneſis
, V.2.
which had nothing but darkneſs upon the face of it, or a thick caligi-
ndis air. Tlie next news we hear of this Abyſó is at the Deluge,(Gen.7.
11.) where 'tis ſaid to be broke open, and the waters of it to have
drowned
176
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
drowned the World. It ſeems then this Abyſs was clos'd up ſome
time betwixt the Creation and the Deluge, and had got another
cover than that of darkneſs. And if we will believe 'iſdom, (Prov.
8. 27.) who was there preſent at the formation of the Earth, an Orl
was fet upon the face of the Abyſs at the beginning of the World.
That theſe three places refer to the fame Abyſs, I think, cannot
be queſtioned by any that will compare them and contider them.
That of the Deluge, Moſes calls there Tehom-Ribbah, the Great Alivſs;
and can there be any greater than the forementioned Mother-Abyſs?
And WISDOME, in that place in the Proverbs, uſeth the ſame
phrafe and words with Moſes, Gen. I. 2. a10ņ'? ?Y: upon the face
of the Deep or of the Abyſs ; chang.ng darkneſs for that Orb of the ex-
teriour Earth which was made afterwards to incloſe it. And in this
vault it lay, and under this cover, when the Pſalmiſt ſpeaks of it
in theſe words (Pfal. 33. 7. He gathereth the waters of the Sea, as in a
* This reading * bag; he layeth up the Abyſs in Iture-houſes
. Laſtly, we may obſerv:
or trunflating, that 'twas this Mother-Abyſs whoſe womb was burſt at the Deluge,
is generally fol-
lowed, (Theor. when the Sea was born, and broke forth as if it had iſſued out of a
Book 1.p.86.) womb; as God expreſſeth it to Job, ch. 38. 8. in which place the
zhough the En: Chaldee Paraphraſe reads it, when it broke forth, coming out of the
gliſh Tranſlati-
Abyſs. Which diſruption at the Deluge ſeems alſo to be alluded to
heap, junjuita- yob 12. 14,15. and more plainly, Prov. 3. 20. by his knowledge the
ter and to the abyſſes are broken up.
ſence.
Thus you have already a threefold ſtate of the Abyſs, which
makes a Thort Hiſtory of it; firſt, Open, at the beginning; then co-
vered, till the Deluge. Then broke open again, as it is at preſent. And
we purſue the Hiſtory of it no further ; but we are told, Ap. c. 20. 3.
That it ſhall be ſhut up again, and the great Dragon in it, for a
Thouſand years. In the mean time we may obſerve from this furm
and poſture of the Ante diluvian Abyſs, how ſuitable it is and co-
herent with that form of the Ante diluvian Eaith which St.Peter and
the Pſalmiſt had deſcrib'd, Suſtain'd by the wraters ; founded upon the
maters; ftretcht above the waters; for if it was the cover of this Abyſs
(and it had ſome cover that was broke at the Deluge) it was ſpread
as a Cruſt or Ice upon the face of thoſe waters, and ſo made an
Orbis Terrarum, an habitable ſphere of Earth about the Abyſs.
on read on a
So
O much for the form of the Ante-diluvian Earth and Abyſs ;
which as they aptly correſpond to one another, ſo, you ſce, our
Theory anſwers and is adjuſted to both; and, I think, fo fitly, that
we have no reaſon hitherto to be diſpleas’d with the ſucceſs we have
had in the examination of it, according to Scripture. We have diſ-
patch'd the two main points in queſtion, firſt, to prove a diverſity
in general betwixt the two natural Worlds, or betwixt the Heavens
and the Earth before and after the Flood. Secondly, to prove where-
in this diverſity conſiſted; or that the particular forin of the Ante-
diluvian H-avens and Eartli was ſuch according to Scripture, as we
have deſcrib'd it in the Theory. You'l ſay, then the work is done,
Ivhat
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
177
!
what needs more, all the reſt follows of courſe ; for if the Antedilu-
vian Earth had ſuch a form as we have propos'd and prov'd it to
have had, there could be no Deluge in it but by a diſſolution of its
parts and exteriour frame: And a Deluge ſo inade, would not be
in the nature of a ſtanding Pool, but of a violent agitation and
cominotion of the Waters. This is true ; Theſe parts of the Thec-
ry are ſo cemented, that you muſt grant all, if you grant any. How
ever we will try if even theſe two particulars alſo may be prov'd
out of Scripture; That is, if there be any marks or memorandums
left there by the Spirit of God, of ſuch a fraction or diſſolution of
the Earth at the Deluge. And alſo ſuch characters of the Deluge
it ſelf, as (how it to liave been by a Auctuation and impetuous com-
motion of the Waters.
To proceed then; That there was a Fraction or Diffolution of the
Earth at the Deluge, the hiſtory of it by Moſes gives us the firſt
account, ſeeing he tells us, as the principol cauſe of the Flood, That
the Fountains of the Great Abyſs were cloven or burſt afunder; and
upon this diſruption the waters guſh'd out from the bowels of the
Earth, as from the widen'd mouths of ſo many Fountains. I do not
take Fountains there to fignifie any more than Sources or Stores of
Water ; noting alſo this manner of their eruption from below; or
out of the ground, as Fountains do. Accordingly in the Proverbs,
(chap.3.20.) ’tis only ſaid, the Abyſſes were broken open. I do not doubt
but this refers to the Deluge, as Bede, and others underſtand it; the
very word being usd here, both in the Hebrew and Septuagint, that typai
expreſs'd the diſruption of the Abyſs at the Deluge.
ερράγης.
And this breaking up of the Earth at that time, is elegantly ex-
preſt in Job, by the burſting of the Womb of Nature, when the Sea
was firſt brought to light; when after many pangs and throes and
dilacerations of her body, Nature was delivered of a burthen which
De had born in her Womb Sixteen Hundred Years.
Theſe three places I take to be memorials and proofs of the diſ-
ruption of the Earth, or of the Abyſs, at the univerſal Deluge. And
to theſe we may add more out of the Prophets, Job, and the Pſalms,
by way of alluſion (commorily ) to the ſtate of Nature at that time.
The Prophet Iſaiah in deſcribing the future deſtruction of the World,
chap. 24.18, 19. ſeems plainly to allude and have reſpect to the paſt
deſtruction of it at the Deluge; as appears by that leading expreſſi-
on, the windows from an bigh are open, inng! 01990 nia?, quei-
d'Es čre og vegvš uvecógenoav, taken manifeſtly from Gen.7. 11. Then
ſee how the deſcription goes on, the windows from an high are open,
and the foundations of the Earth do make. The Earth is utterly broken
domon, the Earth is quite diſſolv'd, the Earth is exceedingly moved. Here
are Concuſſions, and Fractions, and diflolutions, as there were in
the Mundane Earth-quake and Deluge; which we had expreft be-
fore only by breaking open the Abyſs. By the Foundations of the Earth
here and elſewhere, I perceive many underſtand the Centre ; ſo by
moving or ſhaking the foundations, or putting them out of courſe,
muſt be underſtood a diſplacing of the Centre; which was really
done at the Deluge, as we have ſhewn in its proper place. If we theor. book 2
therefore remember that there was both a diſlocation, as I may ſo p. 194, 199-
ch. 38:
Аа
ſay;
178
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
ſay; and a fraction in the body of the Earth, by that great fall :
a diſlocation as to the Centre, and a fraction as to the Surface and
Exterior Region, it will truly anſwer to all thoſe expreſſions in the
Prophet, that ſeem ſo ſtrange and extraordinary. Tis true, this
place of the Prophet reſpects alſo and foretels the future deſtruction
of the World; but that being by Fire, when the Elements hall melt
with fervent heat, and the Earth with the works there in thall be burnt
up,
theſe expreſſions of fractions and concuſſions, leem to be taken origi-
nally from the manner of the Worlds firit deitruction, and to be
transferr'd, by way of application, to repreſent and lignifie the fe-
cond deſtruction of it, though, it may be, not with the ſame exact-
neſs and propriety.
There are ſeveral other places that refer to the diſſolution and ſub-
verſion of the Earth at the Deluge: Amos 9.5, 6. The Lord of Holis
is he that toucheth the Earth, and it shall melt, or be diſſolv'd.-
and it shall riſe up wholly like a Flood, and shall be drowned as by the
Flood of Egypt. By this and by the next verſe the Prophet ſeems to
allude to the Deluge, and to the diffolution of the Earth that was
then. This in fob ſeems to be call'd breaking down the Earth, and
cverturning the Earth, Chap. 12.14,15. Behold be breaketh down and
3t cannot be built again, He fhutteth upan man, and there can be no
opening: Behold, he withholdeth the waters, and they dry up; alſo be
Jendeth them out, and they overturn the Earth : Which place you may
fee paraphras'd, Theor. Book 1.p.91,92. We have already cited, and
Hall hereafter cite, other places out of Job; And as that Ancient
SIM
Author ( who is thought to have liv'd before the Judaical Oecono
nay, and nearer to Noab than Moſes) ſeems to have had the Pre-
cepta Noachidarum, fo alſo he ſeems to liave had the Dogmata Noachia
darum; which were deliver'd by Noah to his Children and Poſterity,
concerning the myſteries of Natural Providence, the origine and
tate of the World, the Deluge and Ante-diluvian ſtate', &c. and accord-
ingly we find many ſtrictures of theſe doctrines in the Book of Job.
Laitly, In the Pſalms there are Texts that mention the Making of
the Earth, and the foundations of the World, in reference to the
Flood, if we judge aright; whereof we will ſpeak under the next
Head, concerning the raging of the Waters in the Deluge.
Theſe places of Scripture may be noted, as left us to be remem-
brancers of that general ruine and diſruption of the Earth at the time
of the Deluge. But I know it will be ſaid of them, That they are
not itrict proofs, but alluſions only. Be it ſo; yet what is the ground
of thoſe alluſions? fomething muſt be alluded to, and ſomething
that hath paſt in Nature, and that is recorded in Sacred Hiſtory; and
what is that, unleſs it be the Univerſal Deluge, and that change
and diſturbance that was then in all Nature. If others ſay, thar
theſe and ſuch like places are to be underſtood morally and allego-
rically, I do nominvy them their interpretation; but when Nature
and Reaſon will bear a literal ſence, the rule is, that we ſhould not
recede from the Letter. But I leave theſe things to every one's
thoughts; which the more calm they are, and the more imparcial,
the more eaſily they will feel the impreſſions of Truth. In the inean
time, I proceed to the laſt particular mention'd, The form of the De-
luge it felf.
This
i
1
0
179
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
This we ſuppoſe to have been not in the way of a ſtanding Pool,
the Waters making an equal Surface, and an equal heighth every
where; but that the extreme heighth of the Waters was made by
the extremne agitation of thein; caus’d by the weight and force of
great Matſes or Regions of Earth falling at once into the Abyfs; by
which means, as the Waters in ſome places were preſt out, ard
thrown at an exceſſive height into the Air, ſo they would alſo in cer-
tain places gape, and lay bare, even the bottom of the Abyſs; which
would look as an, open Grave ready to ſwallow up the Earth, and
all it bore. Whilſt the Ark; in the mean timne, falling and riſing by theſe
gulphs and precipices, formetimes, above water, and ſometimes under;
was a true Type of the ſtate of the Church in this World; And to
this time and ſtate David alludes in the name of the Church, Pfal.42.7.
Abyſs calls unto Abyſs at the noiſe of thy Cataracts or Water-Spouts; All
iby waves and billows have gone over me. And again, Pſal. 46.2, 3. In
the name of the Church, Therefore will not we fear, tho' the Earth be
removed, and; tho', the mountains be carried into the midſt of the Seas.
The waters thereof roar and are troubled, the mountains sake with the
ſwelling thereof.
A
But there is no deſcription more remarkable or more eloquent,
than of that Scene of things repreſented, Pfal. 18.7,8,9,&c. which
ſtill alludes, in my opinion, to the Deluge-ſcene, and in the name
of the Church. We will ſet down the words at large.
Ver.6. In my diſtreſs I called upon the Lord, and cryed unto my God;
He heard
ту voice out of his Temple, and my cry came before him into
bis ears.
7. Then the Earth Shook and trembled, the foundations alſo of the hills
moved and were ſhaken, becauſe he was wroth.
8. There went up a ſmoke from his noſtrils, and fire out of his mouth
devoured; Coals were kindled by it.
9. He bowed the Heavens alſo and came down, and darkneſs was un-
der his feet.
10. And he rode upon a Cherub and did flie, he did flie upon the wings
of the mind.
II. He made darkneſs his ſecret place; his pavilion round about him
was dark waters and thick clouds of the skie.
12. At the brightneſs before him the thick clouds paſſed, hail and coals
of fire.
13. The Lord alſo thunder'd in the Heavens, and the Higheſt gave his
voice, hail and coals of fire.
14. len, he ſent out his arrows, and ſcatter'd them: and he ſhot out
lightnings and diſcomfited them.
15. Then the Chanel's of waters were ſeen, and the foundations of the
World
were diſcovered ; at thy rebuke, O Lord, at the blaſt of the breath
of thy noſtrils.
He ſent from above, he took me; he drew me out of great iraters.
מימ רֶבַּיִם
This I think is a rough * draught of the face of the Heavens and
the Earth at the Deluge, as the laſt Verſes do intimate ; and 'tis ap-
ply'd
Аа 2
180
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
In his first
}
P. 279.
ply'd to expreſs the dangers and deliverances of the Church: The
Expreſſions are far too high to be applyed to David in his Perſon, alid
to his deliverance from Saul; no ſuch agonies or diſorders of Na-
ture as are here inſtanc din, were made in David's time, or upon his
account; but 'tis a Scheme of the Church, and of her fate, parti
cularly, as repreſented by the Ark, in that diſmal diſtreſs, when al
nature was in confufion. And though there may be fome tliings here
intermixt to make up the Scene, that are not ſo cloſe to the lubject
as the reſt, or that may be referr'd to the future deſtruction of the
World : yet that is not unuſual, nor amiſs, in ſuch deſcriptions,
iſ the great ſtrokes be fit and rightly placd. That there was Smoke,
and Fire, and Water; and Thunder, and Darkneſs, and Winds,
and Earth-quakes at the Deluge, we cannot doubt, if we conſider the
circumſtances of it; Waters daſh'd and broken make a ſmoke and
See Philof darkneſs, and no Hurricano could be ſo violent as the motions of
ption of the the Air at that time; Then the Earth was tornin pieces, and its Foun-
Deluge, both dations ſhaken; And as to Thunder and Lightning, the encounters
as to the come and colliſions of the mighty Waves, and the cracks of a falling
Heavens, and World, would make Haihes and noiſes, far greater and more ter-
the fractions rible, than any that can come from vapours and clouds. There was
of the Earth.
an Univerſal Tempeſt, a conflict and claſhing of all the Elements;
Treatiſe de A- and David ſeems to have repreſented it ſo; with God Almighty in
brahamo, mihi, the midſt of it, ruling them all.
But I am apt to think ſome will ſay, all this is Poetical in the Pro-
phet, and theſe are Hyperbolical and figurate expreſſions, from
which we cannot make any inference, as to the Deluge and the Na.
tural World. 'Tis true, thoſe that have no Idea of the Deluge, thar
will anſwer to ſuch a Scene of things, as is here repreſented, muſt
give ſuch a ſlight account of this Pfalm. But on the other hand, it
we have already an Idea of the Deluge that is rational, and alſo con
ſonant to Scripture upon other proofs, and the deſcription here
made by the Prophet anſwer to that Idea, whetlier then is it not
more reaſonable to think that it ſtands upon that ground, than to
think it a meer fancy and Poetical Scene of things : This is the true
ſtate of the caſe, and that which we muſt judge of. Methinks 'tis .
very harſh to ſuppoſe all this a bare fiction, grounded upon no mat-
ter of fact, upon no Sacred Story, uponi no appearance of God in
Nature. If you ſay it hath a moral ſignification, ſo let it have, we
do not deſtroy that; it hath reference no doubt, to the dangers and
deliverances of the Church ; but the queſtion is, whether the words
and natural ſence be a fancy only, a bundle of randome hyperboles:
or whether they relate to the hiſtory of the Deluge, and the ſtate
of the Ark there repreſenting the Church. This makes the Sence
doubly rich, Hiſtorically and Morally; and grounds it upon Scripture
and Reaſon, as well as upon Fancy.
That violent eruption of the Sea out of the Womb of the Earth,
which Job ſpeaks of, is, in my judgment, another deſcription of the
Deluge ; 'Tis Chap. 38.8,9,10,11. Who Shut up the Sea with doors,
when it broke forth, as if it had iſſued out of a Womb; When I made the
cloud the garment thereof, and thick darkneſs a ſwadling band for it.
And broke up for it my decreed place --- hitherto Jhalt i hou come &c.
Here
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
18 i
Here you ſee the birth and nativity of the Sea, or
of Oceanus, deſcrib'd * ; how he broke out of the * Hià comparatio præcedens, Ver.4,5,6,
de ortu Telluris, Jumitur ab ædificio, ita
Womb, and what his firſt garment and ſwadling hæc alsera de ortu maris, fumitur à par-
cloaths were ; namely clouds and thick darkneſs. tu; G exhibetur Oceanus, primim,
This cannot refer to any thing, that I know of, but fatus inclufus in utero, dein u eruma
pens & prodeuns, denique ut faſciis
to the face of Nature at the Deluge; whien the Sea primis fuis pannis involutus. Atque ex
was born and wrapt up in clouds and broken waves, aperto Terre utero prorupit aquarum
and a dark impenetrable miſt round the body of cum færu profundere folet puerpera.
nzoles, ut proluvies illi, quam fimul
the Earth. And this ſeems to be the very fame that
David had expreſt in his deſcription of the Deltge,Pfal.18.11.He made
darkneſs his ſecret place, his pavilion round about him were dirk waters and
thick clouds of the skies. For this was truly the face of the World in
the time of the Flood, tho' we little relect upon it. And this dark cor-
fulinn, every where, above and be ow, aroſe from the violent and
confus'd motion of the Abyſs ; which was dalht in pieces by the See Theor.
falling Earth, and few into the air in miſty drops, as duſt flies up Book: 1. Po99.
in a great ruin.
But I am afraid, we have ſtayed too long upon this particular, the
form of the Deluge ; 'ſeeing 'tis but a Corollary from the precedent
article about the diffolution of the Earth. However time is not ill
ſpent about any thing that relates to natural Providence, whereof
the two moſt lignal inſtances in our Sacred Writings, are, the De-
luge and the Gonflagration. And ſeeing Job and David do often reflect
upon the works of God in the external creation, and upon the ad-
miniſtrations of Providence, it cannot be imagin'd that they ſhould
never reflect. upon the Deluge; the moſt remarkable change of Na-
ture that ever hath been, and the moſt remarkable judgment upon
mankind. And if they have reflected upon it anỳ where,'tis, I think,
in thoſe places and thoſe inſtances which I liave noted; 'and if thoſe
places do relate to the Deluge, they are not capable, in my judgment,
of
any
fairer or more natural interpretation than that which we
have given them; which, you ſee, how much it favours and con-
firms our Theory:
I have now finiſht the heads I undertook to prove, that I might
lhew our Theory to agree with Scripture in theſe three principal
points ; firſt, in that it ſuppoſeth a diverſity and difference betwixt
the Ante-diluvian Heavens and Earth, and the preſent Heavens and
Earth. Secondly, in aſſigning the particular form of the Ante-dilu-
vian Earth and Abyſs. Thirdly, in explaining the Deluge by a diſſo-
lution of that Earth, and an eruption of the Abyſs. How far I have
ſucceeded in this attempt, as to others, I cannot tell; but I am ſure
I have convinc'd my ſelf, and-ain ſatisfied that my thoughts, in that
Theory, have run in the ſame tract with the holy Writings: with
the true intent and ſpirit of them. There are ſome perſons that are
wilfully ignorant in certain things, and others that are willing to be
ignorant as the Apoſtle phraſeth it ; ſpeaking of thoſe Eternaliſts
that denied the doctrine of the change and revolutions of the Natu-
ral World : And 'tis not to be expected but there are many ſtill of
the ſame humour ; and therefore may be called willingly ignorant,
that is, they will not uſe that pains and attention that is neceſſary
for the examination of ſuch a doctrine, nor impartiality in judg-
ing
Aa 3
182
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
!
ing after examination ; tlrey greedily Lay hold on all evidence on
obe fide, and willingly forget, or flightly paſs over, all evidence for
the other ; this I think is the character of thoſe that are willingly ig:
norant for I do not take it to be ſo deep as a down-right wiliul ig-
Rorance, where they are plainly conſcious to themſelves of that
wilfulneſs, but where an inſenſible inixture of humane paſſions in-
dines them 011e way, and makes them averſe to the others and in
that method draws on all the conſequences of a willing ignorance.
There reinains ſtill, as I remember, one Propoſition that I 2011
bound to make good; I ſaid at firſt, that our Fypothelis concerning
the Deluge was more agreeable not only to Scripture in general, but
alſo to the particular Hiſtory of the Flood left us by Moſes; I ſay,
more agreeable to it than any other Hypotheſis that hath yet been
propos'd. This may be made good in a few words. For in Moſes's
Hiſtory of the leluge there are two principal points, The extent
of the Deluge, and the Cauſes of it; and in both theſe we do fully
agree with that ſacred Author, is to the extent of it, :He makes the
Deluge univerſal; All, the high hills under the whole beaven mere cu
verd, fifteen cubits upwards ; We alſo make it univerſal, over the
face of the whole Earth ; and in ſuch a manner as iuft needs raiſe
the waters above the top of the higheſt Hills every where. As to the
caufes of it, Mofes makes them to be the diſruption of the dbuſs, and
the Rains; and no more, and in this alſo we exactly agree with
hím; we know no other cauſes, nor pretend to any other but thoſe
two. Diſtinguiſhing therefore Moſes his narration as to the fub.
ſtance and circumſtances of it, it muſt be allowed that theſe two
points make the ſubltance of it, and that an Hypotheſis that differs
from it in either of theſe two differs from iti dore than Outs ;
which, at the worſt, can but differ in matter of circumſtance. Now
ſeeing the great difficulty about the Deluge is the quantity of Wa-
ter required for it, there have been two explications propoſed; be.
fides ours, to remove or ſatisfie thuis difficulty; One whereof makes
the Deluge not to have been univerſal, or to have reacht only Judeia
and ſome neighbouring Countries ;; and therefore leſs water would
fuffice ; The other owning the Deluge to be: univerſal, ſupplies it
ſelf with Water from the Divine Omnipotenty, and ſays new Wa-
ters were created then for the nonce, and again annihilated when
the Deluge was to ceaſe. Both theſe explications you ſee, (and !
know no more of note that are not obnoxious to the ſame excepti-
ons) differ from Moſes in the ſubſtance, or in one of the two ſub-
ſtantial points; and conſequently more than ours doth. The firſt
changeth the Flood into a kind of national inundation, and the ſe
cond alligns other cauſes of it than Moses had aſſigned. And as
they both differ apparently from the Moſaical Hiſtory,fo you may
fee
them refuted upon other grounds alſo, in the third Chapter of the
Firſt Book of the Theory,
* This may be ſufficient as to the Hiſtory of the Flood by Mofes. But
poſſibly it may be ſaid the principal objection will ariſe from Moſes
his Six-days Creation in the firſt Chapter of Genefis: where another
fort of Earth, than what we have forin'd from the Chaos, is repre-
ſented to us ; namely, a Terraqueous Globe, ſuch as our Earth is at
1
pre-
t
1
A Review of the I beory of the Bardha 183
proſent. 'Tis i'ndeed very apparent, that - Mafes hatli aecommodated
his Six:«la ys Creation to the preſent form of the Earth; or to that
wiiich was before the eyes of the people when he writ. But it is a ,
great queſtion whether tltat was ever intended for a true Phyficat
account of the origine of the Earth : or whether Mofes did either
Philofophize or Aftronomize in that deſoription. The ancient-Fa-
thers, when they anſwer the Heathens, and the adverſaries of Chri-
itianity, do generally deny it; as I am ready to make good upon
another occafion. And the thing it ſelf bears in it evident inaiks of
an accommodation and condeſcention to the vulgar fotions concer-
ping the form of the World. Thofe that think otherwiſe, and would
make it literally and phyſically true in all the parts of it, I deſire
them, without entring upon the ſtri& merits of the cauſe, to deter-
inine theſe Preliminaries. Firſt, wliethen the whole univerſe riſe
from a Terreſtrial Chans. Secondly, what Syſteme of the World
this Six-days Creation proceeds upon : wherher it ſuppoſes the
Earth, or the Sun, for tire Center. Thirdly, Whether the Sun and
Fixt Stars are of a later date, and a later birth, than this Globe of
Earth. And laſtly, Where is the Region of the Supér-celeſtial Wa-
ters. When they have determin'd theſe Fundamentals, we will pro-
ceed to other obſervations upon the Six-days work, which will fur-
ther aſſure us, that 'tis a narration ſuited to the capacity of the pet-
ple, and not to the ſtrict and phyſical nature of things. Beſides, we
are to remember, that Mofes muſt be ſo interpreted in the firſt Chap-
ter of Geneſis, as not to interfere with himſelf in other parts of his
Hiſtory ; nor to interfere with S. Péter, or the Prophet David, or
any other Sacred Authors, wlien tiey treat of the fame matter. Not
laſtly, ſo, as to be repugnant to clear and unconteſted Science. For,
in things that concern the natural World,' that muſt always be cón-
fulted.
With theſe precautions, let them try if they can reduce that nar-
rative of the Origine of the World, to phyſical truth; ſo as to be
conliltent, both with Nature, and with Divine Revelation every
where. It is eaſily reconcileable to both, if we ſuppoſe it writ in a
Vulgar ſtyle, and to the conceptions of the People : And we cannot
deny tliat a Vulgar ſtyle is often made uſe of in the holy Writings.
How freely and unconcernedly does Scripture ſpeak of God Almigh-
ty, according to the opinions of the vulgar? of his paſſions, local mo-
parts and members of his body. Which all are things that do not
belong, or are not compatible with the Divine Natwe, according to
truth and Science. And if this liberty be taken, as to God himſelf,
much more may it be taken as to his works. And accordingly we fee,
what motion the Scripture gives to the Sun: what figure to the
Earth: wiat figure to the Heavens : "All according to the appear-
ance of ſence and popular credulity, without any remorſe for ha-
ving tranfyreſſed the rules of intellettual truth.
This vulgar ſtyle of Scripture in deſcribing the natures of things,
hath been often miſtaken for the real fence, and ſo become a ftum.
bling-block in the way of truth.' Thus the Anthropomorphiter of old
contended for the humane thape of God, from the Letter of Scrip
ture; and brought many expreſs Texts for their purpoſe : but found
reaſon
1
tions,
1
184
A Review of the T beory of the Earth.
reafon at length, got the upper hand of Literal authority. Then.
ſeveral of the Chriſtian Fathers contended, that there were no
Antipodes : and made that doctrine irreconcileable to Scripture. Buit
this alſo, after a while, went off, and yielded to reaſon and experi-
ence. Then, the Motion of the Earth muſt by no means be allow'd,
as being contrary 10 Scripture: for ſo it is indeed, according to the
Letter and Vulgar ſtyle. But all intelligent Perſons fee thorough
this Argument, and depend upon it no irore in this caſe, than in
the former. Laſtly, The original of the Earth from a Chaos,drawn
according to the rules of Phyfiology, will not be admitted : becauſe
it does not agree with the Scheme of the Six-days Creation. But
why may not this be writ in a Vulgar ſtyle, as well as the reſt?
Certainly there can be nothing inore like a Vulgar ſtyle, than to ſet
God to work by the day, and in Six-days to finiſh his task: as he is
there repreſented. We may therefore probably hope that all theſe
diſguiſes of truth will at length fall off, and that we ſhall ſee God
and his Works in a pure and naked Light. .
Thus I have finiſh'd what I had to ſay in confirmation of this
Theory from Scripture. I mean of the former part of it, which de-
pends chiefly upon the Deluge, and the Ante-diluvian Earth. When
you have collated the places of Scripture, on cither fide, and laid
them in the balance, to be weigh'd one againſt another ; If you do
but find them equal, or near to an equal poiſe, you know in wlie-
ther Scale the Natural Reaſons are to be laid : and of what weighe
they ought to be in an argument of this kind. There is a great dif-
ference betwixt Scripture with Philoſophy on its ſide, and Scrip-
ture with Philoſophy againſt it: when the queſtion is concerning
the Natural World. And this is our Caſe: which I leave now to
the conſideration of the unprejudic'd Reader: and proceed to the
Proof of the Second Part of the Theory.
:
;
1
1
T
HE later Part conſiſts of the Conflagration of the World, and
the New Heavens and New Earth. And ſeeing there is no dif-
pute concerning the former of theſe two, our task will now lie in
a little compaſs. Being only this, To prove that there will be New
Heavens, and a New Earth, after the Conflagration. This, to my
mind, is ſufficiently done already, in the firſt
, fecond and third
Chapters of the 4th. Book, both from Scripture and Antiquity;
whether Sacred or Propliane : and therefore, at preſent, we will
only make a ſhort and eaſie review of Scripture Teſtimonies, with
deſign chiefly to obviate and diſappoint the Evaſions of ſuch,
as would beat down ſolid Texts into thin Metaphors and Alle-
gories.
The
A Review of the I beory of the Earth.
185
open viewer
The Teſtimonies of Scripture concerning the Renovation of the World,
aru either expreſs, or implicit. Thoſe I call expreſs, that mention the
New Heavens and New Earth: And thoſe implicit that ſignifie the
ſame thing, but not in expreis-terms. So when our Saviout ſpeaks
of a Palingenejia, or Regeneration, (Matt. 19.28,29.) Or S. Peter
of an -ipocataſtaſis or Reſitution, ( A&t. 3. 21.) Theſe being words
us'd by all Authors, Prophane or Eccleſiaſtical, for the Renovation
of the World, ought, in reaſon, to be interpreted in the fame ſence
in the Holy Writings. And in like manner, when S. Paul ſpeaks
of his Future Earth, or an habitable World to come, Hebr. 2. 5. or of a y si exceleng
Redemption or melioration of the preſent ſtate of Nature, Řoin. 8.21, v mém 80%.
22. Theſe lead us again, in other terms, to the fame Renovation of
The World.. But there are alſo ſome places of Scripture, thắt ſet the
iuft (lut our eyes' not to ſee them. S. Fahit ſays, he ſaw them, and
obſerv'd the form of the New Earth, ipoc. 21. 1. The Seer Iſaiah 1/2.65. 17.
ſpoke of them in expreſs words, many hundred years before. And
S. Peter marks the time when they are to be introduc'd, namely,
after the Conflagration, or after the Diſſolution of the preſent Hea-
vens and Earth: 2 Pet. 3. 12, 13.
Theſe later Texts of Scripture, being ſo expreſs, there is but one
way left to elude the force of thein; and that is, by turning the
Renovation of the World into an Allegory: and making the New Hea-
vens and New Earth to be Allegorical Heavens and Earth, not real
and material, as ours are. This is a bold attempt of ſome moderni
Authors, who chuſe rather to ſtrain the Word of God, than their
own Notions. There are Allegories, no doubt, in Scripture, but we
are not to allegorize Scripture without ſome warrant : either from
an Apoftolical Interpretation, or from the neceſſity of the matter :
and I do not know how they can pretend to either of theſe, in this
caſe. However, That they may have all fair play, we will lay aſide,
at preſent, all the other Texts of Scripture, and confine our ſelves
wholly to S. Peter's words: to ſee and examine whether they are,
or can be turn'd into an Allegory, according to the beſt rules of In-
terpretation
S. Peter's words are theſe: Seeing then all theſe things ſhall be dif- 2 Pet. 3. 11,
ſolvd, what manner of perfus ought ye to be, in holy converſation and
godlineſs? Looking for, and hiſting the coming of the Day of God :
wherein the Heavens being on fire hall be diſſolvd, and the Elements
Shall melt with fervent heat. NEVERTHELESS, me, accord-
ing to his promiſe, look for New Heavens and a Nem Earth, mhereini
Righteouſneſs Mall dwell. The Queſtion is concerning this laſt Verſe,
Whether the Nerr Hetvers and Earth here promis’d, are to be realand
material Heavens and Earth, or only figurative and allegorical. The
words, you ſee, are clear : and the gerieral rule of Interpretation is
this, That we are not to recede from the letter, or the literal fence,
unleſs there be a neceſſity from the ſubject matter ; ſuch a neceſſity;
as makes a literal literpretation abſurd. But where is that neceſſity
in this Calea Cannot God make New Heavens and a New Earth,
as eaſily as he made the Old ones : Is his ſtrength decay'd ſince thať
Time,
12, 13.
186 A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
ܕ
10.
Time, ou is Matter grown more diſobedient? Nay,' does not Nature
offer her ſelf voluntarily to raiſe a New World from the Second
Chaos, as well as from the Firſt: and, under the conduct of Provi-
denice, to make it as convenient an habitation as the Primæval Eartb?
Therefore no neceſſity can be pretended of leaving the literal ſenco
upon an incapacity of the ſubject matter.
The Second Rule to determine an Interpretation to bę Literal or
Allegorical, is, The uſe of the ſame words or phraſe in the Context,
and the signification of them there. Let's then examine our caſe ac-
cording to this rule. S. Peter had us'd the ſame phraſe of Heavens
and Earth twice before in the ſame Chapter. Tlie Old Heavens aud
Earth, ver. 5. The Prefent Heavens and Earth, ver. 7.. and now. he
uſes it again, ver. 13. The New Heavens and Earth. Have we not
then reaſon to ſuppoſe, that he takes it liere in the ſame ſence, that
he had done twice before, for real and material Heavens and Earth?
There is no mark ſet of a new ſignification, nor why we ſhould al-
ter the lence of the words. That lie us'd them always before for
the material Heavens and Earth, I think none will queſtion ; and
therefore, unleſs they can give us a fufficient reaſon, why we ſhould
change the ſignification of the words, we are bound, by this ſecond
rule alſo, to underſtand them in a literal ſence.
Laſtly, The very form of the Words, and the manner of their de
pendance upon the Context, leads us to a literal ſence, and to ma.
terial Heavens and Earth. NEVERTHELESS, ſays the Apoſtle,
me expe&t New Heavens,&c. Why Nevertheleſs! that is, notwithitand-
ing the diffolution of the preſent Heavens and Earth. The Apoſtle
foreſaw, what he had ſaid, might raiſe a doubt in their minds, whe-
ther all things would not be at an end : Nothing inore of Heavens
and Earth, or of any liabitable World, after the Conflagration ;
and to obviate this, he tells them, Notwithſtanding that wonderful
defolation that I have deſcrib'd, we do, according 10 God's promiſes,
expect New Heavens and a New Earth, to be an Habitation for the
Righteous.
You ſee then the New Heavens and New Earth, which the Apoſtle
ſpeaks of, are ſubſtituted in the place of thoſe that were deſtroy'd at
the Conflagration; and would you ſubſtitute Allegorical Heavelis
and Earth in the place of Material... A ſhadow for a ſubſtance?
What an Equivocation would it be in the Apoſtle, when the doubt
was about the material Heavens and Earth, to make an anſwer about
Allegorical
. Laſtly, The Timeing of the thing determines the ſence.
When Thall this New World appear? after the Confagration, the
Apoſtle ſays : Therefore it cannot be underſtood of any Moral Reno-
vation, to be made aty. or in the times of the Goſpel, as theſe Alle-
goriſts pretend. We muſt therefore, upon all accounts, conclude,
that the Apoſtle intended a literal ſence : real and material Heavens, ,
to ſucceed theſe after the Conflagration : which was the thing to be
prov'd. And I know not what Bars the Spirit of God can fet, to
keep us within the compaſs of a Literal Sence, if theſe be not ſuffi-
cient.
Thus much for the Explication of S. Peter's Do&trine, concerning
the New Heavens and New Earth : which ſecures the Second Part
:
+
of
A Review of the i heory of the Earth.
187
ز
of our Theory. For the Theory ſtands upon two Pillars, or two
Pedeſtals, The Ante-diluvian Earth and the Future Earth: or,
in S.
Peter's phraſe, The Old Heavens and Earth, and the New Heavens
und Earth: And it cannot be ſhaken, ſo long as theſe two continue
firm and imınoveable. We might now put an end to this Review,
but it may be expected poſſibly that we ſhould ſay ſomething con
cerning the Millennium : which we have, contrary to the general
Sentiment of the Modern Millenaries, plac'd in the Future Earth.
Our Opinion hath this advantage above others, that, all fan.tical
pretenſions to power and empire in this World, are, by theſe means,
blown away, as chaff before the wind. Princes need not fear to be
dethron'd, to make way to the Saints: nor Governinents unhing'd,
that They may rule the World with a rod of Iron. Theſe are the
effects of a wild Enthufiaſm ; ſeeing the very ſtate which they aiin
ar, is not to be upon this Earth.
But that our ſence may not be miſtaken or miſapprehended in
this particular, as if we thought the Chriſtian Church would never,
upon this Earth, be in a better and happier poſture than it is in at
preſent: We muſt diſtinguilh betwixt a melioration of the World, if
you will allow that word: and a Millennium. We do not deny a re-
forinaticn and improvement of the Church, both as to Peace, Pu-
rity, and Piety. That knowledge may increaſe, mens minds be en-
larg’d, and Chriſtian Religion better underſtood : That the power
of Antichriſt ſhall be diminiſh'd, Perſecution ceaſe, Liberty of Con-
ſcience a'low'd, amongſt the Reformed : and a greater union and
harmony eſtabliſh'd. Tlat Princes will mind the publick good, inore
than they do now; and be themſelves better examples of Vertue
and true Piety. All this may be, and I hope will be, e're long. But
the Apocalyptical Millennium, or the New Jeruſalem, is ſtill another
inatter. It differs not in degree only from the preſent ſtate, but is a
new order of things: toth in the Moral World and in the Natu-
al; and that cannot be till we coine into the New Heavens and Nem
Earth. Suppoſe what Reformation you can in this World, there
will ſtill remain many things inconſiſtent with the true Millennial
ftate. Antichriſt, tho’ weakned, will not be finally deſtroy'd till the
coming of our Saviour, nor Satan bound. And there will be always
Poverty, Wars, Diſeaſes, Knaves and Hypocrites, in this World:
which are not conſiſtent with the New Jeruſalem, as S. John deſcribes
it. Apoc. 21. 2, 3, 4, &c.
You ſee now what our notion is of the Millennium, as we deny
this Earth to be the seat of it. 'Tis the ſtate that ſucceeds the firit
Reſurrection, when Satan is lockt up in the bottomleſs pit. The ſtate
when the Martyrs are to return into Life, and wherein they are to
have the firſt lot and chief Ihare. A ſtate which is to laſt a thouſand
years. And Bleſſed and Holy is he, that hath a part in it : on ſuch the ſe-
cond death hath no power, but they ſhall be Prieſts of God and Chriſt
, and
Shall reign with him a thouſand years. If you would ſee more particular
reaſons of our judgment in this caſe, why ſuch a Millennium is not
to be expected in this World : they are ſet down in the 8th. Chapt.
of the 4th. Book, and we do not think it neceſſary that they ſhould
1
be here repeated.
As
188
A Review of the Theory of the Earth.
As to that diſſertation that follows the Millennium, and reaches
to the Conſummation of all things, ſeeing it is but problematica!,
we leave it to ſtand or fall by the evidence already given. And 1hould
be very glad to ſee the conjectures of others, more learned, in Spa-
culations fo abſtruſe and remote from cominon linowledge. They
cannot ſurely be thought unworthy or unfit for our Meditations,
ſeeing they are ſuggeſted to us by Scripture it ſelf. And to what end
were they propos'd to us there, if it was not intended that they
Nould be underſtood, ſooner or later?
I have done with this Review ; and fail only add one or two re-
Hections upon the whole diſcourſe, and ſo conclude. You have ſeen
the ſtate of the Theory of the Earth, as to the Matter, Form, and
Proofs of it: both Natural and Sacred. If any one will ſubſtitute a
better in its place, 1 ſhall think my ſelf more obliged to him, than
if he had ſhew'd me the Quadrature of the Circle. But it is not
enough to pick quarrels here and there : that may be done by any
writing, eſpecially when it is of ſo great extent and comprehention.
They muſt build up, as well as pull down, and give us another
Theory inſtead of this,'fitted to the fame Natural Hiſtory of the
Earth, according as it is uſet down in Scripture: and then let the
World take their choice. He that cuts down a Tree, is bound in rea-
fon to plant two, becauſe there is an hazard in their growth and
thriving
Then as to thoſe that are ſuch rigorous Scripturiſts, as to require
plainly demonftrative and irreliſtible Texts for every thing they en-
tertain or believe ; They would do well to reflect and contider,
whether, for every article in the three Creeds (which have no ſup-
port from natural reaſon) they can bring ſuch Texts of Scripture as
they require of others: or a fairer and juſter evidence, all things
conſider'd, than we have done for the ſubſtance of this Theory. We
Have not indeed ſaid all that might be ſaid, is to Antiquity : that
making no part in this Review, and being capable ſtill of
ditions. But as to Scripture and Reaſon I have no inore to add.
Thoſe that are not ſatisfied with the proofs already produc'd upon
theſe two heads, are under a fate, good or bad, which is not in my
power to overcome.
}
.
great ad.
j
1
FIN IS.
f
1
1
!
Lundell med
AN
ANSWER
TO THE LATE
EXCEPTIONS
MADE BY
M Eraſmus Warren
AGAINST THE
T H E O RY
OF THE
E A R T H.
C
LONDON,
Printed by R. Norton, for Walter Kettilby, at the Biſhop's
Head in St. Paul's Church-Yard, 1690.
(i)
AN
ANSWER
To the late
EXCEPTIONS
M A D E B Y
M' ERASMUS WARREN
AGAINST
The THEORY of the EARTH
F it be a Civility to return a ſpeedy An-
ſwer to a demand or a meſſage, I will
not fail to pay that reſpect to the late
Author of Exceptions againſt the Theory
of the Earth. I know, ſhort follies, and
ſhort quarrels, are the beſt: and to offer ſatisfaction
at the firſt opportunity, is the faireſt way to put an
end to controverſies. Beſides, ſuch perſonal alterca-
tions as theſe, are but res peritura, which do not de-
ferve much time or ſtudy ; but, like Repartees, are beſt
made off hand, and never thought on more. I only
defire that friendlineſs, that ſome allowance may be
made as to unaccuracy of ſtyle: which is always al-
low'd in hafty diſpatches.
I ſhall make no excurſions from the Subject, nor
uſe any other method than to follow the learned Ex-
ceptor from Chapter to Chapter, and obſerve his ſteps
and morions, ſo far as they are contrary to the Thie-
ory. But if he divert out of his way, for his plea-
fure, or other reaſons beſt known to himſelf, I may
cake notice of it perhaps,but ſhall not follow him any
further than my buſineſs leads me; having no deſign
to abridge his liberty,but to defend my own Writings
where they are attackt. Give mcleave therefore, wich-
out any other preface or ceremony, to fill to our worl.
HH!
A ?
2
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
EXCEPTION S.
C H A P. I.
TH
Pag. 44
HIS Chapter is only an Introduction, and
treats of other things, without any particular
oppoſition to the Theory. And therefore I ſhall only
give you the Concluſion of it, in the Author's own
words : So much for the firſt Chapter; which may be
reckoned as an Introduction to the following Diſcourſe.Which
if any ſhall look upon as a Colle&tion of Notes ſomewhat
confuſedly put together
, rather than a formal, well di-
geſied Treatiſe, they will entertain the beſt or trueſt Idea
of it. A ſevere Cenſure: But every man beſt under-
Itands his own works.
CHA P. I I.
H
Pag. 45.
ERE he begins to enter upon particular Ex-
ceptions: and his firſt head is againſt the Forma-
tion of the Earth, as explain’d by the Theory. To this
he gives but one exception in this chapter: Namely,
that It would have taken up too much time. The World
being made in ſix days. Whereas many ſeparations of
the Chaos and of the Elements, were to be made, ac-
cording to the Theory, which could not be diſpatch'd
in ſo ſhort a time. To this Exception the general An-
ſwer may be this ; either you take the Hypotheſis of
an ordinary Providence, or of an extraordinary, as
to the time allowed for the Formation of the Earch;
If you proceed according to an ordinary Providence,
the formation of the Earth would require much more
time than Six days. But if according to an extraor-
dinary, you may ſuppoſe it made in fix minutes, if
you pleaſe. 'Twas plain work, and a ſimple proceſs,
according to the Theory; conſiſting only of ſuch and
ſuch ſeparations, and a Concretion: And either of
theſe might be accelerated, and diſpatch'd in
lon-
ger or ſhorter time, as Providence thought fir.
a
How-
The Theory of the Earth.
However this Objection does not come well from
the hands of this Author, who makes all the Moun-
tains of the Earthi, (the moſt operoſe part of it, as
one would think) to be rais’d in a ſmall parcel of a
day, by the heat and action of the Sun. As we ſhall
find in the 10th. Chapter, hereafter. He ſeems to
proceed by natural Cauſes, for ſuch are the heat and
action of the Sun: and if ſo, he will find himſelf as
much ftraiten’d for time, as the Theoriſt can be.
But if he ſay, the work of Nature and of the Sun was
accelerated by an extraordinary.power,he muſt allow
us to ſay the ſame thing of the Separations of the Cha-
os,and the firſt Concretion of the Earth. For he can-
not reaſonably debar us that liberty which he takes
himſelf, unleſs we have debarr'd and excluded our
felves. Now 'tis plain the Theoriſt never excluded
an extraordinary Providence in the formation and
conſtruction of the Earth ; as appears and is openly
expreſt in many parts of the Theory. See, if you Eng. Theer.
pleaſe, the concluſion of the fifth Chapter,which treats P. 65.
about the formation of the Earth. The laſt paragraph
is this: Give me leave onely, before we proceed any fur-
ther, to annex here a ſhort Advertiſement, concerning the
Cauſes of this wonderful Structure of the firſt Earth : Tis
true, we have propos’d the Natural Cauſes of it, and I do
not know wherein our Explication is falſe or defective
but in things of this kind me may eaſily be too credulous.
And this Struiture is ſo marvellous, that it ought rather
to be conſider'd as a particular effect of the Divine Art,
than as the work of Nature. The whole Globe of the water
vaulted over, and the exteriour Earth hanging above the
Deep, ſuſtain’d by nothing but its own meaſures and man-
ner of Conſtruction: A building without foundation or
Corner-ſtone. This ſeems to be a piece of Divine Geometry
or Archite&ture ; and to this, I think is to be refer'd that
magnificent Challenge which God Almighty made to Job;
Where was thou when I laid the foundations of the
Earth? Declare,&c. Mofes alſo, when be bad defcrib'd the
Chaos,ſaith, The Spirit of God mov'd upon, or ſat brooding
zupon the face of the waters ; without all doubt to produce
ſome effe&ts there. And St. Peter, when he ſpeaks of the forme
of the Ante-diluvian Earth, low it ftood in reference to the
ܪ
irate's
4 An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
waters, adds, By the word of God, or by the wiſdom of God
it was made ſo. And this ſame miſdom of God, in the
Proverbs, as we obſerved before, takes notice of this very
piece of work in the formation of the Earth: When he
ſet an Orb over the face of the Deep, I was there. .
Wherefore to the great Architect, who made the boundleſs
Univerſe out of nothing, and form’d the Earth out of a
Chaos, let the praiſe of the whole work, and particularly
of this Maſter-piece, for ever with all honour be given. In
Eng. Theor. like manner, there is a larger account of Providence,
1. 106,107. boch Ordinary and Extraordinary, as to the Revolu-
tions of the Natural World, in the laſt l'aragraph of
the 8th. Chapter ; and like reflections are made in o
ther places when occaſion is offer'd.
We have not therefore any where excluded the in
fluence and benefit of ſuperiour cauſes, where the
caſe requires it. Eſpecially when ’tis only to modify
the effect, as to time and diſpatch. And in that cale
none will have morc need of it than himſelf, as we
ſhall find in the examination of his Tench Chapter,
about the Origine of Mountains.
The reſt of this Second Chapter is ſpent in three
Excurſions. One in juſtifying the Carteſian way of
forming Light and the Sun, as agreeable to Moſes.
The Second about the Jewiſh Cabala, and Cabaliſtical
interpretations. And the Third about Myſtical num-
bers. But the Theory not being concern'd in theſe
things, I leave them to the Author and his Readers,
to enjoy the pleaſure and profit of them, and pro-
ceed to the Third Chapter.
C Η Α Ρ. ΙΙΙ.
p. 73.
I
N This Chapter a Second Exception againſt the
formation of the Earth, as propos’d in the Theory,
is alledg’d: And'tis this, The fluctuation of the Cha-
os, or of that firſt watery Globe, would binder, he
ſays, any Concretion of Earth upon its ſurface. Not
that there were Winds or Storms then, to agitate
thoſe waters.
Neither would the motion of the
Earth, or the rotation of that Globe, diſturb them,
as he allows there. But the diſturbance would have
rile
"
18,19.
The Theory of the Earth.
5
· riſe from Tides, or the ebbings and flowings of that
great Ocean: which, he ſays, muſt have been then, as
well as now. And the reaſon he gives is this, Becauſe
the Flux and Reflux of the Sea depend upon the Moon:
And the Moon was then preſent, as he ſays, in our
Heavens, or in our Vortex: and therefore would have
the ſame effect then, upon that Body of waters which
lay under it, that it hath now upon the Sca.
That the Moon was in the Heavens, and in our
Neighbourhood, when the Earth was form’d, he
proves from the Six-days Creation: and ſpends two
or three pages in wit and ſcolding upon this ſubject. p.77,78.79.
But, with his leave, when all is done, bis argument will
be of no force, unleſs he can prove that the Fourth
Day's Creation was before the Third. Iconfeſs, I have
heard of a wager that was loſt upon a like caſe, name-
ly, whether Henry the 8th. was before Henry the 7th ?
Buc that was done by complot in the Company, to
whom it was referr'd to decide the Queſtion. We have
no plot liere, but appeal fairly to that Judge the Ex-
cepter hach chofen, namely to Scripture, which tells
us, that the Moon was made the 4th. Day and the
Earth was form’d the 3d. Therefore unleſs the 4th. .
Day was before the 3d. the Moon could not hinder
the formation of the Earth.
But, I hope, ſay you, this is a miſrepreſentation. The
Animadverter ſure would not put the matter upon
this iſſue. Yes, he does. For when he had oppos'd
to our Formacion of the Earth, the Fluctuation of
the Waters : caus’d, as he phraſes it, by the bulkie
preſence of the Moon, He concludes with theſe words,
(p. 77. Paragr. 3.) But in reference to this matter, there
is a Doubt made by the Theoriſt, which muſt be conſider'd
and removed. Otherwiſe moſt of what bath been ſaid,
touching the inftability and fluctuation of theſe Waters,
will be vain and groundleſs
. "The Doubt is, whether the
Moon were then in our neighbourhood. You ſee that
matter is put upon this iſlue, Whether the Moon was
in the Neighbourhood of the Earth, at the cime of its
formation. We ſay ſhe was not, and prove it by this
plain argument: If ſhe was not in Being at that time;
thc was not in our Neighbourhood: But unleſs the
.
i
:
4th.
6
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
4th. day was before the 3d. ſhe was not in Being. Ergo.
But after all, If the Moon had been preſent then,
and there had been Tides, or any other fluctuation
towards the Poles, we have no reaſon to believe, ac-
cording to the experiences we have now, that that
would have hinder'd the formation of the Earth, up-
on the ſurface of the Chaos. For why ſhould they
have hinder'd that more, than they do the formation
of Ice upon the Surface of the Sea? We know, in cold
Regions, the Seas are frozen, notwithſtanding their
Tides. And in the mouths of Rivers, where there is
both the current and ſtream of the River on one
hand, and the counter-current of the Tides on the o-
ther, theſe together cannot hinder the Concretion thac
is made on the Surface of the Water. And our water
is a ſubſtance more thin, and eaſily broken, than that
tenacious film was, chat cover'd the Chaos. WHERE-
FORE, upon all ſuppoſitions, we have reaſon to con
clude, that no fluctuations of the Chaos could hinder
the formation of the Firit Earth.
Laſtly, The Obſervator oppoſes the reaſons that are
given by the Theoriſt, why the preſence of the Moon was
leſs needful in the firſt World. Namely, becauſe there
were no long Winter-nights: nor the great Pool of the Sea
to move or govern. As to the Second reaſon, 'tis.onely
Hypothetical: and if the Hypotheſis be true, That
there was no open Sea at that time, (which muſt be
elſe-where examin'd) the conſequence is certainly true.
But as to the firſt reaſon, He will not allow the Con-
ſequence, tho' the Hy.potheſis be admitted. For he
ſays, As there were no long Winter-nights then, ſo there
were no Short Summer ones neither. So that ſet but the
one againſt the other, and the preſence of the Moon may
ſeem to have been as needful then, in regard of the length
of nights, as ſhe is now. This looks like a witty obler-
vation, but it does not reach the point. Is there as
much need of the Moon in Spain, as in Lapland, or
the Northern Countries? There is as much Night in
one place as another, within the compaſs of a Year :
but the great inconvenience is, when the Night falls
upon the hours of Travel, or che hours of work and
buſineſs. For if it fall onely upon hours of ſleep,
of
59
or
I
I be Theory of the Earth.
many
ofreſt and retirement: as it does certainly more in
Spain, and in thoſe Climates that approach ncarer to
an Equinox, the Moon is there. leſs neceſſary in that
reſpect. We can ſleep without Moonſhine, or with-
out Light; but we cannot travel,or do buſineſs abroad,
without hazard and great inconvenience, if there be
no light. So that the reaſon of the Theoriſt holds
good viz. That there would be more neceſſity of
Moon ſhine in long Winter-Nights, than in a perpe-
tual Equinox.
We proceed now to the reſt of this Chapter, which
is made up of ſome ſecondary Charges againſt this
part of the Theory, concerning the Chaos and the
Formation of the firit Earth. As firſt, that it is pre- p. 80, 81.
carious : Secondly, Unphiloſophical: and Thirdly, Anti- p. 83.
ſcriptural, which we ſhall anſwer in order. He ſeems
to offer at three or four inſtances of precariouſneſs
, as
to the ingredients of the Chaos, their proportions and
ſeparations. But his quarrel is chiefly with the oily
particles. Theſe he will ſcarce allow at all: nor that
they could ſeparate themſelves, in due time, to receive
the Terreſtrial: at leaſt in due proportions.
Firit, He would have no oily particles in the Chaos.
But why ſo, I pray? what proof or juſt exception is
there againſt them? Why may there not be original
Oily particles
, as well as original Salt particles? Such
as your great maſter D. Cartes ſuppoſes. He who con- Pris. p.
ſiders that vaſt quantity of Oleagineous matter that filetcor:
is diſperſt every where: in Vegetables, in Animals,and c. 1. $. S
in many ſorts of Earths: And that this muſt have
been from the beginning, or as ſoon as the Earth
had any furniture: will ſee reaſon to believe that ſuch
particles muſt be thought Original and Primeval. Not
forg’d below the Abyſs
, and extracted from the in-
feriour regions of the Earth. For that would require
a proceſs of many ages; whereas theſe being the prin-
ciples of Fertility, it is reaſonable to ſuppoſe that a
New World abounds with them more than an Old
one. Laſtly, if we ſuppoſe Oily particles to be tenuious
and branchy, as your Philoſopher docs, too groſs to
be Air,and too light for Water : Why ſhould we ima-
gine that in that valt maſs and variety of particles,
B
whereof
A
I
1
8 An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
any
1.4. 5. 76.
9.58, 59.
whereof the Chaos conſiſted, there ſhould not be
of this figure, as well as of others ? Or, what reaſon
is there to ſuppoſe, that there are none of that figure,
but what are brought from the inferiour Regions of
the Earth? For, of all others, theſe ſeem to be the
moſt unlikely, if not incapable, of being extracted
from thence. And if there be only a gradual diffe-
rence, in magnitude and mobility, betwixt the
par-
Prin.phil. ticles of Air and of Oil, as that Philoſopher ſeems to
ſuppoſe, why muſt we exclude theſe degrees, and yei
admit the higher and lower ?
The ſecond thing which he charges with precariouſ
.
neſs, is the ſeparation of this Oily matter, in due time,
ſo as to make a mixture and concretion with the ter-
reſtrial particles that fell from above. This objection
Eng
. Theor. was both made and anſwered by the Theoriſt: 'which
the Obſervator might have vouchſaf'd to have taken
notice of: and either confuted the anſwer, or ſpar’d
himſelf the pains of repeating the objection.
The third precariouſneſs is concerning the quantity
and proportion of theſe particles: and the fourth,
concerning the quantity and proportion of the Wa
The Excepter , it ſeems, would have had the
Theoriſt to have gag’d theſe liquors, and told him the
juſt meaſure and proportion of each. But in what
Theory or Hypotheſis is that done? Has his great Phi-
loſopher, in his Hypotheſis of Three Elements, ( which
the Excepter makes uſe of,p.52.) Or in his ſeveral Re-
gions of the unform’d Earth, in the 4th Book of his
Principles,defin'd the quantity and dimenſions of each?
Or in the Mineral particles and juices, which he draws
from the lower Regions, does he determine the quan-
tity of them? And yet theſe, by their exceſs or defect,
might be of great inconvenience to the World. Nei-
ther do I cenſure him for theſe things, as precarious.
For when the nature of a thing admits a latitude, che
original quantity of it is left to be determin’d by the
effects: and the Hypotheſis ſtands good, if ncicher
any thing antecedent, nor any preſent phenomena can
be alledged againſt it.
But if theſe examples from his great Philoſopher,
be not ſufficient, I will give him one from an Author
ter.
beyond
The Theory of the EarthA
6
.
*
beyond all exception: and that is froin himſelf. Does
ne Animadverter in his new Hypotheſis concerning
the Deluge, ch. 15. give us the juſt proportions of his
Rock-water, and the juſt proportions of his Rain-
water, that concurred to make the Deluge? I find
no calculations there, but general expreſſions, that
the one was far greater than the other : and that may
be calily preſunied concerning the oily ſubſtance and
the watry in the Chaos. What ſcruples therefore p. 80, 81;
he railcs in reference to the Chaos, againſt the Theo-
riit, for not having demonſtrated the proportions of
che liquors of the Abyſs, fall upon his own Hypothe-
ſis, for the ſame or greater realons. And you know
what the old verſe Tays, Turpe eſt Doctori, cùm culpa
redargnit ipſum.
But however, He will have ſuch exceptions to ſtand p. 81.
good againſt theTheoriſt, cho'chey are not good againſt
other perſons. Becauſe the Theoriſt
Ego quidem in ci? fum fententii, si
ſtands upon * terms of certainty, and
in birium rerum de quibus agitur,cog-
in one place of his Book,has this ſen nitionem,ut aliarum quarumcunque,
tence, Ego quidem,&c. Theſe words, and momenti funt, vifum fuerit Deo
Ithink, are very little exceptionable, perveniendi, ratio illa certa eft, & in
aliqui clarâő incvičti evidentici fino
if they be taken with the Context. data: non conjecturalis,vagin,c dubia.
For this Evidence and certainty ubertate fin , c. qui maxime ſibi ca-
which the Theoriſt ſpeaks of, is verit ab erroribus, 77491quim womplectea
brought in there in oppoſition to
ſuch uncertain arguments as are taken from the in-
terpretation of Fables and Symbols : or from Etymolo-
gies and Grammatical Criticiſms, which are exprelly
mention'd in the preceding diſcourſe. And yet this
ſentence, becauſe it might be taken in too great an
extent, is left out in the 2d Edition of the Theory,and
therefore none had reaſon to inlift upon it. But I ſee
the Excepter puts himſelf into a ſtate of War, and
thinks there is no foul play againſt an Enemy.
So much for his charge of precariouſneſs. We now
come to the 2d, which is call’d unphiloſophicalneſs. And
why is the Theoriſt, in this caſe, unphiloſophical ? Be-
cauſe, ſays the Excepter, He fuppoles Terreſtrial par-
ticles to be diſperſt through the whole Sphere of the
Chaos, as high as the Moon. And why not, pray,
if it be a meer Chaos? where, antecedently to ſepara-
tions
Citr.
B 2
10 An Anſwer to the late Exceptions in ade againſt
tions, all things are mixt and blended without diſtin-
ction of gravity or levity. Otherwiſe it is not a meer
Chaos. And when ſeparations begin to be made, and
diſtinction of parts and regions, fo fir it is cealing to
be a meer Chaos. But then, lors the Obſervator, why
did not the Moon come down, as well as thiele Terre,
ftrial particles ? I anſwer by another queſtion, Why
does not the Moon come down now? Seeing ſhe is
ſtill in our Vortex, and at the ſame diſtance; and ſo
the ſame reaſon which keups her up now, kept her up
then. Which reaſon he will not be at a loſs to un-
derſtand, if he underſtand the principles of his great
Philofopher.
We come now to the last charge, That the Theory,
in this part of it, is Antiſcriptural. And why ſo? be
cauſe it ſuppoſes the Chaos dark, whereas the Scripture
ſays there was Light the firſt day. Well, but does the
Scripture ſay that the Chaos was thoroughly illumi.
Pag. 52. nated the firſt day? the Excepter, as I remember,makes
the primigenial Light to have been the Rudiment of
a Sun: and calls it there a faint light, and a feeble
and in this place, a faint glimmering. It then
the Sun, in all its ſtrength and glory, cannot ſome-
times diſpel a miſt out of the Air, what could this
faint, feeble glimmering do, towards the diſſipation of
ſuch a groſs caliginous opacity, as that was? This
Light might be ſufficient to make ſome diſtinction of
Day and Night in the Skics; and we do not find
any
other mark of its ſtrength in Scripture, nor any other
uſe made of it.
So we have done with this Chapter. Give me leave
only, without offence, to obſerve the ſtyle of the Ex-
cepter in reference to Scripture and the Theory. He
is apt to call every thing antiſcriptural
, that ſuits not
his Sence. Neither is that enough, but he muſt alſo
call it a bold affront to Scripture. He confeſſes, he hath
p. 299.pen, made a little bold with Scripture himſelf, in his new
Hypotheſis. How much that little will prove, we
Thall ſee hereafter. But however as to that hard word,
affront, a diſcreet man, as he is not ape to give an af-
front, ſo neither is he forward to call every croſsword
an affront. Both thoſe humours are extremes, and
breed
un. 17.
lin.27.
light;
p. 78.
The Theory of the Earth.
11
breed quarrels. Suppoſe a Man ſhould ſay boldly,
God Almighty hath no right hand. Oh, might the Ani-
madverter cry, That's a bold affront to Scripture : For,
I can ſhew you many and plain Texts of Scripture,
both in the Old Teſtament, and in the New Teſta-
ment; where expreſs mention is made of God's Right
Hand. And will you offer to oppoſe Reaſon and Phi-
loſophy to expreſs words of Scripture, often repeated,
and in both Teſtaments? O Tempora, 0 Mores. So far
as my obſervation reaches, weak reaſons commonly
produce ſtrong paſſions. When a Man hath clear
reaſons, they ſatisfie and quiet the mind, and he is not
much concern'd whether others reccive his notions, or
no. But when we have a ſtrong averſion to an opi-
nion, from other Motives and Conſiderations: and
find our reaſons doubtful or inſufficient, chen, accord-
ing to the courſe of humane nature, the paflions riſe
for a further ailítance: and what is wanting in point
of argument, is made up by invectives and aggra-
vations.
CHAP. IV.
p. 86,
THIS
HIS Chapter is chiefly concerning the Central
Fire, and the Origine of the Chaos. Of both
which the Theoriſt had declared he would not treat.
And 'cis an unreaſonable violence to force an Author
to treat of what things we pleaſe, and not allow him
to preſcribe bounds to his own diſcourſe. As to the
firſt of theſe, ſee what the Theoriſt hath ſaid, Engl.
Theor. p. 48. 64. & 324. By which paſſages it is evi-
dent, that he did not meddle with the Central parts
of the Earth: nor thought it neceſary for his Hypo-
theſis. As is alſo more fully expreſt
in the Latine * Theory, p. 45. For, trakm, lite Aliffam ignis in centro
* Si adinitt.1il'les infuper Ignem Cena
do but allow him a Chaos from the Terra': q::cd quidem non eft hujus ar-
Simciti. Neque partem intimin
bottom of the Abyſs, upwards to Ch.los, niſi obiter co pro formi, conſi-
the Moon, and he deſires no morc
derivi, cim it rem noftram non pe.
itar. Vid. etiam p. 186. edit. 2.
for the formation of an habitablo
Earth. Neither is it the part of wililom, to load a
new ſubject with unneceſſary curiofities.
Then as to the Origine of the Chaos, ſee how the
Theoriſt
*2
An Anſwer to the laté Exceptio:?s inade againſt
P. 324
. 98.
ung. Theor. Theoriſt bounds his diſcourſe as to that. I did not
think it neceſſary to carry the ſtory and original of the
Earth,higher than the Chaos, as Zoroaſter and Orpiieus
ſeem to have done ; but taking that for our foundation,
which Antiquity ſacred and profane does ſuppoſe, and natu-
ral reaſon approve and confirmi, we have form’d the Eart)
from it. To form an habitable Earth from a Chaos
given, and to ſhow all the great Periods and general
Changes of that Earth, throughout the whole courle
of its duration, or while it remain'd an Earth, was the
adequate deſign of the Theoriſt. And was this deſign
ſo ſhort or hallow, that it could not ſatisfy the great
Soul of the Excepter? but it muſt be a flaw in the
Hypotheſis
, that it did go higher than thc Chaos. We
content our ſelves with cheſe bounds at preſent. And
when a man declares that he will write only the
Roman Hiſtory, Will you ſay his work's imperfect,
becauſe it does not take in the Perſian and Aſſyrian
Theſe things conſider'd, to ſpeak freely of this Chap-
ter, it ſeems to me, in a great meaſure, impertinent
.
Unleſs it was deſign'd to ſhow the learning of the
Obſervator : who loves, I perceive, to dabble in Phi-
loſophy, tho’ little to the purpoſe. For, as far as I ſee,
his diſquiſitions generally end in Scepticiſm; He dif
.
putes firſt one way, and then another, and, at laſt, de.
termines nothing. He rambles berwext D.Cartes and
Moſes, the Rabbies, the Septuagint, the Platoniſts, Mag-
netiſme, ſtriate Particles, and præexiſtence of Souls.
and ends in nothing as to the formation of the Earth,
which was to be the ſubject of the Chapter. We pro-
ceed therefore to the next, in hopes to meet wich
cloſer reaſoning
Ć H A P. V.
p. 106.
Rom the manner of the Earth's formation, thie Ex-
cepter now proceeds to the Form of it, if complea-
ted. And his firſt Exception is, That it would want
Waters or Rivers to water it. He ſays there would
either be no Rivers at all: or none, at leaſt, in due
time.
The Theoriſt hath repleniſht that Earth with Rivers,
Howing
The Theory of the Earth.
i
flowing from the extreme parts of it towards the
middle, in continual ſtreams: and watering, as a Gar-
den, all the intermediate climates. And this conſtant
ſupply of water was made from the Heavens, by an
uninterrupted ſtream of Vapours: which had their
courſe through the Air, from the middle parts of the
Earth towards the extreme; and falling in Rains, re-
turn'd again upon the ſurface of the Earth, from the
extreme parts to the middle. For that Earth being
of an Oval, or ſomething oblong figure,there would
be a declivity all a-long, or deſcent, from the Polar
parts towards the Equinoctial, which gave courſe and
motion to theſe waters. And the vapors above ne-
ver failing in their courſe, the Rivers would never fail
below; but a perpetual Circulation would be eſta-
bliſh'd, betwixt the waters of the Heavens and of the
Earth.
This is a ſhort account of the ſtate of the Waters in
the Primeval Earth. Which you may ſee repreſented
and explain’d more at large, in the 2d. Book of the
Theory, Chap. 5. And this, I believe, is an Idea more
eaſily conceived, than any we could form concerning
the Waters and Rivers of the preſent Earth, if we
had not experience of them. Suppoſe a Stranger
that had never ſeen this Terraqueous Globe, where
we live at preſent, but was told the general Form of
it: How the Sea lies, how the Land, and what was
the conſtitution of the Heavens: If this Stranger was
askt his opinion, whether luch an Earth was habi-
table: and particularly, whether they could have wa-
ters commodiouſly in ſuch an Earth, and how the In-
land Countries would be ſupplied ? I am apt to think,
he would find it more difficult ( upon an Idea onely,
without experience) to provide Waters for ſuch an
Earth, as ours is at preſent, than for ſuch an one as
the Primcval Earth was. 'Tis true, He would eaſily
find Rains, poflible and natural: but with no con-
ftancy or regularity; and thele lie might imagine
would oncly make tranſient corrents,not any fixt and
permanent Rivers. But as for Fountains deriv'd from
the Sea, and breaking out in higher grounds, I am
apt to believe, all his Philolophy would not be able
14
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
9. 114.
to make a clear diſcovery of them. But things that
are familiar to us by experience, we think caſie in
ſpeculation, or never enquire into the cauſes of them.
Whereas,other things that never fall under our expe-
rience, tho' more ſimple and intelligible in themſelves,
we reject often as Paradoxes or Romances. Let this
be applied to the preſent caſe, and we proceed to an-
ſwer the Exceptions.
Let us take that Exception firſt, as moſt material,
that pretends there would have been no Rivers at all
in the Primeval Earth, if it was of ſuch a Form as
the Theoriſt has deſcrib'd. And for this He gives one
grand Reaſon, Becauſe the Regions towards the Poles,
where the Rains are ſuppos’d to fall, and the Rivers
to riſe, would have been all frozen and congeald:
and conſequently no fit Sources of water for the reſt
of the Earth. Why we ſhould think thoſe Regions
would be frozen, and the Rains that fell in thein, he
gives two Reaſons, the Diſtance, and the Obliquity of
the Sun. As alſo the experience we have now, of the
coldneſs and frozenneſs of thoſe parts of the Earth.
But as to the Diſtance of the Sun, He confeſſes that is
not the thing that does onely or chiefly make a Climate
cold. He might have added, particularly in that Eart),
where the Sun was never at a greater diſtance than the
Equator. Then as to the Obliquity of the Sun, neither
was that ſo great, nor ſo conſiderable, in the firſt
Earth, as in the preſent. Becauſe the Body of that
lay in a direct poſition to the Sun, wherças the pre-
ſent Earth lies in an Oblique. And tho' the Polar
circles or circumpolar parts of that Earth, did not
lie ſo perpendicular to the Sun as the Equinoctial
,
and conſequently were cooler, yet there was no dan-
ger of their being frozen or congeald. It was more
the moiſture and exceſſive Rains of thole parts that
made them uninhabitable, than the extreme coldncis
of the Climate, of it ſelf. And if the Excepter lad
well conſider'd the differences betwixt the preſentand
primitive Earth: as to obliquity of poſition, and, that
which follows from it, the length of Nights: He
would have found no reaſon to have charg’d that
Earth with nipping and freezing cold; where there was
P. 118.
10t,
I be Theory of the Earth.
15
!
not, I believe, one morſel of Ice from one pole to
another. But that will better appear, if we conſider
the cauſes of Cold.
There are three general cauſes of Cold: the diſtance
of the Sun, his Obliquity, and his total Abſence; I
mean in the Nights. As to diſtance, that alone muſt
be of little effect, ſeeing there are many Planets, ( which
muſt not be lookt upon as meer lumps of Ice ) at a
far greater diſtance from the Sun than ours. And as
to Obliquity, you ſee it was much leſs conſiderable in
the reſpective parts of the Primitive Earth, than of the
preſenc. Wherefore theſe are to be conſider'd but as
ſecondary cauſes of Cold, in reſpect of the third, che
total abſence of the Sun in the night time. And where
this happens to be long and tedious, there you muſt
expect exceſs of Cold. Now in the primitive Eartlı
there was no ſuch thing, as long winter nights, but
every where, a perpetual Equinox, or a perpetual Day.
And conſequently, there was no room or cauſe of ex-
cellive cold in any part of it. But on the contrary,
the caſe is very different in the preſent Earth. For in
our Climate, we have not the preſence of the Sun,
in the depth of Winter, half as long as he is abſent.
And towards the l'oles they have nights that laſt le-
veral weeks or months together. And then’tis, that the
Cold rages, binds up the ground, freezes the Ocean,
and makes choſe parts, more or leſs, uninhabitable. Buc
where no ſuch cauſes are, you need not fear any ſuch
effects.
Thus much to thew that there miglit be Rains,
Waters, and Rivers, in the primigenial Earth, and to-
wards the extreme parts of it, without any danger of
freezing. But however, ſays the other part of the ex-
ception, Theſe Rivers would not be made in due time.
That's wholly according to the proceſs you take; If
you take a meer natural proceſs, the Rivers could not
How throughout tlic Earth, all on a ſudden : but you
may accelerate that proceſs, as much as you pleaſe,
by a Divine Hand. As to this particular indeed of
the Rivers, one would think there ſhould be no oc-
caſion for their ſudden Aowing through the Earth :
becauſe mankind could not be ſuddenly propagated
C
through
16 An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
throughout the Earth. And if they did but lead the
way, and prepare the ground, in every countrey, be-
fore mankind arrived there, that ſeems to be all that
would be neceſſary upon their account. Neither can
it be imagin'd, but that the Rivers would flow faſter
than mankind could follow; for 'tis probable, in the
firſt hundred years, men did not reach an hundred
miles from home, or from their firſt habitations: and
we cannot ſuppoſe the defluxion of Water, upon any
declivity, to be half ſo flow. As to the chanels of theſe
Rivers, the manner of their progreſs, and other cir-
cumſtances, Thoſe things are ſet down fully enough
in the 5th Chapter of the 2d Book of the Engliſh Theory
,
and it would be needleſs to repeat them here.
But the Anti-theoriſt ſays, this flow production and
propagation of Rivers is contrary to Scripture: Both
becauſe of the Rivers of Paradiſe, and alſo becauſe
Files were made the Sixth day. As to that of the
Filhes, He muſt firſt prove that thoſe were River-
Gen. 1. 22. fiſhes; for the Scripcure makes them Sea-fiſh, and
inſtances in great Whales. But he ſays, (p.113, 114.)
it will appear in the ſequel of his Diſcourſe
, that the
Abyſs could be no receptacle of fiſhes. To that ſequel
of his Diſcourſe therefore we muſt refer the examina-
tion of this particular. Then as to Paradiſe, that was
but one ſingle ſpot of ground, according to the ordi-
nary Hypotheſis: which he ſeems to adhere to; and
Rivers might be there as ſoon as he pleaſes, ſeeing its
ſeat is not yet determin’d. But as for the Lands which
they are ſaid to traverſe or encompaſs, that might be
the work of time, when their chanels and courſes
were extended and ſetled. As they would be doubtleſs
long before the time that Moſes writ that deſcription.
But as to the Rivers of Paradiſe, it would be a long
ſtory to handle that diſpute here. And 'tis fit the
Authors ſhould firſt agree amongſt themſelves, before
we determine the original of its River, or Rivers.
& 22.
ch. 13.
CHAP
The Theory of the Earth
17
1
CH A P. VI.
WE
TE come now to the Deluge: where the great p. 121
Exception is this, That according to che
Theory, the Deluge would have come to paſs
, whe-
ther mankind had been degenerate or no.
We know mankind did degenerate, and 'tis a dan-
gerous thing to argue upon falſe ſuppoſitions: and to
tell what would have come to paſs, in caſe ſuch a
thing had not come to paſs. Suppoſe Adam had noc
ſind, what would have become of the Meſſiah and Eph. 1: 4
the Diſpenſation of the Goſpel ? which yet is ſaid to Apoc. 13.8.
have been decermind more early, than the Deluge.
Let the Anci-theoriſt anſwer himſelf this queſtion,and
he may anſwer his own.
But to take a gentler inſtance, Suppoſe Adam had
nor eaten the forbidden fruit: How could He and all
his Poſterity have liv'd in Paradiſe ? A few generations
would have fillid that place, and ſhould the reſt have
been turn’d out into the wide World, without any
fin or fault of theirs ? You ſuppoſe the Ante-diluvian
Heavens and Earth to have been the ſame with the
preſent, and conſequently ſubject to the ſame acci-
dents and inconveniences. The action of the Sun
would have been the ſame then, as now, according
to your Hypotheſis: The ſame exceſſes of heat and
çold, in the ſeveral regions and climates : The ſame
Vapours and Exhalations extracted out of the Earth:
The ſame impurities and corruptions in the air : and,
in conſequence of theſe, the fame extérial diſpoſi-
tions to Epidemical diſtempers. Beſides, there would
be the ſame ſtorms and tempeſts at Sea, the ſame
Earth:quakes and other deſolations at Land. So that
had all the Sons and Daughters of men, to uſe the Ex- p. 122
cepter's elegant ſtyle, been as purè and bright, as they
could poſſibly have dropt out of the mint of Creation, They
jhould ſtill have been ſubject to all theſe inconvenien-
ces and calamities. If mankind had continued ſpot-
leis and undegenerate till the Deluge, or for ſixteen
hundred years, they might as well have continued fo
for fixteen hundred more. And in a far leſs time,
G 2
accordo
:
18 An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
0.121.
according to their fruitfulneſs and multiplication, the
whole face of the Earth would have been thick co-
vered with inhabitants: every Continent and every
INand, every Mountain and every Deſert, and all the
climates from Pole to Pole. But could naked inno-
cency have liv'd happy in the frozen Zones! where
Bears and Foxes can ſcarce ſubfift. In the midſt of
Snows and Ice, thick foggs, and more than Ægyp-
tian darkneſs, for ſome months together. Would all
this have been a Paradiſe, or a Paradiſiacal ſtate, to
theſe Virtuous Creatures ? I think it would be more
adviſeable for the Excepter, not to enter into ſuch
diſputes, grounded only upon ſuppoſitions. God's
preſcience is infallible, as his counſels are immutable.
But the Excepter further ſuggeſts, that the Theory
does not allow a judicial and extraordinary Provi-
dence in bringing on the Deluge, as a puniſhment up-
on mankind. Which, I muſt needs ſay, is an untrue
and uncharitable ſuggeſtion. As any one may fec
both in the Latin Theory * Chap.
* Notandum verò, quamvis mundi
reteris diſolutionem & rationes Dilu- 6th. and in the Engliſh, in ſeve-
vi fecundum ordinem caufarum natu ral places. So at the entrance up-
talium explicemus,quòd eo modo magis
clare diſtincte intelligantur ; non ideò on the explication of the Deluge
in penam humani generis ordinarum (Theor.p. 68.) are theſe words, Let
fwiſſe diluvium, finguliſque ipfius mo-
tibus præfuiſſe providentiam, inficia us then ſuppoſe, that at a time appoin-
mur : imó in eo elucet maxime Sapiena ted by Divine Providence, and from
morali ita coaptet & attemperet ,ut hu- cauſes made ready to do that great ex-
jus ingenio,illius ordo & difpofitio ſem-
per reſpondeat : & amborum libratis ecution upon a ſinful world, that this
momentis,fimul concurrant Gund com-
pleantur utriuſque tempora & viciffi- Abyſs
, was open'd, and the frame of the
tudines, ipfe etiam Apoſtolus Petrus Earth broke, &c. And accordingly
diluvii & excidii mundani cauſas na-
in the concluſion of that diſcourſe
turales aſſignat, cùm ait, ' , &c.
about the Deluge, are theſe words,
(Theor. p. 105.) In the mean time I do not know any
more to be added in this part, unleſs it be to conclude
with an advertiſement to prevent any miſtake or miſcon-
ſtruction, as if this Theory, by explaining the Deluge in
a natural way, or by natural cauſes, did detra&t from the
power of God, by which that GREAT JUDGMENT
WAS BROUGHT UPON THE WORLD, IN A
PROVIDENTIAL AND MIRACULOUS MANNER.
And in the three following Paragraphs, which con-
clude that Chapter, there is a full account given both
of
Theor. p.
106, 107
108.
The Theory of the Earth.
19
1
of an ordinary and extraordinary Providence, in re-
ference to the Deluge, and other great revolutions of
the Natural World.
But it is a weakneſs however to think, that, when a
train is laid in Nature, and Methods concerted, for
the execution of a Divine Judgment, therefore it is
not Providential. God is the Author and Governor
of the Natural World, as well as of the Moral: and
He ſees through the futuritions of both, and hath
ſo diſpos’d the one, as to ſerve him in his juſt Judg-
ments upon the other. Which Method, as it is more
to the honour of his Wiſdom, ſo it is no way to the
prejudice of his Power or Juſtice. And what the Ex-
cepter ſuggeſts concerning Atheiſts
, and their pre-
fum'd cavils at ſuch an explication of the Deluge, is a
thing only ſaid at random and without grounds. On
the contrary, fo'to repreſent the ſence of Scripture,
in natural things, as to make it unintelligible, and in-
conſiſtent with
Science and Philofophick truth, is one
great cauſe, in my opinion, that breeds and nouriſhes
Atheifm.
1
1
1
CHAP. VII.
}
3
" HIS Chapter is about the places of Scripture,
alledg’d in confirmation of the Theory. And
chiefly concerning that remarkable Diſcourſe in St.
Peter, 2 Epiſt. 3. which treats of the difference of the
Antediluvian World and the preſent World. Thar
Diſcourſe is ſo fully explain'd in the Review of the
Theory, that I think it is plac'd beyond all exception.
And the Animadverter here makes his exception only
againſt the firſt words, havgáiago aurês rãto Jémostas. Ver. s.
which we thus render, For this they willingly are igno-
rant of. But he generally renders it, wilfully ignorant
of: and lays a great ſtreſs upon that word wilfully.
But if he quarrel with the Engliſh Tranſlation, in this
particular,he muſt alſo fault the Vulgate, and Beza, and
all others that I have yet met withal. And it had
been very proper for him, in this caſe, to have given
us ſome Inſtances or proofs, out of Scripture or Greek
Authors, where this Phraſe ſignifies a wilful and obſti-
1
nigte
LO
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
p. 137.
1
hate ignorance. He ſays it muſt have been a wilful
ignorance, otherwiſe it was not blameable: whereas
St. Peter gives it a ſharp reproof. I anſwer, There
are many kinds and degrees of blameable ignorance,
a contented ignorance, an ignorance from prejudices
,
from non-attendance, and want of due examination.
Theſe are all blameable in ſome degree, and all de-
ſerve ſome reproof; but it was not their ignorance
that St. Peter chiefly reproves, but their deriding and
ſcoffing at the Doctrine of the coming of our Saviour,
and the Conflagration of the World. And therefore
He calls them Scoffers
, walking after their own lufts.
But the Excepter ſeems at length inclinable to ren-
der the foremention'd words, thus, They are willingly
mindleſs or forgetful. And I believe the tranſlation
would be proper enough. And what gentler reproof
can one give than to fay; you are willing to forget ſuch
an Argument or ſuch a Conſideration. Which im-
plies little more than non-attention, or an inclination
of the will towards the contrary opinion. We can-
not tell what evidence or what Traditions they might
have then concerning the Deluge, but we know they
had the Hiſtory of it by Moſes, and all the marks in
Nature, that we have now, of ſuch a Diffolution.
And They, that pretended to Philoſophize upon the
works of Nature and the immutability of them, might
very well deſerve that modeſt rebuke, That they were
willing to forget the firſt Heavens and firſt Earth, and
the deſtruction of them at the Deluge, when they
talkt of an immutable ſtate of Nature.
Neither is there any thing in all this, contrary to
what the Theoriſt had ſaid, concerning the Ancient
Philoſophers, That none of them ever invented or
demonſtrated from the Cauſes, the true ſtate of the
firſt Earth. This muſt be granted; But it is one
thing to demonſtrate from the Cauſes, or by way of
Theory, and another thing to know at large: whe-
ther by Scripture, Tradition, or collection from effects.
The mutability and changes of the World, which
theſe Pſeudo. Chriſtians would not allow of, was a
knowable thing, taking all the means which they
might and ought to have attended to: At leaſt, be-
forc
Theor, c, I.
The Theory of the Earth.
21
fore they ſhould have proceeded ſo far as to reject
the Chriſtian doctrine concerning the future changes
of the World, with ſcorn and deriſion. Which is
the very thing the Apoſtle ſo much cenſur'd them
for.
So much for what is ſaid by the Excepter concer-
ning this place of St. Peter. To all the reſt he gives
an eaſie anſwer, (in the Contents of this Chapter) viz.
That they are Figurative, and ſo not argumentative.
The places of Scripture upon which the Theory de-
pends are ſtated diſtinctly and in order, in the RE-
VIEW: and, to avoid repetitions,we muſt ſometimes
refer to that: particularly, as to two remarkable pla-ferier, f.
ces, Pſal.24.2. and Pſal. 136.6. concerning the Foun- 29, &c.
dation and Extenſion of the Earth upon the Seas. Which
the Excepter quickly diſpatches by the help of a Per- yy
ticle and a Figure
The next He proceeds to, is, Pfal. 33. 7. He gather-
eth the waters of the Sea, as in a Bagg: He layeth up the
Abyſſes in ſtore-bouſes. But, he ſays, it ſhould be ren-
der'd, as on a heap: which is the Engliſh Tranſlation.
Whether the Authorities produc’d, in this caſe, by the
Theoriſt *, or by the Excepter, are more conſiderable, * Eng.Thear.
I leave the Reader to judge. But however, he cites p.&c.
another place, Pſal. 78. 13. where the ſame word is
us’d and apply'd to the Red-Sea, which could not be
enclos'd as in a bag. Take whether Tranſlation you
pleaſe for this ſecond place; it is no prejudice to the
Theory, if you render it on an beap: for it was a
thing done by Miracle. But the other place ſpeaks of
the ordinary poſture and conſtitution of the waters,
which is not on a beap, but in a level or ſpherical con-
vexity with the reſt of the Earth. This reaſon the
Animadverter was not pleas'd to take notice of, tho
it be intimated in that ſame place of the Theory which
he
quotes. But that which I might complain of moſt,
is his unfair citation of the next Paragraph of the
Theory, which he applies peculiarly to this Text of Excep.p.144
Pfal.33.7. whereas it belongs to all the Texts alledg’d
out of the Pſalms, and is a modeſt reflection upon the
explication of them. As the Reader may plainly ſee,
if he pleaſc to look the Theory, and compare it with
his citation
The
P. 8C
22
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
i
P. 141.
The next place he attacks, is, fob 26.7. He ſtretches
the North over the Tohu, or, as we render it, over the
empty places: and hangeth the Earth upon nothing. Here
he ſays, Job did either accommodate himſelf to the
vulgar, or elſe was a perfect Platoniſt. Methinks Plato
ſhould rather be a fobijt, if you will have them to
imitate one another. Then he makes an Objection,
and anſwers it himſelf : Concluding however, that
Fob could not but mean this of the preſent Earth,
becauſe in the next Verſe he mentions Clouds. But
how does it appear, that every thing that fob menti-
ons in that Chapter, refers to the ſame time.
The next place, is, Job 38. 4, 5, 6. Where waſt thou
when I laid the foundations of the Earth, &c. Theſe clo-
quent expoftulations of the Almighty, he applies all to
the preſent Form of the Earth : where he ſays, there
are the Emboſſings of Mountains, the Enamelling of leſſer
Seas, the open-work of the vaſt Ocean,and the Fret-work of
Rocks, &c. Theſe make a great noiſe, but they might
all be apply'd to the ruines of an old Bridge, fallen
into the water. Then he makes a large harangue in
commendation of Mountains and of the preſent Forni
of the Earth: which, if you pleaſe, you may compare
with the 10th. Chap. of the Latin Theory, and then make
your judgment upon both.
But it is not enough for the Excepter to admire the
P. 146. beauty of Mountains, but he will make the Theoriſt
to do ſo too, becauſe he hath expreſt himſelf much
pleas'd with the ſight of them. Can we be pleas’d
with nothing in an object, but the beauty of it does
not the Theoriſt ſay there, in the very words cited by
the Excepter,Sæpe loci ipſius inſolentia do Spectaculorum
novitas dele&tat magis quàm venuſtas in rebus notis &
communibus. We are pleas’d in looking upon the Ru-
ines of a Roman Amphitheater,or a Triumphal Arch,
tho' time have defac'd its beauty. A man may be
pleas’d in looking upona Monſter, will you conclude
therefore that he takes it for a beauty? There are
many things in objects beſides beauty, that may
pleaſe: but he that hath not fence and judgnient e-
nough to ſec the difference of thoſe caſes, and whence
the pleaſure ariſes,it would be very tedious to beat it
into him by multitude of words.
After
The Theory of the Earth.
23
3
o
After his commendation of Mountains, he falls up.
on the commendation of Rain: making thoſe Coun-
tries, that enjoy it, to be better water'd than by Ri-
vers; and conſequently the preſent Earth better than
that Paradiſiacal Earth deſcrib'd by the Theoriſt.
And in this he ſays, he follows the rule of Scripture,
for theſe are his words. And that theſe rules whereby p. 148!
we meaſure the uſefulneſs of this Earth, and shem it to
be more excellent than that of the Theory ; are the moſt
true and proper rules: is manifeſt from God's making
uſe of the ſame, in a caſe not unlike : For he comparing
Egypt and Paleſtine, prefers the later before the former ;
becauſe in Egypt the Seed ſomn was watered with the
foot, as a Garden of herbs; but Paleſtine was a Land
of Hills and Valley's, and drank water of the rain of
Heaven, Deut. II. 10, 11.
Let this reſt a while. In the mean time let us take
notice how unluckily it falls out for the Obſervator,
that a Country, that had no rain, ſhould be compared
in Scripture, or joyn'd in priviledge, with Paradiſo
it felf, and the Garden of God. For ſo is this very
Ægypt, Gen. 13. 10. tho'it had no rain, but was wa-
ter'd by Rivers. The words of Scripture are theſe.
And Lot lifted up his eyes, and beheld all the plain of 7o
dan, that it was well watered every where , ( before the
Lord deſtroyed Sodom and Gomorrha ) even as the Garden
of the Lord, like the land of Agypt. The Plain of
Jordan you ſee is commended for its fruitfulneſs and
being well watered: and as the height of its com-
mendation, it is compar’d with Ægypt, and with the
Paradiſe of God. Now in Ægypt we know there was
liccle or no rain : and we read of none in Paradiſe:
but they were both water'd by Rivers. Therefore
the greateſt commendation of a Land, for pleaſure
and fertility, according to Scripture, is its being well
water'd with Rivers: which makes it like a paradiſe.
Surely then you cannot blame the Theoriſt, having
this authority beſides all other reaſons, for making
the Paradiſiacal Earth to have been thus water'd.
Now let the Excepter conſider how he will inter-
pret and apply his place in Deuteronomy, and make it
conſiſtent with this in Geneſis. Till I ſee a better Inter-
Gemelos
pretation,
24
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
p. 149.
pretation, I like this very well, tho' quite contrary
to his: Namely, That they were not to expect
ſuch a Land as Ægypt, that was a Plain naturally fruit-
full, as being well water'd; But the Land they were
to poſſeſs
, depended upon the benediction of Heaven:
And therefore they might expect more or leſs fertility,
according as they kept God's Commandments. And
ſo much for thoſe two texts of Scripture.
Laſtly, The Excepter in the concluſion of his dil
courſe about that place in Job, makes a reflection
upon the impropriety of thoſe expreflions in Job,
about Foundations and Corner-ſtones, if they be apply'd
to the firſt Earth deſcrib’d by the Theoriſt. But this
ſeems to me an Elegancy in that diſcourſe, which he
makes a fault: whether it be underſtood as an Al-
luſion only to our manner of building, by deep
Foundations, and ſtrong Corner-ſtones: Or an Iro.
nical interrogation, as it ſeems to me; implying, that
there was no Foundation, (ſtrictly ſo callid ) nor
Corner-ſtone, in that great Work, tho’ we cannot
build a cottage or little bridge without ſuch prepa-
rations.
He proceeds then to the following verſes in that
38th chap. Who ſhut up the Sea with doors, when it
broke forth as if it had iſſued out of a Womb? This the
Theoriſt underſtands of the Diſruption of the Abyſs at
the Deluge, when the Sea broke forth out of the womb
of the Earth : or out of that ſubterraneous cavity,
where it was encloſed as in a womb. 'Tis plainly
imply'd in the words of the Text, That the Sea was
ſhut up in ſome Womb, before it broke forth. I deſire
therefore to know in what Womb that was. You will
find Interpreters much at a loſs to give a fair anſwer
to that queſtion: What was that inclos’d ſtate of
the Sea ? and what place, or part of Nature, was that
Receptacle where it lay? But the Excepter hath found
out a new anſwer. He ſays it was that Womb of non-
entity. Theſe are his words, It juſt then ( at its crea-
tion ) guſhed out of the womb of nothing, into exiſtence.
This is a ſubtle and far-fetcht notion. Mechinks the
Womb of nothing, is much what the ſame as no Womb.
And ſo this is no anſwer. But however let us confi-
der
1
I be Theory of the Earth.
25
1
der how far it would ſuit this caſe, if it was admit-
ied. If you underſtand the Womb of Non-entity, the Gen. 1. 2.
Sea broke out of that womb the firit day, and had
no bars or doors ſet to it, but flow'd over all chie
Earth without check or controul. Therefore that
could not be the time or ſtate here ſpoken of. And
to refer that reſtraint, or thoſe bars and doors, to
another time, which are ſpoken of here in the ſame
verſe, would be very inexcuſable in the Excepter :
Seeing he will not allow the Theoriſt to ſuppoſe thoſe p. 150.
things that are ſpoken of in different verſes, to be un-
derſtood of different times. To conclude, this Mc-
taphyſical notion of the Womb of nothing, is altogether
impertinent, at least in this caſe : For the Text is
plainly ſpeaking of things Local and Corporeal, and
chis priſon of the Sea muſt be underſtood as ſuch.
He proceeds now to the laſt place alledg’d, Prov.8.
27, 28. When he prepared the Heavens, I was there :
when he ſet a Compaſs upon the face of the deep. The
word in which we render compaſs, he ſays, ſignifies
no more than the rotundity or ſpherical figure of the
Abyſs. And ſo the fence will run chus, When God ſet
a rotundity, or ſpherical figure, upon the face of ihe
Abyſs. But whereas the word may as well ſignifie a
Sphere or Orb, the Theoriſt thinks it more reaſonable
that it ſhould be ſo translated : and ſo the ſentence
would run thus, When God ſet an Orb upon the face of
the Deep. And this diſcourſe of Solomon's, referring to
the beginning of the World, he thinks it rational to
underſtand it of the firſt habitable Earth : which was
really an Orb ſet over the face of the Deep.
One cannot ſwear for the ſignification of a word
in
every particular place, where it occurs: but when
there are two ſences whereof it is capable, and the
one is much more important than the other, it is a
fair preſumption to take it in the more important
fence; eſpecially in ſuch a place, and upon fuch an
occaſion, where the great works of the Divine Wif-
don and Power are celebrated : as they are here
by Solomon. And it cannot be deny’d, that our ſence
of the words is more important than the other :
For of what conſequence iś ic to ſay, God made the
D 2
Roly
26
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
p. 143.
Body of the Abyſs round. Every one knows that Fluids
of their own accord run into that figure. So as that
would be a ſmall remark upon a great occaſion.
The conſtruction of this Orb we ſpeak of, minds
me of an injuſtice which the Excepter hath done the
Theory, in the precedent part of this Chapter, by'à
falſe accuſation. For he ſays, The Theory makes che
conſtruction of the firſt Earth to have been meerly
Mechanical. At leaſt his words ſeem to ſignifie as
much, which are theſe. And ſo its Formation, ſpeak-
ing of the firſt Earth, had been meerly Mechanical, ds
the Theory makes it. That the conſtruction was not
meerly Mechanical; in the opinion of the Theorilt,
you may ſee, Eng. Theor. P:65. which, becauſe wc
have cited it before, we will not here repeat." The
Theoriſt might alſo complain that the Excepter cires
the firſt Edition of the Theory for ſuch things as are
left out in the ſecond : which yet was printed a twelve-
month before his Animadverſions. And therefore
in fairneſs he ought always to have conſulted the
laſt Edition and laſt ſence of the Author, before he
had cenſured hirm or his work. But this unfair mine-
thod, it ſeems, pleas’d his humour better : as you may
ſee in this Chapter, (p.154.) and in ſeveral other plá-
lait part. ces; where paſſages are cited and inſiſted upon, that
are no where to be found in the ſecond Edition. Not
to mention his defective citations; omitting that part
p. 279, 280. chat qualifies the ſentence, as p. 99. laſt citation, and
elſe-where. I make this note that the Reader may
judge, how well this anſwers that ſincerity,with which
he profeſt he would examine this work. Only as a
friend and ſervant to Truth. And therefore with ſuch
Candour, Meekneſs and Modeſty, as becomes one who al-
ſumes and glories in ſo fair a Character, p.43.
The reſt of this Chapter is a general Cenſure of
citations out of Scripture, that are only Tropi-
cal or Figurative Scheams of Speech. Theſe muſt
be made ſo indeed, if our fence of them be not al-
low’d. But what neceſſity is there of a figurative in-
terprecation of all theſe Texts? The rule we go by,
and Ithink all good Interpreters, is this, That we are
not to leave the literal ſence, unleſs there be a neceſſicy
froni
p. 81
p. 154.
p. 227, 228.
P. 244.
p. 288.
The Theory of the Earth.
27
from the ſubject matter. And there is no ſuch neceſ-
ſity in this caſe, upon our Hypotheſis: for it ſuits
with the literal ſence. And 'tis to beg the Que-
ſtion, to ſay the literal ſence is not to be admitted,
becauſe it complies too much with the Theory. But
as for that Text of his own, which he inſtances in, the
Pillars of the Earth tremble, that cannot be underſtoo
(by the ſame Rule) of Pillars literally ; becauſe there
are no ſuch Pillars of the Earth, upon any Hypo-
theſis.
CHA P. VIII.
1
1
T!
HIS Chapter is concerning that grand property
of the Antediluvian Earth, a.perpetual Equinox,
or a Right poſition to the Sun. This perpetual Equi-
nox the Excepter will by no means admit. But I'me
afraid he miſtakes the notion: for as he explains it in
the two firſt Sections of this Chapter, hre ſeems to have
a falſe Idea of the whole matter. He thinks, I perceive,
that wlien the Earth chang’d its ſituation, it was tran-
flated from the Equator into the Ecliptick: and that
before that change, in the Antediluvian ſtate, it mov'd
directly under the Equator. For theſe are his words,
So that in her Annual motion about the Sun, namely, the p. 158.
Earth before that change, she was carried dire&tly un.
der tlse Equinofial: without any manner of obliquity in
herfite, or declination towards either of the Tropicks, in
her courſe ; And therefore could never cut the Equinoctial,
by paſſing ( as now she is prefumd to do ) from one Tropick
to the other. By which words, you ſee, he imagines
that the Earth mov'd perpetually under the Equator,
when it had a perpetual Equinox. And when it came
out of that ſtate, into this wherein it is now, it did
not only change ics 'poſition, and the poſture of its
Axis, but was alſo really tranſlated from one part of
the Heavens into Another: namely, from under the
Equator to the Ecliptick, and fo took another road
in its annual courfe about the Sun. This is a great
miſtake: And I cannot blame him, if he was ſo averſo
to admit this change, ſeeing it lay fo croſs in his ima-
gination. For what Pullies or Leavers ſhould we em-
plor
28 An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
never
15. 1.C. 4.
1
p. 159.
ploy to remove the Earth out of the Equator into the
Ecliptick ? Archimedes pretended, if he had ground to
plant his Engines upon, that he would move the Earth
out of its place; but that it was done before,
Lat. Their. knew, nor heard of: And if the Excepter had conſi-
der'd what is ſaid in the Theory upon that occaſion,
he might eaſily have prevented his miſtake. But we
ſhall meet with the ſame Errour again in another
place; Let us conſider now what Arguments heuſes
againſt this change.
He ſays, If there had been ſuch a change, either Pro-
vidence or Mankind would have preſerv'd the memo-
ry of it. How far the memory of it hath been pre-
ſérv’d, we ſhall ſee hereafter. In the mean time, we
will give him inſtances of other things to reflect upon,
that are loſt out of memory, unleſs he be the happy
Man that ſhall retrieve them. The Age of the World
hath not been preſerv'd, either by the memory of
Man, or by the care of Providence. And was not
that both a thing of importance, and of eaſie preſer.
vation? Noah could not but know the Age of the
World, for he was contemporary with five or ſix Ge-
nerations, that were contemporary with Adam. And
knowing the Age of the World himſelf
, he could not
eaſily forbear, one would think, to tell it to his Sons
and Poſterity. But to this day, we do not know what
the true Age of the World is. There are three Bibles,
if I may ſo ſay, or three Pentateuchs, the Hebrew, Sama-
ritan, and Greek: which do all differ very conſider-
ably in their accounts, concerning the Age of the
World : and the moſt Learned men are not yet able
to determine with certainty, which of the three ac-
counts is moſt authentick. Then; what think you of
the place of Paradiſe? How well is the memory or
knowledge of that preſerv'd? Could Noah be igno-
rant of it: and was it not a fit ſubject to diſcourſe of,
and entertain his Sons and Nephews, and by them to
communicate ic to Pofterity? Yet we ſeek it ſtill in
vain. The Jews were as much at a loſs as we are:
P.263,264, and the Chriſtian Fathers, you think, were out in their
opinions, both about the place and conditions of it :
ncither do you venture to determine them your ſelf:
ſo
265.
The Theory of the Earth.
!
29
ſo that Paradiſe is loſt in a manner out of the world.
What wonder then if this ſingle property of it be loſt?
If the Excepter had well conſider'd what the Theoriſt Eng. Theor.
has ſaid concerning the Providential conduct ofp. 286,287.
knowledge in the World, this doubt or objection
might have been ſpar'd.
After a long excurſion, little to the purpoſe, but to
ſhow bis reading : He tells us next, that Scripture does p. 166
not favour this notion of a perpetual Equinox before
the Flood : And cites Gen. 8.22. which the Theoriſt
had cited as a place that did ſuggeſt to us that vicif-
ſitude of Sealons that was cſtabliſht after the Flood.
The words indeed are not ſo determinate in them-
ſelves, but that they may be underſtood, either of the
reſtauration of a former order in the Seaſons of the
Year, or of the eſtabliſhment of a new one. And in
whether ſence they are to becaken, is to be determin'd
bv collateral Reaſons and Conſiderations. Such the
Theoriſt had ſex down, to make ic probable, that they
ought to be underſtood as a Declaration of ſuch an
Order for the Seaſons of the Year, as was brought in
at that time, and was to continue to the end of the
World. The Excepter hath nor thought fit to take
notice of, or refute, thoſe Reaſons, and therefore they
ſtand good, as formerly. Beſides, the Excepter muſt
remember that this Text ſtands betwixt two remark-
able Phänomena, the Longevity of the Antediluvians
in the old World, and the appearance of the Rainbow
in the New. Both which were marks of a different
ſtate of nature in the two Worlds.
He further excepts againſt that perpetual Equinox p. 168.
before the Flood, for another Scripture-reaſon: Viz.
Becauſe the Earth was curſt before that time,and con-
ſequently, he ſays, had not a perpetual Equinox. But
if that curſe was ſupernatural, it might have its effect
in any poſition of the Earth. For God can make a
Land barren, if he think fit, in ſpite of the courſe of
Nature. And ſo he alſo muſt ſuppoſe it to have been
in this caſe. For, upon all ſuppoſitions, whether of a
perpetual Equinox, or 110,the Earth is granted to have
been very fruitful at firſt: and ſo would have conti-
nued, if that curſe had not interven'd.
Laſtly
2
30 An Anſwer to the late Exceptios irade againſt
p. 169,
D. TO,
Commotions
Laſtly, He makes that an argument, that the Air
was cold and intemperate in Paradiſe, and conſequenc-
ly no conſtant Equinox, becauſe Adam and Eve made
themſelves Aprons to cover their nakedneſs
. So, hecon-
feſſes, Interpreters generally underſtand that it was to
cover their nakedneſs. But he will not allow that to
be the tre ſence, but ſays thoſe Fig-leaves were to
keep them warm. And the other Interpretation of
covering their nakedneſs, he will not admit, for three
reaſons. Firſt becauſe the Scripture, as he pretends,
does not declare it ſo. See, pray, Gen. 3. 7. Secondly,
What ſhame, ſays be, need there have been betwixt Hul-
band and Wife? Thirdly, if it was modeſty; when they
mere innocent, they Jhould have been more modeſt. Some
arguments anſwer themſelves, and I do not think theſe
deſerve a confutation. But, he ſays, however God
made them Coats of Skins afterwards, and that was to
be a defence againſt cold. He muſt tell us in what Cli
mate he ſuppoſes Paradiſe to have ſtood: and which
way, and how far, Adam and Eve were bani!ht from it.
When thoſe things are determin'd, we ſhall know what
to judge of his argument, and of Coats of Skins.
After Laſtly, I expected no more: but he hath rwó
or three reaſons after the Laſt. As firſt, he ſays, upon
our Hypotheſis, one Hemiſphere of the Globe mult
have been unpeopled: becauſe the Torrid Zone was
anpaſſable. And was not the Ocean as unpaſſable,
upon your Hypotheſis? How got they into America ?
and not only into America, but into all the INands of
the Earth, that are remote from Continents. Will
you not allow us one Miracle, for your many ? I'me
ſure the Theoriſt never excluded the Miniſtery of An.
gels? and They could as caſily carry them thorough
the Torrid Zone, as over the Ocean. But Secondly,
he ſays, There could be no Rains, to make the Flood,
if there was a perpecual Equinox. Were not thole
rains that made the Flood, extraordinary, and out of
the courſe of Nature ? you would give one angry
words that ſhould deny ir. Beſides, the Flood-gates of
Heaven were open'd when the Great Deep was broken
up, (Gen. 7. 11.) and no wonder the Diſruption of the
om 171
Eng. Theor.
p. 99.
13
The Theory of the Earth.
31
in the air: and either compreſs the vapours, or ſtop
their uſual courſe towards the Poles, and draw them
down in ſtreams upon ſeveral parts of the Earth.
But the Excepter ſays, this could not be, becauſe the
Theoriſt makes the rains fall before the diſruption of
the Abyſs. But he does not ſuppoſe the Cataracts of
Heaven to have been open'd before, which made the
grand rains. And how unfairly that paſſage of the
Theory is repreſented, we ſhall ſee hereafter in the
14th. Chapeer.
Laſtly, He concludes all with this remark: That p. 176
all ſorts of Authors have diſputed, in what ſeaſon of
the Year the Deluge came, and in what ſeaſon of the
Year the World began: therefore they thought there
were then different ſeaſons of the Year. Theſe di-
pures, he confeſſes, did manifeſtly proceed from inad-
vertency, or ſomething worſe: Becauſe there could
not be any one ſeaſon throughout all the Earth at
once. He might have added, unleſs upon the ſup-
oſition of the Theory, which makes an univerſal
Equinox at that time. And why may not that have
given occaſion to the general belief, that the world
begun in the Spring and when the true reaſon of the
Tradition was loſt, they fell into thoſe impertinent
queſtions, In what ſeaſon of the Year the World began.
But however we do not depend upon the belief, ei-
ther of the Ancients or the Moderns, as to the gene-
rality : for we know they had other notions of theſe
things than what the Theory propoſes; otherwiſe it
would have been a needleſs work. But notwithſtand-
ing the general error, that Providence did preſerve
ſome Traditions and Teſtimonies concerning that an-
ciene Truch, we ſhall ſee in the nexo following diſcourſe.
So much for Scripture and Reaſons. He now
comes to examine Authorities : Namely fuch Teſti-
monies as are alledg’d by the Theoriſt, to ſhew that
there was a Tradition amongſt the Ancients, of a
change that had been, as to the poſition of the Earth:
and conſequently, as to the form and ſeaſons of the
Year. The firſt Teſtimony that he excepts againſt is
that of Diogenes and Anaxagoras ; who witneſs plainly, porn
That there had been an Inclination of the Earth, or a
E
change
32
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
p. 178.
17. 180.
change of poſture, ſince it was form’d and inhabited,
But the Excepcer ſays they have not allign'd a true fi-
nal cauſe, nor ſuch as agrees with the Theory. The
ſecond Teſtimony is chat of Empedocles, which he ex-
cepts againſt, becauſe he hath not given a good Eficieni
p. 179. Cauſe of that change. The third witneſs is Leucippus.
againſt whom he makes the ſame exception, that he
does not aſſign the Cauſes a-right. The fourth witneſs
is Democritus : whom he quarrels upon the ſame ac-
count. But is this a fair hearing of Witneſſes? Or are
theſe juſt and legal grounds of rejecting their teſtimo-
ny, as to matter of Fact, becauſe they are unskilful in
giving the cauſes and reaſons of that matter of Fact?
That is not requir'd in witneſſes: and they are often
impertinent when they attempt to do it. The Theoriſt
does not cite theſe Authors to learn of them che cau-
ſes either Efficient or Final, of that Inclination, or
change of poſture in the Earth, but only matter of
Fact. To let you ſee, that, according to their reſti-
mony, there was a Tradition in that time, which
they took for true, concerning a change made in
the poſture of the Earth. And this is all we require
from them. If you pretend to invalidate their teſti-
mony, becauſe they do not Philoſophize well about
that change: That's as if you ſhould deny that there
was ſuch a War as the Peloponneſian war, becauſe
the Hiſtorian hath not aſſigned the true cauſes and
reaſons of it. Or as if a man ſhould give you the
hiſtory of a Comet, that appear'd in ſuch a year, was
of ſuch a form, and took ſuch a courſe in the Hea-
vens; and you ſhould deny there was any ſuch Comet,
becauſe the ſame Author had not given a good ac-
count of the generation of that Comet, nor of the
Cauſes of its form and motion. The exceptions made
againſt the teſtimonies of theſe Philoſophers, ſeem to
me to be no leſs injudicious.
After theſe Teſtimonies, He makes three or four
remarks or reflections upon them. But they all con-
cern,either the time of this Change,or the Cauſes of it.
Neither of which the Theoriſt either engag’d or in-
tended to prove from theſe Witneſſes.
[131.
Thiere
The Theory of the Earth.
33
1
There is ſțill one Teſtimony behind, which the Ex- p. 182.
cepter hath ſeparated from the reſt, that he might en-
counter it ſingly. Tis another paſſage from Anaxa-
goras, which both notes this Inclination, and the
po-
ilure of the Heavens and Earth before that Inclination,
But here the Excepter quarrels, firſt, with the word
Jonoeda : becauſe Ambroſius the Monk, would have it
to be gonepūs but without the Authority of any Ma-
nuſcript: and, as Caſaubon ſays, malé. Then, he ſays, Al-
dobrandinus tranilates it turbulentè, but gives no reaſon
for that tranſlation, in bis notes. Therefore he can-
not reſt in this, but in the third place, he gives ano-
ther ſence to poea Soroadí.. And if that will not pleaſe
you, he has ſtill a fourclı anſwer in reſerve. I do not
like when a man ſhifts anſwers ſo often, 'tis a ſign he
has no great confidence in any one. But let us have
his fourth anſwer, 'Tis this, Thac Anaxagoras was a
kind of heterodox Philoſopher, and what he ſays is
not much to be heeded. There are the words of the
Excepter. If this will not ſatisfie, 1 have one thing more p. 184.
to offer. Grant that Anaxagoras ſhould mean that very
Declination, which the Theory would have him, yet this
truly would contribute little towards the proof of the thing.
For he was a man as like to be Heterodox, as like to
broach and maintain falſe and groundleſs opinions, as any
of the learned Ancients. Had he made this exception
againſt this witneſs at firſt, it might have fav’d both
himſelf and us a great deal of pains. For we do al-
low, if you can prove a witneſs to be perſona infamis,
or non compos mentis, 'tis ſufficient to invalidate his
Teſtimony.
But this is a rude and groundleſs cenſure ; Shall
that famous Anaxagoras, that was call’d MENS, xar
oglus, not be thought ſo much as mentis compos? nor
have credit enough for an honeſt witneſs: I am apt
to think, from thoſe ſentences, and thoſe remains we
have left of him, that there was not a more conſider-
able man amongſt the Ancients, for nobleneſs of mind
and natural knowledg. I could bring the teſtimonies
of many ancient Authors, and of many Chriſtian fa-
thers, to clear his reputation, and place it above envy.
'Tis generally acknowledg’d, that he firſt introduc'd
E 2
an
34 An Anſwer to the late Exceptions wade againſt
And ac-
ch.14.p.750.
an intellectual principle, in the formation of the Uni-
verſe: to diſpoſe and order confus'd matter.
Prap. Evan. cordingly Euſebius gives him this fair character, &C.
1.10.6. melti dà spor & Simpspwoe, &c. He firſt rectified the doctrine of
Principles: For he did not only diſcourſe about the matter
or ſubſtance of the Univerſe, as other Philoſophers: but
alſo of the cauſe and principle of its motion. And the
ſame Author, in his 14th Book, repeats and enlarges
this character.
I wonder, the Excepter, of all men, ſhould leſſen
the name of Anaxagoras. For, beſides bis Orthodoxy
as to the intellectual World: He was one that eſta-
blith'd the notion of Vortices, in the Corporeal. As
Scrom. 2. p. you may ſee in Clem. Alexandrinus, and in Plato's Pha-
Phed. p. 99. do. And tho' the Father, and Socrates, (who never
was a friend to natural Philoſophy ) both blame him
for it; yet the excepter, who is deſervedly pleas'd with
that Syſteme of Vortices, ought to have ſhew'd bini
ſome favour and eſteem for the ſake of this doctrine.
Laſtly, as to his moral temper; his contempt of the
World, and his love of contemplation; you have
many inſtances of it in the ſhort ſtory of his life in La-
ertius. And I ſhall always remember that excellent
Strom. 2. p. ſaying of his in Clem. Alexandrinus, Tles Jewelær rõ Bisté-
2@ ), xj * CTÒ taútns éneu Dieiar, That the end of life is
Contemplation; and that liberty, that accompanies it, or
flows from it.
But we are not to imagine, that all the opinions of
the ancient Philoſophers, are truly conveyed or re-
preſented to us. Neither can we in reaſon or juſtice
believe, that they could be guilty of ſuch abſurd no-
tions, as are ſometimes fathered upon them. The Ex-
cepter inſtances in an extravagant aſſertion, ( as the
ſtory is told to us ) aſcrib’d to Anaxagoras: of a ſtone
that fell from the Sun. This cannot be literally true,
nor literally the opinion of Anaxagoras, if he believ'd
Vortices; therefore methinks ſo wicty a man as the Ex-
cepter, and ſo well vers’d in the modern Philoſophy,
ſhould rather interpret this of the Incruſtation of a
fixt Star, and its deſcent into the lower World: That
a Star fell from the Ethereal regions, and became an
Opake and Terreſtrial Body. Eſpecially ſeeing Diogenes,
416.
as
The Theory of the Earth.
35
as he ſays, ſuppoſes it a Star. Some things were ænig-
matically ſpoken at firſt: and ſome things afterwards
ſo much corrupted, in paſſing thorough unskilful
hands, that we ſhould be very injurious to the me-
mory of thoſe great Men, if we ſhould ſuppoſe every
thing to have come ſo crudely from them, as it is now
deliver'd to us. And as to this Philoſopher in parti-
cular; As che Ionick Phyſiology, in my opinion, was
the moſt conſiderable amongſt the Ancients; ſo there
was none, of that order, more conſiderable than Anax-
agoras. Whom, tho' you ſhould ſuppoſe extravagant,
quoad boc, that would not invalidate his teſtimony in
other things.
Upon the whole matter, let us now ſumm up the
Evidence, and ſee what it will amount to. Here are
five or fix Teſtimonies of conſiderable Philoſophers :
Anaxagoras, Diogenes, Empedocles, Leucippus and Demo-
critus. To which he might have added Plato, both in
his Politicus and Phædo, if he had pleas'd to have lookt Li.2.c. 10.
into the 2d. Edition of the Latin Theory. Theſe Phi- P. 274-
loſophers do all make mention of a change that hath
been in the poſture of the Earth and the Heavens.
And tho' they differ in aſſigning cauſes, or other cir-
cumſtances, yet they all agree as to matter of Fact:
that there was ſuch a thing, or, at leaſt, a Tradition
of ſuch a thing. And this is all that the Defendant
deſir'd or intended to prove from them, as Witneſſes
in this cauſe.
To theſe Philoſophers, he might have added the Te-
ſtimonies of the Poets, who may be admitted as wit-
neſſes of a Tradition,though it be further queſtioned,
whether that Tradition be true or falſe. Theſe Poets
when they ſpeak of a Golden Age, or the Reign of Sa.
turn, tell us of a perpetual Spring, or a Year without
change of Seaſons. This is exprefly ſaid by Ovid, Ver
erat Æternum, &c. And upon the expiration of the
Golden Age, he ſays,
Jupiter Antiqui contraxit tempora Veris,
Perque Hyemes, Aftuſque, Ginæquales Autuminos,
Et breve Ver, ſpatiis exegit quattuor annum.
Ovid
36
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
Ovid liv'd in the time of our Saviour. And the Tra-
dition, it ſeems, was then a foor, and very expreſs too.
Plato, who was much more ancient, hach ſaid the ſame
thing, in his Politicus, concerning the Reign of Saturn.
Vid. Theor. And if we may have any regard to Mythology, and
6. 10. in fine. make Janus the ſame with Noah, which is now an O-
pinion generally receiv’d: That power that is given
him by the Ancients, of changing Times and Seaſons
,
,
cannot be better expounded,than by that great change
of time, and of the Seaſons of the Year, that happen'd
in the Days of Noah. Neither mult we count it a meer
Fable, what is ſaid by the Ancients, concerning the In-
habitability of the Torrid Zone : and yet that never
was, if the Earth was never in any other poſture, than
what it is in now.
Laſtly, As the Philoſophers and Poets are witneſſes
of this Tradition, ſo many of the Chriſtian Fathers
have given ſuch a Character of Paradiſe, as cannot be
underſtood upon any other ſuppo-
*
Accedit ad hæc, quòd Paradifice ita fition, than of a Perpetual Equinox.
deſcribitur a Sanct Baſilio, in Libro This Card. Bellarmine * hath noted
de Paradiſo; à Joan.Damaſceno Libro
fecundo, de fide, capite undecimo to our hands; and alſo obſerv’d,
Sancto Auguſtino libro decimo quarto
that there could not be a perpetual
de civitate Dei,capit.10. Ab Alchimo,
Avito,om Cland. Mario vičtore, aliis Equinox in the Countries of Aſia,
ſuprà citatis. Ifidoro libro decimo quar-
10 Etymolog.capite tertio, ( alius com nor indeed in any Topical Paradiſe,
muniter ; ut fuerit in eo ver perpetu- (unleſs it ſtood in the middle of the
um, nulla frigora, nulli aftus,nulle plu-
viæ, nives, grandines, nulla etiam nu Torrid Zone) niſi alius tunc fuerit
bes; quod ipfum fignificat feription curſus ſolis, quàm nunc eft ; unleſs the
fuiffe nudos.
courſe of the Sun, or, which is allone,
the poſture of the Earth, was otherwiſe at that time,
than what it is now: which is a true obſervation. The
Jewiſh Doctors alſo, as well as the Chriſtian, ſecni to
See Eng. go upon the ſame ſuppoſition, when they place Para-
diſe under the Equinoctial; Becauſe they ſuppos'd it
certain, as Aben Ezra tells us that the Days and Nights
were always equal in Paradiſe.
We have now done with the examination of Wit-
neſſes: Philoſophers, Poets, Jews, and Chriſtians. From
all theſe we collect, That there was an opinion, or
Tradition, amongſt the Ancients, of a change made in
the ſtate of the Natural World, as to the diverſity of
Seaſons in the Year: And that this did ariſe from the
change
j
Theor.
p. 253.
The Theory of the Earth.
37
change of the poſture of the Earth. Whether this
Opinion, or this Tradition, was de jure, as well as de
fa&to, is a queſtion of another nature, that did not lie
before us at preſent. But the thing that was only
in debate in this Chapter, was macter of Fact, which
think we have ſufficiently prov’d.
In the cloſe of this Chapter, The Excepter makes
two Queries : ftill by way of objection to the Ante-
diluvian Equinox. The Firſt is this, Suppoſing an Equi- p.185
nox in the beginning of the World, would it ( in likely-
hood) have continued to the Flood. If you grant the
firſt part, I believe few will ſcruple the ſecond. For
why ſhould we ſuppoſe a change before there appear
any cauſe for it. He ſays, the Waters might poſſibly
have weigh'd more towards one Pole, than towards
another. But why the Waters more than the Air
The Waters were not more rarified towards one Pole,
than towards another, no more than the Air was:
for which the Excepter had juſtly blam’d Leucippus p. 183.
before. But however, ſays He, that Earth would be
very unſtable, becauſe
, in proceſs of time, there would
be an empty ſpace betwixt the Exterior Region of the
Earth, and the Abyſs below. But that empty ſpace
would be fill’d with ſuch groſs vapors, that it would
be liccle purer than water: and would ſtick to the
Earth much cloſer than its Atmoſphere that is carried
about with it. We have no realon to change the po-
Kure of the Earth, till we ſee ſome antecedent change
that may be a cauſe of it. And we ſee not any, till
the Earth broke. But then indeed, whether its po-
ſture depended barely upon its Æquilibrium, or upon
its magnetiſme, either, or both of them, when its parts
were thrown into another ſituation, might be chang’d.
For the parts of a ruine ſeldom lie in the ſame libra.
tion the Fabrick ſtood in. And as to the magnetiſme
of the Earth, that would change, according as the
Parts, and Regions of the Earth chang'd their fi-
tuation.
The ſecond Query is this. Granting there was ſuch
an Equinox in the firſt World, Would not the natural
day, towards the later end of that World, have been longer,
than in the former periods of the ſame. Suppoſe this was
p. 1871
(rule
S
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
2.835.
true, which yet we have no reaſon to believe, That
the Days were longer towards the flood, than towards
the beginning of the World: why is this contrary to
Scripture? He tells you how, in theſe words. That
the days juſt before the flood were of no unuſual length,
is evident in the very ſtory of the Flood; the duration of
which we find computed by Months, conſiſting of thirty days
a-piece. Whereas had days been grown longer, fewer of
them would have made a Month. This is a meer Para. .
logiſme, or a meer blunder. For if chirty days were
to go to a Month, whether the days were longer or
ſhorter, there muſt be thirty of them; and the Scri-
pture does not determine the length of the days. If
thirty circumgyrations of the Earth make a Month,
whether theſe circumgyrations are ſlow or ſwift, thir-
ty are ſtill thirty. But I ſuppoſe that which he would
have ſaid, and which he had confuſedly in his mind,
was this, That the Month would have been longer at
the Flood than it was before. Longer, I ſay, as to ex-
tent of time, or duration in general, but not as to
number of days. And you could not cut off a ſlip
of one day, and tack it to the next, through the in-
cermediate Night, to make an abridgment of the
whole. Therefore this Objection is grounded upon
a miſtake, and ill reaſoning, which is now ſufficiently
detected.
CHAP. IX.
p. 189
'
TH
HIS Chapter is againſt the Oval Figure of the
firſt Earth: which the Theoriſt had aſſerted, and
grounded upon a general motion of the Waters, forc'd
from the Equinoctial Parts towards the Polar. Buc
before we proceed to his Objections againſt this Ex-
plication, we muſt rectifie one Principle. The Excep-
ter ſeems to ſuppoſe, that Terreſtrial Bodies have a
8.190: nitency inwards or downwards, towards their Central point.
Whereas the Theoriſt ſuppoſes, that all Bodies moving
round, have, more or leſs, a nitency from the Center
of their motion: and that 'tis by an external force
that they are preſt down, againſt their firſt inclination
or nitency
This
The Theory of the Earth.
399
1
í
1
p. 186
This being premis’d, we proceed to his exceptions :
where his firſt and grand quarrel is about the uſe of
a word: whether the motion of the Water from the
middle of the Earth towards the Poles, can be callid
de fluxus. Seeing thoſe Polar Parts, in this ſuppos'd
cale, were as high, or higher than the Equinoctial
. I
think we do not ſcruple to ſay, undæ defluunt ad li-
tora: cho' the ſhores be as high, or higher than the
Surface of the Sea. For we often reſpect, as the The-
oriſt did, the middle and the ſides, in the uſe of that
word: And ſo, defluere è medio ad latera, is no more
than prolabi ad latera. But 'tis not worth the while
to concelt about a word. Eſpecially feeing 'tis ex-
plain'd in the 2d. Edition of the Theory, by adding
detruſione: but it would have ſpoil'd all chis pedantry,
and all his little triumphs, if he had taken notice of
that Explication.
Wherefore ſecting aſide the word, Let us conſider
his reaſons againſt this motion of the Waters towards
the Poles: which, he ſays, could not be, becauſe it
would have been an aſcent, not a deſcent. We allow
and ſuppoſe that. But may not Waters alcend by
force and detruſion: when it is the eaſieſt way they
can take to free themſelves from that force, and per-
fevere in their motion? And this is the caſe we are
ſpeaking to. They were impell’d to aſcend, or recide
from the Center, and it was eaſier for them to aſcend
laterally, than to aſcend directly: upon an inclin'd
Plain, than upon a perpendicular one. Why then
fhould we not ſuppoſe that they took that courſe?
Mechinks the Obſervator, who ſeems to be much con-
verſant in the Carteſian Philoſophy, might have con-
ceiv'd this detruſion of the Waters towards the Poles
by the reſiſtance of the ſuperambient Air, as well as
their flowing towards and upon the ſhores, by the
preſſure of the Air under the Moon. And if the Moon
continued always in the ſame place,or over the middle
of the Sea, that poſture of the waters would be always
the ſame: though it be an aſcent, both upon the Land
and into the Rivers. And this, methinks, is neither
contradiction, nor abſurdity. But an Enemy, that is
little us’d to Victory, makes a great noiſe upon a ſmall
advantage.
F
He
40
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made again
p. 195.
He proceeds now to low, that it was improbable
that the Figure of the firſt Earth ſhould be Oval, up-
on other conſiderations. As firſt, Becauſe of its poli-
tion: which would be croſs to the ſtream of the Air,
that turns it round, or carries ic about the Sun. As
a Ship, he ſays, that ſtands fide-ways againſt a ſtream,
cannot fail. But if that Ship was to turn round upon
her Axis, as a Mill-wheel, and as the Earth does, what
poſture more likely to have ſuch an effect, than to
ſtand croſs to the ſtream that turnsic? And the ſtream
would take more hold of an Oblong-Body, than of a
round. Then, as to its annual courſe, which he men-
tions, that's nothing, but ſo many Circumvolutions:
for in turning round it is alſo progreſſive, as a Cylin-
der in rowling a Garden. And thirce-hundred ſixty-
five circumgyrations conipleat its annual courſe. So
that this argument turns wholly againſt him, and does
rather confirm the Oval Figure of the Earth.
His Second Argument againſt the Oval Figure of
the Firſt Earth, is the Spherical Figure of the preſent
Earth. And how does he prove that? Firſt from Au-
thorities: Anaximander, Pythagoras, and Parmenides
thought ſo. But how does he prove that their aſſert-
ing the Earth to be round, was not meant in oppoſi-
tion to its being Plain : as the Epicureans, and the
Vulgar would have it? That was the Queſtion So-
crates promis'd himſelf to be reſolv'd in by Anaxagoras,
πότερον ή γή πλατεία έσιν, ή τe9) Σύλη. Whether the Earth
was flat, or round. And 'tis likely the diſpute was ge-
nerally underſtood in that ſence. However the The-
oriſt hach alledg’d many more Authorities than theſe,
in favour of the Oval Figure of the Earth. For be-
ſides Empedocles in particular, and thoſe whom Pli-
tarch mentions in general, the Philoſophy of Orphews,
the Phænician, Ægyptian, and Perſian Philoſophers did
all compare the Earth to an Egg: with reſpect to its
Oval external form, as well as internal compoſition.
1.24. Tisco. Theſe you may ſee fully ſet down in the Theory: And
1.31.10. it had been fair in the Excepter to have taken fome
notice of them, if he would contend in that way of
Authorities. But he has thought fit rather to paſs
chem over wholly in ſilence.
Platin
Phad,
His
The Theory of the Earth.
41
p. 1970
1
1
His reaſons to prove the figure of the preſent Earth
to be Spherical and not Oval, are taken, firſt, from
the Conical figure, of the ſhadow of the Earth, caſt
upon the Moon. But that cannot make a difference,
ſenſible to us at this diſtance, whether the Body that
caſt the ſhadow was exactly Spherical or Oval. His
Second reaſon is from the place of the waters: which,
he ſays, would all retire from the Poles to the Equa-
tor, if the Polar parts were higher. But this has been
anſwer'd before. The ſame cauſe that drive che Wa-
ters thither, would make them keep there. As we
ſhould have a perpetual Flood, if the Moon was al-
ways in our Meridian. And whereas he ſuggeſts, that
by this means the Sea ſhould be ſhalloweſt under the
Poles : which, he ſays, is againſt experience. We tell
him juſt the contrary, That, according to our Hypo-
theſis, the Sea ſhould be deepeſt towards the Poles ;
which agrees with experience. That the Sea ſhould
be deepeſt under the Poles, if it was of an Oval form, p.186.
he may ſee plainly by his own Scheme, or by the
Theory Scheme:So that if his obſervation be true, of Theor. Lar.
an extraordinary depth of the Ocean in thoſe parts, it
confirms our ſuſpition, that the Sea continues ſtill O-
val. Laſtly, he urges, If this Earth was Oval, Navi-
gation towards the Poles would be extremely difficult,
if not impoſſible, becauſe upon an alcent. But if there
be a continual draught of Waters from the Equator
towards the Poles, this will balance the difficulty, and
be Equivalent to a gentle Tide, that carries Ships
into the mouth of a River, though upon a gradual
aſcent.
Thus much we have ſaid in complacency to the Ex-
cepter. For the Theoriſt was not oblig’d to ſay any
thing, in defence of the Oval form of the preſent Earth,
ſeeing he had no where aſſerted it. It not being pol-
ſible, as to what evidence we have yet, to determine
in what order the Earth fell, and in what poſture the
ruines lay after their fall. But however, to ſpeak my
mind freely upon this occaſion, I am inclinable to be-
lieve, that the Earth is ſtill Oval or Oblong. What
things the Antitheoriſt hath ſuggeſted, will not decide
the controverſie: nor, it may be, any nacural hiſtory,
li.2.6. 5.
p. 198
F 2
nor
42
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
nor any of thoſe obſervations, that we have already.
The ſurface of the Sea lies more regular than that of
the Land, and therefore I ſhould think, that obfer-
vations made there, would have the beſt effect. I
ſhould particularly recommend theſe two: Firſt,
that they would obſerve towards the Poles, whether
the Sun riſe and ſet, according to the rules of a true
Globe,or of a Body exactly Spherical. Secondly, that
they would obſerve whether the degrees of latitude
are of equal extent in all the parts of a Meridian; that
is, if the quantity of ſea or land that anſwers to a de-
gree in the heavens, be of equal extent towards the
Equator as towards the Poles. Theſe two obſerva-
tions would go the neareſt of any, I know, to deter-
mine whether the figure of the Earth be truly ſplie-
rical or oblong.
CHAP. X.
T
P. 201
'HIS Chapter is concerning the Original of Moun-
tains, and that they were before the Flood, or
from the beginning. Which the Excepter endeavours
to prove from Scripture : not directly, but becauſe
mention is made of them in the ſame places where the
beginning of the Earth is mentioned, as Pſal. 90. 1, 2.
and Prov. 8. 25. therefore they muſt be co-eval and
contemporary. We have, I think, noted before, that
things are not always Synchronal that are mention'd
together in Scripture. The Style of Scripture is not
ſo accurate, as not to ſpeak of things in the ſame place,
that are to be referr'd to different times. Otherwiſe
we muſt ſuppoſe the deſtruction of Jeruſalem, and of
the World, to have been intended for the ſame time:
ſeeing our Saviour joyns them in the ſame diſcourſe,
( Matt.24.) without any diſtinction of time. Or
with ſuch a diſtinction, as rather ſignifies an imme-
diate ſucceſlion (ver. 29.) than fo great a diſtance as
we now find to be betwixt the deſtruction of Jeruſa-
lem and the end of the World. Greater than that,
betwixt the Beginning and the Flood. So in the Pro-
phets ſometimes, in the ſame diſcourſe, one part is to
be referr'd to the firſt coming of our Saviour, and an-
other
The Theory of the Earth.
43
other part to the ſecond: without making any disco
ſtinction of time, but what is to be gaihered from the Luk. 1.31,
fence. Neither is there any incongruicy in the fence, 32, 33.
or in the cenour of the words, if thoſe expreſſions in
the Pſalmiſt be referr'd to different tinies. God ex-
iſted before the Mountains were brought forth, and the
Earth and the World were made. This is certainly true,
whether you take it of the ſame or different times.
And if you take it of different times, 'is a way of
ſpeaking we often uſe. As ſuppoſe a man ſhould ſay
concerning the Antiquity of Troy, that it exiſted be-
fore Rome and Carthage, that does not neceſſarily im-
ply, that Rome and Carthage were built at the famo
time; but only that Troy was before them both. And
ſo this of the Pſalmiſt-may be very well thus expreſt,
by a gradation from a lower Epocha to an higher.
Then as for that place in Prov.ch.8. It would be very
hard to reduce all thoſe things that are mentioned
there, ( from ver. 22. to the 30. ) to the ſame time of
exiſtence; and there is no neceſſity from the words
that they ſhould be ſo underſtood. The deſign and
intention of the Holy Ghoſt is plain in both theſe
places: In the one to ſet out the Eternity of God, and
in the other, of the Logos in particular. And this is
done by ſhewing their pre-exiſtence to this Earth, and
to all its greateſt and nioſt remarkable parts.
He mencions alſo, Deut. 33. 15. where the Hills are
callid Laſting, and the Mountains Ancient. And there-
fore they were before the Flood. This is a hard conſe-
quence. The River Kiſhon is callid the ancient River.
Judg. 5. 21. but I do not therefore think it neceffary,
thar that brook ſhould have been before the Flood:
Things may very well deſerve that character of Laſt-
ing or Ancient, though they be of leſs antiquity than
the Deluge. If one ſhould ſay the laſting Pyrdmids,
and ancient Babylon, nonc could blame the exprcílion,
nor yet think that they were therefore from the be-
ginning of the World.
After theſe allegations from Scripture, He deſcends
to a natural argument, taken from the mountains in
the Moon. Which, he ſays, are much higher than the
mountains upon the Earth : and therefore, ſeeing her
Body
p. 20
103
cofos
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
p. 206.
P. 207
Body is leſs, they could not be made by a Diffolution
of that Planet, as theſe of the Earth are ſaid to have
been. Though we are not bound to anſwer for the
Mountains in the Moon, yet however 'tis eaſie to ſee
thac chis is no good argument. For, beſides that the
Orb there might be more thick, all ruines do not fall
alike. They inay fall double, or in ridges and arches,or
in ſteep piles, ſome more than others, and ſo ſtand at a
greater height. And we have reaſon to believe that
thoſe in the Moon fell ocherwiſe than thoſe of the
Earth: becauſe we do not ſee her turn round: nor
can we ever get a ſight of her back-lide, that we might
better judge of the ſhapes of her whole Body.
From this Natural Argument, he proceeds to an
Hiſtorical Argument, taken from the Talmudiſts and
Joſephus. The Talmudiſts ſay, that many Giants ſav'd
themſelves from the Flood upon Mount Sion. But this, the
Exccpter confeſſes, is wholly fabulous. What need it
then be mention'd as an argument ? Then he ſays, 70-
ſephus reports that many ſav'd themſelves from the flood
upon the mountain Baris in Armenia. But this allo, he
ſays, is falſe in the groſs, and a formal fi&tion. Why
then, ſay I, is it brought in as an argument ? Laſtly, he
quotes a paſſage out of Plato, who ſays, when the gods
jhall drown the Earth, the Herdſmen and Shepherds Jhall
Save themſelves upon mountains. And this the Excepter
calls a piece of confus'd forgery. Why then, ſay I ſtill,
is it alledg’d as an argument againſt the Theory ? Buc
however, ſays the Excepter, theſe things argue that
many thought there were mountains before the Flood.
But did the Theoriſt ever deny that it was the
vulgar and common opinion? Therefore ſuch alle-
gations as theſe, may be of ſome uſe to ſhew reading,
but of no effect at all to confute the Theory.
Yet the Excepter is not content with theſe ſtories,
but he muſt needs add a fourth. Which, he ſays, is a
plain intimation that there were mountains in the begin-
ning of the World. Take his own words for the ſtory
and the application of it. I will only add that Tradi-
tional ſtory which is told of Adam; namely, how that after
bis fall
, and when he repented of his Sin, he bewailed it
for ſeveral hundreds of years, upon the mountains of India.
Another
ibid.
P. 203
The Theory of the Earth.
45
"
P. 209.
Another plain intimation that THERE WERE MOUN-
TAINS in the beginning of the World. This is a
plain intimation indeed, that thoſe that made this
Fable, thought there were mountains then: but is it a
proof that there really was lo? as you ſeem to infer.
Does the Excepter really believe that Adam wander'd
an hundred years upon the mountains of India. It
the matter of fact be falſe, the ſuppoſition it proceeds
upon may as well be falſe. And he does not ſo much
as cite an Author here, for the one or the other.
We are now come to the main point, a new Hypo- p. 208,
thelis concerning the original of Mountains, which the 201, c.
Excepter hach vouchlafed to make for us. And in
Thort, it is chis. When the Waters were drain'd offche
Land, on the 3d day, while it was moiſt and full of
Vapours, the Sun by his heat, made the Earth heave
and riſe up in many places, which thereupon became
Mountains. Buc left we miſtake or miſrepreſent the
Author's ſence, we will give it in his own words. Nom
the Earth by this colle&tion of the waters into one place,
being freed from the load and preſſure of them, and laid
open to the Sun; the moiſture within, by the heat of his
beams, might quickly be turu'd into Vapours. And theſe
Vapours being ſtill increaſed by the continued rarifying
warmth from above, at length they wanted ſpace wherein to
expand or dilate themſelves. And at laji not enduring
the confinement they felt, by degrees heaved up the Earth
above ; ſomewhat after the manner that leaven does Dough,
when it is laid by a fire; but much more forcibly and un-
evenly. And lifting it up tlus in numberleſs places, and
in ſeveral quantities, and in various figures ; Mountains
were made of all ſhapes and ſizes. Whole origine and
properties, he ſays, upon this Hypotheſis, will be ob-
vious, or at leaſt intelligible, to thinking and Philoſophick
Minds.
I muſt confeſs I am none of thoſe Thinking and Phi-
loſophick Minds, to whom this is either obvious or in-
telligible. For there ſeem to me, to be a great many
palpable defects or overſights in this new Hypotheſis.
Whereof this is on of the groficit, that he ſuppoſes
the Sun, by his heat, the 3d Day to have raiſed theſe
Mountains uçon the Earth; whercas the Sun was not
crcared
1
46
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
The Sun's 8.1-
iſtence.
7:51. che pub
. created till the 4th. Day. So that it had this po.
first day of werful effect, it ſeems, one day before it came into
Being.
Buc ſuppoſe the Sun had then exiſted : This is a pro-
digious effect for the Sun to perform, in ſo ſhort a
time, and with ſo litle force. The greateſt part of
that Day was ſpent in draining the Waters from off
the Land. Which had a long way to go, from ſome
Inland Countries, to reach the Sea, or their common
9. 203. receptacle. And, he ſays, without an extraordinary
power, perhaps they could not have been drained off the
Earth in one Day. Let us then allow, at leaſt, half a
Day, for clearing the Ground; fo the Sun might begin
his work about Noon: And before Night, he had raisid
all the Mountains of one Hemiſphere. It will require
a ſtrong Philoſophick Faith, to believe this could be
all done by the action of the Sun, and in ſo ſhort a
time. Beſides we muſt conſider, that the Sun, by
Noon, had paſt all the Eaſtern Countries, yet cover'd
with Water, or not well drain’d: So that after they
were dry'd, he could only look back upon them, with
faint and declining rayes. Yet the Mountains of the
Eaſt are as great and conſiderable as elſe-where. But
there is ſtill another great difficulty in the caſe, as to
the Northern and Southern Mountains of the Earth:
for they lie quite out of the road of the Sun: being
far remov'd towards either Pole; where, by reaſon of
his diſtance and obliquity, his beams have little force.
How would he heave up the Riphæan Mountains, thoſe
valt heaps of Stone and Earth, that lie ſo far to the
North You ſee what obſervations the Excepter hach
made (p.119,120.) concerning the cold of thoſe Coun-
tries: And it falls out very untowardly for this new
Hypotheſis, that the Northern parts of the Earth, as
Norway
, Sweedland, Iſland, Scythia, Sarmathia,&c. ſhould
be ſuch Mountainous and Rocky Countries; where
he had before declar'd the Sun had ſo little force. And
indeed, according to his Scheme, all the great Moun-
tains of the Far:h ſhould have been under the Equa-
tor, or, at least, betwixt the Tropicks.
But to examine a little the manner and method of
this great Action: and what kind of Bodies theſe new
Moun-
7 be Theory of the Earth.
47
Mountains would be. Eicher the Sun drew up only
the ſurface and outward skin of the Earth,as Cupping-
glaffes raiſe Bliſters. Or his beams penetrated deep in-
to the Earth,and heaved up the ſubſtance of it, as Moles
calt up mole-bills
. If you take the firſt method, theſe
fuperficial Mountains would be nothing but ſo many
baggs of Wind: and not at all anſwerable to thoſe
huge maſſes of Earth and ſtone, whereof our moun-
wins conliſt. And if you take the ſecond method,
and ſuppoſe them puht out of the ſolid Earth, and
thrown up into the air, imagine then how deep theſe
raies of the Sun muſt have penetrated in a few hours
time, and what ſtrength they muſt have had, to agi-
tate the vapours to that degree, that they ſhould be
able to do ſuch prodigies as theſe. Several Mountains,
upon a moderate computation, are a mile high from
the level of the Earth. So that it was neceſſary that
the beams of the Sun ſhould penetrate, at leaſt, a mile
deep, in ſo ſhort a time: and there looſen and rare-
fie the vapours, and then tear up by the roots vaſt
loads and extents of ground, and heave them a mile
high into the open air ; and all this in leſs than half
a day. Such things ſurely are beyond all imagination:
and fo extravagant, that one cannot, in conſcience,
offer them to the belief of a man. Can we think that
the Sun, who is two or three hours in licking up the
Dew from the graſs, in a May-morning: ſhould be
able, in as many more hours, to ſuck the Alps and Py-
reneans out of the bowels of the Earth ? And not to
ſpend all his force upon them neither. For he would
have as much work in other Countries. To raiſe up
Taurus, for inſtance, and Imaus, and frozen Caucaſus in
Aſia. And the mighty Atlas and the Mountains of the
Moon in Africk. Beſides the Andes in America, which,
they ſay, far exceed all the Mountains of our Conti-
nent. One would be apt to think, that this Gentle-
man never ſee the face of a Mountainous Country.
For he writes of them, as if he had taken his Idea of
Mountains, and the great ridges of Mountains, upon
the Earth, from the Devil's Ditch, and Hogmagog Hills
.
And he raiſes them faster than Muſhromes, out of the
ground. If the New-born Sun, at his firſt appearance,
G
could
1
48
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
could make ſuch great havock, and ſo great changes;
upon the face of the Earth, what hath he been doing
ever ſince ? we never heard, nor read, of a Mountain,
ſince the memory of Man, rais’d by the heat of the
Sun. We may therefore enquire in the laſt place,
Why have we no Mountains made now by the
ſame cauſes? We have no reaſon to believe, that the
heat or ſtrength of the Sun is leffen'd ſince that time,
why then does it not produce like effects? But I ina-
gine he hath an anſwer for this. Namely, that the
moiſture of the firſt Earth, when it was new-drain'd
and marſhy, contributed much to this effect: which
nowits drineſs hinders. But beſides, that the drineſs
of the Earth ſhould rather give an advantage, by the
collection of Vapours within its Cavities: However
we might expect, according to this reaſon, that all our
drain’d Fenns and marſhy grounds ſhould preſently be
Tais'd into Mountains. Whereas we ſee them all to
continue arrand Plains, as they were before. But if
you think theſe are too little ſpots of ground to re-
ceive a ſtrong influence from the Sun, take Ægypt for
an inſtance. That's capacious enough, and it's over-
flow'd every Year, and by that means made ſoft and
moiſt to your mind, as the new Earth when it rile
from under the Abyſs. Why then is not Ægypt con-
verted into Mountains, after the inundation and re-
tirement of Nile? I do not ſee any qualification a-
wanting according to the Excepter's Hypotheſis: Æ-
gypt hath a moiſt Soil and a ſtrong Sun; much ſtron-
ger than the Alpes or Pyreneans have: and yet ic con-
tinues one of the plaineſt Countries upon the Earth.
But there is ſtill a greater inſtance behind againſt this
Hypotheſis, than any of the former: And that is, of
the whole Earth after the Deluge: when it had been
overflow'd a ſecond time by the Abyſs; upon the re-
tirement of thoſe Waters it would be much what in
the ſame condition as to moiſture, that it was in the
3d. Day, when it firſt became dry Land. Why then
ſhould not the ſame effect follow again, by the hear
of the Sun: And as many new Mountains be rais'd
upon this ſecond draining of the Earth, as upon the
first? Theſe are plain and obvious Inſtances, and as
plainly
The Theory of the Earth.
49
p. 213
plainly unanſwerable. And the whole Hypothefi,
which this Vertuoſo hath propos'd concerning the
Origine of Mountains, is ſuch an heap of Incredibili-
ties, and things inconſiſtent one with another, that
I'me afraid I ſhall be thouglic to have ſpent too much
time in confutation of it.
In the concluſion of this Chapter, he hath an ac-
tempt to prove that there were Mountains before the
Flood, becauſe there were Metals : which are commonly
found about the Roots of Mountains. But the Theo-
riſt, he ſays, to Shun this great inconvenience, fairly con-
ſents to the aboliſhing of metals out of the firſt ſtate of
nature. Yet he's hard put to it, to prove that the
Theoriſt hath any where afferred, whatſoever be
thought, chac there were no Metals then. The firtt
Citation de produces, only recites the opinion of o-
thers, and ſays, he thinks they do not want their reaſons. p. 216.
Of the two other Citations out of the Preface, the
Firſt does not reach home, making no mention of
Metals. And the Second is wholly miſconſtrued, and
perverted to a ſence quite contrary to what the Au-
chor intended, or the Context will bear. But how-
ever the Theoriſt appears doubtful whether there were
Metals, or no, in the Firſt World: and upon this
doubt the Excepter lays this heavy charge. Thus the
Fidelity of Moles is aſſaulted, and another intolerable af- p. 215. li. 24.
front put upon the HOLY GHOST. For, do not both
inform us, that the City Enoch was built, and the Ark pre-
pared before the Flood? But how could either be done witls-
out Iron-tools? But does either Moſes, or the Holy Ghoſt
tell us, that there werc Iron-cools, in building that
Cicy, or the Ark? If they do not, we oncly affrono
the conſequence, which the Excepter draws from the
words,and not the Authors of them. By what divine
auchority does the Animadverter aflert, that there was
Iron, or Iron-tools, in building this City, or that Ark?
I'me ſure Scripture does not mention either, upon
thoſe occaſions. And ſeeing it mentions onely Gopher Gen. 6.14
Wood and Pitch for the building of the Ark, 'tis a pre-
ſumption rather, that there were no other Matcrials
us’d. And as to the City, 'tis true, if he fancy the
City which Enoch built, to have been like Paris, or
London,
G 2
5
o
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
D. 259.
London, he has reaſon to imagine, that they had Iron-
tools to make it. But ſuppoſe it was a number of
Cottages, made of Branches of Trees, of Oſiers and
Bulruſhes, (and what needed they
* Per ludibrium rorant 1.futi homi any other Houſe, when the Air was
sies, uide Architeitos į Opifices con-
durerit Cain ad urbeix extruendan; ſo temperate ) or, if you will,
will, * of
Nos viciſſim :b illis quidriiz:e950 1114 Mud-walls, and a Roof of Straw :
thore credent Urbem ex ladratis la-
pidibles fuiſſe extruitam : co r.1999 with a Fence about it to keep out
artificio, multiſque fump!ibues, ü longi
temporis opera, edificium hoc confi Beaſts: there would be no ſuch ne
tille. Nihil enin dilind colligere licet cit celſity of Iron-tools. Conſider, pray,
verbis 11ofis, 422,11 niteris ex iudi
materii, Caiz fibi i policrus circuns how long the World was without
dcdile. Cal. in loc.
knowing the uſe of Iron, in ſeveral
parts of it, as in the North, and in America : and yet
they had Houſes and Cities after their faſhion. For
the Northern Countries you may ſee Olaus Magnus
,
li. 12.C. 13. For America, Pet. Martyr, Dec. 1. But the
Excepter will ſave you your pains, as to the Indians,
for he ſays himſelf in another place, that they had no
Initruments of Iron,when the Spaniards came amongſt
them. And if in thoſe late Ages of the World, they
were ſtili without the uſe of Iron, or Iron-tools, we
have leſs reaſon to believe that the Children of Cain
had them four or five thouſand years before.
It is alſo worthy our Conſideration, how many
things muſt have been done, before they could come
at theſe Iron-tools. How came the Children of Cain
to dig into the Earth, I know not to what depth, to
ſeek for a thing they had never heard of before?
when it was ſo difficult to dig into the Earth without
ſuch Tools: more difficult, methinks, than to build an
Houſe without them. But ſuppoſe they did this, we
know not how; and, amongſt many other Stones, or
Earthis, found that which we call Iron-orc: How did
they know the nature and uſe of it? Or, if they gueſs’d
.t that, how did they know the way and manner of
preparing it? By Fornaces, Wind-forges,and Smelting-
Mills. Theſe would be as hard to make or build,
without Iron-tools, as dwelling Houſes. And when
they had got a Lump of Iron, till they knew how to
temper it, they could not make Tools of it ſtill. Un-
leſs Cain's Children had an Inſpiration from Heaven, I
do not ſee how they could diſcover all theſe things,
i
The Theory of the Earth.
51
in fo ſhort à time. And this is only to make good
what the Theoriſt ſaid, that ſuch an Hypotheſis does
not rant its reaſons. And as to Tubal-cain, lec thoſe
that poſitively aſſert that there was no Iron in the
Firſt World, tell us in what ſence that place is to be
underſtood. For, I believe, Iron or Braſs is not once
mention’d in all the Theory.
CH A P. XI.
TI
p. 224
HIS Chapter is to prove that the Sea was open
before the Deluge. 'Tis ſomething barren of
Philoſophical arguments, but we will begin with ſuch
as it has, which are taken from this Topick, That the
Fiſhes could not live in our Abyſs : and that for three
reaſons. Firſt, becauſe it was too dark. 2dly. too
cloſe, and 3dly. too cold. As for coldneſs, methinks
he might have left that out, unleſs he ſuppoſe that
there are no fiſh in the frozen Seas, towards the
North and South: which is againſt all ſence and expe-
rience: for cold countreys abound moſt in fiſh. And
according to reaſon, there would be more danger of
too much warmth, in thoſe ſubterraneous waters, than
of too much cold, in reſpect of the Files.
Then as to darkneſs and cloſeneſs, this minds me
of the ſaying of Maimonides: That no man ever would
believe, that a child could live ſo many months, Shut
up in its Mothers Belly, if he never had ſeen the ex-
pcrience of it. There's cloſeneſs and darkneſs in the
lugheſt degree: and in Animals, that, as ſoon as born,
cannot live without reſpiration. Whereas Filhes, of
ull creatures, have the leaſt need of Reſpiration, if they
save any. And as for darkneſs, how many ſubterrane-
ous Labcs have we ſtill, wherein Fiſhes live? And we
in carce ſuppoſe the Main and fathomleſs Ocean to
have light to the bottom: at leaſt when it is troubled
or tempeſtuous. How the Eyes of fiſh are, or might
be formd or conform’d, we cannot tell, but we
ſee they feed and prey on the night time, and take
baits as greedily as on the day. But it is likely they
were leſs active and agile in that Abyſs, than they are
now; Their life was more ſluggiſh thien, and their
motions
52 An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
220.
Foc 38.8. mocions more flow. As being ſtill in that womb of na-
ture that was broke up at the Deluge. And as to
Air, they would have enough for their imperfect way
of breaching in that ſtate. But if they liave a more
perfect now, which is ſtill a queſtion: They mighé
have ſome paſſages, in their body, open'd, (at the dis-
ruprion of the Abyſs ) when they were born into the
light and free air, which were not open'd before. As
we ſee in Infants, upon their birth, a new paſſage is
made into their lungs, and a new circulation of the
bloud, which before took another courſe,
So much for pretended reaſons and Philoſophy.
The reſt of this long Chapter is ſpent either in confe-
quences made from Scripture, or in a prolix diſcourſe
about Rain. As to Scripture, He makes this the firſt
P. 219, objection, that, whereas Adam had a dominion given
him over the fiſh of the Sea, it could have no effect,
if they were encloſed in the Abyſs. Adanı had no more
dominion given him over the fiſh of the Sea,than over
the fowls of the Air: which he could not come at,
or ſeize at his pleaſure, unleſs he could fly into the
air after them. Adam was made Lord of all Animals
upon this Earth, and had a right to uſe them for his
conveniency, when they came into his power. But I
do not believe that Adam was made ſtronger than a
Lyon, nor could maſter the Leviathan, or command
him to the more. He had a right however, and his po-
ſterity, to diſpoſe of all creatures for their uſe and fer-
vice, whenſoever,upon occaſion offered, they fell in-
to their power.
Next he ſays, The Waters were gather'd into one
place, and a Firmament was made to divide the Wa-
ters from the Waters. Well, allow this, tell us then
Gen. I. 17. what was that Firmament. For it is ſaid there, thac
God fer the Sun, Moon, and Stars, in the Fiamament.
Therefore you can argue noching from this, unleſs you
ſuppoſe Superceleſtial Waters: which, when
prov’d, we will give you an account of the Subcele-
Itial, and of the Subterraneous. And here the Ex-
cepter cites ſome things from the Theory, that are not
in the ſecond Edition, and chercfore the Theoriſt
not concern'd to anſwer them.
Laſtly
p. 225,
226.
you have
The Theory of the Earth.
Laſtly, The Excepter comes to his long Harangue
in commendation of the Clouds and of Rain: which
takes up a great part of this Chapter. In his Exor-
dium he makes this Complement to the Clouds. Some- p. 234
times they mount up and fly aloft, as if they forgat, or diſ-
dain'd the meanneſs of their Origin. Sometimes again they
fink and ſtoop ſo low, as if they repented of their former proud
aſpirings, and did remorſeful lumble penance for their
high preſumption. And though I may not ſay they weep to
expiate their arrogance, or kiſs the eart) with bedewed
cheeks in token of their penitence ; yet they often proſtrate
in the duſt
, and ſweep the loweſt grounds of all
, with their
miſty foggy trains. One while they, &c. This Harangue
about the Clouds and Rain, is purſued for fourteen
or fifteen pages, and, with ſubmiſſion to better judg-
ments, I take it to be a Countrey-Sermon, about the
uſefulneſs of Rain. And, I believe, whoſoever reads it,
will, both from its matter and form, be of the ſame
opinion. I do not ſpeak this in derogation to his Ser-
mon, but he would have done better, methinks, to
have printed it in a pamphlet by it ſelf; there being
no occaſion for it in this Theory.
Towards the concluſion of the Chapter, He anſwers P. 296
an obiection made by the Theoriſt againſt the ſuppoſed
Hands and Continents in the Firſt Earth. Namely,That
it would render the propagation of mankind difficult, into
thoſe brokenparts of the World. And the many imperfect
Shifting anſwers which the Excepter gives,or conjectures
without authority, do but confirm the objection of
the Theoriſt, or make his words true, quod Res eſſet
difficilis explicatu. Which is ail that the Theoriſt ſaid
upon that Subject.
1
CH A P. XII.
' HIS is a ſhort Chapter, and will be ſoon dif-
patch'd. 'Tis to prove that the Rainbow was
before the Flood. And notwithſtanding that, a good
ſign that there ſhould never be a Flood again. This
is to me a Paradox, but he confirms it by a greater
Paradox: for he ſays, God might as well (as to ſigni-
ficancy, or authenticalneſs ) have appointed the Sun, as
the
54
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made t
ous.
2. 257.
againſt
the Rainbow, for a ſign that there never ſhould have been
another Flood. So that if God had ſaid to Noah, I do
aſſure thee chere ſhall never be a ſecond Deluge, and
for a ſign of this, Behold I ſet the Sun in the Firmament :
This would have done as well, he fays, as the Rainbow.
That is; in my judgment, it would have done nothing
at all, more than the bare promile. And if it had
done no more than the bare promiſe, it was ſuperAu-
Therefore if the Rainbow was no more than
the Sun would have been, it was a ſuperfluous lign.
They to whom theſe two figns are of equal ſignifi-
cancy and effect, lye without the reach of all con-
viction, and I am very willing to indulge them their
own opinions.
But he ſays, God ſometimes has made things to be ſigns,
that are common and uſual. Thus the fruit of a Tree grom-
ing in Paradiſe,was made a ſign of man’s Immortality. But
how does it appear that this was a common Tree: or
that it was given to Adan as a ſign that he ſhould be
2 Kings 13. Immortal? neither of theſe appear from Scripture.
13. Secondly, he ſays, Shooting with bow and arrows upon ilje
ground, was made a ſign to Joalh of his prevailing again)
the Syrians. This was only a command to make war
againſt Syria, and a Prophecy of ſucceſs; both de-
liver'd in a Symbolical or Hieroglyphical way. The
command was ſignified by bidding the King ſhoot
an arrow, which was the ſign of War. And the ſign
of Victory or of divine aſliſtance, was the Prophets
ftrengthening the King's hands to draw the Bow. This
is nothing as to a ſign given in Nature, or from the
Natural World, in confirmation of a Divine Promiſe:
which is the thing we are only to conſider.
All the reſt of this Chapter is lax diſcourſe without
proof. And as to the ſignificancy of the Rainbow,
upon ſuppoſition that it was a New Appearance: And
Eng. Theor. its inſignificancy upon fuppoſition that it was an Old
book 2. ch. 5.
Appearance, we have ſpoken ſo fully in the Theory ic
ſelf, that it would be needleſs here to make any lon
ger ſtay upon this argument.
CHAP
The Theory of the Earth.
ཙཱཙཱ
ü
CHAP. XIII:
T
Eng. Theo
HIS Chapter is concerning Paradiſe; But our
Author fairly baulks all the difficulties in that
Doctrine, and contents himſelf with a few generals;
which every body knows. The Doctrine of Paradiſe
conſiſts chiefly of two parts; the fire or place of it:
and the ſtate or properties of it. As to the firſt, If
the Excepter wou'd have confuted the Theory, he
ſhould have ſer down the Concluſions that are ad-
vanc'd by the Theory, concerning the place of Para-
diſe, which are theſe; Firſt, The place of Paradiſe can-bock 2. ch. ?
not be determin’d by Scripture only. Neither the
word Mekeddem, (Gen. 2. 8.) nor the four Rivers men-
tioned there, make the place of it defineable. Secondly,
The place of Paradiſe cannot be determin’d by the
Theory. Seeing then neither Scripture, nor Realonde-
termine the place of Paradiſe, if we will determine it,
it muſt be by Antiquity. And if we appeal to Anti-
quity in this caſe, we ſhall find, firſt, that it was not
in Meſopotamia. Secondly, that according to the plu-
rality of Votes, both amongſt the Heathen and Chri-
ſtian Authors, it was plac'd in the other Hemiſphere.
And this is all the Theory ſays upon that Point. As
you may ſee Eng. Tbeor. Book 2. ch.7. and Lat. Theor.
20. Edit
. p. 194. & p. 214, 215. Wherefore if the Ani-
madverter would undertake to confure the Theory
in this Point, he ſhould have confused thoſe four Par-
ticulars. But he ſlips over theſe, and gives us only
a Paraphraſe upon ſome Verſes in the 2d. and 3d. p. zés
Chap. of Gen. which ſays little to this purpoſe, and
yet more than it proves.
In the Second place, As to the ſtate and properties
of Paradiſe, or the Antediluvian world; The longevity
of the Autediluvians is the thing he inſiſts upon. But
this he handles ſo looſely, that in the concluſion of
his diſcourte, one cannot tell whether he affirms it,or
denies it. This Sceptical humour of the Excepter hath
been taken notice of before, and ’ris continued in this
Chapter, where there is little or nothing poſicively
determin'd: The Theoriſt, on che contrary, expreſs
H
affirmas
+
p. 273
56
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
See the Tiz-
P. 220.
affirms che Longevity of the Antediluvians, and gives
thele reaſons for his aſſertion. Firſt, becauſe all che
Lives, and all the Generations recorded in Scripture,
before the Flood, from Father ro Son, in a Line of
fixteen hundred years, are longeval. Of fix, ſeven,
eight, nine hundred years a-piece. Secondly, Anci-
quity, both Greek and Barbarian, have atteſted the ſame
ble of both thing, and recorded the Tradition. Thirdly, che Ge-
Exg. Theor. nerations recorded in Scripture after the Flood as they
exceed the term of ſucceeding Ages, ſo they decline
by degrees from the Ancediluvian Longevicy. Laſtly,
Jacob complains of the ſhortneſs of his life, and few-
neſs of his days, in compariſon of his Forefathers,when
G211.47.9. he had liv'd one hundred and thirty years; which
had been a groundleſs complaint, if his Anceſtors had
not lived much longer.
Theſe ewo laſt reaſons the Excepter has not thought
fic to take notice of. And, in anſwer to the two for-
mer, he hath onely the uſual ſubterfuges. As, that
the long lives of the Antediluvian Patriarchs was a
thing extraordinary and providencial: confin'd to
their Perſons; not of a general extent, nor according
to the courſe of Nature. But how does this appear?
It muſt be made out, either by Scripture or Reaſon.
Scripture makes no diſtinction, nor exception of Per-
fons in this caſe ; All, whereof it hath left any account,
as to term of life, are declar'd to have liv'd ſeveral
hundreds of years. And why ſhould we not conclude
the ſame thing concerning the reſt ? Then as to Rea-
ſon, you cannot ſuppoſe Longevity, in that World, a-
gainſt reaſon or nature, unleſs you firſt ſuppoſe the
form and conſtitution of that World to have been the
ſame with the preſent: Which is to beg the Queſtion.
Admitting that form and conftitution of the firſt Hea-
vens and Earth, which the Theory hach given, Lon-
Imu.2. gevity will be a natural conſequnce of it. And ha-
zl.
ving ſuch a courſe of nature laid before us, as agrees
with the reports of Scripture, and with general Tra-
dition, why ſhould we quit that, to comply with an
imaginary preſumption: that theſe were miraculouſly
preſerv'd, and all the reſt were ſhort-liv'd. I know he
p. 297. pretends, we may as well conclude all Men were Gy-
ants
The Theory of the Earth.
57
ants in thoſe days, becauſe Moſes ſays, I ljere were Giants
upon the Earth in thoſe days, Gen. 6. 4. as conclude
that all Men were long-liv'd in thoſe days, becauſe
Moſes mentions ſome that were ſo. There had been
fome pretence for this, if Moſes had made a diſtinction
oftwo races of Men in the firſt World: Long-livers
and ſhort-livers; as lie hath diſtinguiſht the Giants
from the common Race of Mankind. Or, as he hach
aid in one caſe, There were Giants on the Earth in thoſe
days
. So if he had ſaid in the other, there were Long-
livers upon the Earth in thoſe days: and upon that, had
given us a Liſt of the Long-liv'd Patriarchs: this in-
deed would have made the caſes pretty parallel
. But,
on the contrary, Moſes makes no ſuch diſtinction of
long-living and ſhort-living races, before the Flood;
nor yet notes it as a mark of divine favour, or extraor-
dinary benediction upon thoſe perſons that liv'd ſo
long. Therefore, not to fuppofe it general to Man-
kind at that time, is a groundleſs reſtriction, which is
neither founded upon Scripture nor Reaſon.
As to the ſecond Argument for Antediluvian lon-
gevity, taken from Tradition and the Teſtimony of the
Ancients; He objects, that Joſephus does not ſeem to p.276, 277
be firm in that opinion himſelf. But what then? The
Theoriſt lays no ſtreſs upon Foſephus's ſingle opinion,
but refers to the Teſtimonies of thoſe Authors, whe-
ther Greeks, or ſuch as have given an account of the
Ægyptian, Chaldean, and Phenician Antiquities : which
are call’d in by Foſephus, as witneſſes of this Truth or
Tradition, concerning the long lives of the firſt Men.
And at laſt, the Exceprer ſeems content, this Tradition
ſhould be admitted: ſeeing the Authors are too many,
and too conſiderable, to have their Teſtimonies queſtion'd
or rejected. But then he will make a further Queſtion,
Why there ſhould not alſo be a Tradition concerning
the Perpetual Equinox, or Perpetual Spring, upon which
this Longevity depended. But this Queſtion is fully
anſwer’d, and the Tradition fully made out before, in
the 8th. Chapter, which I need not here repeat. In like
manner, all the ſecondary Queſtions which he there
mentions, depending upon, and being included in this
firſt, receive their reſolution from it. For when a per-
H2
petual
p. 278
58
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made 1
bid,
againſt
petual Equinox is once truly ſtated, there is no diffi-
culty concerning the reſt.
After theſe conteſts about Traditions, lie hath one
2 279,280. or two Reaſons againſt this Antediluvian Longevity,
Firſt, Becauſe the Earth, by this means, would have
been over-ſtockt with People before the time of the
Deluge. Secondly, They fould all have been of the
ſame Longevity before the Flood. Neither of theſe,
methinks, have any ſtrength in them. As to thefirit,
That Earth was niuch more capacious than this is
where the Sea takes away half of its Surface, and ren.
ders it uninhabitable. And whereas he ſuggeſts, as a
recompence, That Mountains have more ſurface and ca-
pacicy than Plains; That's true, but they are alſo leſs
habitable, by reaſon of their barrenneſs and rugged..
neſs. Who can believe that there are as many People
in Wales, as in other parts of England, upon the ſame
compaſs of level ground? Or no more in Holland, than
upon a like number of Acres upon the Alpes or Pyre-
neans? There would be room enough for twiccas many
People as there are in the World, and twice as many
Animals, if there was food enough to nouriſh them.
But here I have two things to complain of, as foul
play: Firſt, the Excepter cices the Theory partially.
Secondly, he does not mark the place whence he takes
that citation: as if it was on purpoſe to hide his par-
tiality. The words he cites are theſe, If we allow the
for: Couple, at the end of one bundred years, or of the firſi
3.3. Theor
: Century, to have left ten, pair of Breeders, which is an eaſie
P. 23. suppoſition, there would ariſe from theſe in fifteen hundred
years.. a greater number than the Earth was capable of:
allowing every pair to multiply. in the ſame decuple pro-
portion the firſt pair did. Here the Excepter ftops, and
makes this inference,that upon an eaſie ſuppoſition, which
the Theoriſt makes and allows, the Earth would have
been, over-ſtocke in fifteen hundred years. This is an
eafne. Suppoſition for the firſt Century, as the Thcoriſt put
isi Byc it would be a very uncálic one for the follow-
ing: Genjuries; when they came to be at any conſide-
rable diſtance from the beginning. And therefore the
Theoriſt tells you, in that very Page, The ſame meaſure
cannot run equally thrcugh all the Ages
. And in his Cal.
culation
The Theory of the Earth.
í
50
i
P.285
culation you fee, after the firſt Century, he hath taken
only a quadruple proportion for the increaſe of mankind.
As judging that a moderate and reaſonable meaſure betwixt
the Higheſt and the Loweſt. This the Excepter might ibid.
eaſily have obſerved, and as eaſily avoided this mif-
application of the words of the Theoriſt.
His ſecond reaſon againſt the antediluvian longevity
is flighter than the firſt. For he pretends that all the
Antediluvians, upon that ſuppoſition, ſhould have
been equally long-liv’d. You may as well ſay, that all
the children of the ſanie parents, and that live in the
ſame place, ſhould now be equally long-liv'd; the ex-
ternal world being the ſame to them all.But, beſides ac-
cidents, their ſtamina and conſtitutions might then be
of a different ſtrength, as well as now: tho' they were
born of the ſame Parents, and liv'd in the ſame Air.
Laſtly, he moves a difficulty about the multiplication p. 2€1,
of Animals in the firſt World, that they would have
been too numerous before the Flood. I can ſay no-
thing to that, nor He neither, upon good grounds:
unleſs we knew what Species's of Animals were then
made, and in what degrees they multiplied. The
Theoriſt always ſuppoſes a Divine Providence to ſu-
perintend, proportion, and determine, both the num-
ber and food of Animals upon the Earth : ſuitably to
the conſtitution and circumſtances of every World. .
And ſeeing that Earth was no leſs under the care and
direction of Providence, than the preſent, we may
conclude that due meaſures were taken for adjuſting
the numbers and food of Animals in ſuch manner, as
neither to be a burthen to one another; nor to man.
:
CH A P. XIV.
T!
HIS Chapter is againſt the Explication of the
Deluge by the Dilolution of the Earth. That diſa
ſolution, as is pretended, being unfic or inſufficient to
produce ſuch an effect. And to prove this, the Anti-
thcoriſt gives us five Arguments, whereof the firſt is
this: Moſes having left us an accurate deſcription of
Paradiſe, according to the proper rules of Topography,luch p.85
a deſcription would have been improper and inſuffi p.38$
cient
ܘ
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
cient to determine the place of Paradiſe, and conſe
quently uſeleſs, if the Earth had been diſſolv’d: and
by that means the bounds of thoſe Countreys, and
the Chancls of thoſe Rivers, broken and chang’d. This
objection, l'me afraid, will fall heavier upon Moſes, or
upon the Excepter himſelf, than upon the Theorilt.
However one would have expected that the Exceptor
hould have determin'd here the place of Paradile, in
vertue of that deſcription. So learned and ſagacious
a perſon, having before him an exact draught ot l'a-
radiſe, according to the proper rules of Topography, could
not fail to lay his finger upon the very ſpot of ground
where it food. Yet I do not find that he lach ven-
curd to determine the place of Paradiſe, cither in this
Chapter, or in the precedent. Which gives nie a
great ſuſpicion,that he was not ſatisfied where it ſtood,
notwithſtanding the Mofaical Topography. Now it
it cannot be underſtood or determin’d by that Topo-
graphy, one of theſe two things muſt be allowed, ci-
ther that the deſcription was inſulficient and inctti-
ctual: or that there has been ſome great change in
the Earth, whereby the marks of it are destroy'd;
namely, the bounds of Countries, and the courſes
of the Rivers. If he take the ſecond of thicle anſwers,
he joyns with the Thcoriſt
. If the firſt, he reflects,
according to his way of arguing, upon the honour
of Moſes, or confutes himſelf.
Buc here is ſtill a further charge: Moſes's defcription
of Paradiſe would have been Falſe ( which he notes for
horrid blaſphemy) if the Earth was broken at the Dia
luge. For then thoſe Rivers, by which Mofes defcribes
Paradiſe, could not have been before the Flood. But
why ſo, I pray? The Theoriſt ſuppoſes Rivers before
the Flood, in great plenty: and why not like to theſe ?
And if their chanels were very much chang'u by cho
Flood, that's no more than what good Inter-
preters ſuppoſe. Being unable, upon any other fup-
pofition, to give an account, why it is ſo hard (noc-
withſtanding Moſes's deſcription) to determine the place
of Paradiſe. Now where is the Blaſphemy of this:
: ibid. Horrid Blaſphemy againſt the holy Ghoſl? A rude and
injudicious detence of Scripture, by railing and ill lan-
9. 286.
guage
The Theory of the Earth.
G
guage, is the true way to leſſen and diſparage it. Efpe-
cially when we make our own conſequences to be of
the ſame authority with the Word of God: and what
foever is againſt them, muſt be charg’d with blaf-
phemy againſt the Holy Ghoſt. Is it not a ſtrange
thing chat che Diſſolution of the Earch ſhould be made
Blaſphemy? when the Prophets and inſpir’d Authors
ſpeak ſo often of the Diſruptions, Fractions, Concufions, see Rezien.
and Subverſions of the Earth. And that very expreſſion, P- 35, &c.
that the Earth is diſſolv’d, is a Scripture-expreſſion.
( Pfal. 75. 3. Iſa. 24. 19. Amos 9. 5.) which, methinks;
might have been enough to have protected it from
the imputation of blaſphemy. But there is nothing
ſafe againſt blind zeal, and opinionative ignorance ;
which, by how much they find themſelves weaker in
reaſons, by ſo much they become more violent in
paflions.
But to return to the objection; upon the whole
matcer, he caſts the burthen of the charge upon Mo-
ſes himſelf, as we noted before. For take whether Hy-
potheſis you will, that the Earth was, or was not,
broken: the queſtion ſtill returns, if the Moſaical To-
pography was exact and ſufficient, why can we not
yet find out the ſituation of Paradiſe? 'Tis now above
three thouſand years ſince Moſes dyed, and men have
been curious and very inquiſitive, in all ages, to find
out the place of Paradiſe: buc it is not found out to
this day to any ſatisfaction. So that, methinks, upon
the whole, the Theory, which fuppofcth the Earch
very much chang'd, makes the faireſt Apology boch
for Moſes and mankind, in this particular. But to pro-
ceed to his ſecond Argument.
Secondly, ſays the Excepter, The diſſolution of the p. 288
Earth could not be the cauſe of the general Flood, becauſe
it would have utterly deſtroy'd Noah's Ark, and all that
were init. I thought the Theoriſt had effectually pre-
vented this objection, by puting the Ark under the
conduct of its Guardian Angels, and of a miraculous
Providence. Theſe arc his words, I think it had been p. 108
impoſſible for the Ark to have liv’d upon the raging Abyſs
,
or for Noah and bis family to have been preſervd, if there
bald not been a miraculous hand of Providence to take care
of
1
Eng. Thcor
.
62
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
of them. Now, either the Excepter did not take no-
tice of this paſſage in the Theory, or he does not allow
that a miraculous hand was ſufficient to preſerve the
Ark: or thirdly, he made an objection, which he knew
himſelf, to be impertinent. And, I confeſs, I am in-
clinable to think the laſt is true. For as to the firſt,
he confeſles ( p. 354.) that the Theory repreſents the
Ark, with its Guardian Angels about it, in the extremi-
ty of the Flood. And as to the ſecond, He himſelf
makes uſe of a miraculous power to preſerve the Ark,
upon his Hypotheſis : in anſwer to the eighth objecti-
on, p. 351, 352,&c. Why then may not we make uſe
of the ſame power and with the ſame effect? Ic re-
mains therefore, that he was conſcious to himſelf that
he made this objection to no purpoſe.
But that is not all: He has alſo us'd foul play in his
citation. For whereas the great danger of the Ark would
be at the firſt fall of the Earth, or the diſruption of
the Abyſs; The Theoriſt, he ſays, to prevent chis, makes
the Ark to be a-float by the Rains, before the Abyſs
was broken. But is that all the Theoriſt ſays in that
place? does he not aſſign another way how the Ark
might be a-float? namely, in a River, or in a Dock.
Theſe are the words of the Theory, so as the Ark, if
it could not float upon theſe Rain-waters
, at leaſt taking
the advantage of a River, or of a dock or ciſtern made io
receive them, it might be a-float before the Abyſs was bro-
ken open. And theſe words being in the ſame place
whence he makes his citation, it muſt be a wilful dil-
ſimulation not to take notice of them. Buc he ſee they
would have taken off the edge of his objection, and
therefore thought fit not to touch upon them. But
after all, there is no neceſſity that the Ark ſhould be
a-float, before the Earth broke. Thoſe things were
premis'd in the Theory, only to foften the way to men
that are hard of belief in ſuch extraordinary matters.
For the Angels, ( whoſe miniſtery we openly own, up-
on theſe grand occaſions ) could as eaſily have held
the Ark, a-float, in the Air, as on the water. And
the Ark, being an Emblem of the Church, God certain-
ly did give bis Angels charge over it; that they hould
bear it up in their hands, that it might not be daſh'd againſt
p. 98.
The Theory of the Earth.
63
1
aftone. And this having been more than once; pro-
felt by the Theoriſt, we muſt again conclude this ob-
jection ſuperfluous and uſeleſs.
The third objection is this. If the Earth had been p. 25.).
thus diſſolv’d, The preſent Earth would bave been,in like-
lihood, of another figure, than that now it bears
. Theſe
are his words, but I ſuppoſe he means, that it would
have been of another forn, as to Sea and Land. And
the reaſon begives is this: Becauſe, ſays he, it would
have broke firſt, in the Equator, and conſequently that
part falling down firſt, would have been ſwallowed up
by the waters, and become all Sea. Whereas we
find, that under the Equator that then was ( which he
ſuppoſech the preſent Ecliptick ) the dry ground is of ibid.
moſt ſpations extent and continuity. We need not ex-
amine his account of Sea and Land, becauſe it
pro-
ceeds upon a falſe ſuppoſition. He relapſes here into
his former Aſtronomical error, or to his firſt adds a sepaz.
ſecond; viz. That the Earth, when it chang’d its firua- before
tion, chang'd its Poles and Circles. This is a greac
miſtake; the change of poſition in reſpect of the
Heavens, did not change the places of its Circles in
reſpect to its own Globe. As when you change a
Sphere or a Globe out of a right ſituation into an ob-
lique, the Circles do not change their places, as to that
Sphere or Globe: but have only another poſition to
the Heavens. The Earth's Ecliptick runs through the
fame places it did before : and the Equinoctial regi-
ons of that Earth were chc lame with the Equinoctial
regions of this; only bear another poſture to the Hea-
vens and the Sun. Thele Circles have not chang'd
places with one another, as he imagines: and which is
svorſe, would father this imagination upon the Theory;
in theſe words, under the Ecliptick (which, in the Pri-
mitive ſituation of the Earth, ( ACCORDING TO THE
THEORY) was its Equino&tial, and divided the Globe
into two Hemiſpheres
, as the Equator does now ) the dry
ground, &c. He that affirms this, wich reſpect to the
Earth, neither underſtands the Theory, nor the Do&trine
of the Sphere. But let's preſs no further upon a miſtake.
The fourth objection is this: That ſuch a Dillo-
lution of the Earth, would have caus’d great barren-
I
nels
ز
P......
64
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
p. 292.
neſs after the Flood. Partly by turning up ſome dry
and unfruitful parts of the Earth: and partly by the
foil and filch that would be left upon its ſurface. As
to the firſt, I willingly allow, that ſome of the interi-
our and barren parts of the Earth might be turn'dup;
as we now ſee in Mountainous and wild Countries :
bnt this rather confirms the Theory, than weakens ir.
But as to the ſecond, that the filth and ſoil would
have made the Earth more barren, I cannot allow
that. For good Husbandmen overflow their grounds,
to make their crop more rich. And 'tis generally ſup-
pos'd, that the Inundation of Nile, and the mud it
leaves behind it, makes Ægypt more fruitful. Beſides,
this
part
of the objection lies againſt the common ex-
plication of the Deluge, as well as againſt that which
is given by the Theory. For if you ſuppoſe an uni-
verſal Deluge, let ic come from what cauſes you pleaſe,
it mult overflow all the Earth, and leave mud and ſlime
and filch upon the ſurface of it. And conſequently
cauſe barrenneſs
, according to this argumentation.
He adds another conſideration under this head,
namely, that if the Earth had been diſſolv'd in this
manner, All the buildings erected before the Flood, would
have been ſhaken down, or elſe overwhelmed. Tet we read
of ſome that outſtood the Flood, and were not demoliſh’d.
Such were the pillars of Seth, and the Cities Henochia
and Joppa. As to Seth's pillars, they are generally ac-
counted fabulous. And I perceive the excepcer will
not vouch for them. For he concludes, (p.295.) I know
the very being is queſtion’d of Seth's pillars
, &c. if he
will not defend them, why ſhould I take the pains to
confute them? I do noc love to play with a Man, that
will put nothing to the ſtake. That will have his
chance to win, but can loſe nothing, becauſe he ſtakes
nothing. Then as to the City Henochia, it hath no au-
thority, but that of Annius Viterbienſis
, and his Berofus.
A Book gencrally exploded, as ficticious. Laſtly, as to
Foppå, the authority indeed is better, though ſtill un-
cercain. But however, ſuppoſe the ruines of one Town
remain'd after the Flood, does this prove that the
Earth was not diſſolv’d? I do not doubt, but there
were ſeveral cracts of the Earth, much greater than
that
The Theory of the Earth
6
65
that Town, tliat were not broken all to pieces by their
fall. But you and your Engliſh Hiſtorian are miſtaken,
if you ſuppoſe the Altars and Inſcriptions mention'd
by Mela, to have been Antediluvian Altars and Inſcri-
prions. Unleſs you will make the Fable of Perſeus and
Andromeda, and the Sea-Monſter, to have been an An-
tediluvian Fable. Neither hath your Hiſtorian been
lucky in tranſlating thoſe words of Mela, cum religione
plurimâ, with the grounds and principles of their religion,
which ſignifie only, with a religious care or ſuperſtition.
But to leave Fables, and proceed.
His laſt Argument againſt the Diffolution is this. p. 296.
Had the Diffolution of the Earth been the cauſe of the
Deluge, It would have made God's Covenant with Noah
a very vain and trifling thing. So much is true, That
the Deluge, in the courſe of Nature, will not return
again in the ſame way. But unleſs God prevent it, it
both may and will return in another way. That is, if
the World continue long enough, the Mountains will
wear and ſink,and the Waters in proportion riſe: and
overflow the whole Earth. As is plainly ſhewn, by a
parallel caſe, in the firſt Book of the Theory, ch. 4. Be-
ſides, God might, when he pleas’d, by an extraordi-
nary power, and for the ſins of Men, bring another
Deluge upon the World. And that is the thing which
Noab ſeenis to have fear'd, and which God, by his Co-
venant; fecur'd him againſt. For, as the Excepter hach
ſaid himſelf, in anſwering an harder objection, (p.152:)
When God aſſigned to the Waters the place of their abode,
be did not intend to fortiſie them in it againſt his own om-
nipotence, or to deveſt himſelf of his Sovereign Prerogativë
of calling them forth when he pleaſed. This being allow'd,
with what we ſaid before, that Covenant was not vain
or trifling, either in reſpect of an ordinary or extra-
ordinary Providence:
Thus we have done with all the Exceptions againſt
the Theory. For the two next Chapters are concer-
ning a new Hypotheſis of his own." And the laſt of
all, excepts not againſt the truth of the Theory, buc
the certainty of it. In reflection upon this whole
matter, give me leave to declare Two things; Firſt,
That I have not knowingly omitted any one Objecti-
1
I 2
on
66 An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
on that I thought of moment. Secondly, That I have
not from theſe
Exceptions found reaſon to change any
part of the Theory,nor to alter my opinion, as to any
particular in it. No doubt there are ſeveral Texts of
Scripture, which, underſtood according to the Letter
in a Vulgar way, ftand croſs, both to this, and other
natural Theories. And a Child that had read the firſt
Chapters of Geneſis, might have obſerv'd this, as well
as the Excepter: but could not have loaded his charge
with ſo much bitterneſs. Some Men, they ſay though
of no great Valour,yer will fight excellently well be-
hind a Wall. The Excepter, behind a Text of Scri-
pture, is very fierce and rugged. But in the open
Field of Reaſon and Philoſophy, he's gentle and tra-
Eng. Theor. ctable. The Theoriſt had declar'd his intentions and
at the end. oblig'd himſelf, to give a full account of Moſes his
Coſmopæia, or fix-days Creation : but did not think it
proper to be done in the Vulgar Language, nor be-
fore the whole Theory was compleated. This might
have ſpard much of the Excepter's pains; But till that
account be given, if the Excepter thinks fit to conti-
nue his Animadverſions, and go thorough the Two
laft Books, as he hath done the two firſt, it will not
be unacceptable to the Theoriſt. Provided it be done
with ſincerity, in reciting the words, and repreſencing
the ſence of the Author.
CHA P. XV.
p. 299
IN
'N This Chapter the Anti-theoriſt lays down a new
Hypothefis for the Explication of the Deluge. And
the War is chang’d, on his ſide, from Offenſive, to
Defenſive. 'Tis but fair that he ſhould lie down in
his turn: and if ſome blows ſmart a little, he muſt
not complain, becauſe he begun the Sport. But let's
P.299, 300. try his Hypotheſis
, without any further ceremony.
The firſt Propoſition laid down for the eſtabliſhing
of it, is this: That the Flocd was but fifteen Cubits high,
above the ordinary level of the Earth. This is an un-
merciful Paradox, and a very unlucky beginning;
For under what notion muſt this Propoſition be re-
cciy'd
The Theory of the Earth.
67
ceiv’d? Aš a Poftulatum, or as a Concluſion ? If it be à
Poſtulatum, it muſt be clear from its own light, or
acknowledg’d by general conſent. It cannot pretend
to be clear from its own light, becauſe it is matter
of Fact, which is not known, but by Testimony. Nei-
ther is it generally acknowledg’d: For the general
opinion is, that the Waters cover'd the tops of the
Mountains; Nay, that they were fifteen Cubics higher
than the tops of the Mouncains. And this he con-
feſſes himſelf, in theſe words: We ſhall find there is a
great miſtake in the common Hypothefis, touching their p. 300.
depth: namely, of the Waters. For Whereas they have
been ſuppoſed to be fifteen Cubits higher than the higheſt
Mountains : They were indeed but fifteen Cubits high in
all, above the Surface of the Earth. And this Opinion,
or Doctrine, he calls, The general ſtanding Hypothefis : p. 329. lin.
The uſual Hypothefis : The uſual ſence they have put up- p. 339. lia
.
on the Sacred Story. It muſt not therefore be made a
Poftulatum, that ſuch an Hypotheſis is falſe, but the
falſity of it muſt be demonſtrated by good Proofs.
Now I do not find that this new Hypotheſis, of a
fifteen-cubit-Deluge; offers at any more than one ſingle
proof, namely, from Gen. 7.20. But before we pro-
ceed to the examination of that,give me leave to note
one or two chings, wherein the new-Theoriſt ſeems to
be inconſiſtent with himſelf, or with good ſence.
18.
At his entrance upon this new Hypotheſis, he hath
theſe words, (P.300.) Not that I will be bound to defend
what I ſay, as true and real,&c. But why then does he
trouble himſelf
, or the World, with an Hypotheſis,
whiclı he does not believe to be true and real? or if
he does believe it to be ſo, Why will he not defend
it? for we ought to defend truth. But he ſays more-
over, (p.302. lin. 19.) Our ſuppoſition ſtands ſupported by
Divine authority: as being founded upon Scripture. Which
as plainly as it can ſpeak, that the Waters prevailed
but fifteen Cubits upon the Earth. If his Hypotheſis be
founded upon Scripture: and upon Scripture as plain-
ly as it can ſpeak, Why will not he defend it as true
and real? For to be fupported by Scripture, and by
plain Scripture, is as much as we can alledge for the
Articles
tells us,
,8 An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
f
Articles of our Faith: which every one ſurely is bound
to defend.
But this is not all the difficulty we meet with. Tlie
whole period which we quoted runs thus. Not that I
will be bound to defend what I ſay, as true or real; any
more than to believe (what I cannot well endure to ſpeak)
that the Church of God has ever gone on in an irrational
way of explaining the Deluge. Whiclə yet ſhe muſt needs
have done, if there be no other rational method of explain-
ing it, and no other intelligible Cauſes of it, than what the
Theory has propos’d; Now for the word Theory, put the
word Excepter, or Excepter's Hypotheſis, and ſee if this
charge, That the Church of God has ever gone on in an
irrational way of explaining the Deluge, does not fall as
much upon the Excepter's new Hypotheſis
, as upon
the Theory. If the Church-Hypotheſis was rational,
what need he have invented a new one? why does he
not propoſe that Hypotheſis, and defend it? I'mie a-
fraid it will be found that he does not only contra-
dict the Church-Hypotheſis
, but reject it as miltaken
and irrational. For what is the Church-Hypotheſis;
but the Common Hypotheſis? (p. 300.lin.24.) The gene-
ral ſtanding Hypotheſis: The uſual Hypotheſis: The u-
ſual ſence they put upon the Sacred ſtory. All theſe he
rejects and diſputes againſt; as you may ſee in the
places fore-cited. And alſo he calls them ſuch Inven-
P. 312. ult. tions, as have been, and juſtly may be diſguſtful, not only
to nice and ſqueamiſh, but to the beſt and ſoundeſt Philo-
Sophick judgments
. And, p. 319. He ſays by his Hypo-
theſis, we are excuſed from running to thoſe Cauſes or Me-
thods, which ſeem unreaſonable to fome, and unintelligible
to others, and unſatisfa&tory to moft. And, to name 110
more, he ſays, p. 330. The ordinary ſuppoſition, that
the Mountains were cover'd with water in the Deluge,
brings on a neceſity of ſetting up a new Hypotheſis for
explaining the Flood. Now, whoſe Methods, Invenci-
ons and Suppoſitions are theſe,which he reflects upon ?
Are they not the commonly receiv'd Methods and
Suppoſitions? 'Tis plain, moſt of thoſe which he men-
tions, (p.310,311,313,314,318.) are not the Theo-
Eng. Theor. riſt's. For the Theoriſt had rejected before, chofe very
ch. 2. 6-3. Methods and Inventions, which the Excepter rejects
NOW
I be Theory of the Earth.
69
Haters of the Sea. Then the laters
now: and ſo far he juſtifies the
* The Excepter rejects, first the
Theory *. Theſe reflections there-
fore muſt fall upon ſome other Hy- Supercelestial Waters. Then a New
potheſis: And what Hypotheſis is Creation of Waters. Then the muls
that
, if it be not the Church-Hypo- of air change into water. And iaitly,
theſis ? To conclude, I argue thus puts men fatally, either upon the
Theory,or upon his new Hypothelis:
in ſhort, to ſhow the Excepter in-
conſiſtent with himſelf in this particular. The Church-
way of explaining the Deluge, is either rational or ir-
rational. If he ſay it is rational, why does he deſere it,
and invenc a new one? And if he ſay it is irrational,
then that dreadful thing, which, he cannot well en-
dure to ſpeak, That the Church of God has ever gone on
in an irrational way of explaining the Deluge, falls flat
upon himſelf
.
p. 2011
21.
Thus much in general, for his Introduction. We
proceed now to examine particularly his new Hypo-
theſis. Which, as we told you before, conſiſts chiefly
in this, That the Waters of the Deluge were but fifteen
Cubits higher than the common unmountainous Surface of
the Earth. This, which ſeems ſo odd and extravagant,
he ſays,is the Foundation of his Hypotheſis. And, which
is ſtill more ſurpriſing, he ſays this depch, or rather
ſhallowneſs, of the Waters of the Deluge; is cold us
by Scripture, as plainly as it can ſpeak. This muſt p. 302. iin,
needs raiſe our curioſity,to ſee that place of Scripture,
which has been over-looke by all the Learned hitherto.
Well, 'tis Gen. 7. 20. in theſe words, Fifteen Cubits up-
wards did the Waters prevail. This, me thinks, is ſome-
what general: for the Baſis of theſe fifteen Cubits is
not expreft, in theſe words. But why does our Au-
thor ſtop in the middle of a Verſe: Why does he noi
tranſcribe the whole Verſe: for the laſt part of it, is
as good Scripture as the firſt. And that ſays plainly,
that the Mountains were cover'd with the Waters. The
whole Verſe runs thus: Fifteen Cubits upiards did the
Waters prevail; AND THE MOUNTAINS WERE
COVERED. Now, if the Baſis of theſe fifreen Cubits
was the common Surface, or plain level of the Earshi,
as this new Hypotheſis will have it:How could fifteca
Cubits, from that Baſis;reach to the tops of the Moun:
tains ? Are the higheſt Mountains but fifteen Cubits
higher
ܪ
70
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
1
1 Sam. 17.4. higher than the common ſurface of the Earth : Goliah
was ſix cubits and a ſpan high. So Pic Tenarift would
not be thrice as high as Goliah. Yet David ſlung a
ſtone up to his forehead. Take what cubic you pleaſe,
Sacred or common, it does not amount to two foor.
So the height of the greateſt Mountains, from bot-
tom co top, muſt not be thirty foot, or ten paces : ac-
cording to this New Hypotheſis. Who ever mea-
ſured Mountains at this rate? The modern Mache-
maticians allow for their height a mile perpendicular,
upon a moderate computation; and that makes 3000
foot. How then could waters that were not 30 food
high, cover Mountains that were 3000 foot high?
That the higheſt Mountains of the Earth were cover'd
with the waters, you may ſee expreſs’d more fully in
the precedent verſe. And the waters prevailed exceed-
Gen. 7.19. ingly upon the Earth. And all the high Hills that were
under the whole Heaven were cover'd. There can ſcarce
be words more plain and comprehenſive. The Ex-
cepter ſays, the Scripture tells us, as plainly as it can
Speak, that the waters were but fifteen cubits high from
the common ſurface of the Earth. And I ſay, The
Scripture tells us as plainly as it can ſpeak, That, all the
bigh Hills under the whole Heaven, mere covered with ma-
ter. And it muſt be a ſtrange ſort of Geometry, that
makes fifteen cubits of water reach to the top of the
higheſt Hills. Laſtly, the ſame Hiſtory of Moſes ſays,
the tops of the Mountains were diſcover’d, when the
waters begun to decreaſe, Gen. 3.5. Is not that a plain
demonſtration that they were cover'd before, and co-
ver'd with thoſe waters.
We may therefore ſafely conclude two things. Firſt,
that this new Hypotheſis, beſides all other faults, is
contrary to the general expoſition
* Thislie acknowledges,p.325.(11'e
*xpound a Text or two of Scripture ſo of the text of Moſes. Secondly,
as none ever did; and deferring the coña
that it is contrary to the general re-
nou receivid ſence,put an unuſia/Glofs
my pon them, not to ſay, idle Finvoin, ceiv'd Doctrine of the Deluge. And
prizate interpretation, and p. 359.
if he has deliver'd a doctrine, con-
trary to theſe two, methinks, it ſhould be hard for
him to maintain his ground, and not pronounce at
the ſame time, what he dreads ſo much to ſpcak,That
the Church of God has ever gone on in an irrational way
of explaining the Deluge.
But
The Theory of the Earth.
71
But let's reflect a little upon this Fifteen-cubit De-
luge; to ſee what figure it would make, or what ex-
ecution it would do upon mankind and upon other
Creatures. If you will not believe Moſes as to the
overflowing of the Mountains, at leaſt
, I hope, you
will believe him as to the univerſal deſtruction made
by the Deluge. Hear his words, Gen. 7.21, 22, 23.
we'l take only the laſt verſe, which is this, And every
living ſubſtance was deſtroyed, which was upon the face of
the ground. Both man and cattle, and creeping things,
and the fowl of the heavens ; and they were deſtroyed from
the Earth: and Noah only remained alive, and they that
were with him in the Ark. Now I would gladly know
how this could be verifyed in a fifteen-cubic Deluge.
The birds would naturally fly to the tops of Trees,
when the ground was wet.
And the Beaſts would
retire by degrees to the Mountains and higher parts
of the Earth, as the lower begun to be overflow'd;
and if no waters could reach them there, how werc
they all deſtroy'd, while they had ſo many Sanctua-
ries and places of refuge ?
Or if you ſuppoſe ſome of theſe Creatures had not
wit enough to ſave themſelves, (though their wit and
inſtincts licchiefly in that)at leaſt mankind would not be
ſo ſtupid: when men ſee the waters begin to riſe, they
could not fail to retire into Mountains. And tho
the upper ſtories of their houſus might be ſufficient
to lave them from fifteen cubits of water ; yet if fear
made them think themſelves not ſecure there, whi-
ther could it drive them, but ſtill into higher places.
And an Houſe feared upon an Eminency, or a Caſtle
upon a Rock, would be always a ſafe retreat from this
diminutive Deluge. I ſpeak all this upon the ſuppo-
litions of the Excepter, who allows not only Moun-p.215,216,
tains and Rocks, but alſo Caſtles and Cities before the 292, &c.
Deluge: built of good Timber, and Stone, and Iron,
and ſuch ſubſtantial materials. But how in ſuch a
caſe, and in ſuch a ſtate of things, all mankind ( ex-
cept Noah, and his Family ) ſhould be deſtroy'd by fif-
teen cubits of water, is a lump of Incredibilities, too
hard and big for me to ſwallow.
K
Buc
72
pool
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
But there is fill another difficulty, that we have not
mention'd. As choſe that were upon the Land might
eaſily ſave themſelves from ruine, lo thoſe that were
upon che Sea, in hips, would never come in danger.
For what would it ſignifie to them, if the Sea was
made a few fathoms deeper, by theſe new waters?
It would bear their vefſels as well as it did before, and
would be no more to them than a Spring-ride.And laſtly
how ſhall we juſtifie the Divine Wiſedom, which gave
luch punctual orders, for the building of an Ark, to
ſave Noals
, and a ſet of Creatures, for a new World:
when there were ſo many more eaſie and obvious
ways to preſerve them, without chat trouble?
Theſe objections, in my opinion, are ſo plain and
full, that it is not needful to add any more. Nor to
anſwer ſuch evaſions as the new Theoriſt attempts to
make to ſome of them. As for inſtance, to that plain
P. 330. objection from Moſes's words, that the Mountains were
cover'd with the waters, he ſays, firſt, that it is a Synec-
doche, where the whole is put for a part. Or Second-
ly, 'tis an Hyperbole : where more is ſaid than under-
(tood. Or Thirdly, 'tis a Poetical Hiſtory. Or Laſtly,
P. 332, if none of theſe will do, by the Tops of the Mountains
is to be underſtood the bottoms of the Mountains: and
that cures all. The truth is, he has taken a great deal
of pains in the next Chapter to cure an incurable Hy-
potheſis. We will give you but one inſtance more.
'Tis about the appearance of the tops of the Mountains
at the decreaſe of the Deluge. Which argues ſtrongly
that chey were cover’d in the Deluge. But take it in
his own words, with the anſwer, It is recorded, Gen.8.5.
that the waters decreaſed continually until the tenth month,
and on the firſt day of the month, WERE THE TOPS OF
THE MOUNT AINS SEEN. Now if the mountains had
not been quite under water, and ſo inviſible for the time
they were overwhelmed; how could they be ſaid to become
viſible again, or to be ſeen upon the Floods going off? This
is a plain and bold objection. And after two an-
(wers to it, which he ſeems to diſtruſt, his 3d and laſt
P 33). is this: If theſe two conſiderations will not ſatisfie, we muſt
carry on the enquiry a little further, and ſeek for a Third.
And truly fome one or other muſt needs be found out.-----
Thirdly
533.
1
The Theory of the Earth.
73
3
Thirdly, therefore we conſider: that the tops of the moun-
tains may be ſaid to be ſeen, at the time mentioned, upon
account of their EMERGENCY OUT OF DARKNESS,
NOT OUT OF WATERS. This is his final Anſwer.
The tops of the Mountains, at the decreaſe of the
Deluge, were ſeen: not that they were covered be-
fore with water, ſays he, but with darkneſs. Where
finds he this account? 'tis neither in the Text nor in
reaſon. If it was always ſo dark, and the tops of the
Mountains and Rocks naked and prominent every
where, how could the Ark avoid them in that dark-
ncſs? Moreover, if the Deluge was made in that
gentle way that he ſuppoſes, I ſee no reaſon to imagine,
that there would be darkneſs, after the forty-days-
rain. For theſe rains being faln, and all the Vapours
and clouds of the Air, diſcharg’d, methinks there ſhould
have enſued an extraordinary clearneſs of the Air: as
we often ſee after rainy ſeaſons. Well, 'tis true : But
the rains, he ſuppoſes, were no ſooner faln, but the Sun
retracted them again in Vapours: with that force
and ſwiftneſs that it kept the Air in perpetual darkneſs.
Thus he ſays afterwards. He's mightily beholden to
the Sun, upon many accounts: and the Sun is no leſs
beholden to him: for he gives him a miraculous power
to raiſe Mountains, and draw up Waters. 'Tis well
the Sun did not prcſently fall to his old work again, of
raiſing Mountains out of this moiſt Earth: as the Ex-
cepter ſays he did, when the Eartha was firſt drain'd.
That he contented himſelf now to ſuck up the Wa-See ch.com
ters only, and let the Earth alone: We are not a little
beholden to him for this. For he ſeems to have had
the ſame power and opportunity, at the decreaſe of
the Deluge, of making new ravages upon the Earth,
that he had before when it was firſt drain’d. But let's
ſee, how or when, theſe waters were luck'd up, or re-
ſolv'd into vapours.
Upon the expiration of the 40 days rain, whether
was the Air purg'd of Vapours and clear, or no? Yes,
it was purg'd. He ſays (p.343.) The Atmoſphere was ne-
ver ſo exhauſted of Vapours, and never ſo thin: as when the
waters were newly come down. Then in that clear Air,
the tops of the Mountains might have been ſeen, if
they
p. 341.
K 2
74 An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
p. 341.
they lay above water. But Moſes ſays, it was in the
Gem. 8. 5. Tenth Month that they begun to be ſeen, when the Wa-
ters were decreas'd; 'twas therefore the Waters, not
the groſs Air, that hindered the fight of them before.
And according to this Method of the Excepter, after
the firſt Forty days, the Deluge begun to decreaſe.
For the Sun forth-with ſet his Engines a work, and
reſoly'd the Waters into vapor and exhalations, ac
ſuch a rate, that he preſently made all the Atmoſphere
dark with thick Miſts and Clouds: and, in proportion,
lefſen'd the Waters of the deluge. But we do not
read in Moſes of any abatement in the Deluge, till the
end of one hundred and fifty days; (Gen. 8. 3.) which
is four months after this term. The truth is, The
whole notion of ſpending the Waters of the Deluge by
Evaporation, is no better than what the Excepter ſu-
P. 343. ſpected it would be thought: Ameer fancy, a whimſi-
cal groundleſs figment. For what could the Sun do, in
the Northern and Southern parts of the World, to-
wards the exhaling of theſe Waters? And in the tem-
perate Climates, why ſhould they not fall again in
Rains, (if he had a power to exhale them) as they do
now? Was not the Earth in the ſame poſition, and
the Sun of the ſame force? Beſides, where does he find
this notion in Scripture, that the Waters of the Deluge
were conſum'd by Evaporation? Moſes ſays, the Waters
returned from off the Earth, in going and returning: Gen.
8. 3, 5. that is, after frequent reciprocations, they
ferled at length in their Chanels. Where bounds were
ſet them, that they might not paſs over: that they return
not again to cover the Earth. Seeing therefore this no-
tion hath no foundation, either in Scripture or rea-
fon, 'tis rightly enough ftyld, in the Excepter's words,
a meer fancy, and groundleſs figment.
But I think we have had enough of theſe ſhifts and
cvaſions. Let us now proceed to the 2d. part of his
new Hypotheſis
, which is this: That the Abyſs or Te-
home-Rabbah, which was broken open at the Deluge,
and (together with the Rains) made thc Flood, was
nothing but the Holes and Caverns of Rocks and
Mountains: which open'd their mouths at that time,
and pour'd out a great quantity of Water. To ſup-
1, 303
port
The Theory of the Earth.
79
I multe zbove it.
port this new notion of Tebom-Kabbal, he alledgech but
one ſingle Text of Scripture: Pſal.79.15. He clave the
Rocks in the Wilderneſs, and gave them drink,as out of the
Great Depths. That is, copiouſly and abundantly as it is
were out of the great Deep. So the next Verſe implies,
and ſo it is generally underſtood. As you may fee botlı
by Interpreters, and alſo by the Septuagint and Vulgate
Tranſlations, and thoſe of the Chaldee Paraplıraſe and
the Syriack. But the Excepter, by all means, will have
theſe holes in the Rocks to be the ſame with the
Moſaical Abyſs
, or Great Deep, that was broken open
at the Deluge. So the Great Deep was not one thing,
or one continued Cavity, as Moſes repreſents it, but ten
thouſand holes, ſeparate and diſtant one from another.
Neither muſt the Great Deep, according to him, fig-
nifie a low place, but an high place. For he confeſics
theſe Caverns were higher than the
* p,303. But though theſe Caverns
common level of the Earth. But
be called Deeps,we muſt not take them
I do not ſee, how, with any tolera- for professnd places,thu went down into
ble propriety or good ſence, that, of it: 031 the contrary, they were fi-
which is higher than the Surface of
the Earth, can be call'd the Great Deep. An Abyſs, in
the Earth, or in the Water, is certainly downwards, in
reſpect of their common Surface. As much as a Pit is
downwards. And what is downwards from us, we can-
not ſuppoſe to be above us, without confounding all
dimenſions, and all names,of things. Calling that low,
which is high:a Mountain a Valley,or a Garret a Cellar.
Neither is there any thing in this Text, Pſal. 78. 15.
that can juſtly induce us to believe the Great Abyſs to
be the ſame thing with Caverns in Rocks. For whether
you ſuppoſe it to be noted here as a miraculous thing,
that God ſhould give them Water
out of a Rock, or out of a FLINT*, * PA1.114.7,8.Tremble thon E.1rti
at the preſence of the Lord,ut the pre-
as plentifully, as if it had been out force of the God of Jacob,71 bich turned
of the Great Abyſs. Or whether you
the Rock into . jtunding water,the flint
into a forvitaii oj litcrs.
underſtand the original of Foun-
tains to be noted here: which are
70031 gottbered the Congregation together
before the Rock,ind he lirid onto them,
ſaid in Scripture to come from the Hur 5101 you rebels : mit ire fetch
Sea, or the great Abyſs; neither of jes lift up his hand, and with his rod
theſe fences make any thing to the
be foote the Rockrricc: and the ?!':-
ter Cilme out ozboradiantly.
purpoſe of the new Hypotheſis, and
Nuin.20.10, 0, And Mofes.ind As.
70!! mitter 01t of this Rock? And Mo-
Pec
76
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
1
-
yet they are the faireſt and eaſieſt ſence that can be
put upon the words: and that which agrees beſt with
other places of Scripture, where the ſame matter of
fact, or the ſame Hiſtory is related. And therefore
there can be no neceſſity, from the Text, of changing
the general notion and ſignification of Deep or Abyſs
.
Both from that which it bach in common uſe, and
that which it hach in Scripture-uſe.
I ſay, as in the common uſe of words, Deep or A-
byſs ſignifies ſome low or inferiour place : So the
ge-
neral uſe of it in Scripture, is in the ſame fence. Ei-
ther to ſignifie the Sea, or ſome ſubterraneous place.
Who ſhall deſcend into the Abyſs or Deep: ſays the Apoſtle,
Rom. 10.7. Is that as much, as if he had ſaid, 'Who
fall aſcend into the holes of the Rocks? And when
Jacob ſpeaks of the bleſſings of the Abyſs, or of the
Deep, he calls them the bleſſings of the Deep that ly-
eth under: Gen. 49. 25. In like manner, Moſes him-
felt calls it the Deep that coucheth beneath : Deut.33.13.
And I know no reaſon why we ſhould not underſtand
the ſame Deep there, that he mencioned before in the
Hiſtory of the Deluge. Which therefore was ſubter-
raneous, as this is. Then as for the other uſe of the
word, namely, for the Sea, or any part of the Sea,
( whoſe bottom is always lower than the level of the
Earth) that is the moſt common uſe of it in Scri-
pture. And I need not give you Inſtances, which are
every where obvious.
One muſt needs think it ſtrange therefore, that any
Man of judgment ſhould break thorough, both the
common uſe of a word, and ſo many plain Texts of
Scripture that ſhew the ſignification of it, for the ſake
of one Text; which, at moſt, is but dubious. And
then lay ſuch ſtreſs upon that new ſignification, as to
found a new doctrine upon it. And a doctrine that
is neither ſupported by reaſon, nor agrees with the
Hiſtory of the Deluge. For, as we noted before, at
the decreaſe of the Deluge, the Waters arc ſaid to re-
turn from off the Earth: Gen. 8.3. Did they not return
to the places from whence they came? but if thoſe
places were the Caverns in the Rocks, whoſe mouthis
lay higher than the Surface of the Deluge, as he fay's
they
The Theory of the Earth.
7?
they did : I ſee no poſſibility of the Waters returning P. 303.203.
into them. But the Excepter hath found out a mar-
vellous invention to evade this argument. He will
have the returning of the Waters, to be underſtood of
their returning into their Principles, (that is, into va-
pors) not to their Places. In good time:So the Dove's
returning, was her returning into her Principles: that
is, into an Egg, not into the Ark. Subtleries ill-foun-
ded, argue two things, wit and want of judgment.
Moſes ſpeaks as plainly of the local return of the Wa-
ters, in going and returning; as of the local going and
returning of the Raven and Dove. See Gen. 8. 3;&5,
compard with Verſe 7th. & 9th.
Laſtly, That we may end this Diſcourſe; the whole
notion of theſe Water-pots in the tops of Mountains,
and of the broaching of them at the Deluge, is a
groundleſs imagination. What reaſon have we co
believe, that there were ſuch Veſſels then, more than
now: if there was no Fraction of the Earth, at the
Deluge, to deſtroy them? And he ought to have gag'd
theſe Casks, (according to his own rule*) and told us * t. 3
the number and capacity of them, that we might have
made ſome judgment of the effect. Beſides, if the o-
pening the Abyſs at the Deluge, had been the opening
of Rocks, why did not Moſes expreſs it ſo: and tell us,
that the Rocks were cloven, and the waters guſhed out,
and ſo made the Deluge? This would have been as
intelligible, if it had been true, as to tell us that the
Tehom-Rabbah was broken open. But there is not one
word of Rocks, or the cleaving of Rocks, in the Hiſtory
of the Flood. Upon all accounts therefore, we muſt
conclude, that this Virtuoſo might have as well ſu-
ſpected, that his whole Theory of the Deluge, as one
part of it, would be accounted a meer fancy, and ground- p. 343
leſs figment.
CH A P. XVI.
THIS Chapter is made up of Eight Objections
,
againſt his own Hypotheſis. And thoſe that
have a mind to ſee them, may read them in the Au-
thor. I have taken as much notice of them, as I
Ebought
78
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
thought neceſſary, in the precedent Chapter: and
therefore leave the Excepter now to deal with them
all together. I omitted one objection ( P:311.) con-
cerning the ſhutting up of the Abyſs, and the Foun-
tains of the Abyſs, becauſe it was anſwer'd before in
the Engliſh Theory, p.104. namely, There were foun-
tains in the Abyſs, as much as Windows in Heaven :
and thoſe were ſhut up, as well as theſe; char is, ceas’d
to act, and were put into a condition to continue the
Deluge no longer.
CH A P. XVII.
ODC
HERE is nothing in this Chapter againſt the
Truth of the Theory, but the Author is blam'd
for believing it to be true. I think he had been more
blame-worthy, if he had troubled the World with a
Theory which he did not believe to be true: and ta-
ken ſo much pains to compoſe, what he thought him-
ſelf no better than a Romance. As to what the The-
oriſt has ſaid in reference to his aſſurance or belief of
the Theory, which the Excepter calls poſitiveneſs: up-
on examination, I cannot find any thing amiſs in his
conduct, as to that particular. For, firit, he impoſes
his ſentiments upon no man: He leaves every
their full liberty of diſſenting. Preface to the Reader,
at the end. Laſtly, in things purely ſpeculative, as theſe
and no ingredients of our Faith, it is free to differ
from one another, in our opinions and ſentiments; And fo
I remember S. Auſtin hath obſerv'd, upon this very
fubje&t of Paradiſe. Wherefore as me deſire to give no
offence our ſelves, ſo neither ſhall we take any at the diffe-
rence of judgment in others. Provided, this liberty be mu-
tual, and that we all agree to ſtudy PEACE, TRUTH,
and a GOOD LIFE. And as the Theoriſt impoſes his
Sentiments upon no man, ſo, as to matter of certainty,
he diſtinguiſheth always berwixt the ſubſtance of the
Theory, and particularities
. So, at the latter end of
i sig. Theor. the Firſt Book, this profeſſion is made; I mean this only,
ſpeaking about certainty, as to the general parts of the
Theory. For as to particularities, I look upon them only as
problematical: and accordingly I affirm nothing therein,
but
are,
M 150.
The Theory of the Earıb.
79
!
P. 288,
but with a power of revocation, and a liberty to change my
opinion when I ſhall be better inform’d. And according-
ly, he ſays in another place: I know how ſubje&t we are Eng. Theor's
to miſtakes, in theſe great and remote things
, when we de- p. 96.
ſcend to particularities. But I am willing to expoſe the
Theory to a full triall, and to Shew the way for any to ex-
amine it, provided they do it with equity and ſincerity.
I have no other deſign than to contribute my endeavours to
find out truth, &c. Laſtly, To cite no more places,
he ſays, There are many particular explications that are Eng. Thecr.
to be conſider’d with more liberty and latitude: and may,
perhaps, upon better thoughts and better obſervations, be
corrected, &c. The Theoriſt having thus ſtated and
bounded his belief or aſſurance, and given liberty of
diffenting to all others, according to their particular
judgments or inclinations, I ſee nothing unfair or un-
decent in this conduct. How could the Obſervator
have made it more unexceptionable? Would he have
had the Theoriſt to have profeſt Scepticiſm: and de-
clar'd that he believ'd his own Theory no more than
aRomance or phantaſtical Idea ? That had been, botla
to bely his own conſcience, and to mock the World.
I remember I have heard a good Author once wilh,
That there were an AEt of Parliament, that whoever
Printed a Book, hhould, when he took a Licence,
Swear, that he thought the Contents of his Book to be
true, as to ſubſtance. And I think ſuch a method
would keep off a great many impertinencies. We
ought not to trouble the World with our roving
thoughts, meerly out of an itch of Scripturiency,
when we do not believe our ſelves what we Write.
I muſt always profeſs my aſſent to the ſubſtance of
that Theory: and am the more confirm'd in it, by the
weakneſs and inefficacy of thele Exceptions.
We need not take notice of the particular citations
he makes uſe of, to prove this poſitiveneſs of the The-
orift. For they only affirm, what we ſtill own, That
the Theory is more than an Idea: or that it is not an
Imaginary Idea: or that it is a reality. And, together
with its proofs from Scripture: cſpecially from S. Pe-
ter: hath more than the certainty of a bare Hypotheſis,
or a moral certainty. Theſe are the expreſſions he cices,
L
and
80
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
to.
1
L
)
p. 43
and we own all, that, in fair conſtruction, they amount
And find no reaſon, either from the nature of
the thing, or from his objections, to change our opi-
nion, or make any Apology for too much poſitive-
neſs.
I wiſh the Excepter had not more to anſwer for,
as to his Partiality: than the Theoriſt hach, for his
poſitiveneſs
. And now that we draw to a concluſion,
it will not be amiſs to obſerve, how well the Excep-
ter hath anſwered that character, which he gave bio-
ſelf at the beginning of his work. Thcle are his
words. This I will endeavour to do, namely, to exa-
mine the Theory, with all ſincerity; and that only as a
Friend and Servant to Trnth. And therefore with fuch
Candour, Meekneſs, and Modeſty, as becomes one who af-
ſumes and glories in ſo fair a Character: And alſo with
ſuch reſpečt to the Virtuoſo who wrote the Theory, as may
teſtifie to the world, that I efteem his Learning, while I
queſtion his opinion. 'Tis of liccle conſequence what
opinion he has of the Virtuoſo, as he calls him. But
let us ſee with what ſincerity and meekneſs, he has cx-
amin’d his Work. As to his ſincerity, we have given
you ſome proofs of it before (p. 26.) both in his de-
fective and partial citations: and alſo, in his never
taking notice of the laſt Edition of the Theory :
where ſeveral citations he has made uſo of, are not
extant. Now, by his own Rule, he ought to have
had regard to this; for he ſays, (p: 356.) He will
there take notice only of the Engliſh Edition, as coming
out after the other : and ſo with more deliberation and ma-
ture thoughts of things. By the ſame realon, lay I, he
ought to have taken notice of the laſt Edition of the
Theory, as being the laſt product, and the moſt de
liberate and mature thoughts of the Author. But this,
it ſeems, was not for his purpoſe.
So much for his Sincerity: Now for his Meekneſs.
So impatient heis to fall upon his Adverſary, that he
begins his charge in the Preface: and a very fierce
one it is. (p.111.) The Theoriſt hath aſſaulted Relin
gion, and that in the very foundation of it. Here I ex-
pected to have found two or three Articles of the
Creed aſſaulted or knock'd down by the Theory. But
that
a
The Theory of the Earth.
SI
P..SE
that is not the caſe, it ſeems : he underſtands fomc-
thing more general: namely, our contradicting Scri-
pture. For ſo he explains himſelf in the next Page.
In ſeveral things (as will appear by our diſcourſe ) it con-
tradicts Scripture; and by too poſitive aſſerting the truth
of its Theorems, makes that to be falſe, upon which our re-
ligion is founded. Let us remember, that this contra-
dicting Scripture, here pretended, is onely in natural
things: and alſo obſerve, how far the Excepter hin-
felf, in ſuch things, hath contradicted Scripture. As
for other reproofs which he gives us, thoſe that are
more gentle, I eaſily paſs over: but ſome-where he
makes our aſſertions too bold an affroni to Suipture. p.78.
And in another place repreſents them, as (either di-
rectly, or conſequentially ) Blaſphemiy againſt the Holy
Ghoft: which is the unpardonable Sin: Matt.12.31.
There is no pleaſure in repeating ſuch expreſſions,
and dreadful ſentences. Let us rather obferve, if the
Excepter hath not made himſelf obnoxious to them.
But firſt, we muſt ſtate the caſe truly, that ſo the
blame may not fall upon the Innocent. The caſe
therefore is this, Whether, to go contrary to the Letter
of Scripture, in things that relate to the natural
World, be deſtroying the foundations of Religion : affron-
ting Scripture: and blaſpheming the Holy Ghoft. In the
Cale propos'd, We take the Negative, and ſtand upon
that Plea. But the Excepter hath taken the Affirma-
tive: and therefore all thoſe heavy charges muſt fall
upon himſelf, if he go contrary to the Literal fence
of Scripture, in his Philoſophical opinions or aſſerci-
And that he hath done ſo, we will give you
fome Inſtances, out of this Treatiſe of his: Pag.314.
He ſays, It is moſt abſurd to think, that the Earth is the
center of the World. Then the Sun ſtands ſtill, and the
Earth moves, according to his doctrine. But this is
exprefly contrary to Scripture, in many places. The
Sun rejoices, as a ſtrong Man, to run bis raie, ſays Pl.19.5.6
David : His going forth is from the end of the Heaven, Fos; 10.12,
and his circuit unto the ends of it. No ſuch thing, ſays 2 Kin
.
the Excepter: The Sun bath no race to run: he is fist Ira. 38. :
in his ſeat, without any progrellive motion. He hach
no courſe from one end of the Heavens to the otlicr.
L 2
Jo
ons.
20.
Si An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
p. 157.
20.
Gem. 8. 5.
In like manner, Sun, ſiand thoz fiill upon Gibeon, fai's
the Sacred Author: and the Sun food ſtill. No, ſays
the Excepter, 'twas the Earth stood ftill
, upon that mi-
racle: for the Sun always ſtood ftill. And 'tis abſurd,
yea moſt abſurd, to think otherwiſe. And he blames
Tycho Brahe for following Scripture in this particular.
Now is not chis, in the language of the Excepter, to
deſtroy the foundations of Religion : To affront Scripture:
and blafpheme againſt the Holy Ghoſt? But this is nos
all. The Excepter ſays, (Chap. 10.) the Sun rais'd up
the Mountains on the 3d. Day. And the Sun was not
in being till the 4th. Day: according to Scripture:
Gen. 1. 14. The Moon alſo, which according to Scri-
pture, was not created till the 4th. Day: he ſays, would
hinder the formation of the Earth, which was done
p. 74. the 3d. Day. Laſtly, In his new Hypotheſis, he makes
the Waters of the Deluge, to be but fifteen Cubits
higher than the Plain, or common Surface of tlie
Gen. 7. 19, Earth. Which Scripture affirms exprefly to have co-
ver'd the tops of the higheſt Hills, or Mountains, un-
der Heaven. Theſe two things are manifeſtly incon-
ſiſtent. The Scripture ſays, they cover'd the tops of
the higheſt Mountains: And the Exceprer ſays, they
reach but fifteen Cubics, about, or upon the skirts of
them. This, I think, is truly to contradict Scripture:
or, according to his talent of loading things with great
9.216. words, This is not onely flatly
, but loudly contraditory to
the moſt expreſs word of the Infallible God.
Theſe obſervations, I know, are of ſmall uſe, unleſs
perhaps to the Excepter himſelf
. But if you pleaſe,
upon this occaſion, let us reflect a little upon the Li-
teral ſtyle of Scripture: and the different authority of
that ſtyle, according to the matter that it treats of.
The ſubject matter of Scripture is either ſuch, as lies
without the cognizance and comprehenſion of humane
reaſon, or ſuch as lies within it. If it be the former
of theſe, 'cis what we call properly and purely Reve-
lation. And there we muſt adhere to the literal ſtyle,
becauſe we have nothing to guide us but thar. Such
is the Doctrine of the Trinity, and the Incarnation:
wherein we can have nothing to authorize our devi-
ation from the Letter and words of Scripture. And
there-
::
The Theory of the Earth.
S;
therefore the School-Divines, who have ſpun thoſe
Doctrines into a multitude of Niceries and Subtleries,
had no warrant for what they did, and their conclu-
fions are of no authority.
The ſecond matter or ſubject of Scripture, is ſuch,
as falls under the view and comprchention of Reaſon,
more or leſs: and; in the ſame proportion, gives us a
liberty to examine the Literal fence: how far it is con-
liſtent with reaſon, and the faculties of our mind. Of
this nature there are ſeveral things in the Holy Wri-
tings, both Moral, Theological, and Natural, wlierein
we recede from the Letrer, when it is manifeſtly con-
trary to the dictates of reaſon. I will give ſome In-
Itances in every kind. Firſt, as to Moral things. Our
Saviour ſays, If thy right Eye offend thee, pluck it out. 11.4. 5. 24.
If thy right hand offend thee, cut it off. There is no Man 30.
that thinks himlelf oblig'd to the Literal practice of
this doctrine: And yet it is plainly deliver’d, you ſee,
in theſe terms, in the Goſpel. Nay, which is more,
our Saviour backs and enforces the letter of this do-
ctrine with a Reaſon: For it is profitable for thee that one
of thy members ſhould periſh, and not that thy whole Body
Jhould be caſt into Hell. As if he had intended that his
Precept ſhould have been really executed according to
the Letter. In like manner, our Saviour ſays, If ang
man will ſue thee at Law, and take away thy Coat, let him
bave thy Cloak alſo. And yet there is no Chriſtian ſo
good-natur'd, as to practiſe chis: nor any Caſuilt ſo
rigid, as to enjoyn it, according to the Letter
. Other
Infanccs you may fee in our Saviour's Sermon upon
the Mount, where we do not ſcruple to lay aſide the
Letrer, when it is judg’d contrary to the Light of Na-
ture, or impracticable in humane Society.
In all other things alſo, chat lie within the ſphere
of humane reaſon, we are allow'd to examine their
practicability, or their credibility. To inſtance in ſome-
thing Theological: The words of Confecration in the
Sacrament. Our Saviour, when he inſtituted the laſt
Supper, us’d theſe words; This is my Body: taking the
Bread into his land. Which words joyn'd with that
action, are very formal and expreſlive. Yet we do
not fcruple to forſake the Literal lence, and take the
words
84
An Anſwer to the late Exceptions made againſt
pl. 7.3.
poc. 3. 5.
& 20, 12.
words in another way. But upon what warranc do
we this? Becauſe the literal fence contains an abſur-
dity: Becauſe it contradicts the light of Nature? Be-
cauſe it is inconſiſtent with the Idea of a Body, and
ſo deſtroys it ſelf. In like manner, upon the idea of
the Divine Nature, we diſpute Abſolute Reprobation,
and an Eternity of Torments, againſt the letter of
Scripture. And, Laſtly, Whether the Reſurrection-
Body conſiſts of the ſame individual parcels and par-
ticles, whereof the mortal Body conſiſted, before it
was putrified or diſpers’d. And whether the Book
of Life are to be underſtood in a literal fence.
The laſt Head is of ſuch things as belong to the Na-
tural World. And to this may be reduc'd innume-
rable Inſtances, where we leave the literal ſence, if in-
conſiſtent with Science, or experience. And the truch
is, if we ſhould follow the Vulgar Style and literal ſence
of Scripture, we ſhould all be Anthropomorphites,as to the
Nature of God: And as to the Nature of his works in the
external Creation, we muſt renounce Philofophy and
Natural Experience, if the deſcriptions and accounts
given in Scripture, concerning the Heavens, the
Earth, the Sea, and other parts of the World, be
received as accurate and juſt repreſentations of the
1tate and properties of thoſe Bodies. Neither is there
any danger loſt this hould affect or impeach the Di-
vinc Veracicy; for Scripture never undertook, nor
was ever deſigned to teach us Philoſophy, or the Arts
and Sciences. And whatſoever the Light of Nature
can reach and comprehend, is improperly the Subject
of Revelation. But ſome men, out of love to their
own eaſe, and in defence of their ignorance, are not
only for a Scripture-Divinicy, but alſo for a Scripture-
Philoſophy. 'Tis a cheap and compendious way, and
ſaves them the trouble of farther ſtudy or examina-
tion.
Upon the whole, you ſee, it is no fault to recede
from the literal ſence of Scripture, but the fault is
when we leave it without a juſt cauſe. As it is no
fault for a man to ſeparate from a Church: or for
a Prince to make war againſt his Neighbour: but to
do the one or the other, without a juſt cauſe, is a
real
The Theory of the Earth.
85
real fault. We all leave the literal ſence in certain
caſes, and therefore that alone is no ſufficient charge
againſt any man. But he that miakes a ſeparation, if
I may ſo call it, without good reaſons, he is truly ob-
noxious to cenſure. The great reſult of all therefore,
is this, to have ſome common Rule to direct us, when
every one ought to follow, and when to leave, the Li-
teral Sence. And that Rule which is generally agreed up-
on by good Interpreters, is this, Not to leave the li.
ecral Sence, when the ſubject matter will bear it,
without abſurdity or incongruity. This Rule I have
always propoſed to my ſelf, and always endeavoured
to keep cloſe to it. But ſome inconſiderare minds
make every departure from the Letter,let the Matter
or Cauſe be what it will, to be an affront to Scri-
pture. And there, where we have the greateſt liber-
ty, I mean in things that relate to the Natural world,
They have no more indulgence or moderation, than
if it was an intrenchment upon the Articles of Faith,
In this particular I cannot excuſe the preſent Ani-
madverter; yet I muſt needs ſay, he is a very Saint
in compariſon of another Animadverter, who hath
writ upon the ſame ſubiect, but neither like a Gentle-
man: nor like a Chriſtian: nor like a Scholar. And
ſuch Writings anſwer themſelves.
ܝܚܝ
)
+
FINI S.
BOOKS Printed for Walter Kettilby, at the Biſhop's
Head in St. Paul's Church-Yard.
H Η
TEnrici Mori Cantabrigienſis Opera Omnia, tum que Latini, tum
qua Anglicè ſcripta funt ; nunc vero Latinitate Donat a Inſti-
gatud Impenſis Generoſiſſimi Juvenis Johannis Kockfbuti Nobilis
Angli. In Three Vol. Folio.
The Theory of the Earth : containing an Account of the Ori-
ginal of the Earth, and of all the General Changes which it hath
already undergone, or is to undergo, till the Confummation of all
things. The two firſt Books concerning the Deluge, and concern.
ing Paradiſe. The two laſt Books concerning the Burning of the
World,and concerning the New Heavens and New Earth.
Telluris Theoria Sacra : Orbis noftri Originem á Mutationes Gene-
rales, quas ant jam ſubiit, ant olim fubiturus eft complectens. Libri
duo priores de Diluvio & Paradiſo. Libri diso pofteriores de Confl.:-
gratione Mundi & de futuro rerum ftatu.
Biſh. Overal's Convocation Book, MDCVI. concerning the
Government of God's Catholick Church, and the Kingdoms of
the whole World, &c.
Mr. Lamb's Dialogue between a Miniſter and his Pariſhioner,
concerning the Lord's Supper. Oftavo.
's Sermon before the King and Queen. Jan. 16. 1689.
Dr. Pelling's Sermon before the King and Queen. Dec. 8. 1689.
Dr. Sharp's Sermon before the Queen. April 11. 1690.
Dr. Henry More's Apocalypſis Apocalypſeos; Or the Revelation of
S. Fohn the Divine unveiled: containing a brief but perſpicuous
and continued Expoſition from Chapter to Chapter, and from
Verſe to Verſe, of the whole Book of the Apocalypſe. Quarto.
's Plain and continued Expoſition of the ſeveral Prophecies or
Divine Viſions of the Prophet Daniel, which have or may concern
the People of God, whether Jew or Chriſtian; whereunto is an-
nexed a threefold Appendage, touching three main Points, the firſt
relating to Daniel, the other two to the Apocalypſe. Quarto.
's Anſwer to ſeveral Remarks upon Dr. Herry More his Expoſi-
tions of the Apocalypſe and Daniel; as alſo upon his Apology :
Writen by S. E. Mennonite, and publiſhed in Engliſli by the An-
ſwerer : whereuntoare annexed two linall pieces, Arithmetica Apo-
calyptica, and Appendicula Apocalyptica. Ofall which an account is
given in the Preface. Quarto.
's Illuſtration of thoſe two abſtruſe Pooks in holy Scripture, the
Book of Daniel and the Revelation of S. John; by continued, brief,
but clear Notes, from Chapter to Chapter, and from Verle to
Verſe, with very uſeful and appoſite arguments prelix'd to each
Chapter, fram'd out of the Expoſitions of Dr. Henry More. quario.
's Paralipomena Propheticx, containing ſeveral Supplements and
Defences of Dr.Henry More his Expoſitions of the Prophet Daniel
and the Apocalypſe, whereby the impregnable firmneſs and ſolidity
of the ſaid Expoſitions is farther evidenced to the World. Where-
unto is alſo added Phililicrines upon R. B. his Notes on the Reve-
lation of S. Fohn. Quarto.
Dr. Sherlock's Examination and Refutation of fome Reaſons for
Non-conformiere
!
A SHORT
CONSIDERATION
OF
M' ERASMUS WARREN's
D E F E N C E
OF HIS
E X CEPTIONS
Againſt the
Τ Η Ε Ο RY
OF THE
E A R T H:
In a Letter to a Friend.
LONDON
Printed by R. Norton, for Walter Kettilby, at the Biſhops-
Head in S. Paul's Church-Yard, 1691.
(1)
---
A SHORT
CONSIDERATION
M' ERASMUS WARREN'S
M
DEFENCE of his EXCEPTIONS
Againſt the THEORY of the EARTH.
f
SIR,
Have read over Mr.Er. Warren's Defence
of his Exceptions againſt the Theory of
the Earth: which, it may be, few will do
after me; as not having curioſity or
patience enough, to read ſuch a long
Pamphler, of private or little uſe. Such altercations
i as theſe, are to you, I believe, as they are to me, a
fort of folly; but the Aggreſſor muſt anſwer for that,
who makes the trouble inavoidable to the Defendant.
And ʼtis an unpleaſant exerciſe: a kind of Wild.gooſe-
chaſe ; where he that leads muſt be followed, through
all his extravagances.
The Author of this Defence mult pardon me, if I
have leſs apprehenſions both of his judgment and
temper, than I had before. For, as he is too verboſe
and long-winded ever to make a cloſe reaſoner : So it
was unexpected to me to find his ſtyle ſo captious and
angry, as it is in this laſt paper. And the ſame ſtrain
continuing to the end, I was ſorry to ſee that his
bloud had been kept upon the fret, for ſo many
months together, as the Pamphlet was a-making.
He might have made his work much ſhorter, with-
out any loſs to the Sence. If he had left out his
popular enlargements, juvenile excurſions, ſtories and
It rains of Country-Rhetorick, (whereof we hall give
you ſome inſtances hereafter ) his Book would have
been reduc'd to half the compals. And if from that
reduc'd half, you take away again trifling aliercacions
and
A 2
?
A ſhort Conſideration of the Defence
+
!
and pedantick repartees, the remainder would fall in-
to the compaſs of a few pages. For my part, I am
always apt to ſuſpect a man that makes me a long
anſwer: for the precile point to be ſpoken to, in a
multitude of words is eaſily loſt: and words are of-
ten multiplied for that very purpoſe.
However if his humour be verboſe, it might have
been, at leaſt, more eaſie and inoffenſive: there having
been no provocation given him in that kind. But let
us gueſs, if you pleaſe, as well as we can, what it was
in the late Anſwer, that ſo much diſcompoſed the Ex-
cepter and altered his ſtyle. Either it muſt be the
words and language of that Anſwer: or the Sence of
it, without reſpect to the Language. As to the Words,
'tis true, he gives ſome inſtances of expreſſions offen-
ſive to him, yet they are but three or four, and thoſe
P. 31. metbinks, not very high: tho' he calls them the brats
of paſſion; they are theſe indiſcreet, rude, injudicious,
and uncharitable. Theſe characters, it ſeems, are ap-
plyed to the Excepter, in ſome part of the anſwer,
upon occaſion offer'd. And whether thoſe occaſi-
ons were juſt or no, I dare appeal to your judgment.
As to the word Rude, which ſeems the moſt harſh,
I had ſaid indeed, that he was rude to Anaxagoras: and
ſo he was, not to allow him to be a competent wit-
neſs in matter of fact, whom all Antiquity, ſacred and
prophane, hath repreſented to us as one of the great-
eft men amongſt the ancients. I had alſo ſaid in an-
other place, that, a rude, and injudicious defence of
Scripture by railing and ill language, is the true way to
leſſen and diſparage it. This I ſtill juſtifie as true, and
if lie apply it to himſelf, much good may it do him.
I do not remember that it is any where ſaid that he
was rude to the Theoriſt; if it be, 'tis poſſibly upon
occaſion of his charging him with Blaſphemy, borrid
blaſphemy againſt the Holy Ghoſt, for ſaying, the Earth
was diſſolvd at the Deluge. And I appeal to any man,
whether this is not an uncharitable, and a rude charge.
If a man had curſed God, or callid our Saviour an
Impoſtor, what could he have been charg'd with more,
than Blaſphemy, horrid blafphemy? And if the ſame
things be charg'd upon a nian, for ſaying, the Earth
was
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth.
3
was diffolv'd at the Deluge, either all crimes and er-
rors muſt be equal, or the charge muſt be rude. But
however it muſt be rude in the opinion of the The-
oriſt, who thinks this neither crime nor error.
What ſays the Defence of the Exceptions to this? P. 153
It makes uſe of diſtinctions for mitigation of the cen-
ſure: and ſays, it will indire&tly, conſequentially, or re-
dučtively, be of blaſphemous importance. Here blaſphe-
my is changed into blaſphemous importance, and borrid
blaſphemy into corſequential
, doc. Buc taking all theſe
mitigations, it ſeems however, according to his The-
ology, all errors in Religion are blafphemy, or of bla-
Sphemous importance. For all errors in Religion muſt
be againſt Scripture one way or other : at leaſt con-
fequentially, indirectly, or reductively: and all that
are ſo, according to the doctrine of this Author, mult
be blaſphemy or of blaſphemous importance. This is
crude Divinity, and the Anſwerer had reaſon to ſub-
joyn what we cited before, That, a rude and injudicious
defence of Scripture, is the true way to leſſen and dil-
1
parage it.
Thus much for rude and uncharitable : as for the
other two words, indiſcreet and injudicious, I cannot
eaſily be induc'd to make any apology for chem. On
the contrary, I'm afraid, I ſhall have occaſion to re-
peat theſe characters again, eſpecially the latter of
ihem, in the peruſal of this Pamphlét. However they
do not look like brats of paſion, as he calls them: buc
rather as cool and quiet judgments, made upon rea-
ſons and premiſes. i had forgot one expreſſion more.
The anſwer, it ſeems, ſomewhere calls che Excepter a
Dabbler in Philoſophy, which he takes ill. But that he
is a dabbler,both in Philoſophy and Aſtronomy, I be-
lieve will evidently appear upon this ſecond examina-
tion of the ſame paſſages upon which that Character
was grounded. We will therefore leave that to the
trial, when we come to thoſe paſſages again, in che
following diſcourſe.
Theſe, Sir, as far as I remember, are the words and
expretlions which he hath taken notice of, as offenſive
to him, and effects of paflion. But, mechinks, there
cannot be of force ſufficient to put him ſo much out
of
6
A ſhort Confideration of the Defence
1
of humour, and change his ſtyle ſo much, as we find
it to be in this laſt Pamphlet. And therefore I am in-
clinable to believe, that 'tis the ſence rather, than the
words or language of the Anſwer, that hach had this
effect upon him: and that ſome unhappy paſſages,
that have expos'd his miſtakes, were the true cauſes
of theſe reſentments. Such paſſages I will gueſs at, as
well as I can, and note them to you as they occur to
my memory.
But give me leave firſt, upon this occaſion of his
new way of writing, to diſtinguiſh and mind you of
three ſorts of arguing, which you may call, Reaſoning,
wrangling, and ſcolding. In fair reaſoning, regard is
had to Truth only, not to Victory : let it fall on whe-
ther ſide it will. But in wrangling and ſcolding, 'cis
victory that is purſued and aim'd at in the firſt place,
with little regard to truth. And if the contention be
manag‘d in civil ternis, 'tis but wrangling: if ia un-
civil, 'cis ſcolding. I will not ſo far anticipate your
judgment as to rank this Arguer in any of the three
orders: if you have patience to read over his Pam-
phlet, you will beſt ſee how and where to ſet him in
his proper place.
We now proceed to thoſe paſſages in the anſwer,
which probably have moſt exaſperated the Author of
Exc. p.77, the Exceptions and the Defence. In his Exceptions
he had ſaid, The Moon being preſent, or in her pre-
fent place in the Firmament, at the time of the Chaos,
ſhe would certainly trouble and diſcompoſe it, as ſe
does now the waters of the Sca: and, by that means,
hinder the formation of the Earth. To this we an-
ſwer'd, that the Moon that was made the 4th. day, could
not hinder the formation of the Earth, which was made the
3d. day. This was a plain incelligible anſwer: and at
the ſame time diſcover'd ſuch a manifeſt blunder in
the objection, as could not but give an uncaſıe thought
to him that made it.
However we muſt not deny,but that he makes ſome
Deſ. f:rz. attempt to ſhifc it off in his Reply: For he ſays, the
Earth formed the 3d. day, was Moſes's Earth, which the
Excepter contends for : but the Earth he diſputes againſt,
is the Theoriſt's, which could not be formed the 3d. day.
He
*
c.
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth.
5
-
He ſhould have added, and therefore would be hinder'd
by the Moon : otherwiſe this takes off nothing. And
now the queſtion comes to a clear ſtate : for when the
Excepter ſays, the Moon would have hinder’d the for-
mation of the Earth, either he ſpeaks upon Moſes's hy-
potheſis, or upon the Theoriſt's hypotheſis. Noc up- Exc.p.27
on the Theoriſt's Hypotheſis, for the Theoriſt does not 78.
ſuppoſe the Moon preſent then. And if he ſpeaks up-. Pz.I
on Moſes's Hypotheſis, the Moon that was made the
4th.day, muſt have hinder'd the formation of the Earch
the 3d. day. So that the objection is a blunder upon
either Hypotheſis.
Furthermore, whereas he ſuggeſts that the Anſwerer
makes uſe of Moſes's hypotheſis to confute his adver-
ſary, but does not follow it himſelf: 'Tis ſo far true,
that the Theoriſt never ſaid that Moſes's fix-days Crea-
tion was to be underſtood literally, but however it is
juſtly urg'd againſt thoſe that underſtand it literally,
and they muſt not contradict that interpretation
which they own and defend.
So much for the Moon,and this firſt paſſage, which
I ſuppoſe was" troubleſome to our Author. Bur he
makes the ſame blunder, in another place, as to the
Sun. Both the Luminaries, it ſeems, ſtood in his way.
In the roth. Chapter of his Exceptions, he gives us a
new Hypotheſis about the Origin of Mountains: which,
in ſhort, is this, that they were drawn or ſuckt out of
the Earth by the influence and inſtrumentality of the
Sun. Whereas the Sun was not made, according to
Moſes, till the 4th. day, and the Earth was form'd the
3d. day. 'Tis an unhappy thing to ſplit twice upon
the ſame rock, and upon a rock ſo viſible. He that
can but reckon to four, can tell whether the 3d. day,
or 4th. day, came ſooner.
To cure this Hypotheſis about the Origin of Moun-
tains, he takes great pains in his Defence, and attempts P.97,98,99. .
to do it chiefly by help of a diſtinction : dividing 108.
Mountains into Maritime and Inland. Now 'uis true,
ſays he, Theſe maritime Mountains, and ſuct
, as were made
with the hollow of the Sea, muſt riſe when that was funk or
depreſt: namely, the 3d. day. Yet Inland ones, he ſays,
might be raiſed ſome earlier, and ſome lacer: and by
the
A
A ſhort Conſideration of the Defence
6
Gen. c. 21.
the influence of the Sun. This is a weak and vain at-
tempt to defend his notion; for, beſides that this di-
ſtinction of Maritime and Inland Mountains, as ariſing
from different cauſes, and at different times, is without
any ground, either in Scripture or reaſon: if their dif-
ferent origin was admitted, the Sun's extracting theſe
Inland Mountains out of the Earth, would ſtill be ab-
ſurd and incongruous upon other accounts.
Scripture, I ſay, makes no ſuch diſtinction of Moun-
tains, made at different times and from different cau-
ſes. This is plain, ſeeing Moſes does not mention Moun-
tains at all in his fix-days Creation : nor any where
elſe, till the Deluge. What authority have we then
to make this diſtinction : or to ſuppoſe that all the
great Mountains of the Earth were not made toge-
ther? Beſides, what length of time would you require,
for the production of theſe Inland Mountains ? were
they not all made within the ſix-days Creation? hear
what Moſes ſays at the end of the 6th. day. Thus the
Heavens and the Earth were finiſhed, and all the hoſt of
them. And on the 7th. day, God ended his work which he
had made. Now if the Excepter ſay, that the Moun-
tains were all made within theſe fix-days, we will not
ſtand with him for a day or two: for that would
make little difference as to the action of the Sun. But
if he will not confine their production to Moſes's fix
days, how does he keep to the Moſaical Hypotheſis?
or how ſhall we know where he will ſtop, in his own
way for if they were not made within the ſix days,
for any thing he knows, they might not be made till
the Deluge ; ſeeing Scripture no where mentions
Mountains before the Flood.
And as Scripture makes no diſtinction of Maritime
and Inland Mountains, ſo neither hath this diſtinction
any foundation in Nature or Reaſon. For there is no
apparent or diſcernible difference betwixt Maritime
and Inland Mountains, nor any reaſon why they
ſhould be thought to proceed from different cauſes,
or to be rais’d at different times. The Maritime
Mountains are as rocky, as ruderous, and as irregular
and various in their ſhape and poſture, as the Inland
Mountains. They have no diſtinctive characters, nor
any
}
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Eart) 7
any different properties, internal or external : in their
matter, form, or compoſition : that can give "is any
ground to believe, that they came from a different
Original. So that this diſtinction is meerly precarious,
neither founded in Scripture nor reaſon: buc made
for the nonce to ſerve a turn.
Beſides, what bounds will you give to theſe Mari-
tine Mountains ? are they diſtinguiſht from Inland
Mountains barely by their diſtance from the Sea, or
by ſome other Character ? If barely by diſtance, tell
us then how far from the Sea do che Maritime Moun-
tains reach, and where do the Inland begin, and how
ſhall we know the Terminalis Lapis ? Eſpecially in a
continued chain of Mountains, that reach from the
Sea many hundreds of miles Inland: as the Alpes from
the Ocean to Pontus Euxinus, and Taurus, as he ſays, Def. p. 14;
fifteen hundred miles in length, from the Chineſe 0-
cean to the Sea of Pamphylia. In ſuch an uninterrup-
ted Ridge of Mountains, where do the Land-Moun-
tains end, and the Sea-mountains begin? Or what mark
is there, whereby we may know that they are not all
of the ſame race, or do not all ſpring from the ſame
original? Such obvious enquiries as theſe, ſhew ſuffici-
ently, that the diſtinction is meerly' arbitrary and ficti-
tious.
But ſuppoſe this diſtinction was admitted, and the
Maritime Mountains made che 3d. day, but Inland
Mountains I know not when: the great difficulty ſtill
remains, How the Sun rear'd up there Inland Moun-
tains afterwards. Or if his power be ſufficient for ſuch
effects, why have we not Mountains made ſtill to this
day ? ſeeing our Mountain-maker che Sun is still in the
Firmament, and ſeems to be as buſie at work, as ever.
The Defender hath made ſome anſwer to this queſtion, Def.p.99
in theſe words, The queſtion is put, why have we no Moun-
tains made now? It might as well bave been askt, fuys he,
zrhy does not the fire make a dough-bak'd loaf Jwell and bu
up? And, he ſays, this anſwer muſt be ſatisfactory to the
queſtion propounded. It muſt be, that is, for wam of a
better : for otherwiſe this Dowe-compariſon is unſa-
tisfactory upon many accounts. Firſt, there was no
ferment in the Earth, as in this Dowe-cake: at least it
B
IS
1
8
A ſhort Conſideration of the Defence
P. 289,
is not prov’d, or made appear, that there was any.
Nay, in the Exceptions, when this Hypotheſis was pro-
pos’d, there was no mention at all made of any fer-
ment or leaven in the Earth: but the effect was whol-
ly iniputed to Vapors and the Sun. But to ſupply their
defects, he now ventures to add the word fermentive,
Ibid lin. 19. as he calls it. A fermentive, flatulent principle, which
heav'd up the Earth, as Leaven does Dowe. But, be-
ſides, that this is a meer groundleſs and groſs Poftula-
tum, to ſuppoſe any ſuch leaven in the Earth; If there
had been ſuch a principle, it would have ſwoln the
whole maſs uniformly, heav'd up the exterior region
of the Earth every where, and ſo not made Moun.
tains, but a ſwoln bloated Globe.
This, Sir, is a 2d. paſſage, which I bought might
make the Defender uneaſie. We proceed now to a
3d. and 4th. in his Geography and Afironomy. In
the 14th. Chapter of his Exceptions, ſpeaking of the
change of the ſituation of the Earth, from a right po-
ſture to an oblique, he ſays, according to the Theory, the
Ecliptick in the Primitive Earth, was its Equino&tial now.
This, he is told by the Anſwer, is a great miſtake;
namely, to think that the Earth, when it chang’d its ſl-
tuation, chang'd its poles and circles. What is now re-
ply'd to this? He ſpeaks againſt a change, ſays the De-
fence, in the poles and circles of the Earth ; A needleſs
trouble, and occafion'd by his own overſight. For bad be
but lookt into the Errata's, he might have ſeen there, that
theſe parentheſes, upon which he grounded what he ſays,
ſhould have been left out. So this is acknowledg’d an
Erratum, it ſeems, but an erratum Typographicum ; not
in the ſence, but only in the parentheſes, which, he ſays,
ſhould have been left out. Let us then lay aſide the
Parentheſes, and the ſentence ſtands thus, For under the
Ecliptick, which in the primitive ſituation of the Earth,
according to the Theory, was its Equinoctial: and divided
the Globe into two Hemiſpheres, as the Equator does norr.
The dry ground, &c. How does this alter or mend the
ſence? Is it not ſtill as plainly affirm’d, as before, that,
according to the Theory, the Ecliptick in the Primi-
tive Earth was its Equinoctial ? And the ſame thing
is ſuppos’d throughout all this Paragraph. And.if he
will
Exc. p. 289
290.
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earch.
159.
will own the truth, and give things their proper name,
'cis down-right ignorance or a groſs miſtake in the
doctrine of the Sphere, which he would firſt father uponi
the Theory, and then upon the parentheſes
.
And this leads me to a 4th. paſſage, much-what of
the ſame nature, where he would have the Earth to
have been tranſlated out of the Æquator into the E-
cliptick, and to have chang’d the line of its motion a-
bout the Sun, when it chang'd its licuation. His words
are cheſe, So that in her annual motion about the Sun,ſhe, Exc.p. ise;
námely, the Earth before her change of ſituation, was
carried dire&tly under the Equinoctial. This is his mi-
ftake. The Earthi mov'd in the Ecliprick, both before
and after her change of ſituation: for the change was
not made in the Circle of her motion about the Sun;
but in her poſture or inclination in the ſame Circle.
Whereas he ſuppoſes that ſhe ſhifted both poſture, and Ibid.p.159
alſo her circuit about the Sun, as his words are in the
next paragraph. But we ſhall have occaſion to reflect
upon this again in its proper place. We proceed now
to another Aſtronomical miſtake.
A 5th. paffage, which probably might dilquiet him,
is his falſe argumentation at the end of the 8th. chap
concerning Days and Months. He ſays there, if the na- Ext.8.189;
tural days were longer towards the Flood, than at firſt:
(which no body however affirms ) fewer than thirty
would have made a month : whereas the duration of
the Flood is computed by months conſiſting of thirty
days a-piece : therefore, ſays lie, they were no longer
than ordindry. This argumentation the Anſwer told
him, was a meer paralogiſm, or å meer blunder. For 30
days are 30 days, whether they are longer or ſorter:
and Scripture does not determine the length of the
days. There are foveral pages ſpent in the Defence, to
get off this blunder: Let's here how he begins : Tho' P. 28, 19)
Scripture does not limit or accorint for the length of days
exprefly, yet it does it implicitly
, and withal věry plainly
and intelligibly. This is deny'd, and if he make this
out, that Scripture does very plainly and intelligibly
determine the length of days at the Deluge, and makes
them equal with ours at prcfent, then, I acknowledge,
he hath remov'd the blunder: otherwiſe it ſtands the
famic;
80,81
B 2
A ſhort Conſideration of the Defence
ſame, unmov'd and unmended. Now obſerve how he
makes this out; For, ſays he, Scripture gives us to un-
derſtand, that days before the Flood were of the ſame lengt!
that they are of now, BY INFORMING VS, that months
and years, which were of the ſame length then, that tbey are
of at preſent, were made up of the ſame number of days. Here
the blunder is ſtill continued, or, at beſt, it is but crant-
ferr'd from days to monclıs, or from months to years.
He ſays, Scripture informis us that months and years were
of the ſame length then, that they are of at preſent. If he
mean by the ſame length, the ſame number of days
, he
relapſes into the old blunder, and we ſtill require the
length of thoſe days. But if Scripture informs us that
the months and years at the Flood, were of the ſame
length that they are of now, according to any abſo-
lure and known meaſure, diſtinct from the number of
days, then the blunder is ſav’d. Let's ſee therefore by
whether of theſe two ways he proves it in the next
words, which are theſe, For how could there be juſt 12
months in the year, at the time of the Deluge : and 30
days in each of thoſe months, if days then had not confifted,
as they do now, of 24 hours a piece. We allow a day might
then conſiſt of 24 hours, if the diſtinction of hours
was ſo ancient. But what then, the queſtion returns
concerning the length of thoſe hours, as it was before
concerning the length of the days: and this is either
idem per idem, or the ſame error in another inſtance.
If you put but hours in the place of days, the words of
the Anſwer have ſtill the ſame force: Twenty four hours
were to go to a day, whether the hours were longer or ſhor-
ter: and Scripture does not determine the length of the
hours. This, you ſee, is ſtill the ſame cale, and the ſame
paralogiſm hangs upon both inſtances.
But he goes on ſtill in this falſe tract, in theſe words:
And as Providence bath ſo ordered nature, that days (that
depend upon its diurnal motion ) Should be meaſur'd by cir-
cumg yrations of the Earth.
So it bath taken care that
each of theſe circumrotations ſhould be performed in 24.
hours: and conſequently that every day ſhould be juſt lo
long that 30 of them (in way of round reckoning ) might
compleat a month. Admit all this, that 30 days com-
pleat a month. Still if Scripture hath nor decermin’d
the
of the Exceptions againſt´ehe Theory of the Earth. it
CON-
the length of thoſe days, nor the ſlowneſs or ſwiftneſs
of the circumgyrations that make them, it haih noc
determin'd co us the length of thoſe months, nor of
the years that depend upon them. This one would
take to be very intelligible: yet he goes on ſtill in
the ſame maze, thus, But now had the circumgyrations of
the Earth grown more from towards the Deluge (by ſuch
cauſes as the Excepter ſuggeſted) ſo as every day had con
liſted of 30 hours, &c. But how ſo, I pray? This is a
wild ſtep: why 30 hours? where does Scripture ſay ſo:
or where does the Theoriſt ſay ſo? We ſay the Day
conſiſted then as now of 24 hours, whether the hours
were longer or forter: and that Scripture hath not
determind the length of thoſe hours, nor conſequent-
ly of thoſe days, nor conſéquently of thoſe months, nor
conſequently of thoſe years. So, after all this a-do, we
are juſt where we were at firſt, namely, That Scripture
not having determin’d the abſolute length of any one,
you cannot by that determine the length of any other.
And by his ſhifting and multiplying inſtances, he does
but abſurda abſurdis accumulare, ne perpluant.
We offer'd before, in our Anſwer, to give the Ex-
cepter ſome light into his miſtake: by diſtinguiſhing in
theſe things, what is abſolute from what is relative : the
former whereof, cannot, under theſe or any ſuch like
circumſtances, be determin'd by the latter. For in-
ſtance; A man hath cen children, and lie will not ſay
abſolutely and determinately what portion he will
give with any one of them: but he ſays, I will give
my eldeſt child a tenth part more than my 2d, and my
ſecond a gth. part more than my 3d, and my third
an 8th. part more than my 4th; and ſo downwards in
proportion, to the youngeſt. Not telling you, in any
abſolute ſum, what money he will give the youngeſt,
or any other: you cannot by this tell what portion
the man will give with any of his children. I leave
you to apply this, and proceed to a nearer inſtance,
by comparing the meaſures of Time and Longitude. If
you know how many inches make a foot, how many
feer a pace, how many paces a mile,&c. you cannot by
theſe numbers determine the ablolute quantity of any
one of the foreſaid mcaſures, but only their relative
quantity
1
12
A ſhort Confideration of the Defence
quantity as to one another. So if Scripture had deter
mind, of how many hours a Day conſiſted: of how
many days a Month: of how many months a Year :
you could not by this alone determine the abſolute
duration or quantity of any one of theſe, nor whether
they were longer or ſhorter than our preſent hours,
days, months, or years. And therefore, I ſay ſtill, as
I ſaid at firſt, 30 days are 30 days, whether they are
longer or ſhorter: and 30 circumgyrations of the Earth,
áre 30, whether they be flower or ſwifter. And that
no Scripture-proof can be made from this, either di-
rectly or conſequentially, that the days before the
Flood, were or were not, longer than they are at pre-
fent. But we have been too long upon this head.
We proceed now from his Aſtronomy to his Philo-
P. 38. fophy. 'Twas obſerv'd in the Anſwer, that the Excepter
in the beginning of the 9th. Chap. ſuppos'd Terreſtrial
Bodies to have a nitency inwards,or downwards towards the
Center. This we noted as a falſe principle in Philoſo-
phy: and to rectifie his miſtake, he now replyes, That
Def.p.82. he underſtood that expreſſion only of ſelf-central and
quieſcent Bodies. Whereas in truch, the queſtion he was
ſpeaking to, was about a fluid Body turning upon its
Axis. But however let us admit his new ſerice, his prin-
ciple, I'm afraid, will ſtill need rectification; namely,he
affirms now,that Quieſcent Earthly Bodies are impregna-
ted with a nitency inward, or downward towards the Center.
I deny alſo this reform'd principle; if Bodies be turn'd
round, they have a nitency upwards, or from the Cen-
ter of their motion. If they be not turn'd round, nor
mov’d, but quieſcent, they have no nitency at all, nei-
ther upwards nor downwards : but are indifferent to
all lines of motion, according as an external impulſe
ſhall carry them, this way or that way. So that his
impregnation with a nitency downwards, is an occult and
fictitious quality, which is not in the nature of Bodies,
whether in motion or in reſt. The truth is, The Author
of the Exceptions makes a great flutter about the Car-
teſian Philoſophy, and the Copernican Syſteme, but the fre-
quene miſtakes he commits in both, give a juft fufpi-
cion that he underſtands neither.
Laſtly, we come to the grand diſcovery of a Fifteen-
Cubit-
ز
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth.
13
Cubit-Deluge, which, it may be, was as uneaſie to him
upon ſecond thoughts, as any of the reſt: at leaſt one
would gueſs ſo, by the changes he hath made in his
Hypotheſis.For he hath now in this Dejence,rºduc'd the P. 181,182.
Deluge to a deſtruction of the world by Famine,racher
than by drowning. I do not remember ii. Scripture any
mention made of Famine in thatgreat judgmencof water
brought upon mankind, but he thinks he hath found
out ſomething that favours his opinion: namely, that
a good part of mankind at the Deluge, were not drown'd,
but ſtarv'd for want of victuals
. And the argument is this,
becauſe in the ſtory of the Deluge, men are not ſaid
to be drown’d, but to periſh, die or be deſtroy'd. But are
they ſaid any where in the ſtory of the Deluge, to have
been famiſh'd? And when God ſays to Noah, I will bring Gen. 6. 17
a flood of waters upon the Earth, to deſtroy all fleſh, Does
it not plainly ſignifie, that that deſtruction ſhould be
by drowning? But however let us hear our Author:
when he had been making uſe of this new Hypotheſis
of ſtarving, to take off ſome arguments urged againſt
his fifecen-cubit Deluge ( particularly, that it would
not be ſufficient to deſtroy all mankind) he adds theſe
words by way of proof, And methinks there is one thing Def. p.182.
which ſeems to infinuate, that a good part of the Animal
world might perhaps come to an end thus: by being driven
to ſuch ſtreights by the overflowing waters, as to be FA-
MISHT OF STARV'D to death. The thing is this
, in
the ſtory of the Deluge,it is no where ſaid of men and living
creatures, that they were drown'd, but they dyed, or were de-
ſtroyed. Thoſe that are drown d are deſtroy'd, I ima-
gine, as well as thoſe that are ſtarv’d: ſo this proves
nothing. But that the deſtruction here ſpoken of, was
by drowning, ſecins plain enough, both from God's
words to Noah before the Flood, and by his words af-
ter che Flood, when he makes his Covenant with Noah,
in this manner : I will eſtabliſh my Covenant with you,nei- Go4. 9. 11
ther Jhall all fleſh be cut off any more by the waters of a
Flood. Now to be cut off, or deſtroy'd by the waters
of a Flood, is, methinks, to be drown'd. And I cake all
fleſh to comprehend the Animal World, or at leaſt,
all mankind. Accordingly our Saviour ſays,Matt.24. 39.
in Noah's time, the flood came, and took them all away:
namely, all mankind.
This
14
A ſhort Confideration of the Defence
}
180.
This is one Expedient our Author hath found out,
to help to bear off the inconveniences that attend his
fifteen-cubic Deluge: namely, by converting a good
part of it into a Famine. But he hath another Expedi-
ent to joyn to this, by increaſing the Waters : and
that is done, by making the Common Surface of the
Earth, or the higheſt parts of it, as he calls them, to
Def. 165.c ſignifie ambiguouſly, or any height that pleaſes him ;
and conſequently fifteen Cubits above that, ſignifies
alſo what height he thinks fit. But in reality, there is
no ſurface common to the Earth, but either the exte-
riour ſurface, whether it be high or low: or the ordi-
nary level of the Earth, as it is a Globe or convex Bo-
dy. If by his common ſurface he mean the exteriour ſur-
face, that takes in Mountains as well as Low-lands, or
any other ſuperficial parts of the Earth. And there
fore if the Deluge was fifteen Cubits above this com-
mon ſurface, it was fifteen Cubits above the higheſt
Mountains, as we ſay it was. But if by the common
ſurface he mean the common level of the Earth, as it
is a Globular or convex Body, then we gave it a right
name when we call'd it the ordinary level of the Earth:
namely, that level or ſurface that lies in an equal con-
vexity with the ſurface of the Sea. And his fifteen
Cubits of water from that level, would never drown
the World. Laſtly, If by the common ſurface of the
Earth, he underſtand a 3d. ſurface, different from both
theſe, he muſt define it, and define the height of it :
that we may know how far this fifteen-cubit Deluge
riſe, from ſome known baſis. One known baſis is the
ſurface of the Sea, and that ſurface of the Land that
lies in an equal convexity with it: tell us then if the
waters of the Deluge were but fifteen Cubits higher
than the ſurface of the Sea, that we may know their
height by ſome certain and determinate meaſure, and
upon that examine the Hypotheſis
. But to tell us thcy
were fifteen Cubits above, not the Mountains or the
Hills, but the Highlands, or the higheſt parts of the com-
mon ſurface of the Earth, and not to tell us the height of
theſe higbeit parts from any known baſis: nor how
they are diſtinguiſht from Hills and Mountains, which
incur our ſences, and are the meaſures given us by
Moles:
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth. is
i
Moſes : This
, I ſay, is but to cover his Hypotheſis withi
ambiguities, when he had made it without grounds:
and to leave room to ſee his Water-mark higher or
lower, as he ſhould ſee occaſion or neceſſicy. And of
this indeed we have an inſtance in his laſt Pamphlets
for he has rais'd his Water-mark chere, more than an
hundred Cubics higher than it was before. In his Ex-
ceprions he ſaid, not that the waters were no where higher P. 300
than juſt fifteen Cubits, above the ground, they might
in moſt places be thirty, forty, or fifty Cubits higher:
But in his Defence he ſays, the Waters might be an P.180,
hundred or tro bundred Cubits higher, than the general
ordinary plain of the Earth. Now what ſecurity have
we; but that in the next Pamphlet, they may be 500
or a 1000 Cubics higher than the ordinary ſurface of
the Earth.
This is his 2d. Expedient, raiſing his Water-mark
indefinitely. But if theſe two methods be not ſuffici-
ent to deſtroy Mankind, and the animate World, he
hath yet a third, which cannot fail : and that is, De-
ſtroying them by Evil Angels. Fle&tere ſi nequeo. This Def. P.ge
is his laſt refuge; to which purpoſe he hath theſe
words, When Heaven was pleas'd to give Satan leave, he
caus’d the fire to conſume Job's Sheep, and cauſed the wind
to deſtroy his Children. And how eaſily could theſe ſpirits,
that are miniſters of God's vengeance, have made the waters
of the Flood fatal to thoſe Creatures that might have eſca-
ped them if any could have done it? As ſuppoſe an Eagle
,
or a Faulcon: The Devil and his crue catch them all,
and held their noſes under water. However,mechinks,
this is not fair play, to deny the Theoriſt the liberty
to make uſe of the miniſtery of good Angels
, when he
himſelf makes uſe of evil Spirits.
Theſe, Sir, and ſuch like paſſages, where che notions
of the Excepéer have been expos’d, were the cauſes, I
imagine, of his angry reply. Some Creatures, you
know, are more fierce after they are wounded : and
fome upon a gentle chaſe will Ay from you, but if you
preſs them and put them to extremities, they turn
and fly in your face. I ſee by our Auchor's example,
how eaſily, in theſe perſonal altercations, reaſoning
degenerates into wrangling, and wrangling into ſcold
C
ing
16 A ſhort Confideration of the Defence
ing. However, if I may judge from theſe cwo Hypo-
theſes which he hath made, about the riſe of Mountains,
and a fifteen-cubit Deluge, of all trades I hould never
adviſe him to turn Hypotheſis-maker. It does not ſeem
at all to lie to his hand, and things never thrive chat
are undertaken, Diis iratis, genioque ſiniſtro.
But as we have given you ſome account of this Au-
thor's Philoſophical notions, ſo it may be you will ex-
pect that we ſhould entertain you with ſome pieces of
his wit and eloquence. The truth is, he ſeems to de-
light and value himſelf upon a certain kind of Coun-
try-wit and popular eloquence, and I will not grudge
you the pleaſure of enjoying them boch, in ſuch in-
ſtances as I remember. Speaking in contempt of the
Theory and the Anſwer, (which is one great ſubject
of his wit) he expreſſes himſelf thus : But if arguments
Def. P. 48. be ſo weak, that they will fall with a fillip, why ſhould grea-
ter force be uſed to beat them down? To draw a Rapier to
ftab a Fly; or to charge a Piſtol to kill a Spider ; I think
would be prepoſterous. I think ſo too, in this we're a-
greed. In another place, being angry with the Theo-
riſt, that he would not acknowledge his errours to
him, he hath theſe words, 'Tis unlucky for one to run his
head againſt a poſt: But when he hath done, if he will ſay
he did not do it, and ſtand in and defend what he ſays:
'tis a ſign he is as ſenceleſs as he was unfortunate : and is
fitter to be pitied than confuted. This wit, it may be,
you'll ſay, is downright clownery. The truth is, when
I obſerv’d, in reading his Pamphler, the courſeneſs of
his repartees, and of that ſort of wit wherein he deals
moſt and pleaſes himſelf, it often rais'd in my mind,
whether I would or no, the Idea of a Pedant: Of one
that bad ſeen liccle of the World, and thought him-
ſelf much wittier and wiſer than others would take
him to be. I will give you but one Inſtance more of
his ruſtical wic : Telling the Theoriſt of an itch of
writing: Methinks, ſays he, he might have laid that pru-
rient humour, by ſcratching himſelf with the briars of a
more innocent controverſie: or by SCRUBBING
SOUNDLY againſt ſomething elſe than the holy Scri-
pture. He ſpeaks very ſenſibly, as if he underſtood
the diſeaſe, and the way of dealing with it. But I
think
P. 108.
P. 214
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth 17
P.IS
think Holy Scripture does not come in well upon that
occaſion.
All this is nothing, Sir, in compariſon of his popu-
lar eloquence. See with what alacrity he runs it off
hand, in a ſimilitude betwixt Adam and a Lord Lieu-
tenant of a County. When the King makes a Gentleman
Lord-Lieutenant of a County, by virtue of his Commiſſion is
he preſently the ſtrongeſt man that is in it? Does it enable
him to encounter whole Regiments of Souldiers in his ſingle
perſon? Does it impower him to carry a Cannon upon his
neck? Or when the great Gun is fir’d off, to catch the Bul-
let as it flies, and put it up in his Pocket? So when God
gave Adam dominion over the Fowls, did, he mean that
he ſhould dive like a Duck, or. foar like a Falcon? that
he should ſwim as naturally as the Swan, and hunt the
Kite, or Hobby, as Boys do the Wren? Did he mean that he
ſhould hang up Oftritches in a Cage, as people do Linnets:
or fetch down the Eagles to feed with his Pullen, and make
them perch with his Chickens in the Henrooſt?
So much for the Fowls, now for the Fiſh. When
God
gave
Adam dominion over the Sea, was he to be able Ibid.
to dwell at the bottom, or to walk on the top of it? To drain
it as a Ditch, or to take all its Fry at once in a Dragnet?
Was he to ſnare the Shark, as we do young Pickarels : or to
bridle the Sea-Horſe, and ride him for a Pad? Or to put
a ſip upon the Crocodile's neck, and play with him as with
a Dog ? &c. Sir, I leave it to you, as a more compe-
tent Judge, to ſet a juſt value upon his gifts and elo-
cution.
For my part, to ſpeak freely, Dull fence, in a
phantaſtick ſtyle, is to me doubly nauſeous.
But leaſt I ſhould cloy you with theſe luſhious ha-
rangues, I will give you but one more: and ’tis a mil-
cellany of ſeveral pieces of Wit together. Should
twenty Mariners, ſays he, confidently affirm, that they fail Dif. F. 68
in a Ship from Dover to Calis, by a brisk gale out of a pair
of Bellows: Or if forty Engineers ſhould poſitively ſwear,
that the Powder-mill near London, was late blown up, hy a
Mine then ſprung at Great Waradin in Hungary,muſt they
not be grievouſly perjur'd perfons? ---- Or if the Hiſtorian
that writes the Peloponneſian war,bad told that the soldi
ers who fell in it, fought only with Sun beamns, and ſingle
Currants which grew thereabouts, and that hundreds and
thou-
5
C2
18
A ſhort Conſideration of the Defence
P. 287.
thouſands were ſtabb’d with the one, and knocked on the
head with the other: who would believe that ever there
were ſuch weapons in that war ; that ever there was ſuch a
fatal war in that Country? even ſo, &c. Theſe, Sir, are
flights and reaches of his Pen, which I dare not cen-
fure, but leave chem to your judgment.
Thus much is to give you a talt only of his wic and
eloquence: and if you like it, you may find more of
the ſame ſtrain, here and there, in his writings. I have
only one thing to mind him of, That he was deſir'd by
Eng. Theo. the Theoriſt to write in Latin ( if he was a Scholar) as
being more proper for a ſubje&t of this nature. If he had
own'd and followed that character, I'm apt to think
it would have prevented a great many impertinencies:
His tongue probably would not have been ſo flippant
in popular excurſions and declamations, as we now
find it. Neither is this any great preſumption or raſh-
neſs of judgment, if we may gueſs at his skill in that
Language by his tranſlations, here and there. Cumz
Excep.p.293. plurimâ religione is render'd with the principles of their
Religion. And if he ſay he followed Sir W. Rawleigh,
in his tranſlation, he that follows a bad tranſlator with-
out correction or notice, is ſuppos'd to know no bet-
ter himſelf. And this will appear the more probable,
if we conſider another of his tranſlations, in this pre-
ſent work. Rei perſonam he tranſlates the Repreſentation
of the thing: inſtead of the perſon of the Guilty: or the
perſon of him that is Reus not A&tor. And in this, I
dare ſay, he was ſeduc'd by no example. But leaſt we
ſhould be thought to miſrepreſent him, take his own
Def. p. 168,
words, ſuch as they are. Yea,though it was ſpoken never ſo
poſitively,it was but to ſet forth REI PERSONĀM: to make
the more full and lively repreſentation of the ſuppoſed
thing. Here, you ſee, he hath made a double blunder,
firſt, in jumbling together perſon and thing: then, if
they could be jumbled togecher, rei perſona would not
ſignifie the full and lively repreſentation of the thing, but
rather a diſguiſe or perſonated repreſentacion of the
thing. However I am ſatisfied from theſe inſtances,
that he had good reaſon, notwithſtanding the caucion
or defire of the Theoriſt to the contrary, to write his
Books in his Mother's tongue.
Thus
169.
I
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth. ig
1
Thus we have done with the firſt part : which was to
mark out ſuch paſſages, as we thought might probably
have inflam'd the Authors ſtyle in this reply. When men
are reſolv'd not to own their faults, you know there is
nothing more uneaſie and vexatious to them, than to
ſee them plainly diſcover'd and expos’d. We muſt now
give you ſome account of the contents of his Chapters,
ſo far as they relate to our ſubject. Chap. Ift. Nothing.
Chap.2d. is againſt extraordinary providence : or that the
Theoriſt ſhould not be permitted to have recourſe to ic
upon any occaſion. This recourſe to extraordinary pro-
vidence being frequently objected in other places, and
of uſe to be diſtinctly underſtood: we will ſpeak of it
apart ar the latter end of the Letter. Chap.3. is about the
Moon's hindering the formation of the Earth before she
was forni’d her ſelf, or in our neighbourhood; as we have
noted before. Another thing in this Chap.is his urging,
Oyly or Oleagineous particles not to have been in the
Chaos
, but made ſince. I'll give a ſhort anſwer to this :
Either there was or was not, Oleagineous matter in the
new-made Earth, (I mean in its ſuperficial region.)
when it came firſt out of a Chaos? If there was there
was alſo in the Chaios, out of which that Earth was
immediately made. And if there was no oleagineous
matter in the new-made Earth, how came the ſoil to
be ſo fertile, ſo far, ſo unctuous? I ſay not only fertile,
but particularly fat and unetuous: for he uſes theſe ve-
ry words frequencly in the deſcription of that ſoil. And Exc.p.211.
Def.p.69,6
all fat and unctuous liquors are oleagineous: and ac-p.98!
cordingly we have ús'd thoſe words promiſcuouſly, in
the deſcription of that Region: (Eng.Tbeor.Chap.5.) un-
derſtanding only fuch unctuous liquors as are lighter
than water and ſwim above it,and conſequently would
ſtop and entangle the terreſtrial particles in their fall or
deſcent. And ſeeing ſuch unctuous and oleagineous par-
ticles were in the new-made Earth, they muſt certainly
have been in the matter out of which it was immediately
form’d, namely,in the Chaos. All the reſt of this Chap-
ter we are willing to leave in its full force: apprehen-
ding the Theory, or the Anſwer, to be in no danger
from ſuch argumentations or reflections.
The 4th. Chap. is very ſhort and hath nothing argu-
mentative
20
A ſhort Conſideration of the Defence
1
mentative. The 5th.Chap. is concerning the cold in the
circumpolar parts, which was ſpoken to in the Anſwer
ſufficiently, and we ſtand to chat. What is added abouc
extraordinary providence, will be treated of in its pro-
per place. The 6th. Chap. is alſo ſhort, againſt this par-
ticular,that it is not ſafe to argue upon ſuppoſitions actually
falſe. And I think there needs no more to prove it,than
what was ſaid in the Anſwer. Chap. 7. is chiefly about
texts of Scripture, concerning which I ſee no occaſion
of ſaying any more than what is ſaid in the Review of
the Theory. He ſays (p.49. ) that the Theoriſt catches
himſelf in a trap, by allowing that PJ. 33.7. is to be
underſtood of the ordinary poſture of the waters, and
yet applying it to their extraordinary poſture under the
vaule of the Earth. But that was not an extraordinary
poſture according to the Theoriſt, but their natural
poſture in the firſt Earth. Yet I allow the expreſſion
might have been better thus, in a level or ſpherical con-
vexity, as the Earth. He interprets 07171910 (p.53.) which we
render the Garden of the Lord, not to be Paradiſe, but
any pleaſant Garden; yet gives us no authority, either
of ancient Commentator or Verſion, for this novel
and paradoxical interpretation. The Septuagint render
it mead coa té Se&. The Vulgate, Paradiſus Domini : and
all ancient Verſions that ï have ſeen render it to the
ſame ſence. Does he expect then that his ſingle word
and authority,ſhould countervail all the ancient Tran-
Nators and Interpreters ? To the laſt place alledged by
the Theoriſt, Prov.8.28. he ſays the Anſwerer charges
him unjuſtly that he underſtands by that word in no
more than the rotundity or ſpherical figure of the Abyſs.
Which, he ſays, is a point of nonſence. I did not think
the charge had been ſo high however, ſeeing ſome
Interpreters underſtand it ſo. But if he underſtand by
ain the banks or ſhores of the Sea, then he ſhould have
Gen.13. 10.
fuper עַל פְּנֵי תְהוֹם told us how thole banks or Thores are
faciem Abyſi, as it is in the Text.
Pag.59. He ſays the Excepter does not miſrepreſent
the Theoriſt when he makes him to affirm the conſtru-
ction of the Firſt Earth to have been meerly mecha-
nical; and he cices to this purpoſe cwo places, which
only prove, that the Theoriſt made uſe of no other
cauſes,
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth. 21
1
1
cauſes, nor ſee any defect in them, but never affirm'd
that theſe were the only cauſes. You may ſee his words
to this purpoſe expreſly, Engl. Theor.p.65. wliereof the
Excepter was minded in the Anſwer,p.3. In the laſt Pa- P.60
ragraph of this Chapter,if he affirms any thing, he will
have the Pillars of the Earth to be underſtood literally
Where then, pray, do theſe Pillars ſtand that bear’up
the Earth? or if they bear up cle Earth, what bears
them up? what are their Pedeſtals, or their foundati-
ons? But he ſays Hypotheſes muſt not regulate Scrii
pture, though in natural things, but be regulated by it,
and by the letter of it. I would gladly know then, how:
his Hypotheſis of the motion of the Earth,is regulated
by Scripture, and by the letter of it. And be unhappis
ly gives an inſtance juſt contrary to himſelf, namely; of
the Anthropomorphites: for they regulate natural rea-
ſon and philoſophy by the letter or literal ſence of
Scripture, and therein fall into a groſs errour. Yet we
mult not call the Author injudicious, for fear of giving
offence.
The 8th.Chap. begins with the Earths being carried di- ibis
rectly under the Equinoctial,before its change of ſituation:
without any manner of obliquity in her ſite, or declination
towards either of the Tropicks in HER COURSE. Here you
ſee, when the Earth chang'd its ſituation, it chang’d,
according to his Aſtronomy,two things: its ſite and its
courſe ; its ſite upon its axis, and its courſe in the hea-
vens. And ſo he ſays again in the next paragraph, put
the caſe the Earth ſhift her poſture, and alſo her CÍRCUIT
about the Sun, in which ſhe perſiſted till the Deluge. Here
is plainly the ſame notion repeated : that the Earth
chang’d not only its ſite,but alſo its road or courſe about
che Sun. And in conſequence of this he ſuppoſes its courſe
formerly to have been under the Equinoctial, and now
under the Ecliptick: it being crantlated out of the one
into the other, at its change. Yet he ſeems now to be
ſenſible of the abſurdity of this doctrine, and therefore
will not own it to have been his fence: and as an ar-
gument that he mcant otherwiſe, he alledges, that he
declar'd before that by the Earths ritght ſituation to the
Sun, is meant that the axis of the Earth was always kept
in a paralleliſm to that of the Ecliptick. But what's this
to
P.61,
22
A ſhort Confideration of the Defence
to the purpoſe: This ſpeaks only of the ſite of the
Earth, whereas his errour was in ſuppoling its courſe or
annual orbit about the Sun, as well as its fire upon its
own axis, to have been different, and chang’d at the
Deluge: as his words already produc'd againſt him,
plainly teſtifie.
What follows in this Chapter is concerning the per-
petual Equinox. And as to the reaſoning part of what
he ſays in defence of his Exceptions, we do not grudge
him the benefit of it, let it do him what ſervice it can
And as to the Hiſtorical part, he will not allow a wit-
neſs to be a good witneſs as to matter of fact, if he did
not aſſign true cauſes of that matter of fact. To which I
only reply,tho’TivertonSteeple was not the cauſe of Good-
win ſands,as the Kentiſh men thought,yet their teſtimony
was ſo far good, That there were ſuch Sands, and ſuch
a Steeple. He alſo commits an errour as to the nature
of Tradition. When a Tradition is to be made out, ie
is not expected that it ſhould be made appear that none
were ignorant of that Tradition in former Ages: or
that all that mention'd it,underſtood the true grounds
and extent of it: but 'tis enough to ſew the plain foot-
ſteps of it in Antiquity, as a Concluſion, tho' they did
not know the reaſons and premiſes upon which it de-
pended. For inſtance, The Conflagration of the world
is a doctrine of Antiquity, traditionally deliver'd from
age to age: but the Cauſes and manner of the Confla-
gration, they either did not know,or have not deliver'd
to us. In like manner, that the firſt age and ſtate of the
world was without change of Seaſons, or under a per-
petual Equinox, of this we ſee many footſteps in An-
tiquicy amongſt the Jews, Chriſtians, Heathens : Poets,
Philoſophers; but the Theory of this perpetual Equi-
nox, the cauſes and manner of it, we neither find, nor
can reaſonably expect, from the Ancients. So much
for the Equinox.
This Chapter, as it begun with an errour, ſo it un-
happily ends with a paralogiſm: namely, that, becauſe
30 days made a month at the Deluge, therefore thoſe
days were neither longer nor ſhorter than ours are at
preſent. Tho'we have ſufficiently expos'd this before,
yet one thing more may be added, in anſwer to his
conf
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth. 2;
A
confident concluſion, in theſe words; But to talk; as
the Anſwerer does, that the Month) ſhould be lengthen’d by
the Days being ſo, is a fearful blunder indeed. For let the
days (by ſlackening the Earth's diurnal motion) bave beer
never ſo long, yet (its annual motion continuing the ſame)
the Month muſt needs have kept its uſual length: only few-
er days would have made it up. 'Tis not uſual for a Man
to perſevere ſo confidently in the ſame errour; As if
the intervals of time, hours; days, months, years, could
not be proporcionably increaſt! ſo as to contain one
another in the ſame proportion they did before, and
yet be every one increaſt as to abſolute duration. Take
a Clock, for inſtance, that goes too ſlow: The circuit
of the Dial-plate is 12. hours, let theſe repreſent the 12.
Signs in his Zodiack: and the hand to be the Earoli
that goes thorough them all :' and conſequently the
whole circuit of the Dial-plate repreſents the Ycar. Sup-
poſe, as we ſaid, this Clock to go too ſlow, this will not
hinder but ſtill fifteen minutes make a quarter, in this
Clock : four quarters make an hour, and 12. hours
the whole circuit of the Dial-plate. But every one of
theſe intervals will contain more time than it did be-
fore, according to abſolute duration, or according to
the meaſures of another Clock that does not go too
flow. This is the very caſe which he caprior or will
not comprehend: but concludes thus in effect, chat
becauſe the hour conſiſts ſtill of four quarters in this
Clock, therefore it is no longer than ordinary.
The 9th. Chapter alſo begins with a falſe notion,
that Bodies quieſcent (as he hath now alcer'd clie cafe)
bave a nitency downwards. Which miſtake we rectified
before, if he pleaſe. Then he proceeds to the Oval fi-
gure of the Earth. And many flouriſhes and harangues
are made here to liccle purpofc. For lie goes upon a
falſe ſuppoſition, that the Waters of the Chaos were
made Oval by the weight or gravitation of the Air. A
thing that never came into the words or thoughts of
the Theoriſt. Yet upon this ſuppoſition he runs into thic
Def.p.85.86
deſerts of Bilebulgerid, and lie waters of Mare del Zur:
Words that make a great noiſe; but to no effect. If
he had pleas'd he might liave fecn the Theoriſt made
no uſe of the weighic of the Air upon this occaſion, by
D
the
24
A ſhort Conſideration of the Defence
the inſtance he gave of the preſſure of the Moon, and
the flux of the waters by that preſſure. Which is no
more done by the gravitation of the Air, than the
Banks are preft,in a ſwift current and narrow chanel,
by the gravitation of the water. But he ſays rarefied
Air makes leſs reſiſtance than groſs Air: and rarefied
water in an Æolipile, it may be, he thinks preſſes with
leſs force than unrarefied. Air poſſibly may be rare-
fied to that degree as to leſſen its reſiſtance: but we
ſpeak of Air moderately agitated, ſo as to be made
only more brisk and active. Moreover he ſays, the
waters that lay under the Poles muſt have riſen per-
pendicularly, and why might they not, as well, have
done ſo under the Equator? The waters that lay na-
turally and originally under the Poles, did not riſe at
all: but the waters became more deep there, by thoſe
that were thruſt thither from the middle parts of the
Globe. Upon the whole I do not perceive that he hath
weaken'd any one of the Propoſitions upon which the
formation of an Oval Earth depended. Which'were
theſe, Firſt, that the tendency of the waters from the
center of their motion, would be greater and ſtronger
in the Equinoctial parts, than in the Polar: or in thoſe
parts where they mov'd in greater circles, and conſe-
quently ſwifter, than in thoſe where they were mov’d
in leſſer circles and flower. Secondly,Agitated Air hath
more force to repel what preſſes againſt it,than ſtagnant
Air: and that the Air was more agitated and rarefied
under the Equinoctial parts, than under the Poles.
Thirdly, Waters hinder'd and repelld in their primary
tendency, take the eaſieſt way they can to free chem-
ſelves from that force, ſo as to perſevere in their mocion.
Laſtly, to flow laterally upon a Plain,or to aſcend upon
an inclin'd Plain, is eaſier than to riſe perpendicularly.
Theſe are the Propoſitions upon which that diſcourſe
depended, and I do not find that he hath diſprov'd any
one of them. And this, Sir, is a ſhort account of a
long Chapter, impertinencies omitted.
Chap. 1o. Is concerning the original and cauſes of
Mountains, which the Excepter unhappily imputes to
the heat and influence of the Sun. Whether his Hypo-
theſis be effectually confuted, or not, I am very willing
to
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth. 25
to ſtand to the judgment of any unconcern’d perſon,
that will have the patience to compare the Exceptions
and the Anſwer, in this Chapter. Then as to his Hiſto-
rical arguments, as he calls them, to prove there were
Mountains before the Flood,from Gyants that ſav'd then-
ſelves from the Flood upon Mount Sion: and Adam's wan-
dring ſeveral hundreds of years upon the Mountains of India;
Thele, and ſuch like, which he brought to prove that
there were Mountains before the Flood, he now thinks
fit to renounce, and ſays he had done ſo before by an Def
. p. 97-
anticipative ſentence. But if they were condemn'd be-
fore by an anticipative ſentence, as fables and forgeries,
why were they ſtuft into his Book, and us'd as Tradi-
tional evidence againſt the Theory?
Laſtly, he contends in this Chapter for Iron and Iron-
tools before the Flood, and as early as the time of Cain:
becauſe he built a City; which, he ſays, could not be
built without Iron and Iron-tools. To which it was
Anſwer'd, chat, if he fancied that City of Cain's, like Paris Anj. P-49,5€
or London, he lrad reaſon to believe that they had Iron-
tools to make it. But ſuppoſe it was a number of Cot-
tages, made of branches of Trees, of Oſiers, and Bul-
ruſhes : or, if you will, of mud-walls, and a roof of
ſtraw, with a fence about it to keep out Beaſts: there
would be no ſuch neceſſity of Iron-tools. Conſider,
'pray, how long the world was without knowing the
uſe of Iron, in ſeveral parts of it: as in the Northern
Countries and America: and yet they had Houſes and
Cities, after their faſhion. And to come nearer home,
conſider what Towns and Cities our Anceſtros, the Bri-
tains, had in Cæſar's time : more than two thouſand
Years after the time of Cain. Oppidum Britanni vocant,
cùm Sylvam impeditam vallo atque folla munierant: quò
incurſionis loftium vitandæ causâ, convenire conſueverunt:
Why might not Henochia, Cain's City, be fuch a Cicy
Com. li.
as this?
And as to the Ark,which he alſo would make a proof
that there were Iron and Iron-tools before the Flood, ibice
'twas anſwer'd,chat Scripture does not mention Iron or
Iron-tools in building of the Ark: but only Goplier
wood and Pitch. To which he replies,If Scriptures filence Daines;
concerning things be a ground of preſumption that they nere
D2
7704
26 A ſhort Conſideration of the Defence
not, what then ſhall we think of an Oval and unmountainous
Earth, an incloſed Abyſs, a Paradiſiacal world, and the like:
which the Scripture makes no mention of. I cannot eaſily
forbear calling this an injudicious reflection,cho'I know
he hath been angry with that word, and makes it a
brat of paſion. But I do aſſure him I call it ſo coolly
and calmly. When a thing is deduc'd by natural argu-
ments and reaſon, the filence of Scripture is enough.
If he can prove the motion of the Earth by natural ar-
guments, and that Scripture is ſilent in that point, we
deſire no better proof. Now in all thoſe things which
he mentions, an Oval and unmountainous Earth, an
Incloſed Abyſs,a Paradiſiacal world,Scripture is at leaſt
filent : and therefore 'tis natural arguments muſt de-
termine theſe caſes. And this ill-reaſoning he is often
guilty of, in making no diſtinction betwixt things that
are, or that are not, prov'd by natural arguments, when
he appeals to the interpretation of Scripture.
Chap. 11. Is to prove an Open Sea (ſuch as we have
now) before the Flood. All his Exceptions were anſwer'd
Anſw.c. 11. before, and I am content to ſtand to that anſwer: re-
ſerving only what is to be ſaid hereafter concerning
the literal ſence of Scripture. However he is too laviſh
in ſome expreſſions here, as when he ſays, (p.115.) that
Adam died before ſo much as one Fiſh appear’d in the world.
And a little before he had ſaid, For fiſhes, if his Hypo-
theſis be believ'd, were never upon this Earth, in Adam's
time. Theſe expreſſions I ſay cannot be juſtified upon
any Hypotheſis
. For why might not the Rivers of
that Earth have Fiſh in them, as well as the Rivers of
this Earth, or as our Rivers now? I'm ſure the Theory,
or the Hypothefis he mentions, never ſaid any thing to
the contrary : but rather ſuppos’d the waters fruitful, ,
as the ground was. But as to an open Sea,whether ſide
ſoever you take, that there was, or was not, any,before
the Flood: I believe however Adam, to his dying day,
never ſee either Sea or Sca-fiſh: nor ever exercis'd any
dominion over either.
Chap. 1 2. Is concerning the Rainbow: and hath no
new argument in it, nor reinforcement. But a queſtion
is mov’d, whether as well, neceſſarily ſignifies as much.
The real queſtion to be conſider'd here, ſetting aſide
pedantry,
P. 114
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earch. 27
I
pedantry, is this, whether that Thing (Sun,or Rainbow,
or any other) could have any ſignificancy as a ſign,
which ſignified no more than the bare promiſe would
have done without a ſign. This is more material to be
conſider'd and reſolv'd, than whether as well and as
much ſignifie the ſame.
Chap. 13. Is concerning Paradiſe,and to juſtifie or ex-
cuſe himſelf why he baulkt all the difficulties, and ſaid
nothing new or inſtructive, upon that ſubject. But he
would make the Theoriſt inconſiſtent with himſelf, in
that he had ſaid, that neither Scripture, nor reaſon,deter- Def. p. 12$
mine the place of Paradiſe : and
yet determines it by the judg-
ment of the Chriſtian Fathers. Where's the inconſiſtency
of this? The Theory, as a Theory, is not concern’d in a
Topical Paradiſe ; and ſays moreover that neither Scri.
pture, nor reaſon, have determin’d the place of it; but
if we refer our ſelves to the judgment and tradition of
the Fathers, and ſtand to the majority of their Votes,
(when Scripture and reaſon are ſilent) they have ſo far
determin’d it, as to place it in the other Hemiſphere,
rather than in this: and ſo exclude that ſhallow opinion
of ſome moderns, that would place it in Meſopotamia.
And to baffle that opinion was the deſign of the The-
orift ; as this Author alſo ſeems to take notice.
P. 136
After this and an undervaluing of the Teſtimonies of
the Fathers, he undertakes to determine the place of
Paradiſe by Scripture, and particularly that it was in
Meſopotamia, or ſome region thereabouts. And his Ar-
gument is this,becauſe in the laſt verſe of the 3d. chap.
of Geneſis,the Cherubims and flaming ſword are ſaid to be
plac'd j7y-127 07pa, which he ſays is, to the Eaſt of the
Garden of Eden. But the Septuagint (upon whom he muſt
chiefly depend for the interpretation of the word op
in the firſt place, c.2.8.) read it here anéværti og razade-
os of tpuçãs. And the Vulgate renders it,ante Paradifum vo-
luptatis: and according to the Samaritan Pentateuch ’tis
rendered ex adverſo. Now what better authorities can
he bring us for his tranſlation? I do not find that he
gives any, as his uſual way is, but his own authority.
And as for the word op in the ad. chap. and 8th.ver.
which is the principal place, 'tis well known, that, ex-
cepe che Septuagint, all the ancient Verſions, Greck and
Latin,
28 A ſhort Conſideration of the Defence
Latin, (beſides others) render it to another ſence. And
there is a like uncertainty of tranſlation in the word
gry, as we have noted elſewhere. Laſtly, the Rivers of
Paradiſe,and the countreys they are ſaid to run through
or encompaſs, are differently underſtood by different
Authors, without any agreement or certain concluſion.
But theſe are all beaten ſubjects
, which you may find
in every Treatiſe of Paradiſe, and therefore 'cis not
worth the time to purſue them here.
Then he proceeds to the longevity of the Ante-diluvians:
which, ſo far as I can underſtand him to affirm any
P.139. thing, he ſays was not general: but the lives of ſome
few were extraordinarily length’ned by a ſpecial bleſſing; the
elongation of them being a work of Providence, not of na-
ture. This is a cheap and vulgar account, (and ſo are all
the contents of this Chap.) prov'd neither by Scripture,
nor reaſon: and calculated for the humour and capa.
city of thoſe, that love their eaſe more than a diligent
enquiry after truth. He hath indeed a bold aſſertion af-
terwards, that Moſes does diſtinguiſh,as much or more,
betwixt two races of men before the Floud: the one long-
livers,and the other ſhort-livers
, As he hath diſtinguiſhe
the Gyants before the Flood, from the common race
of mankind. Theſe are his words, Is not his diftin&tion
equally plain in both caſes ? ſpeaking of this formentio-
ned diſtinction. Or, if there be any difference, does he not
diſtinguiſh better betwixt long-livers and ſhort-livers, than
he does betwixt men of Gigantick and of uſual proportion?
Let's ſee the truth of this: Moſes plainly made mention
Gen. 6.4. of two races of mankind: the ordinary race,and thoſe
of a Gigantick race, or Gyants. Now tell me where he
plainly makes mention of ſhort-livers before the Flood.
And if he no where make mention of ſhort-livers, but
of long-livers only,how does he diſtinguiſh as plainly of
theſe two races, as he did of the other two? for in the
other he mention’d plainly and ſeverally both the parts
or members of the diſtinction, and here he mentions
but one, and makes no diſtinction.
Then he comes to the Teſtimonies cited by Joſephus
for the longevity of the Ante-diluvians, or firſt inha-
bitants of the Earth. And theſe he roundly pronoun-
ces to be utterly falſe. This Gentleman does not leem
P. 141.
to
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth. 29
It
to be much skill'd in Antiquity, either lacred or pro-
fane: and yet he boldly rejects theſe Teſtimonies (as
he did thoſe of the Fathers before) as utterly falſe: which 147
Joſephus had alledg’d in vindication of the Hiſtory of
Moſes
. The only reaſon he gives, is, becauſe theſe Teſti-
monies ſay, They liv'd a thouſand years: whereas Moſes
does not raiſe them altogether ſo high. But the queſtion
was not ſo much concerning the preciſe number of
their years, as about the exceſs of them beyond the pre-
ſent lives of men: and a round number in ſuch caſes
is often taken inſtead of a broken number. Beſides, ſee-
ing according to the account of Mofes,the greater parc
of them liv'd above nine hundred years, at leaſt he
ſhould not have ſaid theſe Teſtimonies in Joſephus were
utterly falſe, but falſe in part, or not preciſely true;
Now he comes to his reaſons againſt the Ante-dilu-
vian longevity; which have all had their anſwers before,
and thoſe we ſtand to. But I wonder he ſhould think P.14,
it reaſonable, that mankind,throughout all ages,ſhould
increaſe in the ſame proportion as in the firſt age: And
ifa decuple proportion of increaſe was reaſonable at
firſt, the ſame ſhould be continued all along: and the
product of mankind, after ſixteen hundred years,ſhould
be taken upon that ſuppoſition. I ſhould not grudge
to admit that the firſt pair of Breeders might leave ten
pair: but that every pair of theſe ten, ſhould alſo leave
ten pair, without any failure: and every pair in their
children ſhould again leave ten pair: and this to be con-
tinued, without diminution or interruption for fixteen
hundred years, is not only a hard ſuppoſition, but ut-
terly incredible. For ſtill the greater the number was,
the more room there would be for accidents, of all
forts: and every failure towards the beginning,and pro-
portionably in other parts, would cut off thouſands in
the laſt product.
Chap.14. Is againſt the Diflolution of the Earth,and
the Diſruption of the Abyſs at the Deluge: ſuch as the
Theory repreſents. Here is nothing of new argument,
but ſome ſtroaks of new railing wit, after his way. He
had ſaid in his Exceptions that the Dillolution of the Earth
was horrid blaſphemy: now he makes it Redu&tive Blaſphe-
my, as being indire&tly,conſequentially, or reductively,con- pusi
(rary
15+
30 A ſhort Conſideration of the Defence
A
trary to Scripture. By this rule, we told him, all: errors
in Religion would be blaſphemy, and if he extend this
to errors in Philoſophy allo, 'tis ſtill more harſh and in-
judicious. I wonder how he thinks, the doctrine,which
he owns, about the motion of the Earth, ſhould eſcape
the charge of Blaſphemy: that being not only indirectly,
but directly and plainly contrary to Scripture. We
thought that expreſſion, the Earth is diſſolv'd, being a
Scripture expreſſion,would thereby have been protected
from the imputation of blaſphemy: and we alledg’d to
that purpoſe, (beſides, P1.75.3.) Iſa.24.19.Amos 9.5. He
would have done well to have prov'd theſe places in
the Prophets lſaiah and Amos, to have been figurative
and tropological,as he calls it: for we take them both to
relate to the diſſolution of the Earth, which literally
came to paſs at the Deluge. And he not having prov'd
the contrary, we are in hopes ſtill that the Diſſolution
of the Earth may not be horrid blaſphemy, nor of blaſphe-
mous importance.
Then having quarrel'd with the Guard of Angels
which the Theoriſt had aſſign'd for the preſervation of
the Ark, in the time of the Deluge: he falls nexc into
his blunder, that the Equator and Ecliptick of the Earth
were interchang’d, when the ſituation of the Earth was
chang’d. This error in the Earth is couſin-germain to
his former error in the heavens, viz. that the Earth
chang’d its tract about the Sun, and leapt out of the
Equator into the Ecliptick,when it chang'd its ſituation.
The truth is,this Copernican Syſteme ſeems to ly croſs
in his imagination. I think he would do better to let it
alone. However,tho’at other times he is generally ver-
boſe and long-winded,he hath the ſence to paſs this by,
in a few words: laying the blame upon certain paren-
theſes or ſemicircles,whoſe innocency notwithſtanding
we have fully clear’d, and ſhew'd the poiſon to be
ſpread throughout the whole paragraph, which is too
great to be made an Erratum Typographicum.
Then after Hermus,Caiſter,Menander and Caicus : Nile
and its mud: Piſcenius Niger, who contended with Septi-
mus Severus for the Empire and reprimanded his Souldiers
for hankering after wine. Du Val,an ingenious French writer,
and Cleopatra and her admired Antony: he concludes that
the
P.160,
161.
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth. 31
the waters of the Deluge raged amongſt the fragnients,
with lafting, inceſſant, and unimaginable turbulence.
And ſo he comes to an argument againſt the Diffolu-
tion of the Earth. That; All the buildings erected before the P. 162.
Flood, would have been ſhaken down at that time, or elſe over-
whelmed. He inſtanc'd in his Exceptions, in Seth's pillars :
Henochia, Cain's City: and Foppa; theſe he ſuppos'd ſuch
buildings as were made before,and ſtood after, the Flood
But now Seth's pillars ånd Henochia being diſmiſt, he in-
lifts upon Foppa only, and ſays, This muſt have conſiſted
of ſuch materials, as could never be prepared, formed, and ſet
up; without Iron tools. Tho' I do not much believe that
Foppa was an Anitediluvian Town, yet whatever they had
in Cain's time, they might, before the Deluge, have Mora
tar and Brick; which as they are the firſt ſtony materi-
als
, that we read of, for building: ſo the ruines of them
might ſtand after the Deluge. And that they had no other
materials is the more probable, becauſe, after the Flood, ac
the building of Babel, Moſes plainly intimates that they had
no other materials than thoſe. For the Text ſays:They ſaid Gen.11.3:
one to another, go to, let us make Brick,and burn them thorough
ly; And they made Brick for ſtone, and ſlime had they for mora
tar. But now this argument, methinks, may be retorted
upon the Excepter with advantage. For, if there were no
diſſolutions, concuſſions; or abſorptions, at the Deluge, in-
ſtead of the ruines of Joppa,methinks we might have had
the ruines of an hundred Antediluvian Cities. Eſpecially,
if, according to his Hypotheſis
, they had good ſtone; and
good Iron, and all other materials, fic for ſtrong and laſt-
ing building. And, which is alſo to be conſider'd, that it
was but a fifteen-cubic Deluge, ſo that Towns built upon
eminences or high-lands, would be in little danger of
being ruin'd: much leſs of being abolilht.
His laſt argument (p.163.) proves, if it prove any thing;
that God's promiſe, that the world ſhould not be drown
again,was a vain and trifling thing to us, who know it muſt
be burnt. And conſequently,if Noah underſtood the con-
Aagration of the World, he makes it a vain and trifling
thing to Noals alſo. If the Excepter delight in ſuch con-
clulions, let him enjoy thenr, but they are not at all to
the mind of the Theoriſt;
Chap.15. Now we come to his new Hypotheſis of a Fif-
teen-cubit Deluge. And what ſhifcs he hath made to de
&
ftroy
32
A ſhort Confideration of the Defence
ſtroy the World with ſuch a diminutive Flood, we have
noted before : Firſt, by raiſing his water-mark, and ma-
king it uncertain. Then by converting the Deluge, in a
great meaſure, into a Famine. And laſtly, by deſtroying
Mankind and other Animals, with evil Angels. We thall
now take notice of ſome ocher incongruities in his Hy-
potheſis
. When he made Moſes's Deluge but fifteen C 24-
bits deep, we ſaid that was an unmerciful Paradox,and askt,
whether he would have it receiv'd as a Poftulatum, or as
a Conclufion. All he anſwers to this is, That the ſame que-
ftion may be askt concerning ſeveral parts of the Theo-
. 166. ry: particularly,that the Primitive Earth had no Open Sea.
Whether is that, ſays he, to be receiv'd as a Poſtulatun,
or as a Concluſion? The anſwer is ready, as a Concluſion:
deduc'd from premiſes,and a ſeries of antecedent reaſons.
Now can he make this anſwer for his fifteen-Cubit De-
luge? Muſt not that ſtill be a Poftulatum, and an unmer-
ciful one? As to the Theory, there is but one Poftulatum
in all, viz. That the Earth riſe from a Chaos. All the other
Propoſitions are deduc'd from premiſes, and that one Po-
ftulatum allo is prov'd by Scripture and Antiquity. We
had noted further in the Anſwer, that the Author had
ſaid in his Exceptions, that he would not defend his Hy-
potheſis as true and real: and we demanded thereupon,
Why then did he trouble himſelf or the World with what
he did not think true and real? To this he replies, Many
have written ingenious and uſeful things, which they never
believ'd to be true and real. Romances ſuppoſe, and Poe-
tical fictions : Will you have your fifteen-cubic Deluge
paſs for ſuch ? But then the miſchief is, where there is
neither Truth of Fact, nor Ingenuity of invention, ſuch a
compoſition will hardly paſs for a Romance, or a good
fiction. But there is ſtill a greater difficulty behind: The
1.xl.p. Excepter hath unhappily ſaid, Our ſuppoſition ſtands ſuppor-
ted by Divine Authority: as being founded upon Scripture :
which tells us as plainly as it can ſpeak, that the waters pre-
vailed but fifteen Cubits upon the Earth. Upon which words
Auſw.P. the Anſwerer made this remark, If his Hypotheſis be foun-
ded upon Scripture, and upon Scripture as plainly as it can
Speak, Why will not be defend it as TRUE and REAL? for
to be ſupported by Scripture,and by plain Scripture, is as much
As we can alledge for the articles of our Faith. To this he
replies now, that he begg’d allowance at firſt, to make bolid
mith
902.
67.
ef. p.
168
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth
33
with Scripture a little. This is a bold excuſe: and he eſpe-
cially, one would think, ſhould take heed how he makes
bold wich Scripture: left, according to his own notion,
he fall into blaſphemy or ſomething of blaſphemous impor-
tance; indirealy, conſequentially, or reductively, at least
However this excuſe, if it was a good one, would take
no place here: for to underſtand and apply Scripture, in
that fence that it ſpeaks as plainly as it can ſpeak, is not to
make bold with it, but modeſtly to follow its dictates and
plain ſence.
He feels chis load to lie heavy upon him, and ſtruggles
again to ſhake it off, with a diſtinction. When he ſaid his
fifteen-cubic Deluge was ſupported by divine authority, &c.
This, he ſays, was ſpoken by him, in an Hypothetick or ſup- Ibid
poſitious way: and that it cannot poſſibly be underſtood other-
wife by men of ſence. Here are two hard words, let us first
underſtand what they ſignifie, and then we ſhall berter
judge how Men of ſence would underſtand his words.
His Hypothetick or ſuppoſitious way, ſo far as I underſtand
it, is the ſame thing as by way of ſuppoſition ; Then his
meaning is, he ſuppoſes his fifteen-cubic Deluge is ſuppor-
ted by divine authority: And he ſuppoſes it is founded upon
Scripture as plainly as it can ſpeak. But this is to ſuppoſe
the Queſtion, and no Man of ſence would make or grand
ſuch à ſuppoſition. So that I do not ſee what he gains
by his Hypothetick and ſuppoſitious way. But to draw bin
out of this miſt of words, Eicher lie affirms this, that bis
Hypotheſis is ſupported by divine authority: and founded up-
on Scripture as plainly as it can ſpeak: or he denies it, or
he doubts of it. If he affirm it, then all his excuſes and
diminutions are to no purpoſe, he muſt ſtand to his cauſe,
and ſhow us thoſe plain Texts of Scriprure. If he deny it,
he gives up his cauſe, and all that divine authority he
pretended to. If he doubt of it, then he ſhould have ex-
preſt himſelf doubtfully; as, Scripture may admit of that
ſence, or may be thought to intimate ſuch a thing ; buc
he ſays, with a plerophory, Scripture ſpeaks it as plainly as
it can ſpeak. And to mend the matter, he unluckily ſub-
joyns in the following words, Yea, tho' it was ſpoken nepier P.163
ſo poſitively, it was but to ſet forth REI PERSONAM:
to make a more full and lively repreſentation of tle ſuppoſe.t
thing. He does well to tell us what he means by Rei
Perſonam, for otherwiſe no Man of ſence, as his phrale is,
E 2
would
16).
34
A ſhort Conſideration of the Defence
Exc. p.
300.
See the
68.
would ever have made that tranſlation of thoſe words.
But the truth is, he is ſo perfectly at a loſs how to bring
himſelf off, as to this particular, that in his confuſion lac
neither makes good ſence, nor good Latin:
Now he comes to another inconſiſtency which was
charg'd upon him by the Anſwer: Namely, that he rejects
the Church-Hypotheſis concerning the Deluge, and yet had
ſaid before, I cannot believe (which I cannot well endure to
Speak) that the Church hath ever gone on in an irrational way
of explaining the Deluge. That he does reject this
Church-Hypotheſis was plainly made out from his own
words: becauſe he rejects the Common Hypothefs: The
atsions general ſtanding Hypotheſis: The uſual Hypotheſis: The ufz-
in the al fence they put upon Sacred ſtory, &c. Theſe cirations he
Anfr. p. does not think fit to take notice of in his reply: but puts
all upon this general iſſue, which the Anſwerer concludes
with: The Church-way of explaining the Deluge, is either ra-
tional or irrational. If he ſay it is rational, why does he deſert
it, and invent a new one. And if he ſay it is irrational, then
that dreadful thing, which he cannot well endure to ſpeak,
That, the Church of God hath ever gone on in an irrational
way of explaining the Deluge, falls Hat upon himſelf. Let's
hear his anſwer to this Dilemma. We ſay, ſays he, that the
Church-way of explaining the Deluge, (by creating and an-
nihilating waters for the nonce) is very rational. Then ſay
I ſtill, why do you deſert it, or why do you trouble us
with a new one? Either his Hypotheſis is more ratio-
nal than the Church-Hypotheſis
, or leſs rational ? If leſs
rational, why does he take us off from a better, to amuſe
us with a worſe? But if he ſay his Hypotheſis is more ra-
tional than that of the Church's, Then Woe be to him, in
P.171. his own words, that ſo black a blemiſh ſhould be faſten'd
upon the wiſeſt and nobleſt Society in the World, as to make
himſelf more wiſe than they, and his Hypotheſis morc
rational than theirs. The truth is, This Gentleman bath
a mind to appear a Virtuoſo: for the new Philoſophy, and
the Copernican Syſteme: and yet would be a Zealot for
orthodoxy, and the Church-way of explaining things.
Which two deſigns do not well agrce, as to the natu-
ral World ; and ſo betwixt two Stools he falls to the
ground, and proves neither good Church-man,nor good
Philoſopher.
But he will not ſtill be convinc'd that he deſerts the
Church-
Def. p.
170,
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth.
35
312.
Church-hypotheſis, and continues to deny the deſertion
in theſe words,We ſay that we do not deſert or reje&t the Church Ibid.
way of explaining the Deluge. Now to diſcover, whether
theſe words are
true or falle, Let us obſerve, Firſt, what he
acknowledges to have ſaid againſt the Church-Hypotheſis:
Secondly, what he hath ſaid more than what he acknow-
ledges here. He acknowledges that he ſaid the Church-
Hypotheſis might be diſguftful to the beſt and foundeſt Philo-
Sophick judgments. And this is no good Character. Yet this
is not all, for he hath fairly dropt a principal word in the
fentence, namely, juftly
. His words,in his Exceptions,were Exc. g.
theſe, ſuch inventions (which he applyes to the Church-Hy-
potheſis) as have been, and, FUSTLY may be diſguſtful, not
only
, to nice and ſquaamiſh, but to the beſt and ſoundejt Philoſo-
phick judgments. Now judge whether he cited this fen-
tence before,truly and fairly : and whether in theſe words,
truly cited, he does not diſparage the Church-Hypotheſis,
and juſtifie thoſe that are diſguſted at it.
He furthermore, acknowledges that the uſual ways of
explaining the Deluge ſeen unreaſonable to ſome, and unin-
telligible to others, and unſatisfa&tory to the moſt
. But,it ſeems,
he will neither be of theſe fome, others, or moſt. Laſtly, he
acknowledges that he had ſaid,The ordinary ſuppoſition that Def. f
the Mountains were covered with waters in the Deluge,brings on
a neceſſity of ſetting up a new Hypotheſis for explaining the
Flood. If ſo, what was this ordinary ſuppoſition: was it not the
ſuppoſition of the Church? And was that ſuch,asmadeit ne-
ceſſary to ſet upa new Hypotheſis for explaining the Flood?
Then the old Hypotheſis was inſufficient, or irrational.
Thus much he acknowledges : but he omits what we no-
ted before, bis rejecting or diſapproving the common Hypo-
theſis the general ſtanding Hypotheſis,the uſual ſence they put
upon the ſacred ſtory,&c.And do not all theſe phraſes denote
the Church-Hypotheſis? He further omics,that he confeſt, Exc.p.
be bad expounded a Text or two of Scripture, about the Deluge,
ſo as none ever did. And deſerting the common receiv'd ſence,
puts an unuſual gloſs upon them. And is not that common re-
ceiv'd ſence, the lence of the Church ? and his unuſual gloſs
contrary to it? Laſtly,he ſays,by his Hypotheſis, we need
not fly to a new Creation of Waters, and gives his reaſons
at large againſt that opinion, which you may ſce, Except.
P:313. Now thoſe reaſons he thought either to be good
realons, or bad reaſons: if bad, why did he ſet them down,
&
171.
325.
or
36
A ſhort Conſideration of the Defence
Def. p.
136.
or why did he not confute them? if good, they ſtand good
againſt the Hypotheſis of the Church: for lie makes that
new Creation and Annihilation of waters at the Deluge,to
be the Hypotheſis of the Church. Defen. p.170. I fear I
have ſpent too much time in ſhewing him utterly incon-
ſiſtent with bimſelf in this particular. And I wonder he
ſhould be ſo ſollicitous to juſtifie the Hypotheſis of the
Church in this point, ſeeing he openly diſſents from it in
a greater : Imean in that of the Syſteme of the World. Hear
his words, if you pleaſe, to this purpoſe
. And what does the
famous Ariſtotelian Hypotheſis ſeem to be now, but a maſs of
Errours? where ſuch a Syſteme mas contrived for the Heavens,
and ſuch a ſituation aſſign’d to the Earth, as neither reaſon
can approve,nor nature allow. Yet ſo proſperous and prevailing
was this Hypotheſis
, that it was generally receiv’d, and ſucceſs-
fully propagated for many ages. This proſperous prevailing
error, or maſs of errors,was it not eſpouſed and ſuppor-
ted by the Church? And to break from the Church in
greater points, and ſcruple it in leſs, is not this to ſtrain
at Gnats, and ſwallow Camels ?
So much for his inconſiſtency with himſelf. The reſt of
this Chapter in the Anſwer, ſhews his inconſiſtency with
Moſes; both as to the waters covering the tops of the
Mountains, which Moſes affirms and the Excepter denyes;
and as to the decreaſe of the Deluge, which Moſes makes
to be, by the waters retiring into their chanels, after fre-
quent reciprocations, going and coming. But the Excepcer
ſays, the Sun ſuck'd up the waters from the Earth: juſt
as he had before ſuck'd the mountains out of the Earth.
Theſe things are ſo groundleſs, or ſo groſs, that it would
be tedious to inſiſt longer upon them. And whercas it is
not reaſonable to expect, that any others ſhould be idle
enough, as we muſt be, to collate three or four Tracts,
to diſcern where the advantage lies in theſe ſmall altcr-
cations : I deſire only if they be ſo diſpos’d, that they would
collate the Exceptions
, Anſwer and Defence, in this one
Chapter, which is our Author's Maſter-piece: And from
this I am willing they ſhould take their meaſures, and
makca judgment,of his good or bad ſucceſs in other parts.
What ſhifts he hath us’d to make his fifteen-cubit De-
luge ſufficient to deſtroy all mankind and all animals, we
have nored before: and here’tis (p.181,182.) that lie re-
duces them to famine. And after that, he comes to a long
excur-
Of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth.
37
185,00,
312,
excurſion of leven or eight pages about the imperfection
of Shipping after the Flood: a good argument for the Def. p.
Theoriſt, that they had not an open Sea, Iron.tools, and 183, 184,
materials for ſhipping, before the Flood. For what ſhould
make them ſo inexpert in Navigation for many years and
ages after the Flood, if they had the practice and experience
of it,before the Flood? And what could hinder their having
that practice and experience,if they had an open Sea,and
all Iron and other materials, for that uſe and purpoſe ?
Laſtly, he comes to his notion of the Great Deep, or
Tehom-Rabbah. Which he had made before,in expreſs words, Def
. p
to be the Holes and Caverns in the Rocks; Iſav,in expreſs 191.
words, ſuch as theſe, Now ſuppoſing that the Caverns in the Exc.fo
Mountains were this great Deep: ſpeaking of Moſes's Great
Deep, according to this new Hypotheſis. He ſays further
(p.105.) In caſe it be urg’d, that Caverns, eſpecially Caverns Ib.p.195
ſo bigh ſituate,cannot properly be called the great Deep. Where
you ſee, his own objection ſuppoſes that he made thoſe
caverns the Great Deep. And in the ſame page, ſpeaking
of the Pſalmiſts Great Deeps (in his own ſence of making
them holes in rocks) and Moſes's Great Deep, he ſays, the
Same thing might be meant by both. By all theſe expreſſions
one would think it plain,that by his Great Deep he meant
his caverns in rocks:yet now,upon objections urged againſt
it,he ſeems deſirous to fly off from that notion. But does
not yet tell us plainly what muſt be meant by Moſes's
Great Deep. If, upon ſecond thoughts,he would have the
Sea to be underſtood by it,why does he not anſwer the
objections that are made by the Theoriſt againſt that In- Engl
. Tin.
terpretation Nay,wly does he not anſwer what he him- p.81,üve
ſelf had objected before (Except.p.310.) againſt that ſup-
poſition? He ſeems to unſay now, what he ſaid before:
and yet ſubſtitutes nothing in the place of it, to be un-
derſtood by Moſes's Tehom-Rabbah.
Chap.16. Is a few words concerning theſe expreſſions
of Shutting the windows of Heaven and the Fountains of the
Abyſs,after the Deluge. And theſe were both ſhut alike and
both of them no leſs than the Caverns in the Mountains.
Chap. 17. Hach nothing of argumentation or Philofo-
phy: but runs on in a popular declamacory way, and (if
I
inay
uſe that forbidden word) injudicious. All amounts
to this, Whether we may not go contrary to the lecter of
Scripture, in natural things, when that goes contrary to
plain
+
38
A ſhort Conſideration of the Deferice
215.
plain reaſon. This we affirm, and this every one muſt af-
firm that believes the motion of the Earth, as our Vertuo-
ſo pretends to do. Then he concludes all with an Har
monious cloſe, that he follows the great example of a R..
Def.p. Prelate, and militates under that Epiſcopal banner. I am wil-
ling to believe that he writ at firſt, in hopes to curry fa-
vour with certain perſons, by his great zeal for Ortho-
doxy; but he hath made ſuch an hotch-potch of new Phi-
loſophy and Divinity, that I believe it will ſcarce pleaſe
the party he would cajole: nor ſo much as his R.Patron.
I was ſo civil to him in the Anſwer, as to make him a
Saint in compariſon of that former Animadverter : but,
by the ſtyle and ſpirit of this laſt Pamphleche hach forfeited
with me all his faintſhip,both abſolute and comparative.
Thus much for his Chapters: and as to his reflections
upon the Review of the Theory, they are ſo ſuperficial
and inconſiderable, that I believe he never expected that
they ſhould be regarded. I wonder however, that he
ihould decline an examination of the 2d. part of the
Theory. It cannot be for want of good will to confute
it: he hath ſhewn that to the height,whatſoever his power
was. Neither can it be for want of difference or diſagree-
ment in opinion, as to the contents of this later part :
for he hath reckon'd the Millennium amongſt the errors
of the ancient Fathers, (Def.p.136.) and the Renovation of
the World he makes Allegorical.(p.224.&c.) It muſt therefore
be for want of ſome third thing: which he beſt knows.
But before we conclude, Sir, we muſt remember that
we promiſed to ſpeak apart to two things, which are of
ten objected to the Theoriſt by this Writer, and to liecle
purpoſé; namely, his flying to Extraordinary Providence,
and his flying from the literal fence of Scripture. As to
Extraordinary Providence, Is the Theoriſt alone debarr'd
from recourfe to it, or would he have all men debarr’d,
as well as the Theoriſt? If ſo, why doch he uſe it ſo much
himſelf? And if it be allow'd to others, there is no rea-
ſon it ſhould be deny'd the Theoriſt, unleſs he have dif
own'd it, and ſo debarr’d himſelf that common privi-
ledge. But the contrary is manifeſt, in a multitude of
places, both of the firſt and ſecond part of the Theory,
For:
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earih. 39
?
For, beſides a diſcourſe on purpoſe upon that ſubject, in Eng. Thi
the 8th. Chap. of the firſt Book, in the laſt Chapter and laſt &c.
words of the ſame book (Latin) he does openly avow,
boch Providence (natural and moral) and miracles: in
theſe words, Deniq; cùm certiſſimum fit, à divinâ Providen-
tiâ pendere res omnes, cujuſcunque ordinis
, & ab eâdem vera
miracula edita eſſe,&c. And as to the ſecond part of the
Theory,the miniſtery of Angels is there acknowledgʻd frc-
quently, both as to natural and moral adminiftrations.
From all which inſtances it is manifeft,that the Theoriſt
did not debar himſelf, by denying either Miracles, Ange-
lical miniſtery, or extraordinary Providence; But if the Ex-
cepter be ſo injudicious (pardon me that bold word) as
to confound all extraordinary Providence with the Afts
of Omnipotency, he muſt blame himſelf for that, not the
Theoriſt. The Creation and Annihilation of waters is an
act of pure Omnipotency, This the Theoriſt did not ad-
mit of at the Deluge: and if this be his fault, as it is fre-
quently objected to him (Def. p.9.66.170,&c.) he perfe-
veres in it ſtill,and in the reaſons he gave for his opinion, Eng.The.
which are no where confuted. But as for acts of Ange- p. 18,19.
lical power, he does every where acknowledge them in
the great Revolutions,even of the natural World. If the
Excepter would make the Divine Omnipotency as cheap P: 107
as the miniſtery of Angels, and have recourſe as freely
and as frequently to that, as to this: If he would make
all extraordinary Providence the ſame, and all miracles,
and ler all at the pitch of Infinite power, this may be an
effect of his ignorance or inadvertency, but is no way
imputable to the Theoriſt.
In the next place it may be obſerv’d, that the Theoriſt
hath no where aſſerted, that Moſes's Coſmopæia (which
does not proceed according to ordinary Providence ) is
to be literally underſtood; and therefore what is urg'd
againſt him from the letter of that Coſmopæia, is impro-
perly urg'd and without ground. There are as good rea-
fons, and better Authorities, that Moſes's fix-days Creation
ſhould not be literally underſtood, than there are, why
thofe Texts of Scripture that ſpeak about the motion of
the Sun, ſhould not be literally underſtood. And as to
the Theoriſt, he had often intimatcd his ſence of that
Coſmopæia, that it was expreſt more humano, Gad captum
populi: as appears in feveral pallages; In the Latin Theory,
F
ſpeaking
The. Lar
P-53.Eng.
40
A ſhort Conſideration of the Defence
1
2. 6.8.
ſpeaking of the Moſaical Coſmogonia, he hath theſe words:
Theor. li. Conſtat hæc Coſmopæia duabus partibus, quarum prima, maſſas
generales atque rerum inconditarum ftatum exhibet: ſequi-
turque eadem principia, & eundem ordineni, quem antiqui
uſque retinuerunt. Atque in hoc nobiſcum conveniunt omnes
ferè interpretes Chriſtiani : nempe, Tohu Bohu Moſaicum
idem eſſe ac Chaos Antiquorum. Tenebras Moſaicas, &c. huc-
uſque convenit Mofi cum antiquis Philoſophis ------ methodun
autem illam Philoſophican hic abrumpit, aliamque orditur, hu-
manam, aut, ſi mavis, Theologicam: quâ, motibus Chaos, ſe-
cundum leges natura, & divini amoris a&tionem, planè neg-
le&tis
, com ſucceſſivis ipſius mutationibus in varias regiones con
elementa : His, inquam, poſt-habitis, popularem narrationen
de ortu rerum hoc modo inſtituit. Res omnes viſibiles in ſex
claſſes, &c. This is a plain indication how the Theoriſt
underſtood that Coſmopoeia. And accordingly in the
P.288. Engliſh Theory the Author ſays, I have not mention’d Mo-
ſes's Coſmopæia : becauſe I thought it deliver’d by him as a
Law-giver, not as a Philoſopher. Which I intend to ſhow at
large
in another Treatiſe : not thinking that diſcuſſion proper
for the vulgar Tongue. The Excepter was alſo minded of
this in the Anſwer, p.66. Now, 'tis much, that he, who
hath ſearcht all the corners, both of the Engliſh and La-
tin Theory, to pick quarrels, ſhould never obſerve ſuch
obvious paſſages as theſe. But ſtill make objections from
the letter of the Mofaical Coſmopæia : which affect the
Theoriſt no more than thoſe places of Scripture that ſpeak
of the motion of the Sun, or the Pillars of the Earth.
In the laſt place, the Theoriſt diſtinguiſht two methods
for explaining the natural World: that of an ordinary
and that of an extraordinary Providence. And thoſe that
take the ſecond way, he ſaid, might diſpatch their task
as ſoon as they pleas’d, if they engag’d omnipotency in
the work. But the other method would require time:
it muſt proceed by diſtinct ſteps, and leiſurely motions,
ſuch as Nature can admit; And, in that reſpect, it might
not ſuit with the buſie lives, or impatient ſtudies, of moſt
Men. Whom he left notwithſtanding to their liberty to
take what method they pleas’d; provided they were not
troubleſome in forcing their hafty thoughts upon all
others. Thus the Theoriſt hath expreft himſelf at the
end of the firſt Book : Intereà, cùm non omnes à naturâ ità
compofiti fimuszut Philoſophiæ ſtudiis dele&temur: Neque etiam
liceat
C. 12.
of the Exceptions againſt the Theory of the Earth.
41
Def. P.
liceat multis,propter occupationes vite, iiſdem vacare,quibus per ingenium li-
cuiſſit: iis jure permittendum eft,compendiariò ſapere ; ó relictis viis natu-
reŰ caufarum fecundarım, que ſape longiuſculæ funt, per caufas ſuperiores
philofophari; idq; potiffimùm,ciim ex piis affectibus hoc quandoque fieri pofſit:
quibus, vel male fundatis,aliquid dandum eſſe exiſtimo,modò non fint tirbulen-
ti. Thus the Theoriſt, you ſee,ſets two ways before them,and 'tis indiffe-
rent to him whether they take, if they will go on their way peaceably.
And he does now moreover particularly declare, That he hath no ambi-
tion, either to make theExcepter or any other of the ſame diſpoſitions of
will,and the ſame elevation of underſtanding, prolelytes to his Theory.
Thus much for Providence; As to the literal fence of Scripture, I find,
if what was noted before in the Anſwer, had been duly conſider'd, there P.82,
would be little need of additions upon that ſubject. The matter was ſta- 83.60
ted freely and diſtinctly,and the remarks or reflections which theExcep-
ter hath made in his Defence upon this doctrine, are both ſhallow & par-
tial. I ſay,partial : in perverting the ſence,and ſeparating ſuch things as
manifeſtly depend upon one another. Thus the Excepter falls upon that
expreſſion in the Anſwer,Let us remember that this contradicting Scripture, 202,
here pretended,is only in natural things:where he ſhould have added the o
ther part of the ſentence, And alſo obſerve how far the Excepter himſelf, in
ſuch things, hath contradicted Scripture.Here he makes an odious declama-
rion,as if the Anſwerer had confeſt that he contradicted Scripture in natio
ral things: whereas the words are contradicting Scripture, here pretend-
ed:and'tis plain by all the diſcourſe,that 'tis the literal ſence of Scripture
that is here ſpoken of, which the Excepter is alſo ſaid to contradict.Such
an unmanly captiouſneſs ſhews the temper and meaſure of that ſpirit,
which rather than ſay nothing will miſrepreſent the plain fence of an
Author. In like manner, when he comes to thoſe words in the Anſwer,
The caſe therefore is this, whether to go contrary to the letter of Scripture in
things that relate to the natural world, be, deſtroying the foundation of religi-
on, affronting Scripture, and blafpheming the Holy Ghoſt. He ſays, This is
not to ſtate the caſe truly, for it is not, ſays he, going contrary to the letter
of Scripture that draws ſuch evil conſequences after it, but going contrary to
the letter of Scripture, where it is to be literally underſtood. And this the
Theoriſt does, he ſays,and the Excepter does not. But who ſays ſo beſides
himſelf? This is fairly to beg the queſtion, and can he ſuppoſe the
Theoriſt ſo eaſie as to grant this without proof? It muſt be the ſub-
ject matter that determines,what is and what is not,to be literally un-
derſtood. However he goes on, begging ſtill the queſtion in his own
behalf, and ſays, thoſe Texts of Scripture that ſpeak of the motion and
courſe of the Sun,are not to be underſtood literally. But why not? be-
cauſe the literal fence is not to his mind? Of four Texts of Scripture
which the Theoriſtalledg'd againſt him,for the motion of the Sun, he an-
ſwers but one,& that very ſuperficially,to ſay no worſe.'TisP8:19. where
the Sun at bis riſing is ſaid to be as a Bridegroom coming out of his Cham-
ber, and to rejoyce as a ſtrong man to run his race. And his going forth is from
the end of the heaven, and his circuit to the ends of it. Which he anſwers
with this vain flouriſh: Then the Sun muſt be a man, and muſt be upon his
marriage ; and muſt be dreſt in fine cloaths, as a Bridegroom is. Then he muſt
come out of a Chamber, and muſt give no more light,and caſt no more heat than
a Bridegroom does,&c. If a man ſhould ridicule,at this rate,the diſcourſe
of our Saviour concerning Lazarus in Abraham's bofom, and Dives in
hell, with a great gulf betwixt them,yet talking audibly to one another;
And
Def. F
206,
P.207
24
A ſhort Conſideration of the Defence,&c.
Def. p.
wack. 16. And that Lazarus ſhould be ſent ſo far,as from heaven to hell,only to dip
the tip of his finger in water, and cool Dives his tongue. He that ſhould go
about thus to expoſe our Saviours parable,would have a thankleſs office,
and effect nothing: for the ſubſtance of it would ſtand good fill: name-
ly,that mens Souls live after deat!), and that good Souls are in a ſtate of
eaſe and comfort,and bad Souls in a ſtate of miſery. In like manner, liis
ridiculing ſome circumſtances in the compariſon made by the Pſalmiſt,
does not at all deſtroy the ſubſtance of that diſcourſe : namely, that the
Sun moves in the firmament, with great ſwiftneſs and luſtre, and bath
the circuit of its motion round the Earth. This is the ſubſtance of what
the Pſalmiſt declares, and the reſt is but a ſimilitude which need not be
literally juſt in all particulars.
After this he would fain perſwade the Theoriſt, that he hath excuſed
the Excepter for his receding from the literal ſence, as to the motion of
the Earth: Becauſe he hath granted, that, in certain caſes, we may and
208. muſt recede from the literal ſence. But where,pray,hath he granted, that
the motion of the Earth was one of thoſe caſes? yer ſuppoſe it be ſo,may
not the Theoriſt then enjoy this priviledge of receding from the literal
ſence upon occaſion, as well as the Excepter? If he will give, as well as
take, this liberty, let us mutually enjoy it. But he can have no pretence
to deny it to others, and take it himſelf. It uſes to be a rule in writing,
“that a man muſt not ſtultum fingere Lectorem. You muſt ſuppoſe your
Reader to have common ſence. But he that accuſes another of blaſphe-
my
for receding from the literal ſence of Scripture in natural things,and
does himſelf, at the ſame time,recede from the literal ſence of Scripture,
in natural things : one would think, quoad hoc, either had not, or would
not exerciſe, common ſence: in a literal way.
Laſtly, He comes to the common known rule, aſſign'd to direct us,
when every one ought to follow,or leave,the literal ſence: which is not
to leave the literal ſence, when the
ſubje&t matter will bear it, without abſur-
dity or incongruity. This he repeats in the next, page thus, The rule is,
When no kind of abſurdities or incongruities accrue to any Texts, from the
literal ſence. If this be his rule,to what Texts does there accrue any ab-
ſurdity or incongruity, by ſuppoſing the Sun to move? for Scripture al-
ways ſpeaks upon that ſuppoſition, and not one word for the motion of
the Earth. Thus he ſtates the rule, but the Anſwerer ſuppoſed, that the
abſurdity or incongruity might ariſe from the ſubject matter. And accor-
dingly he ſtill maintains, that there are as juſt reaſons (from the ſubject
matter) and better authorities, for receding from the literal ſence in the
narrative of the ſix-days Creation, than in thoſe Texts of Scripture,that
ſpeak of the motions and courſe of the Sun. And to affirm the Earth to
be mov’d, is as much Blaſphemy,and more contrary to Scripture,than to
affirm it to have been diſſolv'd, as the Theoriſt hath done.
Sir, I beg your excuſe for this long Letter,and leave it to you to judge
whether the occaſion was juſt or no. I know ſuch jarrings as theſe,
mult needs make bad muſick to your ears: 'tis like hearing two in-
struments play that are not in tune and confort with one another. But
you know lelf-defence, and to repel an aſſailant,is always allow'd : and
he that begins the quarrel, muſt anſwer for the conſequences. How-
ever, Sir, to make amends for this trouble, I am ready to receive your
commands upon more acceptable ſubjects.
Your moſt Humble Servant,&c.
.215.
FINI S.
DO NOT CIRCULATE
THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
GRADUATE LIBRARY
CARRIERE
DATE DUE
OK
MAY
i
BOUND
OCT 17 1946
UNIV. OF MICH.
LIBRARY
BOOK CARD
DO NOT REMOVE
A Charge will be made
if this card is mutilated
T:... ---*********
!,-'LETT -811634
or not returned
u
with the book
GRADUATE LIBRARY
THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
ANN ARBOR, MICHIGAN
1
|
L
GL
1
1
1
1
1
1
}
i
31
1
------
DO NOT REMOVE
OR
MUTILATE CARD
I
.